JP7830007B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding amusement machines.

In slot machines, gameplay begins after a predetermined number of game tokens are inserted and the start lever is operated. Multiple rows of reels, each with a different symbol arranged on its outer edge, rotate. When the reels are stopped using the stop button, and a specific combination of symbols (such as "777") aligns on the winning line, the machine transitions to a special game state (where the probability of winning small prizes is higher than normal), offering greater benefits to the player than normal gameplay. In addition to this basic gameplay, slot machines often incorporate various special effects to enhance the overall entertainment value. Furthermore, the machine includes features such as payout sounds, displays of the number of tokens won, and backlight effects to ensure that the tokens have been dispensed correctly.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-217068

Improvements in the performance of this type of gaming machine are desired.

The game has two states: a notification game preparation state and a notification game state.
In a predetermined game where a specific lottery result has been determined during the notification game preparation game state, the first stop operation mode can be notified by a predetermined display device.
In a notification game state, in a specific game where a specific lottery result has been determined, the second stop operation mode can be notified by a predetermined display device.
The notification content for the first stop operation mode and the notification content for the second stop operation mode, as determined by the specified display device, are different.
The notification content for the first stop operation mode by the designated display device is a notification content recommending that the stop switch corresponding to the first reel not be used as the first stop operation.
In a specific game where a specific lottery result has been determined in a notification game state, a predetermined display device notifies the player of a second stop operation pattern, and when the player performs the stop operation according to the second stop operation pattern, a combination of symbols to which "X (where X is a numerical value, the same applies hereinafter)" is assigned as the number of game media can be displayed as a stop.
In a predetermined game where a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation state, a predetermined display device notifies the first stop operation mode , and when the stop switch corresponding to the first reel is performed the first stop operation, the game following the predetermined game can be played in the notification game preparation state.
In a designated game where a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation state, a designated display device notifies the first stop operation mode , the stop switch corresponding to the second reel is performed as the first stop operation, and even if a symbol combination to which "X" is assigned as the number of game media is not displayed, the next game after the designated game can be played in the notification game state.
In a designated game where a specific lottery result has been determined during the notification game preparation state, it is possible to execute processes for outputting a first test signal and processes for outputting a second test signal .
In a predetermined game where a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation game state, and a predetermined display device notifies the first stop operation pattern, the first test signal includes information regarding the operation sequence of stop switches, with the stop switch corresponding to the second reel being the first stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a predetermined display device notifies the first stop operation pattern in a predetermined game in a pre-notification game preparation game state where a specific lottery result has been determined, the second test signal includes information regarding the operation sequence of stop switches, with the stop switch corresponding to the first reel being the first stop operation.

According to this invention, the performance of amusement machines can be improved.

This diagram shows the exotropic view of the PS1 slot machine cabinet. This diagram shows the back of the front panel of the PS2. This is a diagram showing the inside of the PS3 cabinet. This is a diagram showing functional blocks. This is a flowchart showing the program startup process. This flowchart shows the power outage process. This is a flowchart showing timer interrupt handling. This flowchart shows the power recovery process after a power outage. This is a flowchart showing the main game progression. This is a flowchart showing the process for changing settings. This diagram illustrates the reel arrangement in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the pattern combinations in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the pattern combinations in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the pattern combinations in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the pattern combinations in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the pattern combinations in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the pattern combinations in this embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating the conditional device in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the number of internal draws in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the number of internal draws in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the number of internal draws in this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the case where the MAX bet switch is not used to insert a token after the payout process is complete. This diagram illustrates the case where a MAX bet switch is used to insert a token after the payout process has finished. This diagram illustrates the case where a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process is complete. This diagram illustrates what happens if no game tokens are inserted after the settlement process is complete. This diagram illustrates what happens when game tokens are inserted after the settlement process is complete. This diagram illustrates a scenario where a payout is processed normally. This diagram illustrates what happens when dispensing fails (when a hopper empty error occurs). This diagram illustrates what happens when dispensing fails to occur properly (when a hopper congestion error occurs). This figure shows an example of the display screen when a payout is performed successfully. This figure shows an example of the display screen when dispensing fails (hopper empty error occurs). This figure shows an example of the display screen that appears when dispensing fails (when a hopper congestion error occurs). This figure shows an example of the configuration of a button press order navigation image. This figure shows an example of when the button press order navigation image is displayed on the LCD screen. This figure shows an example of what happens when a predetermined error occurs while the button press order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart showing the results when the MAX bet switch is not used after the payout process based on the winning combination of buttons has finished. This is a time chart showing the process when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning combination has been completed. This is a time chart showing the results when the MAX bet switch is not used after the payout process based on the cherry symbol win is completed. This is a time chart showing the process when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the cherry symbol win has finished. This is a time chart showing the case where no game tokens are inserted after the automatic token insertion process based on winning a replay has finished. This is a time chart showing the process when inserting game tokens after the automatic token insertion process based on winning a replay has finished. This is a time chart showing the process when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning combination of button presses has been completed. This is a time chart showing the process when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic payout process based on the winning of a replay role has finished. This is a time chart for when the payout does not occur properly after the cherry symbol is won (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart for when the payout does not occur properly after the cherry symbol is awarded (when a hopper congestion error occurs). This diagram shows the various regions stored in the main control ROM. This diagram shows the interrupt initialization area and automatic allocation based on the priority of the interrupt initialization area. This diagram shows the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing. This diagram shows the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs. This figure shows an example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods. This figure shows an example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods. This figure shows an example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods. This flowchart shows the management process for the advantageous section clear counter, which corresponds to the advantageous section difference counter. This flowchart shows the management process for the advantageous section clear counter, which corresponds to the advantageous section difference counter. This is a flowchart showing the process for monitoring and stopping operations. This is a flowchart showing the process for monitoring and stopping operations. This is a flowchart showing the process for monitoring and stopping operations. This is a flowchart showing the process for monitoring and stopping operations. This is a flowchart showing the process for monitoring and stopping operations. This figure shows examples of the effects for the operation notification state and the stop notification state. This figure shows an example of the configuration related to the number of bets indicator lamp 25 and the payout indicator. This figure shows an example of the configuration related to the number of bets indicator lamp 25 and the payout indicator. This figure shows an example of the configuration related to the number of bets indicator lamp 25 and the payout indicator. This diagram shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back of the front panel PS2. This diagram illustrates the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. This diagram illustrates the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. This diagram shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44, when the front panel PS2 is closed. This diagram shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44, when the front panel PS2 is closed. This diagram illustrates the position and dimensions of the locking parts (screws) that secure the chute member when the chute member's fixing portion is secured to the front panel PS2. This diagram shows another configuration of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member, and the return member are attached to the back of the front panel PS2. This figure shows an example of an error history screen. This figure shows an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed. This figure shows an example of a time setting screen. This is a list of error history display patterns for when multiple errors occur. This diagram shows an example of the presentation when the notification state for the end of play is "normal state". This diagram shows an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the end of operation is "operation notification state". This figure shows an example of the presentation when the notification state related to the end of operation is "operation notification state". This diagram illustrates the transitions in the notification state related to the termination of the service. This diagram illustrates the relationship between the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-play state during bonus gameplay and the temporary stop-play flag. This diagram illustrates the pre-notification image during bonus gameplay. This diagram illustrates the notification state related to the shutdown when the power is cut off and then restored while the shutdown notification state is in the operation warning state. This diagram illustrates the notification state related to the shutdown when the power is cut off and then restored while the shutdown notification state is in the operation warning state. This diagram illustrates the notification state related to the shutdown when the power is cut off and then restored while the shutdown notification state is in the operation warning state. This diagram illustrates the notification state related to the shutdown when the power is cut off and then restored while the shutdown notification state is in the operation warning state. This diagram illustrates the notification state related to the shutdown when the power is cut off and then restored while the shutdown notification state is in the operation warning state. This diagram illustrates the error image displayed when an error occurs during automatic payment. This diagram illustrates the error image displayed when an error occurs during automatic payment. This figure shows an example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods. This figure shows an example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods. This diagram shows the progress of the game and the way the bet lamps light up. This diagram shows the progress of the game and the way the bet lamps light up. This diagram shows the progress of the game and the way the bet lamps light up. This diagram shows the progress of the game and the way the bet lamps light up. This diagram shows the volume of effects under each situation. This diagram shows a dangerous installation situation for amusement machines. This diagram shows the movement of the selector when the gaming machine is installed in a normal and dangerous configuration. This is a view of a gaming machine with its left side facing down, seen from the back of the front door. This is a front view of a gaming machine, showing the configuration around the speaker. This diagram illustrates the selector and return component when viewed from the back of the front door. This is a view of the selector from the right side. This is a diagram explaining the roulette gameplay. This diagram explains the display content in the roulette animation. This diagram illustrates the timing of the display of the switch effects used in the roulette animation. This diagram explains the different types of settings confirmation animations. This diagram shows the selection table for the setting confirmation animation. This diagram shows a selection table of setting confirmation animations, where the probability of winning differs for each number of plays. This figure shows the internal lottery data during non-RT (Replay Time) phases when a set value L is provided. This figure shows the internal lottery data during RT1 when a set value L is provided. This is an overall front view of the front door, seen from the back. This diagram shows the internal lottery in a new mode for initiating a favorable game state. This diagram illustrates a game presentation that notifies a special stopping operation in a new mode of initiating a favorable game state.

<Explanation of Terms>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insert" in relation to game media are synonymous and all refer to the act of wagering (placing) game media. When representing hexadecimal values, they are written as "0x○○" or "○○h", and when representing binary values, they are written as "○○○○○○○○b" or "○○○○○○○○B", and unless otherwise specified before or after the number, it is represented in decimal. "Reels" may be referred to as "spinning drums", and all are synonymous. "Memory means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "memory area", and all are synonymous. "Granting" used in "granting game media" or "granting points", etc., may be referred to as "payout" or "acquisition", and all are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as the "setting change switch" or "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases it refers to the same switch. Note that the "setting change switch" and "reset switch" may be provided as separate switches. Depending on the operation, if a small win with a high payout or a small win with a low payout stops, the small win with a high payout may be called a "high-payout" (high-payout bell, high-payout small win are synonymous), and the small win with a low payout may be called a "low-payout" (low-payout bell, low-payout small win are synonymous). Note that if a combination of symbols that does not pay out stops in this case, it may be called a "missed combination" (missed combination is synonymous).

The embodiments of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "these embodiments") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of the PS1 slot machine>
The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3.

The slot machine PS1 is broadly divided into two parts: the front panel PS2 and the cabinet PS3, where the necessary components and circuit boards are mounted. The sides of the front panel PS2 and the cabinet PS3 are joined by hinge and locking mechanisms. A lock key is inserted into the locking mechanism on the front panel PS2, and by rotating it in a specific direction, the locking mechanism can be opened. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front Panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as front door PS2, front panel PS2, or simply front door) is a plate-shaped component with a design applied to it. The front side (player side) is equipped with a middle panel (including display window 4, operation instruction lamp 24, etc.), an operation panel 11 (including bet number display lamp 25, credit number display 26, acquired number display 27, etc.), a lower panel 5 (also referred to as lower panel 5), an upper lamp (also referred to as top lamp), or side display lamps (also referred to as side lamp), etc. The back side is equipped with a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various circuit boards, etc., and a setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as setting value display LED, setting display, setting value display, setting display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the patterns drawn on the reels can be seen. The patterns printed on the outer surface of each reel tape fixed to the rim of each reel, the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c, are configured to be visible from the front (player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive patterns out of 21 patterns (the number can be freely designed to be 20 or 16, etc., depending on the specifications) can be seen. In other words, a total of 9 patterns (3 [patterns] x 3 [reels]) can be seen from the display window 4. Here, of the stopping positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop three patterns, the uppermost stopping position is called the upper row, the middle stopping position is called the middle row, and the lowermost stopping position is called the lower row.

<Effective line>
The active lines are the symbol combination lines that are subject to the prize-winning determination process (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c stop. In this embodiment, the active lines are visible from the display window 4 and consist of symbol combination lines (middle horizontal lines) that pass through the middle of each reel. When the prize-winning determination process determines that a symbol combination that has stopped on an active line corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. For example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination such as a bell has stopped, the payout process for game tokens (hereinafter sometimes referred to as tokens, game media, or game value) or the credit addition process is performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped, the automatic bet process is performed.

Furthermore, depending on the slot machine PS1, the number of active lines may be set to five lines: the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, the lower horizontal line, the upward-sloping line, and the downward-sloping line. Alternatively, it may include six or more lines, including non-straight, roughly V-shaped lines (left reel 8a lower, middle reel 8b upper, right reel 8c lower), roughly Valley-shaped lines (left reel 8a upper, middle reel 8b lower, right reel 8c upper), and roughly L-shaped lines (left reel 8a upper, middle reel 8b lower, right reel 8c lower). The number of active lines may also change depending on the number of coins bet. The design can be freely adapted according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. Additionally, straight lines other than the active lines may be referred to as invalid lines.

<Operation indicator lamp 24>
The operation indicator lamps 24 are located around the display window 4 and instruct the player on the order in which to operate the stop switches 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. Specifically, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the middle operation indicator lamps 24b and right operation indicator lamps 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated; when the middle operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamps 24a and right operation indicator lamps 24c are off), it indicates that the middle stop switch 13b should be operated; and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamps 24a and middle operation indicator lamps 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bed count indicator lamp 25>
The bet count indicator lamp 25 (also referred to as the bet count indicator lamp 25, bet amount indicator lamp 25, number of bet indicator lamp 25, or number of bets indicator lamp 25) is located on the operation panel 11 and has the function of displaying the number of bets made by the player. It is composed of a 1-bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1-bet lamp 25a lights up. When a total of two medals are bet, the 1-bet lamp 25a and the 2-bet lamp 25b light up. When a total of three medals are bet, the 1-bet lamp 25a, the 2-bet lamp 25b, and the 3-bet lamp 25c light up. Although not shown, after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed, when the automatic betting process is executed, the bet count indicator lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won lights up, and the replay lamp also lights up. The timing of the bet count indicator lamp 25 lighting up and the timing of the replay lamp lighting up may be simultaneous, or one of them may be configured to light up first.

<Credit count display 26>
The credit count indicator 26 (also referred to as the credit/medal count indicator, medal count display device, game medium count indicator, or game medium count display device) is located on the operation panel 11 and consists of a segment indicator 26a (not shown) which mainly displays the upper digits of the credit count, and a segment indicator 26b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the credit count, and consists of a total of eight segments, consisting of seven segments and decimal points (DP). The credit count refers to the number of medals that are credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and a maximum of 50 can be stored. In addition, when normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a display related to the error may be shown.

<Number of acquired coins display unit 27>
The acquired tokens display 27 (also referred to as the acquired tokens display, acquired tokens display, payout tokens display, or payout tokens display) is located on the operation panel 11 and consists of a segment display 27a (not shown) which mainly displays the higher digits of the acquired tokens, and a segment display 27b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the acquired tokens, and consists of a total of eight segments consisting of seven segments and decimal points (DP). The acquired tokens refer to the number of tokens paid out to the player (including those stored in the credits display 26) according to the results of the game in the slot machine PS1. Furthermore, when normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a display related to the error may be shown.

The credit count indicator 26 and the acquired coins indicator 27 display their respective information using segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27b. Furthermore, depending on whether the DP (Digital Display) is lit, they may also display information different from the credit count or acquired coins information. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable section (described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output may be indicated by illuminating the DP on one of the segment displays. The acquired coins indicator 27 may also have the capability to provide button-press order notification using its upper and lower digit display sections. When the acquired coins indicator 27 is used to provide button-press order notification, it may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Control Panel 11>
The control panel 11 is located approximately in the center of the front panel PS2. The control panel 11 is provided in a stepped manner with a roughly horizontal section and a vertical section extending approximately vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section. The vertical section is provided with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13, which will be described later. The horizontal section is provided with a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a display switch (not shown), which will be described later.

<Start switch 12>
The start switch (also called the start lever) 12 is located on the vertical part of the operation panel 11. It consists of a lever-shaped operating part, and when not in operation, the start switch sensor is ON. When in operation, the start switch sensor turns OFF, which is how the system determines that the start switch has been operated. The start switch 12 becomes active when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number. Upon receiving an operation of the start switch 12, it executes internal lottery processing (also called internal selection processing), instruction function processing, or reel rotation processing. In this embodiment, the input signal is set to low-active, so when the start switch sensor is ON when not in operation, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF during operation, the start switch input signal turns ON. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and the start switch input signal may be configured to turn ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the predetermined number refers to the number of bets required to start the game.

In the following, when we simply refer to "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is located on the control panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c to the right reel 8c. When the stop switch 13 is operational, the color of a lamp on the body of the stop switch 13, or a lamp around it, changes to indicate that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, the lamp may light up blue when the stop switch 13 is operational and light up red when it is not operational. Alternatively, the lamp may light up when the stop switch 13 is operational and turn off when it is not operational.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal slot 17 is located on the control panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Multiple types of medal slots 17 are manufactured to accommodate the standard sizes of multiple types of medals, but the mounting specifications for all types of medal slots 17 are the same so that they can be commonly attached to the control panel 11.

Regarding the insertion of game media, the game media is not limited to the aforementioned medals. For example, it may also include game balls used in pachinko machines (so-called parrots), or game media information stored on electrical storage media such as magnetic cards or flash memory. The game machine may then input this game media information, and the bet amount and winnings may be calculated based on the input information.

<Bed switches (MAX bed switch 18, 1 bed switch 19)>
The bet switch is located on the control panel 11. When the bet switch is operated while there are stored tokens in the credit, a bet process is executed, and a bet number setting process equivalent to inserting tokens into the token slot 17 is performed. However, if the bet switch is operated when there are no tokens stored in the credit, the bet process is invalid (the bet switch operation is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 consists of a pressable part operated by the player, a detection unit that detects the operation of the pressable part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that illuminates the pressable part. The 1 bet switch 19 consists of a pressable part operated by the player and a detection unit that detects the operation of the pressable part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX Bet lamp informs the player that betting is possible when the MAX Bet switch is operated. Various notification methods are possible, such as illuminating the MAX Bet lamp in a predetermined color or flashing it at a predetermined interval. Conversely, if betting cannot be performed even when the MAX Bet switch is operated, possible methods include illuminating the MAX Bet lamp in a specific color or keeping the MAX Bet lamp off.

Furthermore, the slot machine PS1 is equipped with a MAX bet switch 18 that allows betting the maximum number of coins set for each machine (3 coins in this embodiment), and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows betting 1 coin. The system is configured to execute a MAX bet process when the MAX bet switch 18 is activated, and to execute a 1 bet process when the 1 bet switch 19 is activated. The MAX bet process is possible when the sum of the number of credits and the number of currently placed bets is 3 or more, and the number of currently placed bets is less than 3. The MAX bet process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of currently placed bets is less than 3 (in other words, when the number of bets will be less than 3 even if the MAX bet switch 18 is activated), or when 3 coins have already been placed. The 1 bet process is possible when the number of credits is 1 or more, and the number of currently placed bets is less than 3, and cannot be executed when 3 coins have already been placed.

Furthermore, each time the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, a 1-bet process is executed. If the 1-bet switch 19 is operated three times from a state where no bet has been placed, a 3-bet is performed. Three operations of the 1-bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX-bet switch 18.

Furthermore, although an embodiment was described in which the 1-bet switch 19 is deactivated when 3 bets are made, it may also be configured so that when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once while 3 bets are made, the state returns to 1-bet, and 2 credits are returned.

Furthermore, while we have described an embodiment in which the MAX bet process, executed when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, it is also possible to consider a process that places the maximum number of bets currently available. In other words, if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated when no bets have been placed and the number of credits is 2, a process that places a bet of 2 is also conceivable.

Furthermore, the maximum number of coins that can be bet may be configured to differ depending on the game state. For example, the maximum number of coins that can be bet may be 3 during non-bonus periods and 2 during bonus periods.

<Sub-switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is located on the operation panel 11 and consists of a pressable part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection unit that detects when the pressable part is operated, and a sub-switch lamp that illuminates the pressable part of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is mainly used to display a menu screen (sometimes called a user menu screen) on the display device 32, which will be described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20, the sub-control board 1000 also provides a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a performance switch (a switch that is operated using instructions during gameplay) as input means managed by the sub-control board 1000. Furthermore, the sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger to activate the mobile terminal linkage system (hereinafter also referred to as the mobile terminal linkage system), which will be described later. Note that although the sub-switch 20 is used for the menu display function and the performance switch is used for operation during gameplay, they may be used as a common switch.

The menu screen displays items related to the role configuration, reel arrangement, volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, and mobile phone linkage system. Operating the up or down switch on the sub-directional key switch 21 controls the cursor to move up or down, depending on the selected item. Furthermore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is over any of the items, the details of that item are displayed. For example, if the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is over the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the player can adjust the volume using the left or right switch on the sub-directional key switch 21.

Please note that the volume adjustment option on the menu screen only changes the volume of game sounds; the system sound volume cannot be changed. Game sounds are sounds that can be output during gameplay or while waiting for gameplay to begin, including bet sounds, wait sounds, reel start sounds, and other sounds related to game effects. System sounds, on the other hand, are sounds that can be output mainly when gameplay is not possible, including error sounds, complete function activation sounds, and other system-related sounds. Each game sound has a set volume level, and even if the player volume is the same, not all game sounds will be output at the same volume. For example, when the player volume is at level 5 out of 10, the bet sound volume is 30 decibels, and the wait sound volume is 20 decibels.

Furthermore, the menu screen can be displayed when the sub-switch 20 is operated after the game has ended and no bets have been placed. Regardless of the game's current state—whether it's a normal presentation, a continuous presentation, an AT presentation, or a demo screen (a screen displayed 60 seconds after the game ends, showing the manufacturer's name and a presentation introduction in video)—operating the sub-switch 20 will display the menu screen. However, this embodiment is not limited to this one; the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during a continuous presentation or an AT presentation.

Furthermore, the volume may be adjustable using a rotary switch located inside the cabinet. Since the rotary switch is located inside the cabinet, it cannot be operated by the player. The rotary switch is for the administrator to operate and can set the baseline volume level that players can adjust. For example, if players can adjust the volume in eight stages, the rotary switch can also adjust the volume in eight stages. If the rotary switch is set to "2," the initial volume setting on the volume adjustment item in the player-adjustable menu screen will be "2." Alternatively, the rotary switch could be configured to allow players to adjust the volume within the range of volume levels set by the rotary switch.

<Switch for performance>
The performance switch is located on the control panel 11 and consists of a pressable part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection unit that detects when the pressable part is operated, and a performance switch lamp that illuminates the pressable part of the performance switch. When the performance switch is operated while the performance switch is in a state where operation is valid, a performance based on the operation is executed. For example, when a continuous performance is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "LCD") 32, and the final game of the continuous performance displays either a "success" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a success performance) meaning that a bonus is awarded, or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a failure performance) meaning that no bonus is awarded, the performance switch may be operated to display either "success" or "failure".

Furthermore, when the effect switch is activated, the effect switch lamp illuminates, informing the player that the effect switch is active. The effect switch's illumination pattern could be: it remains off when the effect switch is inactive, and illuminates when the effect switch is active. Alternatively, the illumination pattern when the effect switch is active could be a pattern of alternating between illumination and extinguishing at a fixed interval.

Furthermore, when the performance switch is operational, the system indicates that the performance switch is operational by displaying a symbol resembling the performance switch on the LCD. The display of the symbol resembling the performance switch on the LCD is based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, the display may be based on a start switch acceptance command, or on a full reel stop command.

Furthermore, pressing the effect switch allows the object to be detected, which is attached to the effect switch, to move to the detection position (on position) where the sensor attached to the effect switch detects it. While the sensor is detecting the object to be detected, releasing the effect switch (an operation that returns the spring attached to the effect switch to its natural length) allows the object to move to the non-detection position (off position) where the sensor does not detect it.

While the explanation described the effect switch as a push-button switch, it is not limited to this; a jog dial switch may also be used. Furthermore, any other structure is acceptable as long as it can detect the ON and OFF positions.

<Settlement switch>
The settlement switch is located on the operation panel 11. When operated after the game has ended, it executes a settlement process to pay out the number of game tokens that have been bet and the number of game tokens stored in the credits to the player. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated while there are bets and game tokens stored in the credits, the bet game tokens are paid out first, followed by the game tokens stored in the credits. However, the system is not limited to this, and the system may also execute a process to pay out the game tokens stored in the credits only when the number of bet game tokens is 0. That is, when the settlement switch is operated while there are bets, only the bet game tokens are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the game tokens stored in the credits are paid out.

<Lower panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is located below the front panel PS2. It is made up of two pieces of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the joined resins. The design sheet is printed with features that represent the unique characteristics of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout slot 45>
The medal payout port 45 is located below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for releasing medals dispensed from the hopper 44 (also called a hopper), which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (into the receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return port for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28>
The receiving tray 28 (also called the "lower tray") is located below the lower panel 5. It has a roughly concave structure to receive and store the medals dispensed from the medal payout opening 45, and it protrudes towards the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Furthermore, the tray 28 also has other functions, including a cigarette ashtray 29 and a sticker storage section 30 that houses a resin sheet to which a union license sticker, patent sticker, and model number sticker are attached, and has an opening for display to the player.

<Speaker S>
Speaker S is located at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and speakers S output sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds to indicate when an error has occurred.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is located above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and displays various performance images, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order in which to press the stop switch 13 and the position to press it during gameplay (when only the order of pressing is displayed, it is also called an order of pressing navigation image (also called an order of pressing image, operation order image, or operation order image); when only the position to press is displayed, it is also called a position to press navigation image (also called a position to press image, or operation position image); or when both the order of pressing and the position are displayed, or as a higher-level concept of the order of pressing and the position, it may be called an operation mode navigation image (also called an operation mode image)), error images when an error occurs, etc. In addition, some slot machine PS1 models do not have a display device 32. In addition, some slot machine PS1 models have multiple display devices 32. Even when multiple display devices 32 are provided, unless otherwise specified, "display device 32" refers to any one of the multiple display devices 32, or to all of the multiple display devices 32.

<Dot displays, movable props, and other performance devices>
Other display devices, such as dot displays and movable parts, are installed at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. These other display devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and display various display images and actions, as well as game instruction images and actions that indicate the order in which to press the stop switch 13 and the position to press it during gameplay, and error images and actions when an error occurs. These other display devices are installed as appropriate according to the model of the slot machine PS1. In addition, various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can also be used as other display devices. In particular, in a game machine that is equipped with a liquid crystal display as an auxiliary other display device, the display device 32 may be called the main display device, and the liquid crystal display device may be called the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the rear side of the front panel PS2 and is installed in the flow passage below the medal slot 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor installed in the flow passage, a medal removal function that guides any non-standard medals to the receiving tray 28, an eject function that removes any medals jammed inside the medal selector 34 when an eject switch installed on the front of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are being accepted from the flow passage using an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker). Furthermore, if the medals inserted when medals are being accepted are valid medals, the medal selector 34 discharges the medals to the hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors within the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal slot and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insertion sensors 1 and 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine whether the passage is normal or abnormal by judging the time it takes for medals to pass through them. Note that insertion sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2 and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Since the functions of the passage sensor and chute sensor overlap, only one of them may be provided.

Furthermore, the aisle sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, or chute sensor may either directly detect medals or other items (medals or fraudulent devices) using optical sensors, or a physical movable piece may move when it comes into contact with medals or other items, and the proximity sensor may detect the moved movable piece.

The blocker in the medal selector, when ON, allows the passage of game medals, and when OFF, it prevents the passage of game medals. Allowing the passage of game medals means that game medals inserted from the medal slot are guided to the hopper 44, while preventing the passage of game medals means that game medals inserted from the medal slot are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the PS3 cabinet in the PS1 slot machine.

<Cabinet PS3>
The PS3 cabinet has a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and inside it is housed a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or "setting switch"), a power supply 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc. It is also composed of a bottom plate, side plates (right side plate, left side plate), a top plate, and a back plate.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are joined together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are sealed by crimping so that they cannot be easily opened or closed. The main control board 100 is fixed to the main control board case bracket inside the PS3 cabinet.

<Reel Unit 6>
The reel unit 6 mainly consists of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to the reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and secured by locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, reel tapes with multiple patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, a stepping motor pivotally supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base that secures the stepping motor and is considered part of the reel unit. Each reel tape has a different pattern arrangement.

When the player operates the start switch 12, the reels are accelerated. After reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations/minute), a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the interrupt process) is executed once, and the stepping motor is moved one step each time to maintain a constant speed rotation state (constant speed rotation). Then, in response to the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant speed to a stop position determined for each stop operation reception position. After the reel has moved to the stop position, the brake is applied (a 4-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotation of the reel and terminate the excitation output.

Furthermore, each reel has an index on the spoke at its base, and an index sensor on the motor mounting base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference symbol (also called the initial symbol) during rotation for each rotation. In this embodiment, the stepping motor that drives the reels has 336 steps, and during constant-speed rotation, one rotation is completed in 336 timer interrupt processes. Also, during constant-speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every two timer interrupt processes, and a rotation failure is determined when the counter value reaches 180. In other words, a rotation failure is determined if the reel does not complete one rotation even after 360 timer interrupt processes. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when an index is detected, so that if the constant-speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before reaching 180.

In this embodiment, the system determines whether or not an index has been detected during constant-speed processing, but does not determine whether or not an index has been detected during acceleration processing. However, it is not limited to this configuration; the system may also determine whether or not an index has been detected during both constant-speed and acceleration processing. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable the system to accept stop requests from players more quickly.

Furthermore, each reel's motor mounting base is equipped with a backlight unit. These units illuminate to highlight the stopped symbols after the reel has stopped, or to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reel is rotating.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that primarily stores tokens inserted by players. The hopper 44 is mounted on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, engaging with rails, and is capable of sliding back and forth along the rails. The hopper 44 consists of a storage tank section that receives and stores tokens guided into the gaming machine from the token selector 34, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a rotating disc pivotally supported by the hopper motor for aligning the tokens in the storage tank section, a token dispensing section equipped with a dispensing mechanism for dispensing tokens one by one into the receiving tray 28 by rotating the rotating disc, a token dispensing port for dispensing tokens by the token dispensing section, and a dispensing sensor for detecting tokens being dispensed from the token dispensing port.

<Auxiliary Tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to store medals, and medals stored in the hopper 44 exceeding its capacity are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 via a downward-sloping rail section provided in the storage tank section. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full-capacity detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are exposed into the auxiliary tank 46 through through holes provided on at least one side. When a certain amount of medals are stored after being inserted through the medal slot, the two full-capacity detection electrodes become energized via the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. Note that the number of full-capacity detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of electrodes may be changed to three, for example. Furthermore, the method of full-capacity detection is not limited to using full-capacity detection electrodes, and full-capacity detection may be enabled by a sensor provided at a predetermined location that detects medals.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is located in a setting key switch unit with an opening/closing door on the front, which is installed inside the slot machine PS1. Access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit after opening the front panel PS2. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while the machine is capable of accepting tokens, the current setting value can be checked. If the power-on recovery process (also called the power-on process) determines that the setting key switch 37 is on, the setting change process is executed.

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply unit 39 is located in the lower left of the front view of the PS3 cabinet. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box structure, with a power switch 40 on the outside and a power supply board that generates voltage inside. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel mechanism board and the sub-control board 1000 via harnesses (not shown), and is further connected to the main control board 100 via harnesses from the reel mechanism board, supplying power to the main control board 100.

The power supply unit 39 is configured to, when the power switch 40 is turned on, draw power from outside the slot machine PS1, generate predetermined voltages, and supply these predetermined voltages to the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, respectively. When the power switch 40 is turned off, the power supply unit 39 is configured not to draw power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also called the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally installed inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 and converts signals related to the game results output from the main control board 100 into signals in a predetermined format and transmits them to the outside of the slot machine PS1. The contents of the game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (number of big bonuses, number of regular bonuses), and the door open signal. Other conditions for transmitting signals to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the machine enters AT mode, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, or when the value of a game-related counter reaches a predetermined value.

<Functional Block Diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 4.

<Main control board 100>
In this embodiment, the slot machine PS1 enables data communication by electrically connecting the main control board 100 (also referred to as the main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100), which controls the general flow of gameplay, to the sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as the sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), the door relay board (also referred to as the central display board), the reel mechanism board, the reset/setting switch 38, the setting key switch, etc. However, bidirectional communication between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 is not possible, and data communication is enabled by unidirectional communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip contains a main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc., which can communicate with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has built-in main control registers, and these registers and the main control CPU can communicate with each other via a bus. Furthermore, the main control chip includes general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return instruction (e.g., RET instruction) following the execution of a program via a call instruction (e.g., CALL instruction), and interrupt registers (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manage the enable and disable states of maskable interrupts.

The main control chip controls the selection of roles (also called internal selection), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc., and communicates data to various boards as needed. Furthermore, when the main control means 100 notifies the sub-control means of information regarding the display of a selection role (press order, operation timing) as a result of the internal selection, the sub-control means transmits selection role information (selection role group information, information regarding the display of the selection role) so that it can also be notified. Note that all processes related to AT, such as transitioning to AT, extending the number of AT games, and press order notification, are sometimes referred to as processes related to the instruction function. Furthermore, a "press-order feature" is a conditional device where the combination of symbols that stop and the number of game tokens awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (press order). A "timing feature" is a conditional device where the combination of symbols that stop and the number of game tokens awarded to the player differ depending on the timing of the stop button operation.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16KB or less," and has a "7.5KB or less" usable area (also referred to as the first program area) and the remaining area outside the usable area (also referred to as the second program area). The usable area contains a "4.5KB or less" control area (also referred to as the first control area) where the program executed by the main control board 100 is stored, and a "3.0KB or less" data area (also referred to as the first data area) where only information other than the program (e.g., internal lottery table information) is stored, or will be stored. The area outside the usable area also contains a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area), similar to the usable area. The usable area stores programs related to the progress of the game, while the area outside the usable area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for testing the game machine.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," and consists of a usable area of "512B or less" (also referred to as the first work area) and the remaining area outside the usable area (also referred to as the second work area). The first work area is a memory area that can be rewritten according to the progress of the game, while the second work area is a memory area that can be rewritten when executing programs for anti-fraud measures and game machine testing.

The main control RAM, built into the main control chip, contains the following memory areas: a memory area for switch status flags indicating the on/off state of the stop/stop switch and the on/off state of the automatic settlement switch; a memory area for setting value information indicating one of the values from 1 to 6 to be set; a memory area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states is currently active; a memory area for specific condition devices indicating the winning status of specific condition devices such as bonuses; a memory area for game information where other information necessary for game progression is stored; an unused memory area; a stack area where data saved from registers is stored; and a temporary stack area that is set when the power is turned on.

The triggers for initializing the main control RAM are during the setting change process using the setting change mechanism (sometimes referred to as "when the setting change device is activated" or "when the setting change mode is entered"), during the power-off/recovery process, and at the start of each game. The scope of the main control RAM memory area initialized differs depending on the case.

During the configuration change process, if power recovery fails or recovery becomes impossible (a recovery error occurs), the RAM area, excluding the switch status flag storage area, is set to data 0 (initialized). In other words, only the switch status flag is carried over from the state before the configuration change; for example, the RT state and condition device flags are cleared and not carried over. However, this is not the only option; all RWM areas, including the switch status flag, may also be initialized.

Furthermore, during the setting change process, if power recovery is possible or if recovery is not impossible, that is, if the setting change process is performed successfully, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas where the switch status flag, setting value information, RT status information, and specific condition device are stored. In other words, the RT status, setting value data, and condition device flags are carried over so that the game state before the setting change is maintained while gameplay becomes possible with the new setting values. The setting value data is carried over from the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in the subsequent setting change process; therefore, it is used by the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether a setting change has been performed.

Furthermore, during power-off recovery processing, data 0 is set to the unused memory area of the RAM area at the start of each game, and to the memory area of the stack area excluding the maximum usage area during RAM initialization at the time of power-off recovery processing.

The main control chip's built-in registers are used to configure the operation of various peripheral circuits (such as timer circuits) and control their functions.

For example, by writing data to a predetermined memory area of the main control's built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM (also referred to as setting or storing), it is possible to configure settings related to maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM (settings for the timer circuit).

<Sub-control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip includes a sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc., which communicate with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 can communicate bidirectionally with the performance control board and transmits data specifying the effects to be output to the speaker S, LED lamp, sub-switch 20, performance switches, etc. Information for the display device 32 is transmitted as data to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also powered directly from the power supply board.

<Rodding mechanism circuit board>
The reel mechanism board is a relay board that handles data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47), etc., and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reels. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reels are operating normally, and transmits data to the reel mechanism board when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes through the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is open or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether the medals are passing through properly when they are dispensed from the hopper 44. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. The reel mechanism board is also powered directly by the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board receives information from various sensors within the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, aisle sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from blocker information, credit count information, bet count information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit count indicator 26, payout indicator, replay lamp, 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion available lamp, and advantageous section lamp.

<Performance control board>
The performance control board (also referred to as the performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switches, movable props, speaker S, backlight, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board which controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to communicate bidirectionally with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of performances to the performance device based on performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The performance control means selects the performance content based on the result of the internal lottery. In this embodiment, multiple types of performance content are pre-defined, and the performance control means selects the performance content by lottery using software random numbers after the internal lottery has performed the lottery for the winning combination at the start of the game, etc.

Furthermore, the presentation content varies depending not only on the results of the role lottery but also on the results of the freeze lottery and the game state (RT state, freeze state), with multiple variations for each. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation content corresponding to bonus wins, minor role wins, replay wins, and non-wins.

The presentation details specify what kind of effects are output (how the lamps light up, blink, or turn off, what kind of sound is output from speaker S, and what kind of image is displayed on display device 32, etc.) at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure the generation of effects output by the effects control means to be in response to operations by the player. For example, it is conceivable that the effects control means of the sub-control board 100 could generate effects based on sub-control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals such as the start switch 12, stop switch 13, coin slot 17, bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), and settlement switch, which are input to the main control board 100. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the effects could be generated directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to operation means such as sub-switches 20, sub-cross key switches 21, and effects switches, which are input to the sub-control board 1000. In addition, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effects control board are described as separate boards, they may also be configured as a single board. In this case, the sub-control board 1000 may be equipped with the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switches, movable props, speaker S, backlight, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and an image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as the image control means) is equipped with an image control ROM, sound ROM, cooling fan, etc., for specifically displaying the performance content on the display device 32.

<Supplementary information on circuit board configuration>
The sub-control board and the performance control board may be configured on a single board, or the sub-control board, performance control board, and image control board may be configured on a single board. If the sub-control board and performance control board are configured on a single board, it may have two sub-control CPUs and performance control CPUs, or it may have just one CPU. The same applies when the sub-control board, performance control board, and image control board are configured on a single board.

<Power supply board>
In this embodiment, the slot machine PS1 supplies power from the power supply board to the reel mechanism board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel mechanism board then supplies power to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then electrically connected to each component. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 then supplies power to the performance control board and then to the image control board. The supplied power is then electrically connected to each component.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the gameplay of the amusement machine.

<Types of errors>
Errors can be broadly classified into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable Error>
A recoverable error refers to errors related to the selector (medal stagnation error, medal reverse flow error, medal passage time error), errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper stagnation error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. When a recoverable error is set, after removing the cause of the various recoverable errors and accepting the operation of the reset switch, the game can be resumed without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, the display device 32, payout display, and various lamps display information about the error that has occurred in order to inform the player of what kind of error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during gameplay, the game may be stopped immediately upon detection, or after the game in which the error occurred has finished. Stopping the game during a recoverable error minimizes damage to the arcade administrator, even if the error is caused by fraud. The system may be configured to automatically recover from a recoverable error state once the cause of the error is removed; an error that can be recovered from without restarting the power is referred to as a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable Error>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an irrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are disabled, the output of the output port is cleared, and the progress of the game is restricted. In addition, the credit count display 26 displays an indication of the type of error to notify the player that the machine is in an irrecoverable state.

Furthermore, if a recoverable error is set, the error is cleared when the reset switch (not shown) is operated. However, once a non-recoverable error is set, it cannot be cleared by simply operating the reset switch or restarting the power. In this case, the system is configured to clear the non-recoverable error by performing a setting change process. When the power is restarted during a non-recoverable error, after executing part of the power-off recovery process, the system repeatedly displays the non-recoverable error to prevent further game processing.

Unrecoverable errors include: when the number of tokens bet is not the specified number during the prize draw; when the setting value is outside the normal range during the setting value error check; when the power-off process is determined not to have been performed correctly during power-off recovery (sometimes referred to as "RWM (RAM) abnormality" or "RWM (RAM) error"); when a random number anomaly is determined, such as when a crystal oscillator frequency anomaly is indicated; and when, during the prize-winning determination process, the symbol combination corresponding to a prize that has not been won on an active line is stopped.

Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, the game will stop progressing regardless of whether it is currently in play or in the waiting period (from the end of one game until the next game starts).

<How to play, game flow>
To play the PS1 slot machine, first, insert tokens into the token slot 17 or use pre-stored tokens to bet (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19) to set a predetermined number of tokens to bet (also called the specified number). In this embodiment, the specified number is set to 3 tokens. Once the number of tokens to bet is set, the active lines are activated and the machine becomes ready to play.

When the maximum number of tokens bet is reached and tokens are inserted into a new token slot, the number of game tokens stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of tokens stored in the credits is 50. If tokens exceeding the maximum bet limit (3 tokens) and the maximum storage limit (50 tokens) are inserted into the token slot (54th token), the token selector's blocker is turned off (preventing further token insertion into the game machine), and the tokens are returned to the tray. In other words, when both the maximum bet limit and the maximum credit storage limit are reached, the blocker is turned off (the passage to the hopper 44 in the selector is no longer formed).

The number of tokens bet is increased when tokens are inserted if the number of tokens bet is less than 3 (less than the maximum number of tokens bet in the current game state at the time of insertion). Furthermore, tokens can be stored in the credits when tokens are inserted if the number of tokens bet is 3 (the maximum number of tokens bet in the current game state at the time of insertion) AND the credits are less than 50 (less than the maximum number of credits that can be stored). In other words, when the sum of the number of tokens bet and the number of stored credits is less than 53, tokens will be entered into the game machine when they are inserted into the token slot. Another condition for tokens to enter the game machine when inserted is that the game is in standby mode (the period between the end of one game and the start of the next). For example, even during standby mode after a replay symbol combination has been displayed and automatic betting has been executed, the requirement for token insertion is met. In this case, since 3 tokens have been bet automatically, the requirement for token insertion is met if the number of stored credits is less than 50.

Next, upon receiving an operation on the start switch 12, an internal lottery process is executed. After determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the winning combination lottery result or condition device number), it is determined whether the minimum play time (also referred to as the wait time (period) or 4.1-second timer) has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the rotation of each reel begins. If the wait time has not elapsed, the reels remain stationary until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when an operation (stop operation) is received from any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c), the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops according to the result of the role lottery and the timing of the stop operation. Once all reels have stopped (also referred to as "all reels stopped"), it is determined whether the stopped symbols determined at the time of each reel's stop operation are abnormal. If they are not abnormal, the system searches for which symbol combination the stopped symbols correspond to. Based on the matching symbol combination found in the search results, processes such as medal payout (including addition to credit), replay setting (automatic bet processing), bonus state setting, bonus state termination, RT state setting, and RT state termination are performed, and one game ends.

<Freeze processing>
Freeze processing (also called freeze effect) which delays the progress of the game by temporarily pausing it for a predetermined period of time, for example, includes temporarily pausing functions related to the progress of the game, such as receiving game media, receiving the operation of the bet switch to determine the number of tokens to bet using pre-credited game media, receiving the operation of the start switch 12 to start the game, or receiving the operation to stop the reels. Note that the freeze processing (freeze effect) is controlled by the main control board 100.

As a freeze effect, all functions related to the progress of the game, as mentioned above, may be temporarily paused, or only some functions may be temporarily paused.

One way to temporarily suspend gameplay is to refrain from performing control processing based on player operations (processing to form a pathway for medals to be guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing to set the number of medals bet based on the operation of the bet switch, processing to rotate the reels or internal drawing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch 13).

If an input signal based on the player's actions is issued during the period when the game is temporarily paused due to a freeze animation, the system will either not perform control processing based on the input signal, not accept the input signal, or delay the transmission of the input signal until a predetermined period has elapsed. This will result in a delay in the game's completion time compared to when the freeze animation is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, examples include cases where the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period when the start switch 12 is operated, and then rotate after the predetermined period has elapsed; cases where internal drawing and reel rotation do not occur for a predetermined period when the start switch 12 is operated, and then perform internal drawing and reel rotation after the predetermined period has elapsed; cases where internal drawing occurs for a predetermined period when the start switch 12 is operated, but the reels do not rotate until the predetermined period has elapsed; cases where a predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and internal drawing is performed, and then the reels rotate or stop during that predetermined period; and cases where a predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated, and internal drawing and reel rotation are performed, and then the stop reception of the stop switch 13 is disabled during that predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control processing for the freeze effect differs between the freeze effect performed based on the acceptance of the stop switch 13 operation and the freeze effect performed based on the fact that a specific symbol is displayed on the reels as a result of the stop switch 13 operation.

As a control process for the freeze effect based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, for example, if the left stop switch 13a is operated and a freeze occurs while all reels are rotating, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is disabled after the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops. This prevents the player from stopping the rotating middle and right reels for a predetermined period, but since the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is enabled after the predetermined period has elapsed, the timing until the end of a single game can be delayed.

As a result of accepting the operation of stop switch 13, and based on the fact that a specific symbol has stopped and displayed on the reels, the control process for the freeze effect may include, when a specific symbol stops and displays on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, the acceptance of the stop operation of the last stop switch 13 may be invalidated, or, based on the fact that a specific symbol has stopped and displayed on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13, the bet amount setting process based on the operation of the bet switch to start the next game, the insertion detection process of the game medium by the passage sensor, or the control process based on the automatic bet process performed when a replay stops on an active line may not be performed.

During the predetermined period in which the freeze effect is performed, game progress control based on the player's actions is temporarily suspended, but game machine operations that do not affect the progress of the game can still be performed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be arbitrarily set to rotate at the normal rate, or at a slower or faster rate than normal.

Examples of reel rotation patterns during a predetermined period include: rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a predetermined number of times and stopping at a specific combination of symbols, stopping a predetermined reel among multiple reels while keeping the others rotating, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel's operation due to player actions.

The duration of the freeze animation can be changed according to predetermined conditions. These predetermined conditions include the detection of signals based on the player's operation status of various switches (such as the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, or settlement switch), and the results of the freeze lottery. Changing these conditions can involve shortening or lengthening the duration of the freeze animation, or switching the reel rotation pattern.

Control processes to shorten the pause period include forcibly ending the pause period or overwriting it with a shorter period. Control processes to lengthen the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or overwriting the pause period with a longer period. Furthermore, the pause period based on the freeze animation does not necessarily have an upper limit; it may continue until a certain result is reached based on the response to the input.

The pause period for the freeze animation may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or it may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period and the freeze animation period are compared. If the freeze animation finishes during the wait period, the freeze animation is executed during the wait period. If the freeze animation does not finish during the wait period, the freeze animation period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze animation finishes. Furthermore, if the only available freeze animation period is longer than the wait period, the process of comparing the wait period and the freeze animation period can be omitted, and the freeze animation can be started after the operation of the start switch 12 (after the internal lottery process).

As a freeze effect, it is possible to perform a freeze effect (also called a simulated game) during the acceleration process, making it appear as if a normal game is in progress. In the simulated game, the start switch 12 is operated, and a simulated game period is defined during the reel acceleration process after the internal lottery has been performed. During the simulated game period, reel rotation control is performed as in a normal game (reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the simulated game), and reel stopping control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. Furthermore, the system may be configured to start the reels again upon operation of the start switch 12 during the simulated game period. However, internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

Furthermore, in simulated gameplay, when the reels stop due to the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as part of a reel animation, each stopped reel is made to shake up and down (a so-called "shaking" or "fluctuation"). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a simulated game when they operate the stop switch 13.

Furthermore, when performing acceleration processing to start the actual game (sometimes referred to as "main game") after the simulated game has ended, a random delay process is executed to randomize the start timing of each reel's rotation. This is because, for example, if the main game were to start with the same relative positions of the 7 symbols after stopping a combination of 7s during the simulated game, it would be easier to align the 7s in the main game (so-called "assistance for precise reel stopping"). To prevent this, the random delay process randomizes the start timing of each reel's rotation to scatter the combinations of symbols that stopped during the simulated game.

The random delay process sets a timer for each reel to wait for the start of rotation. The set timer value is updated with each interrupt timer update, and rotation begins on the reel whose timer value reaches zero. If, as a result of the random delay process, all reels' timer values reach zero and it is determined that all reels are rotating at a constant speed, then the system allows the reels to be stopped by the stop switches.

If random delay processing is not implemented, instead, the symbol combinations before the start of the simulated game may be memorized, and the symbol positions may be returned to those combinations before the actual game starts, and then the reels may begin to rotate.

<Pattern combinations that do not require technical skill>
A symbol combination that does not require skill intervention refers to a symbol combination that, regardless of when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning, will always stop on the active payline to display the winning combination. For example, when bell symbols are placed at intervals of 3 symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell will always stop (100% pull-in rate), so it can be said to be a symbol combination that does not require skill intervention. Hereinafter, a 100% pull-in rate will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning combination where the pull-in rate on all reels is 100% will be referred to as a PB=1 combination.

Conversely, PB≠1 means that, depending on the timing of the stop switch 13 while the reels are rotating, the winning combination of symbols may not stop. For example, if there is a section within the reel pull-in range where no symbols related to the winning combination exist (e.g., separated by 5 symbols), then PB≠1, and that winning combination may be referred to as a PB≠1 combination.

<Priority control for small wins, priority control for bonuses>
Prioritizing small wins means that when a small win and a bonus are won simultaneously, or when a small win is won within a bonus, if it is possible to draw in both the symbols related to the small win and the symbols related to the bonus, the symbols related to the small win will be drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a minor win and a bonus are simultaneously triggered, or when a minor win occurs during a bonus round, if both the minor win symbol and the bonus symbol can be drawn, the bonus symbol will be drawn instead.

Furthermore, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition flags for replays and minor wins, or replays and bonuses, are simultaneously activated, the replay-related symbols are guaranteed to be drawn.

<Normal section>
The "normal section" is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a button-press sequence win occurs in the normal section, the system executes a process to send masked information (performance group number) indicating which button press sequence was won to the sub-control means 1000. Furthermore, when a button-press sequence win occurs in the normal section, the button press sequence (both correct and incorrect) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, neither the main control means 100 nor the sub-control means 1000 announces the button press sequence even when a button-press sequence win occurs, so it is never clear whether the sequence is correct or incorrect when a button-press sequence win occurs in the normal section. In other words, it is a game section in which the AT state is not activated.

<Advantageous period>
The advantageous period is a period in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and it is set up to suppress excessive medal acquisition through AT (Automatic Trigger). If you win the advantageous period transition lottery, which is executed in the normal period, you can transition to the advantageous period. In the advantageous period, it is possible to conduct a lottery to transition to AT or to enter AT state, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous period is designed to end based on certain conditions and transition back to the normal period.
in particular,
1) When 1500 games have been played since the next game after transitioning to a favorable period; 2) When more than 2400 medals have been acquired since the next game after transitioning to a favorable period; 3) When any condition is met. These measures help to suppress excessive medal acquisition. Note that the 1500 games in 1) may be 4000 games, or 65535 games, which is the maximum value that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area, or the system may be configured so that the favorable period does not end after a predetermined number of games have been played. Also, any condition in 3) may include, for example, when an AT ends, or when a specific combination of symbols is displayed.

If the system is in a favorable period, information indicating that it is a favorable period (also referred to as the favorable period type) is stored in a designated RAM area. If the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (favorable period type is 0), it indicates a normal period; if the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (favorable period type is 1), it indicates a favorable period.

<Advantageous Section Lamp>
An advantageous zone lamp is provided on the main side to indicate whether the player is in an advantageous zone. This allows the player to easily determine whether they are in an advantageous zone by checking whether the advantageous zone lamp is lit or not. Specifically, if the DP on the credit count indicator 26 is lit, it indicates that the player is in an advantageous zone, and if the DP on the credit count indicator 26 is not lit, it indicates that the player is not in an advantageous zone. The timing of when the advantageous zone lamp lights up includes after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation has been accepted, when the first coin inserted by manual insertion is detected, when the second coin inserted by manual insertion is detected, when the third coin inserted by manual insertion is detected, after the start switch has been accepted, or after a winning combination has been selected by internal lottery. In addition, the conditions under which the lamp will always light up include being in an advantageous zone, and when the operation procedure information for the winning combination has been announced, and the payout rate (maximum payout rate) of the announced game exceeds 1 (increases).

Furthermore, due to the machine's design, it lacks specific button-press sequence features (particularly minor roles among button-press sequences), resulting in a payout rate that does not exceed 1. However, the machine is configured to illuminate the advantageous section lamp even when indicating a button-press sequence for transitioning to an RT (Replay Time) mode with a high replay probability. This is to inform the player that they are in a favorable state and to prevent them from suffering losses due to not understanding the machine's specifications.

Furthermore, if the conditions for illuminating the advantageous period lamp as described above are not met, the timing of illuminating the advantageous period lamp after transitioning to a new advantageous period can be left to the player's discretion.

Furthermore, once the advantageous period lamp is illuminated, it will remain lit until the advantageous period ends. The lamp will then be deactivated before the start switch operation is accepted for the next game following the end of the advantageous period (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first manually inserted coin is detected, when the second manually inserted coin is detected, or when the third manually inserted coin is detected).

This configuration allows for the possibility of being in an advantageous zone even when the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, giving players the expectation that processing related to the instruction function will be executed even when the advantageous zone lamp is not lit. Therefore, while conventional games simply involved waiting for a transition to an advantageous zone during normal zones, this embodiment of the gaming machine allows for maintaining player motivation because there is a possibility that AT transition lotteries, etc., are being conducted even when the advantageous zone lamp is not lit.

Furthermore, a favorable section type of 1 does not necessarily mean that the game is in a favorable section. This is because in a game where the game is in a normal section (favorable section type 0) and the favorable section type becomes 1 after winning the favorable section transition lottery, the game state is still considered a normal section because the game has not yet transitioned to a favorable section. When executing the process to send a test signal indicating whether the game is in a favorable section or a normal section, referring to the favorable section type would result in sending a signal for a favorable section even when the game is in a normal section, thus sending a signal that does not reflect the actual state.

To prevent this situation, when transmitting a test signal indicating whether it is a favorable or normal period, the system is configured to refer to the value of the favorable period clear counter. If the value of the favorable period clear counter is 0, the system executes a process to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal period. If the value of the favorable period clear counter is not 0 (the value of the favorable period clear counter is between 1 and 1500), the system executes a process to output a test signal indicating that it is a favorable period. This configuration allows the system to accurately determine the state by only checking whether the value of the favorable period clear counter is 0 or not, thus reducing program capacity and improving program execution speed. Furthermore, even when the favorable period is terminated under arbitrary conditions, the value of the favorable period clear counter is set to 1, as described above. Therefore, the system can accurately output that it is a favorable period even when the favorable period is ending.

<Main game state>
The main game state is a game state managed by the main control means and is not necessarily the same as the RT state. For example, the main game state is defined in accordance with the AT, sub-bonus, CZ, normal section, etc., which will be described later. If only the main game state changes, the probability of determining the internal lottery result by the internal lottery means does not change. The main game state is for the main control means to manage the game state, and the performance related to instruction functions such as AT winning probability, freeze winning probability, or output trigger to external terminals is determined for each main game state.

<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for Assist Time, also known as the notification period, which is a period designed to make it easier for players to win prizes through the prize lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, means of notification during AT include the timing of stop switch operation, the order of stop switch operation, and both the timing and order of stop switch operation, which are also referred to as the operation procedure or operation method.

<Sub-bonus>
A sub-bonus is a type of AT (Attack Time) and is different from the bonuses that can be won through internal抽選 (described later): Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, CB, and SB. While basically the same as an AT, it is characterized by the fact that at the start of a sub-bonus, the starting symbol combination is stopped by reel animations, simulated gameplay, or specific button presses. It should also be noted that the term "AT" alone includes the concept of sub-bonuses.

<Grouping of roles>
The main control means 100 transmits a performance group number indicating that a winning combination has been achieved to the sub-control means 1000 when a winning combination is achieved during non-AT (Attack Time) mode, and transmits the performance group number and operation procedure information to the sub-control means 1000 when a winning combination is achieved during AT mode. In other words, since operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during non-AT mode, the sub-control means 1000 is unable to notify the operation procedure. As a result, the sub-control means 1000 does not know which operation procedure will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT mode, but during AT mode, operation procedure information that will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted, so the operation procedure can be notified by the LCD display or operation instruction lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. This allows the player to easily recognize the operation procedure and further prevents the fraudulent acquisition of operation procedure information during non-AT mode.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lottery, AT bonus lottery, updating of AT termination conditions (addition/subtraction of AT game count, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification count), and AT execution (notifying the operation method), but also processing related to the management of the AT state. This processing related to the instruction function can be executed at a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and if multiple bet counts are set as prescribed numbers for a given game state, the processing is configured to be executed only when one of the bet counts is selected. For example, if both 2-coin and 3-coin bets are possible in the internal bonus state, the processing related to the instruction function can only be executed when playing with a 3-coin bet, and it cannot be executed when playing with a 2-coin bet. In other words, when playing with a 2-coin bet, even if an AT lottery target role is won, the AT lottery will not be conducted, and the number of AT game plays will not be updated according to the progress of the game. Furthermore, if the SB (Single Bonus) or CB, which ends in one game, is exclusively for 2-coin betting games, and the game after the SB or CB ends uses 2-coin or 3-coin betting, then if the number of coins automatically bet when a replay is won in the SB or CB is 2, then the processing related to the instruction function will become impossible to execute in the game after the SB or CB ends (the processing related to the instruction function is possible with a 3-coin bet). Therefore, the number of coins automatically bet when a replay is won in the SB or CB is set to 3. In this way, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed even in the game after a replay is won in the SB or CB, thus eliminating games that are disadvantageous to the player. As mentioned above, the processing related to the advantageous period is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction Monitor>
During AT mode, when providing information regarding the operation procedure for button press combinations, the acquired coin display may be used to provide this information. Specifically, for button press combination A (left, middle, right correct), "1" will be displayed on the instruction monitor; for button press combination B (left, right, middle correct), "2" will be displayed on the instruction monitor; for button press combination C (middle, left, right correct), "3" will be displayed on the instruction monitor; for button press combination D (middle, right, left correct), "4" will be displayed on the instruction monitor; for button press combination E (right, left, middle correct), "5" will be displayed on the instruction monitor; and for button press combination F (right, middle, left correct), "6" will be displayed on the instruction monitor.

This configuration allows players to determine the correct button sequence by checking the instruction monitor. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately display the correct button sequence even if the sub-control board is illegally modified.

Furthermore, when the instruction monitor is used as both a display for the number of tokens won and a token count display, the lower digits may display the aforementioned numbers (1-6), and the upper digits may display "=" as an identifier. In this case, the identifier allows the player to determine whether the token count display is showing the number of tokens won or the button press order, thus avoiding interference with the player's understanding.

Furthermore, if the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display unit, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, for button press sequence A (left, middle, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for button press sequence B (left, right, middle correct), "132" is displayed; for button press sequence C (middle, left, right correct), "213" is displayed; for button press sequence D (middle, right, left correct), "312" is displayed; for button press sequence E (right, left, middle correct), "231" is displayed; and for button press sequence F (right, middle, left correct), "321" is displayed. With this configuration, the button press sequence on the instruction monitor becomes intuitively easy to understand, and players can easily grasp the correspondence between the button press sequence and the display on the instruction monitor.

The ideal timing for displaying the button press sequence on the instruction monitor is either during the advantageous period, after a button press sequence combination has been won through an internal lottery based on the operation of the start switch, and before the stop switch becomes operable. With this configuration, the button press sequence can be announced before the player operates the stop switch, thus preventing the player from stopping the machine with an incorrect sequence.

<Status display monitor (Ratio monitor)>
The payout ratio monitor is a display device that switches and displays the cumulative advantageous section ratio or cumulative payout ratio including instructions (selectable according to the specifications of the gaming machine; also called the payout ratio including instructions), the continuous payout ratio for the most recent 6000 games, the payout ratio for the most recent 6000 games, the cumulative continuous payout ratio, the cumulative payout ratio, and the cumulative payout state ratio every 4800ms. It uses four 7-segment LEDs (with DP) to display a four-digit number. The upper two digits of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called the identification segment, and the lower two digits are called the ratio segment.

In the context of the bonus payout ratio, "bonus payout" refers to Type 1 Special Bonus Payouts (so-called RB), Type 2 Special Bonus Payouts (so-called CB), and Regular Bonus Payouts (so-called SB). The "bonus payout ratio" is calculated as: Payouts during bonus payout operation ÷ Total payouts × 100. Payouts during the operation of Type 1 Special Bonus Continuous Operation Devices (so-called BB) and Type 2 Special Bonus Continuous Operation Devices (so-called MB) are included in "payouts during bonus payout operation," but payouts during general gameplay during BB or MB are not included. Furthermore, "payout" refers to the number of tokens inserted before subtraction; the difference (or difference in tokens) is used when the number of tokens paid out is subtracted from the number of tokens inserted. Sometimes, the combined concept of Type 1 and Type 2 Special Bonus Continuous Operation Devices is simply referred to as the "bonus continuous operation device."

In the context of the continuous bonus payout ratio, "continuous bonus payout" refers to the Type 1 Special Bonus (so-called RB), and the "continuous bonus payout ratio" is calculated as: Payouts during Type 1 Special Bonus operation ÷ Total payouts × 100. Note that payouts during the operation of the Type 1 Special Bonus continuous operation device (so-called BB) are included in "payouts during bonus payout operation," but payouts from general gameplay during BB are not included in "payouts during bonus payout operation."

In the "Instruction-Included Bonus Ratio," "Instruction-Included Bonus" refers to the payouts from games where the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in addition to the aforementioned "bonus." The "Instruction-Included Bonus Ratio" is calculated as (Payouts during instruction function activation, or payouts during bonus function activation) ÷ Total Payouts × 100. Here, (Payouts during instruction function activation, or payouts during bonus function activation) does not refer to the payouts from games where both the instruction function and the bonus function were activated, but rather the sum of the payouts from games where the instruction function was activated and the payouts from games where the bonus function was activated. If a game where the instruction function was activated was also a game where the bonus function was activated, the payouts from that game are not added together; instead, the payouts from that game become (Payouts during instruction function activation, or payouts during bonus function activation). Note that if a player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch during an AT game, they may not receive the maximum payout; in this case, the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed on the payout ratio monitor, specifically the information displayed in the identification segment, is used to identify which of the following ratios is being displayed: cumulative advantageous section ratio, cumulative payout ratio including instructions, consecutive payout ratio for the latest 6000 games, payout ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive payout ratio, cumulative payout ratio, and cumulative payout/state ratio. These are displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H." respectively. For example, if "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and if "6Y." is displayed, it indicates the consecutive payout ratio for the latest 6000 games. The "." displayed on the payout ratio monitor represents a decimal point.

The information displayed on the ratio monitor, specifically the ratio segment, is intended to allow visual confirmation of the calculation results of various ratios. It uses two 7-segment LEDs to display two-digit numbers. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" will be displayed on the ratio segment. The decimal part of the calculation result is truncated. If the calculation result is 100, "99" will be displayed. Furthermore, if the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment will display "00".

The identification segment will flash if the cumulative number of games falls below the standard number of games. The standard number of games is determined according to various ratios: 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative bonus item ratio including instructions, 6,000 games for the consecutive bonus item ratio over the latest 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the bonus item ratio over the latest 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive bonus item ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative bonus item ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative bonus item/state ratio.

The ratio segment will flash if the displayed value exceeds the threshold. The threshold is determined according to the various ratios: 70 for the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 for the cumulative bonus ratio including instructions, 60 for the consecutive bonus ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the bonus ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive bonus ratio, 70 for the cumulative bonus ratio, and 50 for the cumulative bonus state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result exceeds the threshold, but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment will be displayed in a steady-on state.

To verify that the payout ratio monitor is functioning correctly, a test pattern will be displayed on the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800ms after power-on and timer interrupt processing is initiated. The test pattern will display all segments (including the DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the payout ratio monitor in a blinking pattern. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking pattern. The test pattern may also be displayed during setting changes, setting verification, or RWM (RAM) error detection, in addition to the initial power-on timing.

In the identification segment, if the cumulative number of games falls below the standard number of games, in the ratio segment, if the displayed value exceeds the threshold, and when a test pattern is displayed in both the identification and ratio segments, the segment is displayed in a blinking pattern. Specifically, the blinking pattern is displayed by switching between on and off every 300ms, such as on for 300ms → off for 300ms → on for 300ms → off for 300ms → ... Furthermore, when switching between various ratio information, the display starts from on, ensuring that the display period of the various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of on and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or cumulative bonus ratio including instructions, the continuous bonus ratio for the latest 6000 games, the bonus ratio for the latest 6000 games, the cumulative continuous bonus ratio, the cumulative bonus ratio, and the cumulative bonus state ratio displayed on the bonus ratio monitor are configured to switch every 4800ms. By setting this 4800ms to a multiple of 600ms, which is one set of illumination and flashing, it is possible to configure the monitor so that at least one of the 7-segment LEDs is always illuminated when switching between the various ratios displayed on it, even when the display is in flashing mode.

By configuring it in this way, the display starts from a lit state even when various ratio information switches, allowing for a continuous, seamless display without any noticeable shift in the blinking cycle.

Furthermore, since the display period for the test pattern after power-on is set to 4800ms, the 7-segment LED will turn off once the test pattern has finished displaying for 4800ms. The next timer interrupt process will then allow the LED to display information regarding the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative ratio of indicated bonus items.

Next, we will explain the control method for the flashing display in the role ratio monitor.

The performance ratio monitor has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time it takes to switch between on and off to make the display blink. This memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) is a 2-byte memory area, and it is incremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt is processed. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stored as 0) when the power is turned on, and then cycles through values from 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt is processed. In other words, the value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off is "0", an update operation is performed, and the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off becomes "1". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation "0 - 299").

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off is "298", an update operation is performed, and the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off becomes "299". At this point, the carry flag becomes 1 (because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation "298 - 299").

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off is "299", an update operation is performed, and the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off becomes "0". At this time, the carry flag becomes 0 (because the calculation "299 - 299" does not result in a carry-over, the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off is a value between 0 and 298, the carry flag is 1. If the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching between on and off is 299, the carry flag is 0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the system is configured to update the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). The blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stored as 0) when the power is turned on. When 0 is stored in the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the payout ratio monitor is illuminated; when 1 is stored in the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the payout ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300ms, the payout ratio monitor's display mode can repeatedly show (blink) the illuminated state and the off state every 300ms.

The ratio monitor display is shown in a blinking pattern only when the cumulative number of games in the identification segment falls below the standard number of games, when the displayed value in the ratio segment exceeds the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in both the identification segment and the ratio segment. In all other cases, the display is shown in a steady-on pattern without referring to the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referred to, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the timing of switching between on and off is updated with each timer interrupt process. Therefore, the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated as needed. Even when switching from a state where the blinking toggle flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is not referred to to a state where it is referred to, the timing of the on/off switching and the switching timing of the various ratio displays can be displayed without any discrepancies.

<Program Start Processing Flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 5.

The main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine when power is turned on. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, configures the functions of the main CPU, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal or not. If the conditions are met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal; otherwise, the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the status of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on or off.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are ON, the system determines whether the power-off recovery data is normal or recoverable. If the power-off recovery data is normal or recoverable, the system sets the first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process and proceeds to the setting change process shown in Figure 10. If the power-off recovery data is not normal or recoverable, the system sets the second initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process and proceeds to the setting change process shown in Figure 10. After the setting change process, the system proceeds to the game progression main screen shown in Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, the system determines whether the power-off recovery data created by the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal or impossible to recover, the system issues an impossible-to-recover error notification and proceeds to the impossible-to-recover error processing, which stops the gameplay of the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power-off recovery data is not abnormal or impossible to recover, the system proceeds to the power-off recovery processing shown in Figure 8. After the power-off recovery processing, the system proceeds to the main gameplay sequence shown in Figure 9. Note that after the power-off recovery processing, the system restores the state that was saved when the power-off was detected, so the processing may not necessarily start from the beginning of the main gameplay sequence.

Furthermore, in the handling of an unrecoverable error, interrupts are disabled, and the output of the output ports (such as the output of sub-control commands and the output of excitation signals to the stepping motor) is cleared. Then, the acquired coin count display 27 repeatedly displays (notifies) the error.

<Power outage procedure>
The power-off process performed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 6.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event occurs that interrupts the power supply, such as a power outage (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops. When this operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the timer interrupt processing, a determination process that determines whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input is executed when it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input. Note that when determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt processing, the determination may be made in one timer interrupt processing or in two or more timer interrupt processing steps. In other words, when determining whether or not the power is out using multiple timer interrupt processing steps, even if the power outage detection signal is determined to be input in the first step, if the power outage detection signal is not determined to be input in the second step, the power outage processing will not be executed. This is to prevent the power outage processing from being executed in the event of noise or momentary interruption (a state in which the voltage briefly falls below the threshold but immediately rises above the threshold).

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, periodic interrupts are disabled, and the interrupt disable/enable state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved, and the stack pointer is saved. Upon saving, a power-off processing flag is set to "on" to indicate that power-off processing has been performed, and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, RAM writing is disabled, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, the presence or absence of the power-off processing flag, and whether the checksums for all RAM areas are correct are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt handling>
The timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 7.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt processing starts, it compares the necessary data stored in the registers.

Next, the system determines whether a power outage has been detected by checking whether a power outage detection signal has been received. If a power outage has been detected, the power outage process is executed.

Next, the input ports, which determine the input from various sensors and control switches, are read, and the input port data generation process is executed.

Next, reel drive control is performed. Reel drive control involves controlling and updating the drive state of each reel according to its current state: accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting deceleration, decelerating, or stopped.

Next, data to be output for each output port (such as excitation signals for the stepping motors and drive signals for the hopper 44) is created, and port output processing is performed to output various signals.

Next, check for any abnormalities. These abnormalities include whether the current settings are within the normal range and whether the operation patterns of the input/output sensors are normal.

Next, the system outputs external signals to the external terminal board, setting (controlling on/off) bonus signals, ART signals, security signals, and other external signals to be output to external systems such as the hall computer, as well as coin insertion and coin payout signals.

Next, the control command transmission process is executed. If there are set sub-control commands, the control command transmission process outputs the sub-control commands to the sub-control board 1000.

Next, control for the illumination of various LEDs is performed. In controlling the illumination of various LEDs, the RWM memory area representing the illumination/deactivation status of each LED is checked. If a value representing illumination (in this embodiment, "1") is stored, an illumination signal for that LED is output. If a value representing deactivation (in this embodiment, "0") is stored, no illumination signal is output for that LED (or a deactivation signal is output).

The various LEDs control the following indicators: 1-3 bet lamps, replay lamp, start lamp, coin insertion lamp, credit count indicator, acquired coins indicator, stop switch lamp, MAX bet lamp, and others.

Next, it outputs notification data to be transmitted to the sub-control board, such as the sound of the stop switch being operated and the sound of coins being inserted.

Next, the signal related to the performance test will be output.

Next, restore the registers.

Next, the interrupt enable flag is saved as "on," and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Furthermore, there are various types of sub-control commands, including a start command triggered by the operation of the start switch, a winning information command indicating the result of the internal lottery, a reel rotation start command triggered by the commencement of reel acceleration, and commands triggered by the operation of the respective stop switches to stop the reels while they are rotating, such as the left reel stop command, middle reel stop command, right reel stop command, and all reel stop command.

Alternatively, timer measurement processing may be performed within the timer interrupt handler.
In timer measurement, control processing is performed to update the timer (time) information stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, processing is performed to update the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as Timer Area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) (for example, by subtracting 1). Note that in addition to the RWM memory area that monitors the minimum play time, there may also be RWM memory areas related to multiple timers, such as the RWM memory area that monitors (manages) the insertion of game tokens by the insertion button (hereinafter also referred to as Timer Area B), and the RWM memory area that monitors (manages) the output time of external signals (hereinafter also referred to as Timer Area C).
In this case, timer measurement executes processes to subtract 1 from the values stored in the RWM memory areas (hereinafter also referred to as timer areas) that store timer-related information, such as subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, and subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C. Furthermore, if timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in that timer area is configured to become "0".

As an example of a control process to update the timer information stored in the RWM, we gave a process that subtracts 1 from the value stored in the timer area. However, a process that adds 1 to the value stored in the timer area would also be acceptable.

Here, we will explain how the insertion of game tokens via the insertion button is monitored (managed).
Monitoring (managing) the insertion of game tokens via the insertion button refers to a timer that starts counting from the time a bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and the timer is designed so that the process of determining whether or not the next 1-bet switch 19 has been operated is not executed until the value of the timer becomes "0".

For example, under certain conditions where the number of credits is above a predetermined value (for example, when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and betting is possible by operating the 1-bet switch 19), after the bet process based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is executed, "20" is stored in timer area B. Then, the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process subtracts "1" from the value stored in timer area B. When the timer interrupt process has been executed 20 times, the value stored in timer area B becomes "0". Note that if the value stored in timer area B is not "0" (i.e., the value stored in timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the main game progression process does not determine whether the 1-bet switch 19 has been operated or not. In other words, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in timer area B is not "0", the bet process will not be executed. After the value stored in timer area B becomes "0", betting becomes possible when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration prevents multiple bet operations from being executed due to malfunction, even though the single-bet switch 19 was operated only once. Furthermore, it prevents malicious players from repeatedly pressing the single-bet switch 19, thereby preventing multiple bet operations based on the switch's operation and the continuous transmission of commands based on these bet operations to the sub-control means 1000.

<Power outage recovery process>
The power-off recovery process performed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 8.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 40, the main control board 100 performs a power-off recovery process to restore various data to their state before the power was cut off.

During the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be sent to the sub-control board 1000 is restored. Then, it is determined whether the set value data is within the normal range. If the result is abnormal (value outside the defined range), the process proceeds to the recovery impossible error handling. On the other hand, if it is normal (value within the defined range), the unused RAM area is initialized, the periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. Then, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, the interrupt disable/enable state during the power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery process ends. Note that after the power-off recovery process ends, the system returns to the state before the power-off occurred. If it does not return to the state (during a setting change), the game progress control process starts from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing within the power-off recovery process; however, the interrupt may also be activated after the power-off recovery process during the program start process.

<Explanation focusing on game progression>
The control processing for game progression executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 9.

The main control board 100 executes the game value input process. In the game value input process, an automatic input process is executed due to replay (if it is not replay, the automatic input process for inserting medals is not executed). After that, it enters a medal input waiting state, and in the game value input process, it waits for game medals to be inserted from the medal input slot 17 or for the bet switch to be operated. When game medals are inserted or the bet switch is operated, it determines whether a bet is possible (whether the bet amount is stored in the credits, whether the bet amount is at the upper limit), and if a bet is possible, it updates the bet amount or the credit amount. Then it determines whether the number of bets required to play the game has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it determines whether the start switch 12 has been operated, and if it is determined that a bet has not been placed, it waits for game medals to be placed or, if there are medals stored in the credits, for the bet switch to be accepted (if there are medals stored in the credits). If the required number of bets for gameplay have been placed and the start switch 12 is operated (the start switch signal is determined to be ON), an internal lottery process is performed. If the start switch 12 is not operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be ON), the system waits for the start switch 12 to be operated.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated, and a predetermined calculation is performed using the obtained random number to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stopping timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if the stop switch is operated immediately after permission to accept stop switch operation after the reel rotation is granted.

The types of winning combinations available in PS1 slot machines can be broadly categorized into bonuses, minor wins, and replays.

A bonus refers to a special feature that activates under predetermined conditions. Generally, it activates when a combination of symbols such as "7-7-7" or "7-7-Bar" is displayed on the active line in display window 4. The activation of the bonus feature changes the number of symbol combinations required for winning at predetermined intervals, or alters the activation probability of the conditional device for winning at predetermined intervals. Bonuses are categorized into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for Regular Bonus, also known as a Type 1 Special Bonus. Generally, RB is terminated after either 8 small wins or 12 game results. During RB, the probability of winning small wins is set higher than in the normal bonus draw table, and bonus draws are conducted using a special bonus draw table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous operation device related to a Type 1 special feature. The BB is terminated when a predetermined number of game tokens (for example, 269 tokens) exceeding the number of tokens awarded for winning a small prize are paid out. During the BB, the prize draw is conducted using a BB prize draw table, which has a higher probability of winning small prizes (described later) than the normal prize draw table. Note that a BB prize draw table is not required during the BB. For example, a continuous operation of the RB prize draw table (described later) until the BB termination condition is met may also be referred to as a BB prize draw table.

CB stands for Challenge Bonus, also known as a Type 2 Special Bonus. During CB, it's possible to set the game so that at least all minor wins are guaranteed, regardless of the outcome of the prize draw. Furthermore, during CB, a different stopping control is applied to predetermined reels than the normal stopping control. For example, it's possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds instead of 190 milliseconds.

As mentioned above, since the CB (Chance Bonus) results in a state where at least all minor roles have been won, it is possible to configure the system so that certain symbol combinations that could be displayed according to the operating procedure cannot be displayed (also referred to as missed symbols). For example, during the CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds from 190 milliseconds, it may be possible to have a system where, if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the active line at any operating timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed at a certain operating timing.

MB is an abbreviation for Middle Bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous activation device related to the Type 2 Special Bonus. MB is terminated, for example, by the payout of more than 153 medals related to small wins, the winning of an RB (Regular Bonus), or the winning of an SB (Special Bonus), as described later.

SB is an abbreviation for Single Bonus, also known as a regular bonus feature. The SB ends when a result is obtained from a single game. During the SB, the bonus draw is conducted using an SB bonus draw table, which has a higher probability of winning minor roles than the regular bonus draw table.

In this embodiment, the Big Bonus (BB) uses a BB-specific role lottery table for role selection. However, the game is not limited to this. During the BB, the game may also be played using a BB general role lottery table, where the probability of winning small roles is the same as the normal role lottery table, and the probability of winning a Regular Bonus (RB) is increased, or an RB-specific role lottery table, where the probability of winning small roles is set higher than the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still terminates when the payout exceeds a predetermined number of medals related to small role wins. Furthermore, the mechanisms that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A minor win is a combination of symbols that stops and is displayed on the active payline. When the winning combination is determined to be a win through the winning determination process (described later), medals are paid out based on the displayed symbol combination.

A replay (also known as a re-play bonus) is a bonus that grants a re-play (a game where the next game can be played automatically without inserting new tokens) when a winning combination of symbols based on a replay stops and is displayed on an active payline, and the winning judgment process determines that a win has occurred. Since a replay is never missed in the game in which it was won, the next game after a replay is always a re-play.

In the draw for the winning combination, if the result is neither a bonus, a minor win, nor a replay, it is considered a loss, and the winning process described below will not be performed. When it is a loss, a combination of symbols unrelated to any winning combination will be displayed on the active payline.

Regarding the winning combinations (BB, RB, and MB) determined by the winning combination lottery, if the winning combination does not stop on an active payline in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to subsequent games (special winning combination carryover method). While the winning flag is being carried over, the winning combination lottery may be conducted using the winning combination lottery table from before the flag carryover, or using the carryover winning combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag (also referred to as the internal internal lottery table or internal winning combination lottery table). When using the carryover winning combination lottery table, if a winning combination based on BB, RB, or MB stops on an active payline, it is determined that the conditions for transitioning to the winning combination lottery table are met, and the game transitions from the carryover winning combination lottery table to the winning combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The winning probability table for each type of winning combination is defined, and multiple winning combination tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there are winning combination tables used during Big Bonus (BB) and MB (Mystery Bonus) rounds.

The winning combination table includes single winning combinations where one symbol combination can stop and display on an active payline, and overlapping winning combinations where multiple symbol combinations can stop and display on one or more active paylines, depending on the results of the winning combination draw.

Multiple symbol combinations designated as overlapping winning combinations may be set so that all combinations can be stopped and displayed according to the operation method, or some combinations may be set so that they cannot be stopped and displayed. Among these overlapping winning combinations, the combinations corresponding to some of the symbols that cannot be stopped and displayed are sometimes referred to as control combinations.

The role of the control mechanism is to control which active lines the symbols stop on, even when multiple winning combinations result in the same symbol combination, depending on the type of control mechanism set as the duplicate winning combination.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is won in the role lottery. Then, when all stop switches 13 are operated by the player and the prize-winning process for the winning role is completed, the flag corresponding to the winning role is turned off.

Furthermore, regarding the BB, RB, and MB mentioned above, the flags are turned on in the winning game. However, if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed on the active line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flags are carried over to subsequent games in an on state. The carryover prize draw table is then set, and the flags corresponding to the BB, RB, or MB are turned off when the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed and the prize-winning process is completed.

Furthermore, the role lottery table will include an RT role lottery table. RT stands for Replay Time, and refers to a game state where the probability of winning a replay differs from that of the normal role lottery table.

As a concrete example of using RT, one could replace the losing range in the normal role lottery table with replays to increase the probability of winning a replay, or one could replace the replay range in the normal role lottery table with losing ranges to decrease the probability of winning a replay.
Furthermore, while the regular role lottery table and the replay area are the same, the types of replays that can be won within the replay area may be made different.
The PS1 slot machine has multiple RT (Replay Time) role lottery tables, and is configured to transition to other RT states when the predetermined transition conditions for each are met.

The transition conditions for the RT (Replay Time) role lottery table are as follows: Transition Condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (bonus-related symbol combination, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed; Transition Condition 2 is when a bonus is won; Transition Condition 3 is when a BB (Big Bonus), RB (Regular Bonus), or MB (Mystery Bonus) has ended; Transition Condition 4 is when a specified number of games have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) was displayed; Transition Condition 5 is when a specified number of games have been played since a BB, RB, or MB has ended. These transition conditions for the RT role lottery table can be set appropriately according to the gameplay.

The "placement number" refers to the number of winning entries for each draw result defined in the internal draw table generated by the internal draw mechanism. For example, if the total number of placements is 65,536, dividing each placement number by 65,536 gives the probability of winning. For example, the probability of winning for a predetermined draw result with a placement number of 4 is 1/16384.

Furthermore, the number of replays can be changed if any of the transition conditions 1 to 5 of the RT role lottery table described above are met. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3, the replay probability for RT2 may be changed to 1/1.5 when transitioning from RT1 to RT2. This can suppress the decrease in medals by transitioning to a state with a higher replay probability, and can add excitement to the gameplay.

Furthermore, depending on the results of the internal lottery mechanism and whether the freeze number from the previous game is stored, a freeze may be executed after the start lever is operated. If a freeze is executed by the start lever, the reel rotation start process may be executed without determining the next minimum game time elapsed at the end of the freeze.

Next, the system checks if the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set during the previous game has elapsed. If it determines that the minimum play time has elapsed (i.e., the minimum play time timer value is 0), a new minimum play time is set. If it does not determine that the minimum play time has elapsed (i.e., the minimum play time timer value is not 0), the minimum play time timer value is decremented, and then it is checked again whether the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process continues until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed. The system is configured so that no other processes are executed between the minimum play time determination process and the process of setting a new minimum play time, as this is the main game progression process. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processes, allowing for quicker gameplay. In other words, it prevents delays in gameplay without making the player wait.

However, the system is not limited to this; it may also be configured to execute other processes as the main game progression process between the minimum play time determination process and the process of setting a new minimum play time. These other processes could include clearing the RWM address, storing other data in the RWM, or other short-running commands. Because these processes are extremely short, the user will not perceive an extension of the minimum play time. After setting a new minimum play time, the reel rotation preparation process is executed.

The reel rotation start preparation process initializes the reel stop data saved from the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests output for the start of rotation for all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel rotation start command) indicating the start of reel rotation.

The stop table is provided in accordance with the symbol control numbers determined by the result of the role lottery by the internal lottery mechanism, and pre-determines the stopping positions of the reels corresponding to the timing of operation of the stop switch 13.

After the reel rotation preparation process is complete, the process related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel animation before the reels start rotating) is executed. The freeze effect involves slightly moving the reels or reversing their rotation, primarily to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

If the freeze animation does not occur, or after the freeze animation has finished, the reel rotation process (also called reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or machine rotation start process) is executed. There are four reel rotation states: accelerated state, constant speed rotation state, stop preparation state, and stopped state. When rotating the reels, the accelerated state is set. In the accelerated state, a timer interrupt process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor.

The acceleration process, performed during acceleration, is the process executed from a state where the reel's rotation is stopped until the constant-speed rotation process begins. In the constant-speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step with each timer interrupt. However, if the constant-speed rotation process is executed abruptly while the reel is stopped, the torque will be insufficient, increasing the likelihood of step loss. Therefore, acceleration processing is necessary to gradually rotate the reel. In this embodiment, the acceleration process initially moves the stepping motor one step after 50 timer interrupts, then after 30 timer interrupts, then after 10 timer interrupts, then after 5 timer interrupts, then after 2 timer interrupts, and finally after 1 timer interrupt. This is followed by the constant-speed rotation process, where the stepping motor is moved one step with each timer interrupt.

When constant-speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented with each timer interrupt to detect rotation failures. Note that the rotation failure detection counter is incremented with each timer interrupt because its initial value is set to 0. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter could be decremented with each timer interrupt, and a rotation failure could be detected when the value becomes 0.

Furthermore, in constant-speed rotation mode, the system allows the player to accept a stop switch input and waits for the player to operate the stop switch. When the system allows the player to accept a stop switch input, the stop switch lamp lights up blue to inform the player that the stop switch is active (it lights up red when the system does not allow the player to accept a stop switch input). This control of the stop switch lamp's illumination can be handled by either the main control means 100 or the sub-control means 1000. Additionally, when executing a button-press navigation, the system may be configured to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

Furthermore, a command indicating that the reels have started rotating is sent to the sub-control unit 1000. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control unit 1000 sets a reel rotation time timer and starts counting. When the reel rotation time timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), the message "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the LCD screen, prompting the player to stop the reels. The reel rotation time timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is received), and if any reels are still rotating, the counting is restarted. The reel rotation time timer continues to update in this manner until all reels have stopped.

Furthermore, if the reel stop warning image is displayed simultaneously with the button press order navigation, displaying it in front of the navigation ensures the visibility of the reel stop warning image even if their display areas overlap, clearly prompting the player to operate the stop switch. Additionally, since this may make the button press order navigation difficult to see and potentially confusing, the reel stop warning image may be obscured (or reduced in size or moved) by operating a sub-switch or a special effect switch, allowing the player to easily see the button press order navigation.

After enabling stop switch operation reception in the main game progression processing, the stop switch operation reception detection process (reel stop reception check process) is repeated until a stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any stop switch has been operated, the stop control (also called slide control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant-speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel rotates at a constant speed until it reaches the desired stopping position. When it reaches the desired stopping position, it transitions to a stop state, all four phases of excitation are turned ON, and the brakes are applied. Note that the slide control is performed within 190 milliseconds of the operation of stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when stop switch 13 is operated, it is possible to pull in symbols up to four symbols ahead.

Here, the target stopping position is determined by whether the currently traversed symbol number matches the symbol number stored as the stopping position. If a match is determined, all four phases of excitation are turned ON to set the target stopping position. The currently traversed symbol number is determined by setting the initial symbol number at the moment the index sensor detects an index (at the rising edge of the index signal), and then setting the next symbol number after the initial symbol number when the timer interrupt process moves one symbol position.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, the system checks whether all reels have stopped. If all reels have stopped, it executes the prize entry determination process followed by the prize entry process. If not all reels have stopped, it executes the process of waiting for the stop operation acceptance of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. After all reels have stopped, the display content of the status display monitor is updated, and the system proceeds to the advantageous section clear counter management process. Then, a game end check process is performed to update the RT status, etc., and the main sequence of events for game progression is completed. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from the start of reel rotation to the acceptance of the stop operation.

The prize-winning determination process determines whether a winning combination of symbols has stopped on an active payline. It determines whether the stopped symbols determined when the stop switch is operated are abnormal, and does not actually determine the winning combination based on the symbols that stopped on the active payline. If the prize-winning determination process determines that a winning combination of symbols has stopped on an active payline, the prize-winning process is performed. If the prize-winning determination process does not determine that a winning combination of symbols has stopped on an active payline, the process based on a loss is performed.

The prize-winning process is the process of granting benefits to the player based on the combination of symbols that stop on the active payline. When a combination of symbols based on a minor win stops, the prize-winning process involves paying out medals based on the stopped symbol combination or transitioning the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a combination of symbols based on a replay stops, the prize-winning process involves granting the right to a replay or transitioning the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a combination of symbols based on a bonus stops, the prize-winning process involves transitioning the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that no prize-winning process is performed in the case of a losing combination.

However, the system is not limited to this. When the prize determination process results in a loss, a prize-winning process based on the loss may be performed, and the player may not receive any benefits as a result of the prize-winning process. Furthermore, as a prize-winning process based on a loss, the game state may be transitioned depending on the operation pattern at the time of the loss. For example, if all stop switches 13 are operated according to a predetermined order when a loss occurs, the game state may transition to a state with a different freeze winning probability. Also, even in the case of a seemingly loss due to a missed small win, a prize-winning process may be performed without payout, such as controlling the transition to a game state like an RT state. Additionally, as a prize-winning process based on a bonus, the payout of medals or the right to a replay based on the stopped symbol combination may be added.

The process of transitioning between game states involves setting a prize draw table corresponding to the transitioning game state, setting reel control according to the transitioning game state, setting the freeze winning probability according to the transitioning game state, or a combination of these.

In the prize determination process, once the winning combination of symbols is determined, the winning symbol combination information (stopped symbol information) displayed on the active line, and the prize draw result information are transmitted to the sub-control board 1000. Upon receiving this information, the sub-control board 1000 can output a corresponding display using the display device 32, a lamp, or a speaker S.

In the prize determination process, a prize is determined for all valid lines. If, as a result of the determination, multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning combinations are displayed on multiple valid lines, the prize determination process is performed for each of the displayed symbol combinations.

For example, when a small win with a payout of 2 coins and another small win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed on multiple active lines, the winning process involves adding the payouts for the 2-coin win and the 10-coin win together to produce a total payout of 12 coins.

Furthermore, an upper limit is set on the number of coins that can be paid out in a single spin. When multiple symbol combinations based on minor wins are displayed on the active payline, if the number of coins exceeds the upper limit, the maximum number of coins will be paid out.

For example, if the maximum payout is set to 15 coins, and two small wins—one set to pay 12 coins and the other 10 coins—stop on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: If the combined value of the 12-coin and 10-coin payouts exceeds the maximum, the maximum payout of 15 coins will be performed.

In this embodiment, the system is set to pay out medals only for minor wins. However, as a winning process based on a replay, the number of medals paid out may be equal to the number of medals bet, or as a winning process based on a bonus, a predetermined number of medals may be paid out.

<Process to end the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of gaming media>
Conventionally, in gaming machines having a normal section and an advantageous section as gaming sections, there were gaming machines that terminated the advantageous section when the MY in the advantageous section exceeded 2400. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-010896)

Here, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), the MY (Mystery Point) of the advantageous period was defined as the point at which the player's payout was lowest since the start of the advantageous period (0). The advantageous period ended when the difference from this point exceeded "2400". Note that the point at which the player's payout was lowest is synonymous with the point at which the difference in the gaming media was lowest.

Therefore, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), a maximum profit of "2414" could only be given to the player during a single advantageous period. Consequently, if a player spent a large amount of gaming currency during an advantageous period, they could not recoup the spent currency within that period, making conventional gaming machines unattractive to players.

For example, in conventional gaming machines, even if a game transitions from a state where the difference in game currency in the advantageous period is -3000 to a predetermined game state (e.g., AT state), the game ends if the MY (My Money) in the advantageous period exceeds 2400. Therefore, a maximum of approximately 2400 game currency could be obtained in a single advantageous period (the game ended when the difference in game currency in the advantageous period reached approximately -600).

Therefore, instead of ending the advantageous period when the MY (My Winnings) exceeds 2400, the system is configured to end the period when the difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous period (the difference between the total number of game media given in the advantageous period and the total number of game media bet in the advantageous period) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400), with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). Specifically, the total number of IN (total input, also referred to as total bet) and the total OUT (total payout, also referred to as total given) of game media in the advantageous period are considered. In other words, the system is configured to end the advantageous period when the difference between the number of OUT (game media) and IN (game media) in the advantageous period (hereinafter referred to as the difference in game media in the advantageous period) exceeds 2400. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that improves gameplay compared to conventional machines while keeping the gambling aspect within a certain range.

For example, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game transitions from a game where the difference in game media in the advantageous period is -3000 to a predetermined game state (e.g., AT state), the advantageous period can be terminated when the difference in game media in the advantageous period exceeds 2400, starting from the beginning of the advantageous period. Therefore, from a game where the difference in game media in the advantageous period is -3000, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 game media (the advantageous period ends when the difference in game media in one advantageous period becomes +2400).

Furthermore, if the game is configured to terminate when the difference in the number of game tokens obtained in a single advantageous period (the difference between the total number of game tokens granted in the advantageous period and the total number of game tokens bet in the advantageous period) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400), it is permissible to terminate the advantageous period when the value is less than this predetermined number. In other words, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in game tokens obtainable in a single advantageous period is the predetermined number (more precisely, the predetermined number + α (where α is the maximum difference in game tokens in one game)).

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to terminate the advantageous period when the difference in the number of game tokens obtained in a single advantageous period exceeds a predetermined number, it is also possible to terminate the advantageous period if any termination condition is met before the difference in the number of game tokens obtained in a single advantageous period exceeds the predetermined number.

Thus, since the game terminates when the difference in the amount of game currency obtained in a single advantageous period exceeds a predetermined value, it is necessary to be able to store the difference in game currency even if it is a negative value.

The following section explains, using diagrams, the specific process for ending the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of game tokens played.

≪Process to end the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of game tokens (additional version)≫
Figure 53 shows an example of a process that terminates the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of game tokens.

Figure 53 shows a favorable section difference counter. The favorable section difference counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the (total) difference in game media within the favorable section.

The value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. However, the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is cleared by the RWM clear upon the end of the advantageous section. Furthermore, the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is cleared by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear due to the setting change). Additionally, information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area and is not cleared when the machine enters a stop state.

Specifically, powering on a device with a setting change refers to situations such as turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is in the ON position. In other words, powering on a device with a setting change enters the setting change mode. Once the conditions for ending this mode (for example, the setting key switch being turned OFF after the start switch is turned ON) are met, and the setting change mode ends, gameplay becomes possible.

The value stored in the advantageous period difference counter is configured to be updateable by the execution of gameplay within the advantageous period.

Note that while the explanation will use an example where the advantageous interval difference counter consists of 2 bytes, the advantageous interval difference counter may also consist of 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, the "Advantageous Section Clear Counter - 1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter falls below 0 (i.e., there was a carry-over), the carry flag becomes 1. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter does not fall below 0 (i.e., there was no carry-over), the carry flag becomes 0. Furthermore, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The advantageous section clear counter is one of the RWM areas on the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played during the advantageous section.

The question "Is the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction = 0?" will result in NO if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter does not result in a value below 0. Specifically, it will result in NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if "Is the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction = 0?" results in NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous section clear counter for the current game. In other words, it means that the current game is in an advantageous section.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous section clear counter before deduction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal section.

The question "Is the next game in the advantageous section?" is answered based on the information stored in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided during the current game (normal section), the decision can be made based on the information stored in the RWM area indicating the transition to the advantageous section. Alternatively, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided during the current game (normal section), and the destination game state is also determined, the decision can be made based on the information stored in the RWM area indicating the destination game state. In any case, the system can determine whether the next game is in the advantageous section based on the available information. The answer is YES if the next game is in the advantageous section, and NO if it is not.

The "Save Initial Value for Advantageous Section Clear Counter" function stores the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter in the RWM area capable of storing this value. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 will be stored in the RWM area capable of storing the advantageous section clear counter value. Similarly, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 will be stored in the RWM area capable of storing the advantageous section clear counter value. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000; any predetermined value is acceptable. For example, it could be set to a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65535).

The "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Initial Value Set" function sets the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter into a register. In other words, when an advantageous section begins (when the current game is in a normal section and the next game will be in an advantageous section), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter is set into a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535 - 2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400," which corresponds to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section that ends the advantageous section, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in the 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the advantageous section difference counter). In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous section is set to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous section is not limited to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous section can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous section is set to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 4800, the initial value would be 60735 (65535 - 4800).

Furthermore, while this example uses a 2-byte advantageous section difference counter, it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous section difference counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous section is defined as the difference in the number of game media within the advantageous section exceeding 2400, the initial value would be 16774815 (16777215 - 2400).

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous section difference counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous section, as defined as the termination condition for the advantageous section" will be explained later.

Furthermore, the initial value of the advantageous interval difference counter may be set to 63120 (65535 - 2415) when the memory size of the advantageous interval difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, the advantageous interval termination process will be executed when the value of the advantageous interval difference counter becomes 65521 or greater.

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous period difference counter will not exceed its upper limit at the end of the advantageous period (since the game ends when the difference during the advantageous period exceeds 2400, the maximum value added from the initial value is 2400 - 1 (for a single bet) + 15 (for a 15-coin payout), which equals 2414, so the maximum value of the advantageous period difference counter is 65534). Therefore, when the difference during the advantageous period exceeds 2400 and the advantageous period ends, the carry flag and zero flag will not be set.

Therefore, in the update process of the advantageous section difference counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the advantageous section difference counter changes from 1 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when it falls below the lower limit of the advantageous section difference counter (when the result of subtracting the difference of the game in question from the value of the advantageous section difference counter is less than 0). Since it is possible to determine whether the value has fallen below the lower limit of the advantageous section difference counter simply by checking the carry flag, a specific value (e.g., "0", "1", etc.) can be stored in the advantageous section difference counter when the carry flag becomes 1 during the update process of the advantageous section difference counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, thus reducing program size and improving program readability.

The "Advantageous Section Clear Counter Before Subtraction = 1?" check determines whether the Advantageous Section Clear Counter was 1 before performing "Advantageous Section Clear Counter -1". For example, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter by 1 results in a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the result is YES. On the other hand, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter by 1 results in a value of non-zero (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the result is NO.

Furthermore, after the "Advantageous Section Clear Counter Deducted = 1?" and before the "Re-play Activation?", the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter is stored in a designated register (e.g., HL register).

In the "When Replay Activated?" section, if the result of the current game displays a symbol combination corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay-based game), the answer is YES. Conversely, if the result of the current game does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a replay (meaning the next game will not be a replay-based game), the answer is NO.

The question "IN count < OUT count?" determines whether the number of OUTs is greater than the number of INs.

For example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, the result is NO.
(i) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the result is NO.
(c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the result is NO.
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inputs minus the number of outputs is calculated, and the result is stored in a designated register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if a carry-over occurs as a result of the IN-OUT calculation (the carry flag becomes 1), the result is determined to be YES; if there is no carry-over (the carry flag becomes 0), the result is determined to be NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of game media played is greater than the number of outputs (IN), the carry flag is 0, and the result is determined to be YES. Conversely, if the difference in the number of game media played is less than the number of outputs (IN), the carry flag is 1, and the result is determined to be NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
(i) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
(c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, then the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, the number of INs is calculated as follows: If, as a result of the previous game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active payline), and the bet for the current game was automatically placed (for example, "3" was set by automatic betting), and as a result of the current game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay did not stop (on an active payline), then even if the bet was set by automatic betting, it will be treated as the number of INs for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of INs and OUTs, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops (on an active payline) as a result of the current game (i.e., the next game will be a replay-based game), the "IN < OUT?" judgment is not made. In other words, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops (on an active payline) as a result of the current game (i.e., the next game will be a replay-based game), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as an IN. Similarly, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops (on an active payline) as a result of the current game (i.e., the next game will be a replay-based game), the number of bets (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as an OUT.

Note that while the calculation "IN count < OUT count?" was performed by subtracting the OUT count from the IN count, it is also acceptable to determine this by subtracting the IN count from the OUT count. In other words, it is sufficient to calculate the difference in the number of game media used in this game using the IN count and the OUT count.

In "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Subtraction," the value of the advantageous interval difference counter stored in a designated register (e.g., the HL register) is subtracted from the value of the advantageous interval difference counter calculated as "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?" (Number of INs - Number of OUTs). If a carry occurs as a result of "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Subtraction," the carry flag is set to 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 2,
a) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, the HL register becomes 65535 and the carry flag becomes 1. Note that 2 - 3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
(i) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the HL register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
(c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, then the HL register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.

When "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter < 0", the system determines whether a carry-over has occurred by "Subtracting the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter". If a carry-over occurs, the result is YES; if no carry-over occurs, the result is NO. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 2, the result is YES if (a) IN = 3 and OUT = 0. Also, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 2, the result is NO if (b) IN = 3 and OUT = 1. Similarly, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 2, the result is NO if (c) IN = 3 and OUT = 3.

Furthermore, if the "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter < 0" result in YES, the carry flag is set to 1, and therefore a predetermined operation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, this predetermined operation involves performing the exclusive OR of the values in register A and register A. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. While the exclusive OR of register A and register A is given as an example of the predetermined operation, any operation that sets the carry flag to 0 is acceptable.

In the "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Lower Limit Set" function, when a carryover occurs due to "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Subtraction," a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. In the example above, under the situation where the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 2, if (a) IN = 3 and OUT = 0, then "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Subtraction" results in HL register = 65535. In such a case, "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Lower Limit Set" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry-over occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of game tokens in the advantageous section as accurately as possible. Even when the "advantageous section difference counter lower limit setting" is executed, the advantageous section continues, and it is possible to provide the player with gameplay within the advantageous section. In other words, even in gameplay after the "advantageous section difference counter lower limit setting" is executed, the process shown in Figure 53 will be executed as long as the advantageous section continues.

Note that while Figure 53 includes a process for "setting the lower limit of the advantageous section difference counter," this process is not required. Specifically, if YES is determined by "advantageous section difference counter < 0," the value may be set to the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is 2, and the number of INs and OUTs for the game are a) INs = 3, OUTs = 0, then the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game). With such a configuration, abnormal values (values with digit shifts) can be prevented from being stored in the "advantageous section difference counter." Also, since the process equivalent to "setting the lower limit of the advantageous section difference counter" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, if a digit shift occurs due to "subtraction of the advantageous section difference counter," the advantageous section difference counter is not updated using the value after the digit shift, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered into the advantageous section difference counter. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section becomes a negative value, the advantageous section can be terminated as accurately as possible using the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section.

In the "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Addition" operation, the complement of the value (stored in the A register) of the calculation result (IN count - OUT count) for "IN count < OUT count?" is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (stored in the A register) is added to the HL register.

In the context of "advantageous interval difference counter addition," the complement refers to the smallest number that exceeds one byte (255) and results in a carry-over. For example, it can be derived using the value in the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 2,
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register will be 249. However, using the "advantageous interval difference counter addition", we first derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the calculation 2 + 7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), so the carry flag will be 0.

Furthermore, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65530,
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register will be 249. However, using the "advantageous interval difference counter addition", we first derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the calculation 65530 + 7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (due to a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because of the carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

The "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Storage" process stores the value stored in the HL register into the advantageous interval difference counter. In other words, it updates the advantageous interval difference counter.

For example, if the value 63135 is stored in the HL register due to the "Set Initial Value of Advantageous Interval Difference Counter," then 63135 will be stored in the advantageous interval difference counter through the "Save Advantageous Interval Difference Counter" function.

For example, if the "Activate Replay" option is selected as YES, the value of the previous game's advantageous section difference counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "Save Advantageous Section Difference Counter" stores the same value as the previous game's advantageous section difference counter in the advantageous section difference counter.

For example, if the "Advantageous Section Difference Counter < 0?" result is NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of game media used in the current game (number of INs - number of OUTs) from the value of the Advantageous Section Difference Counter from the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "Saving the Advantageous Section Difference Counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of game media used in the current game from the value of the Advantageous Section Difference Counter from the previous game into the Advantageous Section Difference Counter.

For example, if the response to "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter < 0?" is YES, the HL register stores the lower limit (0). Therefore, "Save Advantageous Interval Difference Counter" stores the lower limit (0) in the advantageous interval difference counter.

For example, after "adding to the advantageous section difference counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the current game's media (OUT count - IN count) to the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "saving the advantageous section difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the current game's game media to the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game into the advantageous section difference counter.

The "Advantageous Section Difference > 2400?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game tokens in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. Specifically, it checks whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, the result is YES; if the carry flag is not 1 (i.e., 0), the result is NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when there is a carry-over due to "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Addition." On the other hand, if there is a carry-down due to "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Subtraction," the carry flag will initially be 1, but then a predetermined calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, allowing the "Advantageous Section Difference > 2400?" check to result in NO.

In other words, the condition "Advantageous section difference > 2400?" allows us to determine whether the difference in game currency within the advantageous section exceeds 2400 based on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, compared to directly comparing the difference in game currency within the advantageous section with a constant (2400), the program size can be reduced.

Thus, in the case of "Advantageous Section Difference > 2400?", the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Initial Value Set" stores an initial value of 63135.

As mentioned earlier, 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting "2400," which corresponds to the difference in the number of game tokens in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section, from "65535," the maximum value that can be stored in the 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the advantageous section difference counter's memory area). In other words, if the difference in the number of game tokens in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section exceeds 2400, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will become 1. To put it another way, "Advantageous section difference > 2400?" is a check to determine whether the value of the advantageous section difference counter exceeds 65535.

Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, if the initial value of the advantageous interval difference counter is set to "63120," then "advantageous interval difference > 2400?" refers to the determination of whether the value of the advantageous interval difference counter exceeds 65520 (i.e., whether it is 65521 or greater).

Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in the game medium, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation where the advantageous period difference counter value is 13135 means that the difference is -50000, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value—which is the difference between "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous section difference counter" and "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section as defined as the termination condition of the advantageous section"—the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 can be reduced. Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section. While 63135 is used as an example, any other value that has a similar effect can be used as the initial value.

The "RWM Initialization" process updates all parameters affecting the performance of the instruction function to 0, and then terminates the advantageous section clear counter management process. These parameters include the number of AT games, the AT game state, the advantageous section clear counter, and the advantageous section difference counter. By updating the advantageous section type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal section, not an advantageous section. If "RWM Initialization" was not performed during a game played in an advantageous section, the next game will also be played in an advantageous section (the advantageous section will not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carry-over, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the advantageous section as accurately as possible. Even when the "advantageous section difference counter lower limit setting" is executed, the advantageous section continues, and the game can be provided to the player within the advantageous section. In other words, even in games played after the "advantageous section difference counter lower limit setting" is executed, the process shown in Figure 53 will be executed as long as the advantageous section continues.

Furthermore, while the "IN count < OUT count?" condition subtracts the OUT count from the IN count, it is also possible to configure the system to subtract the IN count from the OUT count. If the system is configured to subtract the IN count from the OUT count, and "IN count < OUT count?" is determined to be NO (a carryover occurs in the A register), then in "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Subtraction," the complement should be calculated using a predetermined operation and stored in the A register (the difference in the game medium used in the current game). Then, the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter) should be subtracted from the value stored in the A register (the difference in the game medium used in the current game). In other words, if "IN count < OUT count?" is NO, the system should be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference in the game medium used in the current game from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter.

Similarly, if the system is configured to subtract the number of INs from the number of OUTs based on the condition "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?", then when "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?" is determined to be YES (i.e., no carry-over occurs in the A register), the "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Addition" should simply add the value stored in the A register (the difference in the number of game media played in the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?" is determined to be NO, the system should be configured to add the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media played in the current game to the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter.

≪Process to end the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of game tokens (subtraction version)≫
Figure 54 shows an example of a process that ends the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of game tokens.

Figure 54 shows a favorable section difference counter. The favorable section difference counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media within the favorable section.

The value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. However, the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is cleared by the RWM clear upon the end of the advantageous section. Furthermore, the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is cleared by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear due to the setting change). Additionally, information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area and is not cleared when the machine enters a stop state.

Note that while the explanation will use an example where the advantageous interval difference counter consists of 2 bytes, the advantageous interval difference counter may also consist of 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, the "Advantageous Section Clear Counter - 1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter falls below 0 (i.e., there was a carry-over), the carry flag becomes 1. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter does not fall below 0 (i.e., there was no carry-over), the carry flag becomes 0. Furthermore, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The advantageous section clear counter is one of the RWM areas on the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played during the advantageous section.

The question "Is the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction = 0?" will result in NO if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter does not result in a value below 0. Specifically, it will result in NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if "Is the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction = 0?" results in NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous section clear counter for the current game. In other words, it means that the current game is in an advantageous section.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous section clear counter before deduction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal section.

The question "Is the next game in the advantageous section?" is answered based on the information stored in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided during the current game (normal section), the decision can be made based on the information stored in the RWM area indicating the transition to the advantageous section. Alternatively, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided during the current game (normal section), and the destination game state is also determined, the decision can be made based on the information stored in the RWM area indicating the destination game state. In any case, the system can determine whether the next game is in the advantageous section based on the available information. The answer is YES if the next game is in the advantageous section, and NO if it is not.

The "Save Initial Value for Advantageous Section Clear Counter" function stores the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter in the RWM area capable of storing this value. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 will be stored in the RWM area capable of storing the advantageous section clear counter value. Similarly, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 will be stored in the RWM area capable of storing the advantageous section clear counter value. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000; any predetermined value is acceptable. For example, it could be set to a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65535).

The "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Initial Value Set" function sets the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter into a register. In other words, when an advantageous section begins (when the current game is in a normal section and the next game will be in an advantageous section), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter is set into a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 corresponds to the value "2400" which represents the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period before the advantageous period ends. In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous period is set to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period exceeding 2400, but this is not the only condition for ending the advantageous period. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous period can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous period is set to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period exceeding 4800, then the initial value would be set to 4800.

Furthermore, while this example uses a 2-byte advantageous section difference counter, it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous section difference counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous section is defined as the difference in the number of game media within the advantageous section exceeding 2400, then the initial value should be 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used during the advantageous period, which is defined as the termination condition for the advantageous period," will be explained later.

Furthermore, the initial value of the advantage interval difference counter may be set to 2415 when the memory size of the advantage interval difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, the advantage interval termination process will be executed when the value of the advantage interval difference counter falls below 15.

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous period difference counter will not exceed the lower limit at the end of the advantageous period (since the advantageous period ends when the difference exceeds 2400, the maximum subtraction from the initial value is 2400 - 1 (for a single bet) + 15 (for a 15-coin payout), which is 2414, so the minimum value of the advantageous period difference counter is 1). Therefore, the carry flag and zero flag will not be set when the advantageous period ends after the difference exceeds 2400.

Therefore, in the update process of the advantageous section difference counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the advantageous section difference counter changes from 65535 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter is exceeded (when the result of adding the difference of the game in question to the value of the advantageous section difference counter exceeds 65535). Since it is possible to determine whether the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter has been exceeded simply by checking the carry flag, a specific value (for example, "65535", "65534", etc.) can be stored in the advantageous section difference counter when the carry flag becomes 1 during the update process of the advantageous section difference counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, thus reducing program size and improving program readability.

The "Advantageous Section Clear Counter Before Subtraction = 1?" check determines whether the Advantageous Section Clear Counter was 1 before performing "Advantageous Section Clear Counter -1". For example, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter by 1 results in a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the result is YES. On the other hand, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Clear Counter by 1 results in a value of non-zero (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the result is NO.

Furthermore, after the "Advantageous Section Clear Counter Deducted = 1?" and before the "Re-play Activation?", the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter is stored in a designated register (e.g., HL register).

In the "When Replay Activated?" section, if the result of the current game displays a symbol combination corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay-based game), the answer is YES. Conversely, if the result of the current game does not display a symbol combination corresponding to a replay (meaning the next game will not be a replay-based game), the answer is NO.

The question "IN count < OUT count?" determines whether the number of OUTs is greater than the number of INs.

For example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, the result is NO.
(i) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the result is NO.
(c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the result is NO.
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inputs minus the number of outputs is calculated, and the result is stored in a designated register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if a carry-over occurs as a result of the IN-OUT calculation (the carry flag becomes 1), the result is determined to be YES; if there is no carry-over (the carry flag becomes 0), the result is determined to be NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of game media played is greater than the number of outputs (IN), the carry flag is 0, and the result is determined to be YES. Conversely, if the difference in the number of game media played is less than the number of outputs (IN), the carry flag is 1, and the result is determined to be NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
(i) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
(c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, then the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, the number of INs is calculated as follows: If, as a result of the previous game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active payline), and the bet for the current game was automatically placed (for example, "3" was set by automatic betting), and as a result of the current game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay did not stop (on an active payline), then even if the bet was set by automatic betting, it will be treated as the number of INs for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of INs and OUTs, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops (on an active payline) as a result of the current game (i.e., the next game will be a replay-based game), the "IN < OUT?" judgment is not made. In other words, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops (on an active payline) as a result of the current game (i.e., the next game will be a replay-based game), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as an IN. Similarly, if a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops (on an active payline) as a result of the current game (i.e., the next game will be a replay-based game), the number of bets (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as an OUT.

Note that while the calculation "IN count < OUT count?" was performed by subtracting the OUT count from the IN count, it is also acceptable to determine this by subtracting the IN count from the OUT count. In other words, it is sufficient to calculate the difference in the number of game media used in this game using the IN count and the OUT count.

In "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Addition," the value of the advantageous interval difference counter stored in a designated register (e.g., the HL register) is added to the value of the advantageous interval difference counter calculated as "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number). If a carry occurs as a result of "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Addition," the carry flag is set to 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65534,
a) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, the HL register becomes 1 and the carry flag becomes 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 1.
a) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the HL register becomes 0 and the carry flag becomes 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
(c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register becomes 65534 and the carry flag becomes 0.

The "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter > Upper Limit?" check determines whether a carry-over has occurred by adding to the "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter". If a carry-over occurs, the result is YES; if no carry-over occurs, the result is NO. In the above example, under the situation where the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 65534, the result is YES if (a) IN = 3 and OUT = 0. Also, in the above example, under the situation where the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 65534, the result is YES if (b) IN = 3 and OUT = 1. Similarly, in the above example, under the situation where the value stored in the Advantageous Interval Difference Counter is 65534, the result is NO if (c) IN = 3 and OUT = 3.

Furthermore, if the response to "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter > Upper Limit?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, and a predetermined operation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, this predetermined operation involves performing the exclusive OR operation on the values in register A and register A. As a result of this exclusive OR operation, the carry flag becomes 0. While the exclusive OR operation on register A and register A is given as an example, any operation that sets the carry flag to 0 is acceptable.

The "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Upper Limit Set" function stores a predetermined upper limit (65535) in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result when a carry occurs due to "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Addition". In the example above, under the situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is 65534, if a) IN = 3 and OUT = 0, then "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Subtraction" results in HL register = 1. In such a case, the "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Upper Limit Set" function stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of game tokens in the advantageous section as accurately as possible. Even when the "advantageous section difference counter upper limit set" is executed, the advantageous section continues, and it is possible to provide the player with gameplay within the advantageous section. In other words, even in gameplay after the "advantageous section difference counter upper limit set" is executed, the process shown in Figure 54 will be executed as long as the advantageous section continues.

Note that while Figure 54 includes a process for "setting the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter," this process is not required. Specifically, if "advantageous section difference counter > upper limit" determines YES, the value may be set to the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is 65534, and the number of INs and OUTs for the game are a) INs = 3, OUTs = 0, then the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter may be 65534 (the same value as the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game). With such a configuration, abnormal values (values with digit shifts) can be prevented from being stored in the "advantageous section difference counter." Also, since the process equivalent to "setting the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry-over occurs due to the "advantageous section difference counter addition," the system prevents abnormal values from being entered into the advantageous section difference counter by not updating the advantageous section difference counter with the value at the time of the carry-over. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section becomes a negative value, the advantageous section can be terminated as accurately as possible using the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, while 65535 (the maximum value that can be stored in the advantageous section difference counter) was used as an example of the upper limit, this is not the only limit. For example, a value less than the maximum value that can be stored in the advantageous section difference counter, such as 12400, is also acceptable. If 12400 is adopted as the upper limit, the advantageous section difference counter can store a value equivalent to -10000 as the difference in the game medium within the advantageous section.

In the "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Subtraction" operation, the complement of the value (stored in the A register) of the calculation result (IN count - OUT count) for "IN count < OUT count?" is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register.

In the "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" operation, the complement refers to the smallest number that exceeds one byte (255) and results in a carry-over. For example, it can be derived using the value in the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 2,
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, using the "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction", we first derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the operation 2 - 7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 - 7 is less than 0 (due to a carry), so the carry flag will be 1.

Furthermore, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 10,
E) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register will be 249. However, using the "advantageous interval difference counter addition", we first derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the calculation 10 - 7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that 10 - 7 does not go below 0 (there is no carry-over), so the carry flag will be 0.

The "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter Storage" process stores the value stored in the HL register into the advantageous interval difference counter. In other words, it updates the advantageous interval difference counter.

For example, if the value 2400 is stored in the HL register due to the "Set Initial Value of Advantageous Interval Difference Counter," then the value 2400 will be stored in the advantageous interval difference counter by "Save Advantageous Interval Difference Counter."

For example, if the "Activate Replay" option is selected as YES, the value of the previous game's advantageous section difference counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "Save Advantageous Section Difference Counter" stores the same value as the previous game's advantageous section difference counter in the advantageous section difference counter.

For example, if the result of "Advantageous Section Difference Counter > Upper Limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of game media used in the current game (number of INs - number of OUTs) to the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "Save Advantageous Section Difference Counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of game media used in the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game into the advantageous section difference counter.

For example, if the response to "Advantageous Interval Difference Counter > Upper Limit?" is YES, the HL register stores the upper limit (65535). Therefore, "Save Advantageous Interval Difference Counter" stores the upper limit (65535) in the advantageous interval difference counter.

For example, after "deducting the advantageous section difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of game media used in the current game (OUT count - IN count) from the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "saving the advantageous section difference counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of game media used in the current game from the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game into the advantageous section difference counter.

The "Advantageous Section Difference > 2400?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game tokens in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. Specifically, it checks whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, the result is YES; if the carry flag is not 1 (i.e., 0), the result is NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when there is a decrease in the number of digits due to "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Subtraction." On the other hand, if there is a carry-over due to "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Addition," the carry flag will initially be 1, but then a predetermined calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, allowing the "Advantageous Section Difference > 2400?" check to result in NO.

In other words, the condition "Advantageous section difference > 2400?" allows us to determine whether the difference in game currency within the advantageous section exceeds 2400 based on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, compared to directly comparing the difference in game currency within the advantageous section with a constant (2400), the program size can be reduced.

Thus, in the case of "Advantageous Section Difference > 2400?", the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned earlier, this 2400 is a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game tokens used in the advantageous period ending. In other words, if the difference in the number of game tokens used in the advantageous period ending exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will be 1. To put it another way, "Advantageous Period Difference > 2400?" is a check to determine whether the value of the advantageous period difference counter is less than 0.

Furthermore, as mentioned earlier, if the initial value of the advantageous interval difference counter is set to "2415," then the condition "advantageous interval difference > 2400?" determines whether the value of the advantageous interval difference counter is less than 15.

Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in game tokens, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation where the advantageous period difference counter value is 30000 means that, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0), the difference is -27600.

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value—a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period, as defined as the termination condition for the advantageous period—the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period exceeds 2400 can be reduced. Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, values up to -63135 can be stored as the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period. While 2400 is used as an example, other values (e.g., 2401) can be used as the initial value if they have a similar effect.

The "RWM Initialization" process updates all parameters affecting the performance of the instruction function to 0, and then terminates the advantageous section clear counter management process. These parameters include the number of AT games, the AT game state, the advantageous section clear counter, and the advantageous section difference counter. By updating the advantageous section type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal section, not an advantageous section. If "RWM Initialization" was not performed during a game played in an advantageous section, the next game will also be played in an advantageous section (the advantageous section will not end).

Furthermore, while the "IN count < OUT count?" condition subtracts the OUT count from the IN count, it is also possible to configure the system to subtract the IN count from the OUT count. If the system is configured to subtract the IN count from the OUT count, and "IN count < OUT count?" determines NO (a carryover occurs in the A register), then in "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Addition," the complement should be calculated using a predetermined operation and stored in the A register (the difference in the game medium used in the current game). Then, the value stored in the A register (the difference in the game medium used in the current game) should be added to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter). In other words, if "IN count < OUT count?" is YES, the system should be configured to add the absolute value of the difference in the game medium used in the current game to the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter.

Similarly, if the system is configured to subtract the number of INs from the number of OUTs based on the condition "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?", then when "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?" is determined to be YES (i.e., no carry-over occurs in the A register), the "Advantageous Section Difference Counter Subtraction" should simply subtract the value stored in the A register (the difference in the game medium used in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "Number of INs < Number of OUTs?" is determined to be NO, the system should be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference in the game medium used in the current game from the value stored in the Advantageous Section Difference Counter.

As explained above, Figures 53 and 54 illustrate specific procedures for ending the advantageous period based on the difference in the number of game tokens played. However, these are not the only methods. In other words, any method that allows the advantageous period to end based on the difference in the number of game tokens played is acceptable.

Furthermore, while Figures 53 and 54 included the condition that the number of games played in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number as one of the termination conditions for the advantageous period, it is not necessary to use the number of games played in the advantageous period reaching a predetermined number as a termination condition. In that case, the advantageous period clear counter shown in Figures 53 and 54 does not need to be included.

If a favorable interval clear counter is not provided, the following processes are not required: the process corresponding to "Favorable Interval Clear Counter -1" in Figures 53 and 54, the process corresponding to "Favorable Interval Clear Counter Before Subtraction = 0?", and the process corresponding to "Save Initial Value of Favorable Interval Clear Counter".

<Regarding the relationship between the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous section difference counter>
In the advantageous interval difference counter described above, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter was configured to be cleared by an RWM clear upon the end of the advantageous interval or by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear upon setting change). However, it may also be configured so that the value is cleared only by an RWM clear upon the end of the advantageous interval (and not by powering on with a setting change). Note that setting changes include not only changing to other setting values (for example, changing from setting value 1 to setting value 6) but also changing to the same setting value (for example, changing from setting value 1 to setting value 1).

In this configuration, if the system is powered on while in an advantageous period and the advantageous period difference counter has a predetermined value stored, the game will start from the normal period. Subsequently, the advantageous period difference counter is not updated in the normal period; therefore, when the system transitions to an advantageous period, the value of the advantageous period difference counter remains at the predetermined value before the setting change.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that keeps the element of chance within a certain range while improving gameplay compared to clearing the value of the advantageous section difference counter by RWM clearing, which involves power-on and setting changes.

For example, if a game ends at a certain amusement parlor when the difference in game currency within a predetermined advantageous period is -3000, even if the settings are changed the next day, the game can start again from a point where the difference in game currency is -3000 in the advantageous period after the setting change. Therefore, starting from the beginning of the advantageous period after the setting change, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 game currency in a single advantageous period.

Furthermore, by clearing the value of the advantageous period difference counter at the arcade, it is possible to prevent users from suffering significant losses when the performance of the instruction function changes based on the advantageous period difference counter.

For example, if the value of the advantageous section difference counter is lower than the initial value, and this improves the performance of the instruction function, such as the AT winning probability and the rate of granting benefits like AT extensions, then even if the business ends with the advantageous section difference counter value below the initial value, and the settings are changed afterward, the advantageous section difference counter value will not be reset for the next day's business. Therefore, the game can start with improved performance in the instruction function.

The following explains the relationship between the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous interval difference counter.

<<Case 1>>
In cases where the advantage section difference counter is not initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change, but the advantage section type is initialized.

In a favorable period (favorable period type = 1), if the value of the favorable period difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is cut off. If the setting change key is turned ON while power is not supplied, and power is restored, the setting change device activates, and an initialization process is performed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device. During this initialization process, the value of the favorable period difference counter is not initialized, but the favorable period is initialized (favorable period type = 0). In other words, after this initialization process is performed and the setting change device has finished operating, the game state is a normal period, and the value of the favorable period difference counter is the predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game played after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal section. If a predetermined number of bets (e.g., 3) are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous section transition process determines that the next game will not transition to the advantageous section, and no payout is made as a result of this first game, then the next game will also be played in the normal section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will remain at the predetermined value (the value of the advantageous section difference counter will not be updated).

Furthermore, the first game played after the setting change device has finished operating will be a normal game. Even if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous section transition process determines that the next game will not transition to the advantageous section, and a specific number (e.g., 10) is paid out as a result of this first game, the next game will still be a normal game, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be the predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game played after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal section. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous section transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous section, and no payout is generated as a result of this first game, then the next game will be played in the advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game played after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal section. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous section transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous section, and a specific number of payouts are generated as a result of this first game, then the next game will be played in the advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be a predetermined value.

In other words, during gameplay in the normal section, the process of updating the value of the advantageous section difference counter is not executed.

Furthermore, if the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is played within the advantageous section, a predetermined number of bets were placed at the start of the game, and no payout was made as a result of the game, the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the game allows the value of the advantageous section difference counter to be updated (value of advantageous section difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, when the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is played within the advantageous section, a predetermined number of bets were placed at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts were generated as a result of the game, the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the game allows for updating the value of the advantageous section difference counter (value of advantageous section difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, during gameplay after the transition to the advantageous period, the process of updating the value of the advantageous period difference counter is executed.

In Case 1, when the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous section, and the main game state is AT, and the initialization process associated with the setting change device is executed, the state after initialization will be: the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in a normal section, and the main game state will be the state corresponding to the normal section (not AT). Regarding the RT state, it may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by a setting change can be determined by the specifications of each game machine.

With this configuration, even if the arcade closes for the day during AT (Automatic Trigger) mode and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be reset, preventing the machine from being in a significantly advantageous position for the user at opening time.

Furthermore, in Case 1, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is initialized through two processes: initialization due to an RWM error and initialization through the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous section. The initialization due to an RWM error is the initialization process executed when an unrecoverable error occurs and the setting change device subsequently activates. Note that the initialization range differs between the initialization process when an unrecoverable error occurs and the initialization process when no unrecoverable error occurs. The initialization process through the advantageous section clear counter management process refers to the initialization process when the value of the advantageous section difference counter reaches its upper limit (the so-called ending) and when any advantageous section termination condition is met.

Furthermore, if the initialization conditions for the advantageous section difference counter in Case 1 are limited to initialization due to RWM abnormalities and initialization due to the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous section, then it becomes impossible to initialize the advantageous section difference counter under other arbitrary conditions. For example, if the advantageous section difference counter value is below its initial value (i.e., the user's difference is negative), the advantageous section difference counter cannot be arbitrarily initialized, thus preventing the user from incurring significant losses.

Furthermore, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the advantageous interval difference counter, the advantageous interval difference counter may be initialized by operating the advantageous interval difference counter clear switch.

In this case, operating the advantageous section difference counter clear switch includes pressing the switch while turning on the power when the power is off, or pressing the switch once or holding it down when the power is shared. The initialization range of the initialization process based on the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be limited to the advantageous section difference counter only, or to both the advantageous section difference counter and the advantageous section type.

If the value of the advantageous period difference counter can be initialized under other arbitrary conditions, then even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous period difference counter, it will be easier for the amusement parlor to resolve the malfunction.

Furthermore, the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

Furthermore, while the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is pressed during gameplay, the operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

Furthermore, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is defined as pressing the switch while the power is turned on while the power is off, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON while the power is off.

In this case, the following scenarios are possible: the advantageous period difference counter and advantageous period type are initialized and the settings change mode is activated; the advantageous period difference counter and advantageous period type are initialized but the settings change mode is not activated; the advantageous period difference counter is initialized but the advantageous period type is not, and the settings change mode is activated; the advantageous period difference counter is initialized but the advantageous period type is not, and the settings change mode is not activated; the advantageous period difference counter is not initialized but the advantageous period type is initialized, and the settings change mode is activated; the advantageous period difference counter is not initialized but the advantageous period type is initialized, and the settings change mode is not activated.

Furthermore, in Case 1, since the arcade operator would be unable to ascertain the value of the advantageous section difference counter, the value of the advantageous section difference counter could be indicated by a lamp or similar device in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, the back of the front door or inside the machine).

For example, if the red LED is off, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; if the red LED blinks at 5-second intervals, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is less than the initial value but greater than or equal to the initial value minus 5000; if the red LED blinks at 3-second intervals, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is less than the initial value minus 5000 but greater than or equal to the initial value minus 30000; and if the red LED is lit, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is at its lower limit (or upper limit if the advantageous section difference counter adds the bet amount).

Alternatively, for example, the value of the advantageous section difference counter could be displayed using a five-digit display (such as a display with five adjacent seven-segment displays).

Furthermore, as a method to allow the amusement parlor to understand the value of the advantageous period difference counter, the value of the advantageous period difference counter, or the number of bets and payouts for each game within the advantageous period, can be output to an external terminal so that it can be checked on the hall computer.

Furthermore, in Case 1, since the value of the advantageous section difference counter can easily reach its lower limit, in order to determine whether the lower limit was reached through a normal route or due to fraudulent activity, the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game and the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the current game are stored for each game. If the difference between the two values is within a certain limit (e.g., 14), it is judged to be normal, and the advantageous section difference counter value is updated. The value of the advantageous section difference counter from the current game is then stored in the value of the previous game's advantageous section difference counter. If the difference between the two values is not within a certain limit (e.g., 14), it is judged to be abnormal, and the advantageous section difference counter value is not updated. The game may be stopped by error processing, or the advantageous section difference counter value may be updated, but an error command may be sent to the sub-control means, which then executes error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous section difference counter is fraudulently lowered to its lower limit, the game parlor can be notified.

Furthermore, in Case 1, the advantageous section difference counter was not updated during the normal section, but it is also permissible to update the advantageous section difference counter during the normal section. In such cases, the advantageous section clear counter management process should be made updateable even during the normal section, and the bet count should be subtracted and the payout count added to the advantageous section difference counter value according to the progress of gameplay in the normal section. Note that in this modified version, it is possible to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter during the normal section. If the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter is reached during the normal section, the advantageous section difference counter and the advantageous section type may be initialized by executing an initialization process, or the advantageous section difference counter may be initialized but the advantageous section type may not be initialized (since the advantageous section type is at its initial value during the normal section). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter is reached during the advantageous section and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous section difference counter is reached during the normal section may be the same process or different processes.

<<Case 2>>
If neither the advantageous section difference counter nor the advantageous section type is initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

When the game is in a favorable period (favorable period type = 1) and the value of the favorable period difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is cut off. If the setting change key is turned ON while power is not supplied, and power is restored, the setting change device activates, and an initialization process is performed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device. During this initialization process, the value of the favorable period difference counter and the favorable period type are not reset (favorable period type = 1). In other words, after this initialization process is performed and the setting change device has finished operating, the game state is in a favorable period, and the value of the favorable period difference counter is the predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous section. If a predetermined number of bets (e.g., 3) are placed at the start of this first game, and no payout is made as a result of this first game, and the advantageous section clear counter management process determines that the game will not transition to the normal section for the next game, then the next game will also be played in the advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be updateable (predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous section. Even if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and a specific number (e.g., 10) is paid out as a result of this first game, and the advantageous section clear counter management process determines that the game will not transition to the normal section for the next game, the next game will still be in the advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be updateable (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Furthermore, the first game played after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous section. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and no payout is generated as a result of that game, and the advantageous section clear counter management process determines that the next game will transition to the normal section (the initialization process in the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed), then the next game will be in the normal section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be reset to its initial value.

Furthermore, the first game played after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous section. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and a specific number of payouts are generated as a result of this first game, and if the advantageous section clear counter management process determines that the next game will transition to the normal section (the initialization process in the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed), then the next game will be in the normal section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be reset to its initial value.

In other words, even after the initialization process when a setting change is activated during the advantageous period, the system remains in the advantageous period, and the process of updating the value of the advantageous period difference counter is executed.

Furthermore, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed while the game is in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in a normal zone. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will not transition to an advantageous zone, and no payout is made as a result of this first game, then the next game will also be in a normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

Furthermore, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed while the game is in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in a normal zone. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will not transition to an advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts are generated as a result of this first game, then the next game will also be in a normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

Furthermore, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed while the game is in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in a normal zone. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and no payout is made as a result of this first game, then the next game will be played in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

Furthermore, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed while the game is in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in a normal zone. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of this first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts are generated as a result of this first game, then the next game will be played in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

In other words, if the setting change device is activated and initialization is performed during the normal section, the game will start from the normal section.

In Case 2, when the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous section, and the main game state is AT, and the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device is performed, the state after initialization will be that the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous section, and the main game state is a game state other than AT. For example, the other game state could be a game state with a high proportion of stays in the design (e.g., the normal advantageous section state). Regarding the RT state, it may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by a setting change can be determined in the specifications of each game machine.

Furthermore, if the main game state before the setting change was during AT (Automatic Trigger), the main game state after the setting change may be a predetermined main game state (for example, the normal state in the advantageous section).

Furthermore, if the main game state before the setting change was different from the game state during AT (Automatic Trigger), the main game state after the setting change may be set to a predetermined main game state.

With this configuration, even if the arcade closes for the day during AT (Automatic Trigger) mode and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be reset, preventing the machine from being in a significantly advantageous position for the user at opening time.

Furthermore, in Case 2, if the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous section, and the main game state is AT, then when the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device is performed, the state after initialization may also be one where the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous section, and the main game state is AT.

This configuration eliminates the need to change the main game state during the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, resulting in reduced program size and improved program readability.

Furthermore, to allow the arcade to reset the main game state, a separate main game state reset switch may be provided. This can be done by pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch while turning on the power when the power is off, or by pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch once or holding it down when the power is shared. The reset of the main game state could be the main game state selected immediately after transitioning to the normal section or the advantageous section, or a predetermined game state.

Furthermore, in Case 2, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is initialized through initialization processing due to RWM abnormalities and initialization processing through advantageous section clear counter management processing at the end of the advantageous section. The initialization processing through advantageous section clear counter management processing refers to initialization processing when the value of the advantageous section difference counter reaches its upper limit (the so-called ending) and initialization processing when any advantageous section termination conditions are met.

Furthermore, if the initialization conditions for the advantageous section difference counter in Case 2 are limited to initialization due to RWM abnormalities and initialization due to the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous section, then it becomes impossible to initialize the advantageous section difference counter under other arbitrary conditions. For example, if the advantageous section difference counter value is below its initial value (i.e., the user's difference is negative), the advantageous section difference counter cannot be arbitrarily initialized, thus preventing the user from incurring significant losses.

Furthermore, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the advantageous interval difference counter, the advantageous interval difference counter may be initialized by operating the advantageous interval difference counter clear switch.

In this case, operating the advantageous section difference counter clear switch includes pressing the switch while turning on the power when the power is off, or pressing the switch once or holding it down when the power is shared. The initialization range of the initialization process based on the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be limited to the advantageous section difference counter only, or to both the advantageous section difference counter and the advantageous section type.

If the value of the advantageous period difference counter can be initialized under other arbitrary conditions, then even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous period difference counter, it will be easier for the amusement parlor to resolve the malfunction.

Furthermore, the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

Furthermore, while the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is pressed during gameplay, the operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

Furthermore, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is defined as pressing the switch while the power is turned on while the power is off, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON while the power is off.

In this case, the following scenarios are possible: the advantageous period difference counter and advantageous period type are initialized and the settings change mode is activated; the advantageous period difference counter and advantageous period type are initialized but the settings change mode is not activated; the advantageous period difference counter is initialized but the advantageous period type is not, and the settings change mode is activated; the advantageous period difference counter is initialized but the advantageous period type is not, and the settings change mode is not activated; the advantageous period difference counter is not initialized but the advantageous period type is initialized, and the settings change mode is activated; the advantageous period difference counter is not initialized but the advantageous period type is initialized, and the settings change mode is not activated.

Furthermore, in Case 2, since the arcade operator would be unable to ascertain the value of the advantageous section difference counter, the value of the advantageous section difference counter could be indicated by a lamp or similar device in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, the back of the front door or inside the machine).

For example, if the red LED is off, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; if the red LED blinks at 5-second intervals, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is less than the initial value but greater than or equal to the initial value minus 5000; if the red LED blinks at 3-second intervals, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is less than the initial value minus 5000 but greater than or equal to the initial value minus 30000; and if the red LED is lit, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is at its lower limit (or upper limit if the advantageous section difference counter adds the bet amount).

Alternatively, for example, the value of the advantageous section difference counter could be displayed using a five-digit display (such as a display with five adjacent seven-segment displays).

Furthermore, as a method to allow the amusement parlor to understand the value of the advantageous section difference counter, the value of the advantageous section difference counter, or the number of bets and payouts for each game within the advantageous section, can be output to an external terminal so that it can be checked on the hall computer.

Furthermore, in Case 2, since the value of the advantageous section difference counter can easily reach its lower limit, in order to determine whether the lower limit was reached through a normal route or due to fraudulent activity, the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the previous game and the value of the advantageous section difference counter from the current game are stored for each game. If the difference between the two values is within a certain limit (e.g., 14), it is judged to be normal, and the advantageous section difference counter value is updated. The value of the advantageous section difference counter from the current game is then stored in the value of the previous game's advantageous section difference counter. If the difference between the two values is not within a certain limit (e.g., 14), it is judged to be abnormal, and the advantageous section difference counter value is not updated. The game may be stopped by error handling, or the advantageous section difference counter value may be updated, but an error command may be sent to the sub-control means, which then executes error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous section difference counter is fraudulently lowered to its lower limit, the game parlor can be notified.

Furthermore, in Case 2, even if the initialization process due to a setting change is performed, the type of advantageous period does not change. Therefore, even if the settings are changed while in an advantageous period, the gameplay immediately after the setting change will be in an advantageous period, and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed based on the results of the internal lottery by the internal lottery mechanism.

This allows the instruction function to be executed from the very first game after the settings are changed, minimizing the number of games where the instruction function cannot be executed (games played during normal periods), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in Case 2, the advantageous interval difference counter was not updated during the normal interval. However, as a variation of Case 2, the advantageous interval difference counter may be updated during the normal interval.

In such cases, the advantageous section clear counter management process is made updateable even during the normal section, and the bet count is subtracted and the payout count is added to the advantageous section difference counter value according to the progress of gameplay in the normal section.

Specifically, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the game will not transition to the advantageous game state, and no payout is made as a result of that game, then the next game state is also a normal game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the game will not transition to the advantageous game state, and a specific number of payouts are made as a result of that game, then the next game state is also a normal game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Furthermore, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the next game will be in the advantageous game state, and no payout is made as a result of that game, then the next game will be in the advantageous game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the next game will be in the advantageous game state, and a specific number of payouts are made as a result of that game, then the next game will be in the advantageous game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous section difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, improving gameplay in the normal section. Furthermore, because the advantageous section difference counter update process can be implemented in a common module without determining the game section, program size can be compressed and program readability improved.

Furthermore, in the modified version of Case 2, the initialization conditions for the advantageous section difference counter may include not only the initialization process due to RWM abnormality and the initialization process due to the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous section, but also the initialization process during the transition to the advantageous section.

The initialization process during the transition to the advantageous period is a process that can be executed when the transition to the advantageous period is decided during the advantageous period transition process in the normal period, and is performed before the start of the next game.

This allows the advantageous section difference counter to be reset when transitioning to an advantageous section, even if the value of the advantageous section difference counter exceeds its initial value during the normal section. Therefore, it prevents the advantageous section from ending with the user's winnings being less than 2400 coins if an AT (Attack Time) is won immediately after the start of the advantageous section. Note that the initialization process at the start of the advantageous section does not necessarily have to be performed every time an advantageous section is transitioned; it may be necessary to only perform the initialization process and set the advantageous section difference counter to its initial value if its value exceeds the initial value at the time of the advantageous section transition.

Furthermore, the initialization conditions for the advantageous interval difference counter, specifically whether or not to execute the initialization process related to any termination condition (an advantageous interval termination condition other than reaching the upper limit of the advantageous interval difference counter) within the initialization process performed by the advantageous interval clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous interval, may be determined according to the status of the advantageous interval.

For example, if the advantageous period ends when a specific termination condition is met, and the value of the advantageous period difference counter exceeds its initial value, it is conceivable that initialization processing would be performed at the end of the advantageous period. However, if the value of the advantageous period difference counter is less than or equal to the initial value, initialization processing would not be performed at the end of the advantageous period.

In this case, since the user benefits if the value of the advantageous period difference counter is below the initial value, even if they don't win any payouts during the advantageous period, they can recover those payouts in the next opportunity. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is not diminished at the end of the advantageous period.

Furthermore, for example, if the advantageous period ends when an arbitrary termination condition is met within that period, and the value of the advantageous period difference counter exceeds the initial value, it is conceivable that the initialization process would not be executed at the end of the advantageous period. Conversely, if the value of the advantageous period difference counter is less than or equal to the initial value, the initialization process would be executed at the end of the advantageous period.

In this case, the possibility of the amusement parlor receiving more payouts than anticipated can be reduced, enabling stable operation of the parlor.

In this modified case 2, it is possible that the upper limit of the advantageous interval difference counter may be reached during the normal interval. If the upper limit of the advantageous interval difference counter is reached during the normal interval, the system may either initialize the advantageous interval difference counter and the advantageous interval type by executing an initialization process, or it may choose to initialize the advantageous interval difference counter but not the advantageous interval type (since the advantageous interval type is at its initial value during the normal interval). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous interval difference counter is reached during the advantageous interval and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous interval difference counter is reached during the normal interval may be the same process or different processes.

The modified version of Case 2 can be combined with the other configurations in Case 2 without any problems. It is a modification of Case 2 that allows the advantageous interval difference counter to be updated during the normal interval. The changes are based on the modified version of Case 2, and it goes without saying that other common features (e.g., the configuration of the advantageous interval difference counter clear switch) can be adopted from the configuration of Case 2.

<<Applies to both Case 1 and Case 2>>
The common structure of the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2 (including variations) will be explained.

The advantageous section clear counter management process is executed at the end of gameplay (after all reels have stopped). Therefore, if the advantageous section difference counter is updateable within a game section, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, and the power outage processing is executed during the period from the start of gameplay (start switch ON) to the end of gameplay (after all reels have stopped and before the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed) (the so-called "during gameplay"), and then the setting key is turned ON while the power supply is still interrupted, and the initialization process is executed by the setting change device, then the number of bets will be initialized, the number of credits will be initialized, the reels will not rotate and will return to the state before betting, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be the predetermined value.

In other words, the timing for subtracting a predetermined number (the number of bets) from the advantageous section difference counter is the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the game. Therefore, if an initialization process is performed due to a setting change during gameplay, the number of bets used in that game will not be updated.

This prevents arcades from intentionally manipulating the advantageous period difference counter value by repeatedly placing bets and changing settings, thus preventing excessive increases in gambling potential.

Furthermore, it is conceivable that the advantageous section clear counter management process be executed at the start of gameplay. In this case, the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed at the start of gameplay (start switch ON) and at the end of gameplay (processing after all reels have stopped). Therefore, if the advantageous section difference counter is updateable within a gameplay period, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, and the power outage processing is executed during the period from the start of gameplay (start switch ON) to the end of gameplay (transition to all reels stopping and before the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed) (the so-called "during gameplay"), and then the setting key is turned ON while the power supply is still interrupted, the power supply is restored, and the initialization process is executed by the setting change device, then the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not rotate and return to the state before betting, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter becomes the predetermined value minus 3.

This allows for accurate updating of the advantageous section difference counter, as the number of tokens actually used can be subtracted from the advantageous section difference counter even when settings are changed during gameplay.

Furthermore, when the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed at the end of gameplay, it is executed after the payout of medals has finished. Therefore, if gameplay begins in a game section where the advantageous section difference counter is updatable, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, and a combination of small winning symbols that pays out a specific number of medals is displayed when all reels stop, and the power outage process is executed while the specific number of medals are being paid out (including while the payout is being added to the credits), and then the setting key is turned ON while the power supply is interrupted, the power supply is restored, and the initialization process by the setting change device is executed, the number of bets will be initialized, the number of credits will be initialized, the reels will not rotate and will return to the state before betting, medal payouts will not resume, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter will be the predetermined value.

This prevents the medal payout process from becoming complicated, as the value of the advantageous section difference counter for already paid-out medals will not be updated even if an initialization process is performed due to a setting change during medal payout.

<<Case 3>>
When both the advantageous section difference counter and the advantageous section type are initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

In Case 3, both the advantageous section difference counter and the advantageous section type are initialized through the initialization process via setting changes, as in the conventional method. However, the difference is that the advantageous section difference counter can be updated even during normal sections.

Specifically, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the game will not transition to the advantageous game state, and no payout is made as a result of that game, then the next game state is also a normal game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous game state difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the game will not transition to the advantageous game state, and a specific number of payouts are made as a result of that game, then the next game state is also a normal game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous game state difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Furthermore, in a normal game state, if the value of the advantageous game state difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous game state transition process determines that the next game will be in the advantageous game state, and no payout is made as a result of that game, then the next game will be in the advantageous game state, and the value of the advantageous game state difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous game state difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, in a normal game state, the value of the advantageous section difference counter is predetermined. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the game, and the advantageous section transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous section, and a specific number of payouts are generated as a result of that game, then the next game will be in the advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous section difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous section difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, improving gameplay in the normal section. Furthermore, because the advantageous section difference counter update process can be implemented in a common module without determining the game section, program size can be compressed and program readability can be improved.

Furthermore, in a situation where the game is in a favorable period, and the value of the favorable period difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets were placed at the start of the game, and no payout was made as a result of the game, the favorable period clear counter management process at the end of the game allows the value of the favorable period difference counter to be updated (value of favorable period difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, in a situation where a favorable period is in effect, and the value of the favorable period difference counter is a predetermined value, and a predetermined number of bets were placed at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts were generated as a result of the game, the value of the favorable period difference counter can be updated during the favorable period clear counter management process at the end of the game (value of the favorable period difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, during gameplay after the transition to the advantageous period, the process of updating the value of the advantageous period difference counter is executed.

In Case 3, when the value of the advantageous section difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous section, and the main game state is AT, and the initialization process associated with the setting change device is executed, the state after initialization will be as follows: the value of the advantageous section difference counter is the initial value, the game is in a normal section, and the main game state corresponds to the normal section (not AT). Regarding the RT state, it may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by a setting change can be determined by the specifications of each game machine.

With this configuration, even if the arcade closes for the day during AT (Automatic Trigger) mode and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be reset, preventing the machine from being in a significantly advantageous position for the user at opening time.

Furthermore, in Case 3, in order to initialize the value of the advantageous section difference counter, in addition to the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, there is also an initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and an initialization process by the advantageous section clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous section. The initialization process by the advantageous section clear counter management process refers to the initialization process when the value of the advantageous section difference counter reaches its upper limit (the so-called ending) and when any advantageous section termination condition is met.

Furthermore, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the advantageous interval difference counter, the advantageous interval difference counter may be initialized by operating the advantageous interval difference counter clear switch.

In this case, operating the advantageous section difference counter clear switch includes pressing the switch while turning on the power when the power is off, or pressing the switch once or holding it down when the power is shared. The initialization range of the initialization process based on the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be limited to the advantageous section difference counter only, or to both the advantageous section difference counter and the advantageous section type.

If the value of the advantageous period difference counter can be initialized under other arbitrary conditions, then even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous period difference counter, it will be easier for the amusement parlor to resolve the malfunction.

Furthermore, the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

Furthermore, while the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is pressed during gameplay, the operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

Furthermore, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is defined as pressing the switch while the power is turned on while the power is off, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON while the power is off.

In this case, there are two possibilities: either the advantageous period difference counter and the advantageous period type are initialized and the settings change mode is activated; or the advantageous period difference counter and the advantageous period type are initialized but the settings change mode is not activated.

<<Regarding the common configuration for cases 1, 2, and 3 concerning the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous section difference counter>>
The common structure of Cases 1, 2 (including variations), and 3 described above will be explained.

In either case, the stop-loss counter related to the complete function is initialized (initial value is set) upon power-off or power-on.

In either case, it is possible to transmit the value of the advantageous interval difference counter to the sub-control means.

Therefore, when the value of the advantageous section difference counter falls a certain number below its initial value, a suggestive animation can be displayed to the user with a predetermined probability, or the value of the advantageous section difference counter can be displayed on a screen that can only be viewed by the arcade operator, such as during setting confirmation or setting change.

This is expected to improve the visual experience for users and enhance the effectiveness of maintenance for amusement parlors.

In the initialization process accompanying the operation of the settings change device, whether the advantageous section difference counter is initialized or not, the initialization process accompanying the operation of the settings change device allows for the initialization of unrecoverable errors, recoverable errors, bet count, credit count, and stop-play status.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 10.

When the settings change mode is activated (the settings change process is executed), it determines whether the current setting value is within the normal range. If it is within the normal range, it retrieves the current setting value. If it is outside the normal range, it saves "1" as the setting value and retrieves the setting value "1".

After obtaining the set value, the set value display data is saved. After saving the set value display data, the lighting control is performed by referencing the set value display data every five interrupts using a timer interrupt process called dynamic lighting control.

Next, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not moved from off to on, the system then checks again whether the start switch 12 has moved from off to on. If it is determined that the setting switch has moved from off to on, the system then checks whether the setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented. If the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the initial value (0) is saved to the current set value, and then the incrementing process is performed again. After incrementing the set value, the updated set value is displayed, and the process returns to determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

Subsequently, when the start switch sensor detects a change and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the system performs a setting value confirmation process. It then waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the determined setting value is saved to the main control RAM, the setting indicator LED is turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on (forming a passage for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is a means of determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as setting values 1 to 6). Once a setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role lottery table) corresponding to that setting value remains set until the setting value is changed again using the setting change means. Note that a different role lottery table is provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the lottery result (probability of winning a role).

The setting change means works as follows: When the slot machine PS1 is powered off, the setting key used for changing settings is rotated by the arcade manager. When the setting key is held in the position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on, the setting key switch signal is turned on as a trigger for the power-on of the slot machine PS1. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal being on means the rising edge is turned on (off → on). If the setting key was on before the power outage occurred, the rising edge is not detected after power-on, and the system is configured not to transition to setting change mode. However, the setting key switch signal being on could be defined as a level on, and even if it was on before the power outage occurred, the system could be configured to transition to setting change mode if the setting key is on when the power is restored.

The setting change mechanism activates a setting change mode that allows the setting values of the slot machine PS1 to be changed when it determines that the setting key switch signal is ON, the door open signal is ON, and the setting change enabled flag is ON.

The setting changeable flag is switched on and off depending on the game state. For example, the setting changeable flag can be turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and turned on during all other periods. However, this is not the only configuration; the setting changeable flag may also be turned off only when a specific bonus game starts or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the system may be configured so that the setting can be changed in any state by not having a setting changeable flag.

When the settings change mode is activated, the blocker on the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the game from starting by inserting medals. The settings data that can be changed in the settings change mode has six levels: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". As the setting value increases, a prize draw table with a higher payout rate is set.

After activating the settings change mode, the setting indicator LED located on the back of the front panel PS2 lights up to indicate that the settings change mode is active. Then, the setting value display data for displaying the set setting value is set, and the credit count indicator 26 located on the front of the slot machine PS1's front panel PS2, and the setting indicator LED (not shown) located on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1, light up to display the setting value. If the setting value data is "1", the setting value display shows "1"; if the setting value data is "2", it shows "2"; if the setting value data is "3", it shows "3"; if the setting value data is "4", it shows "4"; if the setting value data is "5", it shows "5"; and if the setting value data is "6", it shows "6".

Furthermore, when storing setting value data in the setting value data storage area in six levels from "0" to "5," the setting value display will show "1" if the setting value data is "0," "2" if the setting value data is "1," "3" if the setting value data is "3," "4" if the setting value data is "4," "5" if the setting value data is "4," and "6" if the setting value data is "5."

After activating the setting change mode, the system continuously checks whether the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on or off. When the system determines that the start switch 12 has been operated and its sensor signal is on, it determines the setting value and displays the current setting value on the setting indicator LED. In other words, if the system determines that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not change even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, if the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is not detected as ON, but the setting switch signal is detected as ON, the setting switch rising edge data is cleared, and it is determined whether the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"). If it is determined that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (set to "1"). If it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "1" to "5"), the current setting value is incremented. For setting change mode processing when the setting value data has 6 levels from 0 to 5, the current setting value should be determined whether the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"). If it is determined that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (set to "0"). If it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "0" to "4"), the current setting value is incremented.

Furthermore, if the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be ON after activating the setting change mode, the setting value may be displayed on the setting indicator LED in a different manner than when the setting can be changed. For example, "0" may be displayed on the setting indicator LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or "_X" (where "X" is the confirmed setting value) may be displayed on the setting indicator LED.

<Gameplay using the advantageous period applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number for starting the game is only three. In other words, the game cannot be started with anything other than three coins, and even when a bonus is activated, the game can only be started with three coins.

In this embodiment, the active line consists of one line: the lower position of the left reel, the middle position of the middle reel, and the lower position of the right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on the active line, it will simply be referred to as a "symbol combination stopping."

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. These are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples and can be changed without any problem.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11. As shown in Figure 11, each reel has 20 symbols and comprises a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 12 to 17. The "Winning Symbol/Activation Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" column in the figures indicates the name of the conditional device corresponding to the symbol combination. The "Specified Number and Game State" column indicates the bonus awarded when a specified number of symbol combinations stop. If "1 Type BB" is written in the "Specified Number and Game State" column, it indicates that a 1 Type BB is awarded when the symbol combination stops. If "Replay" is written, it indicates that a replay is awarded when the symbol combination stops. If a number is written, it indicates the number of coins paid out when the symbol combination stops. If "-" is written, it indicates that the symbol combination does not stop in the corresponding game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus system includes a single type of Big Bonus (BB), which terminates when more than 11 game tokens are dispensed. This single type of BB is a continuous type of Regular Bonus (RB). The RB terminates when either two wins or two rounds of play are completed. Once the RB's termination condition is met, the RB automatically continues to operate until the single type of BB's termination condition (dispensing more than 11 game tokens) is met.

As shown in Figure 12, there are eight possible symbol combinations for the Type 1 BB (Big Bonus). Since the probability of a symbol matching a Type 1 BB symbol combination appearing on each reel is not 100%, precise reel stopping is required to display the Type 1 BB symbol combinations.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as type 1 BB not internal). If type 1 BB is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the game transitions to RT1 (also referred to as type 1 BB internal) from the next game (or at the end of that game). If the type 1 BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and type 1 BB is activated from the next game (also referred to as type 1 BB in progress). When the operation of type 1 BB ends, the game transitions to non-RT from the next game. Also, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or type 1 BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in the case of a power outage where the setting change device is not activated (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the game starts from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during Type 1 BB (Blockchain) operation, and then power is restored, the Type 1 BB operation state remains in Type 1 BB mode. If a power outage occurs again while the system is in RT1 state, and then power is restored, the RT state remains RT1.

The condition devices in this embodiment are explained in Figure 18. In Figure 18, the "Re-play after winning" item lists the numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. The "Condition Device" item lists the condition devices that are activated. The "Common Name" item lists the simplified names of the condition devices that are activated. For example, the common name for the Re-play - H condition device is "Right Press: Strong - Battle Symbol," indicating that when the right reel is stopped first, the Strong Battle Symbol will stop. The common name for the Winning - A1 condition device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123," indicating that the operation pattern of stopping the left reel first, the middle reel second, and the right reel third is the correct operation pattern (in this case, the pattern in which the symbol combination for Winning 52 (a win with a larger payout than Winning 01-02, 09, 29-31) is stopped). The "Components" item lists the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices. For example, if the Replay-A condition device is activated (a win occurs), it indicates that either Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be displayed. Note that the "0" in the "Winning Replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-internal type BB in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 19 to 21. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-internal type BB are: Type BB, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C (+1 type BB), Replay-D (+1 type BB), Replay-E (+1 type BB), Replay-F (+1 type BB), Replay-G (+1 type BB), Replay-H (+1 type BB), Replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win The prizes are one of the following: Prize A6, Honorable Mention B1, Honorable Mention B2, Honorable Mention B3, Honorable Mention B4, Honorable Mention B5, Honorable Mention B6, Honorable Mention C1, Honorable Mention C2, Honorable Mention C3, Honorable Mention C4, Honorable Mention C5, Honorable Mention C6, Honorable Mention D (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention E (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention F (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention G (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention H (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention I (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention J (+1 type BB), Honorable Mention K (+1 type BB). There are no losing tickets.

The above-mentioned description "Replay - C (+1 type BB)" indicates that Replay - C and 1 type BB are won simultaneously, and corresponds to the fact that the names are written in both "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" in Figures 19, 20, and 21. In addition, the "Internal Drawing" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not an internal drawing is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that it is applicable to the internal drawing and "×" indicating that it is not applicable. Furthermore, the "Advantageous Section Transition" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not an advantageous section transition drawing is performed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous section transition drawing is performed and "×" indicating that the advantageous section transition drawing is not performed. In this embodiment, if the advantageous section transition drawing is performed, it is configured to result in a 100% win and transition to the advantageous section. Furthermore, the "R1" to "R6" items in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicate the number of winning positions in the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, with 65,536 positions allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a set value of "1," "R2" to "2," "R3" to "3," "R4" to "4," "R5" to "5," and "R6" to "6."

In this embodiment, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means within the Type 1 BB is one of the following: Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Prize-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K. There are no losing outcomes.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means within one type of BB is one of the following: win-K, win-L, or lose.

In this embodiment, the condition for transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section is that any of the following are won: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K. Winning Replay-A or Replay-B does not result in a transition to the advantageous section. In other words, if any of the following are won during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, the next game will be in the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, if any of the following are won during the normal section—Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K—the game will always transition to the advantageous section. In other words, if any of the following are won during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, the next game will be in the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, since there are no misses in RT1 (within the first type of BB), (either a re-play win or a winning win is guaranteed), once RT1 is activated, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination in certain operation patterns when a push-order bell C group (winning win - C1 to C6) is won. These certain operation patterns when a push-order bell C group is won refer, for example, to certain stopping positions on the middle reel or the first stop of the right reel when a winning win - C1 is won. Furthermore, when a win occurs during the advantageous period (C1), the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3") is displayed on the LCD screen, causing win 38 to stop and the BB symbol combination to remain active. This configuration allows the user to maintain RT1 by informing them of the operation pattern that prevents the BB symbol combination from stopping. Alternatively, the number of losing spins during RT1 could be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability in the design is 1/17500 or higher), and the BB symbol combination could not stop for other re-spinning or winning spins, thus ensuring that the BB symbol combination only stops on losing spins.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means during the advantageous section include the general advantageous section state, the chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT. The game transitions from the general advantageous section state to the CZ, from the CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous section state, or back to the CZ. Furthermore, the game states managed by the main control means during the normal section are limited to the general normal section state, and no transitions occur until the game transitions to the advantageous section. Note that the flags related to the game states managed by the main control means in the general advantageous section state and the general normal section state may be the same or different.

In the normal state, when the internal lottery result is a win in any of the categories A1 to C6, the system does not notify the player of the advantageous button press order for winning.

The Chance Zone (CZ) is a state entered when, in the normal state, the internal lottery result is one of the following: Entry-D to Entry-H. During the CZ, the transition to the Attack Time (AT) is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ and the lottery at the start of the CZ.

AT is a state entered when the AT lottery during the CZ (Chance Zone) is won. When a win occurs in any of the categories A1 through C6, the game indicates a favorable operating procedure (order of button presses for winning).

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section are: when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1500 times), when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, when initialization processing based on a setting change is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is activated. The AT termination conditions and the advantageous section termination conditions do not coincide. However, some of the AT termination conditions (such as reaching the ending or when the number of acquired coins exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2300 coins)) may be used as the advantageous section termination conditions. Furthermore, the transition to the normal section may occur when a CZ (Chance Zone) is won in the advantageous section. In this case, the decision of whether or not to terminate the advantageous section is made based on the situation in the advantageous section at the time of the CZ win.

The Chance Zone (CZ) is determined by a lottery when any of the following outcomes (D through H, also referred to as rare outcomes) are achieved: Generally, the less likely the internal lottery result is to result in a win, the higher the chance of winning a CZ. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning a CZ is: Win-G > Win-E > Win-H > Win-F > Win-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ (Chance Zone) does not occur immediately after winning, but rather, after winning the CZ, the game transitions from the advantageous section to the normal section, and then transitions back to the advantageous section to start the CZ (the CZ always starts when transitioning to the advantageous section in RT1). This eliminates the problem of not being able to produce payouts when winning the AT (Attack Time) from the CZ because there are few remaining games in the advantageous section. This is particularly effective for specifications with a low net increase in coins (expected number of coins to be acquired per game, also called the slope value). For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins that can be acquired in the advantageous section is approximately 2400, so 1200 games are needed to acquire 2400 coins. However, the AT is not always played in the advantageous section, and various game states such as the normal state and CZ mentioned above are transitioned, so when the AT starts, there are often few remaining games in the advantageous section (for example, 500 games). In this case, even after 500 games, the net increase in coins is 2, so the game ends with an acquisition of only about 1000 coins, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations of winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous period once a CZ (Chance Zone) is won, and then starting a new CZ when transitioning to a new advantageous period, even if the CZ consists of 100 spins, the advantageous period still allows for 1400 spins, creating the expectation for the user to win 2400 coins.

Furthermore, the probability of winning a CZ (Chance Zone) from the second time onward within the same advantageous period may be varied according to the value of the number of coins acquired since the start of the advantageous period (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started at the start of the advantageous period transition and an AT (Attack Time) is won, the probability of winning a CZ within the remaining advantageous period after the AT ends may be varied depending on whether 50 coins or 1000 coins were acquired during the AT. In this case, the probability of winning a CZ after acquiring 50 coins may be higher or lower than the probability of winning a CZ after acquiring 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a Chance Zone (CZ) after acquiring 50 coins is higher than the probability after acquiring 1000 coins, it becomes easier to grant the next CZ to users who haven't acquired many coins during the AT (Attack Time), thus maintaining a sense of anticipation while playing.

If the probability of winning a Chance Zone (CZ) after acquiring 50 coins is lower than the probability after acquiring 1000 coins, then even if the probability of winning a CZ is high, the remaining advantageous period after acquiring 1000 coins is short (close to the conditions for ending the advantageous period, which are 1500 spins or 2400 coins acquired). Therefore, in terms of payout design, this does not significantly increase the gambling instinct, and it can create a new sense of anticipation for the user.

If a player wins a Chance Zone (CZ), a celebratory animation will be displayed, showing text such as "Success" or "Victory," during the game in which the CZ was won, or after a predetermined number of games (which can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game machine). This allows the user to understand that some kind of benefit has been granted, making it possible to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onward, a message indicating "CZ Preparation in Progress" will be displayed on the LCD screen or through the lighting of lights, creating a sense of anticipation for the CZ in the user. "CZ Preparation in Progress" corresponds to the state from the end of the advantageous period when the CZ was won in an advantageous period, until the next advantageous period is entered in the normal period. Internally, "CZ Preparation in Progress" is a normal period, so it is a disadvantageous state for the user as no AT (Attack Time) lottery or AT bonus is performed. However, by lowering the payout rate during CZ Preparation in Progress compared to the AT state, payouts can be allocated to AT, creating fluctuations in payouts. In addition, because the anticipation for the CZ is created during CZ Preparation in Progress, the user is less likely to feel that they have lost out even if the payout rate is lowered.

Furthermore, while the advantageous period ends in the game immediately following a CZ win, it is also possible to have a predetermined number of games played between the CZ win and the end of the advantageous period. In this case, the CZ win is not announced during the game in which it occurs, and the outcome is indicated by the game's animations for a predetermined number of games (so-called premonition or continuous animations). Then, a celebratory animation is performed at the timing of the predetermined number of games, and the game enters the CZ preparation phase from the next game. This is because the advantageous period lamp is lit during the advantageous period, and turns off when the advantageous period ends. Therefore, the animation prevents the player from knowing whether a CZ has been won based on the lamp's illumination pattern between the CZ win and the announcement of the CZ win. It is also possible to transition from the advantageous period to the normal period during CZ preparation. In this case, since the game has already announced that CZ preparation is underway, the outcome cannot be known in advance based on the lamp's illumination pattern during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, the CZ preparation phase does not necessarily have to be a normal phase; it may be set as an advantageous phase. Even in this case, the proportion of times the CZ preparation phase is performed in a normal phase is relatively higher than the proportion of times it is performed in an advantageous phase. The condition for performing the CZ preparation phase in an advantageous phase is that the remaining number of plays in the advantageous phase must be at least a predetermined number (e.g., 1000 plays). This configuration ensures that the CZ preparation phase is performed only when there is ample remaining plays in the advantageous phase. Therefore, even if the CZ is performed after the preparation phase, and the AT is triggered as a result, a sufficient sense of payout can be created. Also, because the normal phase is not used during the CZ preparation phase, it is possible to create a surprise by starting the AT immediately after the CZ preparation phase (since the AT information is initialized at the end of the advantageous phase, if the normal phase is used during the CZ preparation phase, the CZ will be performed at the start of the advantageous phase, and the AT cannot be started).

Furthermore, when the CZ preparation phase is executed during the aforementioned advantageous period, it is possible to determine by lottery whether or not to grant AT (Attack Time) when any of the winning combinations from D to H are achieved during the CZ preparation phase. In this case, the order of rare combinations that are likely to result in an AT win through the AT lottery may be the same as the order of rare combinations that are likely to result in a CZ win, or it may be partially different, such as winning combination E > winning combination G > winning combination F > winning combination H > winning combination D. By configuring it in this way, even during the CZ preparation phase, the user can be made to anticipate winning a rare combination.

Furthermore, to prevent users who hit a rare role but did not win an AT (Attack Time) from losing their motivation to play, a different type of reward may be given. For example, such a reward could be the display of a QR code readable by the user's terminal, or a setting-indicating animation that allows the user to determine the setting value. This reward may be more likely to be given when the number of games played in the advantageous period is close to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 1500 times), or when the number of CZ (Chance Zone) rounds reaches a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The process related to setting changes in this embodiment will be described below.

When the setting change device is activated, the aforementioned RAM initialization process is performed at the timing of the device's activation and when the setting values are confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is RT1, the RT1 information will be initialized after the RAM initialization process, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will be non-RT. Similarly, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is in a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB), the Type 1 BB information will be initialized after the RAM initialization process, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will be non-RT.

Furthermore, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone information will be initialized during the RAM initialization process, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will become the normal zone. In other words, while the game state during the advantageous zone can be the normal state, CZ (Chance Zone), or AT (Attack Time), regardless of the state, the game will transition to the normal zone after the RAM initialization process is performed.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, gameplay begins in a non-RT (Replay Time) and normal section. However, in this embodiment, the system is designed to start the CZ (Chance Zone) when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section. Therefore, after a setting change, the system is in an advantageous state (a state where the CZ can be started by transitioning to the advantageous section without having to play in order to win the CZ).

By configuring the system in this way, the customer is in a favorable position after the settings are changed, which motivates them to visit the store from the morning and increases the effectiveness of attracting customers.

Furthermore, if it becomes possible to set an overly advantageous state after changing the settings (a state where the game transitions to the Chance Zone after only a few plays), there is a risk of excessively stimulating gambling tendencies (the so-called "morning bonus"). Therefore, it is conceivable to change the content of the Chance Zone depending on the circumstances when transitioning to the advantageous period.

In this case, if the RT state for the next game after the transition to the advantageous section is determined to be RT1, the CZ will start as this is the basic game flow. However, if the RT state for the next game after the transition to the advantageous section is determined to be non-RT, the CZ will not start as it is assumed that the settings have been changed. The game that determines a transition to the advantageous period is when any of the following are won: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K.

Furthermore, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, and Win-K are all considered to be a combination of one type of Big Bonus, so the RT state for the next game after a win will be RT1 and the CZ will start, but Win-A1, Winning combinations A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, and C6 do not overlap with a single-type Big Bonus (BB). Therefore, the next game after winning these combinations is not RT (Replay Time), and the Chance Zone (CZ) will not begin.

This configuration allows for transitions to a favorable period during non-RT (Replay Time) phases, thus suppressing the morning-related specification where the game transitions to a CZ (Chance Zone) after only a few plays following a setting change, thereby reducing the element of chance (gambling addiction).

Furthermore, it is conceivable to reduce the element of chance by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous section by referring to the RT state of the next game after the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. In this case, the advantageous section that is entered during non-RT (non-internal Type 1 BB) will not perform AT, while the advantageous section that is entered during RT1 (internal Type 1 BB) may perform AT. With such a configuration, if the advantageous section is entered during non-RT after a setting change, no payout will be obtained because AT will not be performed, thus reducing the element of chance. The condition for ending the advantageous section in this case may be until the above-mentioned CZ is hit, or it may be after a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games) have been played.

Furthermore, while the transition to the Chance Zone (CZ) is controlled by referring to the RT (Replay Time) state of the next game after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the transition to the CZ may also be controlled by referring to the activated condition device of the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery was won. In this case, if the entry-A1 is won during a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) in the normal section, the system will control the CZ to start at the beginning of the advantageous section based on the activation of the condition devices for both the Type 1 BB and the entry-A1. Also, if the entry-A1 is won during a non-internal Type 1 BB in the normal section, the system will control the CZ not to start at the beginning of the advantageous section based on the activation of the condition device for the entry-A1.

In this embodiment, only type 1 BB was included in the draw, but instead, RB or MB may also be included, or two or all of type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be included in the draw.

<Gameplay that increases the expected value of gaining gameplay at the start of the advantageous period>
This invention describes a gameplay feature that increases the expected value of gameplay at the start of the advantageous period, which is applicable to this embodiment.
Furthermore, in order to increase the expected value of gameplay at the start of the advantageous period, the system is configured so that the advantageous period does not end after a predetermined number of games have been played. In other words, the system is configured so that the advantageous period does not end based on the number of games played within the advantageous period.

After the start of the first advantageous period, if a predetermined number of pre-announcement games are played in the general state of the advantageous period, the game will transition to a predetermined AT (also called AT1) from the next game. A predetermined lottery will be held in AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won, AT1 will continue until the number of acquired points in that advantageous period exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit). When the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, the advantageous period will end and the normal period will start from the next game. After the normal period, a new advantageous period will start, and if a predetermined number of pre-announcement games are played in the general state of the advantageous period, the game will transition to AT1. If the predetermined lottery is won in AT1, AT1 will continue until the number of acquired points in that advantageous period exceeds 2400. When the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, the advantageous period will end and the normal period will start from the next game.
In other words, the acquisition of approximately 2400 game value loops until the predetermined lottery in AT1 is unsuccessful. The probability of winning the predetermined lottery can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to configure it so that the probability of winning is between 50% and 80%. Furthermore, a minimum guarantee (such as 50 AT games or 100 acquired items) is provided for the execution period of AT1, and even if the predetermined lottery in AT1 is unsuccessful, AT1 is not immediately terminated but continues until the minimum guaranteed AT is executed. The predetermined lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of AT1, or it may be configured to be executed after the minimum guaranteed AT has been executed in AT1.

Furthermore, if the predetermined lottery is unsuccessful in AT1, the game transitions to the general advantageous state without ending the advantageous period after AT1 ends. In the general advantageous state, if a predetermined role (e.g., Replay-A, Replay-J, Win-J, etc.) is won in the role lottery with a low probability (e.g., the lowest probability of 1/8192), the advantageous period ends, and the normal period begins from the next game. After the normal period, a new advantageous period begins, and after a predetermined number of pre-announcement games are played in the general advantageous state, the game transitions to AT1.

Furthermore, the general advantageous period state, which is entered after failing to win the predetermined lottery in AT1, is configured to have a lower expected value regarding AT than the general advantageous period state at the start of the first advantageous period.

Furthermore, while the system is configured to terminate the advantageous section if a predetermined role is won in the general advantageous section state that is entered after failing to win the predetermined lottery in AT1, it is not limited to this configuration. Alternatively, the system may be configured to execute a predetermined CZ (Chance Zone) to terminate the advantageous section, and terminate the advantageous section if a predetermined lottery is won during that CZ.

Furthermore, during AT1 and the predetermined number of pre-announcement games immediately after the start of the advantageous period, the system is configured so that the advantageous period does not end even if a predetermined role is won. This configuration improves the tempo of gameplay when the 2400 acquired value is looping. Also, even if a predetermined role is won in AT1 when it is confirmed that the predetermined lottery has been won and approximately 2400 game value has been acquired, AT1 will not end prematurely, thus preventing any disadvantage to the player. Similarly, even if a predetermined role is won while a predetermined animation indicating that the predetermined lottery has been won and approximately 2400 game value has been acquired is being performed, the predetermined animation will not end prematurely, thus preventing any potential distrust among the player. Note that if a predetermined role is won during AT2 (described later), the system may be configured to end the advantageous period during the game in which the predetermined role was won, or to end the advantageous period after the end of AT2.

In this way, by increasing the expected value of gameplay at the start of the advantageous period, a new gameplay style can be created where the goal is to end the advantageous period. Furthermore, by requiring a predetermined number of pre-announcement games from the start of the first advantageous period to transition to AT1, even if a predetermined lottery is won in AT1, the AT will not continue beyond 2400 acquired points, thus preventing excessive gambling.

Furthermore, even in the general advantageous zone state that is reached after failing to win the predetermined lottery in AT1, an AT lottery may be conducted, or a ceiling may be set so that the system transitions to AT after the ceiling number of games (for example, 1000 games) are played (these ATs other than AT1 are collectively referred to as AT2). However, it is preferable to configure AT2 so that the predetermined lottery is not conducted. By not conducting the predetermined lottery in ATs other than AT1 in this way, the element of chance can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the expectation of winning the predetermined lottery in AT1 can be increased.

Furthermore, even when the expected value of gameplay at the start of the advantageous period is configured to be high, if the transition to the advantageous period is decided during RT1 (within the Type 1 Big Bonus) using the method described above, the transition to AT1 will occur after a predetermined number of pre-announcement games following the start of the advantageous period. However, if the transition to the advantageous period is decided during a non-RT period, the AT will not be executed even after a predetermined number of games following the start of the advantageous period. In other words, it is preferable to configure the system so that in the first advantageous period after a setting change, the AT will not be executed after a predetermined number of games following the start of the advantageous period. By configuring the system so that the transition to the advantageous period is relatively more advantageous when decided during RT1 than when decided during a non-RT period, the specifications related to the morning bonus can be suppressed.

Furthermore, if a specific number of games (e.g., 5000 games) are played before a particular advantageous period ends, the system may be configured to transition to a predetermined state where the payout rate is set to a predetermined value (a value exceeding 100% but not exceeding 115%) from the next game until the end of the advantageous period. The specific number of games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set it to a number of games that can be played within the operating hours of the amusement parlor in one day.

Furthermore, in order to set the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state to a predetermined value, the system may be configured such that: 1) after a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100 games) in the general advantageous section state, it transitions to AT2, and AT2 always ends after a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games); or 2) multiple scenarios are provided in which the number of games to transition to AT2 and the number of wins in AT2 after the transition are predetermined so that the payout rate reaches a predetermined value, and the game proceeds according to one of these scenarios.

By structuring the game in this way, it becomes possible to create an incentive for players to continue playing even in situations that are disadvantageous to them, such as when a favorable period lasts for a long time.

Furthermore, in a predetermined state where the payout rate is set to a predetermined value, the system may be configured so that the advantageous period does not end even if a predetermined combination is won. This configuration prevents the predetermined state, where the payout rate is set to a predetermined value, from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, even when the payout rate is at a predetermined value, the system may be configured to terminate the advantageous period if a predetermined combination is won. This configuration can enhance the sense of anticipation when a predetermined combination is won.

Furthermore, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state, where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, may be designed to be the same regardless of the setting value. By doing so, a stable gameplay experience without advantage or disadvantage due to the setting value can be provided in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured such that the design value increases as the setting value increases, like this: Setting value 1 < Setting value 2 < ... < Setting value 6. By doing this, the higher the setting value, the sooner the advantageous period can be ended when the player transitions to a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value within that advantageous period. Therefore, the transition to a state with a high expected value of gameplay can be accelerated.

Furthermore, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher than the lowest setting value (setting value 1 in this embodiment) and lower than the highest setting value (setting value 6 in this embodiment). This configuration allows for continued gameplay even if a predetermined lottery is unsuccessful during AT1 in a single advantageous section, enhancing the significance of aiming for a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, while also preserving the significance of playing at the highest setting value.

<Control to handle power outages while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment>
When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no 3-bet has been made (including situations where automatic betting has not been performed), and the number of credits stored is greater than or equal to the number of credits that can be bet 3 (for example, the number of credits when no bet has been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more) (hereinafter referred to as the MAX bet-enabled state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp light up (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are off).

Furthermore, even when the front panel PS2 is open, not just when the front panel PS2 is closed, if the game has finished, no 3-bet has been made (including situations where automatic betting has not occurred), and the number of credits stored is greater than or equal to the number of credits that can be bet 3 (for example, the number of credits when no bet has been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more), then when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp light up (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are off). In addition, unless otherwise specified below, the front panel PS2 is closed when the power is turned on, but the system may be configured to behave similarly even when the front panel PS2 is open.

Furthermore, the MAX bet available state includes situations where no bets have been placed, where one bet has been placed, and where two bets have been placed. However, the MAX bet switch 18 is operated to illuminate the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp only when no bets have been placed (MAX bet available state). In the MAX bet available state where one bet has been placed, the 2-bet lamp and 3-bet lamp will illuminate in addition to the already illuminated 1-bet lamp. Similarly, in the MAX bet available state where two bets have been placed, the 3-bet lamp will illuminate in addition to the already illuminated 1-bet lamp and 2-bet lamp.

Furthermore, when the MAX bet is available, the MAX bet lamp is illuminated, informing the player that the MAX bet switch 18 is active. When the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is illuminated in the MAX bet available state (when the sensor detecting the MAX bet switch 18 switches from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp turns off. In other words, even while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor for the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp turns off.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the MAX bet process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform another MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal for the MAX bet switch is ON), it cannot be pressed, and therefore the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This prevents unintended betting from occurring, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (for example, by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18). Furthermore, even in such cases, the system accurately indicates that the MAX bet switch 18 is operational through the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the MAX bet switch 18 is operational can perform a MAX bet (perform the MAX bet process) by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 (after the sensor on the MAX bet switch 18 switches from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (after the sensor on the MAX bet switch 18 switches from OFF to ON).

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 before or after a power outage, and the MAX bet switch 18 remains pressed, illuminating the MAX bet lamp can inform the administrator that the inability to perform the MAX bet process is not due to a software malfunction.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible, a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold, rendering the gaming machine inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (i.e., the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet process is not executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is then operated (pressed) (the sensor detecting the 1 bet switch 19 switches from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process becomes possible.

This allows the system to indicate that betting is possible and suggests that the 1-bet switch 19 is operable, even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated when power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18). Furthermore, even in such cases, the game can continue because the 1-bet switch 19 is still operational.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (power recovery processing is performed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp may be lit or unlit after power is restored. If the MAX bet lamp is lit after power is restored, it indicates that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. When the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the state changes from 3 bet to 1 bet, and the difference of "2" is returned to the credits. (If the number of credits is 50 in the 3 bet state, the difference cannot be returned to the credits, so even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the state does not change to 1 bet and the 3 bet state is maintained, so the MAX bet lamp does not light up (is unlit) after power is restored.) If the MAX bet lamp is unlit after power is restored, it can indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed. Furthermore, whether the MAX bet lamp is lit or unlit after power-on, outputting a 3-bet sound (three 1-bet sounds) at power-on will indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed.

Next, when the MAX bet is enabled (no bets have been placed), if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated (pressed), the bet number will be stored as 1, and the 1-bet lamp will light up. Also, since the MAX bet switch 18 is still active, the MAX bet lamp will remain lit.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable. If the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed, and power is restored while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (i.e., the power recovery process is executed while the 1-bet switch 19 sensor remains ON), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the 1-bet process will not be executed. Also, because the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed, another 1-bet process by pressing the 1-bet switch 19 is not possible.

This prevents unintended betting from occurring, for example, when the power is restored after a power outage, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated unintentionally (e.g., with a hand placed on the 1-bet switch 19). Furthermore, even in such cases, the MAX bet lamp's illumination pattern indicates that betting is possible, suggesting that the 1-bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the MAX bet switch 18 or 1-bet switch 19 is operational can perform a 1-bet or MAX bet by releasing the 1-bet switch 19 (after the sensor for the 1-bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the 1-bet switch 19 again, or by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 (after the sensor for the MAX bet switch 18 changes from OFF to ON) while still holding down the 1-bet switch 19 (while the sensor for the 1-bet switch 19 remains ON).

Furthermore, in a situation where the machine is in a MAX bet-enabled state (no bets have been placed), and a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold, rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed and power is restored while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (power recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the 1-bet process will not be executed. However, if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process becomes executable.

This allows the system to indicate that betting is possible and suggests that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, even if, for example, the MAX bet lamp illuminates in a way that indicates that betting is possible when the power is restored after a power outage (e.g., by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 19). Furthermore, even in such cases, the game can continue because the MAX bet switch 18 is still operational.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed, and power is restored while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (power recovery processing is executed), the 1-bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp lights up after power-on, indicating that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable. When the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the state changes from 1-bet to 3-bet. Additionally, a 1-bet sound can be output when power-on to indicate that the 1-bet process has been executed.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this can be done whether the front panel PS2 is closed or already open), and the power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed with the front panel PS2 open (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, the 1 bet process becomes possible. Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this can be done whether the front panel PS2 is closed or already open), and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed with the front panel PS2 open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed. However, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released and then operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process becomes possible. In this case, even if the 1-bet switch 19 or MAX-bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1-bet or MAX-bet process is executed, the system may be configured not to output the 1-bet sound or the 3-bet sound. Furthermore, if the 1-bet switch 19 or MAX-bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1-bet or MAX-bet process is executed, resulting in a 3-bet state and the front panel PS2 being open, then when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel rotates, but the system may be configured not to output the start sound.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 is operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18). Furthermore, even in such cases, the system can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid through the illumination pattern of the MAX bet lamp.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 before or after a power outage, and the MAX bet switch 18 remains pressed, illuminating the MAX bet lamp can inform the administrator that the inability to perform the MAX bet process is not due to a software malfunction.

Furthermore, by enabling the 1-bet processing via the 1-bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to verify whether 1-bet processing is functioning correctly, in conjunction with tasks performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (e.g., setting checks or administrator menu settings). In addition, since playing with the front panel PS2 open is not normal in a gaming establishment, intentionally not outputting the 1-bet sound makes it possible to make the player aware that something is wrong.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may occur whether the front panel PS2 is closed or already open), and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed with the front panel PS2 open (power recovery processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp will not light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, and even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will not be executed. Subsequently, if the front panel PS2 is closed (closed) while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being operated (pressed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will become possible.

This prevents unintended betting from occurring, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated unintentionally (for example, if a hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is restored after a power outage. Furthermore, by not illuminating the MAX bet lamp, the player is made aware that the game cannot proceed. Additionally, closing the front panel PS2 allows the betting operation via the 1 bet switch 19 to remain active even if the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, thus minimizing disruption to the game's progress.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the MAX bet process and the 1 bet process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process becomes executable. Similarly, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (power recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet and 1 bet processes are not executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, and the 1 bet switch 19 is then operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process becomes executable.

This prevents unintended betting from occurring, even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are operated unintentionally when the power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed over the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19). Furthermore, even in such cases, the system accurately indicates that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid through the illumination pattern of the MAX bet lamp. Additionally, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 is valid even in such situations, the game can continue.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been placed (re-play is not activated), and a normal animation is being displayed (an animation state other than continuous animation or AT animation) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "menu screen displayable state"), when the sub-switch 20 is operated (pressed) (when the sensor detecting the sub-switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), the menu screen display process is executed, and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

Furthermore, if, while the menu screen is displayable, a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub-switch 20 is pressed, and power is restored while the sub-switch 20 is pressed (i.e., the power recovery process is executed while the sub-switch 20 sensor remains ON), the sub-switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed.

This allows the system to prevent unintended operation of the sub-switch 20 (e.g., placing a hand on the sub-switch 20) even when power is restored after a power outage. Instead, the sub-switch lamp's illumination pattern indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub-switch 20 is operational. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the sub-switch 20 is operational can release the sub-switch 20 (after the sub-switch 20 sensor changes from ON to OFF) and then press the sub-switch 20 again (after the sub-switch 20 sensor changes from OFF to ON), thereby triggering the menu screen display process.

Furthermore, if, while the menu screen is displayable, a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub-switch 20 is pressed, and power is restored while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed (i.e., power recovery processing is performed), the sub-switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power-on, reflecting the intention to press the sub-switch 20, and the illumination of the sub-switch lamp can indicate that the selection operation for each item on the menu screen is valid.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen is displayable, but a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold, rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and sub-switch 20 are pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub-switch 20 are pressed (power recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, the sub-switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, further MAX bet processes cannot be performed by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal for the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed, and therefore MAX bet processes cannot be performed.

This prevents unintended betting and the display of the menu screen, even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 and sub-switch 20 are operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed over the MAX bet switch 18 and sub-switch 20). Furthermore, even in such cases, the system accurately indicates that the MAX bet switch 18 is operational through the illumination pattern of the MAX bet lamp, and indicates that the menu screen can be displayed and suggests that the sub-switch 20 is operable through the illumination pattern of the sub-switch lamp.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 before or after a power outage, and the MAX bet switch 18 remains pressed, illuminating the MAX bet lamp can inform the administrator that the inability to perform the MAX bet process is not due to a software malfunction.

Furthermore, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen is displayable, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the MAX bet switch 18 and sub-switch 20 are pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub-switch 20 are pressed (power recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp may light up, the MAX bet process may not be executed, the sub-switch lamp may light up, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, reflecting the intention to press the sub-switch 20, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power-on, and the lighting of the sub-switch lamp indicates that the selection operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. In this case, the MAX bet lamp remains lit even after the menu screen is displayed, indicating that the MAX bet process is possible.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been placed (re-play is not activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as the "settlement-ready state"), pressing the settlement switch will execute the settlement process, and the medals stored in the credits will be dispensed into the tray 28.

Furthermore, if the machine is in a payout-ready state, and a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold, rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the payout switch is pressed (the sensor detecting the payout switch switches from OFF to ON), and power is restored while the payout switch is pressed (the power recovery process is executed while the payout switch sensor is ON), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the payout process will not be executed. Also, while the payout switch is pressed, the MAX bet process will not be executed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed.

This prevents unintended settlement processes from occurring, even if, for example, the settlement switch is operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed on the settlement switch). Furthermore, the MAX bet lamp's illumination pattern indicates whether there are remaining tokens in the credit, thus preventing players from leaving their seats with remaining credit.

Furthermore, in a situation where the machine is in a payout state, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the payout switch is pressed, and power is restored while the payout switch is pressed (i.e., the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the payout process will not be executed. However, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the payout switch is pressed, the MAX bet process will be executed.

This prevents unintended settlement processes from occurring, even if, for example, the settlement switch is operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed on the settlement switch). Furthermore, by ensuring the MAX bet switch remains operational, the game's progress is minimized, thus preserving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in a situation where the machine is in a payout state, a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold, rendering the gaming machine inoperable. If the payout switch is pressed, and power is restored while the switch is pressed (i.e., a power recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp may light up and the payout process may be executed.

This simplifies the process of powering on the machines before opening, for example, when the machine is powered on while the payout switch is being operated (e.g., with a hand on the payout switch). This allows for immediate payout processing after power-on, thus simplifying both the pre-opening power-on procedure and the payout process for any remaining tokens.

Furthermore, in a situation where the machine is in a payout state, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the payout switch is pressed, and power is restored while the payout switch is pressed (i.e., the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp on sub-switch 20 will light up, indicating that the operation of sub-switch 20 is valid (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of sub-switch 20).

This allows the menu screen to be displayed by operating sub-switch 20, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when the power is restored after a power outage. From the menu screen, players can view and change information useful for gameplay, such as checking game history and adjusting the volume. Furthermore, by enabling all gameplay-related operations at this time, all gameplay except settlement becomes possible. The settlement process is only used at the end of gameplay, and even without performing the settlement process, the number of inserted tokens can be adjusted, so the player will not be disadvantaged. Therefore, it is possible to perform the settlement process with minimal disruption to gameplay.

Furthermore, in a situation where the machine is in a state where MAX bet is possible and settlement is possible, and a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold, rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, and power is restored while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, and the MAX bet process and settlement process will not be executed. Also, in this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still pressed, and then the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process becomes executable. Similarly, if the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, and then the settlement switch is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, the settlement process becomes executable.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlements from being processed even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are unintentionally operated when the power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed over the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch). Furthermore, the illumination pattern of the MAX bet lamp accurately indicates whether there are tokens remaining in the credit and whether the MAX bet switch 18 is being operated effectively.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, and three bets have been placed (including cases where replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the "reel rotation enabled state"), pressing the start switch 12 will execute the reel rotation process, causing each reel to rotate. Note that the reel rotation process is executed only after the minimum game time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in a situation where the reels are spinning but a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and power is restored while the start switch 12 is pressed (i.e., the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up, but none of the reels will spin.

This prevents unintended reel rotations from occurring, even if the start switch 12 is operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (for example, if a hand is placed on the start switch 12). This prevents the player from unintentionally using the bet game tokens. Furthermore, even in such cases, the operation of the start lamp accurately indicates whether the start switch 12 has been operated.

Furthermore, in a situation where the reels are able to rotate but a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and power is restored while the start switch 12 is pressed (i.e., the power recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may rotate. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp lights up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (i.e., when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 turns off).

This prevents unintended reel rotations even if, for example, the start switch 12 is operated unintentionally when power is restored after a power outage (e.g., a hand is placed on the start switch 12). This prevents the player from unintentionally using the bet game tokens. Furthermore, by not illuminating the start lamp in such cases, the player is made aware that the reels will not rotate until the start switch 12 operation is completed. Once the start switch 12 operation is completed, the start lamp illuminates, accurately indicating that the start switch 12 operation is valid.

Furthermore, in a situation where the reels are spinning but a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and power is restored while the start switch 12 is pressed (i.e., the power outage recovery process is executed), all reels may be allowed to spin.

This means that if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage rises above the threshold and the power is automatically restored, and the power is automatically restored while the start switch 12 is being operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all reels will start spinning after the power is restored. Therefore, regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, the game can proceed (all reels will spin), reducing the effort required from the player and improving the game's tempo.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are rotating, and the stop switch 13 is enabled to accept operation (hereinafter referred to as the "reel stop-ready state"), when the stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, or right stop switch 13c changes from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stop-ready state is not limited to a situation where all reels are rotating; it can also be referred to as the reel stop-ready state even when only one reel is rotating.

When the reels can be stopped, the LEDs constituting the stop switch 13 are illuminated in a way that indicates they are active. When the reels cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LEDs constituting the stop switch 13 are illuminated in a way that indicates they are inactive.

Here, the "reel stopping impossible state" may refer to a state where the reels are rotating but the stop switch 13 is not accepting input (e.g., during rotation malfunction detection or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated), or a state where the reels are not rotating (e.g., when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated while the left reel is stopped).

Furthermore, the lighting patterns indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is active include lighting in white or in a color such as red, while the lighting patterns indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is inactive include being unlit (off) or lighting in a color different from the color indicating active status (for example, blue).

Furthermore, in a situation where the reels are in a stoppable state, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and power is restored while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (i.e., the power recovery process is executed while the sensor of the left stop switch 13a remains ON), then the stop control process will not be executed for the left reel. Also, if power is restored while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 will light up in a way that indicates it is disabled.

This prevents situations where, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation, and even if the left stop switch 13a is operated unintentionally when the power is restored after a power outage while the left reel is in a stop-ready state, the left stop switch 13a will not stop the rotation of the left reel. This prevents the player from missing out on small wins that require precise timing, thus preventing any disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, it prevents the stop switch 13 from accepting an operation in a different sequence than the correct sequence when an internal lottery result (a so-called "sequence-of-press" win) is achieved, where the symbols stop in a sequence advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in a situation where the reels are in a stop-able state, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below a threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable. If the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and power is restored while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (i.e., power recovery processing is performed), then a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is restored while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 will light up in a way that indicates it is disabled.

This means that, for example, if a power outage occurs during gameplay, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below a threshold, and then the left stop switch 13a is pressed before the operating voltage rises above the threshold and the power is automatically restored, and the power is automatically restored while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel will stop after the power is restored. Therefore, regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, the game can continue (the corresponding reel will stop), reducing the player's effort and improving the game tempo. Furthermore, when stopping a reel corresponding to a stop switch 13 pressed after power is restored, the system is configured to stop the reel even if it is accelerating, allowing the player to stop the reel closer to their intended timing. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power is restored, the system is configured not to stop any of the reels.

<Control corresponding to power outage during slip control according to this embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, and the stop switch 13 is operated, the reel rotates from the stop switch 13's input position to the stop position (so-called slip control), and when the reel rotates to the stop position, it stops. If a power outage occurs during this slip control, the slip control cannot be performed, and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

Furthermore, the stopping position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the prize winning determination process is executed based on the determined stopping position. Therefore, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, if it is determined that a small win has occurred based on the stopping position, the payout of medals based on the small win will be executed.

Therefore, in a game where a minor role is won through internal lottery processing, when the stop switch 13 is operated at a timing when the symbols corresponding to the minor role can stop, a power-off process is executed during the slide control. Even if the symbols corresponding to the minor role have not stopped on an active line after the power is restored, the winning determination process after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role has stopped, and medals are paid out according to the stopped symbol combination.

This is for the following reasons: While this prevents situations where a player fails to receive medals despite stopping the reels at the appropriate time, it also presents the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination corresponds to the medal payout. To solve this problem, in games where a minor win is achieved through internal lottery processing, a power-off process is executed during the slide control (from stop reception to the end of slide control) when the stop switch 13 is operated at the timing when the symbols corresponding to the minor win are stoppable. After power is restored, the reels are rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reels are rotated to the stop position and then stopped at the stop position, after which the medals are dispensed.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during slide control, the reels will rotate again to the intended stopping position after power is restored, allowing the player to visually confirm which combination of symbols stopped, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed during slide control, and after power is restored and the re-rotation process detects the index, the machine will still move to the planned stopping position even if identical symbols are present during the movement. If the machine were to stop at an identical symbol just before the planned stopping position, it might trigger a stop-prohibition indicator that would not normally appear during gameplay. Therefore, a judgment process to determine whether or not a stop is prohibited is necessary. However, to reduce the processing load during the re-rotation process, the machine is designed to move to the planned position.

Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed during slip control, and the re-rotation process after power restoration executes acceleration and constant-speed processing in the same way as the normal reel rotation start process, then other acceleration and constant-speed processing methods may be used. For example, the acceleration time may be shortened or lengthened, or the constant-speed rotation speed may be slower or faster. By changing the acceleration or constant-speed processing methods in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the rotation is different from the normal process.

Furthermore, if the re-rotation reaches the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed, the system will treat this as a stop operation, similar to normal rotation processing, and slip control will be activated. Once the reel reaches the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal (or a four-phase excitation signal in the case of a four-phase stepping motor) will be output to the stepping motor driving the reel, stopping the re-rotating reel.

Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed during slide control, and the re-rotation process is underway after power is restored, it is conceivable that the system could display "Re-rotating" on the LCD screen, output an audible message saying "Re-rotating," or display an error message on the error indicator to inform the player that re-rotation is occurring. This approach allows the player to recognize that the rotation is different from normal.

Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed during slide control, a flag indicating that the slide control is not complete is stored in a designated memory area. When the power is turned on, the designated memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, a re-rotation process is executed. This flag is initialized when the re-rotation process stops, so that the re-rotation process is not executed under normal power-on conditions. Note that the flag indicating that the slide control is not complete may be an error flag or a game status flag.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during slip control, the re-rotation process may be automatically executed after power is restored, or an error may occur after power is restored and be cleared by a reset switch before the re-rotation process is executed. Both of these methods apply to the re-rotation process in the subsequent embodiments.

Furthermore, if a power-off process is performed during slip control, and the rotation malfunction detection counter is updated during the restart process after power restoration, the counter may be updated during acceleration, constant speed, or constant speed. When the rotation malfunction detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 180 as described above), the acceleration process is executed again. Possible causes of rotation malfunction in this case include holding the reel by hand, motor malfunction causing step loss, or deterioration of components due to aging.

In this case, the rotation malfunction detection counter is initialized during the power-on initialization process, and the rotation malfunction detection counter is updated (counted) simultaneously with the execution of the re-rotation process. Then, after detecting the index for the first time after power-on, the value of the rotation malfunction detection counter is updated to 0, and the rotation malfunction detection counter is updated again. The reel control means then rotates the reel to the stopping position and stops it. By clearing the rotation malfunction detection counter after the index is initially detected in this way, even if the reel stops due to the power-off process at a position immediately after passing the index, and the stopping position is immediately before passing the index, the reel can be stopped to the stopping position without detecting a rotation malfunction. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two full rotations from power-on to stopping, but it is not judged as having a rotation malfunction.

While the rotation malfunction detection counter is initialized at power-on, this is not the only possible timing. The counter may also be initialized when the stop switch 13 is activated, or when the reel enters a constant speed state.

In this way, a power-off process is executed during slip control, and rotational malfunctions are detected during the restart process after power is restored. This prevents the stopping position from shifting due to step loss or other issues during restart, making it possible to stop at the intended position. Furthermore, since rotational malfunctions are not detected during normal slip control, the re-acceleration process is not executed in the event of step loss or other issues during normal slip control.

Next, if a power-off process is executed during slide control, and an error (a recoverable error) is detected during the restart process after power is restored, an error notification will be issued after the restart process is completed. The errors detected at this time include medal retention errors, medal reverse flow errors, medal passage time errors, hopper retention errors, hopper empty errors, abnormality detection errors, door open errors, harness disconnection errors, etc. Furthermore, in addition to displaying the error code on the acquired medal count display unit 27, error notifications can also be made via the LCD, a speaker, or by illuminating the upper or side display lamps or display switch lamps in a predetermined color (for example, a highly visible and conspicuous color such as red or blue). Note that error notifications may be made using only one of these error notifications, or multiple error notifications may be combined.

In this way, by issuing error notifications after the re-spin process is complete, it becomes easier for players and arcade staff to distinguish between notifications during re-spinning and notifications of errors. Furthermore, if a re-spinning notification is being issued during re-spinning, the system is configured to terminate the re-spinning notification and switch to an error notification after the re-spinning is complete. Note that no error notifications are issued during re-spinning, nor are any other notifications related to re-spinning that are not error notifications.

The error patterns during the re-rotation process described above are not limited to those mentioned. The system may detect only some errors (for example, detecting hopper congestion errors but not medal congestion errors). Furthermore, the error notification method may vary; for example, the system may notify the system via the acquired medal count display 27 after error detection, and then via the LCD or speaker when the re-rotation process is complete and the reels stop. Alternatively, the system may not notify the system via the acquired medal count display 27, the LCD, or the speaker after error detection.

Next, during the slip control process, a power-off process is executed. During the restart process after power restoration, the indicator light on the stop switch 13 is in a deactivated state, so that even if the stop switch 13 is operated, the corresponding reel will not stop.

In addition to the power-on scenario where the reels rotate after a power outage during slip control, there is also the scenario where the power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation. In the case of power restoration after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reels can be stopped, and the indicator light on the stop switch 13 indicates the effective state. Therefore, by checking the indicator light on the stop switch 13 when the reels rotate upon power-on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are undergoing re-rotation processing or normal reel rotation.

Furthermore, another situation in which the reels rotate upon power-on is the restoration of power after a power outage during a reel rotation freeze. Types of reel rotation freezes include a simulated game where temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel animation where the reels continue to rotate even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated gameplay, the indicator light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state. When power is restored after a power outage during simulated gameplay, the indicator light on the stop switch 13 becomes active. Therefore, by checking the indicator light on the stop switch 13 when the reels rotate upon power-on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are undergoing re-rotation or normal rotation.

During reel animations, the indicator light on the stop switch 13 is in a deactivated state. Furthermore, when power is restored after a power outage during a reel animation, the indicator light on the stop switch 13 becomes deactivated. Therefore, when the reels rotate upon power-on, it is impossible to determine whether a reel animation is in progress or a re-rotation process is underway based solely on the indicator light on the stop switch 13. However, this can be determined by checking the display device, such as the LCD or error indicator. Even if the indicator light on the stop switch is in a deactivated state during a reel animation, if the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the indicator lights on those other main system switches become enabled. Therefore, by checking the indicator lights on those other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether a reel animation is in progress or a re-rotation process is underway.

Furthermore, during simulated gameplay or reel animation, when the power is restored after a power outage, the reels may not rotate. In this case, since the reels do not rotate upon power restoration, it is easy to determine whether or not the re-rotation process is underway based on the reel rotation pattern.

Next, if a power-off process is executed during slip control, and another power-off process is executed during the restart process after power is restored, the system will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, then move to the planned stopping position and stop again. Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed immediately before index detection, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, and the system rotates again until the index detection timing is reached, this can also be considered as rotating until the index is detected.

In this way, even if the power is restored after a power outage during the re-rotation process, the re-rotation process can still be executed. Therefore, even in unstable situations where multiple power outages may occur, it is possible to display the stopped symbols to the player.

Here, the timing of the power-off process during slip control, and the subsequent power-off process during the re-rotation process after power restoration, can be considered as either before index detection during the re-rotation process, or after index detection during the re-rotation process.

<Pattern 1>
If a power cut-off process is performed during slip control, and another power cut-off process is performed during the restart process after power is restored, before the index is detected during the restart process, then one possible configuration is to rotate the machine until the index is detected during the second restart process after power is restored, and then rotate it to the planned stopping position and stop.

In this case, the index was not detected during the first re-rotation process, and the reference symbol position was not stored. Therefore, the second re-rotation process determines that the reference symbol position is not stored, performs another rotation to detect the index, and allows the re-rotation to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
Furthermore, if a power-off process is executed during slip control, and another power-off process is executed during the restart process after power is restored, and this occurs after the index is detected during the restart process (it is sufficient if the sensor detects the index, and this includes the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies hereafter), then a possible configuration is to rotate the machine to the planned stopping position based on the reference pattern position determined by the index detected before the power-off, and then stop.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reels can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position. Therefore, the time until gameplay can be resumed is reduced by the time it takes to detect the index.

In Pattern 2-1 described above, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stopping position and the application of the brakes (until the output of 4-phase excitation), regardless of whether the rotation had reached the stop acceptance position or not at the time of the power-off process, after power is restored, the re-rotation process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference symbol position without detecting the index again.

Thus, regardless of the stop request position received immediately before the initial power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power-on, thus simplifying the process and enabling faster program execution.

<Pattern 2-2>
Furthermore, if a power cut-off process is performed during slip control, and another power cut-off process is performed during the restart process after power is restored, and this occurs after the index is detected during the restart process, then it is conceivable that the index will be detected again after power is restored, and the machine will then rotate to the planned stopping position and stop.

In this case, considering the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and power restoration, the system will re-rotate until the index is detected again, allowing for more precise rotation to the intended stopping position.

In Pattern 2-2 described above, if a power-off process is executed between the time the index is detected during the first re-rotation process and the time the unit rotates to the planned stopping position and the brakes are applied (until the 4-phase excitation is output), regardless of whether the unit had rotated to the stop acceptance position or not at the time of the power-off process, a re-rotation process will be executed after power is restored to detect the index again, move the symbol to the planned stopping position, and then stop it.

Thus, regardless of the stop request position received immediately before the initial power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power-on, thus simplifying the process and enabling faster program execution.

<Pattern 2-3>
Furthermore, if a power cut-off process is performed during slide control, and another power cut-off process is performed during the re-rotation process after power is restored, and the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the machine has not yet rotated to the stop acceptance position, then after power is restored, the machine will perform a re-rotation process or stop control based on the stored reference symbol position without detecting the index again. Alternatively, if a power cut-off process is performed during slide control, and another power cut-off process is performed during the re-rotation process after power is restored, and the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the machine has already rotated to the stop acceptance position, then after power is restored, the machine will perform a re-rotation process to detect the index again and move the symbol to the planned stop position before stopping.

In this way, the stop reception position received immediately before the initial power outage allows for precise control of the system after the power is restored, enabling appropriate processing according to the circumstances under which the power outage occurred.

<Description of prize-winning animations, settlement animations, and input animations applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the prize-winning animation, the settlement animation, and the coin-in animation applicable to this embodiment will be explained.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, the aim is to prevent misunderstandings such as settlement not being performed correctly or betting not being performed correctly, and to ensure that the player understands that the gaming machine is functioning normally, by simultaneously outputting both the winning animation associated with the payout process of game tokens based on winning minor roles such as sequence-based wins, and the settlement animation associated with settlement processing and the insertion animation associated with betting operations.

The following describes the configurations related to the prize-winning animation, settlement animation, and input animation applicable to this embodiment.

<Main control means>
The main processing performed by the main control means is as described in this embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in this embodiment will be explained below.

<Processing when inserting game tokens>
If game tokens are available for insertion, when game tokens are inserted, if the number of tokens to bet is not set to the maximum limit, the machine will set a bet (also called a bet) for the number of tokens inserted. If the number of tokens to bet is set to the maximum limit, the number of tokens inserted will be added to the credit. Also, if the number of tokens to bet is not set to the maximum limit and there are enough tokens available for betting in the credit, the machine will set the bet according to the operation of the bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, "game tokens being inserted" means that the game tokens placed in the token slot 17 pass through the token selector 34 normally.
Furthermore, if game tokens are set as bets or stored in credits, and before starting the game (after setting the required number of tokens to bet but before operating the start lever), the settlement process can be completed by operating the settlement switch.
Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the performance control means) when a game medal is inserted, and transmits a storage insertion command to the sub-control means corresponding to the set number of medals to bet when the bet switch is operated. When medals are stored (added) to the credit, the main control means transmits a storage quantity command to the sub-control means indicating the current number of stored medals. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion effects such as outputting the sound of a game medal being inserted.

<Prize Winning Processing (Payout Processing)>
The prize winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is the process of paying out a predetermined number of game tokens according to the winning combination (the combination of symbols displayed) when the prize winning determination process determines that a winning combination has been achieved. Paying out game tokens here means adding the tokens to the credits if the credits have not reached their upper limit, and if the credits have reached their upper limit, paying out game tokens from the hopper 44. The main control means sends a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a prize winning (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending a payout based on a prize winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute prize winning effects such as outputting a sound of game tokens being paid out and executing a backlight effect (also referred to as the BL effect). The payout start command includes information on the number of game tokens to be paid out, and both the payout start command and the payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when the player loses or wins a prize in a re-spin). When the player loses or wins a prize in a re-spin, the information on the number of game tokens to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Settlement Process>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, the system executes a settlement process, dispensing (paying out) a number of game tokens from the hopper 44 to the player that correspond to the set bet amount and the number of credits stored. When the settlement process begins, the main control means sends a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process ends, the main control means sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects, such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Sub-control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game. These effects are executed based on the results of the role lottery (results of the internal lottery), and during AT (Attack Time), push-button navigation effects are executed, as well as insertion effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc.

<Introduction>
This is an effect that is executed when a game token is inserted or the bet switch is operated, and it outputs an insertion sound based on the token insertion command and the storage/insertion command transmitted from the main control means. The main control means sets one of the following as the storage/insertion command, depending on the number of tokens set to bet: storage/insertion command (1 token), storage/insertion command (2 tokens), or storage/insertion command (3 tokens), and transmits the set storage/insertion command to the sub-control means. When storage/insertion command (1 token) is received, insertion sound A is output once to indicate that 1 token has been bet (for example, an "da" sound is output), notifying the player that 1 token has been bet. When storage/insertion command (3 tokens) is received, insertion sound A is output three times to notify the player that 3 tokens have been bet. When a token insertion command is received, if the inserted game token is set to bet, insertion sound A is output once, and if it is stored, insertion sound B is output once to indicate that 1 token has been stored (for example, an "ji" sound is output), notifying the player that it has been bet or stored.
Furthermore, when a storage/insertion command (3 coins) is received, instead of outputting insertion sound A three times, insertion sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output, or the same sound may be output for both when a bet is set and when coins are stored (for example, outputting insertion sound A in all states). In addition, different sounds (insertion sound D) may be output for normal play (not during AT) and during AT.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game tokens are dispensed. It is performed based on the dispense start command and dispense end command, and includes the output of a dispense sound indicating that game tokens are being dispensed, as well as a backlight effect.

<Output of dispensing sound>
During the process of dispensing game tokens, there are two distinct sounds for dispensing tokens: Dispensing Sound A and Dispensing Sound B. Dispensing Sound A is the sound that is output when a button sequence wins during normal play (not in AT mode), and as a result of operating in the correct sequence, the correct symbol combination stops and a favorable payout is made. Dispensing Sound B is the sound that is output when a button sequence wins during AT mode, and as a result of operating in the correct sequence, the correct symbol combination stops and a favorable payout is made. If the correct sequence is not operated, an incorrect symbol combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may occur, in which case no payout sound is output. Dispensing Sound A starts when the payout start command is received and repeatedly outputs a first sound (for example, a "zu" sound) until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, it repeats outputting the first sound for a specific period of time (for example, 1 second) and then ends. Payout sound A outputs sound for a first payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the first specified time mentioned above to the actual payout period) which is longer than the actual payout period (the period during which the payout process is performed), making it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by outputting the payout sound for a first payout sound period which is longer than the actual payout period, players will perceive that a payout is taking place during the period in which the payout sound is being output, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. As a result, if effects or other animations corresponding to the results of an internal lottery are being performed for a certain period of time, they are more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

Payout sound B is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly outputs a second sound (for example, a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received. After receiving the payout end command, it repeats outputting the second sound for a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds) and then ends. In other words, payout sound B outputs sound for a second payout sound period that is longer than the actual payout period (the actual payout period plus the second specific time mentioned above), and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of payout sound A. In this way, by outputting the payout sound B for a longer period than payout sound A, it is possible to make players perceive that more game tokens have been awarded. Furthermore, outputting payout sound B, which is different from payout sound A, during AT (Attack Time) makes it easier to recognize that a more advantageous state than usual is being observed.
In addition, while the payout sound was output from the time the payout end command was received until the first or second specified time had elapsed, it is also possible to output the payout sound once the payout start command is received, without being triggered by the payout end command, for a duration equal to the time it takes from the start to the end of payout (whichever is longer, the credit addition or the payout of game tokens) plus the first or second specified time. Furthermore, although the payout sound is different for normal payout sound A and payout sound B during AT, it is also possible to output the same payout sound.

<Backlight effect>
There are two distinct backlight effects: Backlight Effect A and Backlight Effect B. Backlight Effect A is displayed when a button sequence wins during normal play (outside of AT), and the correct button sequence is followed, resulting in a correct symbol combination and a favorable payout. Backlight Effect B is displayed when a button sequence wins during AT, and the correct button sequence is followed, resulting in a correct symbol combination and a favorable payout. If the correct button sequence is not followed, an incorrect symbol combination may be followed, in which case the backlight effect will not be displayed. Backlight Effect A starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly turns on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After receiving the payout end command, it continues to turn on and off in a first pattern for a specific time (e.g., 1 second) and then ends. Backlight effect A is executed for a first backlight effect period that is longer than the actual payout period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time mentioned above to the actual payout period), making it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect A for a first backlight effect period that is longer than the payout period, players will perceive that a payout is taking place during the period when backlight effect A is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. In addition, if an effect corresponding to the result of an internal lottery is being performed for a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

Backlight effect B starts when the payout start command is received and repeatedly turns the backlight on and off in a second pattern until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, it continues to repeat the second pattern of turning the backlight on and off for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) before ending. In other words, backlight effect B repeatedly turns the backlight on and off for a second backlight effect period that is longer than the actual payout period (the actual payout period plus the second specific time mentioned above), and this second backlight effect period is longer than the first backlight effect period. Thus, by executing the backlight effect B for a longer period than backlight effect A, it is possible to create the impression that more game tokens have been awarded. Furthermore, executing a different backlight effect B than backlight effect A during AT (Attack Time) makes it easier to recognize that a more advantageous state than usual is being observed.

Furthermore, while the backlight effect was executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first or second specific time elapsed, it is also possible to execute the backlight effect upon receiving the payout start command for a duration equal to the time taken from the start to the end of payout (whichever is longer, the credit addition or the payout of game tokens) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, although the backlight effect is different during normal play and during AT, it is also possible to execute the same backlight effect. In addition, although the backlight is set to repeatedly turn on and off in a certain pattern, it is also possible to define and output a series of on and off patterns from the start to the end of the backlight effect. Furthermore, the "first backlight effect period" of backlight effect A and the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A are both the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the time when actual payouts are being made, and are both the same period, but these "first backlight effect period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods from each other. The same applies to the relationship between the "second backup light effect period" of backup light effect B and the "second payout sound period" of payout sound B. In short, the "first payout sound period" and "second payout sound period" of payout sounds A and B, and the "first backup light effect period" and "second backup light effect period" of backup light effects A and B, are all longer than the actual payout period, and the relationships "first payout sound period" < "second payout sound period" and "first backup light effect period" < "second backup light effect period" are met. As long as these periods are set appropriately, these durations can be adjusted as needed.

<Settlement Presentation>
This is an animation performed when game tokens are settled. It is executed based on a settlement start command and a settlement end command, and includes the output of a settlement sound (settlement animation) indicating that game tokens are being dispensed, and an audio message indicating that the settlement is complete. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received and repeatedly outputs a sound different from the payout sound (for example, a "do" sound) until the payout end command is received. After receiving the payout end command, it outputs an audio message indicating that the settlement is complete, such as "Settlement complete," for a third specific period (for example, 5 seconds), and then ends. In other words, the settlement animation outputs sound for a predetermined settlement animation period (a period obtained by adding the above third specific time to the actual payout period) which is longer than the actual payout period (the period during which the settlement process is performed).

The following explains the various effects that are executed according to the progress of the game, referring to Figures 22 to 26. Figure 22 is a time chart when no MAX bet operation is performed after the payout process is completed, Figure 23 is a time chart when no MAX bet operation is performed after the payout process is completed, Figure 24 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process is completed, Figure 25 is a time chart when no game tokens are inserted after the settlement process is completed, and Figure 26 is a time chart when game tokens are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that in Figures 22 to 26, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is indicated in parentheses. Specifically, for payout process/settlement process/BL effect/settlement effect, ON indicates that it is being executed, OFF indicates that it is not being executed, changing from OFF to ON means that the process has started, and changing from ON to OFF means that it has ended. The payout/insertion sound is indicated as ON (output) and OFF (no output). The MAX bet lamp/coin insertion ready lamp is indicated as ON (illuminated) and OFF (off). The MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation is indicated as ON (operated) and OFF (not operated). Coin insertion is indicated as follows: ON (coin inserted has passed through the coin selector 34 - the insertion sensor on the coin selector 34 detects the coin) and OFF (no coin inserted).

<If you do not perform the MAX bet operation using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is complete>
As shown in Figure 22, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) and backlight effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) based on the received payout start command. At time t1, the main control means finishes the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting payout sound A and backlight effect A as a prize winning effect for the duration of period T1 (first specific time). After the payout process is finished at time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game tokens. At time t2, the main control means lights up the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that it is now possible to insert game tokens. The MAX bet lamp remains lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. At time t5, since a period T1 has elapsed since time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of the payout sound A and the backlight effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the first payout sound period and the first backlight effect period. As described above, even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the backlight effect A while lighting the MAX bet lamp, smooth control is possible. By continuing the output of the payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and they are also made aware that betting settings can be adjusted by the MAX bet operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<If the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process is complete>
As shown in Figure 23, up to time t2, the situation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not used after the payout process is completed, and at time t3, the MAX bet switch is used. As a result of the MAX bet switch being operated, the main control means turns off the MAX bet lamp, the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and outputs the input sound A (referred to as input sound in the figure, the same applies hereafter) three times as an input effect between time t3 and time t4 (during the T2 period). Even when various situations are combined, such as outputting payout sound A and input sound A at times after time t3, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, as well as that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been made, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t3, the output of payout sound A continues, but by ending the backlight effect A, the player is made to recognize that a payout has occurred through sound, while also being able to recognize that the bet setting has been made visually. Although Figure 23 explains the operation using the MAX bet switch, the same sound is output when using the 1 bet switch or when inserting tokens.

<If you perform a settlement operation using the settlement button after the payout process is complete>
As shown in Figure 24, up to time t2, the procedure is the same as when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process is complete. At time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the MAX bet switch. At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and turns off the MAX bet lamp. The sub-control means then terminates the output of the payout sound A and the backlight effect A at time t3 without waiting for the T1 period to elapse. After that, it starts outputting the settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the settlement start command. At time t6, the main control means finishes the settlement process and sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means outputs an audio message indicating that the settlement has been completed, instead of outputting the settlement sound, for the duration of the T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process begins, if the output of payout sound A and the settlement sound occur simultaneously, it can confuse the player. Therefore, by ending the output of payout sound A and the backlight effect A, which were scheduled to continue during the T1 period, when the settlement process begins, the player can be accurately made aware that a settlement process, different from the payout process, is taking place.

<If you do not insert game tokens after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in Figure 25, at time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the backlight effect is not executed (output) during settlement, so that the payout process and the settlement process can be made to look like different processes. At time t9, the main control means finishes the settlement process and sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means outputs an audio message indicating that the settlement has finished, instead of outputting a settlement sound, for the duration of T3. After the settlement process is finished at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game tokens. At time t10, the main control means lights up the token insertion lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game tokens. After that, no tokens are inserted, so the lamp remains lit. At time T13, since a period of T3 has elapsed from time t9, the sub-control means terminates the output of the voice message indicating that settlement is complete. As described above, the settlement animation is being executed from time t10 onwards, but the machine is in a state where medals can be inserted.

<If you insert game tokens after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in Figure 26, up to the timing t10, the situation is the same as when no game tokens are inserted after the settlement process is completed. At the timing t11, the main control means receives the game tokens, sets a bet of one token, and sends a token insertion command to the sub-control means. Based on receiving the token insertion command, the sub-control means outputs token insertion sound A once as an insertion effect, and this output occurs from the timing t11 to the timing t12. Even when various situations are combined, such as outputting an audio message indicating that the settlement process is complete while simultaneously outputting token insertion sound A, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that the settlement process is complete, that tokens have been inserted, and that a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. In addition, Figures 22 to 26 were explained using an example where the payout sound is designated as payout sound A and the BL effect is designated as backlight effect A. However, in Figures 22 to 26, the payout sound may be designated as payout sound B and the BL effect as backlight effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figures 22 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effects as described above will be produced.

<Change in behavior>
While the configuration described above involves repeatedly outputting the same sound during the dispensing and settlement processes until they are completed, in addition to the commands mentioned above, the main control means may also send a command to the sub-control means each time a dispensing occurs, indicating that one coin has been dispensed, or a command that identifies the remaining number of coins to be dispensed. The sub-control means may then output a dispensing sound or settlement sound each time a coin is dispensed based on the receipt of these commands from the main control means.
Furthermore, while the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it could also be the same. Using the same sound would reduce the amount of sound data, thus reducing data capacity. If the sounds are the same, the presence or absence of the backlight effect can be used to distinguish between the payout process and the settlement process, allowing players to recognize that the settlement process is being performed appropriately, even if the settlement process is performed immediately after the payout process.
Additionally, the settlement sound can be the same as the error sound. In this case, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data size.
Furthermore, while the AT (Automatic Transmission) mode is configured to output payout sound B, in addition to outputting payout sound B from the start of the payout process, it is also possible to output voices indicating the correct button sequence, such as "Got it!" or "Yes!", for a shorter period than the time it takes for the payout process to finish and the second specific time (2 seconds) to elapse. Outputting voices indicating the correct button sequence allows the player to recognize that they have operated the stop switch correctly, and outputting the payout sound for a longer period than the voices indicating the correct button sequence allows the player to recognize that the game tokens have been dispensed appropriately.
Furthermore, although the main control means is used to turn the MAX bed lamp on and off, the main control means may also transmit to the sub-control means whether or not the MAX bed switch is operational, and the sub-control means may then turn the lamp on or off.

Furthermore, while it was explained that an insertion sound is output as part of the insertion effect, in addition to outputting an insertion sound, an image indicating insertion may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for effect may be used to notify that an item has been inserted.
Furthermore, while the winning animation is described as outputting a payout sound and performing a backlight animation, it is also possible to display an image indicating a win on the display device 32 (for example, displaying "GET") or to notify that a win has been achieved using the LED lamps for the animation. In that case, when the insertion animation is performed, the display on the display device 32 as part of the winning animation may be terminated, or the notification on the LED lamps may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification on the LED lamps as part of the insertion animation may not be performed at all.
Furthermore, while the settlement animation is described as outputting a settlement sound and an audio message indicating that settlement is complete, it is also possible to display an image on the display device 32 indicating that settlement processing is underway (for example, displaying "Settlement in Progress") or to use LED lamps for animation to notify that settlement is in progress. In that case, when executing the coin insertion animation, the display on the display device 32 or the notification on the LED lamps as part of the settlement animation may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification on the LED lamps as part of the coin insertion animation may not be performed at all.
Furthermore, while it was stated that a prize winning animation would be performed for the sequence of button presses, it is also possible to perform a prize winning animation for other minor roles (such as the watermelon role, or the bell and cherry roles which do not depend on the button press order). For other minor roles, a different payout sound or a different backlight animation would be produced compared to the sequence of button presses, making it easy for players to recognize that a role other than the sequence of button presses has been won.
Furthermore, the time and duration in this embodiment are merely examples and can be modified in various ways.

<Explanation of errors and prize-winning animations related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment and the prize winning animation will be explained.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, the objective is to ensure that the player is aware of the game's results and the effects before a hopper empty error occurs, even if such an error occurs during the winning animation accompanying the start of payout processing or during the animation after the reels stop.

The following describes the configuration related to errors and prize-winning animations concerning the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment.

<Main control means>
The main processing performed by the main control means is as described in this embodiment and in the descriptions of the prize winning animation, settlement animation, and input animation applicable to this embodiment, but the details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Prize Winning Processing (Payout Processing)>
The payout process is the process of paying out a predetermined number of game tokens according to the winning combination (the combination of symbols displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a winning combination has been achieved. Paying out game tokens here means adding them to the credits if the credit storage limit has not been reached, and if the credit storage limit has been reached, paying out game tokens from the hopper 44. In order to pay out game tokens from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and by rotating the turntable, it dispenses game tokens one by one, and when the payout sensor detects the game token for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3ms and 200ms), it determines that one game token has been paid out. Furthermore, the main control means sends a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when it starts a payout based on a win (whether it is an addition of credits or a payout from the hopper 44), and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means when it ends. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute win animations such as displaying the number of payouts and the cumulative difference in tokens. The payout start command is composed of information on the number of game tokens to be paid out, and both the payout start command and the payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win during replay). When there is a loss or a win during replay, the information on the number of game tokens to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Error related to hopper 44>
The following errors related to the hopper 44 can be detected: hopper jamming error, hopper empty error, and abnormality detection error. The hopper jamming error occurs when it is determined that game tokens are jammed in the payout opening of the hopper 44 when the tokens are being dispensed. The hopper empty error occurs when it is determined that the hopper is empty of game tokens. The abnormality detection error occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor of the hopper 44.
When the main control means detects an error and issues an error notification, it sends an error notification start command containing error type information to the sub-control means, and sends an error recovery command when the error is cleared. Based on the error notification start command, the sub-control means displays error information corresponding to the detected error type (error screen) on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, it terminates the display of the error screen and returns to the display before the error occurred.
Furthermore, the main control means sends an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected when it detects an abnormality detection error, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has occurred based on the error detection command.

<Hopper congestion error>
When dispensing game tokens from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the game token dispensing operation, which involves rotating the turntable. If the dispensing sensor continues to detect a jam for a certain period of time (201 ms) or longer, it is determined that the game tokens are jammed, and a hopper jam error is set.
<Hopper Empty Error>
When dispensing game tokens from the hopper 44, if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and the game token dispensing operation is performed to rotate the turntable, but no game tokens are detected by the dispensing sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), the hopper 44 is determined to be empty of game tokens, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Anomaly detection error>
If the payout sensor detects a situation where the game tokens are not being dispensed for a certain period of time (3ms) or longer, it will be determined that an abnormal input has occurred to the payout sensor, and an abnormal detection error will be set. The error will be displayed when no game is being played (waiting for game tokens to be inserted, waiting for the start lever to be accepted).

<Sub-control means>
Depending on the progress of the game, various effects can be executed, such as executing effects based on the results of the role lottery (results of the internal lottery), executing error notifications, executing push-button navigation effects during AT, executing winning effects, displaying the result screen, and executing result notification effects.

<Winning Performance>
This is a visual effect that is performed when game tokens are dispensed, and includes an acquisition display effect that shows a predetermined number of game tokens being dispensed, and an accumulation display effect that shows the total number of game tokens the player has acquired has reached a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance>
The acquisition display animation is performed when a button sequence wins during AT (Attack Time), and the correct button sequence is followed, resulting in a correct symbol combination and a favorable payout. The acquisition display animation may either display "GET" without specifying the number of game tokens to be paid out, or it may display "12 GET" to specify that 12 game tokens will be paid out. In cases where a button sequence wins during AT, but the correct button sequence is not followed, resulting in an incorrect symbol combination and a disadvantageous payout (such as a payout of 1 token, which is fewer than the correct number of game tokens), the acquisition display animation will not be performed.
The winning display animation starts when the payout start command is received and runs for a predetermined winning display animation period (1 second), which is shorter than the actual payout period (the period during which the payout process is being carried out). Therefore, it runs even if not all of the game tokens that will actually be dispensed to the player have been dispensed. This is to prevent the animation from being canceled when the next game starts or from being confused with the result of the next game if it were to run after all the tokens have been dispensed. Also, by running the winning display animation even if not all of the game tokens have been dispensed, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that they will receive a payout) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display animation is an animation that is executed when the cumulative number of game tokens acquired by the player during AT (also called the total number of game tokens) exceeds a predetermined number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000 tokens) for the first time. Specifically, during one AT, the cumulative number of tokens acquired from the start of AT is counted, and the cumulative display animation is executed (started) when it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed 500 tokens due to the payout of game tokens. After that, the cumulative display animation will not be executed even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and then exceeds 500 again. The cumulative display animation will show a message such as "500 tokens GET" depending on the predetermined number.
The cumulative display animation is initiated when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed a predetermined number as a result of that payout. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display animation period (1 second), which is shorter than the actual payout period (the period during which the payout process is being carried out). Similar to the acquired tokens display animation, it is executed even if the number of tokens actually dispensed to the player does not exceed the predetermined number. This is to prevent inconsistencies in the timing of the cumulative display animation execution, which could lead to the animation being canceled when the next game starts or being confused with the result of the next game. Furthermore, executing the cumulative display animation even if the predetermined number has not been exceeded allows the player to be aware of the result of the game (exceeding the predetermined number) in advance.
Note that while the conditions for both the acquisition display and the cumulative display may be met in a single game, in this embodiment, in games where the cumulative display display is possible, the acquisition display display will generally not be executed, and only the cumulative display display will be executed. However, cases where the acquisition display display is executed, contrary to the general rule, will be described later.

<Displaying the results screen>
The results screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and it displays the total number of game tokens acquired during the AT, the number of games played to indicate the duration of the AT, etc. When the results screen is displayed, a warning message (a message to prevent excessive gambling) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the command to stop all reels is received), the results screen is displayed and continues to be displayed until the next game starts. Note that while the results screen is displayed during the final game, only the acquisition display animation can be executed, and even if any predetermined number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display animation will not be executed. For example, if a player wins a button-pressing combination, and as a result of operating in the correct order, the correct symbol combination stops, a favorable payout is made, and the number exceeds the predetermined number of 500 tokens, the cumulative display animation will be executed if it is not the final game, but if it is the final game, the results screen is displayed, so the cumulative display animation is not executed and the acquisition display animation is executed. This is because the total number of tokens earned during AT is displayed on the results screen, and if the cumulative display animation is also executed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, which would confuse the player.

<Result Announcement Presentation>
The result notification sequence is a sequence that informs the player that a favorable outcome has been achieved, and is performed in the final game of a continuous sequence. Specifically, it is a sequence that informs the player whether or not a favorable outcome has been achieved, such as winning a bonus, winning an increase in the remaining number of games in AT, or winning a special zone that increases the chances of an increase in additional games. As an example, it is used to inform the player whether or not a favorable outcome has been achieved based on the result of a battle sequence. If a favorable outcome is achieved, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if a favorable outcome is not achieved, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In a battle sequence, a screen showing the ally character and the enemy character facing each other is displayed when the lever is operated, and after all the reels have stopped (due to the reception of the all-reels stop command), the ally character and the enemy character compete, and after a certain amount of time has passed and the sequence branches, an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed. The timing for branching the presentation is 2.7 seconds after the start of payout processing, and the result notification presentation ends when an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed, which is 3 seconds after the start of payout processing. As a result, the result notification presentation ends before a hopper empty error occurs (is detected) and the error screen is displayed, allowing the player to confirm whether or not they have a favorable result without the occurrence of an error. Note that the command to stop all reels and the command to start payout are sent at approximately the same time, so the start of payout processing described above can be replaced with the time after all reels have stopped.

The following explains the various effects that are performed according to the progress of the game, referring to Figures 27 to 32. Figure 27 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Figure 28 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Figure 29 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper stagnation error occurs), Figure 30 is an example of the display screen when payout is performed normally, Figure 31 is an example of the display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Figure 32 is an example of the display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper stagnation error occurs).
Note that in Figures 27 to 29, ON and OFF are used for explanatory purposes, but the corresponding processing and display status is indicated in parentheses. Specifically, for payout processing, ON indicates that it is running, and OFF indicates that it is not running. Changing from OFF to ON means that the processing has started, and changing from ON to OFF means that it has ended. For payout, ON indicates that one game token has been dispensed, and OFF indicates that no game tokens have been dispensed. For acquisition display and accumulation display effects, ON indicates that the effect is running (displaying), and OFF indicates that it is not running (not displaying). For result notification effects, ON indicates that it is running (the effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not running (the effect has finished, and the display has stopped on the screen that announces the result). For errors (hopper empty) and errors (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. When the error display is set to ON, it indicates that an error code is displayed by the main control unit or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control unit based on the occurrence of an error. When the error display is OFF, it indicates that neither the error code nor the error screen is displayed.

Figures 30 to 32 show the case where the acquisition display animation is executed. When the cumulative display animation is executed, the "12 coins GET" displayed in the acquisition display animation will change to the "500 coins GET" displayed in the cumulative display animation.

The previously explained prize winning animation, settlement animation, and insertion animation can all be combined, and the times t0 and t1 in Figures 22-24 are the same as the times t0 and t1 in Figure 27. The time t5 in Figures 22 and 23 is later than the time t1 in Figure 27, but earlier than the time t15.

<If the payout is processed successfully>
As shown in Figure 27, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display or accumulation display based on the received payout start command. At time t14, one second later, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display or accumulation display. Then, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds if it is executed normally (in this example, 12 game tokens are dispensed normally). The acquisition display starts at the same time as the payout process and ends before the payout process is completed. This allows the player to recognize that they have acquired game tokens or that the cumulative number of acquired game tokens exceeds a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. The result notification display is executed from the start of the game, so it is already running at the time the payout process starts. At time t15, the result notification animation reaches a branching point, and the display from this point onward differs depending on whether an image indicating success or victory is displayed, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. At time t16, the result notification animation that was running ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<If dispensing fails (hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 28, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display or accumulation display based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game tokens in the hopper 44, no game tokens are dispensed, and the rotation of the turntable continues. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game tokens, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At the other times t14, t15, and t16, similar to Figure 27, at time t14, the acquisition display or accumulation display ends, at time t15, it becomes a performance branching timing, and at time t16, the result notification performance ends. The period during which the acquisition display animation, cumulative display animation, and result notification animation are executed, as well as the period until the end of the result notification animation, is set to be shorter than the period from the start of payout processing until a hopper empty error occurs. Therefore, it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display animation, cumulative display animation, and result notification animation before a hopper empty error occurs and the error screen is displayed.
Note that the diagram shows the case where a hopper empty error occurs because no tokens are dispensed after the dispensing process has started. If a hopper empty error occurs after multiple tokens have been dispensed, the timing of the hopper empty error will be later than time t17 by the amount of tokens that have been dispensed.

<If dispensing fails (when a hopper congestion error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 29, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display or accumulation display based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the game tokens are not dispensed because the hopper 44's discharge port is jammed with game tokens. Then, at time t18, the hopper 44's payout sensor has detected a jammed game token for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game tokens are jammed, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper jam error. Also at time t18, based on the occurrence of the hopper jam error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends display of) the acquisition display or accumulation display that was being executed, as well as the result notification display that was being executed, and displays an error screen. Since the winning display animation or the cumulative display animation is executed from the start of the payout process, it is executed before a hopper congestion error occurs after the payout process has started. Therefore, it is possible to check the contents of the winning display animation or cumulative display animation before the error screen is displayed.
The diagram also shows a case where no tokens are dispensed after the dispensing process begins, resulting in a hopper congestion error. If a hopper congestion error occurs after multiple tokens have been dispensed, the timing of the hopper congestion error will be later than time t18 by the amount of tokens dispensed, resulting in a longer period for executing the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification animations.

The acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification animations are not displayed if the animation itself is canceled. However, it is also possible to make the animation invisible by overlaying an error screen on top of the animation while the animation itself is still running. In this case, if the error is cleared during animation execution, the animation will become visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, clearing the error requires operating the reset switch, which is located inside the cabinet, so it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than 3 seconds from the start of payout processing to the end of the result notification animation before the error can be cleared. Therefore, even if a hopper congestion error occurs and is cleared in the shortest possible time, the system will not resume during the execution of the acquisition display, cumulative display, or result notification animations, but will only resume on the screen after all animations have finished.

<Screen displayed when a payout is completed successfully>
Figure 30 shows an example of the display screen when a payout is performed normally. Figure 30 shows a game in which AT has 11 games remaining and the total number of game tokens acquired is 230, and a battle sequence (result announcement sequence) is being performed. The remaining number of games is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, it is subtracted by 1 and displayed as 10G (games)). The total number of game tokens acquired in AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Allied characters (characters indicated by round heads) are displayed on the left side of the screen relative to the center, and enemy characters (characters indicated by star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure (a) shows the screen at the moment all reels stop during the battle sequence (all reels stop command received). From this point onward, the sequence continues to announce the result. Figure (b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 27, indicating the start of the payout process. One game token is dispensed, increasing the total number of game tokens from 230 to 231. The "12 GET" display moves from the right side of the screen towards the center, indicating that 12 game tokens have been dispensed as part of the winnings display. In the center of the screen, the competition between the ally character and the enemy character has begun. Figure (c) shows the moment three game tokens have been dispensed. The "12 GET" display is prominently displayed in the center of the screen as part of the winnings display, indicating that 12 game tokens have been dispensed as part of the winnings display. The competition between the ally character and the enemy character continues.

Figure (d) shows the moment when 8 game tokens have been dispensed, and the large "Get 12 tokens" display in the center of the screen is moving towards the left side of the screen as the token acquisition display animation comes to an end. Figure (e) shows the moment at time t15 in Figure 27, when the dispensed game tokens have finished and the animation branches. Since the dispensed game tokens have finished, the total number of game tokens is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between the ally character and the enemy character continues. Figure (f) shows the moment after the animation branching timing, and the process of displaying the image indicating success is shown. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and the enemy character, making it clear that success has been achieved. Figure (g) shows the moment at time t16 in Figure 27, when the battle animation ends. "Success" is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, clearly indicating that it was an animation indicating success. The image displayed in Figure (g) is the end of the animation, but it continues to be displayed until the next game starts. Figure (h) shows the timing after the branching point in the animation, displaying the process of showing an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged in the competition between the ally and enemy characters, making it clear that failure has occurred. Figure (i) shows the timing at time t16 in Figure 27, the timing when the battle animation ends. "Failure" is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, clearly indicating that the animation showed failure. The image displayed in Figure (i) marks the end of the animation, but it continues to be displayed until the next game starts.

<Screen displayed when dispensing fails (hopper empty error occurs)>
Figure 31 shows an example of the display screen when a payout does not occur normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). Figures (a) to (i) follow the same flow as Figure 30 for the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification effects. However, since no game tokens are dispensed after the payout process has started, the total number of game tokens in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. Figure (j) shows the timing at time t17 in Figure 28, when a hopper empty error is set in the main control means because no game tokens were detected for 3.5 seconds after the payout process started, and an error screen indicating the hopper empty error is displayed in the sub-control means. The same image is displayed regardless of whether an image indicating success or failure was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

<Screen displayed when dispensing fails (hopper congestion error occurs)>
Figure 32 shows an example of the display screen when a normal payout is not performed (when a hopper jamming error occurs). Figures (a) to (c) show the same flow as Figure 30 for the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification effects. However, since no game tokens have been dispensed after the payout process has started, the total number of game tokens in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. Figure (k) shows the timing at time t18 in Figure 29, when the hopper jamming error is set in the main control means and the screen indicating the hopper jamming error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 detects a jam for 201 ms or more after the payout process has started, the main control means determines that game tokens are jammed and sets a hopper jamming error. When the main control means sets a hopper jamming error, it sends a command to the sub-control means indicating the occurrence of a hopper jamming error. When the sub-control means receives the command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jamming error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper jamming error on the display device 32.

<Change in behavior>
The duration for displaying the acquired winnings and accumulated winnings is set to be shorter than the duration (1.5 seconds) required for a normal payout process (1 second), but it may be set to a longer duration. Specifically, it may be set to be longer than 1.5 seconds but shorter than the duration (3.5 seconds) required to detect a hopper empty error. By setting the duration longer than the duration required for a payout process, the acquired winnings and accumulated winnings can be more easily seen by the player.
Furthermore, while the time required for a successful payout process is set at 1.5 seconds, the time required may vary depending on the number of tokens to be paid out, and whether the payout process only involves adding credits or also includes the dispensing of game tokens from the hopper.
Furthermore, although it is stated that only one of the acquisition display animation or the cumulative display animation will be executed, if the conditions for executing both animations are met, the cumulative display animation may be executed after the acquisition display animation. The acquisition display animation ends one second after the start of the payout process, and the cumulative display animation is executed for one second thereafter, so even if a hopper empty error occurs, the player will be able to recognize the content of the cumulative display animation.
Furthermore, the winning display animation is designed to be performed when a specific button sequence is won during AT, and the correct combination of symbols stops as a result of the correct button sequence, resulting in a favorable payout (12 coins). However, it may also be performed when a different type of win occurs. Specifically, it may be performed when a non-button sequence win (a so-called shared bell) occurs, resulting in a favorable payout (12 coins) regardless of the button sequence, and the symbol combination corresponding to the non-button sequence win (the correct symbol combination) stops.

The winning display animation may have multiple variations when a favorable payout (12 coins) is executed. Specifically, the color and font used when "12 coins GET" is displayed may vary depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may vary depending on whether or not the player is in a state where they are likely to win an AT (Attack Time) bonus, or during the premonition of a continuous animation or the premonition of transitioning to a bonus-specialized zone. Varying the appearance of the winning display animation informs the player that they have won game coins and can also create the expectation that a favorable situation may occur in subsequent games. Furthermore, the color and font used when "12 coins GET" is displayed may also vary according to the setting value set in the game machine. This provides information for players to guess the setting value set in the game machine each time the winning display animation is executed.
Furthermore, the cumulative display animation may include modes that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, in addition to the modes that can be displayed at predetermined intervals. Specifically, when the setting value is set to "2", "4", or "6", the message "246 coins GET" is displayed when the cumulative number of game tokens exceeds 246 for the first time. This message may be displayed automatically when the number exceeds 246, or it may be displayed either by displaying it or by drawing lots and displaying it only if the winner is selected. By using the content displayed in the cumulative display animation to suggest the setting, it is possible not only to inform the player of the cumulative number but also to provide information for inferring the setting value set in the game machine. Only when the setting value is set to "6", the message "666 coins GET" may be displayed when the cumulative number of game tokens exceeds 666 for the first time. In addition, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc., may be provided for each predetermined number, and the displayed display mode may suggest the setting value or state set in the game machine.

The acquisition display and cumulative display animations can be executed during AT (Attack Time). While the results screen is displayed, even if the cumulative number of game tokens exceeds a predetermined number, the cumulative display animation will not be executed; instead, the acquisition display animation will be executed. However, other situations where the acquisition and cumulative display animations are not executed may be provided. Specifically, in situations known as pseudo-bonuses, the acquisition and cumulative display animations do not need to be executed. Furthermore, during pseudo-bonuses executed during AT, the acquisition display animation may not be executed, and only the cumulative display animation may be executed. Also, during the preparation period before the start of AT, on the AT start screen, during continuous animations executed during AT, and during the pre-announcement of continuous animations, the acquisition and cumulative display animations do not need to be executed. In the ending state, which can be executed before the end of the advantageous section, the acquisition and cumulative display animations do not need to be executed. By providing situations where these animations are executed and where they are not, depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the state of the animations managed by the sub-control means, necessary information can be appropriately communicated to the player.

The cumulative display animation was previously determined based on the cumulative number of game tokens acquired by the player during AT and the number of game tokens paid out during the payout process, but it can also be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the value of the MY counter is transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means by sending a command indicating the value of the MY counter after the game end check and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value minus the number of tokens wagered. When the payout start command is received as a result of the game, the number of game tokens included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated, and it is determined whether the added total exceeds a predetermined number. By displaying a value based on the value of the MY counter as the cumulative number during AT, the player can understand the number of game tokens that can be acquired before the advantageous period ends.
The result notification sequence is a battle sequence performed in the final game of a series of sequences, but it could also be a sequence performed in a single game instead of a series of sequences. Furthermore, it is not limited to battle sequences in which allied and enemy characters compete; it could also be other sequences that link the result of a sequence to an outcome favorable to the player, such as whether or not the player wins the grand prize in a lottery, or whether or not they win a lottery.

The result notification sequence is designed to display the result after a time elapses following the complete stop of all reels, followed by a sequence branching timing. However, the result may also be displayed by operating a sequence switch. Specifically, at the sequence branching timing (time t15), an image of a switch resembling a sequence switch (also called an operation prompt image or operation prompt sequence) is displayed, and when the player operates the sequence switch, an image indicating success or failure is displayed. By displaying the operation prompt image at the sequence branching timing, even in situations where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the operation prompt image is displayed before the error screen appears.
Furthermore, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped spinning), a PUSH button animation may be performed to announce a stage change in the performance or the number of remaining games added to the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped and before time t17 occurs, an image of a switch resembling a performance switch may be displayed, and the player can operate it to change the stage of the performance or announce the number of added games. It is possible to recognize that an image of a switch resembling a performance switch is displayed (the PUSH button animation is performed) before a hopper empty error occurs (the error screen is displayed). Also, before displaying an image of a switch resembling a performance switch, an image of an image of a switch resembling a performance switch may be displayed or teased, and it is possible to recognize that an image of an image of a switch resembling a performance switch is displayed as a result of the teasing before the error screen is displayed.

In addition to result notification and PUSH button effects, other effects such as comment effects may be performed, triggered by the operation of the stop switch on the final reel or the stopping of all reels. These effects can also be performed before time t17 occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), so that the content of the effects can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs.
Furthermore, while this animation is designed to be performed when a button-press sequence is won and the correct combination of symbols stops as a result of the correct button-press sequence, resulting in a favorable payout (12 coins), it may also be performed when a different type of win occurs. Specifically, it may be performed when a button-press sequence-independent win (a so-called shared bell), which results in a favorable payout (12 coins) regardless of the button-press sequence, is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the button-press sequence-independent win (the correct combination of symbols) stops.
Furthermore, the durations of time and periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as needed.

<Navigation image>
Next, the navigation images in this embodiment will be described. Here, we will describe the button-press order navigation images (sometimes referred to as stop operation information), but this may be applied not only to the button-press order navigation images, but also to the button-press timing navigation images and operation type navigation images described above.

In this embodiment, for example, during AT (Automatic Trigger) mode, in a game where a push-order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting a favorable operation of the stop switch (such as granting the maximum amount of game currency obtainable in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push-order navigation image. Specifically, six different push-order sequences can be indicated using the numbers "1," "2," and "3," where "1" indicates the stop switch to be operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicates the stop button to be operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicates the stop button to be operated as the third stop operation.

Furthermore, the first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as a two-choice reel stop (indicating whether to operate the stop switch at positions 1 to 10 of the reels, or at positions 11 to 20 of the reels, for example, by indicating either an image of a blue 7 symbol or an image of a red 7 symbol along with the reel stop order navigation image), and combined with the six choices of reel stop order, it may be configured to notify 12 different operation patterns. Also, the reel stop order navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD corresponds to the left reel 8a, the reel stop order navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the reel stop order navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, if "123" is displayed as the reel stop order navigation image, it indicates the order in which to operate the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c in that order. In this embodiment, sometimes a part of the reel stop order navigation image, such as "1", is referred to as the "reel stop order navigation image", and sometimes the entire reel stop order navigation image, such as "123", is referred to as the "reel stop order navigation image".

<Type of button press order navigation image>
Figure 33 shows an example of the configuration of the button press order navigation image in this embodiment. In Figure 33, the button press order navigation image for the first stop operation is explained as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are configured similarly.

The button-press order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image," and is configured to have at least four display modes: "normal mode," "emphasized mode," "failure mode," and "success mode."

Navigation number images are images of numbers indicating the button press order. Navigation background images are decorative images surrounding the numbers indicating the button press order, or images showing effects around the numbers indicating the button press order.

First, Figure 33, <1>, shows the normal mode of the button press navigation image. The button press navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should not be operated at the moment is displayed in the normal mode. Note that the system is configured so that no audio is output for the button press navigation image displayed in the normal mode. Furthermore, even within the normal mode of the button press navigation image, the image corresponding to the next stop switch to be operated and the image corresponding to the last stop switch to be operated may be displayed separately. In this case, the image corresponding to the next stop switch to be operated may be displayed larger than the image corresponding to the last stop switch to be operated, and smaller than the image corresponding to the currently operated stop switch.

Next, Figure 33, section <2>, shows a highlight-mode push-button navigation image. The push-button navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated is displayed in a highlight mode. Furthermore, the system is configured to output audio corresponding to the push-button navigation image displayed in the highlight mode from speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a, the audio "Left" will be output. The highlight-mode push-button navigation image is larger than the normal mode push-button navigation image in at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image," allowing the player to visually notify them of the stop switch to be operated. In addition to size, the highlight-mode push-button navigation image may also be displayed brighter than the normal mode push-button navigation image, or displayed in a different color or font than the normal mode, to visually indicate the stop switch to be operated.

Next, in Figure 33, <3> is the button press navigation image in the successful mode. When the stop switch to be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the button press navigation image currently displayed in the highlighted mode is operated), the button press navigation image that was displayed in the highlighted mode will be displayed in the successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch to be operated in the correct mode, the button press navigation image displayed in the highlighted mode will change to the successful mode. Furthermore, when the stop switch to be operated is operated and the button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, an audio message corresponding to the next button press is output (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b should be operated next, the voice "Middle" is output from speaker S), and the button press navigation image corresponding to the next stop switch to be operated is displayed in the highlighted mode. The button press navigation image in the successful mode is configured to be displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) before the display ends.

Furthermore, when the stop switch is operated in the correct sequence, a sound effect or voice (sometimes referred to as a success sound) indicating that the button sequence was correct may be output from speaker S. This configuration allows the player to recognize, not only visually but also aurally, that the stop switch has been operated in the correct sequence.

Furthermore, the button-press navigation image in the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger than the button-press navigation image in the normal mode. Note that the button-press navigation image in the emphasized mode and the button-press navigation image in the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, in Figure 33, <4> shows the button-press navigation image in a failed state. When a stop switch that should not be operated is operated (when a stop switch corresponding to the button-press navigation image displayed in the normal state is operated), all currently displayed button-press navigation images will be displayed in the failed state. That is, when a stop switch is operated in an incorrect operation state, all currently displayed button-press navigation images will change to the failed state. When a stop switch that should not be operated is operated and the button-press navigation image is displayed in the failed state, the system may be configured to output an audio message indicating that the button press order was incorrect (for example, an audio message such as "What are you doing?", sometimes referred to as a failure sound) from speaker S, or it may be configured not to output an audio message indicating that the button press order was incorrect. The button-press navigation image in the failed state is configured to be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) before the display ends. Furthermore, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated, the system may be configured not to display the button-press navigation image in the failed state, and to immediately (in a shorter time than the predetermined time) terminate the display of all button-press navigation images.

Furthermore, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated, and all currently displayed push-button navigation images are shown in a failed state, the size of the push-button navigation images remains the same as before the stop operation. That is, push-button navigation images that were displayed in an emphasized state before the stop operation will display in a failed state at the size of the emphasized state, and push-button navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation will display in a failed state at the size of the normal state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from receiving the operation of the stop switch 13 to ending the display of the successful button press sequence navigation image is configured to be longer than the time from receiving the operation of the stop switch 13 to ending the display of the unsuccessful button press sequence navigation image.

This configuration allows players to experience a sense of superiority upon success, while simultaneously making it less likely for other players to notice a mistake in the button sequence, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to display all button-press navigation images—normal, emphasized, successful, and failed—with effects, or it may be configured to display at least one button-press navigation image with effects.

Furthermore, the button-press navigation images for all modes—normal, emphasized, successful, and failed—may be configured to be displayed as moving images, or they may be configured to be displayed as still images, or at least one button-press navigation image may be displayed as a moving image while the others are displayed as still images.

Furthermore, when the start switch 12 is operated as the operation to start the game, all push-button navigation images may be displayed in their normal mode, and then, when the stop switch operation becomes effective, the push-button navigation image corresponding to the first stop switch to be operated (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized mode. Alternatively, when the start switch is operated as the operation to start the game, the push-button navigation image corresponding to the first stop switch to be operated may be displayed in an emphasized mode, and the other push-button navigation images may be displayed in their normal mode. However, all push-button navigation images may be displayed as still images from the start of display until the stop switch operation becomes effective, and then all push-button navigation images may be displayed as moving images with some kind of motion when the stop switch operation becomes effective.

This configuration makes it easier for players to visually recognize when the stop switch operation is enabled, thus preventing incorrect button presses. The display of a button press navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation in an emphasized manner, or the change from a still image to a moving image, at the moment the stop switch operation is enabled, is sometimes referred to as a "stop acceptance indication" effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated as the start operation for the game and the push-order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes referred to as the navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

The timing for outputting the voice message corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (for example, "Left") from speaker S could be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, at the start of reel rotation, or at the moment the stop switch operation becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the speaker S is configured to output the voice message at any time between the start switch 12 being operated and the stop switch operation becoming effective.

This configuration allows players to recognize the stop switch they should operate first by sound, even if the display of the button sequence navigation image is delayed due to a malfunction in the LCD screen. This prevents disruption to gameplay and helps prevent button sequence errors.

Furthermore, Figure 34 shows an example of how the button press order navigation image is displayed on the LCD in this embodiment. The display of "123" on the LCD indicates that the correct button press order is to operate the stop switches in the following sequence: the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a → the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b → the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In Figure 34, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in an emphasized button press order navigation image, while "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal button press order navigation image.

<Configuration related to the display of the button press order navigation image and power off>
Next, we will explain the display of the push-button navigation image when a power outage occurs while the push-button navigation image is being displayed, and the power is restored without changing the settings. This will be explained using the example of a case where the player wins the A1 condition device during AT and the push-button navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push-button sequence "left, middle, right" is displayed on the LCD. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push-button navigation image and power outage described below can be appropriately combined and applied even when the timing of the power outage or the appearance of the push-button navigation image is different (e.g., a push-button navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push-button sequence "middle, left, right"). Furthermore, it can be appropriately combined and applied with the <Configuration regarding the display of the push-button navigation image and predetermined errors> described later.

(1) If the power is cut off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Left" is output from the speaker S. The voices such as "Left" that correspond to the stop switch that should be operated are sometimes simply called navigation voices.

Subsequently, before the first stop operation is performed, a power outage occurs, and the LCD display completely shuts down (power is off). Then, at a timing such as when the sub-control board receives drive voltage after power recovery and drawing processing becomes possible, or when the main control board receives drive voltage and sends a command regarding the button press order to the sub-control board (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a predetermined navigation timing), the "123" button press order navigation image is displayed on the LCD again. The "1" button press order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, while the "2" and "3" button press order navigation images are displayed in their normal manner. Furthermore, the navigation voice is not output again at this time. The navigation display sound may also be configured to be output again, or it may be configured to be output again.

In this configuration, if the power is cut off after the button press sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the button press sequence navigation image will reappear, but the navigation voice will not. By not outputting the navigation voice when the power is restored in this way, the processing load on the sub-control board during power restoration is reduced, allowing the button press sequence navigation image to be displayed more quickly.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to re-output navigation voice prompts upon power restoration. This configuration allows for a seamless transition between gameplay before and after a power outage.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to execute the aforementioned operation acceptance animation when the stop switch is activated, it may also be configured to display the stop acceptance animation along with the button press order navigation image when the power is restored. This configuration allows for a seamless transition between gameplay before and after a power outage.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to display the button press order navigation image without any stop-reception animation upon power recovery. This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board upon power recovery, allowing for quicker display of the button press order navigation image.

Furthermore, when the button press sequence navigation images are displayed again after a power outage and recovery, the button press sequence navigation images corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image," while other button press sequence navigation images may only display the "navigation number image." This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board during power outages and recovery, allowing for quicker display of the button press sequence navigation images.

Furthermore, when the button press sequence navigation images are displayed again after a power outage and recovery, the system may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" for all button press sequence navigation images displayed at the time of power recovery. This configuration allows for a seamless transition between gameplay before and after a power outage.

(2) If the first stop operation is performed correctly, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, while the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays shut down (the system is powered off). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after power recovery, the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in a successful configuration, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in an emphasized configuration, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in a normal configuration. In other words, the image display is the same as after stop acceptance when the first stop button press sequence for the stop switch is correct.

Furthermore, at this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output.

Furthermore, at this time, just as before the power was cut off, the button press navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the button press navigation image for "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. Therefore, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the button press navigation image for "3," which is displayed in the normal mode. Also, at this time, the button press navigation image for "1" in the successful mode is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it had ended its display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its start before the power was cut off. Note that the button press navigation image for "1" in the successful mode may be configured to end its display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its reappearance, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its reappearance.

Thus, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the system is configured so that at a predetermined navigation timing after power restoration, the "1" push-order navigation image is displayed in the successful configuration, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in the highlighted configuration, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in the normal configuration. This configuration ensures that even if power is restored during AT (Automatic Transmission), the operation of the stop switch before the power outage is accurately displayed, preventing player errors in the push-order sequence. Furthermore, since the successful push-order navigation image is displayed again, the player can also recognize that the stop switch operation before the power outage was correct.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, and a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the system may be configured such that, at a predetermined navigation timing after power restoration, the button press order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the button press order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the button press order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal manner.

This configuration allows the player to focus on the necessary stopping operations.

(3) If the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and the power is cut off before the second stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the button press order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the button press order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the button press order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, if the first stop operation is performed incorrectly (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all button press navigation images will be displayed in a failed state. After a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the failed state was displayed, the display of all button press navigation images will end. Additionally, a voice message, "What are you doing?", indicating that the button press order was incorrect, will be output from speaker S.

Subsequently, before the second stop operation is performed, a power outage occurs, and the LCD display completely shuts down (the device is powered off). Even if the device is capable of rendering after power recovery, the button press sequence navigation image will not be displayed. Furthermore, no sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is emitted at this time.

In this way, if the game was stopped in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the button-press navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored. This allows the player to resume playing without lowering their expectations (and without unnecessarily raising them).

Furthermore, as described above, if the stop switch is operated correctly as the first stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the system is configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, the button press navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful mode, the button press navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the button press navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal mode. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated incorrectly as the first stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the system is configured so that the button press navigation image is not displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored (referred to as the navigation timing even if no navigation is actually performed).

This configuration allows for appropriate display after power restoration based on the game state before power loss, enabling players to smoothly understand their game status. In particular, if the stop switch was operated incorrectly before power loss, gameplay can be resumed without diminishing (or unnecessarily raising) the player's expectations.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed incorrectly, and a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the system may be configured to display all button-press navigation images in the incorrect configuration again at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored. Even in this case, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating an incorrect button press sequence is output after power is restored. Additionally, the system may be configured to terminate the display of the incorrect button-press navigation images after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since their reappearance, or to terminate the display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

With this configuration, if the stop switch is operated correctly as the first stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, the button press navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in the success mode, the button press navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in the highlighted mode, and the button press navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated incorrectly as the first stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, all button press navigation images will be displayed in the failure mode.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game status. In particular, if the stop switch was operated incorrectly before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored, the incorrect button sequence navigation image will be displayed after the power is restored. This prevents players from mistakenly believing the machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout (such as one coin) despite being in AT mode.

(4) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in the normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, when the second stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode. Furthermore, the "Right" navigation voice message corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, both the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed at approximately the same size.

Subsequently, while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays shut down (the system is powered off). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after power recovery, the "1" button press navigation image is not displayed, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the highlighted mode. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the power outage, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the highlighted mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both will be displayed at approximately the same size. Furthermore, at this time, even if the "2" button press navigation image in the successful mode had ended its display due to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) elapsed since it started displaying before the power outage, it is configured to be displayed again when power is recovered. Furthermore, the button-press navigation image for the successful mode of "2" may be configured to terminate after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its reappearance after a power outage and subsequent recovery, or it may be configured to terminate immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its reappearance.

Thus, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the system is configured such that, at a predetermined navigation timing after power restoration, the button press navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the button press navigation image for "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the highlighted mode.

This configuration allows for accurate display of the stop switch operation before the power outage, even if the power is restored during AT (Automatic Transmission), preventing player errors in button sequence. In particular, since the button sequence navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, players can concentrate on the third stop.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the system may be configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after power restoration, the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the highlighted mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, in this case, since the "1" and "2" button press navigation images are displayed in the successful mode and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the highlighted mode, the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" will all be displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, in this case, even if the "1" and "2" button press navigation images in the successful mode had finished displaying due to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) elapsed since the start of display before the power outage, they are configured to be displayed again when power is restored. Furthermore, the button-press navigation images for successful modes "1" and "2" may be configured to terminate their display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their reappearance after a power outage and subsequent recovery, or they may be configured to terminate their display immediately, even before the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, before a power outage, the display mode of the button-press navigation image switches with each stop operation, so the button-press navigation images for successful modes "1" and "2" terminate at different timings. However, after a power outage, the button-press navigation images for successful modes "1" and "2" terminate at the same timing.

This configuration allows for accurate display of the stop switch operation before the power outage, even in the event of a power interruption and subsequent recovery during AT (Automatic Transmission), preventing player errors in button sequence. In particular, displaying the button sequence navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner clearly indicates that only the third stop remains and that the correct button sequence was followed.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the system may be configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after power restoration, the "1" button press navigation image is not displayed, the "2" button press navigation image is not displayed, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sounds, success sounds, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration allows the player to focus on the necessary stopping operations.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner, the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect manner, and the power is then cut off before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal manner. In addition, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in the normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, if the second stop operation is performed incorrectly (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the button press order navigation images for "2" and "3" will be displayed in a failed state. After a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the failed state was displayed, the display of the button press order navigation images for "2" and "3" will end. Additionally, a voice message, "What are you doing?", indicating an incorrect button press order, will be output from speaker S.

Subsequently, while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays shut off (indicating the device is powered off). Even after the power is restored and the designated navigation timing arrives, the button press sequence navigation image will not be displayed. Note that no failure sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is emitted at this time.

In this way, if the game was stopped in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the button sequence navigation image will not be displayed again when the power is restored. This allows the player to resume playing without lowering their expectations (and without unnecessarily raising them).

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, followed by the second stop operation being performed incorrectly, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the system may be configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after power restoration, the button press navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful configuration, while the button press navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in the failed configuration. In this case, no failure sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is output after power restoration. The failed button press navigation image may be configured to terminate after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since its reappearance, or it may be configured to terminate immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by redisplaying the button-press navigation image corresponding to the correct stopping sequence, players can understand which stopping operation they made a mistake with.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, followed by the second stop operation being performed incorrectly, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the system may be configured to display all button-press navigation images in the incorrect configuration at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored. Even in this case, no failure sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is output after power is restored. The incorrect button-press navigation images may be configured to terminate after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since their reappearance, or they may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed. This configuration prevents players from mistakenly believing the machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout (such as one coin) despite being in AT mode, because the incorrect button-press navigation images will be displayed after power is restored.

(6) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner, then the power is cut off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and then the power is cut off again: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal manner. In addition, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in the normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, when the second stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode. Furthermore, the "Right" navigation voice message corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, both the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed at approximately the same size.

Subsequently, while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays shut down (the system is powered off). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after power recovery, the "1" button press navigation image is either not displayed or displayed in its successful state, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in its successful state, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in its emphasized state. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Furthermore, the "2" button press navigation image in its successful state (and the "1" and "2" button press navigation images in their successful states if the system is configured to also display the "1" button press navigation image) may be configured to terminate after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its reappearance, or it may be configured to terminate immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its reappearance.

Subsequently, the display of the button-press navigation image for the successful configuration of "2" ends (and if the system is configured to also display the button-press navigation for the successful configuration of "1," the display of the button-press navigation image for the successful configuration of "1" also ends). While the button-press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the highlighted configuration, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct configuration, the button-press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful configuration. Furthermore, at this time, a predetermined image (sometimes referred to as the GET image) indicating that all stop operations were performed in the correct configuration is displayed.

Subsequently, after the stop operation up to the third stop has been performed, another power outage occurs, and all LCD displays shut down. Even after power is restored, the button sequence navigation images and GET images are not displayed. Furthermore, at this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are not output.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, since no further stopping operations are required after the third stop, not displaying the button-press navigation image effectively communicates that no further stopping operations are necessary.

Furthermore, if the third stop operation is performed correctly, and then another power outage occurs, the system may be configured to display all the button-press navigation images for "1" through "3" again in the successful configuration at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored. In this case, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes clear that all stopping operations were performed in the correct manner.

Furthermore, if the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the button press navigation image for "1" may not be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, or it may be displayed in the successful mode, the button press navigation image for "2" may be displayed in the successful mode, and the button press navigation image for "3" may be displayed in the highlighted mode. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the button press navigation images may not be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after power is restored. Thus, the display content after power restoration may differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation regarding rare role navigation images>
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a so-called rare role such as a cherry or watermelon is won in a game, the system is configured to display "!!!" as a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning a rare role. The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are identical or substantially identical in their display manner. That is, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "number" and "!" are different. In addition, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or it may be configured to be displayed even in games where the result of the internal lottery is a miss or replay, as an effect that suggests the possibility of being granted a predetermined benefit (for example, initial AT win, AT increase, transition to chance zone, etc.) when it has been determined that a predetermined benefit will be granted.

Furthermore, since there is no advantage or disadvantage based on the button press order for the rare role navigation image, it is designed to always be displayed at the same size throughout a single game (unlike the button press order navigation image, where the size differs between the normal and emphasized modes).

Furthermore, during gameplay where a rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at some point before the third stop operation is performed (e.g., when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, or when the third stop operation is performed), and the LCD display completely shuts off (the power is not turned on). After the power is restored, the rare role navigation image is displayed again at a predetermined navigation timing. Regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image displayed again upon power restoration will be displayed in the same format as after the start switch 12 operation, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it helps maintain the expectation that they might have won a rare prize. Furthermore, it prevents players from missing out on rare prizes.

Furthermore, in a game where a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any point before the third stop operation is performed (e.g., when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, or when the third stop operation is performed), the system may be configured so that the rare role navigation image is not displayed again after the power is restored.

This configuration prevents players from confusing the button press order navigation images with the rare role navigation images.

Furthermore, the rare role navigation images may be configured to terminate one by one in response to a stop operation, or all rare role navigation images may be displayed at the time the first stop operation is performed. Also, if the display of rare role navigation images is terminated one by one with each stop operation, the display may be terminated in the order of the left rare role navigation image, the middle rare role navigation image, and the right rare role navigation image, regardless of which stop switch 13 is operated, or the display of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 that was operated may be terminated in response to the stop operation.

<Configuration related to the display of button press order navigation images and errors>
Next, we will explain the display of the push-button navigation image after a predetermined error (medal stagnation error, medal reverse flow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs while the push-button navigation image is being displayed, and the predetermined error is subsequently cleared. This will be explained using the example of a case where, during AT, the player wins the A1 condition device, and the push-button navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push-button sequence "left, middle, right" is displayed on the LCD, and a hopper empty error occurs as the predetermined error. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push-button navigation image and the predetermined error described below can be appropriately combined and applied even if the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined error or the appearance of the push-button navigation image is different. Furthermore, it can be appropriately combined and applied with the above-mentioned <Configuration regarding the display of the push-button navigation image and power cut-off>.

(1) If the first stop operation is performed correctly, and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, First, as shown in Figure 35, when the start switch 12 is operated, the button press order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the button press order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, while the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the button press order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, while the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the button press order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be achieved by ending the display or by displaying an error-related image on the front of the LCD screen). An image related to the hopper empty error is then displayed.

Subsequently, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error ends, the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the hopper empty error occurred, the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the highlighted mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image which is displayed in the normal mode. Furthermore, at this time, even if the "1" button press navigation image in the success mode had ended its display due to a predetermined time elapsed (e.g., 0.5 seconds) since its start before the hopper empty error occurred, it is configured to be displayed again upon power restoration.

Subsequently, the button press navigation image for the successful configuration "1" may be configured to terminate its display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its reappearance, or it may be configured to terminate its display immediately, even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its reappearance.

Thus, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, the system is configured such that, after the predetermined error is cleared, the button press navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the button press navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. This configuration ensures that even if a predetermined error occurs during AT (Automatic Trigger), the operation of the stop switch before the error occurred is accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the button press order. Furthermore, since the button press navigation image in the successful mode is displayed again, the player can also recognize that the operation of the stop switch before the predetermined error occurred was correct.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, and a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, the system may be configured such that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the button press navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the button press navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal manner.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operation they need to perform at that moment.

Furthermore, the display patterns of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" in the push-button navigation image shown in Figure 35 differ from those of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" in the push-button navigation images shown in Figures 33 and 34, in terms of design (pattern, font of numbers, colors, etc.). Thus, the design of the push-button navigation image may be configured to change appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expected value of AT (Attack Time) bonuses is in the normal state, the push-button navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in Figures 33 and 34, and when it is in the high-probability state, the push-button navigation may be displayed with the design shown in Figure 35. In addition, it may be possible to select a performance mode related to the performance tendencies during AT, and when a predetermined performance mode is set, the push-button navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in Figures 33 and 34, and when a specific performance mode is set, the push-button navigation may be displayed with the design shown in Figure 35.

This configuration allows players to visually understand their current gameplay status through the design of the button-press navigation images.

(2) If the second stop operation is performed correctly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, when the second stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode. Furthermore, the "Right" navigation voice message corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, both the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed at approximately the same size.

Subsequently, while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the push-button navigation image becomes invisible (this can be done by ending the display or by displaying an error-related image on the front of the LCD), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push-button navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push-button navigation image for "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push-button navigation image for "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the hopper empty error occurred, the push-button navigation image for "2" is displayed in the success mode and the push-button navigation image for "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both will be displayed at approximately the same size. Furthermore, in this case, the button press navigation image for the successful mode "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it had stopped displaying due to a predetermined time elapsed (e.g., 0.5 seconds) since it started displaying before the power was cut off.

Subsequently, the button press navigation image for the successful mode of "2" may be configured to terminate its display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its reappearance, or it may be configured to terminate its display immediately, even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its reappearance.

Thus, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, but a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, the system is configured such that, after the predetermined error is cleared, the button press navigation image for "1" is not displayed at a predetermined navigation timing, the button press navigation image for "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode. This configuration ensures that even if a predetermined error occurs during AT (Automatic Transmission), the operation of the stop switch before the error occurred is accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the button press order. In particular, since the button press navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can concentrate on the third stop.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, the system may be configured such that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the button press navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the button press navigation image for "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the highlighted mode.

Furthermore, even in this case, the system may be configured to output at least one of the navigation display sounds, success sounds, and navigation voice prompts corresponding to the third stop operation, or it may be configured so that none of them are output.

Furthermore, at this time, the button press navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in the successful mode, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" are all displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, even if the button press navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode have ended their display due to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) elapsed since the start of display before the hopper empty error occurred, they are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared. Note that the button press navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode may be configured to end their display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed again, or they may be configured to end their display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since they were displayed again. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the button press navigation image switches with each stop operation, so the button press navigation images for successful modes "1" and "2" end at different timings. However, after the hopper empty error is cleared, the button press navigation images for successful modes "1" and "2" end at the same timing.

This configuration allows for accurate display of the stop switch operation pattern before the error occurred, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT (Automatic Transmission), thus preventing player errors in button sequence. In particular, displaying the button sequence navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner clearly indicates that only the third stop remains and that the correct button sequence was followed.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, the system may be configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error is terminated, the button press navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the button press navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the button press navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal manner. In this case, the system may be configured so that at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation is output again, or none of them are output.
This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operation they need to perform at that moment.

(3) If the correct procedure is followed up to the third stop operation, and a predetermined error occurs, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the button press order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the button press order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, while the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the button press order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, when the second stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode. Furthermore, the "Right" navigation voice message corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful mode and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, both the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed at approximately the same size.

Subsequently, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the final stop operation, is operated), the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the successful configuration. Furthermore, since all stop operations have been performed in the correct configuration at this point, the GET image is displayed.

Subsequently, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. After the hopper empty error is cleared, at a predetermined navigation timing, the display of the hopper empty error image ends, and the button press order navigation images for "1," "2," and "3" are displayed again in their successful configuration. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Furthermore, even if the button press order navigation images for "1," "2," and "3" in their successful configurations had ended their display due to a predetermined time elapsed (e.g., 0.5 seconds) before the hopper empty error occurred, they are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared. The GET image may be displayed again, or it may not be displayed.

Subsequently, the button press navigation images for successful sequences "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to terminate their display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their reappearance, or they may be configured to terminate their display immediately, even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their reappearance.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by reproducing all button-press navigation images in the successful configuration after a predetermined error has been cleared, it becomes clear that all stopping operations were performed in the correct configuration.

Furthermore, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly, and then a hopper empty error occurs, the system may be configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is terminated, the push-order navigation images for "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push-order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. In this case, the system may be configured so that at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation is output again, or none of them are output. Also, in this case, even if the push-order navigation image for "3" in the successful mode had ended its display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display started before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, and the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.
This configuration makes it clear that a third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately preceding the occurrence of a predetermined error, and that the third stop operation was performed in the correct manner.

Furthermore, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly, and then a hopper empty error occurs, the system may be configured to terminate the display of the image related to the hopper empty error at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and to not display any of the button press order navigation images from "1" to "3". In this case, the system may be configured to output at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation again, or none of them may be output.
This configuration allows the player to recognize that they have already completed the final stop operation.

Furthermore, if the predetermined error occurs before the payout process is executed, the system may be configured so that the button press order navigation images "1" to "3" are displayed in the successful configuration at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is cleared. Conversely, if the predetermined error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the button press order navigation images "1" to "3" are displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is cleared. Thus, the display content after the predetermined error is cleared may differ depending on whether the situation before the predetermined error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) If the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the button press order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the button press order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the button press order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the button press order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, if the first stop operation is performed incorrectly (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all button press navigation images will be displayed in a failed state. After a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the failed state was displayed, the display of all button press navigation images will end. Additionally, a voice message, "What are you doing?", indicating that the button press order was incorrect, will be output from speaker S.

Subsequently, while the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the hopper empty error image ends, and all button-press navigation images are displayed in a failed state. Note that no sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is output at this time. Furthermore, if the button-press navigation images in the failed state are displayed again after a power outage and recovery, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since their reappearance, or it may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their reappearance.

In this way, if the machine was stopped in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurred, the button-press navigation image will be displayed again in the incorrect manner after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if several minutes pass between the occurrence of the hopper empty error and its clearing, the button-press navigation image in the incorrect manner will be displayed after the error is cleared. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing the machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout (such as one coin) despite being in AT mode.

Furthermore, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, so that all button-press navigation images are not displayed. In this way, by not displaying the failed button-press navigation images again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to the game without diminishing their expectations.

(5) If the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner, the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect manner, and a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in the normal manner.

Subsequently, when the first stop operation is performed correctly (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode, the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the "3" button press navigation image is displayed in the normal mode. Also, the "Middle" navigation voice message corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. Note that at this time, since the "1" button press navigation image is displayed in the success mode and the "2" button press navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the "3" button press navigation image, which is displayed in the normal mode.

Subsequently, if the second stop operation is performed incorrectly (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the button press navigation images for "2" and "3" will be displayed in a failed state. After a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the failed state was displayed, the display of all button press navigation images will end. Additionally, a voice message, "What are you doing?", indicating an incorrect button press sequence, will be output from speaker S.

Subsequently, while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the hopper empty error image ends, and all button-press navigation images are displayed in a failed state. Note that no sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is output at this time. Furthermore, if the button-press navigation images in the failed state are displayed again after a power outage and recovery, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since their reappearance, or it may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their reappearance.

In this way, if the machine was stopped in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurred, the button-press navigation image will be displayed again in the incorrect manner after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if several minutes pass between the occurrence of the hopper empty error and its clearing, the button-press navigation image in the incorrect manner will be displayed after the error is cleared. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing the machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout (such as one coin) despite being in AT mode.

Furthermore, after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing, and the button press navigation image for "1" may be displayed in the successful configuration, while the button press navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in the failed configuration. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it makes it clear which stop operation resulted in a button press error.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the button press navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it makes it clear which stop operation resulted in a button press error.

Furthermore, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, so that all button-press navigation images are not displayed. In this way, by not displaying the failed button-press navigation images again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to the game without diminishing their expectations.

(6) If the first or second stop operation is performed incorrectly and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation, First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation images of "123" are displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, the navigation voice "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" which are displayed in a normal manner.

Subsequently, if the first or second stop operation is performed incorrectly, the button press sequence navigation image displayed at the time of the incorrect press sequence will be displayed in the incorrect state. After a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the incorrect state was displayed, the display of the button press sequence navigation image will end. Additionally, a voice message, "What are you doing?", indicating that the button press sequence was incorrect, will be output from speaker S.

Subsequently, after the third stop operation is performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all button-press navigation images are displayed in a failed state. Note that no sound indicating an incorrect button press sequence is output at this time. Furthermore, if the button-press navigation images in the failed state are displayed again after a power outage and recovery, the display may be configured to end after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the re-display, or it may be configured to end immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the re-display.

In this way, if the machine was stopped in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurred, the button-press navigation image will be displayed again in the incorrect manner after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if several minutes pass between the occurrence of the hopper empty error and its clearing, the button-press navigation image in the incorrect manner will be displayed after the error is cleared. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing the machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout (such as one coin) despite being in AT mode.

Furthermore, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, so that all button-press navigation images are not displayed. In this way, by not displaying the failed button-press navigation images again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to the game without diminishing their expectations.

<Configuration regarding the display of push-button navigation images and reel stop warning images>
Furthermore, in a game where a push-order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and a push-order navigation image is displayed, if a predetermined time (3 minutes) elapses without a stop operation from the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation), the aforementioned reel stop warning image (also called a stop prompt image) is displayed. Subsequently, when the reel stop warning image and the push-order navigation image are displayed at the same time, a power outage may occur. After the power is restored, at a predetermined navigation timing, the push-order navigation image may be displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring it in this way, even if an unexpected event such as a power outage occurs during gameplay, the player can concentrate on the push-order navigation image, thereby preventing push-order errors. The display manner of the push-order navigation image at this time can be appropriately applied according to the <Configuration concerning the display of the push-order navigation image and power outage> described above.

<Explanation of errors and prize lamp effects related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment and the prize winning animation will be explained.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to appropriately inform the player that a win has been achieved by performing a win lamp effect based on the winning of a minor role such as a push-order role, or a win lamp effect based on the winning of a replay role such as a replay role.
Furthermore, even if a hopper empty error occurs after winning a prize, the aim is to ensure that the player is aware of the results of the game before the error occurs.

The following describes the configuration related to errors and the prize lamp display for the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment.

<Winning LED Lamps>
This is a part (not shown) of the display lamps (LED lamps) located on the front panel PS2, which light up or flash when a prize is won. It also lights up or flashes when errors occur, such as a door open error or a hopper empty error.

<Main control means>
The main processing performed by the main control means is as described in this embodiment, the description of the prize winning animation, settlement animation and input animation applicable to this embodiment, and the error and prize winning animation related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment. However, details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Push order combinations>
A winning combination is one that can be won through a prize draw (internal draw). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning sequence of button presses is displayed on the active line, and when the winning judgment process determines that a win has been achieved, medals are paid out based on the displayed symbol combination. Sequence of button presses can be displayed as two types of symbol combinations: correct symbol combinations that are displayed when the correct sequence of button presses is performed, and incorrect symbol combinations that are displayed when the correct sequence of button presses is not performed. Correct symbol combinations are symbol combinations that are displayed on the active line, such as bell-bell-bell, which mainly consists of yellow bell symbols, and 12 medals are paid out. Incorrect symbol combinations are symbol combinations that are displayed on the active line, such as blank-replay-watermelon, and 1 medal is paid out.

<Cherry's role>
The Cherry is a winning combination that can be won through a prize draw (internal draw). When the winning Cherry combination is won, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line, and when the winning determination process determines that a win has been achieved, medals are paid out based on the displayed symbol combination. The symbol combination that corresponds to the Cherry is a combination of symbols that are mainly composed of red Cherry symbols, such as Cherry-Cherry-Cherry, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role>
This is a role that can be won through a role lottery (internal lottery). When a winning replay role is won, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line, and when the winning judgment process determines that a win has been achieved, the player is granted a second play based on the displayed symbol combination. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is a combination of symbols that is displayed on the active line, such as replay-replay-replay, which mainly consists of blue replay symbols.

<Prize Winning Processing (Payout Processing)>
The prize-winning process is the process of dispensing a predetermined number of game tokens according to the winning combination (the combination of symbols displayed) when the prize-winning determination process determines that a winning combination has been achieved. Dispensing game tokens here means adding them to the credits if the credits have not reached their upper limit, and dispensing game tokens from the hopper 44 if the credits have reached their upper limit. The main control means sends a payout start command to the sub-control means when it starts a payout based on a prize (whether it is an addition to the credits or a payout from the hopper 44), and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means when it ends a payout based on a prize. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute prize-winning effects such as outputting a sound of game tokens being dispensed, backlight effects (also called BL effects), and prize-winning lamp effects. The payout start command includes information on the number of game tokens to be paid out, and both the payout start command and the payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when the player loses or wins a prize). When the player loses or wins a replay, the information on the number of game tokens to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command. When a replay is won, the sub-control means can also execute winning animations such as outputting the winning sound and backlight effects based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic input process>
The automatic betting process (automatic betting process) is executed when the winning determination process determines that a replay has been won. In the automatic betting process, the bet is automatically set (storage of the number of tokens inserted) to the same number of tokens as the number of tokens bet in the game in which the replay was won, without inserting any game tokens. When the automatic betting process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) sends an automatic betting command to the sub-control means according to the number of tokens bet (inserted). In this embodiment, the sub-control means does not perform a betting animation (output of a betting sound) based on the automatic betting command, but it may perform a betting animation such as outputting a betting sound, similar to when it receives a token insertion command or a stored token insertion command.

Furthermore, the automatic betting process increments the bet count by one each time. For example, if a replay is won in a game with a bet of 3, and the automatic betting process is then executed, the process of adding 1 to the bet count will be repeated three times. However, since the increment process is executed in a very short time, it is visually apparent to the human eye that the 1-3 bet lamps will light up simultaneously. When displaying the 1-3 bet lamps lighting up sequentially, a timer is set after each bet increment, and the next bet count is not added until the timer value reaches zero.

Furthermore, even after the automatic token insertion process, if the game tokens are set to bet or stored in the credits, settlement can be performed by operating the settlement switch, just as before starting the game (after setting the required number of tokens to bet but before operating the start lever). However, in the settlement process after the automatic token insertion, the set bet amount is not paid out; instead, a number of game tokens corresponding to the number of credits stored are dispensed from the hopper 44 to the player (settlement).

<Sub-control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game. This embodiment describes the prize winning effect, settlement effect, and input effect applicable to this embodiment, as well as the effects described regarding errors related to the hopper 44 and prize winning effects applicable to this embodiment. In addition, this embodiment also executes the prize lamp effect.

<Winning Performance>
These are animations that are performed when game tokens are dispensed, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay is won (displayed), and are executed based on commands such as the payout start command and payout end command. When game tokens are dispensed, a payout sound indicating that game tokens are being dispensed, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are performed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay is won, a winning sound indicating that a replay has been won, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are performed. It is also possible to prevent the winning animation from being performed if a push-order winning combination is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect combination of symbols stops and is displayed on an active line.

<Output of dispensing sound>
During the process of dispensing game tokens, there are two distinct sounds for dispensing game tokens: Dispensing Sound A and Dispensing Sound C. Dispensing Sound A is the sound that is output when a button sequence wins during normal play (not in AT mode), and as a result of operating in the correct sequence, the correct symbol combination stops and a favorable payout (dispensing 12 game tokens) occurs. Dispensing Sound C is the sound that is output when a cherry win occurs during normal play (not in AT mode), and the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry win stops and a payout (dispensing 1 game token) occurs.

Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly outputs a first sound (for example, a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received. Upon receiving the payout end command, it then repeats the output of the first sound for a specific period of time (for example, 1 second) before ending. Payout sound A outputs sound for a first payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the first specific period to the actual payout period) that is longer than the actual payout period (the payout processing period, for example, approximately 1.2 seconds). This makes it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period longer than the actual payout period, players are made to perceive that a payout is taking place during the period the payout sound is output, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. As a result, effects and other animations that are performed over a certain period of time based on the results of internal lotteries are more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

Payout sound C is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly outputs a third sound (for example, a "za" sound) until a payout end command is received. After receiving the payout end command, it repeats the output of a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (for example, 1.5 seconds) and then ends. In other words, payout sound C outputs sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the above fourth specific time to the actual payout period) which is longer than the actual payout period (for example, about 0.2 seconds). This third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of payout sound A because the number of game tokens being paid out is small. In this way, although payout sound C has a shorter period than payout sound A, it outputs payout sound for a longer period than the actual payout period, so that even though the number of tokens is small, the player will not miss it and will be able to recognize that game tokens have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (terminated) when the betting settings are configured (receiving the medal insertion command or the storage/insertion command), but it is canceled (terminated) when the game is started (receiving the start switch acceptance command).

In addition, while the system previously started outputting the payout sound after receiving a payout start command and continued outputting the payout sound until a predetermined time had elapsed after receiving a payout end command, it is also possible to configure the system so that, upon receiving a payout start command, the payout sound is output for a predetermined time, whichever is longer (the time it takes from the start to the end of payout, between credit addition and game token payout), plus a first specific time and a fourth specific time, without being triggered by a payout end command.
Furthermore, although the payout sounds A and C are set to be different, it is also possible to output the same payout sound.

<Output of winning sound>
There is a winning sound called Winning Sound A that is output when a replay combination is won. Winning Sound A starts when the payout start command is received and outputs a fourth sound (for example, a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, players can be prevented from missing it and can recognize that a replay combination has been won.
The output of the winning sound is not canceled (terminated) by the payout completion command or the betting setting (receiving the automatic insertion command), but it is canceled (terminated) by the game start operation (receiving the start switch acceptance command). The output time of winning sound A may be configured to end before automatic insertion occurs, or to end before the game start operation becomes possible.

<Backlight effect>
There are three distinct backlight effects: Backlight Effects A, C, and D. Backlight Effects A is a backlight effect that is displayed (executed) when a button sequence win occurs during normal play (non-AT), and the correct combination of symbols stops as a result of the correct button sequence, resulting in a payout of 12 coins. Backlight Effects C is a backlight effect that is displayed (executed) when a cherry win occurs during normal play (non-AT), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry win stops, resulting in a payout of 1 coin. Backlight Effects D is a backlight effect that is displayed (executed) when a replay win occurs during normal play (non-AT), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay win stops.

Backlight effect A starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly turns the backlight on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After receiving the payout end command, it then repeats the backlight on and off in the first pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) and then ends. By executing backlight effect A for a first backlight effect period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time mentioned above to the actual payout period) that is longer than the actual payout period (e.g., approximately 1.2 seconds), it is possible to make it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect A for a first backlight effect period that is longer than the payout period, it is possible to make players perceive that a payout is taking place during the period when backlight effect A is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for effects such as those corresponding to the results of an internal lottery to be executed without being canceled midway through, especially if they are being performed for a certain period of time. Note that the backlight effect A is canceled (ends) upon receiving the betting settings (medal insertion command, stored/inserted command).

Backlight effect C starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly turns the backlight on and off in a third pattern until a payout end command is received. After receiving the payout end command, it then repeats the backlight on and off in the third pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) and then ends. By executing backlight effect C for a third backlight effect period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time mentioned above to the actual payout period) that is longer than the actual payout period (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), it is possible to make it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect C for a third backlight effect period that is longer than the payout period, it is possible to make players perceive that a payout is taking place during the period when backlight effect C is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for effects such as those corresponding to the results of an internal lottery to be executed without being canceled midway through, especially if they are taking a certain amount of time. Note that, like backlight effect A, backlight effect C is canceled (ends) upon receiving the betting setting (medal insertion command, stored/inserted command).

Backlight effect D begins when the payout start command is received and ends after repeatedly turning the backlight on and off in the fourth pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). By executing backlight effect D for the fourth backlight effect period (the same period as the first specific time), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a replay has been won. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect D for the fourth backlight effect period, the player will perceive that processing based on a replay is taking place during the period when backlight effect D is running, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Additionally, it makes it easier for effects such as those based on the results of internal draws to be executed without being canceled midway through, especially if they are running for a certain period of time. Note that backlight effect D is not canceled (ended) by the betting setting (automatic input command), but it is canceled (ended) by the game start operation (reception of the start switch acceptance command).

<Winning Lamp Effect>
There are three distinct winning lamp effects: Winning Lamp Effects A, Winning Lamp Effects C, and Winning Lamp Effects D. Winning Lamp Effects A is a winning lamp effect that is displayed (executed) when a push-order combination is won during normal play (not in AT mode), and the correct combination of symbols stops as a result of the correct push-order operation, resulting in a payout of 12 coins. Winning Lamp Effects C is a winning lamp effect that is displayed (executed) when a cherry combination is won during normal play (not in AT mode), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry combination stops, resulting in a payout of 1 coin. Winning Lamp Effects D is a winning lamp effect that is displayed (executed) when a replay combination is won during normal play (not in AT mode), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination stops.

The winning lamp effect A starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly turns on and off in yellow until a payout end command is received (fifth pattern). After receiving the payout end command, it then repeats the fifth pattern of turning on and off the winning LED lamp for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) and then ends. By executing the winning lamp effect A for a first winning lamp effect period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time mentioned above to the actual payout period) which is longer than the actual payout period (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), it is possible to make it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect A for a first winning lamp effect period which is longer than the payout period, it is possible to make players perceive that a payout is taking place during the period when the winning lamp effect A is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for effects such as those corresponding to the results of an internal lottery to be executed without being canceled midway through, when they are taking place over a certain period of time. Note that the winning lamp effect A is not canceled (ended) by the betting settings (receiving the medal insertion command or the storage/insertion command), but it is canceled (ended) by the game start operation (receiving the start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect C starts when a payout start command is received and repeatedly turns on and off in red until a payout end command is received (sixth pattern). After receiving the payout end command, it then repeats the sixth pattern of turning on and off for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds) and then ends. The winning lamp effect C is executed for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the actual payout period (e.g., about 0.2 seconds) (a period obtained by adding the above sixth specific time to the actual payout period, and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for players to recognize that a payout is taking place. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third period longer than the payout period, it is possible to make the player perceive that a payout is occurring during the period when the winning lamp effect C is running, thereby delaying the start of the next game. Additionally, if effects such as those corresponding to the results of an internal lottery are running for a certain period of time, they are more likely to be executed without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect C is not canceled (terminated) by the betting setting (reception of the medal insertion command, storage insertion command), but it is canceled (terminated) by the game start operation (reception of the start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect D starts when the payout start command is received and ends after the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and turns off in blue for a seventh specific time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). By executing the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a replay has been won. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player will perceive that processing based on a replay is taking place during the period when the winning lamp effect D is executing, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Additionally, it makes it easier for effects such as those based on the results of internal draws to be executed without being canceled midway through, especially if they are taking a certain amount of time. Note that the winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by the betting setting (automatic input command), but it is canceled (ended) by the game start operation (reception of the start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effects A, C, and D differ in the color of the winning LED lamp when it lights up, but the lighting and flashing patterns and the duration of their execution are identical. By only differing in color, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is caused by a winning combination. Furthermore, by making the duration of the execution the same as that of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay combination is won, the next game can be started earlier than when the correct combination of symbols for the button sequence is displayed. However, because the winning lamp effect is running, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect finishes.

Furthermore, while the winning lamp animations A and C were executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first specific time or sixth specific time had elapsed, it is also possible to execute the winning lamp animation only for a predetermined time, which is the time it takes from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer, the time it takes for credits to be added or the time it takes for game tokens to be paid out), without being triggered by the payout end command, once the payout start command is received.
Furthermore, while the "first winning lamp performance period,""third winning lamp performance period," and "fourth winning lamp performance period" of winning lamp performances A, C, and D are the same as the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A, the "first winning lamp performance period,""third winning lamp performance period," and "fourth winning lamp performance period" may be different from the "first payout sound period." Preferably, the "first winning lamp performance period,""third winning lamp performance period," and "fourth winning lamp performance period" are the same, and may also be longer than the time necessary to pay out the maximum number of game tokens that can be paid out in a single game.

<Error notification>
Error notification is provided when errors occur, such as errors related to the hopper 44 or door opening errors. The main control means displays the error code on the acquired coin display 27, while the sub-control means notifies that an error has occurred using the liquid crystal (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up red during the period when an error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up red when a cherry symbol is won, but during error notification, it continues to light up red, so that the pattern differs from when a cherry symbol is won, making it possible to distinguish whether it is notifying an error or a win.

<Settlement Presentation>
This is an animation that is performed when game tokens are settled. It includes the output of a settlement sound (settlement animation) indicating that game tokens are being dispensed, and an audio message indicating that the settlement is complete. Since the settlement animation does not use the winning LED lamp or backlight, it is easy to recognize that the payout is different from the animations based on winning small wins or replays.

The following explains the various effects that are performed according to the progress of the game, referring to Figures 36 to 45. Figure 36 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not used after the payout process based on the winning of a sequence of symbols has finished, Figure 37 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is used after the payout process based on the winning of a sequence of symbols has finished, Figure 38 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not used after the payout process based on the winning of a cherry symbol has finished, Figure 39 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is used after the payout process based on the winning of a cherry symbol has finished, and Figure 40 is a time chart when game tokens are not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay symbol has finished. These are time charts. Figure 41 shows the time chart when game tokens are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay symbol is completed. Figure 42 shows the time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push-order symbol is completed. Figure 43 shows the time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay symbol is completed. Figure 44 shows the time chart when a normal payout does not occur after the winning of a cherry symbol (when a hopper empty error occurs). Figure 45 shows the time chart when a normal payout does not occur after the winning of a cherry symbol (when a hopper stagnation error occurs).

Note that in Figures 36 to 45, ON and OFF are used for explanatory purposes, but the corresponding processing and effects are indicated in parentheses. Specifically, for payout processing/settlement processing/winning lamp effects (winning LED lamp)/BL effects/settlement effects/error notification (winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is running, OFF indicates that it is not running, switching from OFF to ON means that the process has started, and switching from ON to OFF means that it has ended. For payout, ON indicates that one game token has been dispensed, and OFF indicates that no game token has been dispensed. For payout sound/insertion sound/winning sound, ON indicates that the sound is being output, and OFF indicates that the sound is not being output. For MAX bet lamp/coin insertion ready lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that it is off. For MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. The coin insertion status indicates that the inserted game coins have successfully passed through the coin selector 34 (the insertion sensor on the coin selector 34 has detected the game coins), while OFF indicates that no game coins have been inserted. For Error (Hopper Empty) and Error (Hopper Stagnation), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), while OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For Error Display, ON indicates that an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, while OFF indicates that neither an error code nor an error screen is displayed.

The previously explained acquisition display, cumulative display, result notification, PUSH, and comment effects can all be combined, and the times t0-t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 22-32 and the times t0-t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 36-45 are the same timing.

<If you do not press the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning combination has finished.>
Figure 36 shows the case where a winning combination is achieved by operating in the correct order of button presses, resulting in the correct symbol combination being displayed and a win being achieved. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter), the winning lamp effect A (referred to as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) on the winning LED lamp, and the back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) on the back lamp based on the received payout start command. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds if it is executed normally (in this example, 12 game tokens are paid out normally). At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting payout sound A, winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A as winning effects for the period T1 (first specific time).

The main control means, after the payout process is completed at time t1, performs processing such as updating the RT state (game completion check processing) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game tokens. At time t2, the main control means lights up the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that it is now possible to insert game tokens. The MAX bet lamp remains lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. At time t5, since a period of T1 has elapsed from time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be called the first payout sound period, the first back lamp effect period, and the first winning lamp effect period. As described above, even when various situations are combined, such as the output of payout sound A, the continuation of the winning lamp effect A and the backlight effect A, and the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, smooth control is possible. By continuing the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the backlight effect A, the player is made aware that a payout has occurred, and they are also appropriately made aware that betting settings can be adjusted through the MAX bet operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning combination has been completed.>
Figure 37 shows the case where a winning combination is achieved by pressing the buttons in the correct order, and the correct symbol combination is displayed when the button is pressed correctly. Up to time t2, the situation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not used after the payout process based on the winning combination is completed, and at time t3, the MAX bet switch is used to make the bet. As a result of the operation of the MAX bet switch, the main control means turns off the MAX bet lamp, the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and outputs the bet sound A (referred to as bet sound in the figure, the same applies hereafter) three times as a bet effect between time t3 and time t4 (during the T2 period). Even when various situations such as the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the output of bet sound A are combined at timings after time t3, smooth control is possible, and as a result the player can recognize that a payout has been made, as well as that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been made, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t3, the output of payout sound A and the winning lamp effect A continue, but the backlight effect A is terminated, allowing the user to visually recognize that a bet has been made. Although the explanation above was given using the MAX bet switch, the same process occurs when using the 1 bet switch or inserting tokens, which also terminates the backlight effect A and outputs the input sound A.

<If you do not press the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the cherry symbol win has finished.>
Figure 38 shows the case where a combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry symbol stops on the active line and a win is achieved. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound C (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter), an award lamp effect C (referred to as award lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) on the award LED lamp, and a back lamp effect C (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) on the back lamp based on the received payout start command. The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds if it is executed normally (in this example, one game token is paid out normally). At time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout completion command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a prize winning animation for a period of T4 (fourth specific time) until the timing of time t24, to execute the prize winning lamp animation C for a period of T6 (sixth specific time) until the timing of time t5, and to continue the back lamp animation C for a period of T1 (first specific time) until the timing of time t23.

The main control means, after the payout process is completed at time t19, performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game tokens. At time t20, the main control means illuminates the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that it is now possible to insert game tokens. The MAX bet lamp remains illuminated because the MAX bet switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that there is enough credit stored to allow betting by operating the MAX bet switch. If betting is not possible by operating the MAX bet switch, the game will be ready to insert game tokens at time t20, but the MAX bet lamp will not illuminate.)

At time t23, since period T1 has elapsed since time t19, the sub-control means terminates the backlight effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third backlight effect period. At time t24, since period T4 has elapsed since time t19, the sub-control means terminates the output of the payout sound C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, since period T6 has elapsed since time t19, the sub-control means terminates the prize lamp effect C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third prize lamp effect period. As described above, even when various situations are combined, such as the output of the payout sound C, the continuation of the winning lamp effect C and the backlight effect C, and the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, smooth control is possible. By continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C, the player is made aware that a payout has occurred, and they are also appropriately made aware that betting settings can be adjusted through the MAX bet operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the cherry symbol has been completed.>
Figure 39 shows the case where a combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry symbol stops on the active line and a win is achieved. Up until time t20, the situation is the same as when the MAX bet switch operation is not performed after the payout process based on the cherry symbol win is completed, and at time t21, the MAX bet switch operation is performed. As a result of the MAX bet switch operation, the main control means turns off the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect C, and between time t21 and time t22 (during period T2), three coins are bet by the MAX bet switch operation as part of the betting effect, so the betting sound A (referred to as betting sound in the figure, the same applies hereafter) is output three times. Even when various situations occur simultaneously, such as the output of the payout sound C, the performance of the winning lamp, and the output of the insertion sound A, at a time t21 or later, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, as well as that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been made, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t21, the output of the payout sound C and the performance of the winning lamp continue, but the backlight performance C is terminated, allowing the player to visually recognize that the bet setting has been made.

Note that Figure 39 assumes that sufficient credits have been accumulated to allow betting settings via the MAX bet switch. If betting settings are not possible via the MAX bet switch, the game will be ready to accept tokens at time t20, but the MAX bet lamp will not light up. Furthermore, although the explanation uses the MAX bet switch, inserting tokens using the 1 bet switch or by simply inserting tokens will similarly terminate the backlight effect C and output the token insertion sound A.

<If you do not insert game tokens after the automatic token insertion process based on winning a replay has finished>
As shown in Figure 40, at time t0, the main control means sends a payout start command to the sub-control means with information indicating the number of game tokens to be dispensed is 0. Based on the received payout start command, the sub-control means starts outputting the winning sound A (referred to as the winning sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter), the winning lamp effect D with the winning LED lamp (referred to as the winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter), and the back lamp effect D with the back lamp (referred to as the BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter). Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means continues outputting the winning sound A as a winning effect for the period T5 (fifth specific time), the winning lamp effect D for the period T7 (seventh specific time), and the back lamp effect D for the period T1 (first specific time). At time t25, the main control means starts the automatic insertion process and sends an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means. At time t26, after the automatic insertion process is completed, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game tokens.

The main control means illuminates the coin insertion ready lamp at time t26 based on the fact that the machine is ready to accept game coins. Since no coins were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains illuminated. At time T29, since a period T1 has elapsed from time 09, the sub-control means terminates the backlight effect D. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth backlight effect period. At time t5, since a period T7 has elapsed from time t0, the sub-control means terminates the prize winning lamp effect D. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth prize winning lamp effect period. As described above, even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and backlight effect D while simultaneously illuminating the coin insertion available lamp, smooth control is possible. By continuing the winning lamp effect D and backlight effect D, the player is made aware that a payout has occurred, and also appropriately aware that coin insertion is possible, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Note that this diagram assumes that the credit storage limit has not been reached after the automatic insertion process. If coin insertion is not possible, the coin insertion available lamp will not light up at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned ON).

<When game tokens are inserted after the automatic token insertion process based on winning a replay has finished>
As shown in Figure 41, up to the timing t26, the situation is the same as when no game tokens are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has finished. At the timing t27, a game token is inserted, so the main control means stores one game token in the credit and sends a stored quantity command to the sub-control means. Based on the receipt of the stored quantity command, the sub-control means terminates the backlight effect D and outputs an insertion sound B (referred to as insertion sound in the figure, the same applies hereafter) once as an insertion effect, outputting it from the timing t27 to t28. Even when various situations such as the winning lamp effect D is performed and the insertion sound B is output occur simultaneously at the timing after t27, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a replay role has been won, as well as that a target insertion has been made and one token has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the game machine. Furthermore, at time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the backlight effect D, the player can visually recognize that credits have been added to their account.
Note that this diagram assumes that the credit storage limit has not been reached after the automatic insertion process (storage limit of 48 coins or less), and that the machine remains in a state where it can continue to accept game coins even after inserting one game coin.

<When a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning combination of the button sequence has been completed>
As shown in Figure 42, up to the timing t2, the procedure is the same as when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning combination has finished. At the timing t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the MAX bet switch.
At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and turns off the MAX bet lamp. The sub-control means then ends the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A at time t3 without waiting for the end of period T1. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound begins as a settlement effect. Note that while the settlement sound is output as a settlement effect, effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. To prevent confusion for the player due to the simultaneous output of payout sound A and settlement sound when the settlement process starts, the output of payout sound A, winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for period T1, are terminated when the settlement process starts, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, thereby allowing the player to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is taking place.

<When a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic payment process based on the winning of a replay has finished.>
As shown in Figure 43, up to the timing t26, the process is the same as when game tokens are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has finished, and at the timing t30, the settlement switch is operated.
At time t30, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and turns off the light on the medal insertion lamp. The sub-control means then ends the prize lamp effect D at time t30 without waiting for the T7 period to elapse, and the back lamp effect D at time t30 without waiting for the T1 period to elapse. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as a settlement effect. Note that although the settlement sound is output, effects using the back lamp and prize LED lamp are not performed. By ending the prize lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 and T1 periods, and by not performing effects using the back lamp and prize LED lamp, the player can be made aware that the settlement process is underway. Note that in this figure, it is assumed that the credit storage has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more credits are stored.

<If the payout does not occur properly after the cherry symbol is won (Hopper Empty Error)>
As shown in Figure 44, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game tokens in the hopper 44, no game tokens are dispensed, and the rotation of the turntable continues. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game tokens, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends displaying) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C that were being executed, displays an error screen, and uses the winning LED lamp to announce the error. Note that the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C continue to be executed until time t17. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up and flashes red as a winning lamp effect. However, at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up red as an error notification. Although it is still red, the lighting pattern is different, so it is possible to recognize that it has switched from a winning lamp effect to an error notification. Note that the same figure shows the case where a hopper empty error occurs because no coins are dispensed after the payout process has started. If a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game coins have been dispensed, the timing of the hopper empty error will be later than time t17, due to the dispensing of multiple game coins.

<If the payout does not occur properly after the cherry symbol is won (when a hopper jamming error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 45, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the game tokens are not dispensed because the hopper 44's discharge port is jammed with game tokens. At time t18, the hopper 44's payout sensor has detected a jammed game token for more than 201ms since the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game tokens are jammed, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper jam error. Also at time t18, based on the occurrence of the hopper jam error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends displaying) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C are executed from the start of the payout process. Therefore, they are executed before a hopper congestion error occurs after the payout process begins. This allows players to see the winning effects, such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C, before the error screen is displayed. Note that the diagram shows a case where no coins are dispensed after the payout process begins and a hopper congestion error occurs. In situations where multiple game tokens are dispensed, if a hopper congestion error occurs after some of the tokens have been dispensed, the timing of the hopper congestion error will be later than time t18 (due to the dispensing of some of the tokens), resulting in a longer period during which the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the backlight effect C are executed.

<Change in behavior>
The time required to dispense 12 game tokens normally is set to 1.5 seconds, and the time required to dispense 1 game token normally is set to 0.2 seconds. However, the dispensing time may be varied depending on the number of tokens being dispensed and whether the dispensing process only involves adding credits or includes dispensing game tokens from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to dispense 1 game token from the hopper 44 may be set to be longer than the time required to add 1 game token to the credits. Conversely, the time required to add 1 game token to the credits may be set to be longer than the time required to dispense 1 game token from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp animation, the lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the type of winning combination (yellow when a push-order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is achieved, red when a cherry combination is achieved, and blue when a replay combination is achieved). However, the color of the light could be set to a common color (for example, white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a winning combination has been achieved regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reels. In addition, the winning lamp animation can be performed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination that stops on the active line, thus preventing misinterpretation.
Furthermore, the common color regardless of the type of hand could be the same white for all hands, or it could be divided into several groups depending on the type of hand (e.g., bell and replay hands are white, cherry and watermelon hands are purple).

While the winning lamp animation was previously stated to run for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout end command, it may be set to run for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout start command. For example, when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination, or the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops, it may be set to 2.5 seconds.
The duration of the winning lamp effect is set to be the same as the duration of the payout sound output, but it may be set to a different duration. Similarly, the duration of the winning lamp effect is set to be the same as the duration of the backlight effect output, but it may be set to a different duration. The duration of the winning lamp effect can be set to be longer than the time required for payout processing (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for a hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although the winning lamp animation A is scheduled to be performed during normal play (outside of AT), it may also be performed during AT. Furthermore, the color may be the same, but the patterns of lighting up and extinguishing, and the execution time may be different. Alternatively, it may be chosen not to be performed during AT. By not performing it during AT, the winning lamp animation can be performed each time a winning combination is achieved, preventing annoyance to the player.
Other roles (cherry role, replay role) can also be configured to be executed during AT, or not executed during AT.

The winning lamp animation does not end with the MAX bet switch operation (receiving the storage input command) or the insertion of game tokens (receiving the storage count command), but it may also be configured to end with the MAX bet switch operation (receiving the storage input command) or the insertion of game tokens (receiving the storage count command). After a replay win, the winning lamp animation may not end in the automatic bet process, but may be configured to end only when game tokens are inserted afterward.
The backlight effect is supposed to end when the MAX bet switch is pressed (receiving the storage/insertion command) or when a game token is inserted (receiving the storage count command), but it may be configured not to end.

While the system does not currently use a winning LED lamp for the settlement animation, it may be used. This animation may be the same as the error notification animation performed when an error occurs, or it may be different from the error notification and the winning lamp animation performed when a winning combination is achieved. For a different animation, it is desirable that at least one of the following aspects of the winning LED lamp—color, flashing pattern, or duration—is different, so that it can be recognized as different from the error notification and the winning lamp animation.

While the system uses the winning LED lamp to notify players of errors when an error occurs, it is also possible to use the winning LED lamp to notify players of power-on errors and door-open errors in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When power-on, the notification continues for a certain period after power-on; when a door-open error occurs, it continues until the door is closed or until a certain period has elapsed after the door is closed. In these situations, gameplay can continue, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the winning lamp animation may overlap. In such cases, the error notification may be prioritized over the winning lamp animation. Prioritizing the error notification means that the system can be configured to prevent the winning lamp animation from being executed even if the conditions for execution are met while the error notification is running. Furthermore, if the winning lamp animation is running when the error notification is to be executed, the system can be configured to terminate the winning lamp animation before executing the error notification.

Furthermore, prioritizing error notifications means that the winning LED lamp will only illuminate in accordance with the error notification while it is active. Specifically, when the conditions for executing the winning lamp animation are met, the winning lamp animation will be executed. During the period when error notifications are active, the winning LED lamp will only illuminate in accordance with the error notification. If the period for executing the winning lamp animation continues after the period for executing the error notification has ended, the winning LED lamp will illuminate in accordance with the winning lamp animation.

The winning lamp animation is set to be executed when a winning combination of symbols stops on the correct symbol combination in a game where a specific button sequence is won, when a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry symbol stops, or when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay symbol stops. However, it may also be configured to be executed when a winning combination that does not depend on the button sequence (a so-called shared bell) is won, and a symbol combination corresponding to the non-constrained button sequence (the correct symbol combination) stops. It may also be configured to be executed when other winning combinations such as the watermelon symbol or the chance symbol are won.
Furthermore, the durations of time and periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as needed.

<Explanation regarding payout specifications across advantageous periods>
The RAM initialization process (also called the RAM initialization process at the end of the advantageous period) that occurs when transitioning from the advantageous period to the normal period updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0. Therefore, in conventional gaming machines, when transitioning from one advantageous period to the normal period and then to a new advantageous period, no information regarding the instruction function from the previous advantageous period could be carried over. As a result, even if, for example, 500 games remained in the AT in one advantageous period, once the upper limit of the advantageous period was reached, the AT would end and the remaining AT games would be initialized, often leaving the player feeling like they had lost out.
In light of this issue, we will explain a method for indirectly carrying over predetermined parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function (for example, predetermined modes related to AT winning, predetermined points related to AT winning, etc., also referred to as carryover parameters) to the next advantageous period by having the player win a bonus before the end of the advantageous period.

Here, the reel arrangement, symbol combinations, condition devices, and internal draw settings are basically the same as in Figures 11 to 21, but the replay probability does not change (non-RT is maintained) even if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a Type 1 BB is won. In other words, it is configured not to have RT1 (RT during Type 1 BB internal). It is also configured to have RT2, which is entered after the end of a Type 1 BB and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games). Furthermore, it is configured so that the transition to the advantageous section is determined even in games in which Replay-A or Replay-B is won, so the transition to the advantageous section is determined at approximately 1/1 (65532/65536) in the normal section. Furthermore, for the sake of explanation, we will refer to a non-RT and non-internal 1-type BB as "Non-RT1," and a non-RT and internal 1-type BB as "Non-RT2." However, Non-RT1 and Non-RT2 are the same RT, and the internal draw numbers are the same except that a 1-type BB win with a placement of 4 in Non-RT1 becomes a loss in Non-RT2.

The RT transition starts from non-RT1. If a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) is won during non-RT1 but the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the game transitions to non-RT2 from the next game (or at the end of that game). If the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops during non-RT2, non-RT2 ends and Type 1 BB is activated from the next game (also referred to as during Type 1 BB). Once the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the game transitions to RT2 (a finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB). After a predetermined number of games have been played in RT2, RT2 ends and the game transitions to non-RT1 from the next game. Furthermore, when a Type 1 BB is won during RT2, if the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops, RT2 ends and Type 1 BB activates from the next game. If the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, RT2 does not end, and after 5 games in RT2, RT2 ends and the game transitions to non-RT2 from the next game. Also, when the settings are changed, the game starts from non-RT (non-RT1). Therefore, if the setting change device is activated while the Type 1 BB condition device is active (during non-RT2) or while Type 1 BB is active, the game will be set to non-RT (non-RT1) when the setting change device finishes operating. Note that in the case of a power outage that does not activate the setting change device (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the game starts from the state before the power outage.

Furthermore, in games where a Type 1 BB is won during Non-RT1, games where there is a loss during Non-RT2, and games where any of the Push Order Bell C group (winning - C1 to C6) is won during Non-RT2, the system is configured to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination according to the operation of the stop switch. Note that in games where any of the Push Order Bell C group is won during the advantageous section, the system will notify the user of the stop switch operation method in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination will not stop, except in certain situations. By playing according to the notified operation method, the user can maintain Non-RT2.

In this embodiment, in order to indirectly carry over the carryover parameters (also referred to as the expected value regarding AT, the expected value regarding the notification game state, and predetermined information regarding the notification game state) from one advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous period 1) to the next advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous period 2), first in advantageous period 1, if a specific condition is met during AT (for example, the number of coins acquired during AT exceeds 2000, the number of games played during AT reaches a predetermined number, or the number of games played in one advantageous period reaches a predetermined number, and these are also referred to as ending conditions), the AT is configured to continue until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350) regardless of the remaining period of AT at the time the specific condition is met (the remaining number of games in AT, the remaining difference in coins that can be acquired during AT, etc.). Furthermore, if the upper limit of the advantageous period is defined not as when MY exceeds 2400, but rather as when the difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous period exceeds 2400, then the description "MY counter value" should be replaced with "difference in the number of game media in one advantageous period."

Subsequently, in games where the MY counter value exceeds a predetermined value and where a combination of 1-type BB symbols can be stopped, the system is configured to execute a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination. Furthermore, when executing the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination, the system is configured to notify the player of the stop switch operation method that enables the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination, rather than the operation method that prevents the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination even if one of the push-order bell C group symbols is won. Also, if the 1-type BB symbol combination does not stop in a game where the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination is executed, the system is configured to execute the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination again in a subsequent game where the 1-type BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After the Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) operation ends, the game transitions to RT2 from the next game. The advantageous period 1 ends during either the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or during a game in RT2, and all parameters are updated to 0. The game then transitions to the normal period and non-RT1 from the next game. The decision of whether the advantageous period 1 ends during the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or during a game in RT2 depends on the value of the carried-over parameters at the end of the game that met the ending conditions in the advantageous period 1. This decision is made at the end of the game that met the ending conditions.

After that, the system is configured to allow for a new determination of the carry-over parameter values based on the number of games played during RT2 after transitioning to the advantageous period 2 via the normal period.

Specifically, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game in advantageous section 1 that fulfills the ending conditions is the first value, then advantageous section 1 will end with the game in which the Type 1 Big Bonus has finished operating, and it will be decided that the game will transition from the normal section to advantageous section 2 in the first game of RT2. As a result, four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the value of the carryover parameter will be set to the first value.
Furthermore, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game in advantageous section 1 that meets the ending conditions is the second value, then after the operation of type 1 BB ends, it is decided that advantageous section 1 will end in the first game of RT2, and that the game will transition from the normal section to advantageous section 2 in the second game of RT2. As a result, three games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that three games were played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the second value.
Thus, the system is configured such that the value of the carry-over parameter at the time of transitioning to a non-RT (Replay Time) state in Advantageous Section 2 differs depending on the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of a game in Advantageous Section 1 where the ending conditions are met.

By changing the number of games played in RT2 at the start of the next advantageous period according to the value of the carryover parameter in the previous advantageous period, it is possible to roughly determine the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the previous advantageous period based on the number of games played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous period, and to indirectly carry over the value of the carryover parameter to the next advantageous period.

In this embodiment, the timing for determining whether to end the advantageous period 1 (either during a game where the operation of Type 1 BB ends or during RT2) is set to the end of a game in advantageous period 1 that satisfies the ending conditions. However, this is not limited to this. It may also be set to the end of a game in advantageous period 1 that satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), or to the end of a game in advantageous period 1 where the combination of Type 1 BB symbols stops after the predetermined condition is met.

Furthermore, even if the ending conditions are not met during the AT, but the advantageous period ends after the AT concludes, the system may be configured to indirectly carry over the value of the carryover parameter to the next advantageous period using a similar method. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to execute a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination during a game where a Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT concludes. Also, in this case, the system may be configured to determine, based on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the final game of the AT, whether the advantageous period ends during a game where the Type 1 BB operation ends or during any game in RT2.

Furthermore, if a player accidentally stops a combination of 1-type BB symbols without the designated animation prompting the player to stop the combination being executed, the advantageous period will continue even after the 1-type BB has finished operating. This configuration prevents the advantageous period from ending at an unintended time. It also prevents players from intentionally ending the advantageous period depending on the game situation.

<<Specific example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods 1>>
Next, using Figure 50, we will explain the case in which predetermined points related to AT winning are carried over to the next advantageous period as carryover parameters.

The points related to winning the AT (Attack Time) are managed by a designated counter (details omitted). These points accumulate when unfavorable events occur during gameplay, such as failing a continuous performance sequence or failing a Chance Zone (CZ). Reaching 100 points grants predetermined benefits, such as winning the AT or an extension of the remaining AT period.

Pattern A in Figure 50 shows the case where, at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions are met, the predetermined points related to winning the AT (Automatic Trigger) are between 0 and 30 points.

In Pattern A of Figure 50, the advantageous period 1 ends in the game where the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, and the transition from the normal period to advantageous period 2 is determined in the first game of RT2. Therefore, four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 2. Based on the fact that four games were played in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 2, the system is configured to set 30 to a predetermined point related to AT winning.

Pattern B in Figure 50 shows the case where, at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions are met, the predetermined points related to winning the AT (Automatic Trigger) are between 31 and 50 points.

In Pattern B of Figure 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the first game of RT2 ends the advantageous section 1, and the second game of RT2 determines a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 2. Therefore, three games are played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that three games were played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, the system is configured to set 50 to a predetermined point related to the AT win.

Pattern C in Figure 50 shows the case where, at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions are met, the predetermined points related to winning the AT (Automatic Trigger) are between 51 and 70 points.

In Pattern C of Figure 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the advantageous section 1 ends on the second game of RT2, and the transition from the normal section to advantageous section 2 is determined on the third game of RT2. Therefore, two games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that two games were played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the system is configured to set 70 to a predetermined point related to AT winning.

Pattern D in Figure 50 shows the case where, at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions are met, the predetermined points related to winning the AT (Automatic Trigger) were between 71 and 100 points.

In Pattern D of Figure 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the advantageous section 1 ends on the third game of RT2, and the transition from the normal section to advantageous section 2 is determined on the fourth game of RT2. Therefore, one game is played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that one game was played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the system is configured to set 100 to a predetermined point related to AT winning.

<<Specific example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods (2)>>
Next, using Figure 51, we will explain the case in which a predetermined mode related to AT winning is carried over as a carryover parameter to the next advantageous period.

The specific modes related to AT (Automatic Trigger) wins, while details omitted here, consist of four modes: Normal A, Normal B, Heaven Preparation, and Heaven. The probability of winning an AT during the general advantageous state differs depending on which mode the player is currently in.

Pattern A in Figure 51 shows the case where the player was in Normal A mode at the end of a game where the ending conditions were met in Advantageous Section 1.

In Pattern A of Figure 51, the advantageous period 1 ends in the game where the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, and the transition from the normal period to the advantageous period 2 is determined in the first game of RT2. Therefore, four games are played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous period 2. Based on the fact that four games were played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous period 2, the system is configured to set Normal A as the predetermined mode for AT winning.

Pattern B in Figure 51 shows the case where the player was in Normal B mode at the end of a game where the ending conditions were met in Advantageous Section 1.

In Pattern B of Figure 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the first game of RT2 ends the advantageous section 1, and the second game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 2. Therefore, three games are played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that three games were played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous section 2, the system is configured to set Normal B as the predetermined mode for AT winning.

Pattern C in Figure 51 shows the case where the player was in the Heaven Preparation state at the end of a game where the ending conditions were met in Advantageous Section 1.

In Pattern C of Figure 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the advantageous section 1 ends on the second game of RT2, and the transition from the normal section to advantageous section 2 is determined on the third game of RT2. Therefore, two games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that two games were played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the system is configured to set the predetermined mode for AT winning to Heaven Preparation.

Pattern D in Figure 51 shows the case where the player was in Heaven at the end of a game that met the ending conditions.

In Pattern D of Figure 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the advantageous section 1 ends on the third game of RT2, and the transition from the normal section to advantageous section 2 is determined on the fourth game of RT2. Therefore, one game is played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2. Based on the fact that one game was played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the system is configured to set Heaven mode as the predetermined mode for AT winning.

<<Specific example 3 of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods>>
Next, using Figure 52, we will explain the case in which predetermined information regarding the execution period of AT is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Here, the decision of which RT2 game to end the advantageous period with is determined by the number of remaining AT stocks at the end of the advantageous period. However, if the system is configured to clear the remaining AT stocks when the ending conditions are met, the decision of which RT2 game to end the advantageous period with may be determined by the number of remaining AT stocks at the time the ending conditions are met. Furthermore, instead of the number of remaining AT stocks as predetermined information regarding the AT execution period, the remaining number of AT games may be used as a carry-over parameter if it is a game-count-managed AT, or the remaining number of coins that can be obtained in the AT may be used as a carry-over parameter if it is a difference-coin-managed AT.

The remaining AT stock count refers to information regarding the remaining duration of the AT in a so-called set-management type AT. While details are omitted here, for example, in an AT that lasts for 50 games per set, if there are remaining stocks after each 50 games, the game moves to the next set. If there are no remaining stocks, a continuation lottery is held, and if unsuccessful, the AT ends.

Pattern A in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining AT stock is 0 at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions have been met.

In Pattern A of Figure 52, it is decided that the advantageous period 1 will end when the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, and it is decided that the transition from the normal period to the advantageous period 2 will occur during the first game of RT2. Therefore, four games will be played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous period 2. Based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous period 2, the system is configured to set the remaining stock number of AT to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of AT.

Pattern B in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining AT stock is 1 at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions have been met.

In Pattern B of Figure 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, it is decided to end Advantageous Section 1 during the first game of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal section to Advantageous Section 2 during the second game of RT2. Therefore, three games are played in RT2 at the start of Advantageous Section 2. Based on the fact that three games were played in RT2 at the start of Advantageous Section 2, the system is configured to set the remaining stock count of AT to 1 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of AT.

Pattern C in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining AT stock is 2 at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions have been met.

In Pattern C of Figure 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, it is decided to end Advantageous Section 1 during the second game of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal section to Advantageous Section 2 during the third game of RT2. Therefore, two games are played in RT2 at the start of Advantageous Section 2. Based on the fact that two games were played in RT2 at the start of Advantageous Section 2, the system is configured to set the remaining stock number of AT to 2 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of AT.

Pattern D in Figure 52 shows the case where the number of remaining AT stocks is 3 or more at the end of a game in the advantageous section 1 where the ending conditions have been met.

In Pattern D of Figure 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB ends, it is decided to end Advantageous Section 1 on the 3rd game of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal section to Advantageous Section 2 on the 4th game of RT2. Therefore, one game is played in RT2 at the start of Advantageous Section 2. Based on the fact that one game was played in RT2 at the start of Advantageous Section 2, the system is configured to set the remaining stock number of AT to 3 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of AT.

By configuring the system as shown in specific examples 1 to 3 above, the values of the carry-over parameters from one advantageous period can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous period. This prevents the carry-over parameters from being reset by the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period, thus preventing the player from incurring losses. Furthermore, it provides an incentive for players to continue playing even after one advantageous period ends and the game transitions to the next.

As shown in Figures 50 to 52, the system is configured so that the timing of the end of the advantageous period is delayed as the value of the carryover parameter increases. This is because there is a 4/65536 probability that the normal period will continue. For example, in pattern B of Figure 50, the system is designed so that 50 is set to a predetermined point related to AT winning at the start of advantageous period 2. However, if the normal period continues for two games, two games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 2, so 70 will be set to the predetermined point related to AT winning. In this way, by configuring the system so that the timing of the end of the advantageous period is delayed as the value of the carryover parameter increases, it is possible to ensure that players do not lose money even if the normal period happens to continue for two or more games.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that a larger value for the carryover parameter results in an earlier end to the advantageous period. This configuration ensures that the arcade does not incur losses even if the normal period happens to continue for two consecutive games.

Note that while RT2 is configured to end after 5 games, the number of games required to end RT2 can be appropriately set according to the carryover parameters that you wish to indirectly carry over to the next advantageous period.

Furthermore, by increasing the number of games played before RT2 ends, it is possible to indirectly carry over multiple carryover parameters to the next advantageous period.
For example, one of the predetermined points related to winning the AT, the predetermined mode related to winning the AT, and the predetermined information related to the remaining period of the AT may be carried over as a carry-over parameter, or two of them may be carried over as a carry-over parameter, or all three may be carried over as a carry-over parameter.
It should also be noted that, in addition to the three parameters mentioned above, you may set up four or more carry-over parameters.

As described above, we have explained a method of indirectly carrying over predetermined parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function in one advantageous period to the next advantageous period using RT2 (a finite RT after the end of one type of BB). However, by connecting multiple advantageous periods using RT2, it is also possible to provide players with game tokens that exceed the upper limit of the advantageous period.
The following explanation will be given using Figures 88 and 89.

<<Specific example of payout specifications that span across advantageous periods 4>>
Here, using Figure 88, we will explain an example in which, in the first advantageous period after a setting change, if a specific flag is hit (for example, in a game where a 4/65536 win occurs, or in a game where a 4/65536 win occurs and a predetermined payout lottery is won, etc., hitting a specific flag can be said to mean fulfilling specific conditions), the player is given game media exceeding the upper limit of the difference in the number of game media (game value) in one advantageous period.

In the example shown in Figure 88, the system is configured to determine which of the games in which the Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) operation ends—either the game in which the operation ends or any game in RT2—will end, based on a value stored in a predetermined storage means (also called an RT2 counter) capable of storing the number of games played in RT2 at the start of a particular advantageous period.

Furthermore, the RT2 counter may be configured to count the number of games played in RT2 at the start of one advantageous period, or it may be configured to store the remaining number of games played in RT2 at the start of one advantageous period. The RT2 counter is configured to be initialized at the end of the advantageous period.

Furthermore, RT2 is configured to end after five rounds of gameplay.

Furthermore, during normal gameplay, if the game is in an RT state (non-RT1, non-RT2, RT2) where a transition to the advantageous section can be determined, the system is configured to determine the transition to the advantageous section with a probability of approximately 1/1 based on the results of an internal lottery (not based on the RT state). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 21, the system is configured so that the transition to the advantageous section shown in Figure 21 is not determined during a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB). However, the system is not limited to this configuration; even during a Type 1 BB, the system may be configured to determine the transition to the advantageous section with a probability of approximately 1/1 based on the results of an internal lottery, or it may be configured to determine the transition to the advantageous section with a probability lower than approximately 1/1 (e.g., 1/10) based on the results of an internal lottery.

In the example shown in Figure 88, first, in advantageous section 1 (the first advantageous section after a setting change), if a specific flag is hit (if a specific condition is met), the AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 1 exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 2350). After the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, in a game where the combination of 1 type BB symbols can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to encourage the stopping of the 1 type BB symbol combination. Here, the predetermined effect to encourage the stopping of the 1 type BB symbol combination can be any effect that allows the player to judge that it is appropriate to stop the 1 type BB symbol combination, such as displaying an image that says "Aim for 7!". The player can stop (win) the 1 type BB symbol combination by operating the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to encourage the stopping of the 1 type BB symbol combination. Note that advantageous section 1 is the first advantageous section after a setting change, and since the game starts from a non-RT and non-internal 1 type BB after a setting change, the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous section 1 is 0. Furthermore, even if a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination is performed, if the stop switch is operated in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner without following the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination cannot be stopped (winning). In such cases, in a subsequent game where the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped, the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination will be performed again.

Subsequently, if the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to a predetermined animation prompting them to stop the combination of 1-type BB symbols, the combination of 1-type BB symbols will stop (winning), and the 1-type BB will begin to operate.

Subsequently, based on the RT2 counter value being 0, the game that fulfills the termination conditions for Type 1 Big Bonus (the game in which the Type 1 Big Bonus operation ends) ends the advantageous section 1. Then, the transition to advantageous section 2 is determined in the game following the game that ended advantageous section 1 (the first game of RT2 (a game in the normal section)). After that, since four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous section 2, the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous section 2 becomes 4.

In Advantageous Section 2, upon transitioning to a non-RT state, the AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in Advantageous Section 2 exceeds a predetermined value, based on the RT2 counter value being 4. After the difference in game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed during gameplay where stopping the Type 1 BB symbol combination is possible. If the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (winning), and the Type 1 BB operation begins.

Subsequently, based on the RT2 counter value being 4, the first game of RT2 ends the advantageous period 2. Then, the transition to advantageous period 3 is determined in the game immediately following the game that ended advantageous period 2 (the second game of RT2). After that, three games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 3, so the RT2 counter value in advantageous period 3 becomes 3.

In advantageous section 3, upon transitioning to non-RT mode, the AT is executed based on the RT2 counter value being 3 until the difference in game media in advantageous section 3 exceeds a predetermined value. After the difference in game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed during gameplay where stopping the Type 1 BB symbol combination is possible. If the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (winning), and the Type 1 BB is activated.

Subsequently, based on the RT2 counter value being 3, the advantageous period 3 ends during the second game of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous period 4 is determined during the game immediately following the game that ended advantageous period 3 (the third game of RT2). After that, since two games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 4, the RT2 counter value in advantageous period 4 becomes 2.

In advantageous section 4, upon transitioning to non-RT mode, the AT is executed until the difference in game media in advantageous section 4 exceeds a predetermined value, based on the RT2 counter value being 2. After the difference in game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed during gameplay where stopping the Type 1 BB symbol combination is possible. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (winning), and the Type 1 BB is activated. A Type 1 BB is then awarded.

Subsequently, based on the RT2 counter value being 2, the advantageous period 4 ends during the third game of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous period 5 is determined during the game immediately following the game that ended advantageous period 4 (the fourth game of RT2). After that, one game is played in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 5, so the RT2 counter value in advantageous period 5 becomes 1.

In the advantageous period 5, the AT lottery state is set to a predetermined suppression state based on the value of the RT2 counter being 1. While the system may be configured to allow for AT wins in the predetermined suppression state, it is configured so that the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous period does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, in the predetermined suppression state, the system is controlled so that the advantageous period does not end due to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous period exceeding an upper limit (e.g., 2400). Here, in order to maintain the predetermined suppression state without excessive gambling risk, it is preferable to configure the system so that the advantageous period does not end after a predetermined number of games. However, it is also possible to set an upper limit (e.g., 4000) based on the number of games played in the advantageous period so that the predetermined suppression state can end.

Thus, the system is configured to determine, based on the value of the RT2 counter, whether the advantageous period ends during a game where the operation of Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) ends or during a game in RT2. Furthermore, based on the value of the RT2 counter, it is configured to determine whether to execute the AT (Attack Time) until the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value, or to set the AT lottery state to a predetermined suppression state. In other words, the system is configured to determine the expected value of the AT (the amount of benefit granted to the player) based on the value of the RT2 counter. Specifically, when the value of the RT2 counter is 1, the system is configured to enter a predetermined suppression state, and when the value of the RT2 counter is other than 1, the system is configured not to enter a predetermined suppression state and to execute the AT until the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value. It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not a predetermined suppression state is entered, the expected values related to the AT, such as the expected value of winning the AT, the expected value of additional wins during the AT, and the expected value of the AT continuation, may also be determined based on the value of the RT2 counter.

This configuration makes it possible to award game tokens across multiple advantageous periods based on hitting a specific flag, allowing the player to receive more game tokens than the maximum limit for a single advantageous period. This eliminates the negative image associated with game machines that limit the maximum gain per win to 2400 tokens. Furthermore, the final advantageous period (corresponding to advantageous period 5 mentioned above), which is transitioned to based on hitting a specific flag, enters a predetermined suppression state, preventing excessive gambling risk.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that there is no advantageous period in games where the operation of type 1 BB ends, and the advantageous period ends only in games during RT2, and the system may be configured so that it can be determined which game in RT2 the advantageous period will end based on the value of the RT2 counter. In this case, if a specific flag is hit in advantageous period 1, advantageous period 1 will end in the first game of RT2, advantageous period 2 will end in the second game of RT2, advantageous period 3 will end in the third game of RT2, and the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous period 4 will become 1, so a predetermined suppression state will be entered in advantageous period 4.
By configuring it in this way, the RT state at the end of the advantageous period will be one of the RT2 game modes, so the processing can be kept simple.

Furthermore, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB while a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination is not being performed, predetermined information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is stored in a predetermined RWM. When this predetermined information is stored, the system is configured so that the advantageous period does not end even after the operation of the Type 1 BB has finished, regardless of the value of the RT2 counter. Additionally, the system is configured so that the value of the RT2 counter is not updated in RT2 after the operation of the mistakenly won Type 1 BB has finished. The predetermined information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is configured to be initialized in a game that transitions from RT2 to a non-RT state.
This configuration ensures that players do not incur losses even if they accidentally trigger a type 1 Big Bonus.

Furthermore, while RT2 is configured to end after 5 rounds of play, the number of rounds required to end RT2 can be adjusted as needed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 88, the AT (Attack Time) is started immediately after a specific flag is hit and the game transitions from RT2 to non-RT mode. However, the system is not limited to this configuration; it may also be configured to start the AT after a predetermined number of pre-AT (non-AT) rounds.

<<5 Specific Examples of Payout Specifications that Cross the Advantageous Period>>
Here, using Figure 89, we will explain an example in which, in the first advantageous period after a setting change, if a specific flag is hit (for example, in a game where a 4/65536 win occurs, or in a game where a 4/65536 win occurs and a predetermined payout lottery is won, etc., hitting a specific flag can be said to mean fulfilling specific conditions), the player is given game media exceeding the upper limit of the difference in the number of game media (game value) in one advantageous period.

In the example shown in Figure 89, the system is configured to determine the AT (Attack Time) lottery state based on the current RT (Replay Time) state, referencing the RT state. When the RT state is RT2 (a finite RT after the completion of a Type 1 Big Bonus), the AT lottery state is configured to be a predetermined preferential state (also called a super-preferential state). In the super-preferential state, if not in AT mode, the player wins AT regardless of the winning combination, or the player wins AT with a high probability compared to a predetermined game state (for example, a specific game state different from the super-preferential state). Furthermore, if in AT mode, the AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit (2400). The AT lottery state refers to states that affect the results of AT lotteries, such as AT transition lottery (also called AT initial win lottery), AT bonus lottery, AT termination condition update (addition/subtraction of AT game count, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification count), and AT execution (notification of operation mode).

Note that RT2 is configured to terminate after 2000 rounds of gameplay.

Furthermore, the advantageous period does not end after a predetermined number of games have been played. Instead, it is configured to end when the difference in the number of game tokens used in the advantageous period exceeds the upper limit (2400), or when any termination condition is met.

Furthermore, regardless of the AT (Automatic Trigger) lottery status, the system is configured to execute the AT immediately upon the start of any advantageous period other than advantageous period 1. Alternatively, the system may be configured to execute the AT after a predetermined number of pre-announcement games (e.g., 32 games).

Furthermore, Advantageous Section 1 is an advantageous section that is determined to be entered during gameplay in a normal section and not in RT1 (not in RT and not in a Type 1 Big Bonus internally). Specifically, it is the first advantageous section after a setting change. Advantageous Sections 2 through 5 are advantageous sections other than the first after a setting change. A flag (referred to as the Advantageous Section 1 flag) for distinguishing between Advantageous Section 1 and other advantageous sections is configured to be stored in a predetermined memory area, and the system is configured to distinguish between Advantageous Section 1 and other advantageous sections based on the Advantageous Section 1 flag. The Advantageous Section 1 flag is configured to be initialized at the end of an advantageous section.

Here, we will explain the specific method for distinguishing between advantageous interval 1 and other advantageous intervals. Note that in the example shown in Figure 89, the system is configured to determine the transition to an advantageous interval even in the case of a single win of type 1 BB.

In the example shown in Figure 89, in the normal section, a single win of type 1 BB occurs, followed by replay - C (+ type 1 BB), replay - D (+ type 1 BB), replay - E (+ type 1 BB), replay - F (+ type 1 BB), replay - G (+ type 1 BB), replay - H (+ type 1 BB), replay - I (+ type 1 BB), replay - J (+ type 1 BB), win - D (+ type 1 BB), win - E (+ type 1 BB), win - F (+ 1 If you win any of the following: type BB, win-G (+1 type BB), win-H (+1 type BB), win-I (+1 type BB), win-J (+1 type BB), or win-K (+1 type BB), the game is configured to transition to the advantageous section if the RT state of the game is not RT1, and not to transition to the advantageous section if the RT state of the game is not RT2 or RT2. Furthermore, if you win one of the following prizes during the normal section: Prize A1, Prize A2, Prize A3, Prize A4, Prize A5, Prize A6, Prize B1, Prize B2, Prize B3, Prize B4, Prize B5, Prize B6, Prize C1, Prize C2, Prize C3, Prize C4, Prize C5, or Prize C6, the game is configured to transition to the advantageous section regardless of the RT (Replay Time) state of the game.

Therefore, a single win of 1 type BB, replay - C (+ 1 type BB), replay - D (+ 1 type BB), replay - E (+ 1 type BB), replay - F (+ 1 type BB), replay - G (+ 1 type BB), replay - H (+ 1 type BB), replay - I (+ 1 type BB), replay - J (+ 1 type BB), prize - D (+ 1 type BB), prize - E (+ 1 type BB), prize - F (+ 1 type BB), prize - G (+ 1 type BB), prize - If a game in which a win occurs in any of the following scenarios (a game in which a win occurs in a 1-type BB): H (+1 type BB), Winning - I (+1 type BB), Winning - J (+1 type BB), or Winning - K (+1 type BB), then a transition to the advantageous section is determined to be the advantageous section that was decided to be entered during a non-RT1 period. Therefore, it is determined to be Advantageous Section 1, and the Advantageous Section 1 flag is turned on for the game in which the transition to the advantageous section was decided.
Furthermore, there are cases where the game ending RT2 and the game ending the advantageous period overlap, and in this case, the next game may be in the normal period and not RT1, so there is a risk that the transition to the advantageous period will be decided during a non-RT1 period, even if it is not immediately after a setting change, but a single win of type 1 BB, replay-C (+1 type BB), replay-D (+1 type BB), replay-E (+1 type BB), replay-F (+1 type BB), replay-G (+1 type BB), replay-H (+1 type BB), replay-I (+1 type The probability of winning any of the following is set to 21918/65536 (approximately 1/3) as shown in Figure 19: BB), replay - J (+1 type BB), win - D (+1 type BB), win - E (+1 type BB), win - F (+1 type BB), win - G (+1 type BB), win - H (+1 type BB), win - I (+1 type BB), win - J (+1 type BB), win - K (+1 type BB). Therefore, the probability of remaining in non-RT1 mode after 2000 spins and the end of RT2 is infinitesimally close to 0. Thus, the advantageous period to which the transition is decided during non-RT1 mode is considered the first advantageous period after the setting change.

Furthermore, if a game in which a win occurs in any of the following categories—A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, or C6—and a transition to an advantageous section is determined, it is not possible to determine whether the advantageous section is Advantageous Section 1 or another advantageous section in that game. Therefore, the system is configured to refer to the RT state and the operating state of the Type 1 BB condition device in the first game of that advantageous section. If the first game of that advantageous section is not RT1 (not RT and not internally in Type 1 BB), it is confirmed that the advantageous section is an advantageous section to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be Advantageous Section 1, and the Advantageous Section 1 flag is turned ON. Furthermore, if the first game in the relevant advantageous period is either non-RT2 (non-RT and internally in a Type 1 Big Bonus) or RT2, it is confirmed that the advantageous period is not one that was decided to transition to during non-RT1. Therefore, it is determined to be an advantageous period other than Advantageous Period 1, and the Advantageous Period 1 flag is not turned on.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that the advantageous period does not end while a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) is active, and so that the transition to the advantageous period is not determined while a Type 1 BB is active. Therefore, the transition to the advantageous period is determined only during gameplay in either non-RT1, non-RT2, or RT2 modes.

In this way, the system is configured to distinguish between advantageous period 1 and other advantageous periods by controlling the advantageous period 1 flag.

In the example shown in Figure 89, during the AT (Automatic Trigger) of Advantageous Section 1 (the first advantageous section after a setting change), if a specific flag is hit (if specific conditions are met), a predetermined animation prompting the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed in a game where a Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to the predetermined animation prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (winning), and the Type 1 BB is activated.

Next, once the operation of the first type of Big Bonus (BB) ends, the game transitions to RT2 from the next play. In RT2, the AT (Attack Time) lottery state becomes extremely favorable, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 1 exceeds the upper limit (2400). When the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 1 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous section 1 ends.

Next, after passing through the normal section, once the conditions for starting the advantageous section are met (i.e., the transition to the advantageous section is decided), advantageous section 2 begins. Even at the start of advantageous section 2, the RT state remains RT2, so the AT lottery state becomes extremely favorable. The AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 2 exceeds the upper limit, at which point advantageous section 2 ends.

Next, after passing through the normal section, once the conditions for starting the advantageous section are met (i.e., the transition to the advantageous section is decided), advantageous section 3 begins. Even at the start of advantageous section 3, the RT state remains RT2, so the AT lottery state is extremely favorable. The AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 3 exceeds the upper limit, at which point advantageous section 3 ends.

Next, after passing through the normal section, once the conditions for starting the advantageous section are met (i.e., the transition to the advantageous section is decided), advantageous section 4 begins. Even at the start of advantageous section 4, the RT state is RT2, so the AT lottery state is extremely favorable. The AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 4 exceeds the upper limit, at which point advantageous section 4 ends.

Next, after passing through the normal section, once the conditions for starting the advantageous section are met (i.e., the transition to the advantageous section is decided), advantageous section 5 begins. Even at the start of advantageous section 5, the RT state is RT2, so the AT lottery state becomes a super-favorable state and AT is executed. However, during a certain game in advantageous section 5, RT2 ends and the game transitions to non-RT. Upon transitioning from RT2 to non-RT, the AT state is controlled to a predetermined suppression state. While the game may be configured to allow AT wins in the predetermined suppression state, it is configured so that the difference in game media in the advantageous section does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, in the predetermined suppression state, the game is controlled so that the advantageous section does not end due to the difference in game media exceeding the upper limit. Furthermore, in the predetermined suppression state, certain flags are not drawn, or while certain flags are drawn, they are not won.

Subsequently, under a predetermined suppression state, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section is controlled so that it does not exceed the upper limit. Therefore, if the AT termination condition is met during a game in advantageous section 5, the game becomes non-AT, and the system is controlled to prevent advantageous section 5 from ending thereafter.

As shown in Figure 89, the system is configured to determine the AT (Automatic Trigger) lottery state based on the RT (Replay Time) state, and when the RT state is RT2 (a finite RT after the completion of Type 1 Big Bonus), the AT lottery state is configured to be a super-favorable state. Furthermore, if the system is not in RT mode during Advantageous Section 1 (the first advantageous section after a setting change), the AT lottery state is set to a normal state, and if the system is not in RT mode during any advantageous section other than Advantageous Section 1, the AT lottery state is set to a predetermined suppressed state.

By configuring the system in this way, a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) is awarded based on hitting a specific flag, and then the system is controlled to a highly favorable state in RT2 (Replay Time 2) that follows the end of the Type 1 BB. This makes it possible to award game tokens across multiple advantageous periods, allowing the player to receive game tokens exceeding the upper limit of what can be awarded in a single advantageous period. This dispels the negative image associated with gaming machines that feature advantageous periods where a maximum of 2400 tokens can be obtained per win. Furthermore, when RT2 ends and the system transitions to a non-RT state, a predetermined suppression state is entered, preventing excessive gambling.

Furthermore, the system may be configured such that the difference in the number of game media in advantageous period 1 exceeds the upper limit without hitting a specific flag in advantageous period 1, thus ending advantageous period 1. In this case, the next advantageous period after advantageous period 1 starts with AT (or AT is executed after a predetermined number of pre-announcement games), but the RT state remains non-RT, so it does not become a super-favorable state, and when AT ends, it is controlled to a predetermined suppression state so that the advantageous period does not end.
By reducing the expected value of winning game currency when a specific flag is not hit, it is possible to increase the expected value of winning game currency when a specific flag is hit, while simultaneously reducing the overall gambling aspect of the game machine.

Furthermore, during RT2 after hitting a specific flag, approximately one game of normal gameplay (non-AT gameplay) is played each time the advantageous section ends, but the LCD display is configured to continue executing AT effects. In addition, the display of the number of wins during AT shown on the LCD at this time is configured not to be cleared each time the advantageous section ends, but to display the cumulative number of wins accumulated across multiple advantageous sections.
This configuration allows for seamless gameplay even when the game is configured to provide gameplay media across multiple advantageous periods.

Furthermore, while the system is configured to allow for winning a specific flag during advantageous period 1, it is configured not to allow for winning a specific flag during advantageous periods other than advantageous period 1.
By configuring it in this way, if a specific flag is hit again in the super-favorable state and RT2 is reset after the end of the 1st type BB, the super-favorable state will not be effectively extended, thus preventing the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high.

Furthermore, if a player accidentally wins a Type 1 Big Bonus while not having hit a specific flag in Advantageous Section 1, the system is configured so that even when transitioning to RT2, the AT lottery state will not be set to an extremely favorable state. Additionally, the system is configured so that the difference in the number of game media in the Advantageous Section exceeds the upper limit without hitting a specific flag during RT2, preventing the Advantageous Section from ending.
Furthermore, if a player accidentally wins a Type 1 Big Bonus during the super-favorable state of an advantageous section other than advantageous section 1, RT2 will be reset. However, the system is configured so that the super-favorable state is not activated during the reset RT2, and so that the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section does not exceed the upper limit during the reset RT2, preventing the advantageous section from ending.
Furthermore, if a player accidentally wins a Type 1 Big Bonus while in a predetermined suppression state in an advantageous period other than Advantageous Period 1, the system is configured to maintain the predetermined suppression state even when transitioning to RT2.
This configuration means that players who unintentionally win a Type 1 Big Bonus will lose money, but it prevents players from intentionally winning a Type 1 Big Bonus to acquire a large amount of game currency.

Furthermore, in a game where a specific flag is hit in advantageous section 1 and a combination of 1-type BB symbols can be stopped, a predetermined performance is performed to encourage the stopping of the 1-type BB symbol combination, but if the player fails to stop the 1-type BB symbol combination, the predetermined performance will not be performed again in subsequent games. Instead, the same performance as when the 1-type BB symbol combination was stopped in the game in which the predetermined performance was performed will be performed, and the AT will continue until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous section 1 exceeds the upper limit and the termination condition of advantageous section 1 is met. When the termination condition of the AT, which is performed at the start of the next advantageous section, is met, the AT will end, and thereafter the AT lottery state will be set to a predetermined suppression state. In other words, the expected value of gameplay when a 1-type BB is not won in a game in which the predetermined performance is performed may be set to be smaller than the expected value of gameplay when a 1-type BB is won in a game in which the predetermined performance is performed.
By reducing the expected value of winning when the player fails to time their button press correctly, the expected value of winning when they do is increased. Furthermore, even if the player fails to time their button press correctly, the same animation as when they succeed will be performed, allowing the game to proceed without causing any discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, while the system is configured to draw a specific flag during gameplay in AT (Attack Time) mode within Advantageous Section 1, it is not limited to this configuration. A specific flag may also be drawn during non-AT gameplay within Advantageous Section 1. If the specific flag is drawn, a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) is awarded. After the BB ends and the system transitions to RT2 (Replay Time), the AT-related draw state is set to a highly favorable state, and the AT begins.

In this embodiment, only type 1 BB was included in the draw, but instead, RB or MB may also be included, or two or all of type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be included in the draw.

<Regarding the stop-down difference counter that stores the difference from the time the power is turned on>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a value (difference) is calculated for each game by subtracting the number of tokens inserted (sometimes referred to as the number of tokens inserted, the number of tokens bet, the number of tokens wagered Furthermore, the process of updating the stop-loss difference counter and making decisions regarding the stop-loss process before executing the stop-loss process is also referred to as the stop-loss monitoring process.

The following explanation primarily describes an example where the stop-play process is executed when the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value, with the power-on time as the starting point (0). However, this is not the only example. For instance, after power-on, the point where the player's winnings are lowest may be used as the reference point (0), and the stop-play process may be executed when the difference in the number of game media from that reference point exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, the stop-play process may be executed based on MY (My Own).

For example, if, after power-on, the point at which the player's payout is lowest is set as the baseline (0), and a stop-play process is executed when the difference in the number of game media from that baseline exceeds a predetermined value, then the stop-play difference counter can store either the difference in the number of game media from the baseline (0) when the point at which the player's payout is lowest is set as the baseline (0), or a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media from the baseline (0) when the point at which the player's payout is lowest is set as the baseline (a value that allows the difference in the number of game media from the baseline (0) when the point at which the player's payout is lowest is set as the baseline).

This stop-loss monitoring process is executed not only during the advantageous period but also during the normal period (it is executed regardless of the game period).

For example, in a game where the total number of tokens dispensed since power-on is 50,001 and the total number of tokens inserted since power-on is 31,000, the value of the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 19,000. Therefore, information indicating that the stop-loss condition has been met is stored in the stop-loss flag memory area for that game, and the stop-loss process is made possible.

The stop flag memory area is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. For example, if the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000 starting from power-on, a predetermined value (for example, a predefined number such as "1" or "255") is stored in the stop flag memory area as information indicating that the stop condition has been met.

Furthermore, if information indicating that the termination condition has been met is stored in the termination flag memory area, the termination process can be executed.

Furthermore, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by simply powering on (normal power ON) or powering off (power switch OFF) without changing any settings. Also, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by the RWM clear upon the end of the advantageous period. Note that powering on without changing any settings refers to, for example, turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is OFF.

In other words, if the power is turned OFF (power switch is turned off) while the stop-play process is running, and then the power is turned back on without any setting changes, the stop-play process will not be canceled and will continue to run. Furthermore, even if the game ending the advantageous period is one that meets the stop-play conditions, the RWM clear at the end of the advantageous period does not initialize the value of the stop-play difference counter related to the stop-play conditions, nor does it clear the information stored in the stop-play flag memory area; the stop-play process will continue to run.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on the system with a setting change (RWM clearing process associated with the setting change) (the information indicating that the stop condition has been met can be cleared).

Furthermore, a separate RWM clear switch may be provided, distinct from the setting key switch. If the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated (i.e., the RWM clear switch is ON), the information stored in the stop flag memory area may be cleared. When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated, the system will not enter setting change mode, but the RWM clear process associated with the RWM clear switch will be performed.

The RWM clear switch may also be used as the reset switch. In other words, the information stored in the stop flag memory area may be cleared when the power is turned on while the reset switch is operated (i.e., when the reset switch is ON).

As described above, if the power is turned OFF and then ON again with a setting change while the stop-loss process is being executed, the system will transition to setting change mode. After the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the stop-loss process will not be executed, and the system will be in a state where gameplay is possible (a state where betting is possible).

Furthermore, the information stored in the stop-out flag memory area is not initialized by operating the reset switch, which can clear predetermined error states (such as door open errors or medal retention errors), and the stop-out process is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stop-down process is running, the stop-down process will not be canceled and will continue to run.

Here, we have explained the conditions for clearing and not clearing information stored in the stop flag memory area. However, the conditions for clearing and not clearing information stored in the temporary stop flag memory area, which will be discussed later, are the same as those for clearing and not clearing information stored in the stop flag memory area.

The "stopping process" refers to any of the following actions, or all of them: not adding bets or credits upon inserting medals; turning off the blocker to prevent the addition of bets or credits even when medals are inserted; not executing bets even when the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch is activated; disabling the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch; not executing the reel rotation start process even when the start switch is activated; disabling the start switch; not executing the reel stop process even when the stop switch is activated; or disabling the stop switch.

In other words, the stop-play process prevents the player from taking any further actions to initiate the next game (this is also referred to as stopping the game's progress). This state, when the stop-play process is in effect, is sometimes referred to as the stop-play state or the activation of the complete function.

Even when gameplay is stopped due to a payout process, the settlement switch remains active, and settlement processing is possible. Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not use physical tokens (so-called tokenless gaming machines), the settlement switch, which allows transfer of bet tokens (electronic tokens) to the token count display device (a device capable of storing up to 16,383 tokens, similar to the conventional token tray 28), and the counting switch, which allows transfer of the token count stored in the token count display device to the dispensing unit, remain active, and processing based on the operation of these switches is possible.

If gameplay is stopped due to a "stop" process, it cannot be reversed by simply turning the power on. The game can only be reversed by performing an RWM initialization process through a power-on process that involves changing settings. In other words, a gaming machine that enters a "stop" state during the arcade's operating hours cannot be operated for the remainder of that day's business.

Thus, because exceeding a predetermined value in the payout counter could potentially induce excessive gambling tendencies in players, stopping the game when the payout counter exceeds a predetermined value can prevent excessive gambling addiction.

Furthermore, the stop-loss difference counter may also be referred to as a difference counter, difference storage means, difference storage means, difference storage area, difference storage area, game medium count storage means, game medium count storage area, game medal count storage means, game medal count storage area, MY counter at power-on, MY storage means at power-on, MY storage area at power-on, stop-loss counter, stop-loss difference counter for stop-loss, MY counter for stop-loss, MY storage means for stop-loss, MY storage area for stop-loss, complete difference counter, or complete MY counter.

The value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is configured to be initialized when the machine is in a stop-loss state or when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the machine is in a stop-loss state or not. In this embodiment, the stop-loss difference counter has an initial value of 0 and increments from that initial value. Therefore, initialization upon power-on means setting the stop-loss difference counter value to 0. However, if the stop-loss difference counter has an initial value of 19000 and is a subtractive counter, then initialization upon power-on means setting the stop-loss difference counter value to 19000. Note that "power-on" includes not only normal power-on, but also power-on with setting changes and power-on with RWM abnormalities. Furthermore, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is not initialized during the RWM initialization process executed when the conditions for ending the advantageous section (for example, when MY exceeds 2400 during the advantageous section, or when the number of games played during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number) are met.

Furthermore, since the stop-loss counter is easily compromised if it is initialized simply by powering on, it may be configured so that the stop-loss counter is cleared by pressing a designated switch that the player cannot operate, such as a setting change switch, reset switch, or RAM clear switch, while powering on the system when power is not supplied.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the game is stopped due to the stop-loss counter exceeding a predetermined value, and the system is powered on normally with the setting key switch 37 in the OFF position, the stop-loss counter will be reset, but the game will remain stopped. This is because the system executes a stop-loss process when the stop-loss counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this process is configured to repeat indefinitely using jump commands, etc. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the stop-loss process and the power is restored, the stop-loss process will begin again. Note that interrupt processing occurs during the stop-loss process, and while the interrupt processing is executed as usual, the system does not return to the normal main loop processing from the interrupt processing; instead, it loops through the stop-loss process.

Furthermore, since interrupt processing is executed normally while the shutdown process is running, the above-mentioned power-off process can be executed normally even if an event that cuts off the power (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the shutdown process.

This configuration prevents the game from resuming after it has stopped due to a halt process, by allowing the power to be cut and then turned back on illegally.

The payout difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of tokens inserted from the number of tokens paid out for each game. This section explains a specific example of updating the payout difference counter. The process of updating the payout difference counter is executed at a predetermined timing between the time all reels have stopped and the time when tokens for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game becomes possible). Since the process of updating the payout difference counter is executed at the end of one game, this predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as "after the end of one game." Furthermore, the payout difference counter is explained as 2-byte data. The "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates the delimiter of each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value shows the decimal value of the binary value.

<When the stop-loss counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals dispensed = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the payout difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals dispensed)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7) to obtain the value of the payout difference counter, and the result of adding the calculation result to the value of the payout difference counter is stored (updated) in the payout difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the payout difference counter will be 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the stop-loss counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), payout amount = 00000000b (0), and insert amount = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the payout difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals dispensed)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3) to obtain the value of the payout difference counter, and the result of adding the calculation result to the value of the payout difference counter is stored (updated) in the payout difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the payout difference counter will be 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the stop-loss counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals dispensed = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the payout difference counter is 00000000/00000000b(0), the register calculates 00001010b(10 (number of medals dispensed)) - 00000011b(3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b(7) to obtain the value of the payout difference counter, and the result of adding the calculation result to the value of the payout difference counter is stored (updated) in the payout difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the payout difference counter will be 00000000/00000111b(7).

<When the stop-loss counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), payout amount = 00000000b (0), and insert amount = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the payout difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the following calculation is performed on the register: 00000000b (0 (number of medals dispensed)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3). The value of the payout difference counter is obtained, and the result of adding the calculation result to the value of the payout difference counter is stored (updated) in the payout difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the payout difference counter will be 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The calculation result explained in the case where <stop difference counter = 00000000b (0), payout number = 00000000b (0), insert number = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the reason why the value stored in the stop difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) is because the most significant bit is configured to indicate a positive value when it is 0, and a negative value when it is 1. With a 2-byte counter, the stop difference counter can be stored correctly up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) even without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the value of the stop-loss difference counter is 11111111/11111111b, it can be shown as -32767. Therefore, to show -3 in the above example, it would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some details have been omitted in the above calculation examples. More specifically, the current value of the payout difference counter is obtained, and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the obtained payout difference counter value is 0. If the most significant bit of the obtained payout difference counter value is 0, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paidout medals, and the subtracted value is added to the obtained payout difference counter value. The added value is then updated as the payout difference counter value. If the most significant bit of the obtained payout difference counter value is 1, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paidout medals, and the value obtained by subtracting 10000000/00000000b (32768) from the obtained payout difference counter value is subtracted from the subtracted value. The subtracted value is then updated as the payout difference counter value.

Furthermore, if the calculation for updating the value of the stop-loss difference counter results in a negative value, the value of the stop-loss difference counter will be updated by setting the most significant bit of the absolute value of the calculation result to 1.

Furthermore, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of medals dispensed on the register was added to the value of the stop-loss counter obtained. However, the order of calculation could also be as follows: first, the number of dispensed medals could be added to the obtained value of the stop-loss counter, and then the number of inserted medals could be subtracted from that result; or, the number of inserted medals could be subtracted from the initially obtained value of the stop-loss counter, and then the number of dispensed medals could be added to that result.

Furthermore, when the number of payout medals is not zero, it means that a minor win has occurred and the corresponding symbol combination has stopped. Note that when a re-spin win occurs and the corresponding symbol combination stops, the payout medals may be set to 3 or 0. If the payout medals when a re-spin win occurs are set to 3, the number of medals inserted should be 3. If the payout medals when a re-spin win occurs are set to 0, the number of medals inserted should be 0.

Furthermore, when a re-play bonus is won, the system may or may not perform the process of updating the stop-loss counter.
Furthermore, when a re-play bonus is won, the stop-loss counter determination process may or may not be executed.

Furthermore, the payout difference counter does not necessarily have to be 2 bytes; it can be 3 or 4 bytes. If the payout difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value will be 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608). If the payout difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value will be 10000000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that since the payout difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, even if the number of payout tokens is 0 for approximately 10,000 games played during the arcade's operating hours, only -30000 (10,000 (number of games playable in a day) x 3 (number of tokens inserted)) will be stored. Therefore, a 2-byte payout difference counter has sufficient storage capacity.

<Another method regarding updating the stop-loss difference counter>
The gaming machine may be configured to include a payout medal count storage area that stores the total number of medals paid out since the machine was powered on, an inserted medal count storage area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the machine was powered on, and a stop-loss difference counter that stores the difference since the machine was powered on, wherein the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the stop-loss difference counter are configured to be initialized when the machine is powered on, and when updating the stop-loss difference counter in the stop-loss difference counter update process executed after the end of one game, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is stored in the stop-loss difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is a negative value, then 0 is stored in the stop-loss difference counter.

In this configuration, it is desirable that the payout count memory area, the insert count memory area, and the stop-loss counter be 2-byte memory areas. However, the payout count memory area may be a memory area of 2 bytes or more, the insert count memory area may be a memory area of 2 bytes or more, and the stop-loss counter may be a memory area of 2 bytes or more.

The payout token count memory area, the inserted token count memory area, and the stop-loss counter are initialized when the power is turned on. The initialization process involves storing 0 in each memory area. The power-on process includes setting changes and RWM abnormalities, as described above.

The payout medal count memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of medals paid out for each game. It is updated regardless of the game state or a predetermined number of medals (sometimes referred to as the payout medal count memory area update process). For example, if 100 is stored in the payout medal count memory area, and the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, then 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the Nth game ends. If the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no payout), then 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the N+1th game ends.

The coin insertion count memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of coins inserted in each game, and is updated regardless of the game state or a predetermined number (sometimes referred to as the coin insertion count memory area update process). For example, if 50 is stored in the coin insertion count memory area, and the Nth game is played and 3 coins are inserted, then 53 will be stored in the coin insertion count memory area after the Nth game ends. If the N+1th game is played and 2 coins are inserted, then 55 will be stored in the coin payout count memory area after the N+1th game ends.

The payout difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted token count storage area (updated for each game) from the value stored in the payout token count storage area (updated for each game). If the result of this subtraction is positive, the payout difference counter is updated to this value. However, if the result is negative, the payout difference counter is updated to 0. Therefore, the payout difference counter value is not necessarily the exact value obtained by subtracting the inserted tokens from the payout tokens for each game. However, this is acceptable as the counter is used to determine whether the payout difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

Furthermore, while the description explains a configuration where, if the difference between the value stored in the payout count memory area (updated for each game) and the value stored in the insert count memory area (updated for each game) is negative, the system is not limited to this configuration. If the difference between the payout count memory area and the insert count memory area is negative, the system may not update the payout count counter. Alternatively, the system may store a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 in the payout count counter. Alternatively, it may store a fixed value of 19,000 or greater. Finally, the system may simply store the difference between the payout count memory area and the insert count memory area.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the game-updated coin count storage area from the value stored in the game-updated coin count storage area is negative, the stop-loss counter is not updated, or a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19000 is stored in the stop-loss counter. In this case, even if the determination process to check whether the stop-loss counter value exceeds 19000 is performed for each game, the stop-loss counter value will not exceed 19000, thus preventing the game from stopping. Furthermore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the game-updated coin count storage area from the value stored in the game-updated coin count storage area is positive, the correct value is stored in the stop-loss counter, thus avoiding any problems. Alternatively, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the game-updated coin count storage area from the value stored in the game-updated coin count storage area is negative, the determination process to check whether the stop-loss counter value exceeds 19000 may not be performed.

If the difference between the value stored in the payout count memory area (updated for each game) and the value stored in the insert count memory area (updated for each game) is negative, and the system stores a fixed value of 19,000 or more in the stop-loss counter, or simply stores the difference between the value stored in the payout count memory area and the insert count memory area (updated for each game) as is, then performing the check to determine whether the stop-loss counter value exceeds 19,000 for each game may lead to an incorrect determination. Therefore, if the difference between the payout count memory area and the insert count memory area (updated for each game) is negative, the system can avoid this problem by not performing the check to determine whether the stop-loss counter value exceeds 19,000.

The process for updating the payout difference counter is the same as described above, and is executed at a predetermined timing between the time all reels have stopped and the time when the next game's tokens can be inserted (betting for the next game becomes possible). The payout difference counter update process may also include the process for updating the payout token storage area and the process for updating the inserted token storage area.

<Processing for determining the stop-loss difference counter when the continuous operation device or the Type 1 special device is in operation>
As part of the stop-loss difference counter determination process, before executing the determination process to determine whether the value of the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 19,000, it may be possible to determine whether the continuous mechanism operation device is operating, whether the first type special mechanism is operating, or whether the continuous mechanism operation device or the first type special mechanism is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in any of these cases, the stop-loss difference counter determination process may not be executed.

This is because if the game stops while the continuous bonus mechanism or the first type of special bonus mechanism is active (i.e., during a bonus round), the player's motivation to play is likely to be significantly diminished. Therefore, during a bonus round, even if the value of the payout counter exceeds 19,000, the game can continue. By stopping the game after the bonus round ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. Furthermore, it can increase the player's motivation to play as they try to increase their winnings during a bonus round.

Furthermore, even in this configuration, the update process for the stop-loss counter is performed even when the continuous bonus feature device is operating or when the Type 1 special bonus feature is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program's processing order be configured as follows: "Update process for stop-loss counter" → "Process to determine whether the continuous bonus feature device is operating, whether the Type 1 special bonus feature is operating, or whether the continuous bonus feature device or the Type 1 special bonus feature is operating" → "Determination process for stop-loss counter".

Furthermore, even if the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 during the bonus round, and the value of the stop-loss counter falls below 19,000 at the end of the bonus round, the game may still be stopped after the bonus round ends.

In this configuration, even during a bonus round, it is determined whether the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000. If it is determined that the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the stop-loss flag temporary flag (stop-loss flag temporary storage area). At the end of the bonus round, it is determined whether the value of the stop-loss flag temporary flag is the predetermined value. If it is the predetermined value, the game is stopped. However, if it is determined at the end of the bonus round that the value of the stop-loss flag temporary flag is not the predetermined value, the game is not stopped. Furthermore, if the system is configured to store a predetermined value in the temporary stop flag even when the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 while not in a bonus round, then it is conceivable that the system can be configured to determine whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value after each game, regardless of whether a bonus round is in progress, and to stop the game according to the value of the temporary stop flag. Conversely, if the system is configured not to store a predetermined value in the temporary stop flag when the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 while not in a bonus round, then it is conceivable that the system can be configured to stop the game according to whether the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 without determining whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value after each game, unless a bonus round is in progress.

Note that the temporary stop flag is not initialized by the RWM initialization upon power-on, but is cleared by the RWM initialization upon power-on that involves a setting change.

In the embodiment described above, an example was explained in which the game does not stop even if the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus round. However, the game may not stop even if the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT (Attack Time). However, as mentioned above, since the termination conditions of an AT can be extended (changed), the game will not stop only in ATs where the termination conditions are not extended.

Furthermore, if there are multiple specified numbers for starting a game, and one of these numbers prevents the execution of the instruction function, and if the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the specified numbers, it cannot be said that the termination condition has been changed. Therefore, even if the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000, the game will not be stopped. Specifically, when there are two specified numbers for starting a game (3-coin bet and 2-coin bet), and the AT termination condition can be updated with a 3-coin bet (the number of games played or the difference that ends the AT can be updated), but the AT termination condition cannot be updated with a 2-coin bet (the number of games played or the difference that ends the AT cannot be updated), if the stop-loss counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, the game will not be stopped until the AT termination condition is met.

This ensures that even if the gameplay is designed to make the AT (Automatic Trigger) resemble a bonus, the AT functions similarly to a bonus, preventing a decrease in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it can increase the player's motivation to play and increase their winnings during the bonus round.

Furthermore, if the game does not stop even when the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT (Attack Time), the game will not execute any player-favorable draws, such as AT draws or CZ (Chance Zone) draws, during the bonus or AT period after the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000.

This prevents excessive stimulation of gambling instincts when it is certain that the game will be halted.

Furthermore, while the system is described as determining whether the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000 during the bonus round, and if it is determined that the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the stop-loss flag temporary flag (stop-loss flag temporary flag memory area), and at the end of the bonus round, determining whether the value of the stop-loss flag temporary flag is the predetermined value, and if it is, stopping the game's progress, it is not necessary to have a stop-loss flag temporary flag.

Specifically, if the value of the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus round, the system may be configured so that the value of the stop-loss difference counter is not updated during subsequent bonus rounds, and the stop-loss process is executed based on the stop-loss difference counter judgment process after the bonus round ends. For example, if the value of the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus round (e.g., 19,001), the system may be configured so that the stop-loss difference counter is not updated during subsequent rounds, and the value of the difference counter at the end of the bonus round exceeds 19,000.

<Regarding the initialization of the stop-loss counter>
In the embodiment described above, when initializing the value of the stop-loss counter at power-on, it was explained that the initial value is set to 0 if it is an additive type and to 19000 if it is a subtractive type. However, it is not limited to these, and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the stop-loss difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65535. If the game stops when the difference from power-on exceeds 19000 coins, the stop-loss difference counter only needs to count up to 19000, so the initial value is set to 65535 - 19000 = 46535. In this case, since the game stops when the stop-loss difference counter value exceeds 65535, it's easy to determine whether the difference from power-on exceeds 19000 coins depending on whether the carry flag is set to 1 or 0. Note that the carry flag is also set to 1 if it falls below 0, but as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of coins that can be inserted in a day is around 30000, so there is a sufficient margin of 16535 coins (46535 - 30000). In reality, however, small wins and re-spin wins make it extremely rare to lose 30000 coins in a day, so the probability of it falling below 0 is extremely low.

This configuration simplifies the process of updating the hit-stop difference counter and also compresses the program size.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus round, the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus round. In such a specification, if the stop-loss difference counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus round cannot be counted. Therefore, if the stop-loss difference counter is a 2-byte counter, the initial value may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. A value smaller than 46,535 could be, for example, 40,000. In this case, there is a margin to acquire up to 6,535 coins after the difference exceeds 19,000, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus round, the count of the difference can continue until the bonus round ends. Also, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during an AT (Attack Time), the AT can only acquire up to 2,414 coins due to its relationship with the advantageous section, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during an AT, the count of the difference can continue until the AT ends. When determining whether the difference has exceeded 19,000 when the initial value of the stop-loss difference counter is 40,000, it can be determined by whether the value of the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 59,000. Furthermore, if the value of the stop-loss counter exceeds 59,000, the system will determine whether the game is in a bonus round or not. If it is, the game will continue until the bonus round ends.

While the example given above shows an initial value less than 46535 for the payout difference counter, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value greater than half of the maximum value that can be counted with 2 bytes (65535) (32767 or greater). This is because, when the setting value of a gaming machine is set to the value that indicates the smallest payout rate (for example, setting value 1), the payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the payout difference will decrease rather than increase. Therefore, by setting the initial value of the payout difference counter to a value greater than half of the maximum value that can be counted, the possibility of the payout difference counter value becoming 0 can be reduced, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

Furthermore, it is acceptable for the game to not correctly count the difference when the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the stop-loss difference counter is set to 46,535, the game will not stop even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus round. In this specification, when the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 65,535 (or when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the stop-loss temporary flag. The game then decides whether to stop the game based on whether the stop-loss temporary flag is at the predetermined value for each game. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus round, the stop-loss difference counter will exceed 65,535 and start counting from 0. However, since the decision to stop the game is based on the stop-loss temporary flag, although the value of the stop-loss difference counter is not normal, overall normal operation can be achieved.

While the explanation stated that the payout counter subtracts the number of tokens inserted and adds the number of tokens paid out, it is also possible to reverse this and add the number of tokens inserted and subtract the number of tokens paid out. In this case, the initial value of the payout counter may be 19000, or a value between 19000 and 32766.

The payout difference counter was explained using a 2-byte counter, but a 3-byte or 4-byte counter is also acceptable. If the payout difference counter is a 3-byte counter, setting the initial value to 16758215 allows the carry flag to be set to 1 when the difference exceeds 19000 coins. Furthermore, using 3 bytes or more reduces the likelihood of market malfunctions, as even if a gaming establishment keeps the machine powered on and the payout rate is consistently below 100%, and 10,000 games are played daily, the payout difference counter will never fall below 0 for several years.

<Regarding test signals related to stopping operation>
As mentioned above, when the stop-play process is executed, the game stops (it enters a stop-play state). If the game suddenly stops during testing by a testing organization, it may be difficult to determine whether the stop is due to a malfunction or the activation of the stop-play process. Therefore, when executing the stop-play process, it may be possible to configure the system to output a test signal related to the stop-play process, which allows the testing organization to determine that the game has stopped due to the execution of the stop-play process. By configuring the system in this way, if the game stops due to the stop-play process, the testing organization can determine that the stop is due to the execution of the stop-play process and not a malfunction, thereby obtaining correct results from the testing organization's tests.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to the shutdown may be executed continuously while the shutdown state is active, or it may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), or it may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)).

Furthermore, while the system is configured to output a test signal related to the stoppage process, allowing the system to understand that the game has stopped due to the stoppage process, it may also be configured to output this test signal from before the stoppage process occurs. In other words, it may be configured to output the test signal related to the stoppage in advance. For example, in a specification where the stoppage process is executed when the difference from the power-on time exceeds 19,000, the system may be configured to output the test signal related to the stoppage when the difference from the power-on time reaches 18,500. In this configuration, since the difference from the power-on time has not yet reached 19,000, the game can continue even while the test signal related to the stoppage is being output. By configuring it this way, the testing organization can be notified in advance that there is a possibility of the stoppage process being executed, allowing the testing by the testing organization to proceed more smoothly.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to power-off may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) or for a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)). Furthermore, it may be executed when the difference from the power-on time is 18500 or greater (if the difference from the power-on time falls below 18500, the process for outputting the test signal related to power-off may not be executed).

Furthermore, while the timing for executing the process to output the test signal related to the shutdown was set to when the difference from the power-on time reached 18500, it can be set to any arbitrary value, such as 18000 or 18985.

Furthermore, regarding the timing for executing the process to output a test signal related to the stop-play mechanism, if the point where the player's payout is lowest is used as the reference point (0), and the stop-play state is triggered when the difference in the number of game media from that reference point exceeds 19,000, then the timing can be set to any value, such as when the difference in the number of game media reaches 18,500, 18,000, or 18,985.

Furthermore, processing for outputting external signals may also be performed, in addition to test signals. In this case, the output mode and timing of the test signal related to the stoppage described above can be applied to external signals (e.g., security signals). By outputting external signals in this way, it is possible to inform hall staff in advance that the stoppage process may be executed.

Furthermore, the security signal may be configured to be output under certain conditions, such as when a predetermined error occurs (during the period between the occurrence of the predetermined error and its resolution).

For example, the predetermined errors that trigger the output of a security signal may include any or all of the following: errors related to the selector (medal stagnation error, medal reverse flow error, medal passage time error), and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper stagnation error, anomaly detection error). Furthermore, other errors may also be used, not limited to those mentioned above.

Furthermore, the security signal may be configured to be output not only when a predetermined error occurs, but also during configuration change mode and configuration confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the configuration key switch is ON.

In other words, the system may be configured to output a security signal when any of the following conditions are met: a) when the system reaches a shutdown state, b) when a specified error occurs, c) when the system enters setting change mode, or d) when the system enters setting confirmation mode.

By configuring the system in this way, not only can predetermined errors be prevented, but also unauthorized activation of the setting key switch (for example, unauthorized changes to setting values or unauthorized verification of setting values) can be prevented by the gaming establishment when a security signal is output.

Furthermore, the conditions for outputting a security signal are not limited to adopting all of the above conditions (a) through (d). Some of the conditions may be adopted, or other conditions may be included.

<External signals related to stopping operation>
A security signal is output as an external signal related to the shutdown. For example, the system can be configured to start outputting the security signal at a certain point when the shutdown state is reached, and to stop outputting the security signal after a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, when the shutdown state is reached, the security signal is output for the predetermined period. After the shutdown state is reached and the security signal has been output for the predetermined period, the output of the security signal is terminated even if the shutdown state is still reached.

Specifically, when initiating the output of a security signal, it is conceivable to store a timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) corresponding to the predetermined period for outputting the security signal. Then, at predetermined intervals (for example, each time a timer interrupt is executed), an update process for the timer value for outputting the security signal for the predetermined period (for example, a process that decrements the timer value stored in the RWM by 1) is executed.

For example, the timer value corresponding to a predetermined period can be set to "13429," and the predetermined period can be set to "2.234 ms (the period of timer interrupt processing)." Then, the system is configured to output the security signal for a predetermined period by updating the timer value, until the timer value becomes "0." In this case, the security signal can be output for approximately 30 seconds.

By configuring the system in this way, a security signal can be output to the hall computer (also called the hall computer) for a predetermined period, allowing the staff of the amusement parlor to be aware that some kind of incident has occurred with a gaming machine that has stopped playing.

Furthermore, since the security signal output is terminated after a predetermined period, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not output a security signal even without turning off the power to the machine that has entered a stopped state (without turning off the power switch).

Furthermore, some amusement parlors (or their staff) may want to inform players that a gaming machine has reached its limit (i.e., without turning off the power switch) but instead displaying the notification that appears when a machine reaches its limit (which corresponds to the "limit-reach notification" described later).

Thus, even if a gaming machine is left unattended in a stopped state, the security signal output will cease after a predetermined period from the start of output, preventing the hall computer from continuously receiving the security signal. In other words, it is possible to avoid causing inconvenience to the gaming parlor (and its staff) due to the security signal.

Furthermore, if the system enters a shutdown state and a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and a predetermined error (a predetermined error being one of the conditions for security signal output) occurs, the system may be configured to output the security signal again.

In other words, the security signal is output from the moment the security signal is initiated (timing A) until a predetermined period later (timing B). Subsequently, if a predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected) under predetermined conditions where the security signal is not being output, the security signal is reinstated from the moment the predetermined error occurred (timing C). The security signal is then terminated once the predetermined error is resolved.

By configuring the system in this way, if a predetermined error occurs in a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped-play state, a security signal will be output again, thereby informing the gaming parlor (or its staff) that there is a possibility that some kind of fraud or tampering may have occurred with the stopped-play gaming machine.

Furthermore, if the system enters a stop-down state and a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and then enters the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output the security signal again.

In other words, the security signal is output from the moment the security signal is initiated (Timing A) until a predetermined period later (Timing B). Then, under predetermined conditions where the security signal is not being output, if the system enters the setting confirmation mode, the security signal will start outputting from the moment the system enters setting confirmation mode (when the setting key switch is turned on) (Timing C). The security signal output will stop when the setting confirmation mode ends.

By configuring the system in this way, if a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped-play state enters the settings confirmation mode, a security signal will be output again. This allows the gaming parlor (or staff) to be notified that there is a possibility that some kind of fraud or tampering may have occurred with the stopped-play machine.

<If a specified error occurs while the device is in a stopped state and outputting a security signal (1)>
If the system enters a shutdown state, and a predetermined error (a predetermined error being an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, and the predetermined error is cleared after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, the system may be configured to continue outputting the security signal beyond the predetermined period.

In other words, suppose a predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the security signal output (timing A). Then, suppose the timing at which the predetermined error is cleared (timing C) is after a predetermined period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 40 seconds after timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the predetermined error is cleared (the security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

By configuring the system in this way, even if the system is designed to output a security signal for a predetermined period when the game reaches a stop-loss state, if a predetermined error occurs before the predetermined period has elapsed and the predetermined error is resolved after the period has elapsed, the security signal will continue to be output until the predetermined error is resolved. This allows the game parlor (and its staff) to be appropriately notified that something has happened to the game machine that has reached a stop-loss state.

Furthermore, the system is configured to perform timer value update processing for outputting security signals for a predetermined period, even during periods when a predetermined error occurs.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to those described above; other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the system enters a shutdown state, and a predetermined error (a predetermined error being one of the conditions for security signal output) occurs before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the predetermined error is cleared after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system may be configured to output the security signal until a predetermined period has elapsed since the predetermined error was cleared.

If the system is configured to output a security signal for a predetermined period after a predetermined error is cleared, it is conceivable that, once the predetermined error is cleared, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period should be reset in order to output the security signal for that period.

By configuring it in this way, a security signal will be output until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the predetermined error is cleared. Therefore, even if the predetermined error occurs, the arcade (or arcade staff) can accurately understand that the machine is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, for example, if the system enters a shutdown state, and a predetermined error (a predetermined error being one of the conditions for security signal output) occurs before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the predetermined error is cleared after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system may be configured to output the security signal until the remaining period of the predetermined period has elapsed after the predetermined error has been cleared.

For example, if we define timing A as the timing when the security signal output begins, timing B as the timing when a predetermined error occurs (detection of the predetermined error), timing C as the timing when the predetermined error is cleared, and timing D as the timing when the security signal output ends, then the predetermined period can be defined as (the period from timing A to timing B) + (the period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period may be configured not to be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. However, even in this configuration, the timer interrupt process may still be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined error occurs midway through, a security signal (total) can be output for a predetermined period to notify the gaming establishment (gaming establishment staff) that the game has stopped.

<If a specified error occurs while the device is in a stopped state and outputting a security signal (2)>
If the system enters a stop-down state, and a predetermined error (a predetermined error being an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, and the predetermined error is cleared before the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal, the system may be configured to terminate the output of the security signal when the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of outputting the security signal.

In other words, suppose a predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the security signal output started (timing A). Then, suppose the timing when the predetermined error is cleared (timing C) is before a predetermined period has elapsed from timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Furthermore, after timing C, and after a predetermined period has elapsed from timing A (timing D), the security signal output is terminated.

In this case, a security signal is output from timing A to timing D (a predetermined period from timing A). That is, even if a predetermined error occurs, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for the predetermined period is executed. Furthermore, even if a predetermined error occurs, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is not reset. Also, even after the predetermined error is cleared, the security signal can continue to be output from timing A for the predetermined period (the security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

By configuring the system in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a predetermined period when the system reaches a stop-loss state, if a predetermined error occurs and is resolved within the predetermined period after the start of the security signal output, the security signal output time will not be extended due to the occurrence of the predetermined error (the security signal output time will remain the predetermined period). Therefore, the annoyance caused by the security signal can be avoided for the amusement parlor (and its staff).

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to those described above; other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the system enters a shutdown state, and a predetermined error (a predetermined error being one of the conditions for security signal output) occurs before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the predetermined error is cleared before the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system may be configured to output the security signal until a predetermined period has elapsed after the predetermined error is cleared.

If the system is configured to output a security signal for a predetermined period after a predetermined error is cleared, it is conceivable that, once the predetermined error is cleared, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period should be reset to output the security signal for that period.

By configuring it in this way, a security signal will be output until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a predetermined error is cleared, allowing the amusement parlor (or its staff) to accurately understand that the game has been shut down.

<If the system enters configuration confirmation mode while it is in a shutdown state and outputting a security signal (1)>
If the system enters a shutdown state and transitions to (or starts) the setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the setting confirmation mode ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the security signal may be configured to continue outputting beyond the predetermined period.

In other words, let's assume that the setting key switch turns on and the system enters setting confirmation mode at a timing (Timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (Timing A). Then, let's assume that the timing when the setting key switch turns off and the setting confirmation mode ends (Timing C) occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed since Timing A (e.g., 40 seconds after Timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the setting confirmation mode is deactivated (the security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

Furthermore, even in the configuration confirmation mode, the system is configured to perform a timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period.

By configuring the system in this way, even if it is designed to output a security signal for a predetermined period when the machine reaches a stop-loss state, it will transition to a setting confirmation mode before the predetermined period elapses. If the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed, it will continue to output the security signal until the setting confirmation mode ends. This allows the arcade (or arcade staff) to be notified that something has happened to the machine that has reached a stop-loss state.

Furthermore, since the security signal output time is not extended when the system enters the settings confirmation mode, it is possible to avoid causing inconvenience to the arcade staff due to the security signal.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to those described above; other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the system enters a shutdown state and transitions to a configuration confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the configuration confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system may be configured to output the security signal until a predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the configuration confirmation mode.

If the system is configured to output a security signal for a predetermined period after the configuration confirmation mode ends, it is possible to reset the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period in order to output the security signal for that period once the configuration confirmation mode ends.

By configuring it in this way, a security signal will be output until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting confirmation mode ends, allowing the amusement parlor (or its staff) to accurately understand that the machine is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, for example, if the system enters a shutdown state and transitions to a configuration confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and the configuration confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system may be configured to output the security signal until the remaining period of the predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the configuration confirmation mode.

For example, if we define timing A as the start of security signal output, timing B as the transition to setting confirmation mode, timing C as the end of setting confirmation mode, and timing D as the end of security signal output, then the predetermined period can be defined as (period from timing A to timing B) + (period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period may be configured not to be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. However, even in this configuration, the timer interrupt process may still be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined error occurs midway through, a security signal (total) can be output for a predetermined period to notify the gaming establishment (gaming establishment staff) that the game has stopped.

<If the system enters configuration confirmation mode while it is in a shutdown state and outputting a security signal (2)>
If the system enters a shutdown state and transitions to (or starts) the setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and exits the setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system may be configured to terminate the security signal output when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output.

In other words, let's assume that the setting key switch turns on and the system enters setting confirmation mode at a timing (Timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (Timing A). Then, let's assume that the timing (Timing C) when the setting key switch turns off and the setting confirmation mode ends occurs is before a predetermined period has elapsed since Timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after Timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A until a predetermined period. That is, even in the setting confirmation mode, the timer value update process is executed to output the security signal for the predetermined period. Furthermore, even after the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal can continue to be output from timing A until a predetermined period (the security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

By configuring the system in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a predetermined period when the system reaches a stop-loss state, if the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode and ends within the predetermined period after the security signal output begins, the security signal output time is not extended due to the transition to the setting confirmation mode (the security signal output time remains the predetermined period). Therefore, the annoyance caused by the security signal can be avoided for the amusement parlor (and its staff).

<If the device is powered off while it is in a shutdown state and outputting a security signal, and then powered on again with a setting change>
If the system enters a shutdown state and the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the system will be in a state where power is not supplied. Subsequently, if the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is ON (also referred to as powering on with a setting change), the system will enter setting change mode after power is restored. In this case, the system may be configured to output a security signal in setting change mode. The system may also be configured to stop outputting the security signal when the setting change mode ends.

In other words, the power switch is turned off at a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) before the start of the security signal output (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Then, under conditions where power is not supplied, the system enters the configuration change mode at timing C due to a power-on with configuration changes. Finally, the configuration change mode ends at timing D after the termination conditions are met.

For example, suppose the time between timing A and timing B is 10 seconds, and the time between timing C and timing D is 8 seconds (the setting change mode period is 8 seconds). In this case, the total time of the security signal output from timing A to timing B and from timing C to timing D (18 seconds) may be shorter than the predetermined period (30 seconds).

In this configuration, the timer value corresponding to a predetermined period may be initialized by power-on with a configuration change (through the RWM initialization process performed by power-on with a configuration change).

For example, if the RWM initialization process, which is performed when the power is turned on with a configuration change, occurs at the start of the configuration change mode, the timer value will not be updated during the configuration change mode by the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period (the timer value remains 0). However, the security signal will still be output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process, which is performed when the power is turned on with a setting change, occurs at the end of the setting change mode, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period will be executed even if the system is in setting confirmation mode. In this case, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period may be performed using a value reset to the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period upon power-on with a setting change, or it may be performed using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the predetermined period. However, the security signal will be output regardless of the timer value (even if it is the initial value (0)).

In any case, once the configuration change mode is finished, the output of the security signal can be terminated.

Furthermore, for example, suppose the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the period of setting change mode is 50 seconds). In this case, the total time of the security signal output from timing A to timing B and the security signal output from timing C to timing D (60 seconds) may be longer than the predetermined period (30 seconds).

In other words, if the system enters a shutdown state and a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output, and then a power-on procedure involving a configuration change is performed, the system is configured to output the security signal for the period from the start of the configuration change mode until the configuration change mode ends.

In other words, the sum of the security signal output times does not necessarily correspond to a predetermined period of time.

However, depending on the combination of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D, the sum of the security signal output times may equal a predetermined period.

For example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds (the period of setting change mode is 20 seconds), the sum of the security signal output times may be the predetermined period (30 seconds).

With this configuration, even if the system is designed to output a security signal for a predetermined period when it enters a shutdown state, the power will be cut off before the predetermined period has elapsed since the security signal started outputting. Subsequently, the shutdown state will be released by powering on with a configuration change (due to the RWM initialization process performed by powering on with a configuration change). Therefore, the security signal output time after power restoration can be set to a duration corresponding to the configuration change mode.

Furthermore, powering on the device after a configuration change (through the RWM initialization process performed by the power-on process) not only releases the power-off state, but may also clear the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) used to output the security signal for a predetermined period.

For example, if the RWM initialization process, which is performed when the power is turned on with a configuration change, occurs at the start of the configuration change mode, the timer value will not be updated during the configuration change mode by the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period (the timer value remains 0). However, the security signal will still be output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process, which is performed when the power is turned on with a setting change, occurs at the end of the setting change mode, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period will be executed even if the system is in setting confirmation mode. In this case, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period may be performed using a value reset to the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period upon power-on with a setting change, or it may be performed using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the predetermined period. However, the security signal will be output regardless of the timer value (even if it is the initial value (0)).

Furthermore, for example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the period of setting change mode is 50 seconds), the security signal may be output for the period from timing A to timing B, and for the period from timing C to 20 seconds. In other words, the output period of the security signal may be kept constant even when transitioning to setting change mode (it may also be terminated midway through setting change mode).

<If the device is powered off while it is in a shutdown state and outputting a security signal, and then powered on without any configuration changes>
If the device enters a shutdown state and the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period has elapsed since the security signal began to be output, the device will be in a state where power is not supplied. Subsequently, if the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is off (also referred to as powering on without changing settings), the device will enter a shutdown state after power is restored.

In other words, the power switch is turned off at a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) before the start of the security signal output (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Subsequently, under conditions where no power is supplied, the system transitions to a shutdown state at timing C due to power-on without any setting changes.

Furthermore, let timing D be a certain timing after timing C. Timing D is the timing at which the sum of the time from timing A to timing B and the time from timing C to timing D corresponds to a predetermined period. For example, if the predetermined period is 30 seconds and the time from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, then the time from timing C to timing D will be 20 seconds.

Furthermore, let timing E be a certain timing after timing D. Timing E is a timing where the period from timing C to timing E corresponds to a predetermined period. For example, if the predetermined period is 30 seconds, then the period from timing C to timing E will be 30 seconds.

Furthermore, the period from timing C to timing E is considered to be a paused state.

When configured in this way, the security signal output can be one of the following (Pattern 1) to (Pattern 3).

(Pattern 1) After power-on, the security signal is not output.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. However, no security signal is output during the period from timing C to timing D. Similarly, no security signal is output during the period from timing D to timing E.

For example, by clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) used to output a security signal for a predetermined period when power is restored (by setting the timer value to 0), it is possible to prevent the security signal from being output during the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, even if the device is in a shutdown state, it can be prevented from outputting a security signal when power is restored after being cut off.

In other words, since the system is configured not to output a security signal again when the power is restored, the inconvenience caused by the security signal can be reduced.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error that triggers the output of a security signal occurs between timing C and timing D, the security signal may be output from the time the predetermined error occurs until it is cleared. Similarly, if a predetermined error that triggers the output of a security signal occurs between timing D and timing E, the security signal may be output from the time the predetermined error occurs until it is cleared.

Furthermore, if the system transitions to the configuration confirmation mode between timing C and timing D, a security signal may be output from the start of the configuration confirmation mode until its end. Similarly, if the system transitions to the configuration confirmation mode between timing D and timing E, a security signal may be output from the start of the configuration confirmation mode until its end.

By configuring the system in this way, the amusement parlor (and its staff) can detect that something is happening with a particular gaming machine when the hall computer receives a security signal.

(Pattern 2) After power-on, the security signal output will be performed for the remaining period.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. Also, a security signal is output from timing C to timing D. However, no security signal is output during the period from timing D to timing E.

For example, by not executing the process to clear the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period when power is restored (i.e., continuing to use the timer value stored before the power was cut off), it is possible to output a security signal during the period from timing C to D, and not output a security signal during the period from timing D to timing E.

By configuring the system in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for the remaining time of the predetermined period, thus providing a gaming machine that is highly resistant to fraud. Furthermore, by not executing the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting the security signal for the predetermined period when power is restored, the control process can be simplified.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error that triggers the output of a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, and this predetermined error is cleared at a timing prior to timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Similarly, if the system transitions to (starts) the configuration confirmation mode during the period from timing C to timing D, and the configuration confirmation mode ends at a certain point before timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error that triggers the output of a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, and this predetermined error is cleared at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

Similarly, if the system transitions to (starts) the setting confirmation mode during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing after timing D (timing F), a security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

By configuring the system in this way, the amusement parlor (and its staff) can detect that something is happening with a particular gaming machine when the hall computer receives a security signal.

(Pattern 3) After power-on, the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. Also, a security signal is output during the period from timing C to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to set (store) a timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) corresponding to the predetermined period for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period when power is restored, the security signal can be output during the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for a predetermined period of time, thus providing a gaming machine that is highly resistant to fraud.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error that triggers the output of a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing E, and this predetermined error is cleared at a timing prior to timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Similarly, if the system transitions to (starts) the configuration confirmation mode during the period from timing C to timing E, and the configuration confirmation mode ends at a certain point before timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error occurs during the period from timing C to timing E, and this error is cleared at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

Similarly, if the system transitions to (starts) the setting confirmation mode during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

By configuring the system in this way, the amusement parlor (and its staff) can detect that something is happening with a particular gaming machine when the hall computer receives a security signal.

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the stop-loss difference counter>
The main control unit is configured to transmit information regarding the value of the stop-loss counter to the sub-control unit. This allows the player to be notified before the game stops.

For example, if the remaining difference is 100 coins and exceeds 19,000, the LCD display could show an ending message such as "100 coins remaining," or an audio message could be played. Then, each time the difference is updated and the remaining difference decreases, the ending message would also be updated to something like "90 coins remaining," "85 coins remaining," etc. Finally, when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed, or an audio message played, to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

By doing this, the game's objective can be set as stopping the game when the difference exceeds 19,000 tokens, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, if the remaining number of remaining tokens exceeds 19,000 when there are only 100 tokens left, and the LCD display shows an ending message of "100 tokens remaining," then if the remaining number of tokens increases and exceeds 100, it might be possible to erase (hide) the ending message showing the remaining number of tokens. At this point, when the remaining number of tokens becomes 100 again, the LCD display would then show the ending message of "100 tokens remaining."

This method prevents the player's motivation to continue playing from decreasing due to the difference in scores remaining low and the ending display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference in tokens exceeds 19,000 during a bonus round and the game does not stop until the bonus round ends, the congratulatory message will not disappear even if the difference falls below 19,000 tokens after the message has been displayed. Furthermore, the congratulatory message will remain displayed until the bonus round ends.

By doing this, the celebratory display does not disappear, which would hinder the player's sense of accomplishment and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In the example above, the remaining difference was displayed as the ending, but this is not the only option; a story-driven presentation could also be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be stopped when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the ending display, thus preventing it from being displayed unnecessarily.

Furthermore, if the game suddenly stops with a celebratory animation when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the stop-play process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, it is acceptable to provide notification regarding the stop-play process when the power is turned on or during gameplay (for example, a display or voice message such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins"), or to provide notification regarding the stop-play process on the demo screen or menu screen (for example, a display or voice message such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins").

<Regarding external signal output based on the value of the stop-loss counter>
If, as a result of updating the value of the stop-loss difference counter during the stop-out process, the value reaches a specific value (18900 in this embodiment) that is before a predetermined value (19000 in this embodiment) at which the stop-out process is executed, the main control means or monitoring process executes a process to output a test interruption request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the test to be interrupted before the gaming machine reaches a "stop" state and the game stops. When the test is interrupted, the tester can reset the stop-loss counter value by turning the power off and then back on, allowing the test to continue until the stop-loss counter value exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and then back on when the stop-loss counter value is 18,900, the game can be prevented from stopping until the stop-loss counter value effectively exceeds 37,900, thus ensuring a stable test.

Furthermore, while the specific value preceding the predetermined value at which the stoppage process is executed (19000 in this embodiment) is set to 18900, this is not limited to 18900. Any value between 9500 (half of the predetermined value at which the stoppage process is executed) and 18985 (the maximum payout value at which the stoppage process is not executed) may be used as the specific value.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a process was executed to output a test interruption request signal in order to interrupt the test. However, any signal may be output as long as it is communicated to the tester. Therefore, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached before the predetermined value at which the termination process is executed may be referred to as the predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the process for outputting this signal to the test IF board may be referred to as the process for outputting the predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the stop-loss counter>
When the main control means executes the stop-play process, it is configured to transmit information based on the value of the stop-play difference counter to the sub-control means. This allows the player to be notified that the game has stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "stop-play notification") before the game is officially announced.

For example, if the remaining difference is 100 coins and exceeds 19,000, the LCD display could show "100 coins remaining," and an ending sequence or sound effect could be executed. Each time the difference is updated and the remaining difference decreases, the display would also update to "90 coins remaining," "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed, or a sound effect could be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. The state in which such sub-control means are executing the remaining difference display, ending sequence, or sound effect until the end of play, or the state in which the remaining difference display is not shown but an ending sequence or sound effect related to the end of play is executed, is referred to as the (end-of-play) operation notification state. Note that the operation notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game's objective can be set as stopping the game when the difference exceeds 19,000 tokens, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, if the remaining number of remaining cards exceeds 19,000 when there are 100 cards left, and the LCD display shows "100 cards remaining," then if the remaining number of cards increases and exceeds 100, the remaining number display could be erased (hidden). At this point, when the remaining number of cards becomes 100 again, the LCD display would reappear showing "100 cards remaining."

By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play, which can occur when the difference continues to fall and the remaining difference display does not disappear.

For example, if the difference in tokens exceeds 19,000 during a bonus round and the game does not stop until the bonus round ends, the congratulatory message will not disappear even if the difference falls below 19,000 tokens after the message has been displayed. Furthermore, the congratulatory message will remain displayed until the bonus round ends.

By doing this, the celebratory display does not disappear, which would hinder the player's sense of accomplishment and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the ending sequence or audio may be a continuous narrative sequence or a still image. Even in this case, the ending sequence or audio can be terminated unnecessarily by ending it when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers its execution.

Furthermore, if the game suddenly stops with a celebratory animation when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the stop-play process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, it is acceptable to provide notification regarding the stop-play process when the power is turned on or during gameplay (for example, a display or voice message such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins"), or to provide notification regarding the stop-play process on the demo screen or menu screen (for example, a display or voice message such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins").

<Regarding the processing of lamps managed by the main control means or sub-control means based on the value of the stop-loss difference counter>
This section describes the control of the lamps managed by the main control means or sub-control means when the value of the stop-loss difference counter exceeds 19,000, which satisfies the stop-loss condition.

The main control system manages the following lamps: 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, advantageous section lamp, credit count indicator, and acquired coins indicator. The sub-control system manages the following lamps: stop switch lamp, lower panel lamp, and frame lamp.

Furthermore, the MAX bet lamp may be managed by either the main control system or the sub-control system.

<<Lamp display at the end of a game when the completion function is not activated>>
Here, a game in which the complete function is not activated refers to a game in which the activation conditions (stop conditions) for the complete function were not met.

When a game ends without the completion function activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the bet lamps corresponding to the number of bets made in the previous game will be lit. For example, in a game where 3 bets were made, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp will be lit at the end of the game, while the start lamp will be off.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is not activated, and the game is in an advantageous period where the advantageous period lamp is lit, the advantageous period lamp will remain lit at the end of the game (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), and the next game will also be in an advantageous period.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is not activated, the replay lamp and the start lamp will light up at the end of a game in which a replay has been won (while waiting to operate the start switch after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped and is displayed, or while waiting to insert a medal).

Furthermore, in games where the completion function is not activated, if a winning combination of symbols corresponding to a small win is displayed at the end of the game (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the corresponding segment on the acquired coins display will light up. For example, in a game where 10 game tokens were awarded, if the conditions for activating the completion function are not met, the segment corresponding to "10" on the acquired coins display will light up (displaying "10"). Note that the number of game tokens displayed on the acquired coins display may be configured so that it is not displayed after a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) after the awarding of game tokens has ended.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is not activated, and a non-replay combination (e.g., a minor win or a miss) is won, the MAX bet lamp will light up at the end of the game (during the bet waiting period after all reels have stopped) and the credit display shows a value greater than or equal to the number of bets required to start the next game. Note that the number of bets required to start the next game is "3" if the game can be played by betting three game tokens (and so on).

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is not activated, and at the end of a game where a non-replay combination (e.g., a minor win or a miss) has been won (while waiting for bets after all reels have stopped), and the credit count indicator displays a value less than the number of bets required to start the next game, the MAX bet lamp is off. However, if the credit count indicator displays a value of 1 or more, the MAX bet lamp may be turned on. In other words, if the credit count indicator displays a value less than the number of bets required to start the next game (e.g., 1 or 2), the MAX bet lamp may be turned on. When the MAX bet lamp is turned on, it may be possible to bet the number of game tokens corresponding to the value displayed on the credit count indicator by operating the MAX bet switch. For example, if the number of credits is 1 and the MAX bet lamp is turned on, it is possible to bet 1 by operating the MAX bet switch. Also, for example, if the number of credits is 10 and the MAX bet lamp is turned on, it is possible to bet 3 (the number of bets required to start the next game by operating the MAX bet switch). On the other hand, when the MAX bet lamp is off, the player cannot place a bet even if they operate the MAX bet switch. In this way, the illumination pattern of the MAX bet lamp informs the player whether or not the MAX bet switch operation is effective.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is not activated, and at the end of a game where a replay has been won (while waiting to operate the start switch after all reels have stopped, or while waiting to insert a medal), the MAX bet lamp will be off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit counter.

Furthermore, when a game is ending without the completion function activated (while waiting to operate the start switch after all reels have stopped, or while waiting to insert coins), if the credit count display shows a value less than the maximum number of credits, the coin insertion lamp will be lit.

Furthermore, when the game is ending without the completion function activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), if the credit count indicator displays a value of 1 or more, the corresponding segment of the credit count indicator will be lit.

Furthermore, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp illuminates in a manner indicating that the stop switch operation is invalid. For example, the stop switch lamp may illuminate red or be off.

Furthermore, at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp is lit, and the frame lamps are lit in a manner corresponding to the game waiting period.

<<Lamp display at the end of a game when the "Complete" function is activated>>
Here, a game in which the "complete function" is activated refers to a game in which the activation conditions (stop conditions) for the complete function are met.

When the game ends after the complete function has been activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the bet lamps corresponding to the number of bets in the previous game are not lit; all bet lamps are off. For example, even at the end of a game where 3 bets were placed, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are off, and the start lamp is also off.

Furthermore, in games where the Complete function is activated, the Advantageous Section Lamp will turn off at the end of the game (during the bet waiting period after all reels have stopped) while the game is in the Advantageous Section period. In other words, the Complete function will activate even if the conditions for ending the Advantageous Section are not met in a game where the Complete function is activated. Also, the Advantageous Section Lamp will turn off even if the conditions for ending the Advantageous Section are not met in a game where the Complete function is activated.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is activated and a replay is won, the replay lamp and start lamp are turned off at the end of the game (while waiting to operate the start switch after all reels have stopped, or while waiting to insert a medal).

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is activated, if the winning combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed at the end of the game (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the corresponding segment on the acquired coins display is turned off. For example, in a game where 10 game tokens have been awarded and the conditions for activating the complete function are met, the segment corresponding to "10" on the acquired coins display will light up (displaying "10"). Subsequently, while the complete function is active, the segment corresponding to "10" on the acquired coins display will not light up (do not display "10"). In other words, the segment corresponding to "10" on the acquired coins display will not light up before a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed after the awarding of game tokens has ended.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is activated, if the winning combination corresponding to a minor role is displayed at the end of the game (during the bet waiting period after all reels have stopped), the MAX bet lamp will be off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit counter.

Furthermore, in games where the complete function is activated and a replay is won, at the end of the game (while waiting to operate the start switch after all reels have stopped, or while waiting to insert a medal), the MAX bet lamp will be off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit counter.

Furthermore, if the credit count display shows a value less than the maximum credit limit at the end of a game in which the complete function was activated (while waiting to operate the start switch after all reels have stopped, or while waiting to insert a medal), the medal insertion lamp will be off.

Furthermore, when the game in which the complete function was activated ends (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), if a value of 1 or more is displayed on the credit count indicator, the corresponding segment on the credit count indicator will be lit.

Furthermore, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting to bet after all reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp illuminates in a manner that indicates the stop switch operation is invalid. Alternatively, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting to bet after all reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp illuminates in a manner different from that indicating the stop switch operation is invalid (and also different from that indicating the stop switch operation is valid). An example of the stop switch lamp illuminating in a manner different from that indicating the stop switch operation is invalid (and also different from that indicating the stop switch operation is valid) is when, in a game where the complete function has not been activated, the stop switch lamp illuminates red to indicate the stop switch operation is invalid, whereas in a game where the complete function has been activated, the stop switch lamp is off to indicate the stop switch operation is invalid.

Furthermore, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp illuminates, and the frame lamp illuminates in a manner corresponding to the activation of the complete function.

The above-mentioned configurations of the lamp patterns at the end of a game when the "Complete Function" is not activated and the lamp patterns at the end of a game when the "Complete Function" is activated are interchangeable.

Furthermore, in a configuration different from the above-described embodiment, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the bet lamps corresponding to the number of bets in the previous game may be turned off. For example, in a game where 3 bets were placed, at the end of the game, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp would be off, and the start lamp would also be off.

Furthermore, in a configuration different from the above-described embodiment, the advantageous section lamp may remain lit at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated and the advantageous section lamp is lit (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped).

Furthermore, in a configuration different from the above-described embodiment, in a game where the complete function is activated and a replay is won, the replay lamp may be lit and the start lamp may be off at the end of the game (while waiting to operate the start switch after all reels have stopped, or while waiting to insert a medal).

Furthermore, in a configuration different from the above-described embodiment, in a game where the complete function is activated, when a winning combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination is displayed at the end of the game in which a winning combination was achieved (during the betting waiting period after all reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the acquired coin display may be lit.

Even in the different embodiments described above, the configurations of the lamp patterns at the end of a game where the "Complete Function" is not activated and the lamp patterns at the end of a game where the "Complete Function" is activated can be combined.

<Presentation patterns during the operation warning notification state>
As for the display mode on the display device when the operation notification state is activated, the mode shown in Figure 60 is possible. In Figure 60, the performance image in the normal state (which includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), which is neither the operation notification state nor the stop state, displays a lion and a girl character, a heart effect, the line "Today was fun" and the total number of acquired "TOTAL: 18,000 coins". In addition, in the performance image in the operation notification state (which includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), the remaining difference is displayed as "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation". Furthermore, in the stop notification state (a state where the game has stopped), the visual effects displayed in the normal state and the operation notification state are not displayed. Instead, a black background and a stop notification (notification regarding the stop process, stop notification) that says "Complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of winnings displayed in the normal state does not need to be displayed at all times, and is displayed only when the total number of winnings exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, 18000 as shown in Figure 60, or 18900, which is the value used to send a test interruption request signal to the test IF board).

In the operation notification state, the remaining difference display obscures the entirety of the total winnings display, part of the girl's character display, and all of the effect display. However, since the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, the player can generally grasp the image of the performance being executed. Note that in Figure 60, the transparency of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of the layer behind the remaining difference display is not visible. However, the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This allows both the remaining difference display and the performance image to be grasped.

In addition to the congratulatory display mentioned above, the notification of the end of play may also include displaying text or audio such as "The game has ended" or "The game has finished." The text indicating the end of play may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or it may be displayed after the congratulatory display has ended and the text indicating the end of play or the audio has finished. Furthermore, warning displays or audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" may also be displayed along with the text indicating the end of play.
Furthermore, while the remaining difference display in the operation notification state is displayed at the top of the display area of the display device, it is not limited to this, and the remaining difference display may also be displayed at the bottom or center of the display area of the display device. However, if it is displayed at the bottom or center, it may overlap with the display area of various information displays (game token count display, awarded number display, or bet number display) and a large portion of the performance images, so by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to an arbitrary value between 20% and 90%, the player can still see the various information displays and performance images.

Furthermore, when the AT termination conditions (e.g., number of AT plays, difference during AT, or number of AT navigations) are met during the activation notification state, the addiction prevention display takes precedence over the remaining difference display. This allows the addiction prevention display to be more visible to the player than the remaining difference display, effectively preventing excessive gambling.

Furthermore, conversely to the embodiments described above, when any termination condition for the AT (for example, the number of AT plays, the difference during AT, or the number of AT navigations) is met during the operation notification state, the remaining difference display may take precedence over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly see the remaining difference until the game is stopped.

Furthermore, when an arbitrary termination condition for the AT (e.g., the number of AT games played, the difference during AT, or the number of AT navigations) is met during the operation notification state, the remaining difference display and the addiction prevention display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to see both pieces of information. In this case, if the display areas for the remaining difference display and the addiction prevention display were originally configured to overlap, the display area for the addiction prevention display may be changed, or the display area for the remaining difference display may be changed. Alternatively, the display areas for the remaining difference display and the addiction prevention display may be predetermined to not overlap even when displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, in cases where the total score threshold is reached or the total score limit is exceeded, a notification prompting counting (counting switch prompt display) is provided. Therefore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score limit is exceeded during the operation notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompt display are shown. This allows the player to recognize both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

Furthermore, when the total score reaches the threshold or exceeds the upper limit during the operation notification state, the counting switch prompt display may be displayed with priority over the remaining score difference display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompt display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining score difference display is shown. This allows the total score threshold to be cleared by promptly operating the counting switch, and then the remaining score difference display can be made known to the player.

Furthermore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score limit is exceeded during the activation notification state, the remaining score difference display may be prioritized over the counting switch prompt display. This can provide satisfaction to players who prefer to see the remaining score difference first.

<Presentation patterns when the game has stopped>
In the "stop" notification state, the lion and girl character displays, effect displays, dialogue displays, and total winnings displays are all invisible. Also, the "stop" display is shown instead of the remaining difference display. In Figure 60, the "stop" display is shown in the center of the display area of the device, but the effect image is not displayed (the transparency of the "stop" display is 0%), so it can be displayed anywhere, including the top or bottom of the display area.

Furthermore, the display showing the end of operation during the end-of-operation notification state may occupy 50% or more of the full-screen display area. However, when other information is displayed (such as a message indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating a sub-switch, or a warning message), it is desirable that the display showing the end of operation during the end-of-operation notification state occupies any value between 50% and 90% of the full-screen display area.

In Figure 60, the congratulatory message is not displayed in the stop-loss notification state. However, a congratulatory message using characters may be displayed instead of the black background image. However, even when the congratulatory message is displayed, the in-game animation images are not shown.

Furthermore, during AT (Automatic Trigger) mode, when the game enters a stop notification state (where the arbitrary termination conditions for AT (e.g., number of AT plays, difference in AT count, or number of AT navigations) are not met, but the stop condition is met), the game may display an addiction prevention display when the game is about to end. This prevents the addiction prevention display, which is normally displayed on the AT end screen, from being obscured. The addiction prevention display in this case may have the same display style and duration as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or it may have a different display style and duration. While the display area for the addiction prevention display is generally positioned so as not to overlap with the display area for the stop display, if the addiction prevention display is configured to become invisible (invisible) after a predetermined time, the display areas for the addiction prevention display and the stop display may overlap.

Furthermore, conversely to the embodiments described above, when the game enters a stop-game notification state during AT (when the arbitrary termination conditions for AT (e.g., number of AT games played, difference in the number of games played during AT, or number of AT navigations) are not met, but the stop-game condition is met), the stop-game indicator does not need to be displayed. This does not reduce the visibility of the stop-game indicator, allowing players to quickly recognize that the game has stopped.

Furthermore, even if the game enters a stop-game notification state during AT (when the arbitrary termination conditions for AT (e.g., number of AT plays, difference in AT count, or number of AT navigations) are not met, but the stop-game conditions are met), and the anti-addiction display is not shown when the stop-game notification is displayed, the anti-addiction display may be shown when the arbitrary termination conditions for AT and the stop-game conditions are met simultaneously (when both the arbitrary termination conditions and the stop-game conditions are met at the same time). This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the game enters a stop-game state, thus providing a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, during AT (Attack Time), when the game enters a stop-game notification state (where the arbitrary termination conditions for AT (e.g., number of AT plays, difference in AT count, or number of AT navigations) are not met, but the stop-game condition is met), the game may choose not to display the anti-gambling indicator when the stop-game indicator is displayed. Even when both the arbitrary termination conditions for AT and the stop-game condition are met (when both conditions are met simultaneously), the anti-gambling indicator may still be omitted. This does not reduce the visibility of the stop-game indicator, allowing players to quickly recognize that the game has stopped.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the termination process>
When the main control means executes a stop-play process, the main control means and/or the sub-control means issue a notification to the player that the game has stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "stop-play notification").

As a notification of the end of operation by the main control means, a display indicating that the operation has ended may be displayed on a predetermined indicator controlled by the main control means.

Examples of predetermined displays controlled by the main control means include displays showing the number of acquired tokens and the number of credits.

For example, if a predetermined error (e.g., door open error, medal retention error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is showing an indication that play has stopped (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may be modified to show an indication that the predetermined error has occurred (e.g., E1). Then, if the predetermined error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the acquired coin count display may be modified to show an indication that play has stopped again.

This configuration allows for accurate notification of the shutdown state even if there is a malfunction in the sub-control means. Furthermore, if a predetermined error occurs while the shutdown state is active, the system can accurately notify the system of the occurrence of the predetermined error, even if there is a malfunction in the sub-control means. Additionally, when the predetermined error is cleared, the system can notify the system that the error has been cleared and that the shutdown state has been revoked.

Furthermore, for example, if a predetermined error (e.g., door opening error, medal retention error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is showing an indication that play has stopped (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may be prevented from showing an indication that the predetermined error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a predetermined error occurs, the acquired coin count display may continue to show an indication that play has stopped.

By configuring the system in this way, players will no longer be confused about whether a predetermined error has occurred or if the game has reached its limit, and the system can accurately inform players that the game has reached its limit.

As an example of a predetermined display controlled by the main control means, a display showing the number of acquired tokens was given, but as mentioned above, a display showing the number of credits would also be acceptable.

For example, the credit count indicator displays the number of credits. However, it may be configured so that automatic settlement occurs when the limit condition is met (i.e., when information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag memory area). In this configuration, after the limit condition is met and automatic settlement occurs, the number of credits becomes 0, allowing the credit count indicator to display an indication that the limit condition has been reached (e.g., EE).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle when the conditions for stopping play are met, the player can operate the settlement switch, and after the number of credits reaches zero, the credit display can show an indication that the play-stop condition has occurred (for example, EE).

When the acquired coin count indicator is blank and the credit count indicator is displaying a message indicating that the machine has run out of coins, if a predetermined error (e.g., door open error, coin retention error, etc.) occurs, the acquired coin count indicator may display a message indicating that the predetermined error has occurred (e.g., E1), and the credit count indicator may display a message indicating that the machine has run out of coins. Then, if the predetermined error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the message indicating that the predetermined error has occurred disappears from the acquired coin count indicator (display processing ends), and the message indicating that the machine has run out of coins may continue to be displayed on the credit count indicator.

This configuration allows for accurate notification of the shutdown state even if there is a malfunction in the sub-control means. Furthermore, if a predetermined error occurs while the shutdown state is active, the system can accurately notify the system of the occurrence of the predetermined error, even if there is a malfunction in the sub-control means. Additionally, when the predetermined error is cleared, the system can notify the system that the error has been cleared and that the shutdown state has been revoked.

Furthermore, for example, if a predetermined error (e.g., door opening error, medal retention error, etc.) occurs while the credit count indicator is displaying a message indicating that play has run out (e.g., EE), the acquired medal count indicator may not display a message indicating that the predetermined error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a predetermined error occurs, the display indicating that play has run out on the credit count indicator may continue.

This configuration eliminates confusion for players regarding whether a predetermined error has occurred or if a game has been stopped, and accurately informs players that a game has been stopped.

As a notification of the end of play by the sub-control means, in addition to the congratulatory display described above, it may also execute a stop-of-play display or voice message such as "Complete function activated," "Play has ended," or "Game has ended," as shown in Figure 60. This stop-of-play display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or it may be executed after the congratulatory display has ended. Furthermore, a warning display (various switch prompt displays) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or a voice message may also be executed along with the stop-of-play display.

As a notification of the end of operation, the end-of-operation process may be performed before the congratulatory display is executed, and the congratulatory display may be performed during the end-of-operation process. Alternatively, a predetermined period of freezing may be performed before the end-of-operation process is executed, the congratulatory display may be performed during the predetermined period, and the end-of-operation text display may be performed when the end-of-operation process is executed after the predetermined period.

Furthermore, when displaying a "conclusion" message after a "congratulatory" message, the warning message should not be displayed while the "congratulatory" message is being displayed. Instead, the warning message should only be displayed when the "conclusion" message is being displayed.

This approach prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement or counting switches, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment provided by displaying the celebratory message, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during the stoppage notification, all sounds other than the text and voice prompts such as "The machine has stopped," and the warning voice prompts such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch," are silent. Additionally, during the stoppage notification, all sounds other than the text and voice prompts such as "The machine has stopped," and the warning voice prompts such as "Please press the settlement switch," may be output at a lower volume than that used during error notifications.

By structuring the game in this way, the impression of reaching a "game over" state becomes less likely to be negative for players, and it becomes easier to recognize it as a desirable outcome, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during the stoppage notification, the sub-switches managed by the sub-control system remain functional. Therefore, even during the stoppage process (stoppage notification), the menu screen and volume control screen can be accessed by operating the sub-switches. However, the volume control screen does not include the volume related to the stoppage notification; therefore, the volume cannot be changed during the stoppage notification.

Furthermore, by opening the menu screen during the stop-play process and displaying a QR code containing the game history, a service (a so-called "gaming machine linked service") can be provided to the player, allowing them to scan the game history with their mobile device and save it on the server. Note that since the display device shows the stop-play status, when displaying the QR code from the menu screen outside of the stop-play notification period, it will be displayed in a designated area in the center of the display device screen. However, during the stop-play notification period, the designated area and the stop-play notification overlap. Therefore, the display area for the QR code during the stop-play notification period is different from the designated area and does not overlap with the stop-play notification.

Furthermore, as an alternative method for displaying the stop-out indicator and the QR code, even if the display areas for the stop-out indicator and the QR code overlap, the system may be configured to display the stop-out indicator and the QR code alternately, thereby enabling the reading of the QR code while simultaneously performing the stop-out notification.

Furthermore, when the game ends, the game tokens may be automatically settled. For example, if the game ends while "50" credits are stored, 50 game tokens will be automatically settled (dispensed into the tray) without the player having to operate the settlement switch. This configuration allows the game machine to return the electronically stored game tokens to the player without the player having to operate the settlement switch. In other words, it eliminates the need for warning voice messages such as "Please press the settlement switch" or warning displays such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch."

Furthermore, the shutdown notification does not terminate due to the elapsed time during the shutdown process. In other words, the shutdown notification continues until the shutdown state is released (until the setting change process or RWM error processing is executed).

During the termination process, even if an event occurs that could result in one of the aforementioned recoverable errors, the system may either not detect the specified error, or it may detect the specified error but not execute the specified error processing. In either case, the system is configured not to issue any notification regarding the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because, during the termination process, the termination process is looped, and therefore, even if a predetermined error is detected by the interrupt handler, the predetermined error handling within the main loop is not executed. Note that if the interrupt handler is disabled during the termination process, the predetermined error will not be detected.

Therefore, by executing the stop-play process, it becomes possible to avoid the trouble of having to clear errors even though gameplay cannot proceed, thereby reducing the workload of arcade staff.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to execute a predetermined error handling process within the interrupt handler, this process will be executed even during the termination process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined error handling process from being executed during the termination process by determining whether the termination process is in progress before executing the predetermined error handling process, and then refraining from executing it if it is. Alternatively, this can be achieved by disabling interrupt handling during the termination process.

Furthermore, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing predetermined error handling during the termination process, the system may be configured to allow the execution of predetermined error handling during the termination process.

In this configuration, interrupt processing is enabled even during the shutdown process. When a predetermined error is detected during the interrupt process, the predetermined error processing within the interrupt process is executed to report the predetermined error. Alternatively, if a predetermined error is detected within the shutdown process, the predetermined error processing is executed. This ensures that the predetermined error report is performed during the shutdown loop processing after the predetermined error is detected during the interrupt process.

By doing so, fraud-related processing can be carried out even during the termination process, thus deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to output an external signal when executing the stop-play process. For example, an external signal could be output as a security signal for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds). The security signal is a signal output in response to a predetermined error. Since the gaming parlor can understand that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine when the stop-play process is executed, even if no error notification is given during the stop-play process, fraudulent activity can be deterred.

The predetermined errors that trigger the output of security signals may include, for example, errors related to the selector (medal stagnation error, medal reverse flow error, medal passage time error) or errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper stagnation error, anomaly detection error). Any of these may be used, or all of them may be used. Furthermore, other errors may also be used, not limited to those mentioned above.

Furthermore, the security signal may be configured to be output not only when a predetermined error occurs, but also during configuration change mode and configuration confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the configuration key switch is ON.

By configuring the system in this way, not only can predetermined errors be prevented, but also unauthorized activation of the setting key switch (for example, unauthorized changes to setting values or unauthorized verification of setting values) can be prevented by the gaming establishment when a security signal is output.

<Other configurations related to stoppage monitoring or stoppage processing>
The shutdown monitoring process and the shutdown process are configured to be executed outside the usage area. Alternatively, the shutdown monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the usage area and the shutdown process to be executed within the usage area, or both the shutdown monitoring process and the shutdown process may be configured to be executed within the usage area.

Furthermore, in the case of a coinless gaming machine, the stop-play monitoring process and stop-play process may be executed outside the operating area of the main control board, or the stop-play monitoring process and stop-play process may be executed outside the operating area of the game token count control board.

During the shutdown process, the system is configured to continue executing the process for outputting external signals.

This configuration allows for external notification that the machine is being shut down, enabling arcade managers to quickly understand the status of the gaming machines.

The notification of the end of play may be conveyed not only through the LCD display and audio output from the speaker, but also through the illumination patterns of various LEDs, such as the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, acquired coin display, or credit count display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the game has run out of spinning, even in gaming machines without an LCD screen.

The following section will explain a specific example of the end-of-game monitoring process using diagrams. Here, the end-of-game monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the granting of game tokens (the prize granting process related to the displayed symbol combination in Figure 9) is complete. For example, the end-of-game monitoring process may be configured to be executed as one of the processes performed in the game end check in Figure 9.

Furthermore, the stop-loss monitoring process is performed for all games. Specifically, it is performed regardless of the game section (normal section, advantageous section). It is also performed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), during internal bonus state). Finally, it is performed regardless of the number of game tokens bet (1-coin bet, 2-coin bet, 3-coin bet).

<End of operation monitoring process (version without an end of operation difference counter)>
Figure 55 shows that it has a memory area for the number of medals inserted and a memory area for the number of medals dispensed.

The coin count memory area (also called the total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas on the main control board and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of game tokens inserted (total number of bets). For example, the coin count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The payout token count storage area (also called the total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of game tokens dispensed (total payout). For example, the payout token count storage area can be a 2-byte storage area (a storage area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the coin count memory area is reset to its initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the coin count memory area is reset to its initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, if the coin count memory area is set to 1000 and the coin count memory area is set to 2000, and then a power outage occurs and the power is subsequently turned on, the coin count memory area will be reset to its initial value (0), and the coin count memory area will also be reset to its initial value (0).

Note that "power-on" includes both power-on without setting changes and power-on with setting changes. However, it is also acceptable for the initial values not to be stored when power-on without setting changes, but to be stored when power-on with setting changes.

Furthermore, the values stored in the coin count memory area and the coin count memory area are not reset to their initial values (0) during the RWM clear that occurs at the end of the advantageous period. In other words, when the coin count memory area is 1000 and the coin count memory area is 2000, the advantageous period ends (the RWM clear is performed), and the next game (play in the normal period) starts with 1000 stored in the coin count memory area and 2000 in the coin count memory area. It is assumed that the power is not turned off between the end of the advantageous period and the next game.

First, the "Replay Activation Symbol Display?" question determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, if the internal draw resulted in a replay win and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, if, for example, the internal draw resulted in a push-order bell win (a game where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed), the answer is NO. Note that the symbol combination corresponding to a replay can also be referred to as the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role (the same applies below).

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed during this game, the response to "Display symbols to activate replay?" will be YES, and the stop-play monitoring process will terminate.

The "Total OUT Counter Update Process" updates the value stored in the payout token count memory area. Specifically, it adds the payout amount from the current game to the value stored in the payout token count memory area. Then, the result of adding the payout amount from the current game to the value stored in the payout token count memory area is stored in the payout token count memory area. For example, if "1000" is stored in the payout token count memory area, and the payout amount from the current game is "9", then "1009" will be stored in the payout token count memory area.

The "Total IN Counter Update Process" updates the value stored in the coin count memory area. Specifically, it adds the number of coins inserted in the current game to the value stored in the coin count memory area. Then, the result of adding the number of coins inserted in the current game to the value stored in the coin count memory area is stored in the coin count memory area. For example, if the coin count memory area currently stores "3000" and the number of bets in the current game was "3", then "3003" will be stored in the coin count memory area.

Even if the current game is played using automatic betting, the number of bets placed by automatic betting will be considered the number of bets for the current game. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped and "3" was bet automatically in the previous game, the number of bets for the current game will be "3". However, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stops and is displayed in both the previous game and the current game (two consecutive games), the "Display symbols to activate replay?" question in the current game's end-of-game monitoring process will be answered with YES, and the end-of-game monitoring process will terminate without executing the "Total IN Counter Update Process".

The "Total OUT Counter < Total IN Counter?" check determines whether the total number of withdrawals after the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is updated is less than the total number of entries after the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is updated.

Specifically, a subtraction operation is performed by subtracting the "total number of coins inserted after the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins dispensed after the 'total OUT counter update process'." If the carry flag is 1 as a result of this subtraction, the system determines YES and terminates the stop-loss monitoring process. In other words, the next process, "Difference > 19000," is not executed. On the other hand, if the carry flag is not 1 as a result of this subtraction (i.e., 0), the system determines NO.

For example, if the total number of entries after updating the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is "1000" and the total number of entries after updating the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is "2000", then "2000" - "1000" is executed. Since this subtraction process does not result in a carry-over, the carry flag becomes 0. Therefore, the result is NO.

For example, if the total number of entries after updating the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is "2000" and the total number of entries after updating the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is "1000", then "1000" - "2000" is executed. This subtraction process results in a carry-over, so the carry flag becomes 1. Therefore, the result is YES.

For example, if the total number of entries after updating the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is "2000" and the total number of entries after updating the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is "2000", then "2000" - "2000" is executed. Since this subtraction process does not result in a carry-over, the carry flag becomes 0. Therefore, the result is determined to be NO.

The "Difference > 19000?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game media used exceeds 19000, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction operation performed in "Total OUT Counter < Total IN Counter?" with the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop-play state." Here, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop-play state" is set to "19001," and the determination is made accordingly.

For example, if the total number of entries after updating the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is "1000" and the total number of entries after updating the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is "2000", then the result of performing "2000" - "1000" is "1000". The comparison operation between this "1000" and "19001" ("1000" - "19001") results in a carry flag of 1, so the result is determined to be NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total number of entries after updating the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is "10,000" and the total number of entries after updating the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is "29,000", then the result of subtracting "10,000" from "29,000" is "19,000". The comparison operation between "19,000" and "19,001" ("19,000" - "19,001") results in a carry flag of 1, thus determining NO (the difference does not exceed 19,000).

For example, if the total number of entries after updating the "Total IN Counter Update Process" is "10000" and the total number of entries after updating the "Total OUT Counter Update Process" is "29005", then the result of subtracting "10000" from "29005" is "19005". The comparison operation between "19005" and "19001" ("19005" - "19001") results in a carry flag of 0, thus determining YES (the difference exceeds 19000).

In "Save Stop Flag," information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

Furthermore, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by power-on or power-off (power-off process) without setting changes. Also, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by RWM clearing upon the end of the advantageous period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on the system with a setting change (RWM clearing process associated with the setting change). (If information indicating that the stop condition has been met was stored, this information can be cleared.)

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after saving the information indicating that the conditions for stopping play have been met in the "Save Stop Flag" memory area, and then the power is turned ON again (without changing any settings), the values stored in the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out memory areas will revert to their initial values (0), but the information stored in the stop flag memory area (the information indicating that the conditions for stopping play have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned OFF while information indicating that the conditions for stopping play have been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, and then the power is turned ON without any setting changes, the machine will enter a stop state even if the difference between the value stored in the number of tokens inserted and the value stored in the number of tokens paid out does not exceed 19,000 (the difference in the number of game tokens when the power is turned ON is considered the starting point (0) does not exceed 19,000).

Furthermore, if information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area (i.e., the machine is in a stop state), betting operations for the next game are disabled. For example, the bet button may be disabled, or the blocker position may be set to a position that does not form a coin flow path (a position for returning inserted coins through the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle the game tokens after the information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, the settlement switch may be made operable after the information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area. This configuration allows for the settlement of the credit count.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle the game tokens after information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, the settlement switch may be disabled.

In other words, the stop-loss monitoring process in Figure 55 performs a subtraction operation by subtracting the "total number of balls inserted after the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of balls dispensed after the 'total OUT counter update process'." If the "total number of balls dispensed after the 'total OUT counter update process'" is greater than the "total number of balls inserted after the 'total IN counter update process'," it determines whether it is greater than the specified value (19000). If this determination determines that it is greater than the specified value (19000), information indicating that the stop-loss condition has been met is stored in the stop-loss flag memory area. Therefore, the next game cannot be played without changing the settings.

Furthermore, in the stop-loss monitoring process shown in Figure 55, a subtraction process is performed by subtracting the "total number of balls inserted after the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of balls dispensed after the 'total OUT counter update process'." If the "total number of balls dispensed after the 'total OUT counter update process'" is smaller than the "total number of balls inserted after the 'total IN counter update process'," then it is not determined whether it is greater than the specified value (19000). Therefore, since no information indicating that the stop-loss condition has been met is stored in the stop-loss flag memory area, the next game can be played.

In other words, if the total number of payouts is greater than the total number of inputs, a comparison with a specified value is performed; however, if the total number of payouts is less than the total number of inputs, no comparison with a specified value is performed.

This configuration prevents unnecessary processing when the total number of payouts is less than the total number of inputs. In other words, it reduces the processing time of the main control system and minimizes errors caused by noise or other factors.

Note that while we used "0" as an example for the initial values stored in the coin insertion count memory area and the coin payout count memory area, the initial values are not limited to "0". Any value can be used as long as the initial values stored in the coin insertion count memory area and the payout count memory area are the same.

Furthermore, while the memory area for the number of tokens inserted and the memory area for the number of tokens dispensed were set to 2 bytes, it is also possible to use 3 bytes for both memory areas.

Furthermore, if the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from the power-on point (0), falls below a lower limit, the system may be configured not to update the values stored in the token count memory area and the token count memory area.

For example, if the lower limit is set to -10000, in a game where the difference in the number of game tokens played (starting from power-on, which is 0) falls below -10000, the value stored in the token count memory area based on the number of bets in that game will not be updated. Similarly, the value stored in the token count memory area based on the number of payouts in that game will not be updated.

By setting a lower limit in this way, the game can be stopped when the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the lower limit (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to not setting a lower limit, the number of game tokens a player could potentially obtain before the game stops can be reduced. This means that the element of chance can not be excessively high.

Although the explanation used -10000 as the lower limit, the lower limit is not limited to -10000 and can be any value.
stomach

<Stopping out monitoring process (addition version of stop-out difference counter)>
Figure 56 shows a stop difference counter. The explanation of the stop difference counter is omitted as it has been explained above. Note that the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter will be explained as 2 bytes.

Furthermore, the initial value of the stop-loss difference counter in Figure 56 is the value obtained by subtracting the value corresponding to the difference in the game medium that triggers the stop-loss state from the value corresponding to the memory area of the stop-loss difference counter.

The "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop-loss counter" refers to the maximum value that can be stored in the stop-loss counter's memory area, which is 65535, if the stop-loss counter's memory area is 2 bytes. If the stop-loss counter's memory area is 3 bytes, it refers to the maximum value that can be stored in the stop-loss counter's memory area, which is 16777215.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to trigger the stop-loss state" means, for example, if the stop-loss state is triggered when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the power-on point (0), then the value would be 19,000. Similarly, if the stop-loss state is triggered when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 10,000, starting from the power-on point (0), then the value would be 10,000. Furthermore, if the lowest point in a player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the stop-loss state is triggered when the difference in the number of game media from that baseline exceeds 19,000, then the value would be 19,000.

In Figure 56, the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop-loss difference counter" is set to 65535, and the "value corresponding to the difference in the game medium that triggers the stop-loss state" is set to 19000. The initial value is set to 46535 for the explanation.

The initial value of the stop-loss difference counter is stored in the stop-loss difference counter when the power is turned on without any setting changes (not shown). Even when the power is turned on with setting changes, the initial value of the stop-loss difference counter is stored in the stop-loss difference counter (not shown).

First, the "Replay Activation Symbol Display?" setting determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, if the internal draw resulted in a replay win and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, if, for example, the internal draw resulted in a push-order bell win (a game where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed), the answer is NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed during this game, the response to "Display symbols to activate replay?" will be YES, and the stop-play monitoring process will terminate.

The "Stop Difference Counter Set" stores the value stored in the stop difference counter in a designated register. For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 10000, 10000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the stop difference counter at this time is the value before updating the stop difference counter using the absolute value of the difference in the game medium during the current game.

The question "Inputs < Payouts?" determines whether the payouts are greater than the inputs.

For example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the answer is NO.
(i) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, the answer is NO.
(c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3, the answer is NO.
E) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of tokens inserted minus the number of tokens dispensed is calculated, and the result is stored in a designated register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if a carry-over occurs as a result of this calculation (the carry flag becomes 1), the result is determined to be YES; if there is no carry-over (the carry flag becomes 0), the result is determined to be NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of tokens dispensed in this game is greater than the number of tokens dispensed, the carry flag is 0, and the result is determined to be YES. Conversely, if the difference in the number of tokens dispensed is less than the number of tokens dispensed, the carry flag is 1, and the result is determined to be NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, then register A will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
(i) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
(c) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
E) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, the number of bets placed is determined as follows: If, in the previous game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active payline), the bet for the current game was automatically placed (for example, "3" was set by automatic betting), and in the current game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay did not stop (on an active payline), then even if the bet was set by automatic betting, it will be treated as the number of bets placed for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of bets inserted and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay game), the "number of bets inserted < number of payouts?" judgment is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay game), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of bets inserted. Similarly, if the result of the current game is a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay game), the number of bets awarded (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that while the calculation "Inputs < Payouts?" was performed by subtracting payouts from inputs, it is also acceptable to use payouts minus inputs. In other words, it is sufficient to calculate the absolute difference in the number of game media used in this game using the inputs and payouts.

The "Stopping Difference Counter < 0?" check determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media used in the current game from the value stored in the stopping difference counter falls below the lower limit (0). Specifically, it determines whether there is a carry-over by subtracting the value stored in the A register (number of tokens inserted in the current game - number of tokens paid out in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stopping difference counter). If there is a carry-over, the result is YES; if there is no carry-over, the result is NO. Note that if there is a carry-over, the carry flag becomes 1; if there is no carry-over, the carry flag becomes 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, if the stop-loss difference counter (HL register) is set to 2, and the result of this game,
a) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0 (when register A is 3), the HL register becomes 65535 and the carry flag becomes 1. Note that 2 - 3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
i) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1 (when the A register is 2), the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
(c) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3 (when the A register is 0), the HL register becomes 2 and the carry flag becomes 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the answer is YES. b) if the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO. c) if the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is NO.

Furthermore, if the response to "Stop Difference Counter < 0?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, and a predetermined operation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, this predetermined operation involves performing the exclusive OR operation on the values in register A and register A. As a result of this exclusive OR operation, the carry flag becomes 0. While the exclusive OR operation of register A and register A is given as an example, any operation that sets the carry flag to 0 is acceptable.

In the "Lower Limit Set" function, when a carry-over occurs due to "Catch-off Difference Counter < 0?", a predetermined lower limit value (0) is stored in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. In the example above, under the situation where the value stored in the catch-off difference counter is 2, if a) the number of insertions = 3 and the number of withdrawals = 0, then "Catch-off Difference Counter < 0?" results in HL register = 65535. In such a case, "Lower Limit Set" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry-over occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the game medium as accurately as possible. Even after executing "lower limit setting," the next game can still be played. In other words, the process shown in Figure 56 will be executed in subsequent games even after "lower limit setting" has been performed.

Note that while Figure 56 includes a "lower limit setting" process, it is not necessary to include this process. Specifically, if the system determines YES based on "Stopping Difference Counter < 0?", the value may be set to the value stored in the stopping difference counter from the previous game. For example, if the value stored in the stopping difference counter is 2, and the number of balls inserted and the number of balls paid out in the game are (a) number of balls inserted = 3, number of balls paid out = 0, then the value stored in the stopping difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the stopping difference counter from the previous game). With such a configuration, abnormal values (values with digits shifted) cannot be stored in the "stopping difference counter." Also, since the process equivalent to "lower limit setting" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, if a digit shift occurs due to "Stop Difference Counter < 0?", the system prevents abnormal values from being entered into the Stop Difference Counter by not updating it with the value after the digit shift. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game tokens becomes a negative value, the system can generate a stop-loss state as accurately as possible using the difference in the number of game tokens. Furthermore, for values below the lower limit, the system uses the lower limit or the previous value as the value of the Stop Difference Counter, thus preventing the system from awarding too many game tokens before reaching the stop-loss state. In other words, it prevents the system from becoming excessively high in terms of gambling potential.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the calculation result (number of tokens inserted - number of tokens paid out) when "Stop Difference Counter < 0?" (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is added to the HL register. In other words, the operation is performed using "the value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" + "the absolute value of the difference in the game medium used in the current game."

In "difference update," the complement refers to the smallest number that carries over beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value in the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 2,
E) If the number inserted is 3 and the number withdrawn is 10, the A register will be 249. However, in the "difference update," the first step is to derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the calculation 2 + 7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), so the carry flag will be 0.

Furthermore, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65530,
E) If the number inserted is 3 and the number dispensed is 10, the A register will be 249. However, in the "stop difference counter update", the first thing to do is derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 65530 + 7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (due to a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

The "End-of-Range Difference Counter Update" function stores the value stored in the HL register into the End-of-Range Difference Counter.

For example, if the question "Stopping Difference Counter < 0?" returns NO, the HL register stores a value updated by the absolute difference between the stopping difference counter of the previous game and the game medium used in the current game (number inserted - number paid out, or number paid out - number inserted). Therefore, the "Stopping Difference Counter Update" command stores the value obtained by subtracting or adding the absolute difference in game medium used in the current game to the stopping difference counter value of the previous game.

For example, if the response to "Upper Limit Difference Counter < 0?" is YES, the HL register stores the lower limit value (0). Therefore, the "Upper Limit Difference Counter Update" command stores the lower limit value (0) in the upper limit difference counter.

The "Difference > 19000?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game tokens played, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it checks whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, the result is YES; if the carry flag is not 1 (i.e., 0), the result is NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry-over occurs due to a "Difference Update." On the other hand, if a carry-over occurs due to "Input < Payout?", the carry flag will initially be 1, but a predetermined calculation is then performed to set the carry flag to 0, allowing the "Difference > 19000?" check to result in NO.

In other words, the "Difference > 19000?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000 based on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from power-on (0), with a constant (19000), the program size can be reduced.

Thus, in the "Difference > 19000?" section, the system determines whether the difference in the game media (starting from power-on, which is 0) exceeds 19000 based on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, it stores an initial value of 46535.

As mentioned earlier, this 46535 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "19000," which corresponds to the difference in the number of game media that trigger the stop-play state, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in the 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop-play difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of game media, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000, it exceeds 65535, and therefore the carry flag becomes 1.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, a value equivalent to -46535 in the difference between game media, starting from power-on (0), can be stored. For example, if the initial value is 46535, a situation where the stop-loss difference counter value is 16535 means that the difference between game media, starting from power-on (0), is -30000.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference in the number of game tokens a player could potentially obtain before reaching the stop-loss state can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (0) (46535) + 19000).

As described above, by storing 46535 as the initial value—which is the difference between "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop-loss difference counter" and "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that will be stopped"—the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of game media, starting from power-on, exceeds 19000 can be reduced. Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in the number of game media, starting from power-on. While 46535 is used as an example, any other value that has a similar effect can be used as the initial value.

In "Save Stop Flag," information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

Furthermore, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by power-on or power-off (execution of power-off processing) without setting changes. Also, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by RWM clearing upon the end of the advantageous period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on the system with a setting change (RWM clearing process associated with the setting change) (the information indicating that the stop condition has been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after saving the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met in the stop flag memory area using the "stop flag save" function, and then the power is turned ON again (without changing any settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will revert to its initial value (46535), but the information stored in the stop flag memory area (the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is cut off while information indicating that the conditions for stopping the operation have been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, the stop difference counter will reset to its initial value, but the system will enter a stopped state.

Furthermore, if information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area (i.e., the machine is in a stop state), betting operations for the next game are disabled. For example, the bet button may be disabled, or the blocker position may be set to a position that does not form a coin flow path (a position for returning inserted coins through the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle the game tokens after the information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, the settlement switch may be made operable after the information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area. This configuration allows for the settlement of the credit count.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle the game tokens after information indicating that the stop-play condition has been met is stored in the stop-play flag memory area, the settlement switch may be disabled.

Furthermore, while the "Stopping Difference Counter < 0?" function determined whether the result fell below the lower limit (0) by subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the game medium used in the current game from the value stored in the stopping difference counter, it is also possible to express this as "Stopping Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" instead of "Stopping Difference Counter < 0?", considering cases where the lower limit is not 0.

For example, if the lower limit is set to 36535, the "Stopping Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" check determines whether the result is below the lower limit (36535) by subtracting the absolute difference in the game medium used in the current game from the value stored in the stopping difference counter. If the result is below the lower limit (36535), then 36535 may be stored in the HL register using the "Set Lower Limit" function.

By setting the lower limit to 36535, the game can be stopped when the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds 29000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (36535) (10000) + 19000). In other words, compared to setting the lower limit to 0, the difference in the number of game tokens that a player could potentially obtain before the game stops can be reduced. This means that the element of chance (gambling) can be kept from becoming excessively high.

Furthermore, even if the lower limit is set to 36535, if the "Stopping Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" condition determines YES, the value may be set to the value stored in the previous game's stopping difference counter.

While the explanation above uses 36535 as the lower limit, the lower limit is not limited to 36535; it can be any value.

Furthermore, while the example explained uses a scenario where the game stops when the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000, with the power-on time as the starting point (0). This method can also be applied when the lowest point in the player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game stops when the difference in the number of game tokens from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

If the lowest point in a player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game is considered to stop when the difference in the number of game media from that baseline exceeds 19,000, then it is conceivable to set the lower limit to the same value as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 46,535 ("value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the payout counter" - "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that triggers the payout stop"), then the lower limit should also be 46,535. In this way, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, the system will respond to "payout counter < lower limit?" (in the diagram, "payout counter < 0?") and YES, and 46,535 will be stored as the lower limit. Therefore, the lowest point in a player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game can be considered to stop when the difference in the number of game media from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

Similarly, if the lowest point in a player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game is considered to stop if the difference in the number of game tokens from that baseline exceeds 19,000, then by setting the initial value to 0 and the lower limit to 0, when the difference in the number of game tokens becomes smaller than the initial value, the condition "Stopping Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" (shown as "Stopping Difference Counter < 0?" in the diagram) will be YES, and 0 will be stored as the lower limit. Then, under "Difference > 19,000?", it is determined whether the value stored in the stopping difference counter, updated by "Stopping Difference Counter Update," is less than 19,001. By configuring it in this way, it is also possible to set the lowest point in a player's winnings as the baseline (0), and consider the game to stop if the difference in the number of game tokens from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

<Stopping out monitoring process (subtraction version of stop-out difference counter)>
Figure 57 shows a stop difference counter. The explanation of the stop difference counter is omitted as it has been explained above. Note that the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter will be explained as 2 bytes.

Furthermore, the initial value of the stop-loss difference counter in Figure 57 is set to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that will be considered to have reached the stop-loss state."

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to trigger the stop-play state" means, for example, if the stop-play state is triggered when the difference in the number of game media used exceeds 19,000, starting from power-on (0), then the value would be 19,000. Similarly, if the stop-play state is triggered when the difference in the number of game media used exceeds 10,000, starting from power-on (0), then the value would be 10,000.

In Figure 57, the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop-loss state is set to 19000, and the explanation will proceed with the initial value set to 19000.

The initial value of the stop-loss difference counter is stored in the stop-loss difference counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Furthermore, even when the power is turned on after a setting change, the initial value of the stop-loss difference counter is stored in the stop-loss difference counter (not shown).

First, the "Replay Activation Symbol Display?" setting determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, if the internal draw resulted in a replay win and the symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, if, for example, the internal draw resulted in a push-order bell win (a game where the symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed), the answer is NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed during this game, the response to "Display symbols to activate replay?" will be YES, and the stop-play monitoring process will terminate.

The "Stop Difference Counter Set" stores the value stored in the stop difference counter in a designated register. For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 10000, 10000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the stop difference counter at this time is the value before updating the stop difference counter using the absolute value of the difference in the game medium during the current game.

The question "Inputs < Payouts?" determines whether the payouts are greater than the inputs.

For example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the answer is NO.
(i) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, the answer is NO.
(c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3, the answer is NO.
E) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of tokens inserted minus the number of tokens dispensed is calculated, and the result is stored in a designated register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if a carry-over occurs as a result of this calculation (the carry flag becomes 1), the result is determined to be YES; if there is no carry-over (the carry flag becomes 0), the result is determined to be NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of tokens dispensed in this game is greater than the number of tokens dispensed, the carry flag is 0, and the result is determined to be YES. Conversely, if the difference in the number of tokens dispensed is less than the number of tokens dispensed, the carry flag is 1, and the result is determined to be NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, then register A will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
(i) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
(c) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
E) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, the number of bets placed is determined as follows: If, in the previous game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay stopped (on an active payline), the bet for the current game was automatically placed (for example, "3" was set by automatic betting), and in the current game, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay did not stop (on an active payline), then even if the bet was set by automatic betting, it will be treated as the number of bets placed for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of bets inserted and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay game), the "number of bets inserted < number of payouts?" judgment is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay game), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of bets inserted. Similarly, if the result of the current game is a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay (on an active payline) (meaning the next game will be a replay game), the number of bets awarded (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that while the calculation "Inputs < Payouts?" was performed by subtracting payouts from inputs, it is also acceptable to use payouts minus inputs. In other words, it is sufficient to calculate the absolute difference in the number of game media used in the current game using the inputs and payouts.

The "Upper Limit Exceeded?" check determines whether the result exceeds the upper limit (for example, 65535) by adding the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media used in the current game to the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter. Specifically, it determines whether there is a carry-over by adding the value stored in the A register (number of tokens inserted in the current game - number of tokens paid out in the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop-loss difference counter). If there is a carry-over, the result is YES; if there is no carry-over, the result is NO. The carry flag becomes 1 if there is a carry-over, and 0 if there is no carry-over. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65534,
a) When the number inserted is 3 and the number withdrawn is 0, the HL register becomes 1 and the carry flag becomes 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 1.
(i) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 1, the HL register becomes 0 and the carry flag becomes 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
(c) When the number of inputs is 3 and the number of payouts is 3, the HL register will be 65534 and the carry flag will be 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the answer is YES. b) if the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is YES. c) if the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is NO.

If the answer to "Exceeding upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, and a specific operation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, this specific operation involves performing an exclusive OR operation on the values in register A and register A. As a result of this exclusive OR operation, the carry flag becomes 0. While the exclusive OR operation of register A and register A is given as an example, any operation that sets the carry flag to 0 is acceptable.

In the "Upper Limit Set" function, when a carry occurs due to "Upper Limit Exceeded?", a predetermined upper limit (65535) is stored in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes; however, the upper limit is not limited to 65535, but can be any predetermined value.

In the example above, under the condition that the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 65534, if (a) the number of insertions is 3 and the number of withdrawals is 0, then the HL register becomes 2 due to "exceeding the upper limit?". In such a case, the value 65535 is stored in the HL register by "setting the upper limit".

Similarly, in the above example, under the situation where the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 65534, if (a) the number of insertions is 3 and the number of withdrawals is 1, the HL register becomes 0 due to "exceeding the upper limit?". In such a case, "upper limit setting" stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the game tokens as accurately as possible. Even after executing "Upper Limit Set," the next game can still be played. In other words, the process shown in Figure 57 will be executed in subsequent games even after "Upper Limit Set" has been performed.

Note that while Figure 57 includes a "set upper limit" process, it is not necessary to include this process. Specifically, if the system determines YES based on "Upper limit exceeded?", the value stored in the previous game's stop-loss counter may be used. For example, if the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 65534, and the number of balls inserted and the number of balls paid out in the game are (a) 3 balls inserted and 0 balls paid out, the value stored in the stop-loss counter may be 65534 (the same value as the stop-loss counter in the previous game). Such a configuration prevents abnormal values (values with carry-overs) from being stored in the stop-loss counter. Furthermore, since the process equivalent to "set upper limit" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry-over occurs due to "exceeding the upper limit," the system prevents abnormal values from being entered into the stop-loss difference counter by not updating it with the value at the time of the carry-over. In other words, even if the difference in the game tokens becomes a negative value, the system can still trigger the stop-loss state as accurately as possible using the difference in the game tokens.

Furthermore, for values exceeding the upper limit, the upper limit or the previous value is used as the value of the stop-loss difference counter. This prevents assigning a difference significantly exceeding the value corresponding to the difference in game tokens played until the stop-loss state is reached (for example, 19000). Specifically, by storing 19000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65535, the maximum difference in game tokens a player can potentially obtain before the stop-loss state is reached can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19000) and the upper limit (65535) (46535) + 19000). In other words, this prevents the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the calculation result (number of tokens inserted - number of tokens paid out) in the "Upper Limit Exceeded?" operation (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the operation is performed as follows: "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" - "Difference value of the game medium used in the current game."

In "difference update," the complement refers to the smallest number that carries over beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value in the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65534,
E) If the number inserted is 3 and the number withdrawn is 10, the A register will be 249. However, in the "difference update," the first step is to derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the calculation 65534 - 7, 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that the result of the calculation 65534 - 7 is not less than 0 (there is no carry-over), so the carry flag will be 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 2,
E) If the number inserted is 3 and the number dispensed is 10, the A register will be 249. However, in the "stop difference counter update", the first thing to do is derive 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by performing the calculation 2 - 7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 - 7 is -5, but since it is less than 0 (due to a carry), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because of the carry, the carry flag will be 1.

The "End-of-Range Difference Counter Update" function stores the value stored in the HL register into the End-of-Range Difference Counter.

For example, if the answer to "Exceeding Upper Limit?" is NO, the HL register stores a value updated by the difference between the previous game's stop-loss counter value and the current game's game medium (number inserted - number paid out, or number paid out - number inserted). Therefore, "Stop-Loss Counter Update" updates the stop-loss counter by the absolute value of the difference between the previous game's stop-loss counter value and the current game's game medium (subtraction or addition), and stores this updated value in the stop-loss counter.

For example, if the response to "Exceeding upper limit?" is YES, the HL register stores the upper limit (65535). Therefore, the "Endpoint Difference Counter Update" function stores the upper limit (65535) in the endpoint difference counter.

The "Difference > 19000?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game tokens played, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it checks whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, the result is YES; if the carry flag is not 1 (i.e., 0), the result is NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when there is a digit reduction due to "Difference Update." On the other hand, if there is an increase due to "Input < Payout?", the carry flag will initially be 1, but then a predetermined calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be judged as NO.

In other words, the "Difference > 19000?" check determines whether the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000 based on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from power-on (0), with a constant (19000), the program size can be reduced.

Thus, in the "Difference > 19000?" section, the system determines whether the difference in the game tokens (starting from power-on, which is 0) exceeds 19000 based on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, 19000 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned earlier, this 19000 is the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop-loss state. In other words, if the difference in the number of game media used, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000, it falls below 0, and the carry flag becomes 1.

Furthermore, by storing 19000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from power-on (0). For example, if the initial value is 19000, a situation where the stop-loss difference counter value is 49000 means that the difference in the number of game tokens, starting from power-on (0), is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19000 as the initial value, which corresponds to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop-loss state, the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of game media used, starting from power-on, exceeds 19000 can be reduced. Furthermore, by storing 19000 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -46535 as the difference in the number of game media used, starting from power-on. While 19000 is used as an example, any value other than 19000 can be used as the initial value if it has a similar effect.

In "Save Stop Flag," information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag storage area.

Furthermore, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by power-on or power-off (execution of power-off processing) without setting changes. Also, the information stored in the stop-loss flag memory area is not initialized by RWM clearing upon the end of the advantageous period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on the system with a setting change (RWM clearing process associated with the setting change) (the information indicating that the stop condition has been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after saving the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met in the "stop flag save" memory area, and then the power is turned ON again (without changing any settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will revert to its initial value (19000), but the information stored in the stop flag memory area (the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is cut off while information indicating that the conditions for stopping the operation have been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, the stop difference counter will reset to its initial value, but the system will enter a stopped state.

Furthermore, if information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area (i.e., the machine is in a stop state), betting operations for the next game are disabled. For example, the bet button may be disabled, or the blocker position may be set to a position that does not form a coin flow path (a position for returning inserted coins through the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle the game tokens after the information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, the settlement switch may be made operable after the information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area. This configuration allows for the settlement of the credit count.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle the game tokens after information indicating that the stop-play condition has been met is stored in the stop-play flag memory area, the settlement switch may be disabled.

For the example upper limit used here, if the upper limit is set to 29000, the "Upper Limit Exceeded?" function will determine whether the result of adding the absolute value of the difference in game media used in the current game to the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter exceeds the upper limit (29000). If the result of adding the absolute value of the difference in game media used in the current game to the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter exceeds the upper limit (29000), then the "Upper Limit Set" function may be used to store 29000 in the HL register.

By setting the upper limit to 29,000, the game can be stopped when the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (29,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to setting the upper limit to 65,535, the difference in the number of game tokens that a player could potentially obtain before the game stops can be reduced. This means that the element of chance (gambling) can be kept from becoming excessively high.

Furthermore, even if the upper limit is set to 29,000, if the "Upper limit exceeded?" indicator determines YES, the value may be set to the value stored in the previous game's stop-loss counter.

While the explanation above uses 29,000 as the upper limit, the upper limit is not limited to 29,000; it can be any value.

Furthermore, while the example explained uses a scenario where the game stops when the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000, with the power-on time as the starting point (0). This method can also be applied when the lowest point in the player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game stops when the difference in the number of game tokens from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

If the lowest point in a player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game stops when the difference in the number of game media from that baseline exceeds 19,000, then it is conceivable to set the upper limit to the same value as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 19,000, which corresponds to the difference in the number of game media that triggers the game to stop, then the upper limit should also be set to 19,000. In this way, if the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, the system will respond "YES" to "Exceeding upper limit?", and 19,000 will be stored as the upper limit. Therefore, the lowest point in a player's winnings is used as the baseline (0), and the game stops when the difference in the number of game media from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

As described above, by performing the processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57, it is possible to store information (a predetermined value) indicating that the stop condition has been met in the stop flag storage area when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the power-on point (0) (the stop process can be executed).

Furthermore, by performing the processing shown in Figures 56 and 57, the point at which the player's payout is lowest is set as the reference point (0). When the difference in the number of game tokens from that reference point exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the stop-out condition has been met can be stored in the stop-out flag memory area (allowing the stop-out process to be executed).

Note that the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are just examples; any order of control processes is acceptable as long as it achieves the same effect.

Similarly, the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are merely examples. Any arithmetic operation that achieves a similar effect is acceptable, even if the addition or subtraction in the control process differs (for example, if the addition and subtraction are reversed). In other words, "adding" and "subtracting" can be expressed as "updating."

Furthermore, the stop-loss monitoring process described in Figures 55, 56, and 57 is also executed during bonus gameplay. In other words, even during bonus gameplay (gameplay before the bonus game termination conditions are met), starting from power-on (0), when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the stop-loss conditions have been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the stop-loss flag memory area, thereby triggering the stop-loss state even during bonus gameplay.

Similarly, the stop-out monitoring process described in Figures 56 and 57, even during a bonus game state (gameplay before the bonus game state termination conditions are met), uses the point where the player's payout is lowest as the baseline (0). When the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000, it stores information (a predetermined value) indicating that the stop-out conditions have been met in the stop-out flag memory area, thereby stopping the game even during a bonus game state.

By configuring the machine in this way, even during bonus gameplay, the game can be stopped when the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000 (starting from power-on, which is 0), thus providing a gaming machine that does not excessively increase the element of chance.

However, stopping the bonus game midway through can be unpleasant for the player.

Therefore, in the middle of a bonus game state (gameplay before the bonus game state termination conditions are met), even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the power-on time (0), the game will not immediately enter a stop state. Instead, when the termination conditions for that bonus game state are met, information indicating that the stop condition has been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the stop flag memory area, and the game is then stopped. An example of this is described below.

<Stop monitoring process (a version of the stop difference counter that subtracts from the stop count; the stop state is set to stop after the bonus game state ends, based on the temporary stop flag)>
Figure 58 is a modified version of Figure 57. Figure 58 has a temporary flag storage area for stopping operations.

The temporary stop flag storage area is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. Specifically, it is a storage area that stores information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the temporary stop condition is met when the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000, starting from power-on (0).

The information stored in the temporary stop flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on or off. Furthermore, the information stored in the temporary stop flag memory area is not initialized by the RWM clear upon the end of the advantageous period.

Furthermore, the information stored in the temporary stop flag memory area can be initialized (for example, to "0") by powering on with a setting change (RWM clearing process associated with the setting change) (this clears the information indicating that the temporary stop condition has been met).

Furthermore, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping the game have been met is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area is in a bonus game state, then information indicating that the stop conditions have been met will not be stored in the temporary stop flag memory area. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping the game have been met is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area is in a bonus game state, then the game will not reach a stop state.

If a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping play have been met is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area is in a bonus game state, then the information indicating that the stop conditions have been met will be stored in the stop flag memory area after the game in that bonus game state has ended. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping play have been met is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area is in a bonus game state, the game will enter a stop state after the game in that bonus game state has ended has finished.

The following explanation will focus on the differences between this figure and Figure 57.

First, the "Temporary Stop Flag ON?" check determines whether information indicating that the temporary stop condition is met is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area.

If the "Temporary Stop Flag ON?" is determined to be YES, then the "Bonus Game State?" is determined.

If the "Temporary Stop Flag ON?" is determined to be NO, then the next step is to determine "Re-play Activation Symbol Display?".

The "Re-play activation symbol display?" is identical to the "Re-play activation symbol display?" in Figure 57, therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The "Stopping Difference Counter Set" is identical to the "Stopping Difference Counter Set" in Figure 57, therefore its explanation is omitted.

The statement "Number of inputs < Number of payouts?" is identical to "Number of inputs < Number of payouts?" in Figure 57, therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The phrase "Exceeding the upper limit?" is identical to the phrase "Exceeding the upper limit?" in Figure 57, therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The "Upper Limit Set" is identical to the "Upper Limit Set" in Figure 57, therefore its explanation is omitted.

The "difference update" is identical to the "difference update" in Figure 57, therefore, its explanation is omitted.

The "stop difference counter update" is identical to the "stop difference counter update" in Figure 57, therefore, its explanation is omitted.

The expression "Difference > 19000?" is identical to the expression "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 57, therefore, its explanation is omitted.

In "Temporary Stop Flag Storage," information indicating that the temporary stop condition is met is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area. For example, numerical information such as a predetermined value (e.g., "1") could be used to indicate that the temporary stop condition is met.

The "Bonus Game State?" section determines whether the next game will be a bonus game. Specifically, it checks the bonus activation flag to determine whether a Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB is active.

Here, the bonus activation flag is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. For example, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) stops and is displayed, the bit in the bonus activation flag corresponding to Type 1 BB is turned on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the Type 1 BB ends. Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Type 2 BB stops and is displayed, the bit in the bonus activation flag corresponding to Type 2 BB is turned on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the Type 2 BB ends. Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Regular Bonus (RB) stops and is displayed, the bit in the bonus activation flag corresponding to RB is turned on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the RB ends.

Furthermore, the system is configured to store the on/off status of the bonus activation flag in a process that takes place before the payout monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) ends during the current game, the answer to "Bonus game state?" will be NO.

For example, if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), and the bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) did not end in the current game, then the answer to "Bonus game state?" is YES.

For example, if the previous game was not in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), but the current game becomes a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), then the answer to "Bonus game state?" is YES.

The "Save Stop Flag" function is identical to the "Save Stop Flag" function in Figure 57, therefore, its explanation is omitted.

As described above, by providing a temporary stop flag memory area, even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000 during bonus gameplay (starting from power-on, which is 0), information indicating that the stop condition has been met will not be stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19,000 during bonus gameplay (starting from power-on, which is 0), the stop condition will be reached after the game in which the bonus gameplay ends.

Furthermore, after information indicating that the provisional termination condition is met is stored in the provisional termination flag memory area, the termination difference counter is not updated. This configuration avoids unnecessary processing.

However, even after information indicating that the provisional termination condition is met has been stored in the provisional termination flag memory area, the termination difference counter may still be updated. This configuration allows for the standardization of processing.

Furthermore, after information indicating that the provisional stop condition is met is stored in the provisional stop flag memory area, the determination of whether the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000 is not performed. This configuration avoids unnecessary processing.

Furthermore, as is clear from Figure 58, after the information indicating that the provisional stop condition is met is stored in the provisional stop flag memory area, the information stored in the provisional stop flag memory area is not updated (the information indicating that the provisional stop condition is met is not cleared) even if the difference in the number of game media falls below 19,000. With this configuration, if the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the game can be stopped even if the difference in the number of game media falls below 19,000 in the game after the bonus game state has ended.

<Relationship between the operating hours of a gaming parlor and the difference in the number of gaming machines available before the game is shut down>
Gaming machines that have a function to stop the game (also called a complete function) may be designed such that the following equation holds true.

(Difference in the number of game tokens until the game reaches its limit) / (Expected increase in game tokens per game in the most advantageous game state for the player) × Minimum game time (s) / 3600 < Operating hours (h) for amusement parlors as defined by the Entertainment Business Act

The minimum game time (s) in the above formula is the minimum game time mentioned above, which corresponds to 4.1 seconds. Specifically, it is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation for a given game to the start of reel rotation for the next game (the next game after that game). Also, 3600 is a constant used to convert seconds to hours (1 hour = 60 minutes × 60 seconds = 3600 seconds). Furthermore, the "Fūei Hō" refers to the Act on Regulation and Proper Operation of Entertainment Businesses, etc.

Furthermore, the expected increase in the number of game tokens per game under the most favorable game conditions for the player is generally referred to as the net increase (net increase in tokens) per game under the most favorable game conditions for the player.

To explain the expected increase in game currency per game under the most advantageous game conditions for the player, a simple example will be provided.

For example, let's assume the most advantageous game state is the AT state (where betting 3 coins is the most advantageous). Furthermore, an internal lottery determines a 3/4 probability of winning a 10-coin payout (minor win), and the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed. Also, an internal lottery determines a 1/4 probability of a loss, and the corresponding symbol combination (0 coins) can be displayed. In this AT state, when a minor win is achieved through the internal lottery, the player should operate the stop switch in a way that is advantageous, following the announced advantageous stop switch operation method. In other words, when a 10-coin payout (minor win) is achieved through the internal lottery, the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed with 100% probability.

In this case, the expected increase per game in the most advantageous game state for the player is (3/4 × 10 + 1/4 × 0) / 3 = 2.5. Note that this example does not consider games where a replay is won. However, games where a replay is won through internal抽選 and the corresponding symbol combination is displayed will be calculated as 0 bet and 0 payout.

Furthermore, in gaming machines that have multiple game states, such as Bonus Game State A, Bonus Game State B, and AT State, the game state that offers the greatest expected increase in game currency per game is considered the most advantageous game state for the player.

For example, if the expected increase in game currency per game is 3.5 in Bonus Game State A, 2.0 in Bonus Game State B, and 2.5 in AT State, then the most advantageous game state for the player is Bonus Game State A.

The expected increase in game currency per game for each game state described above is merely an example; other values may also be used.

Furthermore, the operating hours (hours) for amusement parlors as defined by the Entertainment Business Act are 18 hours. Specifically, Article 13 of the Entertainment Business Act states, "Entertainment business operators shall not operate their businesses during late-night hours (meaning the hours from midnight to 6:00 AM; the same applies hereinafter)." In other words, the operating hours for amusement parlors are 18 hours, which is the time of day excluding late-night hours.

Furthermore, the difference in the number of game tokens used until the game reaches its limit is set at 19,000.

Furthermore, the conditions for reaching a payout limit may be either: a) when the lowest point in the player's winnings after power-on is set as the baseline (0), and the difference in the number of game tokens from that baseline exceeds 19,000; or b) when the number of game tokens from the point of power-on (0) is set as the starting point (0), and the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000.

Therefore, substituting the values into the above formula, we get 19000 / (Expected increase in game currency per game in the most advantageous game state for the player) × 4.1 / 3600 < 18.

In other words, by setting the difference in the number of game tokens until the game reaches its limit to 19,000, if the expected increase in game tokens per game in the most advantageous game state for the player is greater than approximately 0.83, then even if the most advantageous game state for the player starts immediately after the arcade opens and continues (i.e., the game reaches its limit before the arcade closes), the game will still reach its limit before the arcade closes.

In other words, even if a gaming machine designed to have a significantly large expected increase in game currency per game in the most advantageous game state (for example, a value greater than 2.5) is installed in a gaming parlor, by setting the difference in game currency until the game reaches its limit to 19,000, the game can reach its limit within the operating hours of the gaming parlor, even if the most advantageous game state for the player continues (if the most advantageous game state for the player occurs consecutively). Therefore, even a gaming machine with a significantly large expected increase in game currency per game in the most advantageous game state can be provided without excessively increasing the gambling aspect.

Furthermore, since the shortest permitted operating time among those set by prefectures is 13 hours, it is also possible to replace 18 (h) on the right-hand side of the above equation with 13 (h) to construct the equation so that it holds true.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gambling element does not increase significantly when the right-hand side of the above equation is set to 13(h) compared to when it is set to 18(h).

<Advantageous section difference counter and stop-loss difference counter>
Let's reiterate the characteristics (main differences) of the advantageous section difference counter and the stop-loss difference counter.

<<Advantageous Period Difference Counter>>
(1) Overview This is a memory area for storing the difference in the number of game media related to the end (forced termination) of the advantageous period. For example, if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous period exceeds 2400, the system controls the termination of the advantageous period.
(2) At the start of counting, the difference in game media is calculated from the game in which the advantageous period began, and the advantageous period difference counter is updated. In other words, if the first game after the power is turned on is in the normal period, for example, in games played in the normal period, the advantageous period difference counter is not started counting based on the difference in game media for games played in the normal period.

Furthermore, if the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are met during a game in the normal section, it is permissible to configure the system to set an initial value (for example, 46535) to the advantageous section difference counter during that game.

(3) End of Count The count ends with the game in which the advantageous period ends. In other words, the advantageous period difference counter is updated starting from the game in which the advantageous period begins, and the advantageous period difference counter is updated thereafter until the game in which the advantageous period ends. Note that the advantageous period difference counter is not required to be updated for the game in which the advantageous period ends, or it may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing the advantageous interval difference counter a) The value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is initialized (for example, by storing 0) by the RWM clear process that occurs when the advantageous interval ends.
(i) When the power is turned on with a setting change (the RWM clear process associated with the setting change mode, which is entered by turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is in the ON position), the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter is initialized (for example, to store 0).

Furthermore, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter after initialization (initialized value) and the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter after the advantageous interval start conditions are met (initial value) may be configured to be different values.

For example, an example of a value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (a value resulting from initialization) is "0".

Furthermore, examples of the value (initial value) stored in the advantageous period difference counter when the conditions for starting the advantageous period are met include: "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period, as defined as the condition for ending the advantageous period," or "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous period difference counter" minus "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period, as defined as the condition for ending the advantageous period."

Here, an example of "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period, which is defined as the termination condition for the advantageous period" is "2400," and an example of "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous period difference counter" - "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous period, which is defined as the termination condition for the advantageous period" is "63135." Note that these values are examples only and are not limiting.

Furthermore, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter may be configured such that the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the value due to initialization) becomes the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter (the initial value) when the conditions for starting the advantageous interval count are met.

Specifically, by initializing the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter, the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value due to initialization) may be defined as either "the value corresponding to the difference in game media within the advantageous section defined as the termination condition for the advantageous section," or "the value corresponding to the size of the advantageous section difference counter's memory area" minus "the value corresponding to the difference in game media within the advantageous section defined as the termination condition for the advantageous section."

(5) Examples in which the value of the advantageous interval difference counter is maintained: a) Even if a predetermined error (recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch to clear the predetermined error is operated, the advantageous interval difference counter is not reset to its initial value (the predetermined error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a predetermined error occurs while the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is 100, and the error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter will not be updated. Furthermore, the advantageous interval will also be maintained in this case.

(i) If power-off processing (also called power-off processing) is performed, and then power is restored by power-on without any setting changes (power switch on while the setting key switch is off), the difference counter for the advantageous period will not be reset to its initial value.

For example, if the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is 100, and the power switch is turned off, executing a power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning it on without changing any settings, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter will not be updated. Furthermore, the advantageous interval will also be maintained in this case.

Note that the examples described above, (4) initializing the advantageous interval difference counter and (5) maintaining the value of the advantageous interval difference counter, are just examples. For example, some of the examples can be adopted, or all of the examples can be adopted. In addition, the system may be configured so that the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is reset to its initial value or the value of the advantageous interval difference counter is maintained when other events occur.
<<Stopping Point Difference Counter>>
(1) Overview This is a memory area for storing the difference in the number of game media that are affected by the end of the game. For example, if the difference in the number of game media affected by the end of the game exceeds 19,000, the system is controlled to enter an end-of-game state (also called a complete state).

In this embodiment, the difference in the number of game media related to the stopping point refers to either (a) or (b) below.
(a) The difference in the current number of game media, starting from the point when the power is turned on (0) (b) After the power is turned on, the point where the player's payout is lowest is used as the reference (0), and the difference in the current number of game media from that reference (2) When counting starts The difference in game media is calculated from the first game after the power is turned on (power turned on without changing settings, and power turned on with changing settings), and the stop difference counter is updated. In other words, counting starts whether the first game after the power is turned on is a game in the normal section or a game in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the counting of the difference in the number of game media used to trigger the stoppage is handled by a designated switch (a so-called stoppage switch) on the game machine. The game is configured so that the arcade cannot choose whether or not to count the difference by operating this switch (this differs from conventional stoppage functions). In other words, when playing on the same type of game machine, there is no difference in whether or not the game reaches the stoppage state depending on the arcade. That is, if the difference in the number of game media used exceeds the limit for triggering the stoppage state, the game will uniformly reach the stoppage state.

(3) End of count The count ends when a game meets the stop condition. In other words, the stop difference counter is updated starting from the game that is powered on, and the stop difference counter is updated thereafter until the stop condition is met. Note that the stop difference counter is not updated for games that meet the stop condition, or it is not necessary to update the stop difference counter.

(4) Example of initializing the stop-loss difference counter a) When a power-off process is performed and then power is restored by power-on with a setting change (power switch on while the setting key switch is on), the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is initialized (for example, stored as 0).

For example, if the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 200, and the power switch is turned off to perform a power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning it on with a setting change, the value stored in the stop-loss counter will become 0 (the value after initialization).

(i) If a power-off process is performed, and then power is restored by powering on without any setting changes (power switch on while the setting key switch is off), the value stored in the stop-loss counter will be initialized (for example, stored as 0).

For example, if the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 200, and the power switch is turned off to perform a power-off process, and then power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the stop-loss counter will become 0 (the value after initialization).

Furthermore, if an event occurs that requires the resetting of the stop-loss difference counter, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter may be reset to its initial value.

By configuring it in this way, the process of initializing the value stored in the stop-loss counter can refer to the same thing as the process of storing (setting) an initial value in the stop-loss counter. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to have two separate processes: one for initializing the value stored in the stop-loss counter and another for storing (setting) an initial value in the stop-loss counter, thus reducing program size.

Furthermore, even if the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is the same as or different from the value used to store (set) the initial value in the stop-loss difference counter, two separate processes may be implemented: one to initialize the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter, and another to store (set) the initial value in the stop-loss difference counter.

For example, when initializing the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter, if the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is 0, the system may be configured to store 0 by subsequently storing (setting) an initial value in the stop-loss difference counter.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to initialize the value stored in the stop-loss counter by setting it to 19000 when the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 0.

(5) Examples in which the value of the stop-loss counter is maintained: a) Even if a predetermined error (recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch to clear the predetermined error is operated, the stop-loss counter is not reset to its initial value (the predetermined error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a predetermined error occurs while the value stored in the stop-loss counter is 200, and the error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the stop-loss counter will remain at 200. In other words, the value stored in the stop-loss counter will not be updated.

(i) The RWM clear process upon the end of the advantageous period does not reset the counter to its initial value. In other words, the stop-loss difference counter is a counter that is not subject to the RWM clear process upon the end of the advantageous period.

For example, even if the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is 200 when the advantageous period ends and an RWM clear is performed due to the end of the advantageous period, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter after the RWM clear remains 200. In other words, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is not updated.

The examples described above, (4) initializing the stop-loss difference counter and (5) maintaining the value of the stop-loss difference counter, are just examples. For instance, some or all of the examples can be adopted. Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is reset to its initial value or its value is maintained due to other events.

<Notification status regarding the discontinuation of the service>
There are three notification states related to the termination of operation: a first state, a second state, and a third state. These notification states related to termination are controlled by a sub-control means.

The first state is the state before the conditions for stopping play are met. It also refers to the state where the difference between the number of game tokens related to stopping play and the number of game tokens remaining until the stopping state is reached is greater than a specific value (for example, 100).

For example, if the difference in the number of game media until the game reaches its limit is 19,000, and a specific value is 100, then the situation where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is between 0 and less than 18,900 corresponds to the first state. In this embodiment, the first state is also referred to as the "normal state," the "pre-operation notification state," and the "pre-limit operation notification state."

The second state is the state before the conditions for stopping play are met. It also refers to the state where the difference between the number of game tokens related to stopping play and the number of game tokens remaining until the stopping state is reached is below a specific value.

For example, if the difference in the number of game media until the game reaches its limit is 19,000, and a specific value is 100, then the situation where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is between 18,900 and 19,000 corresponds to the second state. In this embodiment, the second state is also referred to as the "operation notification state," "operation notification alert state," or "limit operation notification alert state."

The third state is the state where the conditions for stopping are met. Specifically, it refers to the state where the conditions for stopping are met and the stopping process (stopped state) is being executed.

For example, if the difference in the number of game media until the game reaches its limit is 19,000, then the situation where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (the state where the game has reached its limit) corresponds to the third state. In this embodiment, the third state is also referred to as the "operation state," "operation notification state," and "limit operation notification state."

In other words, the transition of the notification state related to the shutdown, from the time the power is turned on until the shutdown state is reached, is as follows: first state followed by second state, and then second state followed by third state.

Furthermore, the transition of notification states related to the termination of operation is not necessarily always in the order of State 1 → State 2 → State 3. As will be explained in detail later, there are also cases where the transition is, for example, State 1 → State 2 → State 1 → State 2 → State 3.

<Notification methods according to the notification status regarding the end of operation>
Next, we will explain the notification methods according to the notification status related to the termination of operation, using diagrams.

<<Notification status regarding the end of service: Normal state>>
Figure 75 shows an example of the display when the notification state related to the end of play is in the "normal state". The following describes the displays (images) shown on the display device 32 in the order of Figure 75(1), Figure 75(2), and Figure 75(3).

<<<Figure 75 (1)>>>
This is an example of a performance during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) when the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal state".

The lower left side of the display device 32 shows "PAYOUT" and "CREDIT". "PAYOUT" displays the number of game tokens obtained (number of tokens awarded) as a result of one game. In Figure 75(1), "00" is displayed because it shows the state before a game is completed (for example, when all reels are spinning).

Furthermore, CREDIT displays the current number of credits. Figure 75(1) shows an example where the game is being played with 50 credits, hence the display of "50".

The upper right side of the display device 32 shows "Total" and "G". "Total" displays the number of game tokens obtained through the AT (Automatic Trigger) state. Figure 75(1) shows an example where 2000 game tokens were obtained through the AT state, so "Total 2000 tokens" is displayed.

Furthermore, G displays the number of games played in AT mode. Figure 75(1) shows an example where 1000 games were played in AT mode, so "1000G" is displayed.

The display device 32 displays an image in the center that enhances the enjoyment of the game, including character images. In AT mode, the display device 32 may also display an indication of the most advantageous operation of the stop switch (not shown).

If the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal state," and the power is turned off during gameplay (in this example, during AT state), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch in the off position (power on without setting change), then PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G will display the same information as when the power was turned off.

Furthermore, while the example shown displays PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G information during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) when the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal," it is not necessarily required to display these.

For example, the system could be configured to display Total and G information, but not PAYOUT or CREDIT information. Also, while G was previously displayed as corresponding to the number of games played in AT mode, it could now be displayed as corresponding to the remaining number of games in AT mode. Thus, as long as the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal mode," the information displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) can be any information you choose.

As described above, when the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal state" and the game is in progress (in this example, during AT state), no prior notification until the end of play conditions are met, nor any notification indicating that the end of play has been reached, will be given. Although AT state was used as an example, regardless of the game state (bonus game state, normal game state (non-AT state, non-bonus game state, non-bonus internal state, bonus internal state)), no prior notification until the end of play conditions are met, nor any notification indicating that the end of play has been reached, will be given.

<<<Figure 75 (2)>>>
This is an example of a notification state related to the end of play being "normal state," and a demonstration (also called a demo performance or demo screen) during the game waiting period. For example, a demo performance is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after payout processing) without any new bets being placed.

Furthermore, the demo sequence may be prevented from running if, in certain game states such as AT mode or bonus game mode, a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or payout processing) without any new bets being placed.

Furthermore, the demo sequence may be prevented from running when the system is in menu mode (when the menu image is displayed) even if a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or payout processing) without any new bets being placed.

In other words, even if the game transitions to menu mode at a point before a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of gameplay (for example, 30 seconds after a certain point), and the predetermined time has elapsed while the menu screen remains displayed, the demo animation does not necessarily need to be executed.

Furthermore, when transitioning to menu mode, the demo performance may be executed after a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the menu mode was initiated, or after a specific time (e.g., 120 seconds) different from the predetermined time has elapsed since the menu mode was initiated.

Furthermore, it's acceptable to prevent the demo animation from running when the user transitions to menu mode (i.e., when the menu image is displayed).

As an example of the demo presentation, character images are displayed, and then corporate logos and warning images (images to prevent excessive gaming) are displayed in sequence.

Furthermore, as part of the demonstration, in addition to the examples of demonstrations described above, an image indicating that the machine has a payout stop function may also be displayed. For example, an image such as "This machine has a payout stop function" or "This machine has a complete function" could be displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds).

In this way, by displaying an image indicating the presence of a payout limit function as a demonstration, players can be made aware of this feature beforehand. In other words, players can use whether or not a machine has a payout limit function as a criterion for selecting which machine to play. Furthermore, even if the machine does reach a payout limit, it can prevent disputes between the player and the arcade (for example, complaints from players if the machine reaches a payout limit mid-AT).

Furthermore, in cases where the demo includes the display of a warning image (an image intended to prevent excessive gaming) and an image indicating the presence of a payout limit function, if the display period of the warning image (the image intended to prevent excessive gaming) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating the presence of a payout limit function is T2, then T1 ≤ T2 may be set. By configuring it in this way, the message that the payout limit function is present can be further emphasized.

Furthermore, if the display period for the warning image (an image designed to prevent excessive gaming) is T1, and the display period for the image indicating the presence of a payout limit function is T2, then T1 > T2 is also acceptable. This configuration allows for a stronger emphasis on messages aimed at reducing addiction (excessive gaming) to the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as an alternative to displaying an image indicating the presence of a payout limit function as a demo, the demo may also be configured to display images such as "This machine has a payout limit function" or "This machine has a complete function" simultaneously while character images, company logos, or warning images (images to prevent excessive gaming) are displayed in sequence.

As described above, when the notification status regarding the stoppage is "normal state" and it is a demo performance, no prior notification is given until the stoppage conditions are met, nor is there any notification indicating that the stoppage state has been reached. However, it is possible to configure the system to display an image indicating that the stoppage function is installed during the demo performance.

<<<Figure 75 (3)>>>
This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state for the end of play is "normal state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated while the game is in standby mode (also referred to as "menu mode").

The menu image displays items that the player can select and information related to their game history.

The player can select from seven items by operating a designated switch (for example, the sub-directional key switch 21): "Member Registration," "Password Entry," "Quick MySlo," "QR Code Display at End," "View Intermediate Record," "Data Clear," and "Volume Adjustment."

For example, by operating a designated switch to select the "Volume Adjustment" option, and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), an image showing volume adjustment options will be displayed.

For example, by operating a designated switch to select the "Member Registration" option, and then operating another specific switch, a QR code containing the server's URL information will be displayed. (By scanning this QR code with a mobile device, users can access the server managed by the gaming machine's manufacturer.)

For example, by operating a designated switch to select the "Password Input" option, and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), an image will be displayed allowing the player to enter a password. After the password is entered, the game history will be stored according to the progress of the game.

For example, by operating a designated switch to select the "Display QR Code at End" option, and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), a two-dimensional code corresponding to the game history from the time the player entered their password will be displayed. Furthermore, when the conditions for ending the display of the two-dimensional code are met (e.g., selecting "End QR Code Display" using a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history corresponding to the game progress from the time the player entered their password will be erased.

For example, by operating a designated switch to select the "View Interim Record" option, and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), a QR code corresponding to the game history from the time the player entered their password will be displayed. Even if the conditions for ending the QR code display are met (e.g., selecting "End QR Code Display" using a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history corresponding to the game progress from the time the player entered their password will be retained. Unlike the case where the "Display QR Code at End" option is selected, this option is intended for players who intend to continue playing but wish to check their game history up to a certain point using a mobile device or similar.

For example, by selecting the "View Interim Record" option, players can check the game history corresponding to their progress since entering their password using a mobile device, allowing them to estimate the setting values, estimate the current difference in the number of game media used in the advantageous section, and estimate the current difference in the number of game media used related to the stop-loss. After doing so, the game can continue without erasing the game history.

While a detailed explanation of all items is omitted, when a menu image is displayed, the player can select an item, and the image corresponding to that item will be displayed.

While seven items have been given as examples of selectable items for players, the system is not limited to these. For example, the game could offer only one selectable item (e.g., volume control), or it could offer two selectable items (e.g., password entry and volume control). Furthermore, the selectable items for players could be partially or entirely different from the seven items listed above.

Below the menu image, information regarding your game history is displayed.

Examples of information related to game history displayed on the menu image include the following five items: "HBB," "BB," "RB," "AT entry count," and "Total game count."

"HBB" displays the cumulative number of Hyper Bonus executions (entries) since the settings were changed. A Hyper Bonus is the most advantageous bonus for the player among multiple bonuses. Figure 75(3) shows information indicating that HBB has been executed once.

"BB" displays the cumulative number of Big Bonus executions (entries) since the settings were changed. A Big Bonus refers to a bonus that is less advantageous to the player than a Hyper Big Bonus. Figure 75(3) shows information indicating that BB has been executed 5 times.

"RB" displays the cumulative number of regular bonuses executed (entered) since the settings were changed. Regular bonuses are bonuses that are less advantageous to the player than big bonuses. Figure 75(3) shows information indicating that one RB has been executed.

"AT Entry" displays the cumulative number of times the AT state has been entered since the settings were changed. The AT state refers to a game state where the game can notify the player of advantageous operation patterns for the stop switch. Figure 75(3) shows information indicating that the number of AT entries is 5.

"Total Play Count" displays the cumulative number of plays since the settings were changed. The total play count may include all play states, including those in advantageous states for the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.), or it may include only some play states, excluding those in advantageous states. Figure 75(3) shows information indicating that the total play count is 2000.

Thus, in gaming machines that display information about the game's history, players can predict the difference in the number of game tokens used before the game reaches its limit.

For example, if a player experiences a high number of favorable game states, such as "AT entry," despite a low total number of plays, they can predict that the number of remaining game tokens before reaching the end of the game is small. In other words, the player can predict that they are close to reaching the end of the game.

On the other hand, for example, if the total number of games played is high, but the number of times the player has entered a favorable game state such as "AT entry" is low, the player can predict that there is a large difference in the number of game tokens remaining before reaching the end of the game. In other words, the player can predict that the end of the game has not yet been reached.

The game history information displayed on the menu image represents the cumulative number of times since the last setting change. Therefore, even after the power is turned off and then turned on again with the setting change key in the off position (power on without setting change), the number of times each piece of information is displayed before the power was turned off and after the power was turned on with the setting change key in the off position will be the same. Note that if a setting change is made, the various pieces of information will be displayed at their initial values (e.g., 0). After a setting change is made (after the power is turned on with the setting change key in the on position), the play limit counter will be set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key in the off position, the play limit counter will be set to its initial value.

However, the game history information displayed on the menu image may not represent the cumulative number of plays since the settings were changed, but rather the cumulative number of plays since the power was turned on. In this case, if the power is turned off and then turned on with the settings change key in the off position (power on without setting changes), all information will be displayed at its initial value (e.g., 0). After a setting change is made (after the power is turned on with the settings change key in the on position), the play limit counter will be set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the settings change key in the off position, the play limit counter will be set to its initial value.

By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player cannot distinguish between cases where settings have been changed (including setting them back to the same value) and cases where no settings have been changed (power-back without setting changes).

Furthermore, while the five items listed as examples of game history information displayed on the menu image are "HBB," "BB," "RB," "AT entry count," and "total game count," the system is not limited to these five items. For example, the menu image may display only one item (e.g., total game count) or two items (e.g., AT entry count and total game count). Additionally, information partially or entirely different from the five items listed above (e.g., a graph showing the trend of the difference in game media (a so-called slump graph)) may be displayed as game history information on the new image. Moreover, the menu image does not necessarily have to display any game history information.

As described above, when the notification status regarding the end of play is "normal state" and the machine is in menu mode, no prior notification will be given until the end-of-play conditions are met, nor will any notification indicating that the machine is in an end-of-play state be given.

<<Notification status regarding shutdown: Operation warning status>>
Figure 76 shows an example of the display when the notification state related to the end of operation is the "operation notification state". Below, the displays (images) shown on the display device 32 will be explained in the order of Figure 76(1), Figure 76(2), and Figure 76(3). Note that the explanation will be omitted for parts that overlap with the explanation of Figure 75, and the characteristic configuration will be explained.
<<<Figure 76 (1)>>>
This is an example of a performance during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) when the notification state related to the end of play is "operation notification state". This example of a performance is an example in which the display device 32 is notified of the number of coins until the complete function is activated.

Unlike Figure 75(1), the upper part of the display device 32 shows an image (also called a pre-notification image) indicating "100 remaining until the complete function is activated." In other words, it notifies that the game will stop when the difference in the number of game tokens increases by 100. In short, it provides pre-notification until the stop condition is met.

Furthermore, the content of the pre-announcement image changes each time the difference in the number of remaining game tokens before the game ends changes. For example, when the difference in the number of remaining game tokens before the game ends is 90, it will say "90 tokens remaining until the complete function is activated"; when the difference is 50, it will say "50 tokens remaining until the complete function is activated"; and when the difference is 10, it will say "10 tokens remaining until the complete function is activated," and so on. This applies not only to the example of the pre-announcement image in Figure 76(1), but also to other examples of pre-announcement images.

Furthermore, the message "XX remaining until the complete function is activated" is just one example; the pre-announcement image could also display other messages such as "XX remaining until the limit is reached."

Furthermore, in games where images related to advantageous stop switch operation methods (also referred to as navigation images) are displayed while pre-warning images are shown, the images related to advantageous stop switch operation methods are configured to be visible.

For example, the image related to the advantageous operation of the stop switch and the pre-notification image may be displayed in a position (area) where they do not overlap. Alternatively, for example, the image related to the advantageous operation of the stop switch and the pre-notification image may be displayed in a position (area) where a portion of them overlap. Specifically, the position (area) where the pre-notification image is displayed may be such that more than half of the image related to the advantageous operation of the stop switch does not overlap. In any case, by configuring it in this way, the image related to the advantageous operation of the stop switch is visible, thus providing a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the player.

Furthermore, in games where an image related to a favorable operation of the stop switch is displayed during AT mode, and in games where a favorable operation of the stop switch is not displayed during AT mode, the position (area) and size of the pre-notification image may be configured not to change. By configuring it in this way, the burden on the control processing for displaying the pre-notification image can be reduced.

Furthermore, while an example showing the remaining number of tokens until the game reaches its limit was provided as a pre-notification image, it is not necessary to display the remaining number of tokens until the game reaches its limit.

For example, a pre-notification image such as "The game will be stopped soon" could be displayed. In this case, the same pre-notification image would be displayed when the difference in the number of remaining game tokens until the game is stopped is 90, and when the difference is 10. While the wording (message) of the pre-notification image remains the same, it may also be presented in a different manner (for example, the color of the pre-notification image could change according to the number of remaining game tokens).

By providing advance notice until the conditions for stopping play are met, it is possible to prevent disputes between players and the arcade operator, compared to cases where play is suddenly stopped (stopped).

Furthermore, the advance notification image is configured so as not to overlap with the displays of PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G. This configuration prevents a decrease in the visibility of PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G information due to the display of the advance notification image. However, it is acceptable for some of the PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G information to overlap with the advance notification image.

Furthermore, when a game state advantageous to the player, such as AT mode or bonus game mode, ends, a warning image (an image designed to prevent excessive gameplay) will be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, until a certain amount of time has elapsed, such as 3 seconds, or until the prescribed operation for the next game (such as betting or switching the start button) is performed).

For example, when the AT state ends while a pre-notification image is displayed and a warning image is displayed, it may be configured as one of the following a) to c).
a) At least a portion of the display area of the advance notification image and the display area of the warning image overlap. In other words, there are cases where the advance notification image and the warning image are displayed simultaneously.

In this configuration, at least a portion of the images overlap, resulting in lower visibility of the pre-announcement image when the warning image is displayed compared to when it is not. However, since the pre-announcement image is visible, it can prevent disputes between players and the arcade.
(i) The display area of the advance notification image and the display area of the warning image do not overlap. In other words, there are cases where the advance notification image and the warning image are displayed simultaneously.

With this configuration, the display areas for the warning image and the advance notification image do not overlap, thus preventing changes in the visibility of the advance notification image depending on whether the warning image is displayed or not (for example, the visibility of the advance notification image decreasing when the warning image is displayed). In other words, the advance notification image remains visible, thus preventing disputes between players and the arcade.
(c) The advance warning image is temporarily hidden, then the caution image is displayed, and only after the caution image has finished displaying is the advance warning image displayed (they are displayed in the order of advance warning image → caution image → advance warning image). In other words, the advance warning image and the caution image are not displayed at the same time.

In this configuration, when the warning image is displayed, the pre-announcement image is not shown, thus increasing attention to the warning image. Furthermore, since the pre-announcement image is displayed after the warning image has finished, disputes between players and the arcade can be prevented.

<<<Figure 76 (2)>>>
This is an example of a case where the notification state for stopping the game is "operation notification state," and a pre-notification image is displayed while a game waiting animation (also called a demo animation) is being performed.

Unlike Figure 75(2), the pre-notification image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

Furthermore, this pre-announcement image will continue to be displayed even when the images displayed as part of the demo are sequentially switched.

In this way, by providing advance notice during the demo sequence about when the conditions for stopping play will be met, it is possible to inform players who are about to start playing that the game machine is about to enter a stopping state. Therefore, compared to cases where the stopping state occurs abruptly, it is possible to prevent disputes between players and the arcade.

Furthermore, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state" and during gameplay (in this example, during AT state), and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state" and during the demo sequence, are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). This configuration reduces the memory capacity required to store images compared to cases where multiple pre-notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) when the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state" may be configured to be different from the pre-notification image displayed during the demo sequence when the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state."

For example, if the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT state) can be a larger image (larger display area for the pre-notification image) than the pre-notification image displayed during a demo sequence when the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state".

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play is the "operation notification state," and the number of remaining game tokens until the end of play is emphasized during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode). In other words, it is possible to clearly show the player how much longer it will take for play to end during gameplay.

Furthermore, for example, if the notification state related to the end of play is "operation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT state) can be a smaller image (smaller display area for the pre-notification image) than the pre-notification image displayed during a demo sequence when the notification state related to the end of play is "operation notification state".

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play is an "operation warning state," and the demo performance can emphasize the difference in the number of game tokens remaining until the end of play is reached. In other words, it can clearly indicate to players who are about to play that the game machine is about to enter the end-of-play state.

Furthermore, while we have explained an example where the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT state) differs from the pre-notification image displayed during the demo sequence when the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state," the explanation is not limited to the size of the pre-notification image.

For example, the pre-warning images could be configured with different colors, different shapes, different text (messages), or different fonts.

In other words, the notification state for the end of play should be the "operation notification state," and the degree of emphasis on the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) should differ from the degree of emphasis on the pre-notification image displayed during the demo sequence when the notification state for the end of play is the "operation notification state."

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a pre-notification image is displayed when the notification status regarding the shutdown is "operation notification status" and a demo performance is being executed, it is also acceptable not to display the pre-notification image when the notification status regarding the shutdown is "operation notification status" and a demo performance is being executed.

In this case, when a player places a bet, the demo sequence should be replaced with the game screen. Once the game screen is displayed, a pre-notification image should be shown (see Figure 76 (1)). In other words, the player is notified that the stop-loss condition has been met before they actually play the game (before placing the required number of bets and operating the start switch), thus preventing potential disputes between the player and the arcade.

<<<Figure 76 (3)>>>
This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state for stopping the game is "operation notification state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated while the game is in standby mode (also referred to as "menu mode").

Unlike Figure 75(3), the pre-notification image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

By providing advance notification in menu mode until the conditions for stopping play are met, it is possible to inform players who intend to play a game machine that has been left idle in menu mode that the machine is about to reach its stopping point. Therefore, compared to cases where the machine suddenly reaches its stopping point, this can prevent disputes between players and the arcade.

Furthermore, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state" and during gameplay (in this example, during AT state), and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state" and in menu mode, are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). This configuration reduces the storage capacity required for images compared to cases where multiple pre-notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state" and during gameplay (in this example, during AT state), and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state" and in menu mode, may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, if the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT state) can be a larger image (larger display area for the pre-notification image) than the pre-notification image displayed in menu mode when the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state".

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play is the "operation notification state," and the number of remaining game tokens until the end of play is emphasized during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode). In other words, it is possible to clearly show the player how much longer it will take for play to end during gameplay.

Furthermore, for example, if the notification state related to the end of play is "operation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT state) can be a smaller image (smaller display area for the pre-notification image) than the pre-notification image displayed in menu mode when the notification state related to the end of play is "operation notification state".

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play becomes the "operation warning state," and the menu mode can emphasize the difference in the number of game tokens remaining until the end of play is reached. In other words, it can clearly indicate to players who are about to play that the game machine is about to enter the end-of-play state.

Furthermore, while we have explained an example where the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) differs from the pre-notification image displayed in the menu mode when the notification state for stopping the game is "operation notification mode," the example is not limited to the size of the pre-notification image.

For example, the pre-warning images could be configured with different colors, different shapes, different text (messages), or different fonts.

In other words, the notification state for the end of play should be "operation notification state," and the degree of emphasis on the pre-notification image displayed during gameplay (in this example, during AT mode) should differ from the degree of emphasis on the pre-notification image displayed in menu mode when the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state."

Furthermore, when the notification state related to the shutdown is "operation warning state" and the system is in menu mode, the pre-notification image is configured so that it does not overlap with the display of each item selectable in menu mode. This configuration prevents a decrease in the visibility of each item selectable in menu mode due to the display of the pre-notification image.

Furthermore, the display of the pre-announcement image may reduce the visibility of some of the images for the items selectable in menu mode. Even in this case, it is sufficient that the items remain identifiable to the player, despite the reduced visibility. This configuration ensures that the player can still select each item.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a pre-notification image is displayed when the notification state for the shutdown is "operation notification state" and the system is in menu mode, it is also acceptable to choose not to display the pre-notification image when the notification state for the shutdown is "operation notification state" and the system is in menu mode.

<<Notification status regarding shutdown: Operation notification status>>
Figure 77 shows an example of the display when the notification state related to the end of operation is the "operation notification state". Below, the displays (images) shown on the display device 32 will be explained in the order of Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), 77(4), 77(5), and 77(6). Note that the explanation will be omitted for parts that overlap with the explanations of Figures 75 and 76, and the characteristic configuration will be explained.

Furthermore, the timing at which the notification state related to the end of play becomes the activated notification state is, for example, after the allocation of game media for games where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play exceeds 19,000 (for example, the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media allocated) has been completed.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of game tokens to be dispensed" refers to processes such as updating the information displayed on the payout indicator (also called the acquired tokens indicator), updating the information displayed on the credits indicator, updating the information displayed on the indicator capable of displaying the total score (also called the total score indicator), and dispensing game tokens from the hopper.

The "process of updating the information displayed on the display unit" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display unit, for example, when dispensing (distributing) 11 game tokens, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11". For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Similarly, the time required to dispense one game token from the hopper is also designed to be an average of 50 ms.

In this design, the notification state related to the end of play is configured to become the activated notification state within 50 ms after, for example, the process of updating the information displayed on the indicator is completed, or after the process of dispensing the game medium from the hopper is completed. In other words, it is preferable that an image indicating the end of play (Figure 77, "Complete function activated. Please call an attendant") is displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the indicator is completed, or after the process of dispensing the game medium from the hopper is completed.

Note that 50ms is an example and is not limited to 50ms. In other words, it is sufficient if it is configured to satisfy the following formula.
Time required to grant one game token > Time from when the game token is granted until the image indicating that play has ended is displayed.

By configuring the system in this way, an image indicating that the game has ended is displayed immediately after the distribution of game tokens is complete, allowing the player to recognize that the distribution of game tokens for that game has finished. Furthermore, the player can recognize that the game has ended.

Furthermore, while the timing at which the notification state for the game ending exceeds 19,000 and the difference in the number of game media related to the game ending exceeds 19,000 was explained as being after the allocation of game media for the game where the difference in the number of game media related to the game ending exceeds 19,000 (the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media allocated), it may also be before the allocation of game media for the game where the difference in the number of game media related to the game ending exceeds 19,000 (the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media paid out).

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the end of play becomes the activated notification state may be before the start of distributing game media for games where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play exceeds 19,000, or at the start of distributing game media for games where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play exceeds 19,000, or during the distribution of game media for games where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, in gaming machines that perform automatic settlement (of credits) after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the notification state related to the limit may become the activated notification state after the automatic settlement is completed, or before the automatic settlement begins, or when the notification state related to the limit becomes the activated notification state, or while the automatic settlement is in progress.

<<<Figure 77 (1)>>>
The notification state related to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is an example of how the display device 32 notifies that the play has ended in a gaming machine that does not use physical tokens as a game medium (also called a tokenless gaming machine).

Here, we will briefly explain coinless gaming machines.

A medalless gaming machine is a gaming machine that uses electronic tokens as the game medium instead of physical tokens.

A coinless gaming machine can communicate bidirectionally with a lending device (lending unit) capable of distributing gaming media.

For example, a single operation of the dispensing switch on the dispensing device allows a predetermined number of game media (e.g., 50) to be transmitted to a coinless gaming machine, which can then store the number of received game media. Furthermore, the stored game media can be used to execute a game (such as placing a bet).

Furthermore, when the counting switch on the coinless gaming machine is operated (by pressing and holding), a predetermined number (50) of game media stored in the machine can be transmitted to the dispensing device at predetermined intervals (e.g., 300 ms). The dispensing device then stores the received game media, and when the return button on the dispensing device is operated, a card containing the stored number of game media can be dispensed.

As described above, in a coinless gaming machine, operating the counting switch allows the machine to transmit the number of game tokens it has stored to the dispensing unit. Then, by dispensing a card containing the stored number of game tokens, it can be exchanged for prizes at the gaming parlor.

Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, the term "gaming machine" in this specification is also applicable to coinless gaming machines.

Return to the explanation in Figure 77(1).

The information "Complete function in operation" and "Please call an attendant" are displayed near the center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 provides notifications indicating that the game has run out and that an attendant (store employee) should be called. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the game has run out and to recognize the need to call an employee. Note that when the notification indicating the game has run out is being displayed, the pre-notification image is not shown.

Furthermore, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the image corresponding to "Complete function in operation" in Figure 77(1) may also be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a stop-down status notification image.

Furthermore, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the entire image shown in Figure 77(1) may be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a stop-down status notification image.

Furthermore, the message "Please count" is displayed at the top center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 provides notification to the player indicating that they should operate the counting switch. This configuration allows the player to recognize the need to operate the counting switch to transmit the number of game media stored in the game machine to the dispensing device.

Furthermore, after the number of game media stored in the gaming machine reaches zero, the notification to the player indicating that they should operate the counting switch may be terminated. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the number of game media stored in the gaming machine has reached zero (i.e., that the data has been sent to the dispensing device) by operating the counting switch.

Furthermore, the information "Press 'PUSH' to display the menu screen" is displayed on the lower side of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) is active. Furthermore, it notifies the player that the system will switch to menu mode when the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) is pressed. This configuration allows the player to understand that, even though the game is in a "stopped" state, they can switch to menu mode by pressing the PUSH button (sub-switch 20), and that they can obtain a QR code containing their game history.

Furthermore, when the display device 32 displays a notification indicating that the game has stopped, information related to the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) will not be displayed on the display device 32 (and therefore cannot be seen by the player).

For example, the display device 32 is configured to display a monochrome (e.g., black) image with notifications indicating that the game has run out, that an attendant (store clerk) should be called, that the player should operate the counting switch, and that the player should know that the PUSH button (also referred to as sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to emphasize and notify that the system has reached its limit.

Furthermore, while the explanation used examples of notifications related to the end of play, specifically those indicating the end of play, calling an attendant, instructing the player to operate the counting switch, and instructing the player that the PUSH button (also referred to as sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active, the explanation is not limited to these notifications.

For example, it might be possible to provide some notifications, such as an alert indicating that the game has run out, an alert indicating that an attendant (store employee) should be called, and an alert indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, but not an alert indicating that the PUSH button (also called sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active.

Furthermore, as a visual effect for the "operation notification state" related to the shutdown, a different notification may be displayed than the one described above.

<<<Figure 77 (2)>>>
The notification state related to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is for a gaming machine that uses physical tokens as the game medium, and in a gaming machine where the number of credits is not automatically settled after the end of play conditions are met, the display device 32 is shown to notify that the end of play has been reached.

Note that we will omit explanations of points common to Figure 77(1) and focus on explaining the distinctive features.

Unlike Figure 77(1), the message "Please settle your bill" is displayed at the top center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 provides notification to the player indicating that they need to operate the settlement switch. This configuration allows the player to recognize the need to operate the settlement switch to settle the game currency (credits) stored in the game machine.

Furthermore, after the number of game credits stored in the gaming machine reaches zero, the notification to the player indicating that they should operate the payout switch may be terminated. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the number of game credits stored in the gaming machine has reached zero after operating the payout switch.

<<<Figure 77 (3)>>>
The notification state related to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is for a gaming machine that uses physical tokens as the game medium, and in a gaming machine where the number of credits is automatically settled after the end of play conditions are met, it is an example of a case in which the display device 32 notifies that the end of play has been reached.

Note that we will omit explanations of points common to Figure 77(1) and focus on explaining the distinctive features.

Unlike Figure 77(1), the information "Automatic payment in progress" is displayed at the top center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 provides a notification to the player indicating that the number of credits is being settled (a notification indicating that automatic settlement is taking place). This configuration allows the player to recognize that the number of credits is being settled even without operating the settlement switch.

Furthermore, after the number of game credits stored in the gaming machine reaches zero (after automatic settlement is complete), the notification indicating that the credits are being settled (the notification indicating that automatic settlement is in progress) may be terminated. For example, in a gaming machine that displays "Automatic settlement in progress" while automatic settlement is in progress, the display of "Automatic settlement in progress" information may be stopped after automatic settlement is complete. By configuring it in this way, players can recognize that the number of game credits stored in the gaming machine has reached zero due to automatic settlement.

<<<Figure 77 (4)>>>
The notification state related to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is an example of when the conditions for ending play are met during gameplay (in this example, during AT state) and the display device 32 is notified that the end of play has occurred.

Points common to Figures 76(1), 77(1), or 77(2) will be omitted from the explanation; only the distinctive features will be described.

First, we will explain the distinctive features compared to Figure 76(1).

Figure 76(1) displays an image (pre-notification image) indicating "100 images remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77(4) displays an image (activation notification image) indicating "Complete function is activated. Please call an attendant."

In other words, Figure 76(1) notifies the player about the difference in the number of game tokens remaining until the game reaches its limit, while Figure 77(4) notifies the player that the game has reached its limit. Furthermore, Figure 76(1) does not notify the player to call an attendant (store employee).

Furthermore, it is preferable that the image in Figure 77(4) showing "Complete function in operation. Please call an attendant." (operation notification image) be displayed with greater emphasis than the image in Figure 76(1) showing "100 images remaining until complete function activation" (pre-notification image).

For example, emphasis can be achieved by making the display area occupied by the operation notification image larger than the display area occupied by the pre-notification image within the display area of the display device 32.

In this way, by emphasizing the activation notification image over the pre-notification image, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has reached its limit (that the next game cannot be played).

In other words, because the emphasis of the pre-announcement image is less than that of the activation announcement image, the pre-announcement image can be used without interfering with the game's progress.

Furthermore, while the difference in the size of the area occupied by the display region was cited as an example of emphasizing the operational notification image over the pre-notification image, this is not the only example.

For example, the font thickness of the text in the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be different. Also, the font color of the text in the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be different.

Furthermore, the degree of emphasis between the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be made approximately the same (approximately the same includes identical emphasis).

Furthermore, Figure 76(1) does not show the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen," whereas Figure 77(4) does show the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen."

In other words, Figure 76(1) does not indicate that the user will enter menu mode by operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20), while Figure 77(4) does indicate that the user will enter menu mode by operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20).

By configuring it in this way, when the game is in a state of "stopped play," the player can be appropriately notified that a menu image is available.

Next, we will explain the distinctive features compared to Figure 77(1) or Figure 77(2).

Figure 77(1) or Figure 77(2) shows that game-related information (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (and therefore not visible to the player), whereas Figure 77(4) shows that game-related information (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is displayed on the display device 32 (and is visible to the player).

In other words, Figure 77(4) is configured to display both the animation (image) that was performed during the game when it reached its limit, and the image (operation notification image) that reads, "Complete function activated. Please call an attendant."

With this configuration, the operation notification image is displayed when the predetermined information (TOTAL or G) is shown when the game reaches its limit. For example, a player can use the camera function of their mobile device to take a commemorative photo that includes the predetermined information when the game reaches its limit.
<<<Figure 77 (5)>>>
The notification state related to the end of play is an example of the presentation in the "operation notification state". This example of presentation is another example of how the display device 32 is notified that the end of play state has been reached when the conditions for ending play are met during gameplay (in this example, during AT state).

In this example, the same demo sequence as described in Figure 75(2) is assumed to be performed, but a different demo sequence is also acceptable.

Points common to Figures 75(2) and 76(2) will be omitted from the explanation; only the distinctive features will be explained.

Figures 75(2) and 76(2) show demo sequences that are executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed without any new bets being placed after a certain point in time following the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or payout processing). Figure 77(5), on the other hand, shows a demo sequence that is executed when the conditions for stopping play are met. In other words, it is a demo sequence that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed after a certain point in time following the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or payout processing).

Furthermore, while Figure 77(5) was explained as a demo performance executed after a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed from a certain point after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after payout processing), the demo performance may also be executed when the notification state related to the stop-play condition becomes the activated notification state. In other words, the demo performance may be executed from a certain point (before the predetermined time has elapsed) after the end of a game that has met the stop-play condition (after all reels have stopped or after payout processing).

By configuring it in this way, the system can inform the player that they will not be able to play again once the game screen switches to a demo sequence.

Figure 76(2) displays an image (pre-notification image) indicating "100 images remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77(5) displays an image (activation notification image) indicating "Complete function activated. Please call an attendant."

In other words, Figure 76(2) notifies the player about the difference in the number of game tokens remaining until the game reaches its limit, while Figure 77(5) notifies the player that the game has reached its limit. Furthermore, Figure 76(2) does not notify the player to call an attendant (store employee).

Furthermore, it is preferable that the image in Figure 77(5) showing "Complete function in operation. Please call an attendant." (operation notification image) be displayed with greater emphasis than the image in Figure 76(2) showing "100 images remaining until complete function activation" (pre-notification image).

For example, emphasis can be achieved by making the display area occupied by the operation notification image larger than the display area occupied by the pre-notification image within the display area of the display device 32.

In this way, by emphasizing the activation notification image over the pre-notification image, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has reached its limit (that the next game cannot be played).

In other words, because the emphasis level of the pre-notification image is lower than that of the operation notification image, the pre-notification image can be used to minimize disruption to the demonstration.

Furthermore, while the difference in the size of the area occupied by the display region was cited as an example of emphasizing the operational notification image over the pre-notification image, this is not the only example.

For example, the font thickness of the text in the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be different. Also, the font color of the text in the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be different.

Furthermore, the degree of emphasis between the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be made approximately the same (approximately the same includes identical emphasis).

Note that while Figure 77(5) was described as a demo sequence executed when the stop condition is met, the system may be configured so that the demo sequence is not executed when the stop condition is met.

<<<Figure 77 (6)>>>
This is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state" when the notification state related to the end of play is met. This example of a presentation is when the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) and enters menu mode after the conditions for ending play have been met.

In other words, this is an example of what happens when, while any of the images in Figure 77(1), Figure 77(2), Figure 77(3), Figure 77(4), or Figure 77(5) are displayed, the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) to enter menu mode.

Points common to Figures 75(3) and 76(3) will be omitted from the explanation; only the distinctive features will be explained.

Figure 76(3) displays an image (pre-notification image) indicating "100 images remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77(6) displays an image (activation notification image) indicating "Complete function is activated. Please call an attendant."

In other words, Figure 76(3) notifies the player about the difference in the number of game tokens remaining until the game reaches its limit, while Figure 77(6) notifies the player that the game has reached its limit. Furthermore, Figure 76(3) does not notify the player to call an attendant (store employee).

Furthermore, it is preferable that the image in Figure 77(6) showing "Complete function in operation. Please call an attendant." (operation notification image) be displayed with greater emphasis than the image in Figure 76(3) showing "100 images remaining until complete function activation" (pre-notification image).

For example, emphasis can be achieved by making the display area occupied by the operation notification image larger than the display area occupied by the pre-notification image within the display area of the display device 32.

In this way, by emphasizing the activation notification image over the pre-notification image, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has reached its limit (that the next game cannot be played).

In other words, because the emphasis of the pre-notification image is less than that of the operation notification image, the pre-notification image can be used to minimize interference with the visibility of the selection items indicated in the menu image.

Furthermore, while the difference in the size of the area occupied by the display region was cited as an example of emphasizing the operational notification image over the pre-notification image, this is not the only example.

For example, the font thickness of the text in the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be different. Also, the font color of the text in the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be different.

Furthermore, the degree of emphasis between the pre-notification image and the operation notification image may be made approximately the same (approximately the same includes identical emphasis).

Furthermore, the display of the operation notification image may reduce the visibility of some of the images for the items selectable in menu mode. Even in this case, it is sufficient that the items remain identifiable to the player, despite the reduced visibility. This configuration ensures that the player can still select each item.

Furthermore, when the notification status related to the shutdown is "operation notification status" and the system is in menu mode, the operation notification image may be hidden.

Furthermore, while the items selectable on the menu screen in Figure 77(6) are the same as those selectable on the menu screens in Figures 75(3) and 76(3), they may be different.

For example, if the notification state related to the shutdown is "operation notification state" and the system is in menu mode, the "Display QR code at end" option may be selectable, but the "Volume adjustment" option may not be selectable (or the "Volume adjustment" option may not be displayed).

By configuring it this way, after the game reaches its limit, only the bare minimum of items will be selectable (the number of selectable items will decrease), thus preventing players from selecting unnecessary items.

Furthermore, if the PUSH button is operated while the notification state for the end of play is "operation notification state," the system may not transition to menu mode (Figure 77(6) will not be displayed), but instead display a two-dimensional code containing the game history. In other words, the system may be configured to display a two-dimensional code containing the game history even without selecting the "Display QR code at end" option.

This configuration reduces the number of steps required to display necessary information to the player after the game has stopped.

When the notification status related to the shutdown is "normal state," "operation warning state," or "operation notification state," the menu mode can be terminated when predetermined conditions are met (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)).

However, the control processing of the sub-control means may be configured to differ depending on whether the menu mode is terminated when the notification state related to the shutdown is "operation notification state" or when the menu mode is terminated when the notification state related to the shutdown is "normal state" or "operation warning state". The following explains the differences in the control processing of the sub-control means (differences when terminating the menu mode) with examples.

(Example 1) Differences in conditions for ending menu mode When the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal state" or "operation notification state", the menu mode can also be ended by betting (betting by operating the 1 bet button, betting by operating the MAX bet button, or betting by inserting medals into the slot).

For example, in menu mode when the notification state for stopping play is "normal state" or "operation notification state," and with a bet count of 0 and credit count of 50, the menu mode can be terminated when the 1-bet button or the MAX-bet button is operated, or when a medal is inserted into the slot. Note that when the menu mode is terminated under these conditions, the notification state for stopping play does not change. For example, if the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state," the notification state for stopping play after the menu mode is terminated will be "operation notification state."

On the other hand, when the notification state for the stop-loss is "operation notification state," it is not possible to exit the menu mode by betting (betting by operating the 1-bet button, betting by operating the MAX-bet button, or betting by inserting tokens into the slot). Specifically, when the notification state for the stop-loss is "operation notification state," the system is controlled not to execute betting, so it is not possible to exit the menu mode.

For example, in a menu mode where the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state," and with a bet count of 0 and a credit count of 50, if the 1-bet button or the MAX-bet button is operated, or if a medal is inserted into the slot, the menu mode cannot be terminated.

(Example 2) Differences in presentation after exiting menu mode When the notification state regarding the end of play is "normal state" or "operation notification state", a demo screen is displayed as a general rule after exiting menu mode. However, if the player enters menu mode while a specific presentation is in progress (for example, during a presentation that spans multiple games (a continuous presentation)) or enters menu mode in a specific game state (for example, during AT), the demo screen does not need to be displayed after exiting menu mode. For example, after exiting menu mode, a screen (image) related to the presentation that was in progress before entering menu mode may be displayed.

In other words, when the notification state for stopping play is "normal state" or "operation notification state," and after executing a predetermined animation (for example, an animation that is completed in one game), the system transitions to menu mode. After fulfilling predetermined conditions (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" option (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the system exits menu mode, and a demo screen is displayed. Note that the notification state for stopping play does not change even after the menu mode is exited. For example, if the notification state for stopping play is "operation notification state," the notification state for stopping play after the menu mode is exited remains "operation notification state."

On the other hand, when the notification status related to the end of play is "operation notification status," after exiting menu mode, the screen (image) related to the performance that was running when the system entered menu mode will be displayed.

For example, when displaying the image in Figure 77(2), the system transitions to menu mode. After fulfilling predetermined conditions (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" option (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the system exits menu mode and displays the image in Figure 77(2).

Similarly, for example, when displaying the image in Figure 77(4), the system transitions to menu mode, and then, after fulfilling predetermined conditions (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" option (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)) and exiting menu mode, the image in Figure 77(4) is displayed again.

However, the system may be configured to display a demo image after the menu mode is exited. In that case, for example, while the image in Figure 77(2) is displayed, the system may transition to menu mode, and then, after fulfilling predetermined conditions (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" option (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)) and exiting menu mode, the image in Figure 77(5) may be displayed.

Similarly, for example, when displaying the image in Figure 77(4), the system may transition to menu mode, and then, after fulfilling predetermined conditions (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" option (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)) and exiting menu mode, the image in Figure 77(5) may be displayed.

Note that while Figure 77(6) is described as an image displayed in the menu mode, which is executed when the stop-play condition is met, the system may also be configured so that the player does not transition to menu mode even if they operate the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) when the stop-play condition is met.

<Power recovery during operation warning state>
When the notification state related to the shutdown is in the operation notification state, the system is configured to display a pre-notification image as shown in Figure 76. In this way, if a power-off process (also called power-off processing) is performed while the pre-notification image is displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings (the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is off), the system is configured so that the pre-notification image is not displayed.

Specifically, if the power-off process is performed when the notification state related to the shutdown is in the operation notification state, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, the sub-control means will return the notification state related to the shutdown to the normal state without receiving a command related to the shutdown difference counter from the main control means.

Furthermore, for example, if the game state controlled by the main control means is in a predetermined game state (e.g., AT state), and a power-off process is performed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the game can resume from the predetermined game state (e.g., AT state). However, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in game media related to the stop-loss will be 0).

For example, if the power is cut off while the image in Figure 76(1) is being displayed, and then the power is turned back on without any setting changes, the message "100 images remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed. However, in this case, other information (such as TOTAL and G) will be displayed as before the power cut-off.

Similarly, if a power-off process is performed while displaying the image in Figure 76(2) or the image in Figure 76(3), and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, the message "100 images remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed.

By configuring the system in this way, the pre-notification image can be hidden immediately, compared to the case where the pre-notification image is hidden based on the reception of a command containing the value of the stop-loss difference counter (the difference in the number of game media involved in stopping play) after a power outage and recovery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent player misinterpretation based on the image displayed after power recovery (the misconception that the difference between the difference in the number of game media involved in stopping play and the difference in the number of game media until the stop-loss state is reached is small).

Furthermore, when the game state controlled by the main control means is in a predetermined game state (e.g., AT state), a power-off process is performed. If power is then turned on with a setting change (power switch turned on while the setting key switch is on), the game will revert to a specific game state (e.g., normal section and normal state). Also, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in game media related to the stop-loss is 0).

Even in this case, after power is restored, the sub-control means is configured to return the notification state related to the shutdown to the normal state, and the pre-notification image is not displayed.

<Confirming settings in the operation notification state>
When the notification state related to the stoppage is in the operation notification state, the machine is configured to display a pre-notification image as shown in Figure 76. In this way, when the pre-notification image is displayed and a predetermined situation where the number of bets is 0 (a situation in which bets can be accepted) is met, the machine is configured to transition to the setting confirmation mode when the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open) are met.

If the notification state related to the shutdown is in the operation notification state and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the system will notify that it is in setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that it is in setting confirmation mode may be displayed, or an audio signal indicating that it is in setting confirmation mode may be output. Furthermore, it may be possible to display a pre-notification image while in setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the system is in settings confirmation mode is the display of an image that says "Checking settings." Furthermore, an example of an audio notification indicating that the system is in settings confirmation mode is the output of the message "Checking settings" from the speaker.

In other words, if the notification state regarding the end of play is in the "operation notification" state and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode, both an image indicating that the system is in setting confirmation mode and a pre-notification image may be displayed. This configuration allows the staff to understand that even during setting confirmation, the number of remaining game tokens before the end of play is small. In other words, the staff can understand that the end of play is imminent.

In this case, the pre-notification image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same pre-notification image as before entering the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it this way, it becomes unnecessary to have multiple patterns of pre-notification images, thus reducing the ROM capacity of the sub-control means. Furthermore, since there is no process to switch pre-notification images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the pre-notification image may be displayed in a different manner than before entering the settings confirmation mode. This configuration allows for immediate distinction between gameplay and settings confirmation by checking the pre-notification image.

While the example of displaying a pre-announcement image during the settings confirmation mode is described, it is not necessary to display the pre-announcement image during this mode. This configuration allows the arcade staff to concentrate on confirming the settings.

Furthermore, whether or not a pre-notification image is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, the system is configured to display the pre-notification image after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, and the game screen is displayed, after the termination conditions of the setting confirmation mode (e.g., turning off the setting key switch) are met. In other words, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop count does not change before and after entering the setting confirmation mode (the value stored in the stop count counter is maintained).

<Power recovery during operation notification state>
When the notification state related to the shutdown is the operation notification state, the system is configured to display an operation notification image as shown in Figure 77. In this way, if a power-off process (also called power-off processing) is performed while the operation notification image is displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings (the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is off), the system is configured to continue displaying the operation notification image.

Specifically, if the power-off process is performed when the notification state related to the stoppage is in the "operational notification" state, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, the notification state related to the stoppage will revert to the "operational notification" state without receiving a command related to the stoppage difference counter from the main control means.

Furthermore, when the notification status related to the stoppage is in the activated notification state, the main control means is executing the stoppage process (i.e., it is in the stoppage state). If a power-off process is performed while the main control means is in the stoppage state, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes (power switch turned on while the setting key switch is off), the main control means will enter the stoppage state. However, the value stored in the stoppage difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in game media related to the stoppage will be 0).

For example, if a power-off process is performed while the image in Figure 77(1) is displayed, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, the image in Figure 77(1) will be displayed again. This applies not only to Figure 77(1), but also to Figures 77(2), 77(3), 77(4), 77(5), and 77(6).

Furthermore, when the notification status related to the stoppage is in the activated notification state, the main control means is executing the stoppage process (the machine is in the stoppage state). If the power is cut off while the main control means is in the stoppage state, and then the power is turned on without any setting changes (power switch on while the setting key switch is off), the machine will enter a specific game state (for example, a normal section and a normal state). Also, the value stored in the stoppage difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in game media related to the stoppage is 0).

By configuring it in this way, although the stop-loss counter stores an initial value, it can notify the player of appropriate information (information indicating that it is in a stop-loss state) corresponding to the state controlled by the main control system (stop-loss state). Therefore, the image display after power restoration can prevent the player from being misled (mistakenly believing that it is no longer in a stop-loss state).

Furthermore, when the game state controlled by the main control means is in the "stopped" state, a power-off process is performed. If power is then turned on with a setting change (power switch turned on while the setting key switch is on), the system transitions to setting change mode. After the termination conditions of setting change mode are met, the system returns to a specific game state (for example, a normal section and a normal state). Also, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference in game media related to stopping is 0).

In this case, after power is restored (during the setting change mode), the sub-control means is configured to return the notification state related to the end of play to the normal state, and does not notify information indicating that play has ended. Similarly, after the setting change mode ends (before the first game starts), the notification state related to the end of play is also returned to the normal state, and does not notify information indicating that play has ended.

Furthermore, while the system is currently configured not to notify users of the "stopped" state after power restoration (during the settings change mode), it may be permitted to notify users of the "stopped" state after power restoration (during the settings change mode). In this case, after the settings change mode ends (before the first game starts), the notification state related to the "stopped" state will be set to the normal state, and the system will not notify users of the "stopped" state.

<Confirming settings in operation notification state>
When the notification state related to the end of play is the operation notification state (when the play has ended), the machine is configured to display an operation notification image as shown in Figure 77. In this way, when the operation notification image is displayed in a specific situation (a situation where no bets are being accepted), the machine is configured to transition to the setting confirmation mode when the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch while the front door is open) are met.

If the notification state related to the shutdown is in the operation notification state and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the system will notify that it is in the setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that the system is in setting confirmation mode may be displayed, or an audio signal indicating that the system is in setting confirmation mode may be output. Note that it may also be possible to display the operation notification image while in setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the system is in settings confirmation mode is the display of an image that says "Checking settings." An example of an audio notification indicating that the system is in settings confirmation mode is the output of the voice message "Checking settings" from the speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the stoppage is in the activated notification state and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode, both an image indicating that the system is in setting confirmation mode and an activated notification image may be displayed. This configuration allows the arcade staff to understand that the machine is in the stoppage state even while setting confirmation is in progress. Furthermore, it is possible to check the setting value at the time the machine is in the stoppage state, allowing for verification of whether any fraudulent activity has occurred (i.e., whether the setting value differs from the setting value set by the arcade).

In this case, the operation notification image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same operation notification image as before entering the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it this way, it becomes unnecessary to have multiple patterns of operation notification images, thus reducing the ROM capacity of the sub-control means. Furthermore, since there is no process to switch operation notification images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the operation notification image may be displayed in a different manner than before entering the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it this way, it is possible to immediately distinguish between the stopped state and the setting confirmation state by checking the operation notification image.

Note that while an example of displaying an operation notification image during the setting confirmation mode is described, it is not necessary to display the operation notification image during this mode. This configuration allows the arcade staff to concentrate on confirming the setting values.

Furthermore, whether or not the operation notification image is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, the system is configured to display the operation notification image after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, following the fulfillment of the setting confirmation mode termination conditions (e.g., turning off the setting key switch).

Furthermore, while we described an example where the system is configured to transition to the setting confirmation mode when the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch while the front door is open) are met in a specific situation where the operation notification image is displayed (a situation where bets are not being accepted), it is also possible to configure the system so that it does not transition to the setting confirmation mode even if the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch while the front door is open) are met in a specific situation where the operation notification image is displayed (a situation where bets are not being accepted).

By configuring it in this way, the need for special processing to enable transition to setting confirmation mode even when the device is stopped is eliminated, thus reducing the program size of the main control means.

<Transition of notification status related to the end of service>
Next, using Figure 78, the transition of the notification state related to the termination in this embodiment will be explained.

The game sections (1) through (7) will be explained as advantageous sections. Furthermore, sections (1) through (7) will be explained as advantageous game states for the player (e.g., AT state).

However, the game sections (1) through (7) are not limited to advantageous sections. Game sections (1) through (7) may also be normal sections, or parts of sections (1) through (7) may be normal sections and other parts may be advantageous sections. Furthermore, the game machine may not have either normal or advantageous sections (a so-called "normal" machine).

Return to Figure 78 for explanation.

The game progresses in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7). In other words, the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of games played since power-on.

The vertical axis corresponds to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop count (for example, the value stored in the stop count difference counter).

The dotted line indicates that the notification status regarding the shutdown is in the normal state.

The lines (non-dotted lines) indicate that the notification status related to the shutdown is in the operation warning state.

The first difference corresponds to the difference in the game medium related to the stop-out process, which triggers the display of the pre-notification image. For example, the first difference could be a value such as 18900. Note that 18900 is an example and is not limited to this value. For example, the first difference could be a value such as 18500. Furthermore, if the timing for initiating the process to output the test signal related to the stop-out process is set to when the difference in the game medium related to the stop-out process exceeds 18500, the timing for initiating the display of the pre-notification image may also be set to when the difference in the game medium related to the stop-out process (the first difference) exceeds 18500.

In other words, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out process, which initiates the output of a test signal related to the stop-out process, and the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out process, which initiates the display of the pre-notification image (first difference), may be the same value. By configuring it in this way, the pre-notification image is displayed when the output of the test signal related to the stop-out process is initiated. Therefore, during the development of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out process, managed by the main control means, is being accurately transmitted to the sub-control means.

The second difference number corresponds to the difference number of the game medium that triggers the termination of the display of the pre-announcement image. For example, if the first difference number is 18900, the second difference number would be a value such as 18850. Note that 18850 is an example and is not limited to 18850. For example, if the first difference number is 18500, the second difference number could be a value such as 18450.

<<Figure 78 (1)>>
Depending on the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage increases as the game progresses, and this period lasts until it reaches the second difference (or less than the second difference). During this period, the notification state regarding the stoppage is the normal state. Therefore, the pre-notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(1), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 75(1) will be displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(1) are as described in Figure 75(1).

During the game waiting period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78(1), an image like that shown in Figure 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period shown in Figure 78(1) are as described in Figure 75(2).

During the period shown in Figure 78(1), in menu mode, an image like that shown in Figure 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the menu image (menu image) during the period shown in Figure 78(1) are as described in Figure 75(3).

<<Figure 78 (2)>>
Depending on the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage increases as the game progresses, and this period is from when the second difference becomes the first difference (greater than or equal to the second difference, but less than the first difference). The notification state regarding the stoppage during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the pre-notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(2), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during the gameplay period shown in Figure 77(1) are as described in Figure 75(1).

During the game waiting period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78(2), an image like that shown in Figure 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period shown in Figure 78(2) are as described in Figure 75(2).

During the period shown in Figure 78(2), in menu mode, an image like that shown in Figure 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the menu image (menu image) during the period shown in Figure 78(2) are as described in Figure 75(3).

<<Figure 78 (3)>>
Depending on the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes a value equal to or greater than the first difference as the game progresses, and then the period until the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage returns to the first difference again. During this period, the notification state for the stoppage is the operation notification state. Therefore, the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

For example, the timing at which the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, and the notification state related to the stoppage becomes the activation notification state, is after the allocation of game media for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes the first difference (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be dispensed) has been completed.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of game tokens to be dispensed" refers to processes such as updating the information displayed on the payout indicator (also called the acquired tokens indicator), updating the information displayed on the credits indicator, updating the information displayed on the indicator capable of displaying the total score (also called the total score indicator), and dispensing game tokens from the hopper.

The "process of updating the information displayed on the display unit" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display unit, for example, when dispensing (distributing) 11 game tokens, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11". For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Similarly, the time required to dispense one game token from the hopper is also designed to be an average of 50 ms.

In this design, the notification state related to the end of play is configured to enter the operation warning state within 50 ms after, for example, the process of updating the information displayed on the indicator is completed, or after the process of dispensing the game medium from the hopper is completed. In other words, the pre-notification image is displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the indicator is completed, or after the process of dispensing the game medium from the hopper is completed.

Note that 50ms is an example and is not limited to 50ms. In other words, it is sufficient if it is configured to satisfy the following formula.
Time required to grant one game token > Time from completion of granting game tokens until the pre-announcement image is displayed

This configuration allows the player to recognize that the game has been completed and that the game will soon run out, as a pre-notification image is displayed immediately after the game token is distributed.

Furthermore, the timing at which the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, and the notification state related to the stoppage enters the activation notification state, is set to be after the allocation of game media (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media payouts) for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes the first difference has been completed. However, it may also be set to be before the allocation of game media (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media payouts) for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes the first difference has been completed.

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the end of play becomes the activation notification state may be before the start of the distribution of game media for the game where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play becomes the first difference, or at the start of the distribution of game media for the game where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play becomes the first difference, or during the distribution of game media for the game where the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play becomes the first difference.

Furthermore, even in AT mode, a small difference in the number of game media related to stopping play may occur, for example, when a minor win such as a button-press sequence win is determined by an internal lottery, and the game notifies the player of a stop switch operation method that is advantageous to the player, but the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not follow the notification.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(3), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) will be displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(3) are as described in Figure 76(1).

During the game waiting period shown in Figure 78(3) (also referred to as the demo sequence), an image like that shown in Figure 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo sequence during the period shown in Figure 78(3) are as described in Figure 76(2). As also explained in Figure 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed while the demo sequence is running.

In the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(3), an image like that shown in Figure 76(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(3) are as described in Figure 76(3). As also explained in Figure 76(3), the pre-notification image does not necessarily need to be displayed in menu mode.

Furthermore, during the period shown in Figure 78(3), if a predetermined error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies that a predetermined error has occurred, the system may be configured not to display the pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door opening error will occur. The pre-opening notification image will not be displayed (it will not be visible), and a notification image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed. After the front door is closed and the door opening error is cleared, an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) will be displayed again on the display device 32.

While the explanation used the door open error as an example of a specific error, it is not limited to the door open error. As mentioned above, a similar mechanism can be applied to some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring the system in this way, arcade staff can pay attention to the details of the error notification and quickly resolve the error.

On the other hand, if a predetermined error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs during the period shown in Figure 78(3), and the display device 32 notifies that the predetermined error has occurred, the system may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door opening error will occur, and both a pre-notification image and an image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed. After the front door is closed and the door opening error is cleared, an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) will be displayed again on the display device 32.

While the explanation used the door open error as an example of a specific error, it is not limited to the door open error. As mentioned above, a similar mechanism can be applied to some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, arcade staff can not only understand the details of the error notification but also recognize when the machine is about to reach its payout limit, allowing them to respond quickly when the machine reaches this limit.

<<Figure 78 (4)>>
Depending on the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes less than the first difference as the game progresses, and then the period continues until the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage does not fall below the second difference (it remains at or above the second difference). During this period, the notification state for the stoppage is the operation notification state. Therefore, the pre-notification image may be displayed on the display device 32.

Furthermore, even in AT mode, a decrease in the number of game media related to the stop-loss may occur if, for example, a minor win such as a push-order win is determined by an internal lottery, and the game notifies the player of a stop switch operation method that is advantageous to the player, but the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not comply with the notification. This point is also true in Figure 78(5), which will be discussed later, where the number of game media related to the stop-loss decreases as the game progresses.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(4), an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) will be displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(4) are as described in Figure 76(1).

During the game waiting period shown in Figure 78(4) (also referred to as the demo sequence), an image like that shown in Figure 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo sequence during the period shown in Figure 78(4) are as described in Figure 76(2). As also explained in Figure 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed while the demo sequence is running.

In the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(4), an image like that shown in Figure 76(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(4) are as described in Figure 76(3). As also explained in Figure 76(3), the pre-notification image does not necessarily need to be displayed in menu mode.

As described above, even if the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage falls below the first difference that triggers the display of the pre-notification image, the system is configured to continue displaying the pre-notification image until the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage reaches the second difference.

This configuration reduces the likelihood of the pre-announcement image disappearing immediately after the difference in the number of game tokens exceeds the first difference and the pre-announcement image begins to display. In other words, the frequency of the pre-announcement image starting and ending can be reduced, minimizing annoyance for the player.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the difference between the first difference and the second difference be greater than the maximum difference in game media during a single game.

Here, the maximum difference in the number of game tokens in a single game is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the maximum number of tokens awarded (payouts) on that game machine. For example, if a game machine can pay out 15 tokens with a 3-token bet, then 12 (15 minus 3) is the maximum difference in the number of game tokens in a single game.

With this configuration, for example, in a situation where the difference in the number of game media related to the stop count is the first difference, even if a small win that yields the maximum number of wins is won through internal抽選, but the player is unable to stop and display the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the small win that yields the maximum number of wins due to the operation of the stop switch, the result of a single game will not fall below the second difference, allowing the pre-notification image to be displayed continuously.

Furthermore, it is more preferable that the difference between the first difference and the second difference be greater than 1x the maximum difference of the game medium in a single game, and less than 20x.

In this embodiment, the first difference is set to 18900 and the second difference to 18850. However, the first and second differences are not limited to these values and can be designed as appropriate.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if, after a certain number of spins (e.g., approximately 20 spins), the difference in the number of spins related to the stop condition is the first difference, and a small win resulting in the maximum number of spins is achieved through internal抽選 (internal lottery), but the player is unable to stop and display the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the small win resulting in the maximum number of spins due to the operation of the stop switch, then the difference between the number of spins related to the stop condition and the number of spins until the stop condition is reached becomes too large, and therefore the pre-notification image can be temporarily hidden.

Furthermore, during the period shown in Figure 78(4), if a predetermined error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies that a predetermined error has occurred, the system may be configured not to display the pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32), a door opening error will occur. The pre-notification image will not be displayed (it will not be visible), and instead, a notification image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed on the display device 32. After the front door is closed and the door opening error is cleared, the situation will revert to that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32).

While the explanation used the door open error as an example of a specific error, it is not limited to the door open error. As mentioned above, a similar mechanism can be applied to some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring the system in this way, arcade staff can pay attention to the details of the error notification and quickly resolve the error.

On the other hand, if a predetermined error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs during the period shown in Figure 78(4), and the display device 32 notifies that the predetermined error has occurred, the system may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32), a door opening error will occur, and both the pre-notification image and an image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed on the display device 32. After the front door is closed and the door opening error is cleared, the situation will revert to that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32).

While the explanation used the door open error as an example of a specific error, it is not limited to the door open error. As mentioned above, a similar mechanism can be applied to some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, arcade staff can not only understand the details of the error notification but also recognize when the machine is about to reach its payout limit, allowing them to respond quickly when the machine reaches this limit.

<<Figure 78 (5)>>
This period is from when the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage decreases as the game progresses and falls below the second difference, until the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes the second difference again (or less than the second difference). The notification state regarding the stoppage during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the pre-notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(5), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the game waiting period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78(5), an image like that shown in Figure 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(5), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32.
<<Figure 78 (6)>>
Depending on the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage increases as the game progresses, and this period is from when it reaches the second difference or higher until it reaches the first difference (below the first difference). The notification state regarding the stoppage during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the pre-notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(6), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the game waiting period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78(6), an image like that shown in Figure 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the menu mode shown in Figure 78(6), an image like that shown in Figure 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32.

<<Figure 78 (7)>>
This is a period during which, depending on the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, and less than the difference in the number of game media that would result in the stoppage state. The notification state related to the stoppage during this period is the operation notification state. Therefore, the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

During the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(7), an image like that shown in Figure 76(1) will be displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during the gameplay period shown in Figure 78(7) are as described in Figure 76(1).

During the game waiting period shown in Figure 78(7) (also referred to as the demo sequence), an image like that shown in Figure 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo sequence during the period shown in Figure 78(7) are as described in Figure 76(2). As also explained in Figure 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed while the demo sequence is running.

In the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(7), an image like that shown in Figure 76(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78(7) are as described in Figure 76(3). As also explained in Figure 76(3), the pre-notification image does not necessarily need to be displayed in menu mode.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs during the period shown in Figure 78(7), and the display device 32 notifies that a predetermined error has occurred, the pre-notification image may be configured not to be displayed on the display device 32.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32), a door opening error will occur. The pre-notification image will not be displayed (it will not be visible), and instead, a notification image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed on the display device 32. After the front door is closed and the door opening error is cleared, the situation will revert to that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32).

While the explanation used the door open error as an example of a specific error, it is not limited to the door open error. As mentioned above, a similar mechanism can be applied to some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring the system in this way, arcade staff can pay attention to the details of the error notification and quickly resolve the error.

On the other hand, if a predetermined error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs during the period shown in Figure 78(7), and the display device 32 notifies that the predetermined error has occurred, the system may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32), a door opening error will occur, and both the pre-notification image and an image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed on the display device 32. After the front door is closed and the door opening error is cleared, the situation will revert to that shown in Figure 76(1) (where the pre-notification image is displayed on the display device 32).

While the explanation used the door open error as an example of a specific error, it is not limited to the door open error. As mentioned above, a similar mechanism can be applied to some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, arcade staff can not only understand the details of the error notification but also recognize when the machine is about to reach its payout limit, allowing them to respond quickly when the machine reaches this limit.

In other words, as explained in Figure 78(4), if the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage initially exceeds the first difference, then falls below the first difference, and then becomes the second difference or greater, the system is configured to display a pre-notification image.

On the other hand, as explained in Figure 78(6), the system is configured so that the pre-notification image is not displayed during periods when the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage is greater than or equal to the second difference but less than the first difference. However, as explained in Figure 78(7), the system is configured to display the pre-notification image again when the difference becomes greater than or equal to the first difference.

By configuring it in this way, the condition for starting the display of the pre-notification image from a situation where the pre-notification image is not displayed can be set to when the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds a first difference, thereby reducing the burden on the control processing of the sub-control means.

In this embodiment, the first difference is set to 18900 and the second difference to 18850 (different values), but the first and second differences may be the same value. In other words, the difference value of the game medium related to the stop-down mechanism that starts displaying the pre-notification image and the difference value of the game medium related to the stop-down mechanism that ends displaying the pre-notification image may be the same value.

In other words, if the first difference equals the second difference equals 18900, then in a game where the difference in the game media related to the stop-loss is 18901 (a certain game), the pre-notification image will be displayed. However, if the difference in the game media for a certain game is -3, then after that game ends, the difference in the game media related to the stop-loss will become 18898, and the pre-notification image will no longer be displayed. In other words, the pre-notification image will not be displayed in the next game after a certain game.

<Difference in the number of game media and temporary stop flag related to the end of play during bonus game state>
Figure 79 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-play state and the temporary stop-play flag.

The temporary stop flag is as described above. To briefly explain the characteristics of the temporary stop flag, in a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (at least one of Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the temporary stop flag is turned on (a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag memory area) when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state.

Furthermore, when the temporary stop flag is ON, gameplay is possible until the bonus game state ends. Once the bonus game state ends, the stop flag is turned ON based on the temporary stop flag (a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag memory area).

Furthermore, after the stop flag is turned on, the system enters a stop state based on the fact that the stop flag is on.

In this embodiment, the situation where a predetermined value is not stored in the temporary stop flag area is referred to as the temporary stop flag being "off," and the situation where a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag area is referred to as the temporary stop flag being "on," in order to simplify the explanation.

Similarly, in this embodiment, the situation where no predetermined value is stored in the stop flag area is referred to as the stop flag being off, and the situation where a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag area is referred to as the stop flag being on, in order to simplify the explanation.

Return to Figure 79 for explanation.

First, we will explain an example where the power did not cut off while the bonus game was in progress (i.e., the power remained on).

<<If the power does not cut off during the bonus game state>>
First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a bonus stops and is displayed. In other words, the bonus game state starts from the next game after the game in (1).

(1) As a result of the game, the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game ending is less than 19,000. For example, suppose the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game ending is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game in (1), the temporary stop flag is off (it remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is a game during a bonus game state (not a game where the bonus game state ends) where the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss exceeds 19,000. For example, suppose the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss is 19,001.

(2) As a result of the game, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, as a result of the game in (2), the temporary stop flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, the timing corresponding to (3) is the game in which the bonus game state ends (or has ended). In other words, it is the game in which the conditions for ending the bonus game state (for example, the number of game tokens awarded during the bonus game state exceeding 200) are met.

In game (3), the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play does not exceed 19,000. For example, suppose the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play is 18,991.

Furthermore, in game (3), the temporary stop flag is turned on (the information that was turned on in game (2) is maintained).

In other words, after the game in (3) is finished (after the payout process for the game tokens is completed), the game enters a "stop" state.

As described above, if, during a bonus game state, the difference in the number of game tokens related to the limiting of play exceeds 19,000 even once, the game ending the bonus game state will be considered a limiting state after the game has finished (after the payout process for the game tokens has been completed). In this case, whether or not the difference in the number of game tokens related to the limiting of play exceeds 19,000 during the game ending the bonus game state is not determined.

In other words, in a game where the bonus game state ends, regardless of whether the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage is 19,000, if the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the system is configured to enter the stoppage state after the game in which the bonus game state ends has finished.

By configuring the system in this way, if the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, it is not necessary to determine again whether the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 after the bonus ends. Therefore, the processing time until the game reaches the stoppage state can be shortened.

Furthermore, in gaming machines that automatically settle the number of credits when the game reaches its limit (including immediately before, during, and immediately after the game reaches its limit), automatic settlement will not occur after the game in (2) is completed, but will occur after the game in (3) is completed.

Next, we will explain what happens if a power outage occurs while a bonus game is in progress.

<<If a power outage occurs during the bonus round (Pattern 1)>>
In the case of a power outage during a bonus round (Pattern 1), the power outage occurs during gameplay between (1) and (2) in Figure 79, and then the power is restored, allowing the bonus gameplay to continue from where it left off.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus stops and is displayed. In other words, the bonus game state begins from the next game after the game in (1).

(1) As a result of the game, the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game ending is less than 19,000. For example, suppose the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game ending is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game in (1), the temporary stop flag is off (it remains off).

Next, a power outage occurs during bonus gameplay. Note that "power outage" here refers to the occurrence of a power outage event (for example, the power switch being turned off) and the execution of power outage processing (also called power outage processing).

Furthermore, the difference in the number of game media related to the game's end-of-play period when a power outage occurs shall be less than 19,000. For example, suppose the value of the game end-of-play difference counter is 18,998. In other words, assume that a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of game media related to the game's end-of-play period is 18,998.

Furthermore, the temporary stop flag is assumed to be off when a power outage occurs. In other words, after the power is turned on, it is assumed that no games have exceeded 19,000 in the difference of game media related to the stop count.

Subsequently, powering on the machine without changing any settings (for example, turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is off) will resume the bonus game state from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the first game of the bonus game state has started, and then powering on the machine without changing any settings is performed, the bonus game state can resume from the second game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing any settings, the stop-loss difference counter will be reset to its initial value (e.g., 0), and the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. In other words, the bonus game state will resume from where it left off when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss is 0.

In other words, if a power outage does not occur during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in Figure 79), the result of game (2) will cause the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out to exceed 19,000, and the temporary stop-out flag will turn on, resulting in a stop-out state after the bonus game state ends. However, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in Figure 79), the result of game (2) will cause the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out to not exceed 19,000 (for example, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out to be 3), so the temporary stop-out flag will be off (remains off), and the stop-out state will not occur after the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, when the power is turned on without any setting changes, the initial value can be uniformly stored in the stop-loss counter at the time of power-on (power-on process) without having to determine whether or not a bonus game state is in progress, thus simplifying the process.

Furthermore, this configuration allows the stop-loss difference counter to store an initial value (because the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss becomes 0), thus preventing disputes between players and arcade staff who might mistakenly believe the machine stopped due to a power outage.

<<If a power outage occurs during the bonus round (Pattern 2)>>
In the case of a power outage during a bonus round (Pattern 2), the power outage occurs during gameplay between (2) and (3) in Figure 79, and then the power is restored, allowing the bonus gameplay to continue from where it left off.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus stops and is displayed. In other words, the bonus game state begins from the next game after the game in (1).

(1) As a result of the game, the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game ending is less than 19,000. For example, suppose the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game ending is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game in (1), the temporary stop flag is off (it remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is a game during a bonus game state (not a game where the bonus game state ends) where the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss exceeds 19,000. For example, suppose the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss is 19,001.

(2) As a result of the game, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, as a result of the game in (2), the temporary stop flag will be turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that "power outage" here refers to the occurrence of a power outage event (for example, the power switch being turned off) and the execution of the power outage process.

Furthermore, it is assumed that the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game's end-of-play period does not exceed 19,000 when a power outage occurs. For example, suppose a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game's end-of-play period is 18,999.

Note that the temporary shutdown flag is set to "on" when a power outage occurs.

Subsequently, powering on the machine without changing any settings (for example, turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is off) will resume the bonus game state from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the third game of the bonus game state has started, and then powering on the machine without changing any settings is performed, the bonus game state can resume from the fourth game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing any settings, the value of the stop-loss difference counter will be reset to its initial value (for example, 0), and then the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. In other words, the bonus game state will resume from where it left off when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss is 0.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on without any setting changes, the temporary stop flag remains on. In other words, if the power is turned on without any setting changes, the temporary stop flag is not cleared.

Therefore, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (2) and (3) in Figure 79), even if the stop-loss difference counter returns to its initial value, the stop-loss temporary flag remains on (and stays on), allowing the game to enter the stop-loss state after the bonus game state ends.

Furthermore, while it was assumed that the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage when a power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000, the same applies even if the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage when a power outage occurs exceeds 19,000. For example, even if a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage is 19,005, the game can still be stopped after the completion of a game that has met the termination conditions for the bonus game state.

In other words, if the conditions for stopping the bonus game state are met during the bonus game state (when the difference in the number of game media related to the stopping exceeds 19,000), a power outage will occur. Even if the power is then turned back on without any setting changes, the bonus game state can continue, and the game can be stopped after the game that met the conditions for ending the bonus game state has finished.

In other words, once the conditions for stopping the bonus game state are met (i.e., the difference in the number of game media related to stopping exceeds 19,000), the game can be stopped regardless of the value of the stopping difference counter (the game can be stopped using a temporary stopping flag).

By configuring it in this way, we provide a gaming machine that cannot increase the element of chance by using power interruptions.

As explained above using Figure 79, the difference in the number of game media and the temporary stop flag related to the stop-play state in the bonus game state have been described. However, a similar configuration may be used in specific states other than the bonus game state, such as the AT state.

Alternatively, it can be structured as follows:

(1) If a power outage occurs during bonus gameplay and the power is subsequently restored without any setting changes, the stop-loss counter does not need to be set to its initial value. On the other hand, in predetermined gameplay states different from bonus gameplay (for example, the internal bonus state (a state where bonus winning information is carried over)), the stop-loss counter must be set to its initial value.

In other words, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss may be configured to be maintained during bonus gameplay.

For example, if a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop count at the end of a game in bonus mode is 18900 (for example, the value of the stop count difference counter is 18900), and then the power is turned on without any setting changes, then the game in bonus mode becomes playable again from the state of 18900 (for example, the value of the stop count difference counter is 18900).

By configuring the machine in this way, even if a power outage occurs during a bonus round, if the power is restored without changing the settings, the bonus round can be resumed while maintaining the difference in the number of game media used to stop the bonus round. This allows for the provision of a gaming machine that does not excessively increase the player's gambling risk.

(2) If the difference in the number of game tokens related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the game may be stopped after the end of that game (after the payout process is completed).

In other words, if the difference in the number of game tokens related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the game may be considered stopped even if it is still before the bonus game state has ended.

For example, if the difference in game media related to the stop count at the end of a game in bonus mode is 18999 (for example, the value of the stop count difference counter is 18999), and the difference in game media for the next game (a game in bonus mode) is 3 (for example, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 6), then the game will be stopped after the next game ends.

Note that when configured in this way, a temporary stop flag is not necessary.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not excessively increase the player's gambling tendencies.

Furthermore, this configuration allows for a reduction in the RWM capacity of the main control means compared to a case where a temporary stop flag is provided.

Furthermore, this configuration eliminates the need to determine whether the current game state is a bonus game state, thus reducing the program capacity of the main control means.

<Pre-notification image during bonus game state>
Next, using Figure 80, we will explain the pre-notification image displayed on the display device 32 during bonus gameplay.

In this explanation, we will omit explanations of points similar to those in Figure 76(1) and focus on explaining the distinctive features.

<<When the game screen during bonus gameplay displays the number of coins needed to activate the complete function>>
Figure 80(1) shows an example of how the number of coins remaining until the completion function is activated is displayed on the game screen during bonus gameplay.

Figure 80(1) shows an example of the display when the temporary stop flag mentioned above is off. In other words, it shows an example of the display shown on the display device 32 when, during a bonus game, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop count has never exceeded 19,000 (the game before the game shown in Figure 79(2)).

The display device 32 displays PAYOUT, CREDIT, and Total, similar to Figure 76(1). Note that the Total may display the sum of the winnings during AT mode and the winnings during bonus game mode, or it may display only the winnings during bonus game mode, without considering the winnings during AT mode.

The display device 32 displays an image (effect) corresponding to the bonus game state in the center.

A pre-notification image is displayed above the display device 32, similar to Figure 76(1). The pre-notification image in Figure 80(1) is an example where the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage reaches 19,000 when +10 is added.

Therefore, a pre-announcement image displays the message, "10 images remaining until the complete function is activated."

By configuring it in this way, even when in bonus game mode, the player can recognize the difference in the remaining number of game tokens until the game reaches its limit.

Furthermore, the notification state related to the end of play when Figure 80(1) is displayed corresponds to the operation notification state. Therefore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated, the behavior is the same as in Figure 76(3). The features of Figure 76(3) are the same as those described in Figure 76(3), so the explanation is omitted. Note that the system may be configured so that the menu screen is not displayed even when the sub-switch 20 is operated during a bonus round.

Similarly, if the system is configured to display a demo screen during the bonus round, the configuration will be the same as in Figure 76(2). The features of Figure 76(2) are the same as those described in Figure 76(2), so the explanation will be omitted. Note that the system may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during the bonus round.

<<When notifying that the complete function is activated on the game screen during bonus gameplay>>
Figure 80(2) shows an example of a case where the system notifies the player that the difference in the number of game media related to stopping play has exceeded 19,000 during the bonus game state.

In other words, this is an example of a display shown on the display device 32 from the time the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state (the predetermined timing after the end of the game as shown in Figure 79 (2)) until the bonus game state ends.

For example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop count becomes 19001, and the temporary stop flag is turned on, the image display shown in Figure 80(2) begins at a predetermined timing.

In this explanation, we will omit explanations of points similar to those in Figure 80(1) and focus on explaining the distinctive features.

In Figure 80(1), the pre-notification image displays "10 remaining until the complete function is activated," whereas in Figure 80(2), the pre-notification image displays "Waiting for complete function activation. The complete function will activate when the bonus ends."

In other words, Figure 80(1) provides notification that allows the player to recognize the difference between the number of game media involved in the stop-loss state and the number of game media that have reached the stop-loss state, whereas Figure 80(2) provides notification that allows the player to recognize that the game will reach the stop-loss state when the bonus game state ends.

This configuration allows the system to notify players in advance of when the bonus game state will end if the difference in the number of game tokens related to the game's end exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state. Therefore, players can play the bonus game state with peace of mind.

Furthermore, the notification state related to the end of play when Figure 80(2) is displayed corresponds to the operation notification state. Therefore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated, the behavior is the same as in Figure 76(3). The features of Figure 76(3) are the same as those described in Figure 76(3), so the explanation is omitted. Note that the system may be configured so that the menu screen is not displayed even when the sub-switch 20 is operated during a bonus round.

Similarly, if the system is configured to display a demo screen during the bonus round, the configuration will be the same as in Figure 76(2). The features of Figure 76(2) are the same as those described in Figure 76(2), so the explanation will be omitted. Note that the system may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during the bonus round.

Furthermore, the notification state regarding the end of the bonus game state will be the "end of play" notification state.

Therefore, after the bonus game state ends, one of the images shown in Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), or 77(4) will be displayed. In other words, the image used to indicate the end of the bonus game state when the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state is the same image used to indicate the end of the game state when the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game exceeds 19,000 in other states (e.g., AT state).

The features of Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4) are the same as those described for Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4), and are therefore omitted here.

Furthermore, if the sub-switch 20 is operated while the device is in the stopped state, the configuration will be the same as that shown in Figure 77(6). The features of Figure 77(6) are the same as those described in Figure 77(6), so their explanation will be omitted. Note that the device may also be configured so that the sub-switch 20 cannot be operated (the menu screen is not displayed) while the device is in the stopped state.

Similarly, if the system is configured to display a demo screen while the machine is stopped, the configuration will be the same as in Figure 77(5). The features of Figure 77(5) are the same as those described in Figure 77(5), so the explanation will be omitted. Note that the system may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed while the machine is stopped.

<When a power-off process is executed in a game where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the jackpot exceeds 19,000>
Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 illustrate, with examples, the control processing that occurs in games where the notification state regarding the end of play before the start of play (before the prescribed number of bets are made and the start switch is operated) is in the operation notification state, and as a result of playing the game, the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play exceeds 19,000, and the power cut-off process (also called power cut-off processing) is executed at the timing of the power cut-off process.

Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 illustrate, for example, a predetermined game state that is not a bonus state, and where the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss before the game starts (before the prescribed number of bets are made and the start switch is operated) is 18999. Furthermore, in this game, the number of bets is 3, and as a result of the internal lottery, a small win of the push-order role is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct push-order sequence, resulting in a symbol combination displaying 11 game media being awarded. Note that the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-loss, the result of the internal lottery, and the number of game media awarded are examples only and are not limited to these.

Furthermore, in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, "power outage" refers to an event that causes the gaming machine to power off (power outage), such as the power switch being turned off, the power cord being unplugged, or the power to the gaming establishment being cut off.

Furthermore, the power outage processing shown in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the process where the main control means detects a power outage and then executes the power-off processing. For example, the time required from the occurrence of a power outage to the power-outage processing is designed to be between 1 ms and 20 ms on average. The power-off processing itself is designed to be completed in an average of 0.5 ms.

Furthermore, in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, "power on" refers to an event that results in the gaming machine's power being turned on (power restored), such as turning on the power switch, replugging a power cord, or restoring power to a gaming arcade after a power outage.

Furthermore, the power-on processing in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to power-on without any setting changes. Specifically, this includes the processing executed when the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is in the off position.

Furthermore, the payout process in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the period from determining the number of game tokens to the completion of the processing corresponding to the determined number of game tokens.

Furthermore, "processing corresponding to the determined number of game tokens to be dispensed" includes processes such as updating the information displayed on the payout indicator (also called the acquired tokens indicator), updating the information displayed on the credits indicator, updating the information displayed on the indicator capable of displaying the total score (also called the total score indicator), and dispensing game tokens from the hopper.

The "process of updating the information displayed on the display unit" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display unit, for example, when dispensing (distributing) 11 game tokens, from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11". For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Similarly, the time required to dispense one game token from the hopper is also designed to be an average of 50 ms.

Therefore, for example, when dispensing (granting) 11 game tokens, the time required for "processing corresponding to the determined number of game tokens to be dispensed" is designed to average 550 ms (11 x 50 ms).

Therefore, the time required for payout processing is the time from determining the number of game tokens to the completion of the processing corresponding to that number of tokens.

Furthermore, in the notification state related to the shutdown shown in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, if the operation notification state is in effect, the system is configured to execute the effects corresponding to the operation notification state described above.

Similarly, in the notification state related to the end of operation shown in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, the system is configured to execute the effects corresponding to the normal state described above when the system is in a normal state.

<<If a power-off process is executed after the payout process for games where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the jackpot exceeds 19,000 has been completed>>
Figure 81 shows an example of a case where a power-off process is executed after the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000 has been completed. Here, "after the payout process has been completed" refers to, for example, a certain timing after the stoppage monitoring process has been executed, but before the game enters a stoppage state (before the stoppage notification is issued).

First, before the game starts (before the prescribed number of bets are placed and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the "operation notification" state. Let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens related to the end of play at this time is, for example, 18999. Let's assume the value stored in the end-of-play difference counter at this time is, for example, 18999.

Next, a bet of Y (where Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor win) is achieved. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that allows for the stopping of a symbol combination that can award a payout of X (where X is a numerical value; Y < X). For example, let Y be 3 and X be 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for this game is 8.

Then, after the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, assigning X as the number of game tokens to be distributed.

A power outage occurs during the payout process, which assigns X as the number of game tokens.

After assigning X as the number of game tokens, the power outage processing begins. Note that the stop-play monitoring process is assumed to have finished before the power outage processing begins. Furthermore, the stop-play notification status is assumed to be in the activated notification state.

Subsequently, after power-on and the power-on processing is executed, the notification state related to the shutdown will be in the operation notification state (it will remain in the operation notification state). Furthermore, the control in the main control means is controlled to enter the shutdown state after the power-on processing is executed.

Furthermore, if the power-on processing is executed, the stop-loss difference counter is configured to reset to its initial value (for example, 0).

As described above, even if a power outage occurs during the dispensing process, if the stop-out monitoring process is completed before the power outage processing begins, the notification status regarding stop-out after power is restored can be set to the operational notification status.

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play after power restoration and the control state of the main control means after power restoration can be made appropriate, thereby reducing trouble between players and arcade staff.

<<If a power cut is performed during the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the end of play exceeds 19,000 (1)>>
Figure 82 shows an example of a case where a power cut-off is performed in the middle of the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000. Here, "in the middle of the payout process" refers to a certain timing, such as from the time the number of game media to be given is determined until the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be given is completed.

First, let's explain Figure 82(a).

First, before the game starts (before the prescribed number of bets are placed and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the "operation notification" state. Let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens related to the end of play at this time is, for example, 18999. Let's assume the value stored in the end-of-play difference counter at this time is, for example, 18999.

Next, a bet of Y (where Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor win) is achieved. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that allows for the placement of a symbol combination that can assign X (where X is a numerical value; Y < X) as the number of game tokens. For example, let's say Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens for this game is 8.

Then, after the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, assigning X as the number of game tokens to be distributed.

A power outage occurs during the payout process, which assigns X as the number of game tokens.

Furthermore, the power outage processing is initiated during the payout process that assigns X as the number of game tokens. In other words, the power outage processing is initiated before the payout process is completed.

Subsequently, after power is turned on and the power-on processing is executed, the notification status related to the shutdown remains in the operation notification state (it remains in the operation notification state). Furthermore, control by the main control means resumes from the middle of the payout process (the continuation of the payout process that was running before the power-off processing was executed) after the power-on processing is executed.

Furthermore, "starting from the middle of the disbursement process (the continuation of the disbursement process that was running before the power outage processing was executed)" means, for example, that if power outage processing is executed between instruction A and instruction B (instruction B being the instruction that follows instruction A), the process will start from instruction B.

Furthermore, when the power-on processing is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss counter is configured to reset to its initial value (for example, 0).

Furthermore, once the payout process is complete and the stop-loss monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter will be the difference in the number of game media used for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, the value corresponding to X - Y will be stored in the stop-loss difference counter.

Therefore, the game does not enter a "stop" state after the current game ends. In other words, you can play the next game.

As described above, if a power outage occurs during the payout process, and a power outage processing event occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is restored. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the machine will not enter a stop-play state, and the next game can be played. Also, the notification state regarding the stop-play state after the payout process is completed can be set to the normal state instead of the activated notification state.

This configuration reduces the likelihood of disputes between players and arcade staff compared to gaming machines where a power outage occurs during the payout process, and the machine subsequently enters a "stopped" state when power is restored. Specifically, it prevents disputes with players who mistakenly believe the machine stopped due to a power outage during the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 82(b). Note that the explanation will be omitted for parts that are the same as those in Figure 82(a).

Figure 82(a) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is in the operation notification state, while Figure 82(b) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is in the normal state.

In other words, Figure 82(a) shows that during the payout process, which is executed after power-on, an animation corresponding to the operation notification state is performed, whereas Figure 82(b) shows that during the payout process, which is executed after power-on, an animation corresponding to the normal state is performed.

As shown in Figure 82(b), the pre-announcement image is not displayed during the payout process. Therefore, after powering on, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end, and can continue playing without any doubt.

<<If a power cut is performed during the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the end of play exceeds 19,000 (2)>>
Figure 83 shows an example of a case where a power cut is performed in the middle of the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000. Here, "in the middle of the payout process" refers to a certain timing, such as from the time the number of game media to be given is determined until the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be given is completed.

First, let's explain Figure 83(a).

First, before the game starts (before the prescribed number of bets are placed and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the "operation notification" state. Let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens related to the end of play at this time is, for example, 18999. Let's assume the value stored in the end-of-play difference counter at this time is, for example, 18999.

Next, a bet of Y (where Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor win) is achieved. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that allows for the placement of a symbol combination that can assign X (where X is a numerical value; Y < X) as the number of game tokens. For example, let's say Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens for this game is 8.

Then, the power cut occurs before the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released. For example, the power cut occurs after the last stop switch has been operated, while that last stop switch is still being operated. In other words, at the moment the power cut occurs, the symbol combinations that can award X as a game token are stopped. However, the payout process has not yet started.

After the final stop switch is released, the payout process begins, assigning X as the number of game tokens.

Furthermore, the power outage processing is initiated during the payout process, which assigns X as the number of game tokens. In other words, the power outage processing is initiated before the payout process is completed.

Subsequently, after power is turned on and the power-on processing is executed, the notification status related to the shutdown remains in the operation notification state (it remains in the operation notification state). Furthermore, control by the main control means resumes from the middle of the payout process (the continuation of the payout process that was running before the power-off processing was executed) after the power-on processing is executed.

Furthermore, "starting from the middle of the disbursement process (the continuation of the disbursement process that was running before the power outage processing was executed)" means, for example, that if power outage processing is executed between instruction A and instruction B (instruction B being the instruction that follows instruction A), the process will start from instruction B.

Furthermore, when the power-on processing is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss counter is configured to reset to its initial value (for example, 0).

Furthermore, once the payout process is complete and the stop-loss monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter will be the difference in the number of game media used for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awarded is X, the value corresponding to X - Y will be stored in the stop-loss difference counter related to the stop-loss.

Therefore, the game does not enter a "stop" state after the current game ends. In other words, you can play the next game.

As described above, even if the payout process has not yet started, if a power outage occurs while the symbol combination capable of awarding X as the number of game tokens is stopped, and a power outage processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is restored. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the game can be played again without entering a stop-play state. Also, the notification state regarding stop-play after the payout process is completed can be set to the normal state instead of the activated notification state.

By configuring the machine in this way, even though the payout process has not yet started, if a power outage occurs while the number of symbols that can award X as the number of game tokens is stopped, and the power outage occurs midway through the payout process, and then the power is restored, the likelihood of disputes between players and arcade staff can be reduced. Specifically, disputes with players who mistakenly believe that the machine has stopped playing because the power outage occurred before the payout process began can be prevented.

Next, we will explain Figure 83(b). Note that the explanation will be omitted for parts that are the same as those in Figure 83(a).

Figure 83(a) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is in the operation warning notification state, while Figure 83(b) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is in the normal state.

In other words, Figure 83(a) shows that during the payout process, which is executed after power-on, an animation corresponding to the operation notification state is performed, whereas Figure 83(b) shows that during the payout process, which is executed after power-on, an animation corresponding to the normal state is performed.

As shown in Figure 83(b), the pre-announcement image is not displayed during the payout process. Therefore, after powering on, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end, and can continue playing without any doubt.

<<If a power cut is performed before the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>>
Figure 84 shows an example of a case where a power cut-off process is performed before the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000. In Figure 84, "before the payout process" refers to a certain timing between the time the symbol combination that awards game media stops and before the number of game media awarded is determined.

First, let's explain Figure 84(a).

First, before the game starts (before the prescribed number of bets are made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the operation notification state. Let's assume the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play at this time is, for example, 18999. Let's assume the value stored in the end-of-play difference counter at this time is, for example, 18999.

Next, a bet of Y (where Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor win) is achieved. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that allows stopping the pattern combination that assigns X (where X is a numerical value; Y < X) as the number of game tokens. For example, let Y be 3 and X be 11. In other words, let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens for this game is 8.

Then, the power cut occurs before the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released. For example, the power cut occurs after the last stop switch has been operated, while that last stop switch is still being operated. In other words, at the moment the power cut occurs, the symbol combinations that can award X as a game token are stopped.

Furthermore, the power outage processing is initiated before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being held down).

Before power is turned on (while the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), the final stop switch is released.

Subsequently, the power is turned on, and after the power-on processing is executed, the payout process is performed. Furthermore, the notification status regarding the stoppage during the payout process remains in the operation notification state (it stays in the operation notification state).

Furthermore, if the power-on processing is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss counter is configured to reset to its initial value (for example, 0).

Furthermore, once the payout process is complete and the stop-loss monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter will be the difference in the number of game media used for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awarded is X, the value corresponding to X - Y will be stored in the stop-loss difference counter related to the stop-loss.

Therefore, the game does not enter a "stop" state after the current game ends. In other words, you can play the next game.

As described above, even if the payout process has not yet started, if a power outage occurs while the symbol combination capable of awarding X as the number of game tokens is stopped, and the power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is restored. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the game can be played again without entering a stop-play state. Also, the notification state regarding the stop-play state after the payout process is completed can be set to the normal state instead of the operation warning notification state.

By configuring the machine in this way, even though the payout process has not yet started, if a power outage occurs while the number of symbols that can award X as the number of game tokens is stopped, and the power outage occurs before the payout process begins, and then the power is turned on after the last stop switch is released, the likelihood of disputes between players and arcade staff can be reduced. Specifically, disputes with players who mistakenly believe that the machine has stopped playing because the power outage occurred before the payout process began can be prevented.

Next, we will explain Figure 84(b). Note that the explanation will be omitted for parts identical to those in Figure 84(a).

Figure 84(a) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is in the operation warning notification state, while Figure 84(b) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is in the normal state.

In other words, Figure 84(a) shows that in the payout process executed after power-on, the animation corresponding to the operation notification state is executed, whereas in Figure 84(b), the animation corresponding to the normal state is executed in the payout process executed after power-on.

By configuring the machine as shown in Figure 84(b), no pre-announcement image is displayed during the payout process. Therefore, after powering on, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end, and can continue playing without any doubt.

<<If a power cut is performed before the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (2)>>
Figure 85 shows an example of a case where a power cut-off process is performed before the payout process for a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage exceeds 19,000. In Figure 85, "before the payout process" refers to a certain timing between the time the symbol combination that awards game media stops and before the number of game media awarded is determined.

First, let's explain Figure 85(a).

First, before the game starts (before the prescribed number of bets are made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the operation notification state. Let's assume that the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play at this time is, for example, 18999. Let's assume that the value stored in the end-of-play difference counter at this time is, for example, 18999.

Next, a bet of Y (where Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor win) is achieved. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that allows stopping the pattern combination that assigns X (where X is a numerical value; Y < X) as the number of game tokens. For example, let Y be 3 and X be 11. In other words, let's assume the difference in the number of game tokens for this game is 8.

Then, the power cut occurs before the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released. For example, the power cut occurs after the last stop switch has been operated, while that last stop switch is still being operated. In other words, at the moment the power cut occurs, the symbol combinations that can award X as a game token are stopped.

Furthermore, the power outage processing is initiated before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being held down).

Next, the power is turned on. At this point, the last stop switch remains pressed.

The last stop switch is released while the power-on processing is in progress.

After the power-on process is executed, the payout process is performed. Furthermore, during the payout process, the notification status regarding the machine's operation stoppage remains in the operation stop notification state.

Furthermore, if the power-on processing is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss counter is configured to reset to its initial value (for example, 0).

Furthermore, once the payout process is complete and the stop-loss monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter will be the difference in the number of game media used for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, the value corresponding to X - Y will be stored in the stop-loss difference counter.

Therefore, the game does not enter a "stop" state after the current game ends. In other words, you can play the next game.

As described above, even if the payout process has not yet started, if a power outage occurs while the symbol combination capable of awarding X as the number of game tokens is stopped, and the power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is restored. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the game can be played again without entering a stop-play state. Also, the notification state regarding the stop-play state after the payout process is completed can be set to the normal state instead of the operation warning notification state.

By configuring the machine in this way, even though the payout process has not yet started, if a power outage occurs while the number of symbols that can award X as the number of game tokens is stopped, and the power outage process occurs before the payout process begins, and then the power is turned back on, and if the last stop switch is released during the power-on process, the machine will enter a stop state. Compared to such a machine, this configuration reduces the likelihood of disputes between players and arcade staff. Specifically, it prevents disputes with players who mistakenly believe that the machine entered a stop state because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 85(b). Note that the explanation will be omitted for parts that are the same as those in Figure 85(a).

Figure 85(a) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is the operation warning notification state, while Figure 85(b) shows the notification state for shutdown after power-on processing is the normal state.

In other words, Figure 85(a) shows that in the payout process executed after power-on, the animation corresponding to the operation notification state is executed, whereas in Figure 85(b), the animation corresponding to the normal state is executed in the payout process executed after power-on.

By configuring the machine as shown in Figure 85(b), no pre-announcement image is displayed during the payout process. Therefore, after powering on, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end, and can continue playing without any doubt.

<Number of game tokens given to players when a game reaches its limit>
This section explains the number of game media awarded to a player when a game is played with a difference of X in the number of game media used to reach the stop-out state, and the result of adding the difference in game media (A) for that game to the difference in game media used to reach the stop-out state (X) exceeds the difference in game media (Y) until the stop-out state is reached. In other words, it is a game that satisfies X + A > Y.

In the following sections, we will use specific numerical data to make the technical details easier to understand.

For example, let's assume the difference in game media related to the stoppage is 18,999 (corresponding to X in the above formula), the difference in game media for that game is 8 (corresponding to A in the above formula; assuming a bet of 3 and 11 game media provided), and the difference in game media until the stoppage state is reached is 19,000 (corresponding to Y in the above formula). It should be noted that these values are examples only and are not limiting.

<<Pattern 1: After all the determined number of game tokens have been distributed, the game has stopped.>>
Pattern 1 is a pattern in which, under the condition that the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage is 18999, three bets are made and the game is played, and as a result a predetermined combination of symbols that can award 11 game media stops is displayed, and after awarding 11 game media, the game ends and the stoppage state is reached.

In other words, in Pattern 1, even if the number of game tokens used exceeds 19,000 (the difference before reaching the limit), all of the determined number of game tokens will be given to the player. Then, after the distribution of game tokens has ended, the game reaches its limit.

By configuring the machine as in Pattern 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause excessive disadvantage to players by resulting in a game-ending state.

Furthermore, the system is configured to display a pre-notification image when distributing game media. However, when distributing game media, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<If a predetermined error occurs during the process of issuing game tokens for a game that has reached the end of Pattern 1>>>
In Pattern 1, if a predetermined error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before distributing more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of distributing game media until the game is stopped (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to stopping is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the predetermined error (for example, processing to display an error code corresponding to a hopper empty error).

When the main control means is performing error processing corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the sub-control means to notify that a predetermined error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the arcade staff to understand that the machine is nearing a payout limit and also to understand that a predetermined error has occurred.

Furthermore, in Pattern 1, if a predetermined error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs after distributing more than 19,000 game media (for example, when the difference in game media related to the end of the game is 19,001), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the predetermined error (for example, processing to display an error code corresponding to a hopper empty error).

When the main control means is performing error processing corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the sub-control means to notify that a predetermined error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the arcade staff to understand that the machine is nearing its limit and also to understand that a predetermined error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means may display an operation notification image instead of a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the arcade staff to understand that the machine is about to enter a stop-play state, and also to understand that a predetermined error has occurred.

While the hopper empty error was used as an example of a specified error in this explanation, the specified error is not limited to the hopper empty error; it may also include recoverable errors such as door open errors.

<<Pattern 2-1: After distributing a portion of the determined number of game tokens, the game is stopped.>>
Pattern 2-1 is a pattern in which, under the condition that the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage is 18999, three bets are made and the game is played, and as a result a predetermined combination of symbols that can award 11 game media stops is displayed, and after awarding 5 game media, the game reaches a stoppage state.

In other words, in Pattern 2-1, the game reaches its limit when the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000, reaching 19,001. To put it another way, the player is not given all of the determined number of game tokens.

By configuring the machine as shown in Pattern 2-1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can uniformly control the difference in the number of gaming media used until the game reaches its limit.

Furthermore, the system is configured to display a pre-notification image when distributing game media. However, when distributing game media, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<Pattern 2-2: After distributing a portion of the determined number of game tokens, the game is stopped.>>
Pattern 2-2 is a pattern in which, under the condition that the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage is 18999, three bets are made and the game is played, resulting in a predetermined symbol combination that can award 11 game media being displayed as the stoppage, and after awarding 4 game media, the game reaches the stoppage state.

In other words, in pattern 2-2, the game reaches its limit when the number of remaining game tokens reaches 19,000. To put it another way, the player does not receive all of the determined number of game tokens.

By configuring the machine as shown in Pattern 2-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can uniformly control the difference in the number of gaming media used until the game reaches its limit.

Furthermore, the system is configured to display a pre-notification image when distributing game media. However, when distributing game media, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<If a predetermined error occurs during the process of issuing game media for games that reach the stop-play state in Pattern 2-1 and Pattern 2-2>>>
In Pattern 2-1 or Pattern 2-2, if a predetermined error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before distributing more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of distributing game media until the game is stopped (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to stopping is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the predetermined error (for example, processing to display an error code corresponding to a hopper empty error).

When the main control means is performing error processing corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the sub-control means to notify that a predetermined error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. This configuration allows the arcade staff to understand that the machine is nearing a payout limit and also to understand that a predetermined error has occurred.

While the hopper empty error was used as an example of a specified error in this explanation, the specified error is not limited to the hopper empty error; it may also include recoverable errors such as door open errors.

<If a specified error occurs during the execution of automatic settlement>
Next, using Figures 86 and 87, we will explain an example of notification when a predetermined error occurs in a gaming machine that performs automatic settlement when it reaches a payout limit. Note that while a hopper empty error will be used as an example of the predetermined error, the predetermined error is not limited to a hopper empty error; it may also be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

For example, suppose the game is in a non-bonus state (a predetermined game state), and after the end of a game where the difference in the number of game tokens related to the limit-up exceeds 19,000 (after the limit-up monitoring process is completed), the credit counter displays 50. When automatic settlement begins, the 50 game tokens displayed on the credit counter are settled. Specifically, through automatic settlement, the value displayed on the credit counter is reduced by 1 each time: 50, 49, 48, ..., 0. Also, as the value on the credit counter is reduced by 1 each time, one game token is returned from the return slot.

During the process of this automatic settlement, a hopper empty error occurs, and the main control unit executes error handling (the process of displaying the error code corresponding to the hopper empty error). For example, suppose a hopper empty error occurs when 30 is displayed on the credit count indicator (after 20 has been automatically settled as game currency).

<<If a specified error (hopper empty error) occurs during the execution of automatic settlement (1)>>
Figure 86(1) shows an example where an automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of game media related to the limit has exceeded 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process has finished), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In Figure 86(1), the period during which automatic settlement is being executed is the completion function activation notification period. In other words, the notification state related to the stoppage during automatic settlement is the activation notification state. That is, the system is configured to be able to execute notifications corresponding to the activation notification state during automatic settlement execution. Furthermore, as a notification method corresponding to the activation notification state during automatic settlement execution, the method shown in Figure 77(3) can be considered. That is, during automatic settlement execution, notifications are made indicating that the stoppage state has been reached and that automatic settlement is being performed.

If a hopper empty error occurs during the execution of this automatic settlement process (for example, when 30 is displayed on the credit count indicator), the sub-control means may use one of the following notification methods: (a), (b), or (c).

(a) The normal hopper empty error (also called HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function is not visible.

Figure 87(a) shows the specific notification method described in (a) above.

Figure 87(a) shows the image displayed when a hopper empty error occurs, even when the machine is not in a state of being stopped out (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to stopping out is 10).

In other words, whether a hopper empty error occurs while the device is in a stopped state or while it is not in a stopped state, the system will notify the user that a hopper empty error has occurred in the same manner.

By configuring it in this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs while the device is stopped firing, it is possible to notify the system of the hopper empty error without requiring complex control processing.

(i) Display the normal hopper empty error (also called HE error) screen. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function will be visible.

Figure 87(i) shows the specific image display method described in (i) above.

Figure 87(a) consists of an image displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation that is not a stop-out state (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-out is 10), and an image indicating that the stop-out state is in effect (an image that reads "Complete function activated. Please call an attendant.").

In other words, the same image is used whether a hopper empty error occurs while the device is stopped or while it is not stopped. However, when the device is stopped, an image indicating that it is stopped is also displayed.

By configuring the system in this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs while the machine is in a stopped-play state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the machine is in a stopped-play state without requiring complex control processing. In other words, arcade staff can understand that the machine will be in a stopped-play state after the hopper empty error is cleared, saving both players and staff the trouble of having to call an arcade staff member again after the error is cleared.

(c) Display information (image) related to the complete function. At this time, information (image) related to the hopper empty error should be visible.

Figure 87(c) shows the specific image display method described in (c) above.

Figure 87(c) shows a different image (from Figure 87(a)) used to notify of a hopper empty error when the machine is not in a stopped-out state (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the stopped-out state is 10). It also displays an image indicating that the machine is in a stopped-out state ("Complete function activated. Please call an attendant" image).

The image indicating this halted state may be an image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, or it may be a different image from the one displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

In other words, different images are used depending on whether a hopper empty error occurs while the device is in a stopped state or while it is not. Furthermore, when the device is in a stopped state, an image indicating this is also displayed. The image indicating the stopped state may be the same as the one in Figure 77(3) (however, the "Press to display menu screen" message in Figure 77(3) does not need to be displayed).

By configuring the system in this way, if a hopper empty error occurs while the machine is in a stopped-play state, the system can notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred, as well as the player that the machine is in a stopped-play state. In other words, arcade staff can understand that the machine will be stopped-play after the hopper empty error is cleared, saving both players and staff the trouble of having to call an arcade staff member again after the error is cleared.

Furthermore, if the image indicating the hopper empty state was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, the burden on the display processing can be reduced, allowing for notification of both the hopper empty error and the hopper empty state.

As described in (i) and (iii) above, if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is in progress, a notification will be sent indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the system has stopped.

Furthermore, in (a), (b), and (c) above, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation as before the hopper empty error occurred will be performed. That is, instead of notifying that a hopper empty error has occurred, notifications will be made indicating that the machine has stopped spinning and that automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, once the automatic settlement is complete, a notification indicating that the process has stopped will be issued (continued). In other words, the notification indicating that the automatic settlement is in progress will cease.

Furthermore, if a power outage process (also called a power-off process) is executed during automatic payment processing, and then the power is restored without any setting changes (setting key switch off, power switch on), the automatic payment process will resume from where it left off after the power-on process is executed. In this case, the same visual effects as before the power outage process were executed will be displayed. In other words, the system will notify the user that automatic payment is in progress.

After the automatic settlement is complete, the process will stop.

Furthermore, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement, and the main control means is performing error processing (the process of displaying the error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), and then power-on processing (also called power-off processing) is performed, without any setting changes (setting key switch off, power switch on), then power-on processing is performed, followed by the resumption of error processing (the process of displaying the error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

After the hopper empty error is cleared, the automatic settlement process will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation will be executed as before the hopper empty error occurred. That is, instead of notifying the user that a hopper empty error has occurred, the system will not notify the user that automatic settlement is in progress.

After the automatic settlement is complete, the process will stop.

Thus, if a power outage occurs during automatic settlement, or if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and a power outage occurs while error handling is in progress, the system is configured to resume from where it left off before the power outage when power is restored without any configuration changes.

In other words, upon power-on, the stop-loss difference counter related to stopping the operation resets to its initial value (e.g., 0), but the system is configured to enter a stop-loss state.

<<If a specified error (hopper empty error) occurs during the execution of automatic settlement (2)>>
Figure 86(2) shows an example where an automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of game media related to the limit has exceeded 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process has finished), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In Figure 86(2), the completion function activation notification period does not occur during the execution of automatic settlement. In other words, the notification state regarding the end of the process during automatic settlement is not the activation notification state. That is, the system does not notify that the process has ended during automatic settlement.

As for the visual effects during automatic settlement, for example, a visual effect corresponding to the operation notification state as shown in Figure 76(A) (displaying "XX coins remaining until complete function activates") or a visual effect indicating that the machine is about to stop (displaying "Preparing complete function") may be displayed.

First, when automatic settlement begins, the system will execute the animations indicating that automatic settlement is in progress. If a hopper empty error occurs during (or at any point in) this automatic settlement process, a notification indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred will be displayed.

As an example of a notification indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred, Figure 87(a) is displayed on the display device 32. Note that Figure 87(a) is also displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the machine is not in a stop-play state (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the stop-play state is 10).

After clearing the hopper empty error, automatic payment will resume.

Then, after the automatic settlement is complete, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after the automatic settlement is complete, the notification state related to the stoppage becomes the activated notification state. That is, after the automatic settlement is complete, it becomes possible to notify that the stoppage state has been reached.

Furthermore, if a power outage process (also called a power-off process) is executed while automatic settlement is in progress, and then the power is restored without any setting changes (setting key switch off, power switch on), the automatic settlement will resume from where it left off after the power-on process is executed (after the stop-loss counter is reset to its initial value). In this case, the same visual effects as before the power-off process were executed will be displayed. That is, the system will announce that automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, after the automatic settlement is complete, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after the automatic settlement is complete, the notification state related to the stoppage becomes the activated notification state. That is, after the automatic settlement is complete, it becomes possible to notify that the stoppage state has been reached.

Furthermore, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement, and the main control means is performing error processing (the process of displaying the error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), and then power-on processing (also called power-off processing) is performed without any setting changes (setting key switch off, power switch on), then power-on processing is performed (after resetting the stop-loss counter to its initial value), and then error processing (the process of displaying the error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) is resumed.

After the hopper empty error is resolved, the automatic settlement process will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same animation will be performed as before the hopper empty error occurred. That is, no notification of the hopper empty error will be given; instead, the animation will be the same as when the automatic settlement was in progress.

After automatic settlement is complete, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, the notification state related to the stoppage becomes the activated notification state. That is, after automatic settlement is complete, it becomes possible to notify that the stoppage state has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the system notifies players that the automatic settlement has finished and that the game has ended, thus preventing players from leaving their seats during the automatic settlement process.

Furthermore, in Figures 86(1) and (2), if a power outage processing (also called power-off processing) is performed during automatic settlement, and then a power-on (setting key switch ON, power switch ON) involving a setting change is performed, the system will transition to setting change mode. When the termination conditions for setting change mode are met and the setting change mode ends, the system will not resume from where it left off during automatic settlement, but will return to the state before the start of gameplay (the state where bets on the game medium are accepted). In other words, automatic settlement can be terminated midway, preventing a "stopped" state. Furthermore, during and after the setting change mode, notifications regarding the "stopped" state or the ongoing automatic settlement can be disabled.

With this configuration, for example, if the arcade's closing time arrives during automatic settlement, the arcade can simultaneously cut off the power supplied to the gaming machines (power off), while still providing players with gaming tokens until closing time. After closing time, arcade staff can change the settings to return the machines to their pre-game state without collecting the gaming tokens from the return slot, thus facilitating smooth operation of the arcade.

Although Figure 58 was explained as a modified version of Figure 57, it is also applicable to Figures 55 and 56.

For example, before the "Re-play activation symbol display?" in Figure 55, a process corresponding to "Temporary stop flag ON?" in Figure 58 is added. After the "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 55 is answered with YES, a process corresponding to "Save temporary stop flag" in Figure 58 is added. Before the "Save stop flag" in Figure 55, a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in Figure 58 is added. With this configuration, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state (starting from power-on (0)), information indicating that the stop condition is met will not be stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state (starting from power-on (0)), the stop state can be established after the game ends in the bonus game state.

Similarly, for example, before the "Re-play activation symbol display?" in Figure 56, a process corresponding to "Temporary stop flag ON?" in Figure 58 is added. After the "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 56 is answered with YES, a process corresponding to "Save temporary stop flag" in Figure 58 is added. Before the "Save stop flag" in Figure 56, a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in Figure 58 is added. With this configuration, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state (starting from power-on (0)), information indicating that the stop condition is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state (starting from power-on (0)), the stop state can be established after the game ends in the bonus game state.

Furthermore, in Figure 58, this method can also be applied when the point with the lowest number of balls won by the player is set as the baseline (0), and the game is considered to have stopped if the difference in the number of game balls from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

For example, even if the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000 (using the lowest point of the player's winnings during bonus gameplay as the baseline (0)), information indicating that the conditions for stopping play have been met will not be stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000 (using the lowest point of the player's winnings during bonus gameplay as the baseline (0)), the stop state can be activated after the bonus gameplay ends.

<Stopping out monitoring process (a subtraction version of the stop-out difference counter; the stop-out state is determined by the stop-out difference counter after the bonus game state ends)>
Figure 59 is a modified version of Figures 57 and 58. Similar to Figure 58, Figure 59 is identical in that, if the number of game media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state (starting from power-on (0)), the game is stopped after the game ends. However, unlike Figure 58, it does not have a temporary stop flag storage area.

Furthermore, the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the "stop-play" state is set to 19001. In other words, when the power is turned on from a state where it was off, without changing any settings, the initial value stored in the stop-play difference counter is 19001. Similarly, when the power is turned on from a state where it was off, with a setting change, the initial value stored in the stop-play difference counter is 19001.

The following explanation will focus on the differences between this figure and Figure 58.

First, the "Stopping Difference Counter = Specific Value?" check determines whether the value stored in the stopping difference counter is the specific value. For example, if the specific value is set to 0, the check determines whether the value stored in the stopping difference counter is 0. Note that while Figure 58 uses 0 as the specific value for explanation, any value other than 0 is acceptable as long as it is a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the gameplay that determines "YES" based on the "Stopping Difference Counter = Specific Value?" is the gameplay during the bonus game state, starting from power-on (0), after the number of game media has exceeded 19,000, and before the "Stopping Flag Save" is executed. Details will be explained later.

The "Re-play activation symbol display?" is identical to the "Re-play activation symbol display?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The "stop-loss difference counter set" is identical to the "stop-loss difference counter set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore its explanation is omitted.

The statement "Number of inputs < Number of payouts?" is identical to "Number of inputs < Number of payouts?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The phrase "Exceeding the upper limit?" is identical to "Exceeding the upper limit?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The "Upper Limit Set" is identical to the "Upper Limit Set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore, its explanation is omitted.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the calculation result (number of tokens inserted - number of tokens dispensed) (the value stored in the A register) in the "Upper Limit Exceeded?" operation is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the calculation is performed as "value stored in the stop-loss difference counter" - "value of the difference in the game medium used in the current game." If this calculation result falls below a specific value, that specific value is stored in the HL register.

In "difference update," the complement refers to the smallest number that carries over beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value in the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, if the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter (the value in the HL register) is 65534, and the number inserted is 3 and the number withdrawn is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, in the "difference update," the first step is to derive the complement of 249, which is 7. Then, by calculating 65534 - 7, 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that the result of the calculation 65534 - 7 is not less than 0 (there is no carry-over), so the carry flag is 0.

When there is no carry-over (when the carry flag is 0), the process of updating the HL register value to a specific value (0) is not performed. In other words, the value of the HL register is the result of the calculation: "the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter" - "the difference value of the game medium used in the current game."

Furthermore, for example, if the value stored in the stop-loss counter (the value in the HL register) is 2, and the number of insertions is 3 and the number of withdrawals is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, in the "stop-loss counter update," the complement of 249, which is 7, is derived first. Then, by performing the calculation 2 - 7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 - 7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (due to a carry), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, due to the carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

When a carry occurs (when the carry flag is 1), the value of the HL register is updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register becomes the specific value (0).

The "stop-loss difference counter update" is identical to the "stop-loss difference counter update" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore, the explanation is omitted.

The "Difference > 19000?" check determines whether the difference in the game tokens, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it checks whether the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is the specific value (0), the result is YES; otherwise, the result is NO.

Furthermore, the case in which the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is a specific value (0) is when: a) the result of the calculation performed by "Difference Update" ("Value stored in the stop-loss difference counter" - "Difference value of the game medium used in the current game") falls below a specific value (0); or b) the result of the calculation performed by "Difference Update" ("Value stored in the stop-loss difference counter" - "Difference value of the game medium used in the current game") becomes a specific value (0).

Specifically, (a) above corresponds to the case where the difference in the number of game media, starting from the power-on point (0), becomes greater than 19001, and (b) above corresponds to the case where the difference in the number of game media, starting from the power-on point (0), becomes 19001.

In other words, with "Difference > 19000?", it's possible to determine whether the difference in the game tokens, starting from power-on (0), exceeds 19000 based on whether the value stored in the stop-loss difference counter is a specific value (0).

Furthermore, by storing 19001 as the initial value when powering on without changing settings, or when powering on with setting changes, a value equivalent to -46534 as the difference in game media, with power-on as the starting point (0), can be stored. For example, if the initial value is 19001, a situation where the stop-loss difference counter value is 49001 means that the difference in game media, with power-on as the starting point (0), is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19001 as the initial value, which corresponds to the difference in the number of game media used to reach the stop-play state, it is possible to determine whether the difference in the number of game media used, starting from power-on, exceeds 19000 by checking whether the stop-play difference counter value is "0" or not, thereby reducing the program capacity. Furthermore, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -46534 as the difference in the number of game media used, starting from power-on. While 19001 is used as an example, any value other than 19001 that has a similar effect can be used as the initial value.

The "Bonus Game Status?" is the same as the "Bonus Game Status?" in Figure 58, so some explanation is omitted. Note that if "Bonus Game Status?" is determined to be YES, the "Save Stop Flag" operation is not performed, and the stop monitoring process is executed instead. In other words, if "Bonus Game Status?" is determined to be YES, a specific value (0) is stored in the stop difference counter, and with no information indicating that the stop condition has been met stored in the stop flag storage area, the next game (a game during the bonus game status) can be played.

In other words, when a specific value (0) is stored and the next game is played, and the stop-loss monitoring process is executed, the first judgment of the stop-loss monitoring process, "Stop-loss difference counter = specific value?", will be judged as YES. That is, if, during a bonus game state, the number of game media (starting from power-on (0)) exceeds 19,000, and "Stop-loss flag saving" has not been performed, the "Stop-loss difference counter = specific value?" will be judged as YES, and the system will determine whether or not it is in a bonus game state without performing processes such as "Stop-loss difference counter update".

The "Save Stop Flag" function is identical to the "Save Stop Flag" function in Figure 58 (Figure 57), therefore, its explanation is omitted.

As described above, the stop-out monitoring process shown in Figure 59 does not require a temporary stop-out flag storage area (without putting pressure on the RWM storage area), and even if the number of game media (starting from power-on (0)) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

Furthermore, if the number of game tokens (starting from power-on, or 0) exceeds 19,000 during a bonus round, the game can be stopped even if the number of game tokens (starting from power-on, or 0) in the game that ended the bonus round falls below 19,000. This configuration allows for the provision of a gaming machine that does not allow players to exploit any strategic elements.

Furthermore, in the stop-loss monitoring process shown in Figure 59, since there is no temporary stop-loss flag storage area, if the number of game media (starting from power-on (0)) exceeds 19,000 during a bonus game state, and a specific value is stored in the stop-loss difference counter, and then a power outage occurs during a predetermined game in the bonus game state, followed by a power-on without any setting changes, the stop-loss difference counter will reset from the specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), and therefore the game will not enter a stop-loss state after the bonus game state ends.

In other words, if a power outage occurs during a bonus round after the number of game tokens (starting from power-on at 0) exceeds 19,000, the game will not be stopped if the power is subsequently turned back on and the bonus round continues from where it left off. This configuration prevents players from mistakenly believing that the game has been stopped due to a power outage during the bonus round.

Although Figure 59 was explained as a modified example of Figures 57 and 58, it can also be applied as a modified example of Figure 56.

Specifically, in Figure 59, the initial value was set to 19001, which is the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that trigger the stop-loss state. However, when applying the modified version shown in Figure 56, the initial value should be set to "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop-loss difference counter" minus "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that trigger the stop-loss state." For example, if the memory area of the stop-loss difference counter is 2 bytes, then "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop-loss difference counter" is 65535, and "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that trigger the stop-loss state" is 19001, resulting in an initial value of 46534.

Furthermore, while the specific value is set to 0 in Figure 59, when applying the modified example of Figure 56, the specific value should be set to 65535.

As described above, the initial values and specific values in Figure 59 can be set to any predetermined values.

Furthermore, while Figure 59 provides a specific example, the processing order and content are not limited to this. Even if the number of game media (starting from power-on (0)) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, without requiring a temporary stop flag storage area (and thus without burdening the RWM storage area), it is sufficient if the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

Furthermore, in Figure 59, this method can also be applied when the point with the lowest number of balls won by the player is set as the baseline (0), and the game is considered to have stopped if the difference in the number of game balls from that baseline exceeds 19,000.

For example, if the lowest point in a player's winnings during a bonus round is used as the baseline (0), and the number of game tokens exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus round ends. However, if the power is turned off during a bonus round and then turned back on without any setting changes, the stop-loss counter will reset from a specific value to its initial value (the bonus round continues), thus preventing the game from stopping after the bonus round ends.

<Example 1 of the configuration related to the number of bets indicator lamp 25 and the number of payouts indicator>
The configuration of the bed count indicator lamp 25 applicable to this embodiment will be described.
Figures 61 to 63 show an example of a configuration relating to the bet count indicator lamp 25 and the payout count indicator applicable to this embodiment. In Figures 61 to 63, "paying out" refers to the period from the start to the end of the payout process, and "payout count not displayed" may refer to a situation where the payout count indicator is off (nothing is displayed), a situation where a predetermined display (for example, "0") is displayed on the payout count indicator, a situation where information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error is displayed on the payout count indicator in a predetermined recoverable error state, or a situation where information corresponding to the set value or information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, in Figures 61 to 63, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated with "3" or more credits, a bet of 3 coins is placed, one of the push-order bells is hit, a high-value bell is awarded, and a game value of 10 coins is paid out.

In Figure 61, first, at the timing shown in Figure 61(1), the MAX bet switch 18 is operated to place three bets, causing the 1st bet lamp 25a, 2nd bet lamp 25b, and 3rd bet lamp 25c to light up. While the 1st bet lamp 25a, 2nd bet lamp 25b, and 3rd bet lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, they may also be configured to light up in the order of 1st bet lamp 25a → 2nd bet lamp 25b → 3rd bet lamp 25c.

Subsequently, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reel begins to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 61(2).

Subsequently, upon the player's stop operation, all reels stop at the timing shown in Figure 61(3). The payout process begins with the entry of a high-payout bell, and the payout indicator displays "10" as the payout amount (the display may be configured to update by 1 at a speed visible to the player, such as "0→1→2→...→9→10", or it may be configured to display only the payout amount, such as "0→10"). Also at the timing shown in Figure 61(3), a specific timer begins measuring the illumination time of the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c and the display time of the payout amount on the payout indicator. This specific timer is a decrement timer; when the timer reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.

Subsequently, the payout process is completed at the timing shown in Figure 61(4).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in Figure 61(5), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0") (i.e., when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped), the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout display on the payout indicator is hidden.

In the example shown in Figure 61, after a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are turned off, and the payout display on the payout indicator is hidden.

This configuration prevents a player from mistakenly believing that an empty machine is already being used and thus avoiding playing.

<Example 2 of the configuration related to the number of beds indicator lamp 25 and the number of payouts indicator>
Figure 62 shows an example in which a predetermined recovery error (such as errors related to the selector (medal stagnation error, medal reverse flow error, medal passage time error), errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper stagnation error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc.) occurred during the measurement of a predetermined time after all reels had stopped.

In Figure 62, first, at the timing shown in Figure 62(1), the MAX bet switch 18 is operated to place three bets, causing the 1st bet lamp 25a, 2nd bet lamp 25b, and 3rd bet lamp 25c to light up. While the 1st bet lamp 25a, 2nd bet lamp 25b, and 3rd bet lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, they may also be configured to light up in the order of 1st bet lamp 25a → 2nd bet lamp 25b → 3rd bet lamp 25c.

Subsequently, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reel begins to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 62(2).

Subsequently, upon the player's stop operation, all reels stop at the timing shown in Figure 62(3). The payout process begins with the entry of a high-stakes bell, and the payout indicator displays "10" as the payout amount. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 62(3), a specific timer starts measuring a predetermined time (e.g., 1 minute).

Subsequently, the payout process is completed at the timing shown in Figure 62(4).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in Figure 62(5), a predetermined recoverable error occurs, resulting in an error state, and the payout display on the payout counter disappears. At this time, the payout counter is configured to display information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error. For example, if it's a hopper empty error, "HE" is displayed. Furthermore, the system is configured to keep the 1-bet lamps 25 to 3-bet lamps 25c continuously lit even during the predetermined recoverable error. Additionally, the system is configured to continue measuring a predetermined time using a specific timer even during the predetermined recoverable error.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in Figure 62(6), the predetermined recovery error is cleared, the system returns to a normal state, and "10" is displayed again as the payout quantity on the payout display.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in Figure 62(7), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are turned off, and the payout display on the payout indicator is hidden.

Furthermore, while Figure 62 shows the case where the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined recovery error has been cleared, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during a predetermined recovery error, even during the predetermined recovery error, when the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c will turn off. After the predetermined recovery error is cleared, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c will remain off, and the payout indicator will remain hidden without displaying the payout again.

As shown in the example in Figure 62, the system is configured to continue measuring a predetermined time using a specific timer even during a predetermined recoverable error. Furthermore, even during a predetermined recoverable error, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain illuminated until the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. The payout indicator, during a predetermined recoverable error, hides the payout display and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error. If the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the predetermined recoverable error, the indicator remains hidden after the predetermined recoverable error is resolved. If the value of the specific timer does not reach a predetermined value during the predetermined recoverable error, the payout display is re-displayed after the predetermined recoverable error is resolved, and the payout display is hidden once the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value.

This configuration allows for proper error notification when a predetermined recoverable error occurs, and maintains the illumination of the bet count indicator lamp 25, thereby preserving the notification of the previous game's bet count. Furthermore, even after the predetermined recoverable error is resolved and the payout is displayed again, excessive payout figures are prevented.

Furthermore, if a predetermined recoverable error occurs and the system enters an error state, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit, the payout indicator hides the payout display and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and then, once the predetermined recoverable error is cleared, the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer resumes from where it left off, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit, "10" is displayed again as the payout, and then, once the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout display on the payout indicator disappears. In this case, it should be noted that even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. Specifically, during a predetermined recovery error, even if a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since all reels actually stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit.

This configuration allows the system to display the bet amount and payout amount from the previous game for an appropriate period of time, even if an error occurs before a predetermined time has elapsed after all the reels have stopped.

Furthermore, if a predetermined recoverable error occurs and the system enters an error state, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, the payout indicator hides the payout display and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error. After the predetermined recoverable error is cleared, the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer is restarted, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c light up again, and "10" is displayed again as the payout. After the measurement of the predetermined time is restarted and the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout display on the payout indicator is hidden. In this case, even if a predetermined amount of time has actually elapsed since all the reels stopped at the time the predetermined recoverable error is cleared, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
This configuration allows for the appropriate notification of the type of error based on the payout amount during an error, and also allows for the appropriate notification of the bet amount and payout amount from the previous game to the player.

Furthermore, if a predetermined recoverable error occurs and the system enters an error state, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c are turned off, the payout indicator displays the payout count but hides the payout count and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and then, once the predetermined recoverable error is cleared, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain off, and the payout count display on the payout indicator remains hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting patterns of the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c and the payout indicator can be kept constant after the error is cleared.

<Example 3 of the configuration related to the number of bets indicator lamp 25 and the number of payouts indicator>
Figure 63 shows an example where the system transitions to setting confirmation mode during a predetermined time measurement after all reels have stopped. In this embodiment, the system is configured to transition to setting confirmation mode when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and no bets have been placed.

In Figure 63, first, at the timing shown in Figure 63(1), the MAX bet switch 18 is operated to place three bets, causing the 1st bet lamp 25a, 2nd bet lamp 25b, and 3rd bet lamp 25c to light up. While the 1st bet lamp 25a, 2nd bet lamp 25b, and 3rd bet lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, they may also be configured to light up in the order of 1st bet lamp 25a → 2nd bet lamp 25b → 3rd bet lamp 25c.

Subsequently, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reel begins to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 63(2).

Subsequently, upon the player's stop operation, all reels stop at the timing shown in Figure 63(3). The payout process begins with the entry of a high-stakes bell, and the payout indicator displays "10" as the payout amount. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 63(3), a specific timer starts measuring a predetermined time (e.g., 1 minute).

Subsequently, the payout process is completed at the timing shown in Figure 63(4).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in Figure 63(5), the system switches to the setting confirmation mode. The 1-bet lamp 25a, 2-bet lamp 25b, and 3-bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout indicator maintains the payout display. Furthermore, when the system switches to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in Figure 63(6), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the 1-bet lamp 25a, 2-bet lamp 25b, and 3-bet lamp 25c remain lit, while the payout indicator continues to display the payout number. Furthermore, once the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer resumes.

Subsequently, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing shown in Figure 63(7), the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout display on the payout indicator disappears. It should be noted that, in this case, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit, and the payout indicator maintains its payout display, until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit, and the payout indicator maintains its payout display.

As shown in the example in Figure 63, the machine is configured to interrupt the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer during the setting confirmation mode, and to resume the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer from where it left off when the setting confirmation mode ends. Furthermore, even during the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit, and the payout indicator maintains the display of the payout. After the setting confirmation mode ends, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout display on the payout indicator is hidden.
It should be noted that even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c will remain lit until a specific timer value reaches a predetermined value, and the payout display on the payout indicator will not be hidden. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels stopped, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c will remain lit, and the payout display on the payout indicator will not be hidden.

This configuration allows the notification of the bet amount and payout amount from the previous game to be maintained even while the settings are being checked.

Furthermore, even during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer may be continued, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c may remain lit, and the payout indicator may be configured to hide the payout display and show information corresponding to the set value (such as displaying a number corresponding to the set value, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and also lighting up DP on the payout indicator, or displaying a number corresponding to the set value along with an alphabet such as A or C).
In this case, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c will remain lit until the setting confirmation mode ends, and information corresponding to the set value will be displayed on the payout indicator. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c will turn off, and the payout indicator will be turned off.
Furthermore, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout count indicator may be configured to display the payout count again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout count display on the payout count indicator is hidden.

This configuration allows for the continuous notification of the previous game's bet amount even during the settings confirmation process, and prevents the payout display from showing an excessive number of payouts after the settings confirmation mode ends.

Furthermore, even during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time using a specific timer may be continued, the 1-bed lamps 25a to 3-bed lamps 25c may remain lit, and the payout indicator may be configured to display a message corresponding to a door open error.
In this case, even while in setting confirmation mode, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bed lamp 25a to the 3-bed lamp 25c may be turned off, the payout indicator may maintain the display corresponding to the door open error, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1-bed lamp 25a to the 3-bed lamp 25c will remain off, and the payout indicator may be turned off.
Furthermore, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout count indicator may be configured to display the payout count again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout count display on the payout count indicator is hidden.

This configuration allows for the continuous notification of the previous game's bet amount even during the settings confirmation process, and prevents the payout display from showing an excessive number of payouts after the settings confirmation mode ends.

Furthermore, when the system enters the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared). During the setting confirmation mode, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c remain lit, and information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the payout indicator. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off, and the payout indicator becomes invisible.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting patterns of the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c and the payout indicator can be kept constant after the setting confirmation mode ends.

In the examples shown in Figures 61 to 63, the trigger for starting the measurement of a specific timer is set to the stopping of all reels. However, it is not limited to this; it could also be set to the start of the payout process or the completion of the payout process. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the system so that the measurement of a specific timer, which measures a predetermined time, starts at a predetermined timing after at least all reels have stopped.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in Figures 61 to 63, a specific timer is used to measure the illumination time of the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c and the display time of the payout count indicator. However, the system is not limited to this configuration; a first timer for measuring the illumination time of the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c and a second timer for measuring the display time of the payout count indicator may be provided separately. In this case, the time until the 1-bet lamps 25a to 3-bet lamps 25c turn off may be configured to be the same as the time until the payout count display on the payout count indicator disappears, or they may be configured to be different.

<<Configuration of the normal bet count indicator lamp 25>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the bet count indicator lamp 25 during normal operation. Note that "normal operation" refers to any situation where gameplay can proceed, excluding settings confirmation mode, settings change mode, and error states.
(1) The lights will turn off when it is determined that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since all the reels stopped.
(2) The lights remain lit even after a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels stopped.
<<Configuration of the bet count indicator lamp 25 during setting confirmation mode>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the bet count indicator lamp 25 during the setting confirmation mode.
(1) The light remains on even in setting confirmation mode, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer continues even in setting confirmation mode, and the light turns off when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, even if in setting confirmation mode.
(2) The light remains lit even during the setting confirmation mode, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer continues during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the light turns off when the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the light turns off when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(3) The light remains lit even during the setting confirmation mode. When the system switches to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed, and the light turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(4) The light remains lit even during the setting confirmation mode. When the system switches to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, and the light turns off when the setting confirmation mode ends.
(5) The light remains lit even during the setting confirmation mode. When the system switches to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer starts anew, and the light turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(6) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the light turns off. During setting confirmation mode, the system continues to measure a predetermined time using a specific timer. If the setting confirmation mode is terminated after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light remains off even after the setting confirmation mode is terminated. If the setting confirmation mode is terminated before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light turns on again when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(7) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the light turns off, interrupting the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the light turns on again, resuming the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer. After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light turns off.
(8) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the light turns off, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, and the light remains off even after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(9) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the light turns off, ending the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the light turns on again, starting the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer. After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light turns off.

<<Configuration of the bed count indicator lamp 25 during a specified error>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the bet count indicator lamp 25 during a predetermined error.
(1) The light remains lit even during a specified error, and the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer continues even during a specified error, and the light turns off when the specific timer reaches a specified value, even if a specified error is occurring.
(2) The light remains lit even during a specified error, and the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer continues even during a specified error. If the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light turns off when the specified error is cleared. If the specified error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light turns off when the specific timer reaches a specified value after the specified error is cleared.
(3) The light remains lit even during a predetermined error. When a predetermined error occurs, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted. After the predetermined error is cleared, the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed, and the light turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(4) The light remains lit even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer ends, and the light turns off when the specified error is cleared.
(5) The light remains lit even during a specified error. When a specified error occurs, the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer ends. After the specified error is cleared, the measurement of a specified time by the specific timer starts again. The light then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(6) The light turns off when a predetermined error occurs, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer continues even when a predetermined error occurs. If the predetermined error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the predetermined error, the light remains off even after the predetermined error is cleared. If the predetermined error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the predetermined error, the light turns on again when the predetermined error is cleared, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(7) When a predetermined error occurs, the light turns off, interrupting the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer. When the predetermined error is cleared, the light turns on again, resuming the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer. After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light turns off.
(8) When a predetermined error occurs, the light turns off, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, and the light remains off even after the predetermined error is cleared.
(9) When a predetermined error occurs, the light turns off, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, the light turns on again when the predetermined error is cleared, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer starts anew, and then the light turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.

The bed number indicator lamp 25 may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations.
(1) When the demo screen is displayed (2) When the settlement process is started (3) When the settlement process is completed (4) When the menu screen is displayed (5) When the menu screen is closed

<<Configuration of the payout display during normal operation>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the payout display during normal operation. Note that "normal operation" refers to any situation where gameplay can proceed, excluding settings confirmation mode, settings change mode, and error states.
(1) The display will be hidden once it is determined that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since all the reels stopped.
(2) The display of the number of payouts will remain active even after a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels stopped.
<<Configuration of the payout display during setting confirmation mode>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the payout display during the setting confirmation mode.
(1) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even in setting confirmation mode, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer continues even in setting confirmation mode, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, it is hidden even in setting confirmation mode.
(2) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer continues even during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the display will be hidden when the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the display will be hidden when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(3) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even while in setting confirmation mode. When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is resumed, and the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(4) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even while in setting confirmation mode. When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, and the display is hidden when setting confirmation mode ends.
(5) The display of the number of payouts is maintained even while in setting confirmation mode. When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer starts anew, and the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(6) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the display of the number of payouts ends, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer continues even during setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode ends after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during setting confirmation mode, the display will be hidden after the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode ends before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during setting confirmation mode, the number of payouts will be displayed again after the setting confirmation mode ends, and will be hidden once the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(7) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the display of the number of payouts ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, the display of the number of payouts ends again, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer resumes, and then the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(8) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the display of the number of payouts ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, and the display is hidden after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(9) When the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the display of the number of payouts ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, the display of the number of payouts ends again when the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer starts anew, and then the display disappears when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
In addition, in (6) through (9) above, the display may be hidden during the setting confirmation mode, a display corresponding to the setting value may be shown, a display corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be shown, or a display corresponding to the door open error may be shown.

<<Configuration of the payout display during a specified error>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the payout indicator during a predetermined error.
(1) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error will be shown, and the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer will continue even during the predetermined error. If the predetermined error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the predetermined error, the display will be hidden once the predetermined error is cleared. If the predetermined error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the predetermined error, the number of payouts will be displayed again once the predetermined error is cleared, and then the display will be hidden once the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(2) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error is changed, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is interrupted, the number of payouts is displayed again when the predetermined error is cleared, the measurement of a predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed, and then the display is turned off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.
(3) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error will be shown, and once the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer has finished and the predetermined error has been cleared, the display will disappear.
(4) When a predetermined error occurs, the display corresponding to the predetermined error will be changed, the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer will end, the number of payouts will be displayed again when the predetermined error is cleared, the measurement of the predetermined time by a specific timer will start anew, and then the display will be hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value.

The payout indicator may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations.
(1) When the demo screen is displayed (2) When the settlement process is started (3) When the settlement process is completed (4) When the menu screen is displayed (5) When the menu screen is closed

The configurations of the bet count indicator lamp 25 and the payout count indicator, as described above, can be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration regarding the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member>
The configuration relating to the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member applicable to this embodiment will be described.

Figure 64 shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are mounted on the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 64, a chute member is provided on the back surface of the front panel PS2, adjacent to the medal selector 34, to guide medals permitted to pass through by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44.

Here, the medal selector 34 requires regular maintenance, such as checking the sensor for any abnormalities when an error occurs with the selector, or removing dirt accumulated from passing medals. Therefore, in this embodiment, a gap is provided between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to facilitate maintenance work on the medal selector 34.

Furthermore, on the back of the front panel PS2, below the medal selector 34, there is a return member that returns medals dispensed from the hopper 44 and medals removed from the medal selector 34 to the receiving tray 28 via the medal dispensing port 45.
The return component has a medal return receiving port (sometimes also called the entrance to the return passage) for receiving medals removed from the medal selector 34, and a medal dispensing receiving port for receiving medals dispensed from the hopper 44.
Furthermore, when the return member is attached to the front panel PS2, a return passage is formed in the space between the return member and the front panel PS2.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 64, the chute member has a medal guide passage for guiding medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44. The medal guide passage has a gentle downward slope from upstream (towards the medal selector 34) to downstream (towards the hopper 44). In addition, the medal guide passage has a shape that curves gently by approximately 90 degrees from about the middle of the passage toward the hopper 44 in order to guide medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 toward the hopper 44.
Furthermore, the chute member has a bottom portion that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage, an outer wall portion that forms the outer side surface of the medal guide passage, and an inner wall portion that forms the inner side surface of the medal guide passage, with the top of the medal guide passage being open. In addition, the chute member has a stepped portion at approximately the middle of the medal guide passage on the bottom portion, where the upstream side is higher than the downstream side.
Furthermore, the chute member has a fixing portion for securing the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2 with a predetermined locking component (screw). The fixing portion is provided in a position that protrudes upward from near the end of the outer wall on the side of the medal selector 34, and when the chute member is attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2, the fixing portion and the predetermined locking component are configured to be located above the medal guide passage.

Furthermore, the predetermined locking component that secures the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2 is made of metal and is configured to conduct electricity. If the predetermined locking component comes loose and the chute member enters the auxiliary tank, the full-capacity detection electrode of the auxiliary tank 46 can be energized via the predetermined locking component.
Furthermore, the designated locking parts are made of magnetic materials such as iron and are designed to be attracted to magnets. On the other hand, the tokens used in the game are made of stainless steel and are designed not to be attracted to magnets.
With this configuration, even if a predetermined locking part comes loose due to aging or actions such as a player hitting the front panel surface of the PS2 and falls into the hopper 44 or auxiliary tank 46, the magnet allows only the predetermined locking part to be easily removed.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member to secure it to the back surface of the front panel PS2. By hooking the claws of the locking portion onto the front panel PS2, the chute member is secured to the back surface of the front panel PS2. In this state, the chute member can be fixed to the back surface of the front panel PS2 using screws passed through the screw holes of the fixing portion. Therefore, even if the screws securing the chute member come loose, the chute member will not fall from the back surface of the front panel PS2.

Figures 65 and 66 illustrate the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

As shown in Figure 65, the upper edge of the return member, corresponding to the edge surrounding the return opening at the top of the return member, is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In other words, the return opening is not located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 65, when the thickness of the medal is "A", the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is "B", and the width of the upper edge is "C", the following configuration is satisfied.
(1) B > A
In other words, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is greater than the thickness of a single medal.
(2) B ≈ 2 × A
In other words, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is approximately equal to the thickness of two medals.
(3) C > A
In other words, the width of the upper edge is greater than the thickness of a single medal.
(4) C > B
In other words, the width of the upper edge is greater than the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Therefore, the system is configured to allow medals to be inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. Furthermore, since an upper edge is positioned vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, medals can be placed on the upper edge and retained in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 66, medals placed on the upper edge and inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will block the exit of the medal passage. Therefore, when medals are in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, medals inserted from the medal input slot 17 will collide with the medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member as they move from the exit of the medal passage towards the medal guide path of the chute member, causing them to stop and become stuck at the exit of the medal passage. At this time, the inserted medals will cause both the input sensor 1 and input sensor 2 to remain on (it may also be configured so that only input sensor 2 remains on), so the main control means will detect an error related to the selector, and a medal stagnation error will be reported as a selector-related error.

As shown in Figure 66, when an inserted medal collides with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and becomes stuck at the exit of the medal passage, the upper edge of the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is higher than the center of the inserted medal. Therefore, the inserted medal cannot pass over the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

With this configuration, it is not possible to directly detect the presence of a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. However, the notification of an error related to the selector allows for indirect detection of the presence of a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when a game parlor employee checks whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting errors related to the selector, if they insert medals into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member while inserting medals through the medal slot 17, the inserted medals will be prevented from passing through the exit of the medal passage by the medals placed in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. This creates a situation where the inserted medals remain detected by the insertion sensors 1 and 2, making it easy to check whether errors related to the selector are being properly detected.

As mentioned above, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute component is larger than the thickness of a single medal, so a medal placed in this gap by a game arcade employee will not get stuck and become impossible to remove.

Figure 67 shows the positional relationship between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the hopper 44, when the front panel PS2 is closed.

As shown in Figure 67, when the front panel PS2 is closed, the hopper 44 is positioned below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.
Therefore, even if a medal is resting on its upper edge and is trapped in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the front panel PS2 is closed, causing the medal to fall out due to the impact, the system is configured to allow the fallen medal to be stored in the hopper 44.

With this configuration, even if a store employee forgets that they placed a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member while checking whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting errors related to the selector, and closes the front panel PS2, causing the medal to fall, the fallen medal will not enter the medal return receiving port and be discharged from the medal payout port 45 into the receiving tray 28. Therefore, it is possible to prevent store employees from accidentally giving the medals they used for their work to players.

Furthermore, by lowering the position where the return component is attached, the system can be configured so that even when a medal rests on its upper edge and remains in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute component, the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute component does not block the medal passage (the top of the medal is positioned below the medal passage between the medal selector 34 and the chute component even when a medal is resting on its upper edge). This configuration allows a medal that has been inserted and permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to pass beyond the exit of the medal passage and through the medal guidance passage. With this configuration, even if a game parlor employee accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and it falls into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute component, it is still possible to insert medals, thus preventing disruption to the game.

Figure 68 illustrates the radius of the medal, the height of the medal guide aisle, the height of the step in the medal guide aisle, and the width of the medal guide aisle.

As described above, the medal guide passage is gently curved at approximately 90 degrees in order to guide the medals permitted to pass through by the medal selector 34 towards the hopper 44.
Therefore, medals permitted to pass through by the medal selector 34 will slow down as they pass through the medal guide passage by coming into contact with the outer and inner walls of the medal guide passage.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a stepped section is provided at approximately the middle of the medal guide passage on the bottom surface, where the upstream side is higher than the downstream side.
Furthermore, the system is configured so that when the medals are dropped as they pass over the stepped section, they can be accelerated as they come into contact with the outer and inner walls of the medal guide path, thus accelerating them.

This configuration allows the inserted medals to be stored in the hopper 44 without becoming stagnant in the medal guide passage, even when multiple medals are inserted at once through the medal slot 17.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 65, when the thickness of the medal is "A", as shown in Figure 68, when the radius of the medal is "D", the height of the medal guide passage is "E", the height of the step in the medal guide passage is "F", and the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", the configuration satisfies the following conditions.
(1) G > A
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide aisle is greater than the thickness of the medal.
(2) G < 2 × D
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide aisle is smaller than the diameter of the medal.
(3) F < D
In other words, the height of the step in the medal guideway is smaller than the radius of the medal.
(4) F < E
In other words, the height of the step in the medal guided walkway is less than the height of the medal guided walkway itself.

By configuring the system as described in (1) and (2) above, when a medal passes through the medal guidance pathway, it can roll through in an upright position without stopping lying on its side midway through the pathway.

Furthermore, by configuring the system as described in (3) and (4) above, the medals are accelerated by the stepped sections of the medal guide path, while preventing them from flying out of the path due to the impact of falling over the stepped sections. In addition to configurations (3) and (4), E > D (the height of the medal guide path is greater than the radius of the medal) may also be used. In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent medals from flying out of the path due to the impact of falling over the stepped sections.

Figure 69 illustrates the position and dimensions of the locking component (screw) used to secure the chute member when the chute member's fixing portion is secured to the front panel PS2.

As shown in Figure 69, when the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 with screws, a medal guide passage is located vertically below the screws that fix the chute member, and there is no medal return receiving port.
Therefore, even if the screw that secures the chute component comes loose and falls, the screw that secures the chute component will not come out of the receiving tray 28 through the return passage and the medal dispensing port 45 from the medal return receiving port.

This configuration prevents injuries such as cuts to the player's hand from forcefully gripping the screw securing the chute component along with the tokens, even if the screw comes loose and the component falls. It also prevents the screw securing the chute component from flying out of the game machine and getting lost due to the impact of the fall.

As mentioned above, the chute member is configured to be secured to the back surface of the front panel PS2 by its locking mechanism. Therefore, even if the screws securing the chute member come loose, the chute member will not fall from the back surface of the front panel PS2.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69, when the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", the total length of the screw (also referred to as the length in the longitudinal direction) is "H", and the diameter of the screw head (also referred to as the length in the transverse direction) is "I", the configuration satisfies the following conditions.
(1) G < H
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the total length of the screws that secure the chute component.
(2) G < I
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute component.

This configuration prevents the screws securing the chute component from coming loose and falling, thus preventing them from entering the medal guide path and thus preventing them from obstructing the passage of medals.

Furthermore, the configuration may satisfy both "G < H" and "G > I". That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured to be smaller than the total length of the screw securing the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head securing the chute member.

In this configuration, if the screw securing the chute component comes loose and falls, it could potentially get stuck in the medal guide channel. However, even if the screw does enter the guide channel, it will get caught and stopped midway, preventing the loosened screw from being lost.

Furthermore, the configuration may satisfy both "G > H" and "G > I". That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be greater than the total length of the screw securing the chute member and greater than the diameter of the screw head securing the chute member.

In this configuration, if the screw securing the chute component comes loose and falls, it will enter the medal guide passage. However, the loose screw will simply pass through the medal guide passage and fall, thus preventing it from obstructing the passage of medals.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fixing portion of the chute member is configured to protrude upward from the outer wall of the medal guide passage. However, this is not the only option; a recess may be provided in the outer wall of the medal guide passage toward the front panel PS2, and a screw hole may be provided in this recess to serve as the fixing portion. In this case, it is preferable that the depth of the recess be greater than the total length "H" of the screw that fixes the chute member. This configuration prevents the screw fixing the chute member from coming loose and entering the medal guide passage, thus preventing it from obstructing the passage of medals.

Furthermore, the medal slot 17 has a mounting section that allows multiple medals to be placed vertically on top of each other, and is configured to allow multiple medals placed vertically on the mounting section to be continuously inserted into the medal slot 17.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal is "A," the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G," and the number of medals that can be stacked vertically on the display area is "J," the system is configured such that "G < (A × J) ÷ 2." In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is configured to be less than half the thickness of the number of medals that can be stacked vertically on the display area.

Furthermore, when the return component is attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2, it may be configured so that its upper edge is gently sloped toward the hopper 44.
With this configuration, even if a medal rests on the upper edge and gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it will roll out. This prevents the medal stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member from obstructing the passage of the inserted medal, and also reduces the likelihood of errors related to the selector.

Figure 70 shows another configuration of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are mounted on the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment. While the size of the medal return opening differs from that in Figure 64, the other configurations are the same as in Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 70, the medal return receiving port is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, rather than at the upper edge.
In the example shown in Figure 70, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the medal return slot are designed to be larger than the diameter of the medal.
With this configuration, even if a store employee accidentally drops a medal while replenishing it and it gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it will still be discharged from the medal return receiving port through the return passage to the medal payout port 45 and into the tray 28. This prevents the medal stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member from obstructing the passage of inserted medals and also reduces the likelihood of errors related to the selector.

<Explanation regarding error history>
The display of error history applicable to this embodiment will be described.
The error history can be displayed on the LCD while in setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when entering setting confirmation mode, the administrator menu screen (sometimes also called the setting confirmation screen) is displayed on the LCD. This administrator menu screen displays multiple administrator menus, and one of the administrator menu items is "Error History". When "Error History" is selected by operating the sub-cross key switch 21, and the sub-switch 20 is operated (turned on), the error history is displayed on the LCD. In this embodiment, the system is configured to enter setting confirmation mode when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and the bed is not set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, upon receiving an error notification start command from the main control means, the sub-control means notifies the error, and the error history, including the error content and the time of the error occurrence, is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM controlled by the sub-control means. The information regarding the time of the error occurrence is acquired, for example, using the RTC (Real-Time Clock) function provided in the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the error history is not erased by power on/off or setting changes. The error history is also configured to store a predetermined number of entries (e.g., 120), and if this number is exceeded, the oldest error history entries are deleted first.

Furthermore, while this embodiment allows the display of error history during the setting confirmation mode, the system may also be configured to allow the display of error history during the setting change mode.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the error history is displayed on the LCD when the sub-switch 20 is operated on the administrator menu screen, or so that the error history is displayed on the LCD when the system transitions to the settings confirmation mode, or so that the LCD is used as a touch panel and the error history is displayed on the LCD when the error history item is touched on the administrator menu screen.

Furthermore, the operation sound output from speaker S when operating the sub-directional key switch 21 to select an item displayed on the administrator menu screen is configured to be different from the operation sound output from speaker S when operating the sub-directional key switch 21 to select an item displayed on the user menu screen.
Furthermore, the administrator menu screen may be configured to have different sounds output from the user menu screen by not outputting the operation sound of the sub-directional key switch 21. Also, the operation sound output from speaker S when the sub-directional key switch 21 is operated on the administrator menu screen may be configured to not be output at all on any screen other than the administrator menu screen. In addition, the user menu screen may be configured to output a predetermined background music (BGM) from speaker S, while the administrator menu screen may be configured to be silent with no BGM output.
This configuration makes it easy to recognize the difference between the user menu screen and the administrator menu screen, thus preventing administrator errors.

Figure 71 shows an example of an error history screen.
In Figure 71, "door open" corresponds to the door open signal being on, and "door closed" corresponds to the door open signal being off.

As shown in Figure 71, the error history screen displays each error along with the time it occurred.

Furthermore, the error history screen is configured to display entries in descending order, starting with the most recent.

Furthermore, opening/closing the front door, turning the power on/off, starting/ending setting changes, and starting/ending setting checks are not errors, but are configured to be displayed in the error history.

Furthermore, the system is configured to display the start and end points of each error, such as the occurrence and resolution of errors, the start and end of setting changes, and the start and end of setting checks, as part of the error history. However, it is not limited to this configuration; the system may also be configured to display only the start point of the error.

Furthermore, the error history is configured to display up to 12 entries per page, and the error history screen pages can be switched using the sub-directional key switch 21.

In this embodiment, although the "occurrence time" of each error is displayed on the error history screen as shown in Figure 71, "007 Medal retention error occurred 2021/11/11 10:01:01," in reality, the "time when notification of each error started" is stored in the error history as the "occurrence time" and displayed on the error history screen. Furthermore, the error details and occurrence time are stored in the error history not at the time the error occurred (the time the error was detected), but at the time the error notification started (the time the sub-control means received the error notification start command).

This configuration is used because, for example, errors may be detected while the reel is rotating, but the error notification may not begin immediately. In other words, there may be a time lag between error detection and error notification.
For example, if a predetermined error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the rotation of the reels in a game, the system is configured not to notify the player of the error at the time the error is detected (when the predetermined error occurs), but to enter a predetermined error state at a predetermined time after the game has ended (such as when all reels have stopped or when the payout process has been completed), preventing the game from continuing and notifying the player of the predetermined error. In this case, if the player leaves their seat while the reels are rotating and it takes about 3 minutes to stop all the reels, there will be a delay of about 3 minutes between the detection of the error and the notification of the error.
Even in such cases, by displaying the time the error notification started as the time the error occurred, there is no discrepancy between the timing of the error notification and the time the error occurred on the error history screen. This prevents the staff of the gaming parlor from mistakenly believing that there was a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud had occurred.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error is detected during the rotation of the reels in a game as described above, and the power is turned off before the end of the game, the power will be cut off before the end of the game, and the predetermined error and the time of its occurrence will not be stored in the error history. Subsequently, if the system transitions to the settings change mode after the power is restored, the initialization process in the settings change process will erase the information regarding the predetermined error, so the predetermined error will not be reported even after the settings change mode ends, and it will not be stored in the error history.
By configuring the system in this way, unreported errors are not stored in the error history and are not displayed on the error history screen. This ensures consistency between reported errors and the error history, preventing arcade staff from mistakenly believing that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, the error history screen may be configured to display error history in a predetermined color (e.g., red), while other history events (power on/off, setting change start/end, etc.) are displayed in a specific color (e.g., white or black).
By configuring it in this way, the error history can be displayed more prominently than other history entries, making it easier to review the error history.

Alternatively, instead of displaying the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting confirmations in the error history, a separate item called "Setting Change History" may be created, and the history of setting change start/ends and setting confirmation start/ends may be displayed in the setting change history along with the time.
This configuration simplifies the content displayed on the error history screen, preventing arcade staff from overlooking any errors or setting change history when reviewing it.

Additionally, the system may be configured to display a history of completed setting changes, such as "Setting Change Completed (6)" (where (6) indicates the setting value), allowing users to check the setting value set during the setting change process in the setting change history.
By configuring it in this way, if there is suspicion that a setting value has been illegally overwritten, it is possible to check the setting value set in the most recent setting change process, thereby confirming whether or not illegal activity has occurred.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to display the time elapsed since power-on, starting from the moment the power is turned on, in the error history. Specifically, if the errors occur in the order of "Power On" → "Door Open" → "Door Close" → "Medal Retention Error Occurred", the error history screen may be configured to display, from top to bottom (from the most recent history), as follows: "Medal Retention Error Occurred: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds elapsed" → "Door Close: 0 hours 0 minutes 10 seconds elapsed" → "Door Open: 0 hours 0 minutes 1 second elapsed" → "Power On: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds elapsed". The time elapsed since power-on is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation using the power-on time and the time each error occurred, which are stored in a predetermined memory area of the sub-control RAM.
This configuration allows for an intuitive understanding of the time elapsed between power-on and the occurrence of an error.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to display the time elapsed since the error occurred in the error history. If the errors occur in the following order: "Power On" → "Door Open" → "Door Close" → "Medal Retention Error Occurred"... the system may be configured to display the errors in the order from top to bottom (from the most recent history) as follows: "Medal Retention Error Occurred: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds ago" → "Door Close: 0 hours 9 minutes 50 seconds ago" → "Door Open: 0 hours 9 minutes 59 seconds ago" → "Power On: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds ago". The time elapsed since the error occurred is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation using the time each error occurred, which is stored in a predetermined memory area of the sub-control RAM, and the current time obtained by the RTC function.
This configuration allows for an intuitive understanding of the time elapsed since the error occurred.
In this configuration, it is preferable to display a message such as "More than the specified period has elapsed" if a predetermined period (e.g., 31 days) has passed since the error occurred.

Figure 72 shows an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is being displayed.
In Figure 72 (1), the front door is open, and "Start setting check" is displayed in 001 (latest error content).
After that, when the front door is closed, the door open signal is turned off, the error history is updated, and "Door Closed" is displayed in 001.
Afterward, when the front door is opened again, the door open signal is turned on, the error history is updated, and "Door Open" is displayed in 001.

In this manner, if the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed, the system is configured to update the error history related to the opening and closing of the front door in real time each time the opening or closing of the front door is detected, and the error history screen is also updated accordingly.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to accurately determine whether or not the error history display is working correctly.

Furthermore, while the error history screen is displayed, the error history may be updated each time the front door is opened or closed, but the error history screen may not be updated. The error history screen may then be updated when the display of the error history screen is terminated and the error history screen is displayed again.
By configuring it in this way, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while the error history is being checked. This prevents older error history from being unintentionally deleted from the error history screen when you want to check older error history.

Furthermore, while the error history screen is displayed, the system detects the opening/closing of the front door. However, if the opening/closing of the front door is detected within a predetermined time (approximately 1 minute) since the previous error history update, the system will not update the error history. If the predetermined time has elapsed since the previous error history update, the system will update the error history and the error history screen will also be updated.
In other words, the system may be configured such that opening and closing the front door while the error history screen is displayed does not register in the error history unless a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous error history update, and does register in the error history if the predetermined time has elapsed.
This configuration allows for accurate determination of whether the error history display is functioning correctly. Furthermore, opening and closing the front door before a predetermined time has elapsed since the error history update is not recorded in the error history, so even if the front door is opened and closed repeatedly unintentionally, old error history entries will not be erased from the error history screen.

Furthermore, while the error history screen is displayed, the system may be configured not to detect the opening/closing of the front door, or to detect it but not to store it as an error in the error history.
By configuring it in this way, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while the error history is being checked. This prevents older error history from being unintentionally erased by opening or closing the front door when you want to check older error history.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected (when the door open signal is turned on), a predetermined image is displayed on the LCD as a display corresponding to the door open error (such as "The door is open"), and "dE" is displayed on the dispensing count indicator, and a door open sound is output from speaker S. However, when the system switches to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the predetermined image is terminated and the output of the door open sound is stopped (or the volume is set to "0"). Note that the dispensing count indicator may be configured to continue displaying the door open error even after switching to the setting confirmation mode, or the display on the dispensing count indicator corresponding to the door open error may be configured to terminate when the system switches to the setting confirmation mode.
Alternatively, the system may be configured to continue outputting the door opening sound while in settings confirmation mode and the administrator menu screen is displayed, and to stop outputting the door opening sound when the error history screen is displayed.
This configuration allows you to configure the administrator menu and check the error history in settings confirmation mode in a quiet environment.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to continuously output the door opening sound from speaker S even while in settings confirmation mode or while the error history screen is displayed.
With this configuration, even if a store employee forgets to exit the settings change mode and leaves the gaming machine, they will be alerted by the sound of the door opening.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, "Time Setting" is provided as one of the setting items in the administrator menu. When "Time Setting" is selected by operating the sub-cross key switch 21, and the sub-switch 20 is operated (turned on), the time setting screen is displayed on the LCD, and the time can be changed on the time setting screen.

Figure 73 shows an example of a time setting screen.
Figure 73 shows an example where the time setting screen is displayed when the current time on the gaming machine is November 11, 2021, 11:11:11 AM.

As shown in Figure 73, when the time setting screen is displayed, the current time is shown on the LCD.
The time setting screen allows users to change the values of each item: "Year,""Month,""Day,""Hour,""Minute," and "Second." The time setting screen is displayed with the "Year" item initially selected. On the time setting screen, the cursor can be moved to the desired item by operating (pressing) the left and right switches of the sub-directional key switch 21. The value of the desired item can be changed by operating (pressing) the up and down switches of the sub-directional key switch 21. Finally, by operating the sub-switch 20, the change to the current time is confirmed, and the changed time is set as the current time.

Please note that while the current time displayed during the transition to the time setting screen is configured not to update even as time passes on the time setting screen, the internal mechanism continues to keep track of the current time.

Furthermore, when you confirm a changed time on the time setting screen, the system is configured to reset the current time's seconds to "0" before starting to count the current time.

Furthermore, the system is configured to detect the opening and closing of the front door even while the time is being set, and to record this in the error history. If the front door is opened before confirming the change to the current time on the time setting screen, the door open history is recorded based on the current time before the change, since the change to the current time has not been confirmed. Similarly, if the front door is closed before confirming the change to the current time on the time setting screen, the door closed history is recorded based on the current time before the change, since the change to the current time has not been confirmed.
By configuring it in this way, even if the time setting is terminated without confirming the change to the current time, the correct time can be stored as an error history.

Furthermore, the error history screen is configured to display errors in descending order, starting with the most recent one, according to the order in which they are stored in the error history. For example, suppose the first error occurs when the error history is not displayed, and the first error is reported at the time "t1". After the first error is resolved, the time setting screen is set to a time earlier than "t1" as the current time. Then, a second error occurs, and the second error is reported at the time "t2" (a time earlier than t1). In this case, the time of the first error is recorded as "t1" and the time of the second error is recorded as "t2" in the error history. However, the error history screen is configured to display the second error as the most recent error.
By configuring it in this way, the order of the error history cannot be intentionally changed by setting the time, thus ensuring that a record of fraudulent activity is reliably preserved.

Figure 74 is a list of error history display patterns for when multiple errors occur.
In the setting confirmation mode, errors are detected in the same way as when the reels are rotating, but no error notification is given. For example, if a predetermined error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined error is not notified at the time the predetermined error is detected (when the predetermined error occurs). Instead, the predetermined error is notified at a predetermined time after the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the error details and the time the error occurred (the time the error was notified) are stored as error history.
Furthermore, the system is configured so that operating the reset switch will not clear any errors while in the settings confirmation mode.

In Figure 74, "Checking" corresponds to the setting confirmation mode, while "Normal" corresponds to a state where error notification is possible when the reels are not rotating or the setting confirmation mode is not active. "Notify in Total" refers to the combined notification of multiple unnotified errors, for example, "Error 1 and Error 2 occurred." "Display in Total" refers to the error history when errors are reported in total, for example, "Error 1 and Error 2 occurred." Furthermore, "Error 1" and "Error 2" correspond to errors related to the hopper 44 and errors related to the selector, respectively, with Error 1 having a higher priority for error notification than Error 2.

Let's explain Pattern 1 in Figure 74.
First, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during verification, the system is configured to notify the first error after the setting verification mode ends, and then notify the second error once the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is recorded in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is configured to display the errors in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence from top to bottom (from the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during verification, the system is configured to notify the first error after the setting verification mode ends, and then notify the second error once the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is recorded in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is configured to display the errors in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence from top to bottom (from the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during normal operation, the system is configured so that the first error is reported immediately after it occurs, and then the second error is reported after the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is recorded in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is configured to display the errors in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence from top to bottom (from the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during normal operation, the system is configured so that the second error is reported immediately after it occurs, and then the first error is reported after the second error is resolved. In this case, the error history is recorded in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence, and the error history screen is configured to display the first error occurrence → second error occurrence from top to bottom (from the most recent history).

As shown in Pattern 1 of Figure 74, if multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation mode, the system is configured to notify the errors in order of priority after the setting confirmation mode ends, and if multiple errors occur during normal operation, the system is configured to notify the errors in the order in which they occurred.
Even with this configuration, the error history is stored in the order in which errors were reported, not in the order in which they occurred. This ensures consistency between the order in which errors were reported and the order in the error history, preventing arcade staff from mistakenly believing that there was a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud had occurred.

Let's explain pattern 2 in Figure 74.
First, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during verification, the system is configured to report the sum of the first and second errors after the setting verification mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error details of the first and second errors, and the error history screen is also configured to display the combined details of the first and second errors.

Next, if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during verification, the system is configured to report the combined first and second errors after the configuration verification mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error details of the first and second errors, and the error history screen is also configured to display the combined details of the first and second errors.

Furthermore, if multiple errors are reported together, the system may be configured to clear all reported errors with a single error clearing operation (operation of the reset switch), or it may be configured to require a separate error clearing operation for each reported error.

Furthermore, the case where errors occur in the order of first error → second error during normal operation, and the case where errors occur in the order of second error → first error during normal operation, are the same as Pattern 1 in Figure 74.

This configuration allows for the notification of multiple errors simultaneously, thus simplifying the error notification content.

For example, if errors occur in the order of third error → fourth error (with the same notification priority as the third error) during the settings confirmation mode, the third error will be notified after the settings confirmation mode ends, and then the fourth error will be notified once the third error is cleared. In this case, the error history is recorded in the order of third error occurrence → fourth error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the errors in the order of fourth error occurrence → third error occurrence from top to bottom (newest history first). Even if multiple errors occur during settings confirmation, if the notification priority of the errors is the same, the errors will be notified in the order they occurred, and recorded in the error history in the order they occurred.

Alternatively, the system may be configured not to detect errors while in configuration confirmation mode.
With this configuration, even if an error occurs, the error will not be reported, and therefore will not be recorded in the error history.
By configuring the system in this way, unannounced errors will remain in the error history, preventing administrators from mistakenly believing that a gaming machine has malfunctioned or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, if an error is detected while the error history screen is displayed in the settings confirmation mode, the system may be configured to update the error history in real time and also update the error history screen.
This configuration allows administrators to be immediately notified of errors even while viewing the error history.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a specific error occurs, the system may be configured to notify the specific error and the monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error. Note that the "specific error" is an error for which the detailed cause of the error can be identified, while the "monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error" is an error for which the detailed cause of the error cannot be identified.
For example, if a hopper congestion error occurs, the system may be configured to notify the system of a dispensing sensor monitoring error indicating that either a hopper congestion error or an error related to the hopper 44 has occurred.

Here, if a hopper stagnation error occurs during normal operation (when the reels are not rotating or the system is not in setting confirmation mode and error notification is possible), both a hopper stagnation error and a payout sensor monitoring error will be notified. The error history will record the payout sensor monitoring error first, followed by the hopper stagnation error. The error history screen may also be configured to display the error history from top to bottom (from the most recent history) as follows: hopper stagnation error first, followed by the payout sensor monitoring error.
Furthermore, when the hopper congestion error is cleared at this time, the error history may be stored in the order of cleared dispensing sensor monitoring error → cleared hopper congestion error, and the error history screen may also be configured to display them in order from top to bottom (from newest history to oldest) as cleared hopper congestion error → cleared dispensing sensor monitoring error.
In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs during normal operation and the error history screen is displayed after the hopper congestion error is cleared, the system may be configured to display the following in order from top to bottom (from the most recent history): hopper congestion error cleared → dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → hopper congestion error occurred → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurred.

On the other hand, if a hopper congestion error occurs while the error history screen is displayed in the settings confirmation mode, the hopper congestion error and the dispensing sensor monitoring error will be reported after the settings confirmation mode ends. The error history will then record the hopper congestion error first, followed by the dispensing sensor monitoring error. When the error history screen is displayed again, it may be configured to display the dispensing sensor monitoring error first, followed by the hopper congestion error, from top to bottom (from the most recent history).
Furthermore, when the hopper congestion error is cleared at this time, the error history may be stored in the order of cleared dispensing sensor monitoring error → cleared hopper congestion error, and the error history screen may also be configured to display the error history from top to bottom as cleared hopper congestion error → cleared dispensing sensor monitoring error.
In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs during the settings confirmation mode, and the error history screen is displayed again after the hopper congestion error is resolved, the system may be configured to display the following in order from top to bottom (from the most recent history): hopper congestion error resolved → dispensing sensor monitoring error resolved → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurred → hopper congestion error occurred.

By configuring it this way, if a specific error occurs while the error history screen is displayed, when the error history screen is displayed again, the specific error will be displayed from top to bottom (from the most recent history) → monitoring error of the sensor that detected the specific error. Therefore, even if someone tries to tamper with the system to find out the error type, the error type will not be instantly revealed.

Furthermore, this configuration ensures that the error resolution history on the error history screen remains the same both during normal operation and while the error history screen is displayed, thus allowing for accurate record-keeping.

<Time required for various processes>
In this embodiment, the time required for various processes to realize various operations will be explained.

In this embodiment, the clock frequency of the main control CPU included in the main control chip mounted on the main control board is 10 MHz. Therefore, the time required for one cycle, the smallest unit of the number of cycles indicating the execution time of various instructions, is 0.0001 ms. In other words, the time elapsed by instruction execution is determined according to the number of cycles required for instruction fetching and execution.

For example, in the LD instruction (LD_r, n) for storing the value n in register r, the number of cycles is 2, meaning that 0.0002 ms elapses when this LD instruction is executed.

Executing a software module consisting of multiple instructions requires the sum of the cycle counts specified for each instruction; therefore, the cycle count is an important parameter when creating a software module.

<<Explanation regarding the control of the bed count indicator lamp>>
Here, regarding the process of lighting the bet count indicator lamp, we will explain the case where, in a predetermined game state where 3 bets have been made and a predetermined game has been started, a replay is determined as the result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, and 3 bets are automatically placed as a process to grant a replay after the predetermined game has ended.

The illumination of the bet count indicator lamps is controlled by dynamic illumination control. Specifically, the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is 2.235 ms, and the illuminated location is changed with each interrupt processing, completing a full cycle of illuminated locations over multiple interrupt processing cycles (five interrupt processing cycles in this embodiment). For example, if the LED display counter value is 1, the upper and lower digits of the credit count indicator are illuminated, and other LEDs are not illuminated; if the LED display counter value is 2, the upper and lower digits of the acquired coins indicator are illuminated, and other LEDs are not illuminated; if the LED display counter value is 3, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are illuminated, and other LEDs are not illuminated; if the LED display counter value is 4, the replay lamp is illuminated, and other LEDs are not illuminated; and if the LED display counter value is 5, the start lamp and the coin insertion ready lamp are illuminated, and other LEDs are not illuminated.

By using dynamic lighting control for all lamps managed by the main control unit, power consumption and lamp wear can be reduced compared to static lighting, where the lamps are always lit. While dynamic lighting control causes the lamps to blink rapidly, the cycle is designed so that the lamps are lit again before they completely turn off, giving the impression of continuous illumination. In other words, 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts) after a predetermined lamp (e.g., 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, 3-bed lamp) is turned off via interrupt processing is still before it has completely turned off. Approximately 20 ms is required for a predetermined lamp to completely turn off after it has been turned off.

Note that the combination of LED display counter value and target lamp is just an example; the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp do not necessarily need to be lit when the LED display counter value is the same (for example, the 1-bet lamp might light up when the LED display counter value is 1, the 2-bet lamp when the LED display counter value is 2, and the 3-bet lamp when the LED display counter value is 3). Even when the lamps are lit using such dynamic lighting control, it will be treated as "lit" in this context.

Alternatively, the illumination of the bet count indicator lamps may be controlled using static illumination control. In this case, while the 1st to 3rd bet lamps are illuminated, the values in the RWM area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps will not become 0 via interrupt processing. However, similar to dynamic illumination control, when turning off the 1st to 3rd bet lamps, the values in the RWM area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps will be stored as 0 via interrupt processing. Furthermore, similar to dynamic illumination control, it takes approximately 20ms from the time the values in the RWM area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps are stored as 0 via interrupt processing until the bet lamps are completely turned off.

During the specified gameplay described above, the bet count indicator lamp remains continuously lit. In other words, during a game started with a 3-bet, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are all lit. When the specified gameplay ends, the game completion check process shown in Figure 9 is executed. Note that the game completion check process is sometimes referred to as the process related to the end of one game. Furthermore, the game value input process executed afterward is sometimes referred to as the process related to the start of one game. Also, when referring to either the game completion check process or the game value input process, it may be referred to as the specified process executed at a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped.

Here, since there are multiple possible patterns for the illumination of the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamps after the end of a predetermined game, each pattern will be explained below.

<<Pattern 1: In the game end check process, the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted resets the values of the memory areas for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM to 0 (initialization). Then, in the automatic insertion process included in the game value insertion process, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps light up simultaneously.>>

During the game end check process, the values in the RWM's memory area for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights are reset to 0 (initialized). This process clears the data for the number of coins inserted. By resetting the RWM area for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights to 0, the system can then illuminate the appropriate bet lights for the next automatically inserted coins.

Furthermore, even if the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM memory area used for the illumination indicators of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 0, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps will not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt processing controls the illumination of various LEDs. The interrupt processing checks the values in the RWM area used for the illumination indicators of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps, and if it is 0, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps are turned off. Even when the control of various LEDs is executed and a lamp switches from lit to off, there will be a slight delay before a person actually perceives that the lamp has turned off due to signal transmission time and lamp cooldown time.

Therefore, even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the memory area for the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamp indicators to 0 (the process to turn them off), the actual time it takes for the lamps to turn off is the sum of the time from when the game end check process executes the process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM's memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamp indicators to 0 until the interrupt process stops outputting the lamp indicator signals, and the time it actually takes for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to completely turn off.

After the game completion check is performed in the main game progression process, the game value input process is executed. In the automatic input process executed during the game value input process, if replay is enabled, the number of inserted tokens is stored, and the values in the memory areas for the RWM's 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicator are set to 1 (the value indicating illumination) (the process of illuminating the lamps).

Furthermore, even if the automatic input process sets the values in the memory areas for the indicator lights of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps to 1, the lamps do not immediately light up. Instead, the system uses interrupt processing to control the lighting of various LEDs, checking the values in the RWM area for the indicator lights of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps. If the value is 1, the lamps are then illuminated. Similarly, due to signal transmission time and lamp illumination time, there may be a slight delay before the lamps are fully lit.

In this way, during the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp, which were lit, are turned off. Then, during the subsequent automatic betting process, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are turned back on.

In this configuration, the system is configured so that the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up via an interrupt process after the automatic input process is executed, before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps completely turn off due to the execution of the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won. In other words, the system is configured so that the values in the memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamp indicators of the RWM are cleared to 0 after the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won, and then the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up via an interrupt process after the automatic input process is executed, before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps completely turn off due to the execution of the automatic input process.

Figure 90 shows the values in the memory area for the illumination indicators of the RWM's 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp, and the illumination status of the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp. Note that the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 is not correlated with the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 90 is the moment when the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicators of the RWM become 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 90 is the moment when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt processing executed after the game end check process.

Timing T3 in Figure 90 is the moment when, during the automatic input process, the values in the memory areas for the illumination indicators of the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps become 1.

Timing T4 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to light up during the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 90 is the moment when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are fully illuminated.

The time from T1 to T2 and from T3 to T4 in Figure 90 will differ depending on the timing of the interrupt processing. For example, if the interrupt processing is started immediately after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check processing, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt processing is started 2ms after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check processing, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed plus 2ms. Also, for example, if the interrupt processing is started immediately after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 1 in the automatic insertion processing, the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed. For example, if the interrupt process is triggered 2ms after the automatic input process sets the values of the memory areas for the illumination indicators of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps to 1, the time from T3 to T4 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed, plus 2ms.

As shown in Figure 90, when a replay is won, the automatic input process stores the value 1 in the memory area for the indicator lights of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps before they have completely turned off following the game end check process. This allows the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to light up before they have completely turned off.

To configure the system in this way, the time from when the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps are turned to 0 during the game end check process until the game value input process (cycle count A × 0.0001 ms), the time from when the game value input process starts until the automatic input process, which is executed when replay is activated, sets the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 1 (cycle count B × 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value for two interrupt processes, which is 4.47 ms (2.235 ms × 2 times), must be designed to be less than approximately 20 ms, the time it takes for the lamps to completely turn off. Furthermore, to make the lamps appear to remain lit for a longer period (not to appear to be turned off), it is preferable to design the system to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms × 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processing cycles refers to the maximum delay time between the interrupt processing that turns the lamp off and the interrupt processing that turns the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count B × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. Therefore, the sum of the cycle counts for A and B must be less than 155,300. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to remain lit continuously (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count B × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. Therefore, the sum of the cycle counts for A and B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the sum of the cycle counts for A and B is approximately 1000, so both relationships are satisfied.

By configuring it this way, it becomes possible to turn on the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps have completely turned off.

<<Pattern 2: In the game end check process, the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted resets the values of the memory areas for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM to 0 (initialization). Then, in the automatic insertion process included in the game value insertion process, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps light up in sequence.>>

During the game end check process, the values in the RWM's memory area for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights are reset to 0 (initialized). This process clears the data for the number of coins inserted. By resetting the RWM area for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights to 0, the system can then illuminate the appropriate bet lights for the next automatically inserted coins.

Furthermore, even if the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM memory area used for the illumination indicators of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 0, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps will not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt processing controls the illumination of various LEDs. The interrupt processing checks the values in the RWM area used for the illumination indicators of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps, and if it is 0, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps are turned off. Even when the control of various LEDs is executed and a lamp switches from lit to off, there will be a slight delay before a person actually perceives that the lamp has turned off due to signal transmission time and lamp cooldown time.

Therefore, even if the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the memory area for the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 0, it will take the total time for the lamps to actually turn off to be the sum of the time from when the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 0 until the interrupt process stops outputting the lamp lights, and the time it takes for the lamps to actually turn off completely.

After the game completion check is performed in the main game progression processing, the game value input process is executed. In the automatic input process executed during the game value input process, if replay is enabled, the following processes are performed: storing the number of inserted tokens, setting the value of the RWM's 1-bet lamp's indicator memory area to 1 (indicating illumination), setting the value of the 2-bet lamp's indicator memory area to 1 (indicating illumination), and setting the value of the 3-bet lamp's indicator memory area to 1 (indicating illumination).

Furthermore, even if the automatic input process sets the value of the memory area for the 1-bed lamp's illumination indicator to 1, the 2-bed lamp's illumination indicator to 1, and the 3-bed lamp's illumination indicator to 1, the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp do not immediately light up. Instead, the system uses interrupt processing to control the illumination of various LEDs, checking the value of the RWM area for the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp illumination indicator. If the value is 1, the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp are illuminated. Similarly, due to signal transmission time and lamp illumination time, there will be a slight delay before the lamps are fully illuminated.

In this way, during the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp, which were lit, are turned off. Then, during the subsequent automatic betting process, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are turned on.

In this configuration, the system is configured so that the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up via an interrupt process after the automatic input process is executed, before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps completely turn off due to the execution of the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won. In other words, the system is configured so that the values in the memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamp indicators of the RWM are cleared to 0 after the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won, and then the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up via an interrupt process after the automatic input process is executed, before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps completely turn off due to the execution of the automatic input process.

Figure 91 shows the values in the memory area for the illumination indicators of the RWM's 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp, and the illumination status of the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp. Note that the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 91 is not correlated with elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 91 is the moment when the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicators of the RWM become 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 91 is the moment when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt processing executed after the game end check process.

Timing T3 in Figure 91 is the moment when the value in the memory area for the RWM's 1-bed lamp illumination indicator becomes 1 during the automatic feed-in process.

Timing T4 in Figure 91 is the moment when the value in the memory area for the illumination indicator of the RWM's two-bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic switching process.

Timing T5 in Figure 91 is the moment when the value in the memory area for the illumination indicator of the RWM's 3-bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic feed process.

Timing T6 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to light up during the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion process.

Timing T7 in Figure 91 is the moment when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are fully illuminated.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in Figure 91 will differ depending on the timing of the interrupt processing. For example, if the interrupt processing is started immediately after the values in the memory area for the illumination indicators of the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps are set to 0 in the game end check processing, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed. Alternatively, if the interrupt processing is started 2ms after the values in the memory area for the illumination indicators of the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps are set to 0 in the game end check processing, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed plus 2ms. For example, if the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control for the illumination of various LEDs is executed within the interrupt process, in the case where the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st bed lamp is set to 1 during the automatic switch-in process, then the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 2nd bed lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 3rd bed lamp is set to 1 immediately after the interrupt process is activated, then the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control for the illumination of various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed plus 2ms, in the case where the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control for the illumination of various LEDs is executed within the interrupt process, plus 2ms.

As shown in Figure 91, when a replay is won, the automatic input process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for the 1-bet lamp's illumination indicator, a value of 1 in the memory area for the 2-bet lamp's illumination indicator, and a value of 1 in the memory area for the 3-bet lamp's illumination indicator, before the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp have completely turned off. This makes it possible to illuminate the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp before they have completely turned off.

To configure it in this way, the time required to set the RWM's 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamp indicator memory area to 0 during the game end check process until the game value input process (cycle count A × 0.0001 ms), the time from the start of the game value input process until the automatic input process, which is executed when replay is activated during the game value input process, sets the RWM's 1st bet lamp indicator memory area to 1 (cycle count B × 0.0001 ms), the time until the 2nd bet lamp indicator memory area is set to 1 (cycle count C × 0.0001 ms), the time until the 3rd bet lamp indicator memory area is set to 1 (cycle count D × 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of two interrupt processes, which is 4.47 ms (2.235 ms × 2 times), must be designed so that the sum of these times is less than approximately 20 ms, which is the time it takes for the lamps to completely turn off. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to remain lit more continuously (appear not to be turned off), it is desirable to design the system so that the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts). Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time between the interrupt process for turning the lamp off and the interrupt process for turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count B × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count C × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count D × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. Therefore, the sum of the cycle counts for A + B + C + D must be less than 155,300. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to remain lit continuously (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count B × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count C × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count D × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. Therefore, the sum of the cycle counts for A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the sum of the cycle counts for A + B + C + D is approximately 1500, so both relationships are satisfied.

By configuring it this way, it becomes possible to turn on the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps have completely turned off.

Furthermore, although the intervals between T3 and T4, and between T4 and T5, are extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), it is possible that interrupt processing may occur between T3 and T5. In such cases, the 2-bet and 3-bet lamps may completely turn off. However, because the intervals between T3 and T4, and between T4 and T5, are shorter than the interrupt processing cycle, it is possible to immediately relight the lamps that were turned off in the next interrupt processing. This allows for quick relighting of the lamps even in rare cases, maintaining the game's tempo.

<<Pattern 3: In the game value input process, the input count display data clearing process clears the values of the memory areas for the RWM's 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp illumination indicators, resetting them to 0 (initializing them). Then, in the automatic input process, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp illuminate simultaneously.>>

During the game value input process, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights of the RWM (Recovery Mode Module). By clearing the values in the RWM areas for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights to 0, the appropriate bet lights can be illuminated according to the next automatically inserted bet.

Furthermore, even if the RWM's memory area for displaying the number of tokens inserted is cleared to 0 during the game value input processing, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps will not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt processing controls the illumination of various LEDs. The interrupt processing checks the value of the RWM area for the illumination of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps, and if it is 0, the lamps are turned off. Even when a lamp switches from lit to unlit after the control of various LEDs is performed, there will be a slight lag before a person actually perceives that the lamp has turned off due to signal transmission time and lamp deactivation time.

Therefore, even if the RWM's memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps is reset to zero (initialized) during the game value input process's coin count display data clearing process, the actual time required for the lamps to turn off is the sum of the time from when the RWM's memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps is reset to zero during the coin count input process's coin count display data clearing process until the interrupt process stops outputting the lamp lights, and the time it actually takes for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to turn off completely.

The game value input process in the main game progression process includes an automatic input process (executed after the input count display data clearing process). In the automatic input process, if replay is activated, it stores the number of inserted tokens and sets the values in the memory areas for the RWM's 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp illumination indicator to 1 (the value indicating illumination).

Furthermore, even if the game value input process sets the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights to 1, the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights do not immediately illuminate. Instead, the system uses interrupt processing to control the illumination of various LEDs, checking the values in the RWM area for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights. If the value is 1, the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights are then illuminated. Similarly, due to signal transmission time and lamp illumination time, there may be a slight delay before the lights fully illuminate.

In this way, after a game in which a replay is won, the process of clearing the data display of the number of coins inserted during the game value insertion process is executed to turn off the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp that were lit. Then, during the automatic insertion process of the subsequent game value insertion process, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are turned on.

In this configuration, the system is configured so that the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamps begin to light up due to an interrupt process that follows the execution of the automatic game value input process before the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamps are completely extinguished by the execution of the game value input data clearing process after a game in which a replay is won. In other words, the system is configured so that the values in the memory area for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamp indicators of the RWM are cleared to 0 after the execution of the game value input data clearing process after a game in which a replay is won, and then the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamps begin to light up due to an interrupt process that follows the execution of the automatic game value input process before the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamps are completely extinguished by the execution of the automatic game value input process after a game in which a replay is won.

Here, Figure 92 shows the values in the memory area for the illumination indicator of the RWM's 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp, and the illumination status of the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp. Note that the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 is not correlated with the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 92 is the moment when the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicators of the RWM become 0 during the data clearing process for the number of tokens inserted during the game value input process.

Timing T2 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt process executed after the data clearing process for the number of tokens inserted during the game value input process.

Timing T3 in Figure 92 is the moment when the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicators of the RWM become 1 during the automatic input process of the game value input process.

Timing T4 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to light up during the interrupt process executed after the automatic input process of the game value input process.

Timing T5 in Figure 92 is the moment when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are fully illuminated.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in Figure 92 will differ depending on the timing of the interrupt processing. For example, if the interrupt processing is started immediately after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed. Alternatively, if the interrupt processing is started 2ms after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed plus 2ms. For example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until the control for the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed, if the interrupt process is activated immediately after the value in the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps is set to 1 during the automatic game value input process. Alternatively, if the interrupt process is activated 2ms after the value in the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps is set to 1 during the automatic game value input process, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until the control for the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed plus 2ms.

As shown in Figure 92, when a replay is won, the automatic input process of the game value input process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for the indicator lights of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps before the data clearing process for the number of tokens inserted in the game value input process and the time it takes for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to completely turn off. This makes it possible to light up the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps before they completely turn off.

To achieve this configuration, the time required to set the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 0 during the game value input process's coin count display data clearing process, and then to set the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to 1 during the game value input process's automatic input process (cycle count A × 0.0001 ms), plus the maximum value for two interrupt processes, which is 4.47 ms (2.235 ms × 2 times), must be designed to be less than approximately 20 ms, the time it takes for the lamps to completely turn off. Furthermore, to make the lamps appear to remain lit more continuously (appear not to be turned off), it is preferable to design the system to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms × 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time between the interrupt process that turns off the lamps and the interrupt process that turns on the lamps.

In other words, the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. Therefore, cycle count A must be less than 155,300. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to remain lit continuously (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. Therefore, cycle count A must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, cycle count A is approximately 800, so both relationships are satisfied.

By configuring it this way, it becomes possible to turn on the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps have completely turned off.

<<Pattern 4: In the game value input process, the input count display data clearing process clears the values of the memory areas for the RWM's 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicators, resetting them to 0 (initializing them). Then, in the automatic input process, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp light up in sequence.>>

During the game value input process, the data clearing process for the number of tokens inserted is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights of the RWM (Recovery Mode Module). By clearing the values in the RWM areas for the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet indicator lights to 0, the appropriate bet lights can be illuminated according to the next number of tokens automatically inserted.

Furthermore, even if the RWM's memory area for displaying the number of tokens inserted is cleared to 0 during the game value input processing, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps will not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt processing controls the illumination of various LEDs. The interrupt processing checks the value of the RWM area for the illumination of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps, and if it is 0, the lamps are turned off. Even when a lamp switches from lit to unlit after the control of various LEDs is performed, there will be a slight lag before a person actually perceives that the lamp has turned off due to signal transmission time and lamp deactivation time.

Therefore, even if the RWM's memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps is reset to zero (initialized) during the game value input process's coin count display data clearing process, the actual time required for the lamps to turn off is the sum of the time from when the RWM's memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps is reset to zero during the coin count input process's coin count display data clearing process until the interrupt process stops outputting the lamp lights, and the time it actually takes for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps to turn off completely.

The game value input process in the main game progression process includes an automatic input process (executed after the input count display data clearing process). The automatic input process, when replay is activated, executes the following: storing the number of inserted tokens, setting the value of the RWM's 1-bet lamp's indicator memory area to 1 (indicating illumination), setting the value of the 2-bet lamp's indicator memory area to 1 (indicating illumination), and setting the value of the 3-bet lamp's indicator memory area to 1 (indicating illumination).

Furthermore, even if the automatic input process sets the value of the memory area for the 1-bed lamp's illumination indicator to 1, the 2-bed lamp's illumination indicator to 1, and the 3-bed lamp's illumination indicator to 1, the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp do not immediately light up. Instead, the system uses interrupt processing to control the illumination of various LEDs, checking the value of the RWM area for the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp illumination indicator. If the value is 1, the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp are illuminated. Similarly, due to signal transmission time and lamp illumination time, there will be a slight delay before the lamps are fully illuminated.

In this way, during the game value input process for a game where a replay has been won, the input count display data clearing process is executed to turn off the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp that were lit. Then, during the subsequent automatic input process, the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are turned on.

In this configuration, the system is configured such that, after the automatic insertion process is executed and an interrupt occurs, the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up due to the execution of the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted during the game value insertion process of a game in which a replay has been won, before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps have completely turned off. In other words, after the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted during the game value insertion process of a game in which a replay has been won clears the values in the memory area for the illumination display of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM, the system is configured so that the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up due to the interrupt occurs after the automatic insertion process is executed and the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps begin to light up due to the execution of the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted during the game value insertion process of a game in which a replay has been won, before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps have completely turned off.

Figure 93 shows the values in the memory area for the illumination indicators of the RWM's 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp, and the illumination status of the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, and 3-bed lamp. Note that the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 93 is not correlated with elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 93 is the moment when the values in the memory areas for the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp indicators of the RWM become 0 during the data clearing process for the number of tokens inserted during the game value input process.

Timing T2 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt process executed after the data clearing process for the number of tokens inserted during the game value input process.

Timing T3 in Figure 93 is the moment when the value in the memory area for the RWM's 1-bet lamp illumination indicator becomes 1 during the automatic input process of the game value input process.

Timing T4 in Figure 93 is the moment when the value in the memory area for the RWM's 2-bet lamp illumination indicator becomes 1 during the automatic input process of the game value input process.

Timing T5 in Figure 93 is the moment when the value in the memory area for the RWM's 3-bet lamp illumination indicator becomes 1 during the automatic input process of the game value input process.

Timing T6 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp begin to light up during an interrupt process executed after the automatic input process of the game value input process.

Timing T7 in Figure 93 is the moment when the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are fully illuminated.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in Figure 93 will differ depending on the timing of the interrupt processing. For example, if the interrupt processing is started immediately after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 during the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed. Alternatively, if the interrupt processing is started 2ms after the value of the memory area for the illumination indicator of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 during the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until the control related to the illumination of the various LEDs within the interrupt processing is executed plus 2ms. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control for the illumination of various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed, if the interrupt process is activated immediately after the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process sets the value of the memory area for the illumination of the 1st bet lamp to 1, the value of the memory area for the illumination of the 2nd bet lamp to 1, and then the value of the memory area for the illumination of the 3rd bet lamp to 1. Alternatively, if the interrupt process is activated 2ms after the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process sets the value of the memory area for the illumination of the 1st bet lamp to 1, the value of the memory area for the illumination of the 2nd bet lamp to 1, and then the value of the memory area for the illumination of the 3rd bet lamp to 1, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until the control for the illumination of various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed plus 2ms.

As shown in Figure 93, when a replay is won, the automatic input process of the game value input process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for the indicator light of the 1st bet lamp, the memory area for the indicator light of the 2nd bet lamp, and the memory area for the indicator light of the 3rd bet lamp, before the data clearing process for the number of coins inserted in the game value input process and the 1st bet lamp, 2nd bet lamp, and 3rd bet lamp have completely turned off. This allows the 1st bet lamp, 2nd bet lamp, and 3rd bet lamp to light up before they have completely turned off.

To configure it in this way, the time required to set the value of the memory area for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bet lamps of the RWM to 1 by the automatic input process of the game value input process (cycle count A × 0.0001 ms), the time required to set the value of the memory area for the 2nd bet lamp to 1 by the automatic input process of the game value input process (cycle count B × 0.0001 ms), the time required to set the value of the memory area for the 3rd bet lamp to 1 by the automatic input process of the game value input process (cycle count C × 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of two interrupt processes, which is 4.47 ms (2.235 ms × 2), must be designed to be less than approximately 20 ms, the time it takes for the lamps to completely turn off. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to remain lit more continuously (appear not to be turned off), it is desirable to design the system so that the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts). Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time between the interrupt process for turning the lamp off and the interrupt process for turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count B × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count C × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. Therefore, the sum of the cycle counts for A + B + C must be less than 155,300. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to remain lit continuously (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: Cycle count A × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count B × 0.0001 ms + Cycle count C × 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. Therefore, the sum of the cycle counts for A + B + C must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the sum of the cycle counts for A + B + C is approximately 900, so both relationships are satisfied.

By configuring it this way, it becomes possible to turn on the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps before the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd bed lamps have completely turned off.

Furthermore, although the intervals between T3 and T4, and between T4 and T5, are extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), it is possible that interrupt processing may occur between T3 and T5. In such cases, the 2-bet and 3-bet lamps may completely turn off. However, because the intervals between T3 and T4, and between T4 and T5, are shorter than the interrupt processing cycle, it is possible to immediately relight the lamps that were turned off in the next interrupt processing. This allows for quick relighting of the lamps even in rare cases, maintaining the game's tempo.

The above explanation of patterns 1 through 4 assumes dynamic lighting control, but the same relationship between the number of cycles and the time it takes for the bed lamp to turn off also holds true for static lighting control. This is because the time it takes for the bed lamp to turn off completely (20 ms) remains the same regardless of whether it is dynamic or static lighting control.

In patterns 2 and 4 described above, the bet count is increased by one each time during the automatic input process, but it appears as if the increases are happening simultaneously. However, this is not the only option. Alternatively, a timer could be set for each increment in the bet count, and when the timer value reaches zero during the interrupt processing, the bet count could be updated from 1 to 2, and the timer could be reset again, giving the player the visual impression that the bet lamps are lighting up sequentially.

In this case, the memory area for the 1-bet lamp illumination indicator should be set so that the time it takes to store "1" after being cleared is until the 1-bet lamp is completely off. The memory areas for the 2-bet lamp illumination indicator and the 3-bet lamp illumination indicator may be set to completely off after being cleared, or the 1-bet lamp may also be set to completely off. Furthermore, the timer value set when visually displaying the number of bets one by one must be longer than the interrupt period of 2.235 ms if static illumination control is used, and longer than the dynamic illumination period of 11.175 ms if static or dynamic illumination control is used. An example of such a timer value is 30 ms.

Next, we will explain the control of the illumination of the bet count indicator lamp when the bet switch is operated.

When the game is in a waiting state (waiting for bets) with a bet count of 0, the 1-bet lamp can be illuminated when the bet switch (including the MAX bet switch and the 1-bet switch) is operated. (If the MAX bet switch is operated, the 1-3 bet lamps can be illuminated.)

The system determines whether the bet switch has been operated by executing input port reading and input port data generation processes during interrupt handling. If the bet switch is operated, data indicating that the bet switch has been operated is generated.

In the game progress-focused game value input process, the system checks whether data regarding the operation of the bet switch is stored. If data is stored, it determines whether a bet is possible. If a bet is possible, it executes a process to add game tokens one at a time.

In the process of adding game tokens one by one, 1 is added to the RWM area that stores the bet count, and then the token count display data is generated and saved. Furthermore, if the MAX bet switch is operated, the betting process is repeated until the bet count reaches 3, or until it is determined that betting is not possible.

In this situation, the time from receiving a bet switch operation to storing the value of the number of coins inserted per bet is configured to be shorter than the interrupt processing cycle. Furthermore, the time from receiving a bet switch operation to storing the value of the number of coins inserted per bet may also be configured to be shorter than the dynamic lighting control cycle.

To achieve this configuration, A should be set such that the number of cycles A × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms from the start of the game value input process to the storage of the inserted coin count display data. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the storage of the inserted coin count display data should be set to less than 22350. Furthermore, if the time from the acceptance of the bet switch operation to the storage of the inserted coin count display data for one bet is shorter than the cycle of the dynamic lighting control, then A should be set such that the number of cycles A × 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms from the start of the game value input process to the storage of the inserted coin count display data. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the storage of the inserted coin count display data should be set to less than 111750.

This configuration allows the single-bet lamp to be illuminated in the shortest possible interval between interrupt processing or dynamic lighting processing. This eliminates disruption to the game's tempo from operating the bet switch to the lamp illuminating, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if the lighting control for a single-bet lamp is static, it is not problematic to compare it to the shortest cycle of dynamic lighting control.

Furthermore, when the MAX bet switch is operated while the number of bets is 0, and the 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet lamps are to light up in sequence, the time between storing the value of the coin count display data for the 1-bet and storing the value of the coin count display data for the 2-bet is configured to be longer than the dynamic lighting cycle.

To achieve this configuration, if the number of cycles from storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets were set to such a value that the number of cycles × 0.0001 ms > 11.175 ms, the betting process would become redundant and strain the program capacity of the main control means. Therefore, the system is configured so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms + waiting time > 11.175 ms. In other words, the number of cycles and waiting time are determined so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms, and waiting time > 11.175 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms).

The waiting time is set between the time the value of the number of tokens inserted for the first bet is stored and the time the value of the number of tokens inserted for the second bet is stored. During this time, the waiting time is updated, and the process for the second bet is executed when the waiting time becomes zero.

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for one bet to storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for two bets is approximately 120. Since 120 (number of cycles) × 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms, we have 0.012 ms < 11.175 ms, satisfying the above relationship. Furthermore, the waiting time is 15 ms. Since 15 ms (waiting time) > 11.175 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for one bet to storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for two bets × 0.0001 ms), we have 15 ms > 11.163 ms, satisfying the above relationship.

Furthermore, in the case of static lighting control, the time between storing the value of the number of coins inserted for one bet and storing the value of the number of coins inserted for two bets should be configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle.

To achieve this configuration, the system is configured such that the number of cycles × 0.0001 ms + waiting time > 2.235 ms from storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets. In other words, the number of cycles × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, and the waiting time > 2.235 ms - (number of cycles × 0.0001 ms from storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets).

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for one bet to storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for two bets is approximately 120. Since 120 (number of cycles) × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, we have 0.012 ms < 2.235 ms, satisfying the above relationship. Furthermore, the waiting time is 15 ms. Since 15 ms (waiting time) > 2.235 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for one bet to storing the value of the number of tokens inserted for two bets × 0.0001 ms), we have 15 ms > 2.223 ms, satisfying the above relationship.

Regardless of whether dynamic or static lighting control is used, as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied, the number of cycles and waiting time between storing the value of the coin count display data for one bet and storing the value of the coin count display data for two bets can be changed as appropriate.

The process between a 1-bet and a 2-bet, as described above, is the same as the process between a 2-bet and a 3-bet.

This configuration prevents the bet lamps from lighting up simultaneously during interrupt processing in a system where the 1st to 3rd bet lamps are lit sequentially. This allows for a smoother gameplay experience and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the waiting time can also be set during the interrupt processing's lighting process. In this case, the process of storing the values of the number of coins inserted for bets 1-3 is the same, or executed at a shorter interval than the interrupt processing. However, if the waiting time has not elapsed after the 1-bet lamp is lit during the interrupt processing, the 2-bet lamp will not be lit. Similarly, if the 2-bet lamp is lit after the waiting time has elapsed, and the next set waiting time has not elapsed, the 3-bet lamp will not be lit. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from lighting up simultaneously at the timing of the interrupt processing in a specification where the 1-3 bet lamps are lit sequentially, thus allowing the game to proceed at a good pace and improving the enjoyment of the game.

<<Explanation regarding the control of the credit count indicator>>
Here, regarding the process of lighting up the credit count indicator, we will explain the case where, as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means of a predetermined game that has been started with 3 bets in a predetermined game state, a small win is determined, and after all the reels have stopped, 8 game tokens are added to the credits as part of the token awarding process.

For example, if the RWM has "10" stored as credit data in a designated memory area, and the combination of symbols that dispenses 8 game tokens stops, the credit count display will increment as follows: 11 → 12 → 13 → ... → 18.

The process of displaying the credit count on the credit counter involves controlling the illumination of various LEDs via interrupt processing. For each interrupt, the system retrieves the credit data value stored in a predetermined memory area of the RWM and illuminates the corresponding segment.

During this process, the credit data is updated by one each time, so that it goes from 10 → 11 → 12 → ... → 18.

Furthermore, the credit data update interval is configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle. Specifically, the credit data update interval is 60 ms, and the interrupt processing cycle is 2.235 ms. Note that when the credit count indicator is illuminated using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable that the credit data update interval > the dynamic lighting cycle interval.

In this embodiment, the program that increments the credit count by 1 has approximately 120 cycles, resulting in 120 × 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the interrupt processing cycle. Therefore, in the credit increment process, after setting the credit data from 10 to 11 in a predetermined memory area of the RWM, a timer is set for the waiting period. During the timer update process for each interrupt, if the timer value becomes 0, it is updated from 11 to 12, and the timer is set again. The timer value set is 60 ms.

In this way, to increment the credit indicator, a timer is set each time a credit is added, and then, if the timer value becomes 0 as a result of the timer update, the process of adding 1 to the credit data is repeatedly executed.

This configuration reduces program size, improves program readability, allows for incremental updates of the credit count display, and enhances the enjoyment of the game by improving the game's tempo.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination process of the credit count indicator, we will explain the process that occurs when the settlement switch is operated while the credit count indicator is displaying 10, causing the credit count indicator to become 0.

For example, if the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a designated memory area of the RWM, and the settlement switch is operated to execute the settlement process, the credit display will show a decrement as follows: 9 → 8 → 7 → ... → 0.

The process of displaying the credit count on the credit counter involves controlling the illumination of various LEDs via interrupt processing. For each interrupt, the system retrieves the credit data value stored in a predetermined memory area of the RWM and illuminates the corresponding segment.

During this settlement process, the credit data is updated one by one, so that it goes from 10 → 9 → 8 → ... → 0.

Furthermore, the credit data update interval is configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle. Specifically, the credit data update interval is 40 ms, and the interrupt processing cycle is 2.235 ms. Note that when the credit count indicator is illuminated using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable that the credit data update interval > the dynamic lighting cycle interval.

In this embodiment, the program that subtracts 1 from the credit count during settlement processing has approximately 120 cycles, resulting in 120 × 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the interrupt processing cycle. Therefore, during settlement processing, after setting the credit data from 10 to 9 in a predetermined memory area of the RWM, a timer is set for the waiting period. During the timer update process for each interrupt, if the timer value becomes 0, it is updated from 9 to 8, and the timer is set again. The timer value set is 40 ms.

In this way, to display a decrement on the credit indicator, during the settlement process, a timer is set each time one credit is deducted. Then, if the timer value becomes zero as a result of the timer update, the process of deducting one credit again is repeatedly executed.

This configuration reduces program size, improves program readability, allows for decrementing of credit count displays, and enhances the enjoyment of the game by improving the game's tempo.

<<Explanation regarding starter lamps>>
Here, we will explain the process of lighting the start lamp, specifically the case where, after a predetermined game in a predetermined game state has ended, the MAX bet switch is operated, a 3-bet is placed, and the start lamp lights up.

For example, if the bet count is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in the RWM's designated memory area, when the MAX bet switch is operated, the 3-bet lamp will light up first, followed by the start lamp. Similarly, if 3 bets are automatically placed during the automatic input process after a replay in the previous game, the 3-bet lamp will light up first, followed by the start lamp.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time between storing a "1" (indicating illumination) in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator and storing a "1" (indicating illumination) in the memory area for the start lamp illumination indicator is less than the interrupt cycle.

To implement this design, the number of cycles between storing a "1" (indicating illumination) in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator and storing a "1" (indicating illumination) in the memory area for the start lamp illumination indicator must be less than 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles between storing a "1" (indicating illumination) in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator and storing a "1" (indicating illumination) in the memory area for the start lamp illumination indicator must be less than 22350.

Even if a "1" indicating illumination is stored in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator, it takes time for the 3-bed lamp to actually light up, including the time until the LED illumination process is executed in the next interrupt process and the time until the 3-bed lamp is fully illuminated. Therefore, by setting the number of cycles × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms from the processing after storing a "1" indicating illumination in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator to the processing after storing a "1" indicating illumination in the memory area for the start lamp illumination indicator, the 3-bed lamp and the start lamp can light up simultaneously or with a 1-interrupt delay. In other words, if a "1" indicating illumination is stored in the memory area for the start lamp illumination indicator between the time a "1" indicating illumination is stored in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator and the start lamp is activated in the next interrupt process, the 3-bed lamp and the start lamp will light up simultaneously. If a "1" indicating illumination is stored in the memory area for the start lamp illumination indicator after the interrupt process is executed following the storage of a "1" indicating illumination in the memory area for the 3-bed lamp illumination indicator, the 3-bed lamp and the start lamp will light up with a 1-interrupt delay.

This configuration allows for immediate notification that gameplay is possible after the three-bet lamp lights up, improving the game's tempo and enhancing its enjoyment.

Furthermore, regarding the process of turning on the start lamp, we will now explain the case where the start switch is operated while the start lamp is lit, causing the start lamp to turn off.

For example, if the start switch is operated while the start lamp is lit, an internal lottery process is executed to determine the result. The start lamp then turns off.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time from receiving the start switch operation to determining the internal lottery result is less than the time from receiving the start switch operation until the start lamp completely turns off.

To implement this design, the number of processing cycles from receiving the start switch operation to determining the internal lottery result must be less than the time from receiving the start switch operation until the start lamp completely turns off (20 ms). In other words, the number of processing cycles from receiving the start switch operation to determining the internal lottery result must be less than 200,000.

By configuring it in this way, the internal lottery result can be determined before the start lamp turns off. Therefore, even if someone tries to fraudulently obtain the internal lottery result, it becomes difficult to determine when the internal lottery process was executed, thus preventing fraudulent activity.

<Game sounds related to betting and starting>
Gaming machines emit game sounds in various ways, but here we will explain the betting sound that can be emitted when the bet switch is operated or game tokens are inserted, the weight sound that can be emitted when the start switch is operated, and the reel start sound that can be emitted when the reels start to rotate.

The bet sound is output for each bet. If three bets are placed by operating the MAX bet switch, the same bet sound is output three times.

The betting sound is a "da!" sound that is emitted for 0.13 seconds for each bet. If three bets are placed, the betting sound will be emitted for 0.13 seconds x 3 = 0.39 seconds.

The bet sound can be output when a bet command is transmitted from the main control unit and the sub-control unit receives the bet command. The sub-control unit then performs the processing related to the output of the bet sound. Furthermore, since the bet sound is output per shot, once the bet sound is output, it will not be output again for that bet.

The wait sound is a sound used to signal the minimum game duration of 4.1 seconds. If less than 4.1 seconds elapse between the start of reel rotation for one game (based on the operation of the start switch) and the start of reel rotation for the next game (based on the operation of the start switch), a waiting period (wait period) occurs until 4.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of reel rotation for the previous game. The system is configured to output the wait sound during this waiting period.

The duration of the weight sound output varies depending on the remaining standby time. However, since it takes approximately 1.1 seconds from the start of reel rotation to the operation of the start switch for the next game, the standby time can be up to approximately 3 seconds. Furthermore, the weight sound output during the standby period is "terotero terotero...", which is the "tero" sound data looped and output during the standby period. The "tero" sound is output for 0.2 seconds. In the case of "terotero terotero," it is output for 0.2 seconds x 3 = 0.6 seconds.

The weight sound can be output when the main control means sends a command regarding start switch reception and the sub-control means receives the command regarding start switch reception. It can be stopped when the main control means sends a command regarding reel rotation start and the sub-control means receives the command regarding reel rotation start. The sub-control means then performs the processing related to the output of the weight sound. Therefore, the weight sound is output in a loop, and it will not stop from the time the command regarding start switch reception is received until the command regarding reel rotation start is received. Note that if the command regarding reel rotation start is received between the "Te" and "Ro" of the weight sound "Tero," the output of the weight sound will stop at that point; therefore, "Te" will be output, but "Ro" will not.

The reel start sound is the sound emitted when the reels begin to rotate based on the operation of the start switch. If there is a waiting period, the reel start sound is emitted when the reels begin to rotate after the start switch operation.

The reel start sound is a "thud" sound that is emitted for 0.1 seconds each time the reels rotate. Even if there are multiple reels, the reel start sound is emitted only once. In other words, the reel start sound can be emitted when all the reels that stopped in the previous game begin to rotate again when the start switch is operated in the current game.

The reel start sound can be output when the main control means sends a command regarding the start of reel rotation, and the sub-control means receives the command regarding the start of reel rotation. The sub-control means then performs the processing related to the output of the reel start sound. Furthermore, since the reel start sound is output in one shot, once the reel start sound is output, it will not be output repeatedly for that reel rotation start.

The reel start sound is emitted at the moment the reels begin to rotate, allowing the player to time the moment between the reels starting to rotate and the activation of the stop switch. Therefore, the reel start sound provides essential information for players to comfortably perform precise reel stopping.

The output times for the bet sound, weight sound, and reel start sound mentioned above do not represent the playback time of each data item, but rather the time from when the first sound is output until the last sound fades away. For example, if the bet sound data includes a "da!" sound with 0.1 seconds of silence before and after it, the playback time of the bet sound data is 0.1 seconds + 0.13 seconds + 0.1 seconds = 0.33 seconds, but the output time of the bet sound itself is 0.13 seconds.

Here, we will explain the volume levels of various sounds based on Figure 94.

The administrator volume in Figure 94 is a volume level that can only be changed by the administrator and cannot be altered by the player. For example, conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include operating a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-directional key switch 21, or effect switch) during setting confirmation, operating a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-directional key switch 21, or effect switch) during setting changes, or operating a specific sub-switch (rotary switch) inside the cabinet (behind the front door or inside the cabinet). In other words, the conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include the status of devices that the player cannot operate. Figure 94 shows that three levels (low, normal, and high) are selectable.

The "player volume" in Figure 94 refers to the volume level that the player can adjust. For example, this includes the volume adjustable via the volume control screen accessible through the sub-switch menu, or the volume adjustable using the left and right directional buttons. Figure 94 shows that there are 10 selectable levels.

In Figure 94, the numbers assigned to each sound represent the volume, and the unit is decibels. For example, when the administrator volume is "low" and the player volume is "1", the volume of the bet sound is 12 decibels.

In this embodiment, both the administrator volume and the player volume are adjustable; however, it is also possible to have a configuration where only one of them is adjustable. In that case, the relative volume levels of the game sounds and system sounds will remain unchanged.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the reel starting sound.

The weight sound and reel start sound are triggered by the operation of the start switch. As mentioned above, the weight sound can be output upon receiving the start switch acceptance command, and the reel start sound can be output upon receiving the reel rotation start command after the start switch operation. In other words, the weight sound and reel start sound are output at very close intervals.

Furthermore, under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to a specific level), the weight sound is quieter than the reel start sound.

This configuration makes the reel start sound, which is output after the weight sound, more audible, making it easier for players to recognize when the reels start spinning. This clarifies the timing of the reel start and makes it easier to understand when to operate the stop switch, thus improving the tempo of the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

As mentioned above, the weight sound loop is output for 0.2 seconds, and the reel start sound is output for 0.1 seconds.

This configuration allows players to intuitively determine which sound is being output when the start switch is turned ON. Specifically, while the weight sound may be output for up to approximately 3 seconds, the reel start sound is only output for 0.1 seconds. By making the duration of one weight sound loop longer than the duration of the reel start sound, players can intuitively determine, for example, that the weight sound was output 0.2 seconds after operating the start switch. This improves the tempo of the game and enhances its enjoyment.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the betting sound.

The bet sound can be output in response to the operation of the bet switch, and the wait sound can be output in response to the operation of the start switch. When the number of bets available for play reaches the result of the bet switch operation, the start switch operation is activated. Therefore, the bet sound and the wait sound are output at very close intervals.

Furthermore, under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the wait sound is quieter than the bet sound.

If left as is, the weight sound may become inaudible due to the betting sound. However, since the betting sound is an important sound that allows the player to determine whether or not a bet has been placed due to the player's operation of the betting switch, making the betting sound quieter than the weight sound is not advisable.

To solve this problem, the output periods for the bet sound and the wait sound are configured not to overlap. For example, when three bets are placed by operating the bet switch, a "da-da-da" sound is output for 0.39 seconds. Even if the start switch is operated immediately after the minimum time it takes for the start switch to become active, and the wait sound is output, the final "da" of the bet sound will have finished outputting and will no longer be heard before the "te" sound at the beginning of the wait sound is heard.

This configuration prevents the betting sound from drowning out the weight sound, and also allows the betting sound to be louder than the weight sound, thus improving the game's tempo and enhancing its enjoyment.

Note that while other game sounds may be emitted during betting, these are not betting sounds and therefore do not fall under the effects of the betting sound described above. Other game sounds emitted during betting include, for example, the celebratory sound emitted when the MAX bet switch is operated while the LCD screen displays "Press MAX bet switch!!" during the betting waiting phase, and when an AT (Automatic Trigger) or other instruction function is announced, indicating a favorable result for the player, such as winning an AT. In other words, game sounds emitted when the bet switch is used for purposes other than placing game tokens are not betting sounds.

As shown in Figure 94, the volume of each game sound increases proportionally to the increase in the player volume. However, this is not limited to this configuration; the volume of certain game sounds may be configured to increase less. For example, regarding the weight sound, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume is 8. When the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume is 12. The weight sound volume is 1.2 times higher when the player volume is "2" compared to "1." However, the volume of the weight sound may be configured to increase less when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," and to increase less when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low," for example (the increase in volume for other sounds such as betting sounds and reel start sounds remains the same).

In addition to the game sounds shown in Figure 94, the game also features background music (BGM), voices, and sound effects (SE). The volume levels for the BGM, voices, and SEs are set higher than those for the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound. For example, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the bet sound volume is "12," the wait sound volume is "8," and the reel start sound volume is "10." However, in this situation, the volume of a certain BGM is "30," the volume of a certain voice is "45," and the volume of a certain SE is "50." It should be noted that under certain volume conditions, not all background music (BGM), voices, and sound effects (SE) are louder than the bet sound, wait sound, or reel start sound. Rather, it means that more than half of all BGM, voices, and SEs have a volume setting that is louder than the bet sound, wait sound, or reel start sound. Furthermore, the volume of BGM, voices, and SEs increases proportionally, or simply increases, as the player volume or administrator volume increases.

Furthermore, while the output time and volume of the betting sound, weight sound, and reel start sound were mentioned above, we will now explain the data capacity of each sound.

The relationship between the data capacity of the bet sound data that can be output in one bet, the data capacity of the wait sound data for one loop of the wait sound, and the data capacity of the reel start sound data is as follows: wait sound data > reel start sound data > bet sound data. Thus, although the output period for the reel start sound is shorter than that of the bet sound data, the data capacity is larger. This is because the reel start sound is not composed of simple sounds, in order to make it more memorable to the player than the bet sound. Therefore, players can easily remember the reel start sound, which can improve the tempo of the game.

<<Regarding game sounds in simulated games>>
This section explains the various game sounds that occur during simulated gameplay.

As mentioned above, a simulated game is a freeze animation triggered by operating the start switch. Specifically, during this freeze animation, all reels rotate, and the corresponding reels stop when the stop switch is operated.

These simulated games, while employing swaying and random delay processing, operate in a manner similar to the actual game, making it difficult for players to distinguish between simulated and real gameplay. In particular, the reel rotation start time is similar for both simulated and real gameplay. Therefore, players who haven't anticipated the simulation might be surprised and delighted when they stop the reels, resulting in a stop pattern unique to the simulated game, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the game's appeal is further enhanced by making it more difficult to distinguish between the actual game and the simulated game compared to conventional machines.

This game allows for the output of a wait sound. The wait sound is output during the wait period. Since the simulated game starts before the acceleration process, it runs for a period equivalent to the wait period. If the simulated game starts without a wait period while one remains, the player will feel uneasy about the reels starting to spin. Therefore, if a wait period remains, the reels will not start spinning for the period equivalent to the wait period at the start of the simulated game, and will only start spinning when the period equivalent to the wait period has ended. The system is configured to output the same wait sound as the main game during the period equivalent to the wait period.

In this case, the timer value for the wait period is obtained at the start of the simulated game. This wait period timer value is then set at the beginning of the simulated game's operation. The set wait period timer value is then updated, and when it is determined that the timer value is 0, the reel rotation start process related to the simulated game is executed.

In this case, the simulated game starts before determining whether the wait period has elapsed when transitioning from the main game to the simulated game. Furthermore, the wait period timer value is either continuously updated during the simulated game or initialized after the simulated game starts. By ensuring that the sum of the minimum game time in the main game and the minimum game time in the simulated game is longer than 4.1 seconds, the minimum game time can be guaranteed, and since there is no remaining wait period when the main game starts after the simulated game ends, the main game can start smoothly.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to distinguish between the actual game and a simulated game, thus creating a sense of surprise if it turns out to be a simulated game.

The above example illustrates how to manage a period equivalent to a wait period during simulated gameplay. However, the system is not limited to this example; the reel rotation start process for the simulated game may be executed at the end of the wait period for the actual gameplay. In other words, before starting the simulated gameplay, it is determined whether or not a wait period is in progress. If it is determined to be a wait period, the determination process is repeated until it is determined not to be a wait period. If it is determined not to be a wait period, the reel rotation start process for the simulated game is executed.

Furthermore, when two simulated games are executed consecutively, a timer (initial value of the timer is 4.1 seconds) is set at the start of reel rotation to determine whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed between the start of reel rotation in the previous simulated game and the start of reel rotation in the current simulated game. If the start switch operation, which marks the start timing of the current simulated game, is received while the timer value is not 0, the reel rotation start process for the current simulated game will not be executed until the timer value becomes 0.

Between the previous and current simulated game sessions, a simulated bet sound will be output when the bet switch is pressed, but no credit deduction will occur.

In this simulated game, if the start switch is pressed, a random delay process may or may not be implemented.

Even without implementing random delays, the game's design, which includes wait periods and betting sounds, helps to some extent prevent players from realizing it's a simulated game. However, implementing random delays makes it even more difficult to distinguish between a simulated and a real game compared to not implementing them.

When a random delay is implemented after a simulated game, a reel start sound is output when the reels begin to spin. The timing of the reel start sound output can be as follows: outputting it in accordance with the first reel to start spinning, outputting it in accordance with the last reel to start spinning, outputting the reel start sound for each reel that starts spinning, or not outputting the reel start sound at all.

Regarding the timing of outputting the reel start sound, if the output is to correspond to the first reel to start spinning, the reel start sound will be output when the reel whose delay time due to random delay processing has been eliminated first starts spinning. In other words, the reel start sound will be output to the first reel to start spinning among the left, middle, and right reels.

Regarding the timing of outputting the reel start sound, if the output is to correspond to the last reel to start spinning, the reel start sound will be output when the reel whose delay time due to random delay processing has ended starts spinning. In other words, the reel start sound will be output to the reel that last started spinning among the left, middle, and right reels.

Regarding the timing of outputting the reel start sound, if the reel start sound is output for each reel that starts rotating, the reel start sound is output each time a reel rotates after the delay time due to random delay processing has disappeared. In other words, the reel start sound is output when all reels—left, middle, and right—have started rotating.

Even with this random delay, if the reel start sound is output, it will be output at a timing similar to that of the actual game. This reduces the player's discomfort when transitioning from the simulated game to the actual game, improving the game's tempo and enhancing its enjoyment.

If the reel start sound is not output, the reel start sound will not be output even if the reel starts spinning after the delay time has been eliminated by the random delay processing. In other words, the reel start sound will not be output regardless of whether the left, middle, or right reel starts spinning. In this case, the absence of the reel start sound may cause more discomfort to the player than when the reel start sound is present, but it prevents the reel start sound from being output at an unintended time, thus minimizing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, when transitioning from a simulated game to the actual game, the system may wait until the waiting period has elapsed between the start of reel rotation in the simulated game and the start of reel rotation in the actual game before executing the reel rotation start process for the actual game. Note that the reel rotation start in the actual game is executed after a random delay process. In other words, a waiting period can be created by operating the start switch of the actual game when transitioning from the simulated game, and a waiting sound can be output.

With this configuration, the transitions from the main game to the simulated game, from one simulated game to another, and from the simulated game to the main game can be made smoother. This allows players to play without being aware of whether they are playing a simulated game or the main game, improving the pace of the game and enhancing its enjoyment.

Furthermore, while an embodiment in which a wait period is provided at the start of the simulated game has been described, the invention is not limited to this. There may be cases where a wait period is provided at the start of the simulated game, and cases where it is not. It is also possible to ensure that not providing a wait period increases the proportion of favorable results given to the player in the lottery related to the instruction function of AT, etc. With such a configuration, the player will feel a sense of unease due to the absence of a wait period, and at the same time, they can anticipate a favorable lottery result, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while an embodiment in which a waiting period is provided at the start of the simulated game has been described, the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have no waiting period at the start of the simulated game.

Furthermore, when transitioning from the main game to the simulated game, if the simulated game starts even if there is still a waiting period remaining from the start of reel rotation in the main game, the waiting sound may not loop during the maximum remaining waiting period (the period when the game is played in the shortest possible time from the start of reel rotation in the main game to the start of reel rotation in the simulated game). For example, if the maximum remaining waiting period is 2.1 seconds, one loop of the waiting sound should be 2.1 seconds or longer. By configuring it this way, the waiting sound will not loop when transitioning from the main game to the simulated game in the shortest possible time, thus reducing boredom with the game caused by continuously hearing the same sound.

<Regarding measures to prevent fraudulent use of gaming machines and to curb dangerous installations>
In recent years, due to regulations on the installation ratio of each type of gaming machine within stores, there have been cases where gaming machines are installed using methods different from the usual installation methods in order to increase the installation ratio of a particular type of gaming machine.

Furthermore, in order to differentiate themselves from neighboring stores, the layout of gaming machines in stores is becoming more diverse.

Furthermore, there has been an increase in cases where players purchase gaming machines and play at home. Since these players are not necessarily skilled in handling gaming machines, there is a risk of them setting them up in a dangerous condition.

The gaming machine in this embodiment aims to suppress some excessive installation methods in order to enable safe gameplay even in diverse installation situations.

First, in a normal gaming machine installation, as shown in Figure 1, the bottom plate is in contact with a horizontal surface (or mounting space), and the top plate is positioned horizontally above the bottom plate. Furthermore, the left and right side panels and the back panel are positioned approximately perpendicular to the horizontal surface (or mounting space).

Under these normal installation conditions, playing the game is safe.

Next, we will explain dangerous installation conditions based on Figure 95.

A dangerous installation of a gaming machine is one where the bottom plate is installed on a sloped surface (for example, a surface that slopes downwards at a 45-degree angle to the left), as shown in Figure 95. Alternatively, the left side panel is installed on a horizontal surface (in other words, the left side panel is the bottom, the top and bottom panels are positioned approximately perpendicular to the horizontal surface, and the right side panel is positioned horizontally above the left side panel). Note that Figure 95 shows a front view of the gaming machine with the bottom plate installed on a surface that slopes downwards at a 45-degree angle to the left. If the slope of the surface were 90 degrees, the left side panel would be installed on a horizontal surface.

Under such dangerous installation conditions, there is a risk of the gaming machine toppling over, making it impossible to guarantee safe gameplay.

<<Preventing dangerous installation situations with selectors>>
Therefore, if the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 to 90 degrees), the machine will display an error and the game will stop. When the gaming machine is in a normal installation position, it is said that the gaming machine is installed in the correct position, or that the selector is installed in the correct position. In the following explanation of this example, it is assumed that the gaming machine is powered on and the game state is that of a waiting state after one game has finished and no bets have been placed.

Specifically, one method for triggering an error in a gaming machine is to have a movable part of the aisle sensor mounted on the selector swing when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 to 90 degrees), thereby inducing a selector error and stopping the game. A selector error is triggered if the aisle sensor detects that it is not in its initial position for a predetermined period of time.

Figure 96 shows a movable piece mounted on the selector and a sensor that detects the movable piece. Figure 96(A) shows the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state, and Figure 96(B) shows the selector when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation state.

For example, the sensor in Figure 96 is a passage sensor. A movable piece constituting the passage sensor is pivotally supported on the selector. When the selector is in the correct position, the movable piece is configured to extend onto the medal passage so that it can contact medals, etc. When a medal, etc., touches the movable piece, the movable piece rotates, and the sensor constituting the passage sensor changes from on to off due to the oscillation of the movable piece, thereby detecting the medal, etc. The selector has this configuration.

As shown in Figure 96(A), in such a selector, when no coins are inserted into the coin slot and the selector is set in the upright position, the movable piece is prevented from swinging by an elastic member such as a spring, allowing the movable piece to return to its initial position. Alternatively, even when no coins are inserted into the coin slot and the selector is set in the upright position, the movable piece may not be restricted by an elastic member such as a spring, but its swing can be restricted by gravity, allowing it to return to its initial position. In such cases, setting the selector at an angle so that the movable piece faces downwards makes it more susceptible to the effects of gravity, allowing the movable piece to remain stably in its initial position.

In gaming machines equipped with such selectors, when the machine is installed in the correct position, the movable part of the selector remains in its initial position. Since the aisle sensor does not detect this as an abnormality, the game does not stop.

As shown in Figure 96(B), in the case of such a selector, if no tokens are inserted into the token slot and the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous position, the movable piece will swing. This is because the elastic member such as a spring and the gravitational vector acting on the movable piece are altered from those in a normal gaming machine state, causing the movable piece to displace to a position different from its initial position. Furthermore, in cases where no tokens are inserted into the token slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, and the swing of the movable piece is not restricted by an elastic member such as a spring, but rather by gravity acting on the movable piece to restrict its swing and return it to its initial position, the point at which the movable piece receives gravity changes, causing the movable piece to displace to a position different from its initial position.

Furthermore, in gaming machines equipped with such selectors, if the machine is installed in a dangerous location, the movable piece will experience gravity at different points, causing it to swing. When the power is turned on, the movable piece moves from its initial position, causing the sensor to fail to detect it. The aisle sensor then detects this as an abnormality, allowing the game to be stopped.

Furthermore, a dangerous installation situation for a gaming machine could be one where the machine's back panel is placed on a surface horizontal to the ground, and the bottom panel, top panel, or left and right side panels are positioned at approximately a right angle to the surface.

Even when the gaming machine is installed in such a dangerous location, the operation of the selector's movable piece remains the same as described above. The movement of the movable piece, as shown in Figure 96(B), allows for the detection of a selector error when the power is turned on, thereby stopping the game.

Furthermore, using dedicated sensors to determine whether a gaming machine is installed in a dangerous condition would increase the number of parts and costs. Therefore, the selector itself is equipped with a sensor that can detect the machine's condition. Thus, when the gaming machine is installed normally and powered on, if the selector is oriented in the same way as when the machine is installed in a dangerous condition, the selector error described above can occur. For example, if the selector is tilted 45 to 90 degrees to the left from its correct position, or tilted 90 degrees backward from its correct position, a selector error can be detected, allowing the game to be stopped.

This configuration allows for preventing gameplay from progressing when the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous position, thus deterring dangerous installation methods. Furthermore, since tilting the selector in the same direction as a dangerous installation will result in a selector error, it can also be expected to detect fraud by detecting instances where a selector that has been removed due to fraudulent activity is reinstalled in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous location and measures are in place to prevent selector errors, then when the start switch is operated with three bets placed, the reels will spin, and the reels can be stopped according to the operation of the stop switch (allowing the game to continue).

<<Preventing dangerous installation conditions related to medal dispensing>>
Figure 97 illustrates the dangerous installation conditions of gaming machines.

Figure 97 shows the view from the back of the front door when the left panel of the gaming machine is in contact with a horizontal surface. Although not shown, the front door is actually closed. The black arrows in Figure 97 indicate magnified views of the area enclosed by the dotted line.

In cases where a predetermined error occurs when the left panel of the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface, and the game does not stop, or where the game does not stop even when the situation shown in Figure 97 occurs because the predetermined error is not detected during gameplay, the payout process can be executed if the situation shown in Figure 97 occurs during gameplay, and then, after all reels have stopped, a combination of symbols that can produce a predetermined number of payouts has stopped.

In the situation shown in Figure 97, if a predetermined number of dispensing operations are performed (i.e., more than the predetermined number of medals are stored in the hopper), the medals are not discharged into the receiving tray 28, and the system is configured to allow the medals to be stored in the receiving section shown in Figure 97.

Furthermore, under normal installation conditions, the hopper's discharge port and the medal dispensing port 45 of the return passage are separated by a predetermined distance even when the front door is closed. In other words, medals dispensed from the hopper fly out of the hopper's discharge port, pass through the medal dispensing port 45 of the return passage, and are guided to the receiving tray 28. For at least the predetermined distance from when the medals fly out of the hopper's discharge port until they pass through the medal dispensing port 45 of the return passage, the medals are suspended in the air.

Furthermore, in the event of a dangerous installation situation, as shown in Figure 97, the gravitational vector acting on the medals in the air will differ from that of a normal installation situation. However, the medals ejected from the hopper's discharge port will not hit the edge of the medal dispensing port 45 of the return passage, but will pass through the medal dispensing port 45 of the return passage and be stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

Furthermore, the receiving section of the return passage is designed with a width and depth that can accommodate 15 tokens (the maximum number of tokens payout stipulated by the gaming machine regulations) of 25mm diameter, even in dangerous installation conditions. Therefore, even if the machine is designed to dispense 15 tokens at a time, they can be stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 97 (view of the area enclosed by the dotted line from the right side), the receiving section of the return passage protrudes from the front, allowing for the storage of tokens. Since game tokens are typically about 1.6 mm thick and 25 mm in diameter, the capacity of the receiving section of the return passage (the capacity of the protruding part around the token dispensing outlet of the return passage) must be 600 ^mm² or more in order to store 15 of these tokens.

With this configuration, when medals are dispensed in a dangerous installation situation, they will not be dispensed into the tray 28 but will be stored in the receiving section of the return passage. This effectively stops the game from progressing, preventing play in dangerous installation situations.

Furthermore, if the payout process is executed with the back panel of the gaming machine in contact with a horizontal surface, the system is designed so that the tokens do not enter the receiving tray 28 by colliding with the edge of the token payout opening 45 in the return passage.

Even with this configuration, gameplay is practically impossible, thus preventing dangerous installation situations.

<<Measures against fraud related to speakers>>
In recent years, there have been cases where individuals who engage in fraudulent activities intentionally tamper with speakers to make it difficult to hear error sounds or unusual sounds (such as the same sound being emitted repeatedly or a designated sound being emitted in situations where it should not be emitted) that occur when they perform fraudulent operations.

The objective of this embodiment of the gaming machine is to ensure that sound can be heard as much as possible even if the speaker is being manipulated illegally.

Figure 98 shows a front view of the gaming machine, which is equipped with a lower speaker and an upper speaker. The speakers are fixed to the back of the front door.

The dashed line in Figure 98 represents the entire circumference of the lower speaker cone, and the entire speaker is not visible from the front of the gaming machine. The diameter of the speaker cone is 70 mm.

Furthermore, a cover member is positioned on the front door of the gaming machine to cover the speaker cone and center cap. The cover member has numerous holes to direct the speaker's sound towards the player. The cover member is made of a non-magnetic metal. Note that Figure 98 is an illustrative diagram, and the number of holes in the cover member may not be as shown in the figure.

The diameter of the holes in the cover material is 2 mm, and there are 300 holes in the cover material corresponding to one of the lower speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover component is 942 square millimeters ((2/2) × (2/2) × 3.14 × 300). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3846.5 square millimeters ((70/2) × (70/2) × 3.14). To put it another way, the total area of the holes in the cover component is less than 1/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

This configuration ensures that even if wires or other objects penetrate through all the holes in the cover, creating holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover, at least 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap will remain intact.

Therefore, even if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or other objects entering through all the holes in the cover material, more than 3/4 of the cone paper and center cap area will remain. The design ensures that the volume reduction rate is less than 20% when more than 3/4 of the cone paper and center cap area remains intact, so error sounds and game sounds from the amusement machine are still clearly audible even through the torn speaker.

Furthermore, even if the cone paper and center cap are torn due to wire or other objects entering through all the holes in the cover material, the game sound will still be at an average of 50 decibels or higher, even when the volume setting available to the player is at its minimum (excluding silence), ensuring it is clearly audible. Error sounds are designed so that the player cannot change their volume.

Furthermore, while the above explanation described a situation where the cone paper and center cap were torn due to wire or similar objects entering through all the holes in the cover member, if all the holes in the cover member were only on the front of the cone paper, and only the cone paper was torn, even if the cone paper had holes equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than 3/4 of the cone paper's surface area would remain intact.

Furthermore, the design ensures that the volume reduction rate is less than 20% even when more than 3/4 of the cone's surface area remains, allowing error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine to be clearly audible.

The number and size of holes in the cover component, the size of the cone paper, and the size of the center cap mentioned above are examples only. The cone paper and center cap can be designed with arbitrary values as long as a wire or similar object can be inserted through all the holes in the cover component, leaving at least 3/4 of the cone paper's surface area intact.

In Figure 98, the upper speaker has a cone and center cap area that is approximately the same as the area of the cover. Furthermore, a hole is formed in the cover on approximately the front surface. The speaker cone and center cap are approximately rectangular, measuring 100 mm vertically and 30 mm horizontally.

The diameter of the holes in the cover material is 2 mm, and there are 480 holes in the cover material corresponding to one of the upper speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover component is 1507.2 square millimeters ((2/2) × (2/2) × 3.14 × 480). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3000 square millimeters (100 × 30). To put it another way, the total area of the holes in the cover component is approximately half (1/1.99) the area of the cone paper and center cap.

In the case of this type of speaker, even if wires or other objects were to enter through all the holes in the cover material, and holes equal to the total area of the holes in the cover material were created in the cone paper and center cap, the design ensures that at least 1/1.5 to less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains intact.

Furthermore, the design ensures that the volume reduction is less than 50% when 1/1.5 to less than 1/2.5 of the cone paper and center cap area remains intact.

With this configuration, the area of the speaker cone and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member. Even if a wire or similar object were to enter through all the holes in the cover member, creating holes in the cone and center cap equal to the total area of the cover member's holes, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine would still be clearly audible, thus preventing any fraudulent activity against the gaming machine.

Furthermore, even in the case of the upper speaker, similar to the lower speaker example, if the cone paper and center cap are torn due to wire or other objects entering through all the holes in the cover material, the game sound will still be at an average of 40 decibels or higher, even when the volume that the player can set is at the minimum (excluding silence), and will be clearly audible. Note that the error sound is a sound whose volume cannot be changed by the player.

The number and size of holes in the cover component, the size of the cone paper, and the size of the center cap mentioned above are examples only. The cone paper and center cap can be designed with arbitrary values, as long as a wire or similar object can be inserted through all the holes in the cover component, leaving at least 1/1.5 to less than 1/2.5 of the cone paper's surface area unaffected.

Although not shown in the diagram, the design ensures that the volume reduction is less than 40% when 1/2.5 to less than 3/4 of the cone paper and center cap area remains intact. Therefore, even if a wire or similar object enters through all the holes in the cover, creating holes equal to the total area of the cover's holes in the cone paper and center cap, the error and game sounds from the gaming machine will still be clearly audible, effectively preventing any fraudulent activity.

<<Preventing problems caused by liquid flowing in from the inlet>>
In recent years, there have been several incidents of people pouring beverages such as tea into the coin slots of arcade games.

The coin slot is a hole for inserting coins into the gaming machine. A larger opening makes it easier to insert coins all at once, while a smaller opening makes it easier to insert coins one at a time.

Furthermore, medals inserted through the medal slot may be guided to the hopper via a selector, or they may be guided from the selector through a return passage to the receiving tray 28.

This is because the specifications of the tokens are actually fixed, and the token slot is designed to guide the tokens to a predetermined location inside the gaming machine, preventing them from being guided to any other location (although tokens may occasionally spill out as an irregular occurrence).

However, if liquid is introduced through the coin slot, it can splash into unexpected places, potentially causing fires or malfunctions.

The objective of this embodiment of the gaming machine is to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions even if liquid flows in through the coin slot.

Figure 99 is a front view of the front door from the back, and Figure 100 is a view of the selector from the right side.

The liquids most likely to be added are tea, water, coffee, or juice sold in stores, typically in volumes of 150 ml to 500 ml. Of these, water has the lowest kinematic viscosity at 1.004 × ^{10⁻⁶ m²} /S (20°C).

The following explanation uses water, which has the lowest kinematic viscosity among the possible liquids added, as an example. It goes without saying that the composition will still be satisfied even if water is replaced with tea, coffee, or juice, which have higher kinematic viscosity.

If the liquid inserted through the coin slot flows into the power box, it could cause a short circuit and potentially lead to a fire. Furthermore, if the liquid inserted through the coin slot flows into the hopper, it could cause the hopper to malfunction.

Therefore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured to guide the liquid introduced through the coin slot into the receiving tray 28 as much as possible.

First, the size of the coin slot opening, which serves as the entry point for the liquid, should be roughly rectangular, measuring between 1.7 mm and less than 3 mm vertically, and between 25 mm and less than 30 mm horizontally. This is to make it smaller than the 30 mm diameter of a typical plastic bottle opening.

This configuration prevents the liquid from flowing out of the coin slot all at once, thus keeping the liquid's flow rate below a certain level. This prevents the rapidly moving liquid from splashing into the gaming machine's casing.

Next, since the liquid flowing in from the coin slot enters the selector, the width of the passage through which the coins roll from the selector to the hopper (width A in Figure 100) should be less than 3 mm to prevent it from being guided from the selector to the hopper.

This configuration allows medals to pass through the selector, but the liquid can spill out of the passage and be guided to the return passage. This makes it difficult for the liquid to reach the hopper, thus preventing hopper malfunction. Furthermore, since the passage to the hopper has a chute component (as shown in Figure 99), even if some liquid is guided to the hopper, it can be stopped by the chute component.

Next, the liquid guided to the return passage is led through the return passage to the receiving tray 28. The return passage is fixed to the back of the front door with screws in multiple places (not shown), and is designed to prevent liquid leakage around the return passage. Furthermore, the medal dispensing outlet is not positioned in the liquid flow path, preventing liquid from splashing out of the outlet. Also, the area on the back of the front door covered by the return passage is constructed from a single component, ensuring there are no gaps.

This configuration allows the liquid guided from the selector to the return passage to flow down the return passage and be directed to the receiving tray 28. Therefore, the liquid is less likely to spill inside the casing, reducing the chance of it being guided towards the power supply box, thus preventing fires and malfunctions.

Furthermore, the design ensures that the liquid guided into the receiving tray 28 is less likely to spill. Specifically, the volume of the receiving tray is set to 500 ml or more.

This configuration allows the entire contents of a standard-sized plastic bottle of liquid to be poured into the coin slot, which can then be collected by the tray 28, minimizing spillage to the store and thus reducing the cleaning burden on the store.

Furthermore, it is not necessary for 100% of the liquid poured from the coin slot to be guided into the receiving tray. This is because, as the liquid normally flows, some remains in the passages and walls. Therefore, even if 500 ml of liquid is poured from the coin slot, less than 500 ml will accumulate in the receiving tray 28. Also, since a small amount of liquid spilling onto the bottom of the machine is unlikely to cause a fire or malfunction, the objective can be achieved by configuring the system so that 50% or more of the liquid poured from the coin slot is collected in the receiving tray 28.

<Regarding the roulette presentation in the gaming machine of this embodiment>
This section will explain the roulette animation, which is one of the animations in the gaming machine described in this embodiment.

The sub-control means can receive information from the main control means, such as the results of internal lotteries, the results of processing related to instruction functions, and game states such as the main game state and RT state. It can then execute effects corresponding to the received information. For example, based on this information from the main control means, the sub-control means can execute effects that notify the player of a favorable result, or effects that do not provide a favorable result but create the expectation of a favorable result. A roulette effect is one such effect.

The roulette animation is a series of animations in which the display area of the display device 32 is divided, the benefits to be given to the player are displayed in each divided area, the cursor display moves cyclically, and then the selection of one of the divided areas is displayed automatically or by the player's operation. The cursor display is an animation that points to the currently selected divided display area, and it is an animation that displays a lighting effect in accordance with the frame image within each divided display area.

For example, in Figure 101 (A), the display area of the display device is divided into four sections: (1) upper left section, (2) upper right section, (3) lower left section, and (4) lower right section. The cursor display is shown cyclically in the order of (1) upper left section, (2) upper right section, (3) lower left section, (4) lower right section, (1) upper left section, (2) upper right section, (3) lower left section, (4) lower right section, and so on. After a predetermined period of time, the system automatically displays which section the cursor has been moved to, triggered by the player's operation of the performance switch, or by the operation of the final stop button. Since the section to be stopped in is determined at the start of the roulette performance, even when the section is determined and displayed triggered by the player's operation of the performance switch, the display will be shown in a predetermined section regardless of the timing of the player's operation of the performance switch. For this reason, when the cursor display is shown cyclically after the start of the roulette performance, the cursor display is shown to move cyclically at high speed. As shown in Figure 101(A), with a four-part display, an example interval for rapidly and cyclically displaying the cursor (for example, the interval between moving from (1) to (2)) is approximately 50 ms. Note that the cyclical display order in Figure 101(A) could also be a clockwise circular sequence: (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (4) lower right area, and (3) lower left area. Furthermore, each divided display area is sometimes referred to as a "square."

For example, Figure 101(B) displays the display area of the display device in four sections: (1) left section, (2) center left section, (3) center right section, and (4) right section. The cursor display is shown cyclically in the order of (1) left section, (2) center left section, (3) center right section, (4) right section, (1) left section, (2) center left section, (3) center right section, (4) right section, and so on. After a predetermined period of time, it is automatically determined, or triggered by the player's operation of the performance switch, that section has been selected and displayed. Since the section in which the cursor will stop is determined at the start of the roulette performance, even when the section is selected and displayed triggered by the player's operation of the performance switch, it will be selected and displayed in a predetermined section regardless of the timing of the player's operation of the performance switch. For this reason, when the cursor display is shown cyclically after the start of the roulette performance, the cursor display is shown to move cyclically at high speed. As shown in Figure 101(B), with a four-way split display, an example interval for rapidly and cyclically displaying the cursor (for example, the interval between moving from (1) to (2)) is approximately 50 ms.

In the roulette animation, approximately 50ms was used as an example for the interval between rapidly cyclically displaying the cursor (for example, the interval between moving from (1) to (2)). However, this is not limited to this; as shown in Figures 101(A) and (B), 40ms or 60ms are also acceptable. Furthermore, while the explanation used an example of rapidly cyclically displaying the cursor across four divided display areas, it is also possible to rapidly cyclically display the cursor across three divided display areas or five divided display areas. Regardless of the number of divided display areas, if the interval between rapidly cyclically displaying the cursor for one full rotation in the roulette animation is between 150ms and 300ms, the player will be less likely to perceive the cursor display as intentionally stopped, even if the cursor display is stopped based on the player's operation of the animation switch.

Furthermore, the interval at which the cursor is displayed rapidly and cyclically in the roulette animation does not have to be constant. The cursor could move slowly for the first rotation and then gradually approach maximum speed from the second rotation onward, or it could move slowly for the first rotation and then move at maximum speed from the second rotation onward.

By incorporating a roulette-style animation, the notification method becomes more engaging, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by moving the cursor more slowly during the first rotation than during the second, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the content displayed in each segmented area.

The cursor display that remains visible after the roulette animation begins indicates that a particular split-screen area is currently selected. For example, it might highlight the currently selected area (or dim other areas), display a predetermined color effect around the selected area, or display a predetermined icon at a specific location within the selected area. This cursor display, visible after the roulette animation begins, is sometimes simply referred to as an effect display (movement effect display) to convey the meaning of a visual effect.

The roulette animation can be executed after the start lever operation to begin the game is received, or after all reels have stopped. In other words, the cursor display in the roulette animation begins to move after the start lever operation to begin the game is received, or after all reels have stopped. Alternatively, the roulette animation's divided display areas may be displayed during the previous game, and the cursor display may begin to move when the start lever operation to begin the next game is received.

When the roulette animation begins, the content of the split display area is displayed. For example, as shown in Figure 102 (1), the obtainable rewards are displayed in each split display area. Here, the reward content may be displayed in the order of the upper left area, upper right area, lower left area, and lower right area, or the reward content of all split display areas may be displayed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (2), a cursor is displayed to indicate that "No Addition" in the upper left area was initially selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (3), a cursor is displayed to indicate that "+10" in the upper right area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (4), a cursor is displayed to indicate that "+50" in the lower left area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (5), a cursor is displayed to indicate that "+100" in the lower right area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (2), a cursor will be displayed to indicate that "No Addition" is currently selected in the lower right area. The cursor will then be displayed sequentially until it stops.

In Figures 102 (2), (3), (4), and (5), the selected split-screen area is highlighted, while the other split-screen areas are darkened. The visibility of the background image and text may be reduced to a degree that allows them to be seen.

As shown in Figure 102, the reward in the split-screen area selected first at the start of the roulette animation is the lowest reward (including no reward) compared to the rewards in the other split-screen areas. This configuration, by displaying the lowest reward first, makes the roulette animation more suspenseful and exciting. Conversely, displaying the highest reward first would easily create a sense of security, potentially leading players to quit playing due to the gap between their expectations and the actual outcome if the roulette animation is unfavorable. The system is configured to display the lowest reward first to embody this psychological effect.

Furthermore, the rewards displayed in each split display area shown in Figure 102 are examples, and the system may include multiple display patterns to show various types of rewards. In other words, it includes multiple display patterns corresponding to the expected level of reward acquisition. However, in all cases, the cursor is initially displayed in the upper left area, and the cursor movement order is the same. Also, the system is configured to display the lowest-level reward in the upper left area.

Furthermore, it is also acceptable for the proportion of all presentation patterns in which the cursor is initially displayed in the upper left area to be higher than the proportion in which the cursor is initially displayed in an area other than the upper left area, or for the proportion in all presentation patterns in which the lowest reward is displayed in the upper left area to be higher than the proportion in which the lowest reward is displayed in an area other than the upper left area.

Furthermore, the displayed reward content in each divided area may be identical. For example, in Figure 102(1), the reward content could be "+10G" in the upper left area, "+10G" in the upper right area, "+50G" in the lower left area, and "+100G" in the lower right area, or it could be "+100G" in the upper left area, "+100G" in the upper right area, "+100G" in the lower left area, and "+100G" in the lower right area.

Furthermore, the specific reward to be awarded is determined before the roulette animation begins. The game used to determine the reward can be either the game in which the roulette animation starts or a game played before the roulette animation begins.

This configuration makes the regularity of the roulette display easier to understand, facilitating players to grasp the game mechanics.

Furthermore, by circulating the cursor display in the order of (2), (3), (5), and (4) in Figure 102, it becomes possible to create a greater sense of unease by utilizing the clockwise rule, thereby increasing interest in the roulette animation.

Figure 103 illustrates an example where, after starting the roulette animation as shown in Figure 102, an image prompting the user to operate the animation switch is displayed, and the cursor display stops after the animation switch is operated.

Figure 103 (1) shows that after the cursor movement display shown in Figure 102 has completed at least one full rotation (one rotation is defined as starting from the upper left area and moving to the lower right area), an image prompting the user to operate the effect switch is displayed. The image prompting the user to operate the effect switch is an image resembling an effect switch with the word "PUSH" written on it, covering a portion of all the divided display areas.

In this way, by displaying an image prompting the player to operate the performance switch after the cursor movement display has completed at least one full rotation, the roulette performance does not immediately end after being started by operating the performance switch, allowing the player to recognize that the roulette performance has begun. Furthermore, this prevents the effect of the performance switch operation, which creates a sense of player control, from being diminished by the cursor stopping in a split display area that the cursor has not yet reached after the performance switch has been operated. Alternatively, the image prompting the player to operate the performance switch may be displayed at a time when the cursor movement display has completed one or more full rotations.

This configuration can be described as a display device that displays certain information related to the progress of the game in each of multiple display areas, sequentially switches and displays a selection indicator to show that one of the display areas has been selected, and, when a predetermined condition is met, displays a predetermined effect that stops the selection indicator in one of the display areas. The predetermined condition includes accepting the press of an effect switch, and while the selection indicators are sequentially switching and displaying, an operation-prompting effect can be displayed to encourage the operation of the effect switch. The operation-prompting effect is configured to be displayed after each display area has been selected and displayed at least once after the predetermined effect has started.

Furthermore, Figure 103 (2) shows that the cursor has moved to the upper right area while the image prompting the operation of the performance switch remains displayed.

Furthermore, Figure 103 (3) shows that the cursor display has moved to the lower left area while the image prompting operation of the performance switch remains displayed.

Then, in Figure 103 (4), the cursor display has moved to the lower right area while the image prompting the user to operate the effect switch remains displayed. From here on, the cursor moves cyclically, displaying the image prompting the user to operate the effect switch in the order of Figure 103 (1), (2), (3), and (4).

Thus, while the image prompting the operation of the performance switch remains displayed and the cursor is moving cyclically, the cyclical cursor movement display does not end. The cursor display is stopped only when the performance switch is operated. However, if the roulette performance is started when the game is initiated by operating the start switch, and the final stop switch is operated, the cursor display may stop in the same manner as if the performance switch had been operated, even if the performance switch itself was not operated.

Figure 103 (5) shows that the effect switch was operated at the time the cursor display selected the upper right area.

As shown in Figure 103 above, it has been decided that a bonus of "+100G" (indicating an extension of 100 AT game rounds) will be granted before the start of the roulette animation. Therefore, even if the animation switch is operated at timing (5) in Figure 103, the cursor display will not stop at "+10G" shown in the upper right area.

Furthermore, if the effect switch is operated at the timing indicated in (5) of Figure 103, the cursor display will not move to the lower left area, but will instead move to the lower right area as shown in (6) of Figure 103 and then stop. In other words, regardless of the timing of the effect switch operation, when the effect switch is operated, the cursor is configured to move to a predetermined cursor display position before stopping.

Since the cursor moves one square in 50ms, it is difficult for the player to reliably operate the effect switch at a specific cursor position. Furthermore, the player has no way of proving this. Therefore, even if the cursor does not stop at a predetermined stopping position after the effect switch is operated and the cursor moves sequentially, it is unlikely that the player would perceive that the cursor was intentionally stopped within a predetermined divided display area.

With this configuration, the results of the roulette animation can be immediately announced at the moment the player operates the animation switch, allowing for a faster pace of gameplay and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in games where the roulette animation is performed, even in the theoretically fastest possible play time from operating the start switch until all reels stop, the system is configured so that an image prompting the player to operate the animation switch is displayed before all reels stop.

This configuration makes it easier for players who play quickly to recognize that the roulette animation is running, and by making them interested in the roulette animation, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced.

Furthermore, while Figure 103 displays an image resembling a performance switch to prompt the user to operate the performance switch, this is not the only option. The introductory performance could be executed before the performance switch is displayed, or a text image such as "Press!" could be used, or a character image could be displayed followed by an audio prompt to operate the performance switch.

Furthermore, when a roulette animation is performed and an image prompting the player to operate the animation switch is displayed, the lamp on the animation switch will flash. In this case, the flashing cycle of the lamp on the animation switch (the time from when it lights up to when it turns off) is configured to be longer than the interval it takes for the cursor display to complete one rotation. This configuration makes the player perceive the cursor display as moving relatively quickly.

When the display switch is operated and the cursor display stops, the system is configured to blink the split display area where the cursor display stopped. Blinking means rapidly switching the brightness of the split display area where the cursor display stopped, so that the split display area alternates between a bright display mode and a dark display mode at regular intervals.

The time it takes for the blinking display to switch from a bright to a dim display is set to 20ms. In other words, the time it takes for the blinking display to switch from a bright to a dim display is shorter than the interval (50ms) at which the cursor display is rapidly and cyclically displayed.

This configuration makes it visually clear when the cursor has stopped, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the duration for which blinking is performed in the split-screen area where the cursor display has stopped is set to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to complete one cycle when it is being displayed rapidly and cyclically. For example, the duration for blinking in the split-screen area where the cursor display has stopped is set to 500ms.

This configuration makes it even easier to visually understand when the cursor has stopped, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

When representing such a configuration, the display device can display certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the multiple display areas, sequentially switch and display a selection indicator to show that one of the display areas has been selected, and when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect can be displayed in which the selection indicator is stopped in one of the display areas. The display device can also display a stop display mode in which, when the predetermined condition is met and the selection indicator is stopped in one of the display areas, the stop display mode alternates multiple times between a mode in which the selected display area is brightly displayed and a mode in which the selected display area is darkened. When comparing the time T1 from when a certain display area is selected in each of the display areas to just before the next selection display in the display device, and the time T2 in which the stop display mode of the selection indicator switches from a mode in which the selected display area is brightly displayed to a mode in which the selected display area is darkened, it can be said that T1 > T2.

Furthermore, the blinking display executed in the split-screen area when the cursor display is stopped is made more conspicuous than the movement of the cursor display. For example, the maximum brightness of the blinking display is brighter than the maximum brightness when the cursor display is moving, the difference between the maximum brightness and maximum darkness is greater for the blinking display when the cursor display is moving, and the range of the effect is larger for the blinking display when the cursor display is moving.

This configuration makes it even easier to visually understand when the cursor has stopped, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

This configuration allows the display device to display certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the multiple display areas, sequentially switch and display a selection indicator to show that one of the display areas has been selected, and, when a predetermined condition is met, display a predetermined effect that stops the selection indicator in one of the display areas. Furthermore, when the predetermined condition is met and the selection indicator is stopped in one of the display areas, the display device can display a specific effect on the selected display area. In the situation where the selection indicators are sequentially switched, a predetermined effect is displayed on a certain display area to indicate that a certain display area is selected, and a predetermined effect is not displayed on a certain display area to indicate that a certain display area is not selected, and the specific effect is configured to be more easily recognizable than the predetermined effect.

Furthermore, before starting the roulette animation, the side lamps on the front panel PS2 flash. For example, if the roulette animation is to be performed after all reels have stopped, the side lamp flashing pattern will be executed after all reels have stopped before the cursor movement display for the roulette animation begins. An example of the side lamp flashing animation is a pattern where the side lamps repeatedly light up and turn off in white. The time it takes for the side lamps to light up and turn off is called the flashing cycle, and in this embodiment, the flashing cycle is 100 ms. Note that the color of the side lamps is not limited to white; it may be changed to other colors as appropriate.

With this configuration, players can recognize that the roulette animation is starting via the side lamps, increasing their anticipation for the roulette animation.

Furthermore, the flashing cycle in the side lamp flashing pattern is configured to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next when the roulette display is moving at its fastest speed. For example, if the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next is 50 ms, the flashing cycle is set to 100 ms.

With this configuration, the movement time of the roulette cursor display is shorter than the flashing cycle of the side lamps. This allows for visually rapid cursor movement, preventing the player from being certain they have precisely targeted a specific area of the roulette display. Therefore, even if the cursor stops in an unexpected position, the player's motivation to play will not diminish.

This configuration allows the display device to display certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the multiple display areas it divides into, sequentially switching and displaying a selection indicator to show that one of the display areas has been selected, and displaying a predetermined effect that stops the selection indicator in one of the display areas when a predetermined condition is met. While the predetermined effect is being executed, a predetermined lamp can flash in a predetermined flashing pattern. The time T1 from when one of the display areas is selected to when the selection indicator is sequentially switched and displayed in the display device, to when the next display area to be selected is selected, and the time T2 from when the predetermined lamp lights up to when it turns off in a predetermined flashing pattern, can be expressed as T1 < T2.

Furthermore, regarding the effect switch used to stop the cursor display in the roulette animation, the distance required to press the effect switch to a position where its ON state can be detected is set to 0.8 cm. This means that, assuming a player's hand movement speed of 100 km/h, it takes approximately 0.3 ms to press the effect switch 0.8 cm when it is operated. This approximately 0.3 ms time prevents the player from being certain that they have precisely targeted a certain segmented display area of the roulette animation, thus preventing a decrease in their motivation to play even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position. Generally, when operating an effect switch, the distance a player's hand moves to reach the effect switch is about 50 cm, meaning that it takes 18 ms from the time the player starts moving their hand to press the effect switch until their hand reaches the switch. By adding this 18ms to the time it takes for the performance switch to turn ON, it becomes possible to further prevent players from having absolute certainty that they have precisely targeted a specific segmented display area of the roulette animation. This also helps to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play even if the cursor stops in an unexpected position.

Furthermore, when performing periodic animations, such as roulette animations where the cursor display moves periodically, the system is configured so that the period of the periodic animation does not synchronize with the reel rotation speed, in order to avoid assisting with reel stopping on the main reels. In this embodiment, under the condition that the cursor display movement speed is at its maximum speed, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next is 50 ms. Under the condition that the main reel rotation speed is at its maximum speed (constant speed), the 20-symbol reel rotates 79.5 times per minute, so the time it takes for the reel to move from one symbol to the next is approximately 37.7 ms. Therefore, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next is greater than the time it takes for the reel to move from one symbol to the next.

This configuration allows for a staggered display cycle between the roulette cursor and the reel's symbol movement cycle, thus preventing the need for manual reel stopping on the main reels.

Furthermore, under the condition that the cursor display movement speed is at its maximum, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next is set to 20 ms. And under the condition that the main reel rotation speed is at its maximum (constant) speed, the 20-symbol reel rotates 79.5 times per minute, so the movement time from one symbol to the next on the reel is approximately 37.7 ms. In this case, the system may be configured such that the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next is less than the movement time from one symbol to the next on the reel.

Even with this configuration, the cursor display cycle of the roulette animation and the movement cycle of the symbols depicted on the reels can be staggered, thus preventing the need for manual reel stopping on the main reels. In other words, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next does not need to be equal to the movement time from one symbol to the next on the reels. The time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next, and the movement time from one symbol to the next on the reels, are not limited to the embodiment described above.

In this configuration, the display device displays certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the multiple display areas, sequentially switches and displays a selection indicator to show that one of the display areas has been selected, and when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect is displayed in which the selection indicator in one of the display areas is stopped. When comparing the time T1 from when one of the display areas is selected to when the selection indicator is sequentially switched in the display device, to when the next display area to be selected is selected, with the time T2 from when a certain symbol is displayed in a predetermined position while the reels are rotating at a constant speed to when the next symbol is displayed in a predetermined position, it can be expressed that T1 ≠ T2.

Furthermore, when the game is started by operating the start switch, a waiting period may occur depending on the progress of the previous game. The waiting period can last a maximum of approximately 2-3 seconds. If the roulette animation starts after the start switch is activated, and the waiting period is at its maximum after the start switch is activated, the roulette animation will start after the stop switch becomes available. Even if there is no waiting period after the start switch is activated (i.e., more than 4.1 seconds have passed since the reel rotation started in the previous game), the roulette animation will start before the stop switch becomes available.

This configuration prevents the roulette animation from being skipped by the operation of the stop switch. For example, if the roulette animation ends due to the operation of any of the stop switches, or the third stop operation, or the bet operation for the next game, or the start switch operation for the next game, there is a possibility that the roulette animation may end before the player can fully enjoy it. To prevent this, the start timing of the roulette animation is set to be before the timing when the stop switches become operational. In particular, by starting the roulette animation and completing at least one full rotation of all divided display areas, or by setting the cursor movement speed of the roulette animation to maximum speed, before the timing when the stop switches become operational, the roulette animation can be made more enjoyable, enhancing the excitement of the game.

This configuration allows the display device to display certain information related to the game's progress in each of the multiple display areas it divides into, sequentially switching and displaying a selection indicator to show which of the display areas is selected, and displaying a predetermined effect that stops the selection indicator in one of the display areas when certain conditions are met. This predetermined effect can be executed by operating the start switch, and if the predetermined effect is executed by operating the start switch in a situation where no wait occurs, it can be said that the predetermined effect becomes executable before the stop switch is activated.

Furthermore, if the roulette animation starts after the start switch is activated, a freeze can be triggered after the start switch is activated (before the reels begin to spin), and the roulette animation can begin during the freeze. If the roulette animation starts during the freeze, the freeze will last for several seconds, and the roulette animation will begin during the freeze. The roulette animation may end during the freeze, or it may end at the same time as the freeze ends, or it may continue after the freeze ends.

With this configuration, the roulette animation can be started during the freeze, allowing players to enjoy the roulette animation.

Furthermore, the roulette animation may have multiple patterns for the cursor display's stopping position. For example, there may be a pattern where the cursor moves from its initial position upon activation to a predetermined position in the shortest possible time; a pattern where the cursor moves from its initial position after completing one full rotation to a predetermined position; and a pattern where the cursor moves from its initial position after completing one full rotation to a predetermined position, while also exhibiting a slower cursor movement speed. The selection rate of each cursor movement pattern varies depending on the expected likelihood of whether or not a relatively advantageous reward among those displayed in the split-screen area is awarded to the player.

This configuration allows players to experience a sense of anticipation by observing the cursor's stopping pattern, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the cursor movement cycle for the roulette animation is 50 ms, and this movement cycle is configured not to synchronize with the dynamic lighting cycle. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting cycle is 11.175 ms, and each time the cursor moves one position, a certain lamp (one of the following: credit count indicator, acquired coins indicator, 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, or coin insertion ready lamp) does not light up.

This configuration reduces light stimulation because the brightness of the various lamps and the LCD are not synchronized. This reduces fatigue during gameplay and suppresses the onset of photosensitivity, allowing for safe and extended gameplay.

<Setting Confirmation演出>
In this embodiment, the game includes a presentation that convinces the player of a setting value corresponding to the payout rate of the game machine, and a presentation that convinces the player of a range of setting values corresponding to the payout rate of the game machine. Such presentations are referred to as setting confirmation presentations.

A performance designed to convince a player of a machine's payout rate is one that only appears at a specific setting. For example, if a setting confirmation performance only appears when the machine is set to 6, the player can be certain that the machine is set to 6 upon seeing that performance. Such a performance that confirms a single setting is called a setting confirmation performance (single).

A visual effect designed to ascertain the player's setting value (excluding the range of all setting values) based on the payout rate of a gaming machine is one that only appears within a certain range of setting values. For example, if a setting confirmation effect is performed that only appears when the setting value is 4, 5, or 6, the player can be certain that the setting value is one of those three when they see the effect. Such a setting confirmation effect that confirms a setting within a certain range is called a setting confirmation effect (range).

Note that when simply referred to as "setting confirmation animation," it encompasses a broader concept that includes both "setting confirmation animation (single)" and "setting confirmation animation (range)."

Furthermore, while certain effects may appear at all settings, those that suggest a particular setting is more likely to appear at a specific setting are not included in the setting confirmation effects in this embodiment. For example, if a certain effect appears at 10% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 10% for setting 4, 10% for setting 5, and 20% for setting 6, it is more likely to appear at setting 6, but since it can appear at all settings, the player cannot be certain of the setting when they see the effect; therefore, it is not included in the setting confirmation effects in this embodiment. However, if a certain effect appears at 0% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 10% for setting 4, 10% for setting 5, and 20% for setting 6, the effect will not appear at setting 1, allowing the player to be certain of setting 2 through 6 when they see the effect; therefore, it is included in the setting confirmation effects in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 104, the setting confirmation effects include the start screen of game states such as CZ and AT, the end screen of game states such as CZ and AT, the sound patterns output when the effect switch is operated on the end screen of game states such as CZ and AT, the display of the number of game tokens acquired during AT, the display of the number of added tokens during AT, and sounds output at specific timings (when the button press is successful, at the start of a certain game state, at the end of a certain game state, etc.).

Furthermore, there are cases where, after the end screen of a game state such as a CZ or AT is displayed, the CZ or AT may continue to start when the start switch is operated for the next game (a so-called revival sequence). In this case, the ending screen may have the possibility of selecting a different setting confirmation sequence pattern for a different setting value. For example, if the ending screen is displayed with setting value 2, and the start switch is operated for the next game, the revival sequence may be executed when the start switch is operated for the next game. Thus, the condition for a setting confirmation sequence may or may not include the condition that a revival sequence does not occur (even if a revival sequence occurs, as long as the relationship between the setting value and the setting confirmation sequence is correct).

The information about the setting values revealed by these setting confirmation animations is important for players to use when deciding whether or not to continue playing, and as a guideline for setting goals to achieve during gameplay.

Furthermore, if the highest payout rate setting (setting 6) is determined too early, other gaming machines in the same arcade may be judged as not having setting 6, leading to a decrease in overall operation of the arcade.

Therefore, the triggers and frequency of appearances in the setting confirmation animations are important parameters for enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, the setting confirmation animation, which guarantees a high payout rate (referred to as a high setting) for setting 5 and setting 6, is one of the animations that players are most interested in. Therefore, if it appears too frequently, players may assume that the absence of the setting confirmation animation means they are playing a setting with a low payout rate (referred to as a low setting), which could lead to them abandoning the game prematurely.

In light of this, the numerator of the setting confirmation演出 (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the CZ ending screen, which is one of the predetermined setting confirmation演出s, is set to 1, and the denominator is set to a value of approximately 10,000 or more, which is the maximum number of plays in one day (12 hours of operation). For example, if the probability of winning a CZ with setting values 1 to 6 is set to 1/120 (assuming that the CZ ending screen is always displayed when a CZ is won), and the probability of winning the setting confirmation演出 (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the CZ ending screen for each play is set to 1/100, then 1/120 × 1/100 = 1/12000, and the denominator (12000) when the numerator is 1 is set to 10,000 or more, which is the maximum number of plays in one day (12 hours of operation). The probability of winning 1/10000 at least once when playing 10,000 times is 63.21%. In other words, the probability of winning something with a 1/10,000 chance in 10,000 tries is 63.21%, and the probability of not winning something with a 1/10,000 chance in 10,000 tries is 36.79%.

With this configuration, the probability of the setting confirmation animation (single) appearing on the CZ ending screen after 10,000 plays is 56.54%, which is less than 63.21%. Even if the setting confirmation animation (single) does not appear on the CZ ending screen, the probability of the setting being 6 is 43.46%, which is more than 36.79%. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation animation (single) does not appear on the CZ ending screen, it is less likely to cause players to abandon the game. Furthermore, when the numerator is 1, the denominator represents the number of plays required to reach a point where there is a 50% or higher probability of winning. By setting the probability denominator to a value of 10,000 or more, even if it doesn't appear after playing for a day, it cannot be definitively concluded that the setting is low, thus preventing a decrease in the motivation to return to the arcade.

Furthermore, when the numerator of the setting confirmation animation (single) that confirms setting value 6 on the AT ending screen is set to 1, the denominator is set to a value of approximately 10,000 or more, which is the maximum number of plays per day (12 hours of operation). For example, if the probability of winning an AT with setting values 1 to 6 is 1/500 (assuming the AT ending screen is always displayed when an AT is won), and the probability of winning the setting confirmation animation (single) that confirms setting value 6 on the AT ending screen is 3/100, then 1/500 × 3/100 = 1/16666.67, and the denominator (16666.67) when the numerator is 1 is 10,000 or more, which is the maximum number of plays per day (12 hours of operation).

With this configuration, the probability of the setting confirmation animation (single) appearing on the AT ending screen after 10,000 plays is 45.12%, which is less than 63.21%. Even if the setting confirmation animation (single) does not appear on the AT ending screen, the probability of the setting being 6 is 54.88%, which is more than 36.79%. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation animation (single) does not appear on the AT ending screen, it is less likely to cause players to abandon the game.

Furthermore, among the setting confirmation演出 (single) sequences that confirm a setting value of 6, the denominator when the numerator is 1 for the combined appearance probability of the setting confirmation sequences (single) that confirm a setting value of 6 on the CZ ending screen and the AT ending screen is less than 10,000, which is the maximum number of plays per day (12 hours of operation).

For example, in the embodiment described above, the probability of the setting confirmation animation (single) confirming a setting value of 6 appearing on the CZ ending screen for each game is 1/12000, and the probability of the setting confirmation animation (single) confirming a setting value of 6 appearing on the AT ending screen for each game is 1/16666.67. Therefore, the combined probability of the setting confirmation animation (single) confirming a setting value of 6 appearing on the CZ ending screen and the AT ending screen is 1/6976.74, and the denominator (6976.74) when the numerator is 1 is less than the maximum number of games played in a day (12 hours of operation), which is 10,000.

Furthermore, the combined probability of all single-setting confirmation animations that guarantee a setting of 6 appearing is not 1/2000 or higher. This is because the average number of plays per day (12 hours of operation) is approximately 2000. If the combined probability of all single-setting confirmation animations that guarantee a setting of 6 were set higher than this average number of plays, players would assume that the absence of these animations meant a low setting, increasing the likelihood of them leaving the game early. Therefore, the combined probability of all single-setting confirmation animations that guarantee a setting of 6 appearing is set to 1/2000 or higher.

This configuration makes it less likely for players to abandon the game even if the setting confirmation animation (single) is not displayed, and it also increases their motivation to play, encouraging them to continue playing until there is a chance of the setting confirmation animation (single) being displayed.

The selection ratio of this type of presentation pattern will be explained using Figure 105. Note that the payout rates for settings 1 to 6 in Figure 105 are the same as in the gaming machine of this embodiment, with setting 1 having the lowest payout rate and setting 6 having the highest. Furthermore, for settings 2 to 5, the payout rate increases as the setting value increases.

The probability of winning the CZ (Chance Zone) shown in Figure 105 is 1/120, and the probability of winning the AT (Attack Time) is 1/500. Note that the probabilities of winning the CZ and AT can be freely designed in the specifications of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the probability of winning a CZ (Chance Zone) and an AT (Attack Time) may vary depending on the setting value. For example, the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/139 and the probability of winning an AT at setting value 1; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/130 and the probability of winning an AT at setting value 2; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/541 at setting value 3; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/128 and the probability of winning an AT at setting value 3; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/538 at setting value 4; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/126 and the probability of winning an AT at setting value 4; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/532 at setting value 5; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/124 and the probability of winning an AT at setting value 5; the probability of winning a CZ might be 1/120 and the probability of winning an AT at setting value 6; the probability of winning a CZ and an AT might be 1/500 at setting value 6. Thus, the probability of winning a CZ and an AT may increase as the setting value increases (as the payout rate increases), or conversely, the probability of winning a CZ and an AT may decrease as the setting value increases (as the payout rate increases).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figure 105, "default" refers to the normal presentation pattern, not the setting confirmation presentation. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that can appear regardless of the setting value.

"Setting 2 or higher confirmed" is a visual effect pattern that, when it appears, confirms that the setting value is one of the following: setting 2, setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6. In other words, it is a visual effect pattern that will not appear with setting 1.

"Setting 3 or higher confirmed" is a visual effect pattern that, when it appears, confirms that the setting value is one of the following: setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6. In other words, this visual effect pattern will not appear with setting values 1 or 2.

"Setting 4 or higher confirmed" is a visual effect pattern that, when it appears, confirms that the setting value is either 4, 5, or 6. In other words, it's a visual effect pattern that does not appear with settings 1, 2, or 3.

"Setting 5 or higher confirmed" is a visual effect pattern that, when it appears, confirms either setting 5 or setting 6. In other words, it's a visual effect pattern that does not appear with settings 1, 2, 3, or 4.

"Setting 6 Confirmed" refers to a visual pattern that, when it appears, confirms that the setting value is 6. In other words, it's a visual pattern that does not appear with settings 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

"Even-numbered setting confirmed" is a visual pattern that, when it appears, confirms that the setting is 2, 4, or 6. In other words, it is a visual pattern that does not appear with settings 1, 3, or 5.

The "Setting 2 Denial" animation pattern, when it appears, confirms that the setting value is one of the following: setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6. In other words, it is an animation pattern that does not appear with setting 2. Furthermore, the probability of winning the "Setting 2 Denial" animation pattern at a setting with a payout rate lower than the denial setting value (setting 1 in Figure 105) is lower than the probability of winning the animation pattern at a setting with a payout rate higher than the denial setting value (settings 3, 4, 5, and 6 in Figure 105). Therefore, if the "Setting 2 Denial" setting confirmation animation appears, it can be expected that the setting value is 3 or higher. Alternatively, the "Setting 2 Denial" setting confirmation animation could appear more frequently as the setting value increases. In this case, the probability of the setting value being 6 increases when the "Setting 2 Denial" setting confirmation animation appears, and the higher the setting, the more reliable the setting value estimation becomes.

This configuration has multiple setting values with different payout rates, a first setting value negation animation that makes it clear that the setting is not the first setting value, a second setting value different from the first setting value, and a third setting value different from the first and second settings. The third setting value has a higher payout rate than the second setting value, and it can be said that the first setting value negation animation is more likely to appear when playing with the third setting value than when playing with the second setting value.

Furthermore, in Figure 105, the performance patterns belonging to the "Setting Confirmation Performance (Single)" category are the "Setting 6 Confirmation" performance patterns, while the performance patterns belonging to the "Setting Confirmation Performance (Range)" category are the "Setting 2 or Higher Confirmation," "Setting 3 or Higher Confirmation," "Setting 4 or Higher Confirmation," "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmation," "Even Setting Confirmation," and "Setting 2 Negated."

Furthermore, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the CZ ending screen is 1%, and since the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the CZ ending screen for each game is 1/12000.

Furthermore, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen is 3%, and since the AT winning probability is 1/500, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen for each game is 1/16666.67.

Furthermore, even if the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern is not triggered when the setting value is 6, it may still be confirmed as setting 6. This is determined by the results of multiple successful setting confirmation animations (ranges).

For example, in the case of the CZ ending screen pattern shown in Figure 105, if the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" and "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation patterns are selected, it will be determined that the setting value is 6. If the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" animation pattern is selected, either setting value 5 or setting value 6 is confirmed. If the "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation pattern is then selected, since setting value 5 is odd, it will be determined that the setting value is 6.

In this way, when the setting value is determined by multiple setting confirmation animations (ranges), the probability of winning with multiple setting confirmation animation patterns (ranges) is higher than the probability of winning with a single setting confirmation animation pattern.

To explain this using Figure 105, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern on the CZ ending screen when the setting value is 6 is 1%, the probability of winning the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" animation pattern on the CZ ending screen when the setting value is 6 is 2%, and the probability of winning the "Even Setting Confirmed" animation pattern on the CZ ending screen when the setting value is 6 is 5%. Therefore, with a CZ (Chance Zone) winning probability of 1/120, the CZ ending screen will be displayed an average of 83 times in 10,000 games. In a setting of 6, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" pattern appearing on those 83 CZ ending screens is 1 - (1 - 1/100)^83 × 100, which is 56.58%. The probability of both the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" and "Even Setting Confirmed" patterns appearing on those 83 CZ ending screens in a setting of 6 is (1 - (1 - 2/100)^83) × (1 - (1 - 5/100)^82) × 100, which is 80.09%. Therefore, the probability of multiple setting confirmation patterns appearing and determining that the setting is 6 is higher than the probability of a single setting confirmation pattern appearing and determining that the setting is 6.

Furthermore, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the CZ ending screen for each game played in a single day (12 hours of operation) is 1/12000, the probability of the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the CZ ending screen for each game played in a single day (12 hours of operation) is 1/6000, and the probability of the "Even Setting Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the CZ ending screen for each game played is 1/2400. Therefore, the denominators (6000 and 2400) when the numerator is 1 for each CZ ending screen in a single day (12 hours of operation) are less than the maximum number of games played in a single day (12 hours of operation), which is 10,000.

Therefore, with a setting of 6, the probability of either the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" or "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation pattern appearing within a day increases. This means that if you play for a full day, you can expect to see either the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" animation pattern or the "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation pattern, and even both. Therefore, players who play for longer periods have a higher chance of discovering setting 6 than those who play for shorter periods, thus increasing their motivation to play.

This configuration allows for the execution of a first setting confirmation animation, which enables the player to recognize that the game is at a predetermined setting value; a second setting confirmation animation, which enables the player to recognize that the game is at any setting value including the predetermined setting value; a third setting confirmation animation, which enables the player to recognize that the game is at any setting value including the predetermined setting value; and, when both the second and third setting confirmation animations are executed, the player can recognize that the game is at the predetermined setting value. Furthermore, the probability of the first setting confirmation animation being executed is lower than the probability of both the second and third setting confirmation animations being executed.

Furthermore, similar to the CZ ending screen, if the AT ending screen displays both the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" and "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation patterns, it will be determined that the setting is 6. In a setting of 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 confirmed" animation pattern on the AT ending screen is 3%, the probability of winning the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" animation pattern is 4%, and the probability of winning the "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation pattern is 10%. Therefore, with an AT winning probability of 1/500, the AT ending screen will be displayed an average of 20 times in 10,000 games. In a setting of 6, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" pattern appearing on the 20 AT ending screens is 1 - (1 - 3/100)^20 × 100, which is 45.62%. The probability of both the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" and "Even Setting Confirmed" patterns appearing on the 20 AT ending screens in a setting of 6 is (1 - (1 - 4/100)^20) × (1 - (1 - 10/100)^19) × 100, which is 48.26%. Therefore, the probability of multiple setting confirmation patterns appearing and revealing a setting of 6 is higher than the probability of a single setting confirmation pattern appearing and revealing a setting of 6.

Furthermore, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen for each game during a 12-hour day of operation is 1/16666.67, the probability of the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen for each game during a 12-hour day of operation is 1/12500, and the probability of the "Even Setting Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen for each game is 1/5000. Therefore, the probabilities of the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" animation pattern and the "Even Setting Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen for each game during a 12-hour day of operation are higher than the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing on the AT ending screen for each game during a 12-hour day of operation.

Therefore, with a setting of 6, the probability of either the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" or "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation pattern appearing within a day increases. This means that if you play for a full day, you can expect to see either the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" animation pattern or the "Even-numbered setting confirmed" animation pattern, and even both. Therefore, players who play for longer periods have a higher chance of discovering setting 6 than those who play for shorter periods, thus increasing their motivation to play.

Furthermore, if the setting value is 6, the probability that the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern, which confirms the setting value is 6, will appear on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen within a day is 100 - ((100 - 56.58) × (100 - 45.62)) = 76.39%. The probability that both the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" animation pattern and the "Even Setting Confirmed" animation pattern will appear on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen within a day is 100 - ((100 - 80.09) × (100 - 70.32) × (100 - 54.97) × (100 - 48.26)) = 98.62%. Furthermore, the probability of determining setting 6 within a single day through either the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern (where setting 6 is confirmed on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen) or through both the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" animation pattern and the "Even Setting Confirmed" animation pattern (where setting 6 is confirmed on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen) is 100 - ((100 - 76.39) × (100 - 98.62)), which is 99.67%.

Therefore, in a setting of 6, players can expect to see animations that almost certainly confirm setting 6 by playing for an extended period, thus increasing their motivation to play for longer periods and boosting machine usage.

In Figure 105, with setting value 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern on the CZ ending screen is 1/100. The denominator (100) when the numerator is 1 is smaller than the average number of CZ wins over 10,000 plays (equivalent to the daily maximum play limit) (83 times), and larger than the average number of CZ wins over 2,000 plays (equivalent to the daily average play limit) (16 times). This indicates that the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern is less likely to appear on the CZ ending screen even during a single day of play.

Furthermore, in Figure 105, under setting value 6, the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation animations on the CZ ending screen is 20/100. The denominator (5) when the numerator is 1 is smaller than the average number of CZ wins (83 times) over 10,000 plays (corresponding to the daily maximum number of plays), and also smaller than the average number of CZ wins (16 times) over 2,000 plays (corresponding to the daily average number of plays).

With this configuration, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation appearing on the CZ ending screen during a day of gameplay under setting 6 is low (56.58%), but the probability of any setting confirmation animation appearing is high (99.99%). Therefore, seeing any setting confirmation animation will motivate players to continue playing, and players who have seen one may continue playing until they see the next setting confirmation animation, leading to longer-term gameplay motivation.

This configuration has multiple setting values with different payout rates, and among the multiple setting values, there is a first setting value with the highest payout rate. When playing with the first setting value, it is possible to execute a first setting value confirmation animation on the ending screen indicating that a predetermined game state has ended, allowing the player to recognize that it is the first setting value. When playing with the first setting value, it is possible to execute a second setting value confirmation animation on the ending screen indicating that a predetermined game state has ended, allowing the player to recognize that it is one of the setting values, including the first setting value. There are multiple types of second setting value confirmation animations, and in the situation where the first setting value is used, 10000 In a single game, the average number of times the ending screen indicating the end of a predetermined game state may be displayed is smaller than the denominator when the numerator of the probability of executing the first setting value confirmation animation on the ending screen is set to 1. Conversely, in 10,000 games played under the first setting condition, the average number of times the ending screen indicating the end of a predetermined game state may be displayed is larger than the denominator when the numerator of the probability of executing one of the multiple second setting value confirmation animations on the ending screen is set to 1.

In Figure 105, with setting value 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern on the AT ending screen is 3/100. The denominator (33.33) when the numerator is 1 is greater than the average number of AT wins (20 times) over 10,000 plays (corresponding to the daily maximum number of plays), and also greater than the average number of AT wins (4 times) over 2,000 plays (corresponding to the daily average number of plays).

Furthermore, in Figure 105, under setting value 6, the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation animations on the AT ending screen is 39/100. The denominator (2.56) when the numerator is set to 1 is smaller than the average number of AT wins (16 times) over 2000 plays, which corresponds to the average number of plays per day.

With this configuration, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation appearing on the AT ending screen during a day of gameplay under setting 6 is low (45.62%), but the probability of any setting confirmation animation appearing is high (99.99%). Therefore, seeing any setting confirmation animation will motivate players to continue playing, and players who have seen one may continue playing until they see the next setting confirmation animation, leading to longer-term gameplay motivation.

Furthermore, similar to the CZ ending screen, the denominator of the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern on the AT ending screen (when the numerator is set to 1) may be smaller than the average number of AT wins (20 times) over 10,000 plays, which corresponds to the daily maximum number of plays.

Furthermore, players often use the end of the first AT (Automatic Trigger) round as a criterion for deciding whether or not to continue playing.

Therefore, while the single-symbol setting confirmation animation is unlikely to appear within the average number of games played to see the first AT ending screen, it is desirable to configure the system so that some kind of setting confirmation animation may appear.

If the AT winning probability is 1/500, the average number of games played until AT is 500. The number of games played from the start to the end of AT varies depending on the AT stay ratio. If the AT stay ratio is set to 30%, which is below the upper limit of 70%, then the average number of games played per AT is 150 ((maximum number of games played per day 10,000 × 30%) / (maximum number of games played per day 10,000 × AT winning probability 1/500)), so the number of games played from the start to the end of the first AT is 650. In this situation where the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed"演出 pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 games is 1 - (1 - 1/100)^5 + 1 - (1 - 3/100)^1 × 100 (%) = 7.90%. Furthermore, with the setting value at 6, the probability of winning either the setting confirmation animation pattern on the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen after 650 games is (1 - (80/100)^5) × (1 - (61/100)^1) × 100 (%), which is 26.22%. In other words, with the setting value at 6, the probability of winning either the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen after 650 games is less than the probability of winning either the setting confirmation animation pattern on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen after 650 games with the setting value at 6.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, while the single-pattern setting confirmation animation is unlikely to appear within the average number of games played to see the first AT ending screen, the machine is configured to allow for the appearance of some kind of setting confirmation animation. This means that while setting 6 is unlikely to be confirmed after the first AT ending in a setting 6 situation, some kind of setting confirmation animation is more likely to appear, thus increasing the motivation to play for extended periods.

Furthermore, players often aim to play until they reach the number of games required to guarantee an AT (Attack Time) or CZ (Chance Zone) (the so-called "ceiling play count") as a criterion for deciding whether or not to continue playing.

Therefore, while it is unlikely that a single setting confirmation animation pattern will appear within the average number of plays required to reach the ceiling play count and see the CZ (Chance Zone) or AT (Attack Time) end screen, it is desirable to configure the system so that some kind of setting confirmation animation may appear.

If the number of games played to guarantee an AT is 1000, and the number of games played from the start to the end of the AT varies depending on the AT stay ratio, but assuming the AT stay ratio is 30%, which is less than the upper limit of 70%, the average number of games played per AT is 150 ((maximum number of games played per day 10000 × 30%) / (maximum number of games played per day 10000 × AT winning probability 1/500)), so the number of games played from the start to the end of the first AT is 1150. In this situation where the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ ending screen after 1150 games is 1 - (1 - 1/100) to the power of 8, which is 7.73%. Also, since the AT has not been won within 1000 games, it is only one AT due to the ceiling, so the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT ending screen is 3%. In other words, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern appearing upon reaching the ceiling is 1 - (1 - 0.0773) × (1 - 0.03) × 100 (%) = 35.41%. Also, in a situation where the setting value is 6, the probability of winning any setting confirmation animation pattern on the CZ ending screen after 1150 games is (1 - (80/100)^8) × 100 (%) = 83.22%. Furthermore, since the AT has not been won within 1000 games, there is only one chance due to the ceiling, so the probability of winning any setting confirmation animation pattern on the AT ending screen is 31%. In other words, the probability of any setting confirmation animation pattern appearing upon reaching the ceiling is 1 - (1 - 0.8322) × (1 - 0.61) × 100 (%) = 93.46%. In other words, the probability of triggering the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation pattern on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen after 1150 games with the setting value set to 6 is less than the probability of triggering any setting confirmation animation pattern on either the CZ ending screen or the AT ending screen after 1150 games with the setting value set to 6.

Therefore, in this embodiment of the gaming machine, while the single-pattern setting confirmation animation is unlikely to appear within the average number of games played to see the AT ending screen after reaching the ceiling, the machine is configured so that some kind of setting confirmation animation may appear. This means that while it is difficult to confirm setting 6 after the first AT ends when the setting is 6, some kind of setting confirmation animation is likely to appear, thus increasing the motivation to play for extended periods.

Furthermore, in Figure 105, when the number of plays until the ceiling is reached is 1000 and the probability of winning a CZ (Chance Zone) is 1/120, the average number of CZ wins until reaching the ceiling is 8. Since the probability of any setting confirmation animation appearing on the CZ ending screen is 1/5, the average number of CZ wins until reaching the ceiling is greater than the denominator (5) when the numerator of the probability of any setting confirmation animation appearing on the CZ ending screen is 1.

Therefore, even if you play until you reach the ceiling, the setting confirmation animation is more likely to appear at least once, which helps maintain the motivation to continue playing even after the AT ends after reaching the ceiling.

In a different embodiment, if the maximum number of plays until the ceiling is reached is 1000, the probability of winning a Chance Zone (CZ) is 1/120, and the probability of any setting confirmation animation appearing on the CZ ending screen is 1/10, then the average number of CZ wins until the ceiling is smaller than the denominator (10) when the numerator of the probability of any setting confirmation animation appearing on the CZ ending screen is 1. In this case, even if the game is played until the ceiling is reached, the setting confirmation animation is less likely to appear. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation animation does not appear after reaching the ceiling, there is still a possibility of a high setting, which can help maintain the motivation to continue playing.

The AT ending screen described above is a normal ending screen, but a special ending screen different from the normal ending screen may also be provided for AT. For example, the ending screen accompanying the ending sequence that is executed when the number of acquired items exceeds a predetermined number or when the number of consecutive ATs exceeds a predetermined number may be a special ending screen.

If the condition for reaching the ending is that the number of acquired coins exceeds a predetermined number, then it is conceivable to use MY2400 coins, the condition for ending the advantageous period, as the basis for the predetermined number. In other words, since the advantageous period ends at MY2400 coins, the ending sequence could be initiated during approximately 50 to 100 games played, and the ending sequence's ending screen (special ending screen) could be displayed when MY reaches 2400 coins and the advantageous period ends. Note that any number of acquired coins, not just MY2400, could be used as the basis.

When the condition for reaching the ending is set as exceeding a predetermined number of consecutive AT (Attack Time) rounds, any number of consecutive AT rounds may be used as the criterion. For example, if the ending sequence is to be executed after 10 rounds, the system may be configured to execute the ending sequence and display the ending screen after the AT round count reaches 10, regardless of the number of games played.

Because these special ending screens appear less frequently than normal ending screens, the probability of the setting confirmation animation appearing is increased compared to normal ending screens.

This configuration makes it more likely for the setting confirmation animation to appear when the player reaches the ending, a situation that provides a sense of accomplishment. This increases the player's motivation to continue playing and prevents them from immediately quitting after reaching the ending.

This configuration allows for the execution of a setting confirmation animation during gameplay at a predetermined setting value, enabling the player to recognize that the setting value is predetermined, or that it is any setting value including the predetermined setting value. Furthermore, the setting confirmation animation can be executed on the ending screen, which indicates the end of a predetermined game state. The ending screen comprises a first ending screen that can be displayed when predetermined conditions are met, and a second ending screen that can be displayed when specific conditions are met. It can be said that the setting confirmation animation is more likely to appear on the second ending screen than on the first ending screen.

Figure 105 illustrates a configuration where the same type of presentation pattern can be selected for both the CZ (Challenge Zone) and AT (Attack Time) ending screens. However, the system is not limited to this configuration; different types of presentation patterns may be selected for the CZ and AT ending screens. For example, the CZ ending screen could be configured to allow selection of "Setting 2 or higher confirmed," "Setting 3 or higher confirmed," and "Setting 4 or higher confirmed," while the AT ending screen could be configured to allow selection of "Setting 2 or higher confirmed," "Setting 3 or higher confirmed," "Setting 4 or higher confirmed," "Setting 5 or higher confirmed," and "Setting 6 confirmed." This is because the AT ending screen has a lower appearance probability than the CZ ending screen. Therefore, even if it is easier to display a highly accurate setting confirmation presentation on the AT ending screen, the low appearance rate of the AT ending screen prevents it from appearing too frequently, thus preventing the high-setting confirmation presentation from appearing too early. Furthermore, it prevents the high-setting confirmation presentation from appearing too early on the CZ ending screen.

Conversely, the CZ (Chance Zone) ending screen could be configured to display setting confirmation animations related to higher settings more frequently than the AT (Attack Time) ending screen. In this case, the player's goal becomes more likely to be the CZ (the probability of winning the CZ is higher than that of the AT), thus lowering the barrier to playing until winning the CZ and increasing the player's motivation to play.

In this embodiment, setting confirmation animations different from those shown in Figure 105 may be provided. For example, there may be "Setting 1 Negation," "Setting 3 Negation," etc., which negate a certain setting value; "Setting 5 Confirmation," "Setting 4 Confirmation," etc., which confirm a certain setting value; "Odd Setting Confirmation," etc., which confirms an odd setting value; or "Setting Increase Confirmation," which confirms that the setting value has been changed to a setting value with a higher payout rate than the previous day's setting value. Even in such cases, "Setting 5 Confirmation" and "Setting 4 Confirmation" would belong as single setting confirmation animations, and "Setting 1 Negation," "Setting 3 Negation," "Odd Setting Confirmation," and "Setting Increase Confirmation" would belong as ranged setting confirmation animations. Furthermore, the configuration of the invention described above may be satisfied in embodiments other than this embodiment.

This section will detail the "setting increase confirmation" indicator, one of the setting confirmation indicators mentioned above.

When the "Setting Increase Confirmed" animation pattern appears, it confirms that the machine has a higher setting value than the previous day. For example, if the previous day's setting was 1 and the next day's setting is 2, the "Setting Increase Confirmed" animation pattern may be selected. However, if the previous day's setting was 3 and the next day's setting is 2, the "Setting Increase Confirmed" animation pattern will not be selected.

To determine whether it's the previous day or the next day, the sub-control unit stores multiple sets of settings between power outages. This is because setting changes always involve a power outage. The setting after a certain power outage is stored in a predetermined memory area of the sub-control unit, and the setting after the next power outage is stored in a specific memory area different from the predetermined memory area of the sub-control unit. Furthermore, the predetermined memory area and the specific memory area are configured not to be initialized by power outages or setting changes. Note that the number of setting values spanning power outages stored is not limited to two; three or more may be stored.

With this configuration, power outages will not occur during normal business hours. A power outage would indicate the end of business for the day, and power restoration would signify the opening of the amusement facility the following day. Therefore, the sub-control means stores the setting values between power outages. If the setting value stored in a specific memory area is greater than the setting value stored in a predetermined memory area, the system will use a performance table that allows the selection of the "setting increase confirmed" performance pattern. To use the performance table that allows the selection of the "setting increase confirmed" performance pattern, a flag enabling the selection of the setting increase confirmed performance pattern should be stored in a certain memory area of the sub-control means.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during business hours and the power is restored, the settings will not change before and after the power outage. Therefore, after the power is restored, a presentation table will be selected that does not display the "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern. As a result, the "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern will no longer appear, but since this does not display any information unfavorable to the player, any problems can be prevented.

Furthermore, the flag that enables the selection of the setting increase confirmation animation pattern, which is stored in a certain memory area of the sub-control means, is configured to be initialized during the power-on initialization process. This configuration ensures that the setting increase confirmation animation pattern is temporarily disabled upon power-on after a power outage. Therefore, it becomes less likely that the flag enabling the setting increase confirmation animation pattern will be stored due to a malfunction when the setting value decreases before or after a power outage.

Furthermore, in order to determine whether or not to display the "setting increase confirmed" animation pattern, the sub-control means is designed to store multiple setting values between power outages. However, it is not limited to this; the sub-control means could also store multiple setting values between setting changes. Even in this case, by initializing the flag that enables the selection of the setting increase confirmed animation pattern when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the setting increase confirmed animation pattern from appearing even if the setting change device is not activated during preparation for opening the next day (so-called "left unchanged").

Furthermore, by incorporating an RTC (Real Time Clock), the system could determine whether it's the next day or not based on the RTC information, compare the setting values from the previous day and the next day, and select a "setting increase confirmed" animation pattern if the setting value has increased.

In this configuration, the main control means has a first setting value storage area capable of storing the set value, and the sub-control means has a second setting value storage area capable of storing the set value. The first setting value storage area is configured to be initialized during the initialization process associated with the setting change, while the second setting value storage area is configured not to be initialized during the initialization process associated with the setting change. If a setting change is performed while the setting is at the first setting value, and the setting is changed to the second setting value which has a higher payout rate than the first setting value, then in the game played while the setting is at the second setting value, a first setting value confirmation animation can be executed, allowing the player to recognize that the current setting value has a higher payout rate than the previous setting value.

In this embodiment, the system may be configured so that the setting confirmation animation appears more frequently as the number of games played since power-on increases.

For example, in Figure 106, the appearance rate of each setting confirmation animation pattern differs depending on whether the number of games played is 1000G or less, 1001G to 3000G, 3001G to 5000G, or 5001G or more. Furthermore, as the number of games played progresses from less than 1000G to less than 3000G, 3001G to less than 5000G, and 5001G or more, the appearance rate of each setting confirmation animation pattern increases.

Furthermore, the appearance rate of the setting confirmation animation on the CZ ending screen in Figure 105 is based on the animation table that can be selected between 3001 and 5000 games played. For earlier game plays, the appearance rate of each animation pattern decreases. For example, when the game play count is 1000 games or less, the appearance rate of the default screen on the CZ ending screen is 95% or higher for all setting values.

This configuration prevents situations where the setting value is determined immediately in the morning, while encouraging players to continue playing until they reach a number of plays where setting confirmation animations are likely to appear, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that while Figure 106 only explains the CZ (Chance Zone) ending screen, the appearance rate of other setting confirmation animations, as shown in Figure 104, also increases as the number of gameplay rounds increases.

In this embodiment, an example was described with setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 in descending order of payout rate. However, a gaming machine with a setting value L that has a lower payout rate than setting value 1 may also be used.

Setting L is designed to have a payout rate of approximately 80% to 90%, which is more than 10% lower than the payout rate of setting 1. For example, the payout rate for setting L is 80%, setting 1 is 97%, setting 2 is 98%, setting 4 is 101%, setting 5 is 105%, and setting 6 is 110%. While the difference between setting 1 and setting 2 is only about 1%, the difference between setting L and setting 1 is 17%. Thus, setting L is the setting that has the largest difference in payout rate compared to its neighboring setting when the settings are arranged in order of payout rate. Note that there can only be a maximum of six setting values; therefore, if setting L is included, one of the settings from 1 to 6 will be omitted. In the example above, setting 3 is omitted.

Even in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a setting value L, the storage range of the setting value storage area of the main control means is 0 to 5. That is, the value in the setting value storage area is 0 for setting value L, 1 for setting value 1, 2 for setting value 2, 3 for setting value 4, 4 for setting value 5, and 5 for setting value 6.

Furthermore, when a setting value falls outside the range due to fraudulent activity or other reasons, resulting in an abnormal state, the setting value stored in the setting value memory area may be reset to either 0 or 1. If 0 is stored in the setting value memory area, the setting value can be reset to the lowest payout rate setting value after fraudulent activity, thus minimizing losses for the arcade. If 1 is stored in the setting value memory area, losses for players can be minimized even if the setting value becomes 1 due to a malfunction.

Furthermore, since setting value L is a test setting and is not normally intended for use in the operation of amusement facilities, the "Setting L Confirmed" animation pattern is more likely to be selected when setting value L is set. In other words, the "Setting L Confirmed" animation pattern is included in the setting confirmation animation.

The "Setting L Confirmed" presentation pattern involves a special screen or sound being executed at a high frequency (50% to 100%) when the start switch is operated, or a special screen being displayed at a high frequency (50% to 100%) at the end of the CZ or AT. This is designed to allow players to quickly realize that the setting is L and thus deter them from playing machines with setting L.

Furthermore, if the setting value is L, the lower panel 5 may be turned off during the demo screen display (lower panel 5 is lit during the demo screen display if the setting value is 1 or higher), or lower panel 5 may be kept off at all times (lower panel 5 is normally lit if the setting value is 1 or higher), to inform the player that the setting value is L. Note that in eco mode, lower panel 5 may also be turned off, but this does not indicate that the setting value is L.

In other words, the probability of executing the "Setting L Confirmed" animation under conditions where the setting value is L is met is higher than the probability of executing the "Setting 6 Confirmed" animation under conditions where the setting value is 6 is met. The predetermined conditions include those that enable the execution of the setting confirmation animation, such as operating the start switch or displaying the CZ or AT ending screen.

This makes it easier for players to recognize when the setting value L is set, thus discouraging them from playing with excessively low payout rates.

Furthermore, among all the setting confirmation animations, the "Setting L Confirmation" animation pattern is the most frequently selected.

This makes it easier for players to quickly recognize that the setting value L is set, thus discouraging them from playing with excessively low payout rates.

Furthermore, by ensuring that setting value L is available but setting value 3 is not (resulting in a six-level setting of setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6), the "even setting confirmed" animation pattern can be made more likely to appear. If setting value 4 is removed, the setting becomes six levels: setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 5, and setting value 6. Therefore, when the "even setting confirmed" animation pattern is displayed, it becomes a choice between setting value 2 or setting value 6 (since setting value L is not an even number). This would drastically reduce the payout rate when "even setting confirmed" appears and the setting value is 2, lowering the player's repeat rate for that machine. Also, even if the proportion of setting value 6 in "even setting confirmed" is increased, it becomes impossible to differentiate it from "setting 6 confirmed."

Therefore, by ensuring that there is no odd-numbered setting value when setting value L is present, the gameplay possibilities for "even-numbered setting confirmed" are expanded, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

This configuration has multiple setting values with different payout rates, a first setting value with the highest payout rate among the multiple setting values, a second setting value which is the setting value with the lower payout rate among adjacent setting values when the multiple setting values are arranged in order of payout rate, and which has the largest difference in payout rate between it and the adjacent setting value, and in the game played with the first setting value, a first setting value confirmation animation can be executed so that the player can recognize that it is the first setting value, in the game played with the second setting value, a second setting value confirmation animation can be executed so that the player can recognize that it is the second setting value, and in the game played with setting values classified as even, a third setting value confirmation animation can be executed so that the player can recognize that the setting value is even, and in the game played with the first setting value, the probability of the first setting value confirmation animation being executed is lower than in the game played with the second setting value, and it can be said that there are more types of setting values classified as even among the multiple setting values than there are more types of setting values classified as odd among the multiple setting values.

However, if the payout design is such that setting 5 has a higher payout rate or more volatile payouts than setting 6, or if setting 5 is the highest setting, or if there is a "confirmed odd setting" animation pattern, then the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by omitting one even setting when setting L is present.

Furthermore, under the setting value L, the following setting confirmation animation patterns, such as "Setting 1 Negated," "Setting 2 Negated," and "Setting 3 Negated" (if Setting 3 exists), which negate a certain setting value, are not selected.

This reduces the gambling potential of setting L, making it easier for players to realize that it's not a good setting.

Furthermore, under setting value L, the system may be configured so that only the default ending screen can be displayed on the CZ and AT ending screens. In this case, the setting confirmation animation will not be displayed on the CZ and AT ending screens.

This reduces the gambling potential of setting L, making it easier for players to realize that it's not a good setting.

Furthermore, under setting value L, the average number of games played or the average number of coins won when an AT (Attack Time) is won is lower than with other settings. In other words, setting value L results in a lower AT duration compared to other settings.

This reduces the gambling potential of setting L, making it easier for players to realize that it's not a good setting.

Figures 107 and 108 show the internal lottery data when a setting value L is selected. In Figures 107 and 108, the settings are listed in descending order of payout rate: setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6. Furthermore, winning a Big Bonus (BB) during non-RT (Replay Time) mode transitions to RT1. Since BBs are extremely difficult to win during RT1, the game is designed to be played in RT1 mode except during factory default settings.

The items in Figures 107 and 108 are the same as those in Figure 19. Figures 107 and 108 have an item called "Role," which explains the role of each condition device. For example, "Press-order Bell - 123" indicates that when the stop switches are operated in the order of left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch, a high-paying bell will be displayed on the active line. If the stop switches are operated in any order other than left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch, the high-paying bell will not be displayed on the active line, and a low-paying bell or a missed bell will be displayed on the active line depending on the timing of the stop switch operation. Also, "Biased Bell - 312" refers to a group of small wins where the high-paying bell will not be displayed on the active line if a certain stop switch is stopped first. In Figures 107 and 108, there is a group of small wins where the high-paying bell can only be stopped by the first stop of the right stop switch. In this case, if the right stop switch is stopped first without any specific instruction (not in AT, etc.), a penalty will be incurred, such as not executing the processing related to the instruction function. Furthermore, "Single Coin Payout (1/4)" indicates that when the left or right stop switch is stopped first, there is a 1/4 chance that a single coin payout will be displayed on the active line, and a missed payout will be displayed 3/4 of the time. Additionally, "Common Bell" indicates that a small payout equivalent to a high-payout bell will be displayed on the active line regardless of the order of button presses or timing of stop switch operation.

In Figures 107 and 108, the number of instances of setting value L in the sequence of bell combinations (winning combinations A1 to A14) is the smallest compared to other setting values. For example, the number of instances of setting value L is 1080 in all condition devices, while the number of instances of setting value 1 is 2466 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 2 is 2462 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 4 is 2456 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 5 is 2446 in all condition devices, and the number of instances of setting value 6 is 2438 in all condition devices.

Thus, with setting value L, the probability of the internal lottery result being one of the sequenced bell symbols is lower compared to other settings. Therefore, fluctuations in payout due to more or fewer sequenced bell symbols appearing than average can be suppressed (variance is reduced), allowing for a stable, low payout rate.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, the biased bell group (winning-B1 to winning-B4) also shows the smallest number of settings for the setting value L compared to other settings.

Therefore, even in the biased bell group, with setting value L, the probability that the result of the internal lottery will be one of the biased bell groups is lower compared to other settings. This suppresses the volatility of payout fluctuations caused by biased bells appearing more or less than average (reducing variance), allowing for a stable, low payout rate.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, the difference between the setting value L of the A1 condition device for winning in the sequence of bells and setting value 1 is greater than the difference between the setting value L of the B1 condition device for winning in the biased bells and setting value 1. This is true for both condition devices.

As a result, the number of bell symbols in the order of pressing the buttons (12960) is greater than the number of bell symbols in the biased order (8140). Therefore, in the conditional device group with a high probability of winning, lowering the number of symbols with setting value L is more effective in maintaining a stable, lower payout rate.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, the number of instances of setting value L is the largest compared to other setting values for the single-coin wins (win-D1 to win-D4) that do not result in a simultaneous win with a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB). For example, the number of instances of setting value L is 6140 in all condition devices, while the number of instances of setting value 1 is 1000 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 2 is 1000 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 4 is 1000 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 5 is 1000 in all condition devices, and the number of instances of setting value 6 is 1000 in all condition devices.

Thus, at setting value L, the single-coin payout occurs more frequently than at other settings, preventing the payout rate from becoming too low. Furthermore, even if the 1/4 single-coin payout rate at setting value L is higher than average, the payout rate will not increase sharply, allowing for a stable, low payout rate.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, in non-RT mode, the number of instances of setting value L is the smallest compared to other setting values for the single-coin winning combinations (winning-E1 to winning-E4) that are simultaneously won with type 1 BB. For example, the number of instances of setting value L is 1131 in all condition devices, while the number of instances of setting value 1 is 2302 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 2 is 2299 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 4 is 2290 in all condition devices, the number of instances of setting value 5 is 2277 in all condition devices, and the number of instances of setting value 6 is 2269 in all condition devices.

As a result, other setting values are more likely to transition to Type 1 Big Bonus (BB) in simulation tests (tests where all winning condition devices result in a payout) than setting value L, thus suppressing the payout rate for setting values other than setting value L in the simulation tests. Note that the payout rate during Type 1 Big Bonus is less than 100%.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, the number of instances of setting value L is the smallest compared to other setting values for weak watermelon (winning - F). For example, the number of instances of setting value L is 27, while the number of instances of setting value 1 is 601, the number of instances of setting value 2 is 603, the number of instances of setting value 4 is 619, the number of instances of setting value 5 is 651, and the number of instances of setting value 6 is 667.

This reduces the probability of winning with a weak watermelon at setting value L, thereby lowering the probability of the instruction function being executed by a weak watermelon. For example, it can reduce the chances of winning a CZ or AT from a weak watermelon, allowing for a consistently low payout rate.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, the number of instances of setting value L is the largest compared to other setting values in the common bell (winning - M). For example, the number of instances of setting value L is 4842, while the number of instances of setting value 1 is 4, the number of instances of setting value 2 is 51, the number of instances of setting value 4 is 122, the number of instances of setting value 5 is 241, and the number of instances of setting value 6 is 336.

This increases the probability of a small win with a payout equivalent to a high-payout bell being displayed at setting L, thus preventing the payout rate at setting L from becoming too low. Furthermore, at setting L, the number of bell combinations is less likely to occur than at other settings; therefore, the common bell compensates for the lower probability of high-payout bells being displayed at this time.

Furthermore, in Figure 107, the advantageous section transition lottery (which guarantees a transition to the advantageous section) is possible for wins E1 to E4, but in Figure 108, the advantageous section transition lottery is not possible. Therefore, depending on whether or not a transition to the advantageous section occurred when wins E1 to E4 were achieved, it is possible to determine whether the advantageous section termination conditions were met during the factory default (non-RT) or during the advantageous section within a Type 1 Big Bonus (BB). As a result, the game state at the start of the advantageous section when wins E1 to E4 during RT1 and transition to the advantageous section provides greater benefits to the player than when wins E1 to E4 during non-RT. This allows players to continue to obtain significant benefits even after reaching the advantageous section termination condition of 2400 coins, thus maintaining a favorable state for the player even across the advantageous section.

<Structure related to lower panel 5>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a lower panel 5 is provided at the bottom of the front door PS2. As shown in Figure 1, the lower panel 5 is about 1/4 to 1/3 the size of the front side (the side visible to the player) of the front door PS2, and by lighting the lower panel lamp provided inside the lower panel 5, it can be made conspicuous in the gaming hall.

The lower panel 5 is configured to protect a design sheet depicting characters and the title of the gaming machine with a translucent, transparent acrylic plate. The lower panel locking portion extends from the edge of the lower panel 5 at a predetermined position on the front side of the front door PS2, covering the LED circuit board on which the lower panel lamp located in the front door PS2 is mounted. This portion is inserted into the opening of the front door PS2 and locked to the back side of the front door PS2. The lower panel locking portion may be located in one place or multiple places.

The lower panel locking portion extending from the lower panel 5 is also part of the acrylic plate and is a translucent, transparent material. Furthermore, the lower panel locking portion is an elastically deformable hook shape. After the lower panel locking portion deforms and is inserted into the opening of the front door PS2, it elastically deforms and catches on the back side of the front door PS2, securing it in place. The lower panel locking portion is visible from the back side of the front door PS2.

As described above, the lower panel 5 is hooked onto the back of the front door PS2, making it difficult to remove from the front side of the front door PS2. However, it can be easily removed from the back side of the front door PS2 by releasing the hook on the lower panel's locking mechanism.

The lower panel lamp is a full-color LED capable of illuminating in white or red, and may be used to indicate the status of the gaming machine. The illumination color of the lower panel lamp can be close to white.

When the lower panel lamp illuminates in white, the entire lower panel 5 (including the lower panel locking mechanism) emits white light. When the lower panel lamp illuminates in red, the entire lower panel 5 (including the lower panel locking mechanism) emits red light.

Figure 109 will be used to further explain the rear portion of the front door PS2.

The front door PS2 has a lower panel lamp located on the front side of the front door PS2, as well as a reel illumination lamp located above or below the display window on the back side of the front door PS2 to illuminate the reels from the front. In Figure 109, it is located below the reel display window, but it may also be located above, or in both locations (above and below). The reel illumination lamp illuminates in white or near-white to improve the visibility of the symbols.

Furthermore, on the back of the front door PS2, there is a designated opening (harness opening) for passing a predetermined harness connected to the LED board on which the lower panel lamp is mounted. This opening allows the LED board on which the lower panel lamp is mounted and the sub-board on which the lamp control means is mounted to be connected via a predetermined harness.

Furthermore, a transparent component is provided in the area where the lower panel on the back of the front door PS2 is covered, allowing a portion of the back surface of the lower panel to be visible. The back of the front door PS2 is formed of a sheet metal frame with opaque resin and sheet metal, but some transparent components and openings that allow light to pass through are also formed there.

The lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and transparent member shown in Figure 109 do not necessarily have to be present; any one of them may be present. Furthermore, there may be other means of visibility that allow the light from the lower panel to be seen from the back of the front door PS2.

Next, we will explain the lighting patterns of the lower panel lamps.

The lower panel lamp has a lighting pattern where it illuminates in white when the front door PS2 is closed. For example, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp illuminates in white at a predetermined timing after power-on, and maintains this white lighting pattern even as gameplay progresses through betting, reel rotation, and payout. Furthermore, when a demo screen is displayed on the LCD after a predetermined time has elapsed without any bets being placed, the lower panel lamp switches to the demo lighting pattern. The demo lighting pattern, by repeatedly lighting up and turning off, indicates that the machine is not in operation and informs the player that the machine is available. The lower panel lamp may also remain illuminated in white even when the demo screen is displayed. Additionally, the lower panel lamp may be turned off during gameplay to indicate anticipation or the game status.

Furthermore, when the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is illuminated in white under predetermined conditions (such as during game standby or gameplay), opening the front door PS2 (detecting the opening of the front door PS2) will switch the illumination pattern of the lower panel lamp. The following describes the multiple illumination patterns that occur when the front door PS2 is opened.

<<Pattern 1>>
When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white, under certain conditions (such as waiting to play (waiting for a bet), playing, or when the lower panel lamp is not lit in the demo pattern), opening the front door PS2 (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected) will switch the lower panel lamp to a red lighting pattern.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, red light is visible from the lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and transparent material on the back of the front door PS2. This reduces visibility to the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp illuminates in white.

Because red light has a lower brightness than white light, even if light from the lower panel lamp leaks through the lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and transparent component, the internal structure is more difficult to see when the light is red compared to when it is white. Especially during amusement arcade hours, when the lights are dimmed, the internal structure can be made even more difficult to see when the unit is installed in an amusement arcade.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone attempts to illegally open the front door PS2 and commit fraud, the visibility to the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it more difficult to carry out such fraudulent activity and thus deterring illegal activities.

This configuration includes a front door and a lower panel located below the front door. In a predetermined situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel can emit light in a predetermined color. When the front door is opened from this predetermined situation, the lower panel can emit light in a specific color different from the predetermined color.

<<Pattern 2>>
When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white under certain conditions (such as waiting to play (waiting for a bet), playing, or when the lower panel lamp is not lit in the demo pattern), opening the front door PS2 (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected) will switch the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp to one where it is off.

This prevents light from leaking from the lower panel through the lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and transparent material on the back of the front door PS2 when it is open. Therefore, it reduces visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp is lit in white.

When the lower panel lamp is turned off to prevent light from leaking through the lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and transparent components, the internal structure becomes more difficult to see compared to when the lamp is emitting white light. Especially during operating hours in amusement facilities, when the lights are dimmed, the internal structure can be made even more difficult to see when the unit is installed in amusement facilities.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone attempts to illegally open the front door PS2 and commit fraud, the visibility to the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it more difficult to carry out such fraudulent activity and thus deterring illegal activities.

This configuration includes a front door and a lower panel located below the front door. In a predetermined situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel can illuminate in a predetermined color. When the front door is opened from this predetermined situation, the lower panel can be deactivated.

<<Pattern 3>>
When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white, under certain conditions (such as waiting to play (waiting for a bet), playing, or when the lower panel lamp is not lit in the demo pattern), opening the front door PS2 (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected) will switch the lower panel lamp to a flashing pattern in white. An example of a flashing pattern is a pattern in which the lamp turns on and off every second.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, the lower panel lamp flashes white and is visible through the lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and transparent material on the back of the front door PS2. This reduces visibility to the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp is lit white.

Even if the lower panel lamp is white, flashing it makes the internal structure more difficult to see compared to when the light from the lower panel lamp, the lower panel locking mechanism, the harness opening, and the light leaking from the transparent material are all white. This is especially useful when the lights are dimmed during amusement arcade operating hours, making the internal structure even more difficult to see when the device is installed in an arcade.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone attempts to illegally open the front door PS2 and commit fraud, the visibility to the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it more difficult to carry out such fraudulent activity and thus deterring illegal activities.

This configuration includes a front door and a lower panel located below the front door. In a predetermined situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel can illuminate in a predetermined color. When the front door is opened from this predetermined situation, the lower panel can illuminate in a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, regarding the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp when the front door PS2 is open, using a red flashing pattern, rather than just a white flashing pattern, can further reduce visibility to the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3.

As a common feature of the above-mentioned Patterns 1, 2, and 3, the front door PS2 may illuminate in a predetermined color other than white when closed. However, since bright colors are preferable, highly luminous or highly saturated colors such as orange or pink are desirable.

Furthermore, as a common configuration, the reel illumination lamp, which is lit when the front door PS2 is closed, may be turned off when the front door PS2 is opened. In other words, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamp is lit in white, the lower panel lamp may light up, turn off, or blink in a predetermined color that is darker than the predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamp may turn off.

This further reduces visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 when the front door PS2 is open, thereby deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as a common configuration, when the LCD display for the front door PS2 is closed under predetermined conditions switches to a front door PS2 open display (door open error notification) when the front door PS2 is opened, the front door PS2 open display may be displayed in a darker color when compared to the LCD display before the switch. A darker color could, for example, display "Door Open Error" in red letters on a black background.

This reduces visibility of the back of the PS2 front door and the inside of the PS3 cabinet by dimming the light from the LCD when the front door of the PS2 is opened, thereby deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as a common configuration, if the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode after the front door PS2 is opened, the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp may switch from the lighting pattern after the front door PS2 is opened to the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp in the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the front door PS2 is opened while the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamp is lit in white, the lower panel lamp will light up, turn off, or blink in a specific color that is dimmer than the predetermined color. Subsequently, if the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode are met and the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the lower panel lamp will switch to the lighting pattern corresponding to the setting confirmation mode.

The lighting patterns corresponding to the lower panel lamp setting confirmation mode include patterns where the lamp lights up in a predetermined color, patterns where the lamp lights up in a color brighter than a specific color, the same lighting pattern as when the front door PS2 is closed, and flashing patterns different from the flashing pattern when the front door PS2 is open (for example, a pattern where the lamp lights up and turns off every two seconds).

In such cases, to deter fraud, the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 are made difficult to see when the front door PS2 is opened. Then, when the arcade staff enters the setting confirmation mode to perform setting verification, the lower panel lamp switches to a lighting pattern that makes the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 easier to see than the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open. This increases the efficiency of the arcade staff's work. Furthermore, if the front door PS2 is open when the setting confirmation mode ends after meeting the termination conditions, the lower panel lamp switches back to the lighting pattern used when the front door PS2 is open.

Furthermore, as a common configuration, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is illuminated in a predetermined color, a demo screen is displayed on the LCD, and the back lamp is illuminated in a demo pattern. When the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamp may switch to a pattern of illumination, extinguishing, or flashing in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, and the back lamp may switch to a steady illumination pattern.

This improves visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 when the front door PS2 is opened, making it easier for arcade staff to resolve errors and check settings.

Furthermore, if the focus of the challenge is on improving the work efficiency of arcade staff rather than suppressing fraudulent activity, then, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, a demo screen is displayed on the LCD, and the back lamp is lit in a demo pattern. If the front door PS2 is then opened, the lower panel lamp may maintain its predetermined color illumination pattern, while the back lamp switches to a different illumination pattern.

This improves visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 when the front door PS2 is opened, making it easier for arcade staff to clear errors and check settings. Furthermore, it is more energy-efficient than simply controlling the back light to blink.

Furthermore, in a configuration different from the above-described embodiment, the front door PS2 may not have a translucent lower panel locking portion, harness opening, or transparent member on its rear side. Instead, all members visible from the rear side of the front door PS2 may be made of non-translucent materials.

Even in this case, when the front door PS2 is open, the visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be reduced, thus deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in a configuration different from the above-described embodiment, when the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is illuminated in white under predetermined conditions (such as during game standby or gameplay), and the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the illumination pattern of the lower panel lamp does not change (the illumination pattern of white is maintained).

This configuration makes it easier for arcade staff to check for errors and other malfunctions, and to verify settings, as the back of the front door PS2 and the interior of the cabinet PS3 become more visible when the front door PS2 is open, thanks to the light transmitted from the lower panel locking mechanism, harness opening, and the lower panel lamp leaking through the transparent material.

<A new way of initiating a favorable game state (AT game state)>
Next, we will explain a new way of initiating a favorable game state. In the following explanation, we will use the AT game state as a specific example of a favorable game state.

However, a favorable game state is not limited to AT game states. For example, it could be any game state that allows for the extension of playable AT game states, such as an AT bonus-focused game state. In other words, a favorable game state is any game state that is advantageous to the player compared to a different predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state designed to have the highest stay rate, or the game state immediately before the favorable game state begins).

Furthermore, a new method for initiating a favorable game state will be described. However, in the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the favorable game state may be initiated using this new method, or it may be initiated using another method (for example, a conventional method). In other words, the machine may be configured to initiate a favorable game state without using the new method.

Conventionally, in a non-AT state, there was a chance zone to initiate AT. In this chance zone, if a specific combination of symbols (a small symbol or a replay) was won through a draw (internal draw), and the stop switch was operated with the correct button sequence for that combination, AT would begin. If the stop switch was operated with an incorrect button sequence, the chance zone would end (returning to the normal non-AT state). (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-72791)

In the conventional gameplay described above, the AT (Attack Time) state does not begin unless a specific button sequence (a small win or a replay) is won in the chance zone and the stop switch is operated in the correct sequence. Therefore, players must wait for a specific button sequence to be won, and depending on the probability of winning the specific button sequence in the draw, the chance zone can be prolonged. Furthermore, if a specific button sequence is won, and the player operates the stop switch in the wrong sequence, the chance zone ends, and the player must continue playing until the chance zone is re-entered.

On the other hand, the new method for initiating the advantageous game state, as described below, allows for a reduction in the number of games required to initiate the advantageous game state compared to conventional methods. Furthermore, even if the player makes a mistake in stopping the stop switch, the number of games required to initiate the advantageous game state can still be reduced. These effects reduce player stress.

<<Explanation of major game states>>
First, I will explain the characteristics of the main game states, including the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state.

In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game can transition to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state in the following order: Normal game state → Pre-announcement game state → AT preparation game state → AT game state.

Therefore, we will explain the four game states: normal game state, pre-announcement game state, AT preparation game state, and AT game state. Note that the transitions between these game states are controlled by the main control means.

Furthermore, while we will explain the four game states—normal game state, pre-bonus game state, AT preparation game state, and AT game state—these four states do not necessarily represent all possible game states. In other words, the game may have other game states different from these four. Similarly, the game does not need to have all four of these game states (at least the AT preparation game state and the AT game state are sufficient).

1) Normal game state The characteristics of the normal game state are as follows:

a) The "normal game state" is the game state designed to have the highest retention rate.

(i) The normal game state is one of the game states within the advantageous period. For example, the main game state can be set to "0".

Furthermore, the "main game state" refers to the game state related to the instruction function controllable by the main control means.

(c) In the normal gameplay state, the AT transition lottery can be executed as part of the processing related to the instruction function.

E) In the normal game state, as a process related to the instruction function, it is possible to update the remaining number of games until the ceiling (the number of games until a game state more advantageous than the normal game state, such as AT game state, AT preparation state, or pre-announcement game state, is confirmed) is reached. For example, if the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached is 500, playing with a non-penalty press as described below will change the remaining number of games until the ceiling to 499. The number of games until the ceiling can be arbitrarily determined depending on the game machine, such as 1000 or 1500.

(e) In normal gameplay, if the player first operates the stop switch corresponding to the left reel (also referred to as "non-irregular pressing" or "non-penalty pressing"), the system will be able to perform the AT transition lottery and update the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached as part of the instruction function. On the other hand, if the player first operates the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel (also referred to as "irregular pressing" or "penalty pressing"), the system will not perform the AT transition lottery or update the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. In other words, the system is configured to perform a penalty process if the game is played using irregular pressing.

Furthermore, even if the game is played using irregular button presses, the AT transition lottery and the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached may still be updated.

However, when playing with irregular button presses, the probability of winning an AT (the probability of obtaining the right to transition to AT) and the frequency of updating the remaining number of games are lower than when playing with non-irregular button presses. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to play with non-irregular button presses than to play with irregular button presses.

(c) If the AT transition lottery is won, information indicating that the AT transition lottery was won can be stored in the RWM.

Here, "storing information indicating a successful AT transition lottery in the RWM" means, for example, storing the number of pre-trigger games (e.g., "16") in a memory area capable of storing the number of pre-trigger games, or storing information corresponding to the next main game state in a memory area capable of storing the main game state (for example, updating the information in the main game state memory area from "normal game state" to "pre-trigger game state"). Other information may also be stored in the RWM.

(k) If you win the AT transition lottery, the game state for the next game can be set to a pre-announcement game state.

Furthermore, if the AT transition lottery is won, the game may proceed directly to the AT preparation game state without going through the pre-announcement game state.

(k) The designed payout rate during normal gameplay is less than 100%, regardless of the setting value.

2) Pre-game state The characteristics of the pre-game state are as follows:

a) A pre-announcement game state is a game state in which the player has the right to transition to an AT (Automatic Trigger) mode.

(i) The pre-game state is one of the game states within the advantageous period. For example, it can be designated as Main Game State "1".

(c) The pre-symptom game state allows for updating the number of pre-symptom games as part of the processing related to the instruction function.

E) In the pre-symptom game state, if the player plays using a non-irregular button press pattern, the pre-symptom game count can be updated (for example, by subtracting 1). On the other hand, if the player plays using an irregular button press pattern, the pre-symptom game count will not be updated.

Furthermore, even if an irregular button press occurs, the pre-announcement game count may still be updated.

However, when playing with irregular button presses, the frequency of updating the pre-bonus game count is lower than when playing with non-irregular button presses. Therefore, playing with non-irregular button presses allows you to end the pre-bonus game state more quickly.

(e) When the conditions for ending the pre-game state are met (for example, when the number of pre-game sequences becomes "0"), information indicating the end of the pre-game state can be stored in the RWM.

Here, "storing information in the RWM indicating the end of the pre-game state" means, for example, storing information corresponding to the next main game state in a memory area capable of storing the main game state (for example, updating the information in the main game state memory area from "pre-game state" to "AT preparation state"). Other information may also be stored in the RWM.

(c) If the conditions for ending the pre-battle state are met, the game state for the next game will be set to the AT preparation state.

(k) The display device 32 is configured to execute effects corresponding to the pre-announcement game state. These effects can lead the player to anticipate whether or not they have the right to transition to AT (Automatic Trigger). However, even if the game state is normal, the display device 32 may execute effects similar to those of a pre-announcement game state to make the player believe they are in a pre-announcement game state. This state, where the game state is normal but appears to be a pre-announcement game state, is sometimes referred to as a "pre-announcement game state."

(k) The designed payout rate during the pre-game state is less than 100%, regardless of the setting value.

3) AT preparation game state (AT preparation in progress)
The characteristics of the AT preparation game state are as follows:

a) The AT preparation game state is a game state in which the player has the right to transition to AT (Automatic Trigger).

(i) The AT preparation game state is one of the game states during the advantageous period. For example, it can be set to Main Game State "2".

(c) In the AT preparation game state, as a process related to the instruction function, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 can be used to notify the player of the stop switch operation method (also referred to as "AT"). Details of the notification of the stop switch operation method in the AT preparation game state will be described later.

E) For games that can meet the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met, information indicating a transition to the AT game state is stored in the RWM (Runtime Memory).

Here, "storing information indicating a transition to the AT game state in the RWM" means, for example, storing information corresponding to the next main game state in a memory area capable of storing the main game state (for example, updating the information in the main game state memory area from "AT preparation game state" to "AT state"), or storing initial values related to the AT game state (for example, AT game count information, AT difference in tokens information, etc.). Other information may also be stored in the RWM.

Further details regarding the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state will be provided later.

(e) In games where the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state can be met, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met, the AT preparation game state will continue. In other words, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state can be met in a game, but the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met, the game will not transition to the normal game state.

(c) In games where the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state can be met, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met, the game state for the next game will be set to the AT game state.

(k) The display device 32 is configured to execute effects corresponding to the AT preparation game state. Through these effects corresponding to the AT preparation game state, the player can understand that they have the right to transition to AT. Specific examples of effects displayed by the display device 32 during the AT preparation game state will be described later.

(c) The designed payout rate during the AT preparation game state is less than 100%, regardless of the setting value.

4) AT game state (AT)
The characteristics of the AT game state are as follows:

a) The AT (Automatic Trigger) game state is one of the game states within the advantageous period. For example, it can be set to Main Game State "3".

(i) As part of the instruction function processing, the AT game state allows the player to be notified of the stop switch operation method using the instruction monitor and the display device 32.

The AT game state is synonymous with "AT," "sub-bonus," and "AT state," and these have been explained above. Therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(c) The AT (Automatic Trigger) game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the payout rate in the AT game state is designed to exceed 100% regardless of the setting value.

<<A variation showing the transition to the AT preparation game state>>
As described above, the sequence of transitions from normal gameplay to pre-AT gameplay to AT preparation gameplay is as follows. However, the sequence of events leading up to the transition to AT preparation gameplay is not limited to the example described above.

For example, the game could transition from normal gameplay to Chance Zone (CZ) gameplay to AT preparation gameplay in that order.

In such cases, the system allows for a draw to transition to the CZ (Chance Zone) game state while in normal game mode. If the draw is successful, the system will then transition to the CZ game state.

During the CZ (Chance Zone) game state, the AT (Attack Time) transition lottery can be performed. If the AT transition lottery is successful, the game can transition to the AT preparation game state. On the other hand, if the AT transition lottery is unsuccessful, the game can transition to the normal game state.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned variations are merely examples; any game state can be used as long as it is possible to transition to the AT preparation game state before starting the AT game state.

<<Characteristics of Internal Drawing in AT Preparation and AT Play State (Part 1)>>

The same prize draw table is used in both the AT preparation state and the AT game state. In other words, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met in the AT preparation state, the prize draw table does not change. Therefore, for the same settings, the types of prizes won and the probability of winning prizes are the same in both the AT preparation state and the AT game state. In other words, even if the main game state changes, the RT state does not.

By configuring it in this way, the number of types of role-drawing tables is not increased, thus preventing the main control ROM capacity from being strained.

Furthermore, the same winning combination table can be used for normal gameplay, AT preparation gameplay, and AT gameplay. This configuration avoids increasing the number of winning combination tables, thus further reducing the strain on the main control ROM capacity.

Similarly, when a pre-bonus game state exists, the same prize draw table can be used for the normal game state, the pre-bonus game state, the AT preparation game state, and the AT game state. This configuration avoids increasing the number of prize draw tables and thus prevents further strain on the main control ROM capacity.

Similarly, when the game is in a CZ (Chance Zone) state, the same winning combination table can be used for the normal game state, the CZ state, the AT (Attack Time) preparation state, and the AT (Attack Time) state. This configuration avoids increasing the number of winning combination tables and thus prevents excessive strain on the main control ROM capacity.

<<Explanation of internal lottery during AT preparation and AT gameplay>>
The internal lottery (winning combination lottery) during the AT preparation game state and the AT game state will be explained using Figure 110. It should be assumed that the same internal lottery as in Figure 110 is also performed during the normal game state. Furthermore, the same internal lottery as in Figure 110 may also be performed during other game states.

Figure 110 illustrates the roles related to the transition conditions to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state during the AT preparation game state.

In other words, roles that are not related to the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state during the AT preparation game state are not shown in the diagram.

For example, during the AT preparation game state, there are symbols that are not related to the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, such as the replay symbol, symbols that do not depend on the order of button presses (e.g., the common 10-coin symbol), and the 1-coin symbol. However, these symbols will not be explained here.

Furthermore, this embodiment is designed on the premise that the player will bet 3 while carrying over bonus winning information. Specifically, in the design, over 90% of the time, the player will be playing with a bet of 3 while carrying over bonus winning information. In other words, the game is designed so that the player can play with a bet of 3 while carrying over bonus winning information and transition from the AT preparation state to the AT game state.

Therefore, the explanation using Figure 110 describes the case where the game is played with a bet of 3 while the bonus winning information is carried over. Consequently, when playing with a bet of 3 while the bonus winning information is not carried over, the number of game tokens issued and the stop switch operation that maximizes the number of game tokens issued may differ from the explanation using Figure 110.

Furthermore, it should be noted that even when playing with a bet of 3 under circumstances where bonus winning information has not been carried over, it is possible to adopt a new method for initiating a favorable game state (AT game state).

Furthermore, winning a certain role may be referred to as "winning a designated role," "being determined to win a designated role," "being determined to a certain winning number," "being determined to a designated winning number," "being determined to a certain lottery result," or "being determined to a designated lottery result."

First, let's explain the terminology used in Figure 110.

The name refers to the designation used to distinguish each winning combination (draw result).

The correct stopping operation sequence refers to the sequence of stopping operations of the stop switch that results in the largest number of game tokens being awarded when that role is won.
For example, the correct stopping sequence being "left → middle → right" refers to the order in which the first stopping operation is the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the second stopping operation is the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, and the third stopping operation is the stop switch corresponding to the right reel.

As mentioned above, the "placement count" corresponds to the number of winning combinations for each combination as defined in the internal lottery table. For example, if the total number of placements is 65536 (the range of possible random numbers is 0 to 65535), then dividing each placement count by 65536 gives the winning probability. For instance, since the placement count for the winning combination A1 is 4, the winning probability is 4/65536. Note that the placement counts shown in Figure 110 are just examples and can be set to any value.

The number of points awarded upon a correct answer refers to the number of game tokens awarded when the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping operation manner.

The number of points awarded upon incorrect answer refers to the number of game tokens awarded when the stop switch was not operated in the correct stopping operation manner.

The "Normal Gameplay Navigation" refers to the type of navigation information corresponding to the operation of the stop switch, which is communicated to the player during normal gameplay. Specifically, "×" indicates that information corresponding to the stop switch operation is not communicated to the player. In other words, during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not communicate information corresponding to the correct stop operation. However, at a lower frequency than during AT gameplay (for example, less than 1/10), the instruction monitor and display device 32 may communicate information corresponding to the correct stop operation.

The "AT preparation game state navigation" refers to the type of navigation information corresponding to the operation of the stop switch, which is notified to the player during the AT preparation game state. Specifically, "correct navigation" refers to the notification of information corresponding to the correct stop operation on the instruction monitor and display device 32. "Special navigation" refers to the notification of information corresponding to a special stop operation on the instruction monitor and display device 32. Note that the information corresponding to a special stop operation differs from the information corresponding to the correct stop operation. This point will be explained later.

The AT game state navigation refers to the type of navigation information corresponding to the operation of the stop switch, which is communicated to the player during AT game state. Specifically, the correct answer navigation refers to the notification of information corresponding to the correct stop operation on the instruction monitor and the display device 32.

Next, we will explain the points awarded for correct and incorrect answers.

The roles can be broadly divided into two groups: Group A (A1 to A6) and Group B (B1 to B6).

Details of each role belonging to Prize Group A will be described later, but if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, the symbol combination that assigns "X (where X is a numerical value)" as the number of game tokens will be displayed. On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct manner, the symbol combination that assigns "X (where X is a numerical value)" as the number of game tokens will not be displayed.

In the following explanation, we will use "X" as 10, but it is not limited to 10; any value is acceptable.

Furthermore, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner, the symbol combination that assigns 1 (a value smaller than X) as the number of game tokens will be displayed as a stop. However, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner, it is acceptable for a losing symbol combination (a number of game tokens assigned to 0) to be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

The roles belonging to the winning group B will be described later, but if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, the symbol combination that assigns "Y (where Y is a numerical value)" as the number of game tokens will be displayed when stopped. On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct manner, the symbol combination that assigns "Y (where Y is a numerical value)" as the number of game tokens will not be displayed when stopped.

In the following explanation, "Y" will be assumed to be 10, but it is not limited to 10; any value is acceptable.

Furthermore, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner, the symbol combination that assigns 1 (a value smaller than Y) as the number of game tokens will be displayed as a stop. However, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner, it is acceptable for a losing symbol combination (number of game tokens assigned to 0) to be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

Furthermore, the relationship between "X" and "Y" can be expressed as X = Y, X > Y, or X < Y.

Furthermore, it is preferable that when the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the number of game tokens awarded is equal to or greater than the number of bets. Therefore, it is preferable that 3 ≤ X and 3 ≤ Y are satisfied.

Next, we will explain each role in the winning group A.

a) Name: Prize A1 (10-coin payout based on biased button press order)
The probability of winning the A1 prize is 4/65536.
When the winning combination A1 is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping operation manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When the winning combination A1 is selected, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that assigns 1 as a game medium will be displayed in the stop display (combinations of symbols that assign 10 as a game medium will not be displayed in the stop display).

Specifically, when the A1 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of left → middle → right, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the middle reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the right reel.

On the other hand, when the A1 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of left → middle → right, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When the A1 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the A1 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the display device 32.

When the A1 winning combination is achieved during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=1" and the display device 32 displays "1・2・3".

i) Name: Prize A2 (10-coin payout based on biased button press order)
The probability of winning the A2 prize is 4/65536.
When the player wins the A2 prize, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the game will be able to stop and display a combination of symbols that will award 10 game tokens.
When the A2 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping operation manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping operation manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the A2 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of left → right → middle, and the combination of symbols that awards 10 game tokens can be displayed. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the middle reel.

On the other hand, when the A2 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of left → right → middle, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When the A2 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the A2 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and "1・3・2" is displayed on the display device 32.

When the A2 winning combination is achieved during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1・3・2".

(c) Name: Prize A3 (10-coin payout based on biased button press order)
The probability of winning the A3 prize is 7314/65536.
When the player wins the A3 prize, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the game will be able to display a combination of symbols that will award 10 game tokens.
When a winning combination A3 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the A3 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of middle → left → right, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when the A3 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of middle → left → right, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

However, if the stopping operation is performed in any of the following order: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, or middle → right → left, the symbol combination that assigns 1 to the number of game tokens will be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the stopping operation is performed in any of the following order: right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, the symbol combination corresponding to a losing combination may be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the A3 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the A3 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "×・?・?".

Here, information corresponding to a special stopping operation means information suggesting that the first stopping operation that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to AT is not left, and information suggesting that the first stopping operation that may satisfy the conditions for transitioning to AT is middle or right. In the following, information corresponding to a special stopping operation means information suggesting that the first stopping operation that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to AT is not left, and information suggesting that the first stopping operation that may satisfy the conditions for transitioning to AT is middle or right.

Furthermore, examples of cases where the conditions for transitioning to AT (Automatic Trigger) are met in games where information corresponding to a special stopping operation is announced will be described later.

In other words, when the A3 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, the information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32.

When the A3 winning combination is achieved during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=3" and the display device 32 displays "2・1・3".

E) Name: Prize A4 (10-coin payout based on biased button press order)
The probability of winning the A4 prize is 7314/65536.
When the player wins the A4 prize, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the game will be able to display a combination of symbols that will award 10 game tokens.
When a winning combination A4 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the A4 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of middle → right → left, and a combination of symbols that awards 10 game tokens can be displayed. Therefore, the correct stopping operation is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the middle reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the left reel.

On the other hand, when the A4 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of middle → right → left, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

However, if the stopping operation is performed in any of the following order: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, or middle → left → right, the symbol combination that assigns 1 to the number of game tokens will be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the stopping operation is performed in any of the following order: right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, the symbol combination corresponding to a losing combination may be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the A4 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the A4 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "×・?・?".

In other words, when the A4 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, the information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the A4 winning combination is achieved during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=4" and the display device 32 displays "3・1・2".

O) Name: Prize A5 (10-coin payout based on biased button press order)
The probability of winning the A5 prize is 7314/65536.
When the A5 prize is won, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping operation manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When a winning combination A5 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping operation manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping operation manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the A5 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of right → left → middle, and the combination of symbols that awards 10 game tokens can be displayed. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when the A5 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → left → middle, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

However, if the stopping operation is performed in any of the following order: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, or right → middle → left, the symbol combination that assigns 1 to the number of game tokens will be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the stopping operation is performed in the order: middle → left → right, or middle → right → left, the symbol combination corresponding to a losing combination may be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When a winning combination A5 is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the A5 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "×・?・?".

In other words, when a winning combination A5 is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the A5 winning combination is achieved during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and "2・3・1" is displayed on the display device 32.

C) Name: Prize A6 (10-coin payout based on biased button press order)
The probability of winning the A6 prize is 7314/65536.
When the winning combination A6 is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When a winning combination A6 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping operation manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping operation manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the A6 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of right → middle → left, and a combination of symbols that awards 10 game tokens can be displayed. Therefore, the correct stopping operation sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when the A6 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → middle → left, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, or right → left → middle, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

However, if the stopping operation is performed in any of the following order: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, or right → left → middle, the symbol combination that assigns 1 to the number of game tokens will be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the stopping operation is performed in the order: middle → left → right, or middle → right → left, the symbol combination corresponding to a losing combination may be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the A6 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the A6 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32.

In other words, when the A6 winning combination is achieved during the AT preparation game state, the information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the A6 winning combination is achieved during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=6" and the display device 32 displays "3・2・1".

Next, we will explain each role in the winning group B.

K) Name: Prize B1 (6-choice button press order 10-coin payout)
The probability of winning the B1 prize is 2080/65536.
When a winning combination B1 is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When a winning combination B1 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when a winning combination (B1) is achieved, the stop switches are operated in the order of left → middle → right, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the middle reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the right reel.

On the other hand, when a winning combination B1 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of left → middle → right, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When a winning combination (B1) is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the player wins the B1 prize during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=1" and the display device 32 displays "1, 2, 3".

When the player wins the B1 prize during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=1" and the display device 32 displays "1・2・3".

(k) Name: Prize B2 (6-choice button press order 10-coin payout)
The probability of winning the B2 prize is 2080/65536.
When the player wins the B2 prize, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the game will be able to stop and display a combination of symbols that will award 10 game tokens.
When a winning combination B2 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping operation manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping operation manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when a B2 prize is won, the stop switches are operated in the order of left → right → middle, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch on the middle reel.

On the other hand, when a B2 prize is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of left → right → middle, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When a B2 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When the player wins the B2 prize during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1・3・2".

When the player wins the B2 prize during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1・3・2".

K) Name: Prize B3 (6-choice button sequence 10-coin payout)
The probability of winning the B3 prize is 2080/65536.
When the player wins the B3 prize, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the game will be able to stop and display a combination of symbols that will award 10 game tokens.
When a winning combination B3 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when a winning combination (B3) is achieved, the stop switches are operated in the order of middle → left → right, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when a winning combination B3 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of middle → left → right, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When a winning combination (B3) is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When a winning combination B3 is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32.

In other words, during the AT preparation game state, when a winning combination B3 is achieved, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

In AT (Automatic Trigger) gameplay mode, when a winning combination B3 is achieved, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=3" and the display device 32 displays "2・1・3".

(C) Name: Prize B4 (10-coin payout with 6 button presses)
The probability of winning the B4 prize is 2080/65536.
When the winning combination B4 is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When a winning combination B4 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the winning combination B4 is achieved, the stop switches are operated in the order of middle → right → left, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when a winning combination B4 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of middle → right → left, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When a winning combination (B4) is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

During the AT preparation game state, when a winning B4 combination is achieved, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "×・?・?".

In other words, when a winning combination B4 is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32.

When the player wins the B4 prize during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=4" and the display device 32 displays "3・1・2".

S) Name: Prize B5 (10-coin payout with 6 button presses)
The probability of winning the B5 prize is 2080/65536.
When a winning combination B5 is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When a winning combination B5 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when a winning combination (B5) is achieved, the stop switches should be operated in the order of right → left → middle, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when a winning combination (B5) is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → left → middle, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When a B5 winning combination is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation. For example, the instruction monitor is off, and the display device 32 is executing the normal animation.

When a winning combination B5 is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32.

In other words, when a winning combination B5 is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When a winning combination (B5) is achieved during AT (Automatic Transmission) gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=5," and the display device 32 displays "2・3・1."

C) Name: Prize B6 (6-choice button sequence, 10-coin payout)
The probability of winning the B6 prize is 2080/65536.
When the winning combination B6 is achieved, and the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping operation manner, the symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens can be stopped and displayed.
When a winning combination B6 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping manner (i.e., if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stopping manner), the combination of symbols that awards 1 game token will be displayed as a stop (combinations of symbols that award 10 game tokens will not be displayed as a stop).

Specifically, when the winning combination B6 is achieved, the stop switches are operated in the order of right → middle → left, allowing the game to display a combination of symbols that awards 10 points as game tokens. Therefore, the correct stopping sequence is as follows: the first stop operation corresponds to the right reel's stop switch, the second stop operation corresponds to the middle reel's stop switch, and the third stop operation corresponds to the left reel's stop switch.

On the other hand, when a winning combination B6 is achieved, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → middle → left, it is possible to award 1 game token. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, or right → left → middle, it is possible to stop and display a symbol combination that awards 1 game token.

When a winning combination (B6) is achieved during normal gameplay, the instruction monitor and display device 32 will not display information corresponding to the correct stopping operation.

When a winning combination (B6) is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to a special stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "×・?・?".

In other words, when a winning combination (B6) is achieved during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the player wins the B6 prize during AT gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=6" and the display device 32 displays "3・2・1".

<<Features of Internal Drawing in AT Preparation and AT Play State (Part 2)>>

The above explains the typical winning combinations in the internal抽選 (random抽選 - random selection) during the AT (Automatic Trigger) preparation and AT game states. The characteristics of these winning combinations are explained below.

Firstly, while the winning combinations A1 through A6 are push-order combinations that award 10 game tokens if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, the winning probabilities are not the same for all of them.

Specifically, the winning probabilities for winning combinations A1 and A2, which result in a symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated first, are designed to be lower than the winning probabilities for winning combinations A3 and A4, which result in a symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens when the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel is operated first, and also lower than the winning probabilities for winning combinations A5 and A6, which result in a symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens when the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated first.

In other words, under circumstances where it is unclear which role has been won (for example, under circumstances where the player is not notified of the stop switch operation method using the instruction monitor and display device as part of the instruction function processing), the probability of a symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens stopping and displaying differs depending on whether the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated first or the stop switch corresponding to the middle or right reel is operated first.

This configuration allows for a lower payout rate (base rate) in normal gameplay, as players will attempt to benefit from the processing related to the instruction function by performing non-irregular button presses (non-penalty presses). This is because the player will then attempt to receive the benefits of the instruction function (e.g., AT transition lottery, update of remaining game count until reaching the ceiling).

Furthermore, by lowering the payout rate (base rate) during normal gameplay, it is possible to create a difference in payout rates between normal gameplay and AT (Automatic Trigger) gameplay.

Secondly, the winning combinations B1 through B6 are push-order combinations that award 10 game tokens if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, and the winning probability is the same for all of them.

In other words, unlike the winning combinations A1 through A6, in situations where it is unclear which combination has been won (for example, in situations where the player is not notified of the stop switch operation method using the instruction monitor and display device 32 as part of the instruction function processing), the probability of a symbol combination that awards 10 game tokens stopping and displaying is the same whether the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated first, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel is operated first, or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated first.

This configuration allows players to perform non-irregular button presses (non-penalty presses) during normal gameplay to receive benefits from the instruction function (e.g., AT transition lottery, update of remaining game count until reaching the ceiling). However, if the number of B1 and B2 winning combinations exceeds expectations, even if the first stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, this configuration has the effect of increasing the payout rate (base) during normal gameplay.

Thirdly, the probability of winning any of the prize combinations A1 through A6 (combined probability) is higher than the probability of winning any of the prize combinations B1 through B6 (combined probability).

Specifically, the probability of winning any of the prize combinations A1 through A6 is 29264/65536, while the probability of winning any of the prize combinations B1 through B6 is 12480/65536.

In particular, the probability of winning each of the prize roles A3 through A6 is 7314/65536, while the probability of winning each of the prize roles B1 through B6 is 2080/65536.

In other words, the probability of winning any of the A3 to A6 prize combinations is 29256/65536, which is designed to exceed the 1/3 probability of winning a combination determined by the draw.

On the other hand, the probability of winning any of the winning combinations B1 through B6 is 12480/65536, which is less than one-third of the probability of winning a combination determined by the draw.

This configuration allows the player to perform non-irregular button presses (non-penalty presses) during normal gameplay to receive benefits from the instruction function (e.g., AT transition lottery, update of remaining game count until reaching the ceiling). Therefore, when playing with non-irregular button presses, even if the player wins any of the A3 to A6 winning combinations, the symbol combination that awards 10 to the game medium will not be displayed as a stop. This allows for a lower payout rate (base) during normal gameplay. On the other hand, during AT gameplay, information regarding the correct stop operation can be provided when any of the A3 to A6 winning combinations are won, allowing for a difference in payout rates between normal and AT gameplay.

Furthermore, while the explanation stated that the winning group A consists of winning role A1 (where the correct stopping sequence is left → middle → right) and winning role A2 (where the correct stopping sequence is left → right → middle), it is not necessary to have winning role A1 or winning role A2.

By configuring it in this way, the payout rate (base rate) in normal gameplay can be further reduced, allowing for a greater variation in payout rates between normal gameplay and AT (Automatic Trigger) gameplay.

Fourth, the navigation system is configured to have different modes depending on the game state.

For example, if any of the winning combinations A3 through A6, or any of the winning combinations B3 through B6, are won, information regarding the correct stopping operation can be displayed during AT gameplay, while information regarding a special stopping operation can be displayed during AT preparation gameplay. On the other hand, if any of the winning combinations A1, A2, B1, or B2 are won, information regarding the correct stopping operation can be displayed during both AT preparation gameplay and AT gameplay.

In other words, if a winning combination is achieved in the AT preparation game state where the first stop operation of the correct stopping pattern is left, information regarding the correct stopping pattern can be displayed. On the other hand, if a winning combination is achieved in the AT preparation game state where the first stop operation of the correct stopping pattern is middle or right, information regarding a special stopping pattern can be displayed.

By configuring the system in this way, the level of benefit (expected value of game tokens) given to the player can be made different for the normal game state, the AT preparation game state, and the AT game state. For example, with a setting of 6, the payout rate for the normal game state can be designed to be 54.9%, the payout rate for the AT preparation state to be 76.6%, and the payout rate for the AT game state to be 248.6%. In other words, the payout rates for each game state are designed to be Normal Game State < AT Preparation Game State < 100% < AT Game State, preventing the player from intentionally increasing their benefit by continuing the AT preparation game state. Note that the relative payout rates for each game state with a setting of 6 are assumed to be the same for other setting values as well.

Fifth, if any of the winning combinations A3 through A6, or any of the winning combinations B3 through B6, are achieved, the AT preparation game state will notify the player of information regarding a special stopping operation, thereby fulfilling the conditions for starting the AT. Details of this point will be described later.

<<Variations of internal lottery>>
Figure 110 illustrates the roles related to the transition conditions to the AT game state during the AT preparation game state. However, different embodiments are also possible. Examples of modifications are given below, and these modifications may be applied independently or in combination.

Firstly, the six hands included in the winning group A are designated as winning hands A1 through A6, but this is not limited to these.

For example, the winning combinations in group A could consist of four combinations: winning combination A3 through winning combination A6. In other words, when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → middle → right, or left → right → middle, the number of symbol combinations that award 10 points as a game token can be reduced.

This configuration allows for a reduction in the payout rate from non-penalty button presses. In other words, the base payout rate during normal gameplay can be further reduced, allowing for greater variation in payout rates between normal gameplay and AT (Automatic Trigger) gameplay. Furthermore, the number of small win types can be reduced, decreasing program and data capacity.

Secondly, while we explained the six winning hands included in the B-group of prize winners (B1 to B6), it is not necessary to possess all of the winning hands in the B-group.

In other words, when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → middle → right, or in the order of left → right → middle, the number of symbol combinations that award 10 points as game tokens can be reduced.

This configuration allows for a reduction in the payout rate from non-penalty button presses. In other words, it lowers the base payout rate during normal gameplay, allowing for a variation in payout rates between normal gameplay and AT (Automatic Trigger) gameplay. Furthermore, it reduces the number of small wins, thereby decreasing program and data capacity.

Thirdly, while the AT game state was described as a single game state, it is also possible to divide the AT game state into multiple game states, such as AT game state 1 and AT game state 2.

For example, if the conditions for transitioning to AT Game State 1 are met while in the AT preparation game state, AT Game State 1 will begin. Then, if the conditions for transitioning to AT Game State 2 are met while in AT Game State 1, AT Game State 2 will begin.

Here, the transition conditions for AT game state 1 can be those described later. Furthermore, the transition conditions for AT game state 2 can be any conditions that can be met in AT game state 1, such as obtaining the right to transition to AT game state 2 as a result of a lottery related to the instruction function in AT game state 1, or playing a specific number of games in AT game state 1.

Furthermore, to differentiate the level of benefit given to the player between AT game state 1 and AT game state 2, the notification of information corresponding to the correct stopping operation may be changed.

For example, in AT game state 1, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation for winning group A is displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32, while information corresponding to the correct stopping operation for winning group B is not displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. On the other hand, in AT game state 2, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation for both winning group A and winning group B is displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, when the setting value is 6, the payout rate for AT game state 1 can be designed to be 188.8%, and the payout rate for AT game state 2 can be designed to be 248.6%. While the relationship between the payout rates for AT game state 1 and AT game state 2 has been explained for setting value 6, it is possible to design the system to be similar for other setting values.

By configuring the game in this way, AT game state 2 offers greater benefits to the player than AT game state 1, creating a new gameplay element where players aim to fulfill the conditions for transitioning to AT game state 2.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even if any of the six winning combinations in the B group of winning combinations are selected, the probability of winning each combination is the same. Since there is no difference in the degree of benefit given to the player depending on the order in which the stop switches are operated, in AT game state 1, there is no need to perform penalty processing (processing that disadvantages the player) associated with stopping the stop switches, thus reducing program capacity. Also, because there is no difference in the degree of benefit given to the player depending on the order in which the stop switches are operated, in AT game state 1, if the information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is not displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32, the player can freely perform the stopping operation. Therefore, a game machine that enhances the player's enjoyment can be provided.

<<Conditions for transitioning from AT preparation game state to AT game state>>
In the AT preparation game state, if a specific role (specific lottery result) is won (determined), and information corresponding to a special stopping operation is announced, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state may be met.

In this embodiment, a specific winning combination corresponds to any of the winning combinations A3 through A6 mentioned above, or any of the winning combinations B3 through B6.

Here, we will explain two examples of conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state.

<<<Example 1 of conditions for transitioning to AT game mode: The stop switch was operated in a specific stopping operation manner>>>

For example, if the first stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, or the first stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are met. On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.

In other words, when "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met when the stop switch corresponding to the reel corresponding to "?" (either the middle reel or the right reel) is first stopped. That is, the type of stop switch used for the second and third stop operations does not matter.

To illustrate with a concrete example, let's explain what happens when you win the A3 prize.

In a game where the A3 role is won during the AT preparation game state and "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device,
a) When the stop switch is operated in the order of left → middle → right, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.
(i) When the stop switch is operated in the order of left → right → middle, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.
(c) When the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → left → right, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
E) When the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → right → left, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
(e) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → left → middle, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
(c) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
This is the result.

The example given shows that operating the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel as the first stop operation satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, but operating the stop switch corresponding to the left reel as the first stop operation does not. However, this is not an exhaustive example.

For example, it's possible to have a system where, if either the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated as the first stop operation, the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are met. However, if a stop switch other than the specific stop switch is operated as the first stop operation, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.

In other words, when "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32, the condition for transitioning to the AT game state is met when either the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel or the right reel (which corresponds to the "?") is first stopped. That is, the type of stop switch used for the second and third stop operations does not matter.

For example, as a method for determining which of the predetermined stop switches corresponds to the middle reel or the right reel, a lottery may be held for each game to determine which stop switch corresponds to the middle reel or the right reel.

Another method of determination is to determine the stop switch corresponding to the winning combination. For example, if the first stop operation in the correct stopping pattern is the middle reel, and any of the winning combinations A3, A4, B3, or B4 are won, the stop switch may be set to correspond to the middle reel. Similarly, if the first stop operation in the correct stopping pattern is the right reel, and any of the winning combinations A5, A6, B5, or B6 are won, the stop switch may be set to correspond to the right reel.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the stop switch that triggers the transition to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state without performing a new lottery.

Furthermore, even if the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping manner and 10 game tokens are awarded, it is possible to prevent situations where the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are not met.

Here, the determination process by which the main control means has met the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is configured to be executed after all reels have stopped. For example, if the main control means were to execute the determination process for meeting the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state after the first stop operation, the reel stop control process due to the second stop operation might be delayed. In other words, by executing the determination process for meeting the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state after all reels have stopped, it is possible to prevent delays in the progress of the game.

However, the main control means may be configured to perform a determination process to determine whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state have been met after the first stop operation or the second stop operation.

If the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are not met, the game state for the next game will be the AT preparation game state.

<<<Example 2 of conditions for transitioning to AT game state: The stop switch is operated in a specific stopping operation manner, and the number of game media provided is 1 or more>>>
For example, if the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel is operated as the first stop operation, or if the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated as the first stop operation, and the number of game tokens issued is 1 or more, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met. On the other hand, if the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated as the first stop operation, even if the number of game tokens issued is 1 or more, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.

In other words, when "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32, and the stop switch corresponding to the reel corresponding to "?" (either the middle reel or the right reel) is first stopped, and the number of game media dispensed is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 1), the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.

This point will be explained using the example of when the A3 prize winner is selected.

In a game where the A3 role is won during the AT preparation game state and "×・?・?" is displayed on the display device 32,
a) When the stop switch is operated in the order of left → middle → right, 1 is assigned as the number of game media, but the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.
(i) When the stop switch is operated in the order of left → right → middle, 1 is assigned as the number of game media, but the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.
(c) When the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → left → right, 10 is assigned as the number of game media, and the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
E) When the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → right → left, the number of game media is assigned as 1, and the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
(o) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → left → middle, and the number of game media is assigned as 1, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
(2) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → left → middle, if 1 is not assigned as the number of game media, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.
(1) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left, and the number of game media assigned is 1, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.
(2) If the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left, and the number of game media is not set to 1, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met.
This is the result.

As shown in (1) and (2) above, even with the same stop switch operation sequence, whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are met depends on whether or not the number of game media assigned is 1.

Similarly, as shown in (1) and (2) above, even with the same stop switch operation sequence, whether or not the number of game media assigned is 1 determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.

Whether or not the number of game tokens assigned is 1 depends on the timing of the operation of the second stop switch, and/or the third stop switch.

Therefore, in Example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, the main control means is configured to perform the determination process of whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state have been met after all reels have stopped.

The above explains the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state, using two examples: Example 1 and Example 2. However, these are merely examples and not the only conditions for transitioning to the AT game state.

At a minimum, in a game where a specific role (specific lottery result) is won (determined) during the AT preparation game state, and information corresponding to a special stopping operation is notified, it is sufficient that the AT transition conditions are not met when the stop switch corresponding to the reel where the first stop operation is "×" is operated, and that the AT transition conditions may be met when the stop switch corresponding to the reel where the first stop operation is "?" is operated.

Furthermore, in a game where a special stopping operation pattern is announced during the AT preparation game state, it is sufficient that the probability of fulfilling the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is the same whether the stop switches are operated in the order of middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the probability of a game in the AT preparation state that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state (the combined probability of winning each specific role) be greater than 1/2. In other words, it is preferable that the game is designed so that a game that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state occurs within an average of two games from the start of the AT preparation state.

In other words, it is preferable that the probability of a game in the AT preparation state where a special stopping operation is announced is greater than 1/2 (greater than the probability of a game in the AT preparation state where a special stopping operation is not announced).

In this configuration, as shown in Figure 110, the combined probability of winning prizes A3 through A6 and B3 through B6 is set to 37576/65536 (greater than 1/2).

This configuration prevents a decline in player interest due to prolonged AT (Automatic Trigger) preparation gameplay. Especially when the arcade's closing time is approaching, players want to start playing in AT mode as quickly as possible, so this configuration provides a gaming machine that minimizes player stress.

Furthermore, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are not met, the game state for the next game will be the AT preparation game state.

<<Games that can meet the conditions for transitioning to AT game state>>
A game that can meet the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is a game in which, during the AT preparation game state, the number of bets is set to a specific value (for example, 3), the start switch is operated, and a specific role (specific lottery result) is won (determined).

When a specific winning combination is achieved, information regarding a special stopping operation can be displayed on the display device 32 from the time the start switch is operated until all reels reach a certain speed.

Furthermore, once all reels have reached a certain speed, operating the stop switch allows the display device 32 to display information other than that related to the specific stopping operation.

This point will be explained using Figure 111.

Figure 111 shows an example of notification from the display device 32 in a game that can satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state.

Figure 111(a) shows the display device 32 becoming able to display information after the start switch has been operated. Figure 111(a) also shows the situation when neither stop switch has been operated. Note that Figure 111(a) is an example where information regarding a special stopping operation is being displayed on the display device 32. In this case, the instruction monitor is displayed as "=7".

The central area of the display device 32 shows an image of "×・?・?". This indicates that the game is capable of fulfilling the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state.

Here, "×" indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are not met. Specifically, it indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is performed as the first stop.

Furthermore, the "?" indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state may be met. Specifically, it suggests that the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state may be met when the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is used as the first stop.

The image "Start!?" is displayed in an area of the display device 32 that does not overlap with the central area (the upper central area in Figure 111). In other words, the text indicates that this game is capable of fulfilling the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state. Note that other text indications, such as "AT!?", may also be used.

Figure 111(i) shows that after the notification in Figure 111(a), the stop switch is operated in a manner that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, and then the notification becomes available on the display device 32. At this time, the instruction monitor is assumed to be displaying "=7".

The image "Start!" is displayed in the central area. This indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state have been met (or will be met) during this game. In other words, it informs the player that the next game will be in the AT game state.

For example, using Example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state described above, the timing of the operation that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is the timing of the first stop operation. In other words, if the operation performed at the time of the first stop operation satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, the display changes from Figure 111 (a) to Figure 111 (b).

In this case, as described above, the determination process of whether the main control means has met the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state may be configured to be executed after all reels have stopped. In other words, although the determination process of whether the main control means has met the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is executed after all reels have stopped, the player is notified that the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state have been met when the first stop operation is performed.

This configuration allows the player to be notified as soon as possible that the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state have been met, giving them a sense of accomplishment upon successful completion of the first stop operation. Furthermore, by determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state have been met after all reels have stopped, the delay before the second stop operation becomes possible is reduced compared to determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state have been met after the first stop operation.

Furthermore, even when using Example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state described above, even if the first stop operation satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state when it is performed, the display may be configured to change from Figure 111(a) to Figure 111(b) when the second stop operation is performed or when the third stop operation is performed (after all reels have stopped). Note that Figure 111(a) is displayed until the display changes to Figure 111(b).

Furthermore, for example, in Example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state described above, the timing of the operation that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is not only after the first stop operation, but also after the second stop operation or the third stop operation. In such cases, it is preferable to configure the display to change from Figure 111(a) to Figure 111(b) when the operation satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state after the third stop operation has been performed.

Figure 111(c) can be displayed when, after the notification shown in Figure 111(a), the stop operation is performed in a manner that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state. At this time, the instruction monitor is assumed to be displaying "=7".

The image "×・？・？" is not displayed in the central area of the display device 32. Furthermore, it does not indicate, even through text, that the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state are met during this game. In other words, it indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state were not met during this game.

The image "Start!?" is displayed in the upper central area. However, the display method differs from that of Figure 111 (a). In this example, the emphasis level in Figure 111 (c) is lower than in Figure 111 (a).

For example, in Figure 111(a), a star-shaped mark image (effect image) is displayed around the "Start!?" image, whereas in Figure 111(c), the star-shaped mark image (effect image) is not displayed around the "Start!?" image. Therefore, Figure 111(a) is configured to be more emphatic than Figure 111(c).

Here, examples of varying the degree of emphasis are not limited to the above examples; any difference in the size of the "Start!?" image or the color of the "Start!?" image is acceptable as long as the display device 32 allows the player to perceive that the degree of emphasis in Figure 111 (c) is lower than in Figure 111 (a).

For example, using Example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state described above, the timing of an operation that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is the timing of the first stop operation. In other words, if the first stop operation is one that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, the display changes from Figure 111 (a) to Figure 111 (c). Note that the display remains as shown in Figure 111 (a) until it changes to Figure 111 (c).

In this case, as described above, the determination process of whether the main control means has met the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state may be configured to be executed after all reels have stopped. In other words, although the determination process of whether the main control means has met the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is executed after all reels have stopped, the player is notified that the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state have been met when the first stop operation is performed.

This configuration allows the player to be notified as quickly as possible if the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) state have not been met. Furthermore, by determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT state have been met after all reels have stopped, the delay before the second stop operation becomes possible is reduced compared to determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT state have been met after the first stop operation.

Furthermore, even when using Example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state described above, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met when the first stop operation is performed, the display may be configured to change from Figure 111(a) to Figure 111(c) after the second stop operation or the third stop operation is performed (after all reels have stopped). Note that Figure 111(a) is displayed until the display changes to Figure 111(c).

Furthermore, for example, in Example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state described above, the timing of the operation that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is not only after the timing of the first stop operation, but also after the timing of the second stop operation or the third stop operation. In such cases, it is preferable to configure the display to change from Figure 111(a) to Figure 111(c) when the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met after the third stop operation has been performed. Note that the display is configured to show Figure 111(a) until it changes to Figure 111(c).

Furthermore, even in games where the AT preparation state is reached but the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met, the notification shown in Figure 111 (c) may still be displayed. However, in this case, the instruction monitor will not display "=7".

<<Test signals regarding the operation of the stop switch in each game state>>
The main control means is capable of performing processing to output a test signal to a predetermined test device (for example, not only the test device itself, but also an interface board that relays between the gaming machine and the test device) in order to check that the gambling instinct of the player is not excessively stimulated.

In particular, the system is capable of outputting two types of test signals related to the payout rate. Specifically, these are the IF2 test signal, primarily used to check whether the payout rate exceeds a predetermined upper limit, and the IF3 test signal, primarily used to check whether the payout rate falls below a predetermined lower limit. The "IF" in IF2 and IF3 test signals stands for interface.

Furthermore, to allow the testing institution to arbitrarily select the testing method, the system is capable of executing processes to output both the IF2 and IF3 test signals for each game. Specifically, the system can execute the processes to output the IF2 and IF3 test signals before the start switch is operated and all reels reach a constant speed (constant speed state).

Furthermore, since gaming machines installed in amusement parlors are not connected to a designated testing device, the IF2 and IF3 test signals are not output externally (i.e., they are different from external signals). However, gaming machines installed in amusement parlors also have programs (processes) that output the IF2 test signal and programs (processes) that output the IF3 test signal. Moreover, gaming machines installed in amusement parlors also execute programs (processes) that output the IF2 and IF3 test signals. Therefore, although the test signals are not output externally in gaming machines installed in amusement parlors, the processing for outputting the test signals is configured to be executable. Thus, "executing the processing for outputting the test signals" is referred to as "making the processing for outputting the test signals executable," etc.

<<<IF2 test signal>>>
First, let me explain the IF2 test signal.

The IF2 test signal contains information about the sequence of stop switch operations and the timing of the stop switch operations.

The IF2 test signal information varies depending on the information displayed on the indicator monitor.

a) Non-instructed gameplay In non-instructed gameplay (gameplay where the instruction monitor is not displayed), processing can be performed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is left → middle → right, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is A for the left reel, B for the middle reel, and C for the right reel.

In this configuration, the stop switch operation sequence is left → middle → right. This is included in the non-penalty press sequence mentioned above.

Note that the order in which the stop switches are pressed to stop is not necessarily left → middle → right, but can also be left → right → middle, which is included in the non-penalty press order.

Furthermore, A, B, and C above may be either pattern numbers or the number of steps in a stepping motor.

For example, when using the symbol number as the stopping timing for the IF2 test signal's stop switch, if the symbol "20" is displayed on one reel, then A, B, and C will be one of the values from "0" to "19". Note that A, B, and C may all be the same value, any two of them may be the same value, or they may all be different values.

For example, when the stop timing of the IF2 test signal's stop switch is determined by the number of steps of a stepping motor, and "336" steps are assigned to one reel, then A, B, and C will be one of the values from "0" to "335". Note that A, B, and C may all be the same value, any two of them may be the same value, or they may all be different values.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 or B1 to B6 are achieved, and where information corresponding to the correct stopping operation pattern or information corresponding to a special stopping operation pattern is not displayed on the instruction monitor and display device (non-instruction games), the system can execute a process to output an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as left → middle → right, and information indicating the stopping timing of the stop switches as follows: the stopping timing of the left reel's stop switch is A, the stopping timing of the middle reel's stop switch is B, and the stopping timing of the right reel's stop switch is C.

a) Games that instruct left → middle → right In games that instruct left → middle → right, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is left → middle → right, and information indicating that the timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the stop switch on the left reel, the stop switch on the middle reel, and the stop switch on the right reel.

The statement that the stop timing for the IF2 test signal's stop switch is arbitrary means that the stop operation can be performed at any time.

For example, when using the symbol number as the stopping timing for the stop switch of the IF2 test signal, if the symbol "20" is placed on one reel, the timing will be a value other than "0" through "19". For example, it could be a value such as "255".

For example, when the step count of a stepping motor is used as the stop timing for the IF2 test signal, if "336" steps are assigned to one reel, the value will be one of the values other than "0" to "335". For example, it could be a value such as "1024".

Furthermore, in games that instruct players to stop the stop switch in a sequence other than left → middle → right, the timing of the stop switch operation in the IF2 test signal is considered to have the same meaning and value as "arbitrary."

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either the A1 or B1 prize combination is won, and where information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device, the system is capable of outputting an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as left → middle → right, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

(c) Games that instruct left → right → middle In games that instruct left → right → middle, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is left → right → middle, and information indicating that the timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the stop switch on the left reel, the stop switch on the middle reel, and the stop switch on the right reel.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In a game where either of the two winning roles (A2) or the two winning roles (B2) is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing is enabled to output an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as left → right → middle, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

E) Games that instruct the player to spin the reels in the order of middle → left → right. In games that instruct the player to spin the reels in the order of middle → left → right, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is middle → left → right, and information indicating that the timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In a game where either of the three winning roles A or B is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as middle → left → right, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

O) Games that instruct the player to move from middle to right to left. In games that instruct the player to move from middle to right to left, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is middle to right to left, and information indicating that the timing of the stop switches is arbitrary: the timing of the stop switch for the left reel is arbitrary, the timing of the stop switch for the middle reel is arbitrary, and the timing of the stop switch for the right reel is arbitrary.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In a game where either of the four winning combinations (A4) or the four winning combinations (B4) is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as middle → right → left, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

(c) Games that instruct the player to move right → left → middle. In games that instruct the player to move right → left → middle, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is right → left → middle, and information indicating that the timing of the stop switches is arbitrary: the timing of the stop switch for the left reel is arbitrary, the timing of the stop switch for the middle reel is arbitrary, and the timing of the stop switch for the right reel is arbitrary.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In a game where either of the five winning combinations (A5) or the five winning combinations (B5) is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as right → left → middle, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

K) Games that instruct right → middle → left In games that instruct right → middle → left, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is right → middle → left, and information indicating that the timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the stop switch on the left reel, the stop switch on the middle reel, and the stop switch on the right reel.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In a game where either of the six winning combinations (A6) or the six winning combinations (B6) is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as right → middle → left, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

(k) A game that notifies a special stopping operation (a game that notifies "×・?・?" on the display device)
In a game that notifies a special stopping operation pattern, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the stopping order of the stop switches is middle → left → right, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel's stop switch, the middle reel's stop switch, and the right reel's stop switch.

Here, we've indicated that the stop switch operation order is middle → left → right. However, any stop operation order is acceptable as long as the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is not the first stop operation.

Specifically, the information doesn't necessarily have to indicate the order as middle → left → right; it could also indicate the order as middle → right → left, or right → left → middle, or right → middle → left.

This is because, in a game where a special stop operation pattern is announced during the AT preparation game state, the probability of fulfilling the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is the same whether the stop switches are operated in the order of middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left.

In other words, in games where a special stop operation pattern is notified during the AT preparation game state, processing is enabled to output information, including the stop operation sequence of the stop switches that may satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, as an IF2 test signal.

In other words, the IF2 test signal allows for testing the payout rate when the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state is initiated (or when the AT game state is likely to initiate), and enables verification of whether the payout rate exceeds a predetermined upper limit.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where any of the winning combinations A3 to A6, or B3 to B6, is achieved, and where information corresponding to a special stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device 32, processing is enabled to output an IF2 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as middle → left → right, and information indicating that the stopping timing of the stop switches is arbitrary for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

<<<IF3 Test Signal>>>
Next, I will explain the IF3 test signal.

The IF3 test signal includes the sequence of stop switch operations. However, it does not include information on the timing of the stop switch operations.

The IF3 test signal information varies depending on the information displayed on the instruction monitor.

a) Non-instructed gameplay In non-instructed gameplay (gameplay where the instruction monitor is not displayed), processing can be performed to output an IF3 test signal containing information indicating that the stop switch operation order is left → middle → right.

Note that the order in which the stop switches are pressed to stop is not necessarily left → middle → right, but can also be left → right → middle, which is included in the non-penalty press order.

Specifically, the information regarding the stop switch operation sequence included in the IF2 test signal during non-instructed gameplay should be the same as the information regarding the stop switch operation sequence included in the IF3 test signal during non-instructed gameplay.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 or B1 to B6 are achieved, and where information corresponding to the correct stopping operation pattern or information corresponding to a special stopping operation pattern is not displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32 (non-instruction games), processing is enabled to output an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switch as left → middle → right.

a) Games that instruct left → middle → right In games that instruct left → middle → right, processing can be performed to output an IF3 test signal that contains information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is left → middle → right.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either the A1 prize or the B1 prize is won, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switch as left → middle → right.

(c) Games that instruct left → right → middle: In games that instruct left → right → middle, processing can be performed to output an IF3 test signal that contains information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is left → right → middle.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either the A2 prize or the B2 prize is won, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switch as left → right → middle.

E) Games that instruct the player to move from center to left to right. In games that instruct the player to move from center to left to right, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF3 test signal that contains information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is center to left to right.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either of the three winning roles (A3) or the three winning roles (B3) is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switches as middle → left → right.

O) Games that instruct players to move from center to right to left: In games that instruct players to move from center to right to left, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF3 test signal that contains information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is center to right to left.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either the A4 prize or the B4 prize is won, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device 32, processing is enabled to output an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switch as middle → right → left.

(c) Games that instruct the player to move right → left → middle. In games that instruct the player to move right → left → middle, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF3 test signal that contains information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is right → left → middle.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either the A5 prize or the B5 prize is won, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and display device 32, processing is enabled to output an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switch as right → left → middle.

K) Games that instruct the player to move right → middle → left. In games that instruct the player to move right → middle → left, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF3 test signal that contains information indicating that the order in which the stop switches are operated is right → middle → left.

A specific example will be explained, corresponding to the winning roles shown in Figure 110.

In games where either of the six winning combinations (A6) or the six winning combinations (B6) is achieved, and information corresponding to the correct stopping operation is reported to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, the system is capable of outputting an IF3 test signal containing information indicating the stopping order of the stop switch as right → middle → left.

(k) A game that notifies a special stopping operation (a game that notifies "×・?・?" on the display device)
In games that notify a special stopping operation pattern, it is possible to perform processing to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the stopping order of the stop switches is left → middle → right.

Note that the order in which the stop switches are pressed to stop is not necessarily left → middle → right, but can also be left → right → middle, which is included in the non-penalty press order.

Specifically, the information regarding the stop switch operation sequence included in the IF2 test signal for non-instructed games, the information regarding the stop switch operation sequence included in the IF3 test signal for non-instructed games, and the information regarding the stop switch operation sequence included in the IF3 test signal for games that signal a special stop operation pattern must be the same.

In other words, in a game where a special stopping operation pattern is announced during the AT preparation game state (a game that can satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state), performing a process to output a test signal for stopping the stop switches in the order of left → middle → right (or left → right → middle) will prevent the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state from being met.

In other words, the IF3 test signal allows for testing the payout rate when the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state does not start (or is difficult to start), and enables verification of whether the payout rate falls below a predetermined lower limit.

<<<Summary of IF2 and IF3 test signals>>>
Although this overlaps somewhat with the above, we will now explain again the characteristics of the IF2 test signal and the IF3 test signal in a game where a special stopping operation is notified during the AT preparation game state.

In games where a special stop operation pattern ("×・?・?" on the display device) is indicated during the AT preparation game state, processing can be performed to output a test signal as an IF2 test signal. This test signal includes information on a predetermined stop operation sequence, where the first stop operation is either the middle or right stop switch corresponding to "?", and stop operation position information (information indicating that the stop acceptance position for all reels is arbitrary).

By configuring the system in this way, when the payout rate is tested according to the IF2 test signal, there are cases where the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met in a game where a special stop operation pattern is notified during the AT preparation game state. In other words, the IF2 test signal can be used to test a payout rate that is almost identical to the payout rate when a player operates the stop switch in the manner that would occur if the game machine were installed in the market. To put it another way, it is possible to check whether the payout rate has reached a predetermined upper limit.

On the other hand, in games where a special stop operation pattern is announced during the AT preparation game state, processing is enabled to output a test signal as an IF3 test signal. This signal includes information about a predetermined stop operation sequence, with the left stop being the first stop operation, corresponding to the stop switch marked "×" (information about the stop operation position is not included). Note that the information in the IF3 test signal for games where a special stop operation pattern is announced during the AT preparation game state and the information in the IF3 test signal for non-instructed games are the same.

By configuring the system in this way, when the payout rate is tested according to the IF3 test signal, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met in games where a special stop operation pattern is notified during the AT preparation game state. In other words, the payout rate in cases where the AT game state does not start (or is difficult to start) when the game machine is installed in the market can be tested using the IF3 test signal. To put it another way, it is possible to check whether the payout rate falls below a predetermined lower limit.

Furthermore, by using the same information for the IF3 test signal of a game where a special stop operation pattern is reported during the AT preparation game state, and for a non-instructed game, the data capacity can be compressed.

<<Irregular Processing 1 during AT Preparation Game State>>
This section explains Irregular Processing 1, which can be implemented during the AT preparation game state.

Suppose that during the AT preparation game state, a special stop operation pattern (displaying "×・?・?" on the display device) is shown, and the player mistakenly stops the stop switch corresponding to "×" (the stop switch corresponding to the left reel). In this case, the next game state will not be the AT game state. However, as mentioned above, the AT preparation game state is configured to continue. In other words, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met during a game that displays a special stop operation pattern while in the AT preparation game state, the AT preparation state continues, and the game is configured so that another game displaying a special stop operation pattern may occur in the continued AT preparation game state.

Here, the game transitions to the AT preparation state. The first game played in the AT preparation state is designated as the first game, the game that first announces a special stopping operation in the AT preparation state is designated as the second game, and any subsequent games in the AT preparation state that announce a special stopping operation are designated as the third game. Note that the first and second games may be the same game, but here we will assume that the first game is not the game that announces a special stopping operation. For example, the first game would be a game in which the B1 winning combination is achieved, or a game in which the replay combination is achieved. The second and third games are games in which any of the winning combinations from B3 to B6 in Figure 110 is achieved, or any of the winning combinations from B3 to B6.

Furthermore, the period from the first game to the second game is referred to as the first period of games, and the period from the second game to the third game is referred to as the second period of games.

In this case, it is preferable that the relationship between the designed payout rate in the first period of gameplay (hereinafter referred to as payout rate X) and the designed payout rate in the second period of gameplay (hereinafter referred to as payout rate Y) be set as payout rate X ≤ payout rate Y.

By configuring the system in this way, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met in a game where a special stopping operation pattern is first announced during the AT preparation game state, the player will not suffer any further disadvantages in the subsequent AT preparation game state.

For example, if the frequency at which the correct stopping operation is notified when a winning B1 or B2 role is achieved during gameplay in the first period (hereinafter referred to as probability α), and the frequency at which the correct stopping operation is notified when a winning B1 or B2 role is achieved during gameplay in the second period (hereinafter referred to as probability β), then probability α = probability β (0% ≤ probability α = probability β ≤ 100%), then the system can be configured such that payout rate X = payout rate Y < 100%.

Furthermore, for example, if probability α < probability β (0% ≤ probability α < probability β ≤ 100%), then the payout rate X < payout rate Y < 100% can be constructed.

In other words, by setting 0 ≤ probability α ≤ probability β ≤ 100%, we can set the payout rate X ≤ payout rate Y < 100%.

Furthermore, if a special stopping operation is announced in the third game and the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met, the designed payout rate for the game during the period while the AT preparation game state continues may be the same as payout rate Y, or it may be a different payout rate (higher than payout rate Y, or lower than payout rate Y).

<<Irregular Processing 2 during AT Preparation Game State>>
This section will explain the second irregular processing method that can be used during the AT preparation game state.

As explained in Irregular Processing 1, even if a game that signals a special stop operation pattern ("×・?・?" on the display device) fails to meet the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state during the AT preparation game state, the AT preparation state continues, and the system is configured such that another game that signals a special stop operation pattern may occur again during the continued AT preparation game state.

However, for example, if a player does not understand the game mechanics and continues to operate the stop switch corresponding to "×" (the stop switch corresponding to the left reel), or if the player operates the stop switch corresponding to "?" but the AT preparation state does not start, the AT preparation state may persist.

Therefore, the game is configured to not only satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT (Automatic Trigger) game state in games that notify a special stopping operation, but also to initiate the AT game state when certain conditions are met. In other words, even in games that do not notify a special stopping operation, the next game can be set to the AT game state when certain conditions are met.

This configuration prevents the AT preparation state from continuing unintentionally, thereby reducing player frustration.

For example, specific conditions include: a) the number of games played in the AT preparation state reaching a specified number (e.g., 1000 games); b) the number of games played since the first notification of a special stop operation reaching a specified number (e.g., 1000 games); c) the number of times a special stop operation has been notified reaching a specified number (e.g., 100 times); and d) a specific role (a so-called rare role) being won through the role lottery.

However, the specific conditions are not limited to those described in a) through d) above. For example, you may adopt at least one of a) through d), or you may choose a condition different from a) through d) as the specific condition.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (rotating-type gaming machine) is used as an example of a gaming machine configuration, but it can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko machines, jackpot machines, parrot machines, or casino machines.

The technical details of this embodiment described above can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub-control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Coin slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub directional key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Middle operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Bet count indicator lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Credit count indicator 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Number of tokens acquired display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Seal storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply unit 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout port 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

The game has two states: a notification game preparation state and a notification game state.
In a predetermined game where a specific lottery result has been determined during the notification game preparation game state, the first stop operation mode can be notified by a predetermined display device.
In a notification game state, a specific game in which a specific lottery result has been determined can be notified by a predetermined display device to indicate the second stop operation mode.
The notification content for the first stop operation mode and the notification content for the second stop operation mode, as displayed by the predetermined display device, are different.
The notification content for the first stop operation mode by the designated display device is a notification content recommending that the stop switch corresponding to the first reel not be used as the first stop operation.
In a specific game where a specific lottery result has been determined in a notification game state, a predetermined display device notifies the player of a second stop operation pattern, and when the player performs the stop operation according to the second stop operation pattern, a combination of symbols to which "X (where X is a numerical value, the same applies hereinafter)" is assigned as the number of game media can be displayed as a stop.
In a predetermined game where a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation state, a predetermined display device notifies the first stop operation mode , and when the stop switch corresponding to the first reel is performed the first stop operation, the game following the predetermined game can be played in the notification game preparation state.
In a designated game where a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation state, a designated display device notifies the first stop operation mode , the stop switch corresponding to the second reel is performed as the first stop operation, and even if a symbol combination to which "X" is assigned as the number of game media is not displayed, the next game after the designated game can be played in the notification game state.
In a designated game where a specific lottery result has been determined during the notification game preparation state, it is possible to execute processes for outputting a first test signal and processes for outputting a second test signal .
In a predetermined game where a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation game state, and a predetermined display device notifies the first stop operation pattern, the first test signal includes information regarding the operation sequence of stop switches, with the stop switch corresponding to the second reel being the first stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a predetermined display device notifies the first stop operation pattern in a predetermined game in a pre-notification game preparation game state where a specific lottery result has been determined, the second test signal includes information regarding the operation sequence of stop switches, with the stop switch corresponding to the first reel being the first stop operation.